PC-6 AMM 01975 Rev. 33

�PLATUSEF
PC-6
B2-H2/B2-H4
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
Document No. 01975
Initial Issue: June 14 1991
©PILATUS AIRCRAFT LIMITED 1991

All rights reserved
Pilatus Aircraft Ltd. CH-6370 Stans. Switzerland

PC-6 PUBLICATION TRANSMITTAL LETTER
Pilatus Aircraft Ltd

CH-6371 Stans
Switzerland
Tel +41 41 619 61 11
Fax + 41 41 619 65 93
Email: publications@pilatus-aircraft.com
TO HOLDERS OF:
PC-6 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DOCUMENT NUMBER 01975
REVISION 33
DATED JUL 31/22
HIGHLIGHTS
Pages which have been added or revised are given below together with the highlights of the revision. Remove
and insert the affected pages as listed.
Remove Insert Reason for Change
Chapter 20 - Standard Practices

20-LEP 1 and 2 1 and 2 Updated.
20-31-00 1 thru 46 1 thru 50 Updated.
20-40-00 201 thru 204 201 thru 208 Fully revised with new CPC, cleaning tools and materials,
new examination and repair procedures; editorial changes.
20-40-10 201 and 202 201 thru 206 Fully revised with new procedure and materials.
Chapter 28 - Fuel
28-20-03 401 thru 404 401 thru 404 Consumable materials updated and added; warning
updated, lubrication of engine internal splines added, pipe
and union work steps updated; editorial changes.
28-23-12 401 thru 404 401 thru 406 Fully revised; general para added; job set up information
updated; warnings and caution added; cross references
added, part configuration updated, PTFE tape removed,
O-ring seal lubrication added, cleaning added; illustration
updated; editorial changes.
Chapter 32 - Landing Gear
32-51-12 401 thru 406 401 thru 406 General para updated; job set up information updated and
added, solder P number added; procedure updated with
cable stowage, route checks updated, solder instructions
updated; figure updated; editorial changes.
Chapter 33 - Lights
FILE THIS TRANSMITTAL IN FRONT OF THE MANUAL

CHECK THAT ALL PREVIOUS TRANSMITTALS HAVE BEEN INCORPORATED
If any Transmittals have not been received, please advise Technical Publications Department, Pilatus Aircraft Ltd Page 1 of 2
PUBLICATION TRANSMITTAL LETTER PC-6
33-47-12 801 thru 804 801 thru 804 Job set up information updated; reference to Alodine 1132
REPAIR 01 removed, warning updated, job set up added, sequence of
steps updated, consumable material steps updated;
editorial changes.
Chapter 55 - Stabilizers
55-TOC 1 and 2 1 and 2 Updated.
55-31-11 - 401 thru 406 New procedure.
Record of Revisions Sheet Record incorporation of this revision and date of incorporation.
Record of Temporary No change.

Revisions Sheet
FILE THIS TRANSMITTAL IN FRONT OF THE MANUAL

CHECK THAT ALL PREVIOUS TRANSMITTALS HAVE BEEN INCORPORATED
Page 2 of 2 If any Transmittals have not been received, please advise Technical Publications Department, Pilatus Aircraft Ltd
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Rev Date of Date Rev Date of Date

Signature: Signature:
No. Issue: Inserted: No. Issue: Inserted:
1 Incorporated at Issue 26 Incorporated at Issue
8 Incorporated at Issue 33
ROR Page 1
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
ROR Page 2
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS
Temp Date of Date Date Removed /

Rev No. Issue: Inserted: Incorporated in:
05-01 Oct 25/95 Included Pilatus TR 05-03 Pilatus
05-02 Oct 30/95 Included Pilatus Rev 4 Pilatus
05-03 Feb 03/97 Included Pilatus TR 05-04 Pilatus
05-04 Feb 24/97 Included Pilatus Rev 4 Pilatus
27-02 Oct 23/98 Included Pilatus Rev 5 Pilatus
32-01 Nov 30/99 Included Pilatus Rev 5 Pilatus
05-06 Aug 28/01 Included Pilatus Rev 5 Pilatus
28-01 Sep 04/01 Included Pilatus Rev 5 Pilatus
27-03 Jan 15/02 Included Pilatus Rev 5 Pilatus
27-04 Mar 28/02 Included Pilatus Rev 5 Pilatus
71-01 Jun 07/02 Included Pilatus TR 71-02 Pilatus
71-02 Jun 20/02 Included Pilatus Rev 5 Pilatus
05-07 Jul 05/02 Included Pilatus Rev 5 Pilatus
24-01 Jun 11/04 Included Pilatus Rev 6 Pilatus
27-06 Dec 07/05 Included Pilatus Rev 7 Pilatus
ROTR Page 1
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

25-02 Jan 28/09 Mar 11/09 Pilatus Rev 10 Pilatus
25-03 Jan 28/09 Mar 11/09 Pilatus Rev 10 Pilatus
05-13 Mar 23/10 Mar 29/10 Pilatus Rev 12 Pilatus
55-01 Sep 20/11 Sep 25/11 Pilatus Rev 15 Pilatus
71-03 Feb 27/17 Feb 27/17 Pilatus Rev 25 Pilatus
05-14 Jan 19/18 Jan 19/18 Pilatus Rev 26 Pilatus
53-01 Jun 05/18 Jun 05/18 Pilatus Rev 27 Pilatus
05-15 Aug 17/21 Aug 17/21 Pilatus Rev 32 Pilatus
ROTR Page 2
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ROTR Page 3
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ROTR Page 4
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CONTENTS
Subject Chapter
INTRODUCTION -
SERVICE BULLETIN LIST -
AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS 04
TIME LIMITS / MAINTENANCE CHECKS 05
DIMENSIONS AND AREAS 06
LIFTING AND SHORING 07
LEVELLING AND WEIGHING 08
TOWING AND TAXIING 09
PARKING AND MOORING 10
PLACARDS AND MARKINGS 11
SERVICING 12
STANDARD PRACTICES 20
AIR CONDITIONING 21
ELECTRICAL POWER 24
EQUIPMENT / FURNISHINGS 25
FLIGHT CONTROLS 27
FUEL 28
ICE PROTECTION 30
INDICATING / RECORDING 31
LANDING GEAR 32
LIGHTS 33
NAVIGATION 34
OXYGEN 35
VACUUM 37
DOORS 52
FUSELAGE 53
STABILIZERS 55
WINDOWS 56
WINGS 57
PROPELLER 61
POWERPLANT 71
ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL 73
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
CONT May 14/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Subject Chapter
IGNITION 74
ENGINE CONTROLS 76
ENGINE INDICATING 77
EXHAUST 78
OIL 79
STARTING 80
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
CONT May 14/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
1. General
The technical content of this document is approved under the authority of the DOA ref. EASA.21J.357.
This manual has been prepared using the Air Transport Association of America Specification 100 (ATA
100).
The maintenance manual gives instructions for maintenance personnel to service and maintain the
aircraft. It provides sufficient information to inspect, fault isolate and to complete the
removal / installation and adjustment / test of equipment as well as the repair of certain systems. To
provide as complete a coverage as possible, optional equipment has been included in the manual.
Information which is beyond the scope of this manual may be found in the following manuals:
• Illustrated Parts Catalog (IPC)

• Wiring Diagram Manual (WDM)
• Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
• Component Maintenance Manuals (CMMs).
It is the responsibility of the owner or operator to ensure that the latest revision of the manual is used for
servicing and maintenance of the aircraft.
If it is necessary to contact Pilatus Aircraft Ltd. about your aircraft, it is important to include the aircraft
serial number in any correspondence. The serial number can be found on the manufacturers data
placard, the location of the placard is given in Chapter 11 of the IPC.
Use only parts that have been approved and certified by Pilatus and obtained from Pilatus approved
sources for maintenance on the aircraft. Salvaged or reworked parts obtained from non Pilatus
approved sources are unsuitable and unsafe for use on the aircraft.
In the event that the aircraft should be maintained and/or operated with parts and/or components which
are not approved by the Seller and/or its supplier and vendor, all warranties will be rendered null and
void upon installation of such parts and/or components. Pilatus expressly disclaims any and all liability
including but not limited to liability for any loss or damage of property, injury or death, in association with
any and all malfunctions and/or failures and/or incidents and/or accidents involving such non approved
parts and/or components.
CMMs giving overhaul information for components should be obtained direct from the manufacturer or
his distributor. The address of component manufacturers can be found in the introduction of the IPC.
A. Copyright and Legal Statements
 Pilatus Aircraft Ltd. This document contains proprietary information that is protected by
copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this document may be copied, reproduced or
translated to other languages without the prior written consent of Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.
In connection with the use of this document, Pilatus does not provide any express or implied
warranties and expressly disclaims any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular
purpose. This document contains trade secrets, confidential and/or proprietary information of
Pilatus and technical data subject to export control laws and regulations, including the U.S.
Export Administration Regulations (EAR). Disclosure or distribution of this document contrary to
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
INTRO Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
the EAR, and other laws and regulations, is strictly forbidden. The above restrictions may apply
to data on all pages of this document.
2. Revisions
When necessary, new or replacement pages will be issued to keep the manual up to date.
Normally all pages of each revised topic (page block) are issued in a revision. This is to make the
incorporation of the revision into the manual simpler, i.e. remove a complete topic, insert a complete
topic.
Regular revisions are supplied with a Transmittal Letter which details the pages which are removed and
those replaced by the revision. A brief summary of the changes contained in the revised pages and
temporary revisions removed by the revision are also given.
The incorporation of the revision is recorded on the Record of Revisions sheet and removal of
temporary revisions is recorded on the Record of Temporary Revisions sheet, both of which are in the
front of the manual.
Revisions are shown in the new pages by a revision bar in the left margin against the part of the text or
illustration which is changed. If changes make unchanged text move to the next page the revision bar is
put next to the page number.
Temporary Revisions are issued when the manual must be revised between normal regular revisions.
They are issued on yellow paper and must be filed in the position given on the front sheet. The
incorporation of temporary revisions is recorded on the Temporary Revisions Record Sheet. Temporary
revisions must only be removed from the manual when instructed on a transmittal letter or when
superseded by a temporary revision.
3. Page Dates
The date on a page indicates the date of issue. If changes are done to a page or the text is moved due
to changes on other pages, the page date is changed to the date of the revision at which it is issued.
4. List of Effective Pages
The List of Effective Pages, which is at the front of each chapter, lists all pages which appear in the
chapter, together with their current date of issue. Each revision has a new List of Effective Pages for the
chapters with new or revised pages.
5. Warnings, Cautions and Notes
These are used to stress important items in the text. Warnings and Cautions come immediately before
the text to which they refer. Notes are put after the text to which they refer. The uses are given below:
WARNING: GIVES DETAILS OF MATERIALS, PROCESSES, PROCEDURES OR LIMITS

WHICH MUST BE FOLLOWED TO AVOID INJURY TO PERSONNEL.
CAUTION: GIVES DETAILS OF METHODS OR PROCEDURES WHICH MUST BE

FOLLOWED TO AVOID DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
NOTE: Used to give details of hints or tips which make the task easier for maintenance
personnel.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
INTRO Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Manual Breakdown
A. Chapter / Sub-Chapter Guide
The following chapter / system guide is prepared in accordance with both GAMA Specification
No. 2 and ATA Specification No. 100 for use with this manual.
04 AIRWORTHINESS LMITATIONS 33 LIGHTS
05 TIME LIMITS / MAINTENANCE CHECKS 34 NAVIGATION
06 DIMENSIONS AND AREAS 35 OXYGEN
07 LIFTING AND SHORING 51 STRUCTURES
08 LEVELLING AND WEIGHING 52 CANOPY
09 TOWING AND TAXIING 53 FUSELAGE
10 PARKING AND MOORING 54 ENGINE COMPARTMENT
11 PLACARDS AND MARKINGS 55 STABILIZERS
12 SERVICING 57 WINGS
20 STANDARD PRACTICES 61 PROPELLER
21 AIR CONDITIONING 71 POWERPLANT
24 ELECTRICAL POWER 73 FUEL AND CONTROL
25 EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS 74 IGNITION
27 FLIGHT CONTROLS 76 ENGINE CONTROLS
28 FUEL 77 ENGINE INDICATING
30 ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION 78 EXHAUST
31 INDICATING / RECORDING SYSTEMS 79 OIL
32 LANDING GEAR 80 STARTING
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
INTRO Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Chapter - Section - Subject
The numbering system uses a chapter - section - subject number with the page number to
identify each part of the manual.
Example:
28-20-04
Chapter Section Subject

(28 - Fuel) (20 - Distribution) (04 - Fuel Booster Pump)
C. Page Numbers
The pages are numbered to indicate the type of information.
The page blocks used are:
Page Type of Information
1 to 99 Description and Operation
101 to 199 Fault Isolation
201 to 299 Maintenance Practices
301 to 399 Servicing
401 to 499 Removal/Installation
501 to 599 Adjustment/Test
601 to 699 Inspection/Check
701 to 799 Cleaning/Painting
801 to 899 Approved Repairs
7. Punctuation in Units of Weight and Measurement
In this manual the decimal fraction is shown by a point in the Imperial / US units of weight and
measurement, and by a comma in metric units.
8. Consumable Materials
Consumable materials used on the aircraft during maintenance procedures are listed in
Chapter 20-31-00, Consumable Materials List. The list gives details of the material and the supplier,
and also gives a material number which is used throughout the manual.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 4
INTRO Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9. Requests for Revisions
If operators have suggestions for improvements to the content of the manual or errors are found,
please submit the proposed changes on the Publication Revision Request Form shown on the following
page.
10. Occurrence Reporting Requirements
EASA Implementing Rule Part 21A.3 ‘Failures, Malfunctions and Defects’ requires Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.
to maintain a system for collection, investigation and analysis of aircraft malfunction data that fulfils the
EASA Reporting Criteria (AMC 20-8) for any occurrence which is reported to the agency. To fulfil this
requirement, Pilatus Aircraft Ltd. requests that Operators and Service Centers report all aircraft failures,
malfunctions and defects using either:
• The ‘MyPilatus’ internet portal

• A copy of the Aircraft Malfunction Report form, shown on Page 7.
The data supplied will be used to highlight problems and will allow Pilatus to develop modifications to
improve reliability and reduce operating costs.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 5
INTRO Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PUBLICATION REVISION REQUEST

Manual AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL Revision No.
Chapter/Section/Subject Pages
Topic Title
Reason for Change
Proposed Changes
Company Name Date
REMARKS BY TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS
Name Signature Date
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 6
INTRO Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIRCRAFT MALFUNCTION REPORT

Pilatus Aircraft Ltd
P.O. Box 992
6371 Stans, Switzerland
Aircraft
Type: Serial N°: Reg. N°: Operator:
Hrs: Ldg: Last Service: Service Center:
Malfunction occurrence
Date of Malfunction: Flight Aborted: No of occurrences:
Please indicate either During Operation or During A/C Servicing. One of these must be selected.
Pre Flight Start up Taxi (pre Flight) Take off
During Operation Climb Cruise Aerobatic Descent
Landing Taxi (post Flight) Shut down Post Flight
Time into flight: Min OAT: °C Fuel Flow: LBS/HRS
Altitude: FT Cabin Alt: FT Airspeed: KTS
Torque: PSI ITT: °C NG: %
Weather conditions:
During A/C Servicing Type of Service: HR Special Service:
Description of Malfunction
Corrective Action
Pilot Action taken to continue flight:
Was the Malfunction reproducible on ground:
Maintenance repair action taken:
Maintenance remarks:
Component Details
Action on reported malfunctioning Repaired (To be) replaced Tested, no fault found
component: Adjusted / Recalibrated
Finding:
Component Identification Defective Component Details Replacement Component Details
ATA Chapter: Pilatus P/N: Pilatus P/N:
Description: Vendor P/N: Vendor P/N:
Serial No: Serial No:
If component has been replaced Operating Hrs: Operating Hrs:
please provide at least the data of
the marked fields. Landings: Landings:
Engine Cycles: Engine Cycles:
Status: New Exchange
General
Malfunction Report/Claim No: Pilot Name:
Warranty Claim attached Signature:
Maintainer or Pil. FSE:
Order No. (If available): Signature:
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 7
INTRO Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 8
INTRO Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 04 - AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Chapter
Section
Subject Pages Date
List of Effective 1 Oct 30/20
Pages 2 Oct 30/20
Table of Contents 1 Feb 28/10

2 Feb 28/10
04-00-00 1 Oct 30/20

2 Oct 30/20
3 Oct 30/20
4 Oct 30/20
5 Oct 30/20
6 Oct 30/20
Page 1
04-LEP Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
04-LEP Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 04 - AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
Subject Subject Page Effectivity
AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS 04-00-00

General 1 All
Mandatory Structural Inspections 1 All
Life Limited Items 4 All
Page 1
04-TOC Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
04-TOC Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIRWORTHINESS LIMITATIONS
1. General
The Airworthiness Limitations section is EASA approved and variations must also be approved.
The Airworthiness Limitations section is also FAA approved for US registered aircraft in accordance
with FAR 21.29.
The Airworthiness Limitations section is FAA approved and specifies maintenance required under 14
CFR 43.16 and 91.403 unless an alternate program has been FAA approved.
On any PC-6, do not install the following parts:
Mechanical stabilizer trim system:

Connecting pieces 6232.0026.XX manufactured by Fairchild. The Fairchild part has a rivet in the center
that is not on the Pilatus part (refer also to SB 53-001, Rev. 1).
Electrical stabilizer trim system:

Fitting 116.40.06.033 without index after part number (refer also to SB 53-001, Rev. 1).
2. Mandatory Structural Inspections
Item Maintenance Requirement Interval
Chapter 27 - Flight Controls
Aileron, Rudder, Elevator and Flap Examine 7000 flying hours or 14 years
Bellcranks and Levers (Non Destructive Inspection, (whichever comes first)
see NOTE F below)
Aileron Trim Screw-Actuator Check for backlash. The 3500 flying hours or 7 years
(Mechanical System) maximum permitted (whichever comes first)
backlash is
0,3 mm (0.012 in.)
Chapter 53 - Fuselage
Stabilizer Trim Attachment Components, Examine 1100 flying hours or 12 months

FR12A (Ref. 53-30-00. Page Block (whichever comes first)
601) See NOTE C and NOTE G
below
FR12A Examine 1100 flying hours or 12 months

(Ref. 53-30-00. Page Block (whichever comes first)
below
Fuselage - Wing-Strut Attachment-Brackets Examine 3500 flying hours or 7 years

(Ref. 53-28-00. Page Block (whichever comes first)
601)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
04-00-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Fuselage Wing Fittings Examine 7000 flying hours or 14 years

(Ref. 53-00-01, Page Block (whichever comes first)
601)
NOTE: This procedure is

revised, see NOTE
I below
Trim Actuator Attachment Examine 1100 flying hours or 12 months

below
Chapter 57 - Wings
Left and Right Wing-Strut Fitting (All P/Ns) Examine Aircraft registered in the USA
(Ref. 57-00-02, Page Block (N-registration):
601 - Check 1 - Visual 3 months
Inspection)
All other aircraft:
3 months (See NOTE 1)
NOTE 1: For aircraft that

operate in a severe Corrosion
Severity Zone (Ref. AMM,
20-40-00, Page Block 1)

operate in a moderate Corrosion
20-40-00, Page Block 1)

operate in a mild Corrosion
20-40-00, Page Block 1)
See NOTE D and NOTE G

below
Left Wing-Strut Fitting (P/N 6102.0041.00, Examine 1100 flying hours

111.35.06.055, 111.35.06.184 or (Ref. 57-00-02, Page Block or 12 months (whichever comes
111.35.06.185) 601 - Check 2 - Eddy Current first)
Inspection (Ref. SRM 51-00- See NOTE D and NOTE G
09)) below
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
04-00-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Right Wing-Strut Fitting (P/N 6102.0041.00, Examine 1100 flying hours

111.35.06.056, 111.35.06.184 or (Ref. 57-00-02, Page Block or 12 months (whichever comes
111.35.06.186) 601 - Check 2 - Eddy Current first)
Inspection (Ref. SRM 51-00- See NOTE D and NOTE G
09)) below
Left Wing-Strut Fitting (P/N 111.35.06.193, Examine 12 months

111.35.06.195, 111.35.06.216 or (Ref. 57-00-02, Page Block See NOTE D and NOTE G
111.35.06.217) 601 - Check 2 - Eddy Current below
Inspection (Ref. SRM 51-00-
09))
Right Wing-Strut Fitting (P/N Examine 12 months

111.35.06.194, 111.35.06.195, (Ref. 57-00-02, Page Block See NOTE D and NOTE G
111.35.06.216 or 111.35.06.218) 601 - Check 2 - Eddy Current below
Inspection (Ref. SRM 51-00-
09))
Wing to Fuselage Fittings Examine 7000 flying hours or 14 years

601)
Aileron/Flap Support-Brackets Examine 7000 flying hours or 14 years

601 - Non Destructive
Inspection, see NOTE F
below)
NOTE A: Refer to the appropriate engine and propeller maintenance manuals for the applicable
airworthiness limitations.
NOTE B: If any of the above maintenance tasks were accomplished in accordance with an earlier revision
of this AMM, the relevant interval starts from that date, except for items with NOTES C or D.
NOTE C: For parts with 1000 flying hours or more since the completion of SB 53-003 part B, the
maintenance task must be accomplished within 100 flying hours or 100 landings, whichever
comes first.
NOTE D: If the maintenance requirement of this task was accomplished as part of SB 57-005 or
superordinate ADs, the interval starts from that date.
NOTE E: Any maintenance task listed above for which NOTES B, C or D do not apply must be
accomplished within 12 months from the effective date of Feb 28/10.
NOTE F: You can do a Fluorescent Dye Penetrant Inspection or an Eddy Current Inspection (Ref. SRM
51-00-09).
NOTE G: A 10% tolerance only to the calendar time interval is applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
04-00-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE I: In accordance with the design, the bush (P/N 6100.0020.01) must be installed with grease. If
the bush (P/N 6100.0020.01) has been bonded as instructed in the AMM Doc No. 01975
Revision 29 (Feb 28/20) (Ref. 53-00-01, Page Block 601), the inspection / check of Frame 3
must be done again:
• Within 100 flying hours of the issue date of AMM Doc No. 01975 Revision 30 (Oct 30/20)
• With AMM Doc No. 01975 Revision 30 (Oct 30/20) or later versions of 53-00-01, Page Block
601
• Remove and discard the bonded bush (P/N 6100.0020.01) as described for the bonded bush
(P/N 6201.0107.01).
3. Life Limited Items
Chapter 25 - Equipment and Furnishings
Halon Fire Extinguisher Replace (discard) 10 years

(if installed)
Flight Control Chains Replace (discard) 7000 flying hours or 14

(Mechanical Trim and Flaps) years (whichever comes
first)
Aileron Attachment Bolts Replace (discard) 7000 flying hours or 14

years (whichever comes
first)
Elevator Attachment Bolts Replace (discard) 7000 flying hours or 14

first)
Rudder Attachment Bolts Replace (discard) 7000 flying hours or 14

first)
Flap Attachment Bolts Replace (discard) 7000 flying hours or 14

first)
Horizontal-Stabilizer Attachment-Bolts Replace (discard) 7000 flying hours or 14

first)
Stabilizer Trim Actuator (Mechanical Trim) Overhaul 3500 flying hours
Stabilizer Trim Actuator (Electrical Trim) Overhaul 3500 flying hours
Flap Actuator (Electrical System) Overhaul 3500 flying hours or 7 years

All models except P/Ns 978.73.14.101 and (whichever comes first)
978.73.14.103 (listed below)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 4
04-00-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Flap Actuator (Electrical System) Overhaul 3000 landings

(Electro-Metal Type 55.1-1100,
P/N 978.73.14.101)
Flap Actuator (Electrical System) Overhaul 5000 landings or 7 years

(Electro-Metal Type 55.1-1100, Amdt. 2 (whichever comes first)
P/N 978.73.14.103)
Flap Actuator Jacks (Mechanical System) Overhaul 3500 flying hours
Main-Gear Shock-Strut Attachment-Bolts Replace (discard) 10000 landings or 7 years

P/N 6401.0066.01 (whichever comes first)
P/N 114.35.06.032
Tail-Gear Attachment-Bolts Replace (discard) 10000 landings or 7 years

P/N 932.12.31.422 (whichever comes first)
P/N 932.53.47.207
P/N 932.53.47.217
P/N 932.53.47.218
Chapter 35 - Oxygen
Oxygen Cylinder (if installed) Overhaul and send to an 5 years

authorized facility for hydrostatic
test
Connecting Piece (Mechanical Trim) Replace (discard) 3500 flying hours

P/N 6232.0026.01 See NOTE H below
Fitting (Electrical Trim) Replace (discard) 3500 flying hours

P/N 116.40.06.033 See NOTE H below
P/N 116.40.06.112
Chapter 55 - Stabilizer
Support Bearing LH/RH (Mechanical Trim) Replace (discard) 3500 flying hours
P/N 6304.0023.01/02 See NOTE H below
Fork, Bearing (Electrical Trim) Replace (discard) 3500 flying hours

P/N 116.40.06.034 See NOTE H below
Chapter 57 - Wings
Wing Attachment Bolts Replace (discard) 7000 flying hours or 14

first)
Wing-Strut Attachment-Bolts Replace (discard) 7000 flying hours or 14

first)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 5
04-00-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE H: For parts with 3400 flying hours or more or unknown installed life, the replacement task must
be accomplished within 100 flying hours or 100 landings, whichever comes first.
Approved by:
EUROPEAN AVIATION SAFETY AGENCY (EASA)

EASA Approval No: 10074635
Approval Date: Oct 22/20
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 6
04-00-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 05 - TIME LIMITS / MAINTENANCE CHECKS

Chapter Chapter
Section Section
Subject Pages Date Subject Pages Date
List of Effective 1 Jan 31/22 05-22-02 (Cont‘d) 3 Jan 30/17
Pages 2 Jan 31/22 4 Jan 30/17
Table of Contents 1 Feb 28/20 05-22-03 1 Jan 30/17

2 Feb 28/20 2 Jan 30/17
3 Jan 30/17
05-00-00 1 Jul 31/12 4 Jan 30/17
2 Jul 31/12
05-22-04 1 Jan 30/17
05-10-00 1 Jul 30/17 2 Jan 30/17
2 Jul 30/17
05-23-00 1 Nov 30/03
05-10-10 1 Jan 31/22
2 Jan 31/22 05-23-01 1 Jun 30/21
3 Jan 31/22 2 Jun 30/21
4 Jan 31/22 3 Jun 30/21
4 Jun 30/21
05-10-20 1 Nov 21/18 5 Jun 30/21
2 Nov 21/18 6 Jun 30/21
3 Nov 21/18 7 Jun 30/21
4 Nov 21/18 8 Jun 30/21
9 Jun 30/21
05-20-00 1 Jun 30/21 10 Jun 30/21
2 Jun 30/21 11 Jun 30/21
3 Jun 30/21 12 Jun 30/21
4 Jun 30/21
05-23-02 1 Jan 30/17
05-22-00 1 Mar 14/95 2 Jan 30/17
3 Jan 30/17
05-22-01 1 Feb 28/20 4 Jan 30/17
2 Feb 28/20
3 Feb 28/20 05-23-03 1 Jan 30/17
4 Feb 28/20 2 Jan 30/17
5 Feb 28/20 3 Jan 30/17
6 Feb 28/20 4 Jan 30/17
7 Feb 28/20
8 Feb 28/20 05-23-04 1 Jan 30/17
9 Feb 28/20 2 Jan 30/17
10 Feb 28/20
11 Feb 28/20 05-24-00 1 Mar 14/95
12 Feb 28/20
05-24-01 1 Jun 30/21
05-22-02 1 Jan 30/17 2 Jun 30/21
2 Jan 30/17 3 Jun 30/21
Page 1
05-LEP Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter Chapter
Section Section
05-24-01 (Cont‘d) 4 Jun 30/21 05-51-12 (Cont‘d) 2 Jul 30/15
5 Jun 30/21
6 Jun 30/21 05-51-13 1 May 14/10
7 Jun 30/21 2 May 14/10
8 Jun 30/21
9 Jun 30/21 05-57-01 601 Nov 21/18
10 Jun 30/21 602 Nov 21/18
11 Jun 30/21 603 Nov 21/18
12 Jun 30/21 604 Nov 21/18
13 Jun 30/21 605 Nov 21/18
14 Jun 30/21 606 Nov 21/18
05-24-02 1 Jan 30/17

2 Jan 30/17
3 Jan 30/17
4 Jan 30/17
05-24-03 1 Jan 30/17

2 Jan 30/17
3 Jan 30/17
4 Jan 30/17
05-24-04 1 Jan 30/17

2 Jan 30/17
05-50-00 1 May 14/10

2 May 14/10
05-51-01 1 Nov 30/03

2 Nov 30/03
05-51-02 1 Feb 28/10

2 Feb 28/10
05-51-03 1 Nov 21/18

2 Nov 21/18
05-51-04 1 Nov 21/18

2 Nov 21/18
05-51-05 1 Nov 30/03
05-51-08 1 Jun 14/91
05-51-09 1 Jul 30/15

2 Jul 30/15
05-51-12 1 Jul 30/15
Page 2
05-LEP Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 05 - TIME LIMITS / MAINTENANCE CHECKS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
TIME LIMITS / MAINTENANCE CHECKS 05-00-00

General 1 All
TIME LIMITS 05-10-00

General 1 All
OVERHAUL AND REPLACEMENT SCHEDULE 05-10-10 1 All
TIME LIMITED MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS 05-10-20 1 All
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS 05-20-00

General 1 All
100 HOUR / ANNUAL INSPECTION 05-22-00
General 1 All
Airframe 05-22-01 1 All
Engine 05-22-02 1 All
Electrics and Instruments 05-22-03 1 All
Avionics 05-22-04 1 All
PARTIAL OVERHAUL 05-23-00
General 1 All
COMPLETE OVERHAUL 05-24-00
General 1 All
Page 1
05-TOC Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter
Section
UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS 05-50-00

General 1 All
HIGH g-LOADS 05-51-01 1 All
HARD OR OVERWEIGHT LANDING 05-51-02 1 All
TAIL DOWN LANDING 05-51-03 1 All
OVERSPEED - MORE THAN VNE 05-51-04 1 All
OVERSPEED - MORE THAN VFE 05-51-05 1 All

WITH FLAPS EXTENDED
ENGINE OVERTORQUE 05-51-08 1 All
SUDDEN PROPELLER STOPPAGE OR 05-51-09 1 All
IMPACT
LIGHTNING STRIKE 05-51-12 1 All
FLIGHT THROUGH VOLCANIC ASH OR 05-51-13 1 All
SMOKE
ALIGNMENT AND SYMMETRY 05-57-01 All
Inspection / Check 601 All
Page 2
05-TOC Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TIME LIMITS / MAINTENANCE CHECKS
1. General
This chapter has three sections:
• Time Limits 05-10-00

• Scheduled Maintenance Checks 05-20-00
• Unscheduled Maintenance Checks 05-50-00
2. Time Limits
The Time Limits section gives the life and / or the overhaul and replacement / inspection intervals
related to the aircraft, its systems and the components / parts installed.
3. Scheduled Maintenance Checks
This section gives the instructions related to the maintenance checks and inspections that must be
done on the aircraft at the scheduled / specified intervals.
4. Unscheduled Maintenance Checks
This section gives the instructions related to the maintenance checks and inspections that must be
done on the aircraft after a special or unusual incident has occurred. These maintenance checks and
inspections are necessary to find possible damage to the aircraft.
5. Permissible Tolerances
The following paragraphs give the permissible tolerances and extensions for flying hours, cycles
(landings) and calendar based maintenance intervals.
It is the responsibility of the owner or operator to make sure that any maintenance interval extension is
accepted by the Airworthiness Authority of the country of registration of the affected aircraft.
If you do the maintenance inside the permissible tolerance limits, the next planned maintenance times
do not change, e.g:
• If the standard interval is 100 hrs, the permissible tolerance is ± 10 hrs. If the maintenance work
is done inside the shaded tolerance band, the maintenance intervals do not change:
IN LIMITS
90 110 190 210 290 310
0 hrs 100 hrs 200 hrs 300 hrs

6741
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-00-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
You can do the maintenance earlier than the permissible tolerance limit, but if you do this the next
planned maintenance times do change, e.g:
• If the standard interval is 100 hrs, the permissible tolerance is ± 10 hrs. If the maintenance work
is done earlier and outside the shaded tolerance band, the maintenance intervals do change:
OUT OF LIMITS
290 310 450 470 550 570 650 670
200 hrs 300 hrs 360 hrs 400 hrs 460 hrs 500 hrs 560 hrs 600 hrs 660 hrs 700 hrs
PREMATURE NEXT
INSPECTION INSPECTION
6742
These tolerances do not apply to the maintenance tasks in Chapter 04, Airworthiness Limitations.
A. Flying Hour Based Intervals
100 flying hours or less: ± 10 flying hours.
More than 100 flying hours: ± 10%, but not more than 500 flying hours.
B. Cycle Based Intervals
500 cycles or less: ± 10%, but not more than 25 cycles.
More than 500 cycles: ± 10%, but not more than 500 cycles.
C. Calendar Time Based Intervals
1 year or less: ± 10%, but not more than 1 month.
More than 1year: ± 10%, but not more than 6 months.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-00-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TIME LIMITS
1. General
This section has two subjects:
• Overhaul and Replacement Schedule 05-10-10

• Time Limited Maintenance Requirements 05-10-20
The time limits given in this section are based on average usage of the aircraft and average
environmental conditions.
The time limits given are not a guarantee that the item will reach the time without malfunction as the
base factors cannot be controlled by the manufacturer. This is specially applicable to aircraft that are
operated in very hot and humid climates, or very cold and damp climates, or salt-laden atmospheres,
etc.
The date of manufacture of the aircraft (given on the aircraft data plate) is used as the basis for all
time limited items listed in this section.
The subsequent monitoring procedure for all the calendar time limited items after their initial
replacement or inspection, will be in elapsed time or installed time. This is given with each component
interval in sections 05-10-10 and 05-10-20.
Elapsed time is the time interval since manufacture of the component.
Installed time is the time interval since the installation of the component on the aircraft.
For the calendar based time limited items, the inspection requirement is to be done no later than the
last day of the month of the calendar interval given. This is also applicable to all the subsequent
calendar time limited inspection requirements.
It is the responsibility of the owner or operator to make sure that the times are monitored correctly.
2. Overhaul and Replacement Schedule
This subject gives a recommended list of all components which have an overhaul life or a maximum life
limit. The time limits for the components are based on flying hours, calendar time or number of flights.
The first overhaul or replacement of a component must be done not later than the stated time limit (the
permissible tolerances given in 05-00-00 are applicable). The condition of the component can be used
as a criterion (to calculate subsequent time limits applicable to the individual aircraft or fleet operation) if
the operator has an approved condition-monitoring system.
The requirements of this subject can be accomplished by:
• Overhaul (disassembly, inspection, assembly and test) of the component in accordance with the
applicable Component Maintenance Manual (CMM)
• Replacement with components purchased from Pilatus Aircraft Limited (items that can be
overhauled can be returned to Pilatus for exchange).
Compliance with one of these two options is at the discretion of the maintenance center responsible for
the work related to the time limit requirement.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-10-00 Jul 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Components not listed as lifed or to be overhauled do not have a specified life. These components
need only be replaced when their condition shows that replacement is necessary.
3. Time Limited Maintenance Requirements
This subject gives a list of the items that must have an inspection and / or test at intervals that are
based on flying hours, calendar time or the number of flights. To give the best utilization, each item
listed in this subject is given an individual optimized periodicity. For this reason these items are listed
separately from the scheduled Inspection Requirements given in section 05-20-00. When a scheduled
inspection is due, check to see if there are Time Limited Maintenance Requirements due at the same
time.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-10-00 Jul 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OVERHAUL AND REPLACEMENT SCHEDULE
Component Maximum Life Overhaul Interval
Chapter 24 - Electrical Power
Starter-generator 1000 flying hours
Safety harnesses 10 years (elapsed)
Pilots' roof-mounted shoulder-harnesses 10 years (elapsed)

Overhaul by Pilatus only
(PC-6 specific modification)
ELT battery (if installed) After a total of one hour of ELT

use or as shown on the battery
label
First aid kit (if installed) 1 year
Powder fire extinguisher 3 years

P/N 959.08.01.352 or 959.08.01.354
(if installed)
Control column aileron/pitch trim switch 3500 flying hours or 10 years
Deleted
Deleted
Aileron to rudder interconnect - tension 3500 flying hours or 7 years,

springs whichever occurs first
Ref. NOTE 1
(Ref. 27-14-11, Page Block 401)
Chapter 28 - Fuel
Flexible hoses (P/N 115.55.06.135, 10 years

115.55.06.136, 6538.0043.00)
Fuel filter element (Airmaze) 600 flying hours

- cleanable type
Fuel filter element (Zenith) 100 flying hours

- disposable type
Transfer pumps - underwing tanks 7000 flying hours

(if installed)
Engine driven pump 3500 flying hours
EFFECTIVITY: All
05-10-10
Page 1
Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Auxiliary pump 1200 flying hours

or 7 years
Flexible hoses 10 years
V-strut assembly 7000 flying hours

or 14 years
Main gear shock struts 10000 landings

or 7 years
Tail shock strut 10000 landings

or 7 years
Tail landing gear assembly 3500 flying hours

or 7 years
Brake unit 3500 flying hours

or 7 years
Chapter 37 - Vacuum
Vacuum system air filter (D9-18-1) 500 flying hours or 1 year,

whichever comes first
Chapter 61- Propeller
Propeller (with attachment bolts) 3000 flying hours

or 5 years (Ref. Hartzel
SL 61, latest revision)
Propeller overspeed governor Engine TBO + 500 hours
Chapter 71 - Power Plant
Engine 3600 flying hours

(Ref. P&WC SB 1803)
Engine accessories (Ref. P&WC SB 1803)
Engine rotor components Refer to P&WC SB 1002
Engine hot section (HSI) 1800 flying hours

(Ref. P&WC SB 1803)
Engine shockmounts At engine overhaul, but not

later than 5000 flying hours
EFFECTIVITY: All
05-10-10
Page 2
Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 73 - Engine Fuel and Control
FCU drivebody inspection/bearing 3600 flying hours or Basic

replacement TBO, whichever is first.
(Ref. P&W EMM 72-00-00, Page Block 601 This limit is calculated from
/ Pilatus SL 076) the time the unit has
entered service or the last
overhaul of the FCU.
P3 air filter Pt No. 3029268 1000 flying hours maximum

(cleanable type) (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-
00, Page Block 601)
P3 air filter Pt No. 3031781 1000 flying hours

(disposable type) (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00,
Page Block 601)
HP fuel pump outlet filter 600 flying hours

Pt No. 3033355 (Ref. P&WC EMM 73-10-02)
Chapter 77 - Engine Indicating
Flexible hose (P/N 6501.0131.00) 10 years
Chapter 79 - Oil
Engine oil filter (permanent type) 1500 flying hours

(Post P&WC SB 1118 and Pre SB 1215) (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-
00, Page Block 601)
Engine oil filter (disposable type) 1000 flying hours

(Post P&WC SB 1215 and SB 1282) (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00,
Page Block 601)
Oil cooler 3500 flying hours
Oil cooler shockmounts 3500 flying hours, 7 years, or

when the cooler is removed
Flexible hoses (P/N 115.60.06.054, 10 years

115.60.06.045, 6543.0111.00)
NOTE 1: Aircraft with aileron to rudder interconnect tension springs with more than 3500 flying hours or 7
years, whichever occurs first, must have the springs replaced within 12 months after publishing date
of the AMM Revision 31 (Jun 30/21).
EFFECTIVITY: All
05-10-10
Page 3
Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
05-10-10
Page 4
Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TIME LIMITED MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Hawker NiCad Battery (if installed) Remove and service (Ref. 300 flying hours or 3 months
24-32-11, Page Block 401
and Battery CMM)
Marathon NiCad Battery (if installed) Remove and service (Ref. 100 flying hours or 3 months
24-32-11, Page Block 401
and Battery CMM)
Hawker Lead Acid Battery (if installed) Remove and capacity test Initial test: 4500 flying hours or
(Ref. 24-32-11, Page Block 18 months
401 and Battery CMM) Subsequent tests at 750 flying
hours or 3 months
Concorde Lead Acid Battery (if installed) Remove and capacity test Initial test: 600 flying hours or 12
(Ref. 24-32-11, Page Block months
401 and Battery CMM) Subsequent tests at 200 flying
hours or 4 months
Emergency Battery (if installed) Remove and service 1 year

(Capacity test, Ref. CMM)
Operational test 3 months
Starter / Generator Brushes Check for wear 200 flying hours

(Ref. 24-31-11, Page Block
601)
Halon Fire Extinguisher Examine 1 year

(if installed) Check contents
Powder Fire Extinguisher Examine and weigh 1 year

P/N 959.08.01.352 or 959.08.01.354 Max permitted weight loss is
(if installed) 10 grams (0.35 oz)
Check pressure
ELT (if installed) Operational Test 1 year

501)
Aileron Control Cables and Pulleys Examine 3500 flying hours or 7 years
601)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-10-20 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Rudder Control Cables and Pulleys Examine 3500 flying hours or 7 years
601)
Elevator Control Cables and Pulleys Examine 3500 flying hours or 7 years
601)
Trim Control Cables (if installed) Examine 3500 flying hours or 7 years
601)
Rudder-Trim Friction-Brake Functional Test 2 years

(Mechanical system) (Ref. 27-25-00, Page Block
501)
Chapter 28 - Fuel
Fuel Filter Element Clean (Ref. 28-21-12, Page 50 flying hours

(Airmaze Pt. No. OW1702-231) Block 701)
Fuel Filter Element Clean (Ref. 28-21-12, Page 100 flying hours
(Airmaze Pt. No. OW2440-231) Block 701)
Engine Driven Fuel Pump Check pump drive shaft for 400 flying hours
backlash
601)
Main and Tailwheels Crack detect the wheel At each tire replacement
halves as given in the latest
revision of ABSC CMM AP
440
Magnetic particle inspect the
tie bolts
Chapter 34 - Navigation
Pitot-Static System Leak check 2 years

Drain 2 years
Standby Magnetic Compass Check swing 2 years
Encoding Altimeter System (if installed) Functional test IFR flight operations:
2 years
VFR flight operations:
On condition
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-10-20 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Altimeter Functional test IFR flight operations:

2 years
VFR flight operations:
On condition
Transponder System (If installed) Functional test 2 years
Chapter 35 - Oxygen
Regulator Panels (if installed) Overhaul 2 years or 2000 flying hours

P/N 957.12.16.604
Regulator Panels (if installed) Overhaul 5 years

P/Ns 957.12.16.106 and 957.12.16.201
Chapter 51 - Structures
Complete Structure - Internal and External Look for corrosion 1 year
Fuselage, Seat Attachments and Examine 2 years

Surrounding Structure
Chapter 56 - Windows
Emergency Windows Check operation 300 flying hours or 1 year

(Aircraft without pilot/co-pilot doors) Lubricate seals (Material No.
P04-018)
Chapter 61 - Propeller
Propeller Lubricate 100 flying hours or 1 year,
Propeller Overspeed Governor Check operation 200 flying hours

501)
Chapter 71 - Powerplant
Compressor Performance Recovery 100 to 200 flying hours

Wash (Ref. P&WC EMM 71-00-00)
All operations
701)
Desalination Wash Daily to weekly depending on

Salt laden environment operating conditions
(Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block (Ref. P&WC EMM 71-00-00)
701)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
05-10-20 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Examine for corrosion and 400 flying hours or when FOD

erosion (Ref. P&WC EMM damage is suspected
72-30-05)
Turbine Wash (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Ref. P&WC EMM 71-00-00

Block 701)
Sand Filters (if installed) Clean (Ref. 71-12-00, Page 25 flying hours
Block 701)
Hot Section Examine with boroscope Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00,

(Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00) Table 601
HP Fuel Pump Inlet Screen Clean 600 flying hours

Examine (Ref. P&WC EMM
73-10-02)
HP Fuel Pump Coupling Shaft Examine drive splines for 600 flying hours
(If Sundstrand Fuel Pump installed) fretting corrosion
(Ref. P&WC EMM 73-10-02)
Fuel Manifold Adapter and Nozzle Examine (Ref. P&WC EMM Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00,
Assemblies 73-10-05) Table 601
Chapter 74 - Ignition
Spark Ignitors or Glowplugs Examine (Ref. P&WC EMM 400 flying hours
74-20-00 and 74-20-02)
Chapter 79 - Oil
Chip Detector Examine (Ref. P&WC EMM 100 flying hours

(Aircraft without CHIP caption on CAWS) 72-00-00)
Chip Detector Examine (Ref. P&WC EMM 600 flying hours or 1 year
(All aircraft) 72-00-00)
Oil Separator (if installed) Drain 50 flying hours
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 4
05-10-20 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS
1. Inspection Requirements
As required by FAR Part 91, the aircraft must have a complete Annual Inspection each 12 calendar
months of operation.
An Annual Inspection includes all the 100 Hour Inspection items.
The inspection intervals are based on normal usage of the aircraft under average environmental
conditions. Aircraft operated in very hot and humid climates, or very cold and damp climates, or
salt-laden atmospheres, may need more frequent inspections for wear, corrosion and lubrication. Under
these adverse conditions the 100 Hour Inspection should be done in compliance with the inspection
sheets at a more frequent interval until the owner or operator can set his own inspection interval based
on field experience.
For the permissible tolerances of maintenance intervals, refer to 05-00-00.
The owner or operator is primarily responsible for maintaining the aircraft in an airworthy condition. This
includes compliance with Airworthiness Directives and any additional maintenance requirements from
the Time Limits section of this chapter. It is further the responsibility of the owner or operator to make
sure that the aircraft is inspected in accordance with the inspection sheets.
2. Recommended Scheduled Inspection Intervals
The aircraft maintenance cycle is completed each 7000 flying hours, or 14 years if this occurs first.
• 100 Hour Inspection
The 100 Hour Inspection must be done each 100 flying hours, or each year if this occurs first.
• Annual Inspection
Aircraft operated under civil regulations must have an Annual Inspection each 12 months.
• Partial Overhaul
A Partial Overhaul must be done when or before the aircraft completes 3500 flying hours, or at 7
years if this occurs first.
• Complete Overhaul
A Complete Overhaul must be done when or before the aircraft completes 7000 flying hours, or
at 14 years if this occurs first.
When a Complete Overhaul is done the aircraft maintenance cycle starts again.
3. Scheduled Inspection Procedures
The sections used for Scheduled Inspection procedures are:
• 100 Hour / Annual Inspection 05-22-00

• Partial Overhaul 05-23-00
• Complete Overhaul 05-24-00
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-20-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Inspection Sheets
The inspection sheets list the maintenance items for inspection and state the level of inspection
required. The sheets have been prepared to assist the owner or operator in meeting the foregoing
responsibilities. They include, together with the inspection requirements, cross references to the
maintenance procedures which are necessary to do the inspections.
The inspection sheets are not intended to be all-inclusive, for no such sheets can replace the good
judgement of a qualified mechanic in the performance of his duties. As the one primarily responsible for
the airworthiness of the aircraft, the owner or operator should select only qualified personnel to
maintain the aircraft.
5. Inspection Guidelines
The inspection sheets can be copied and should be used to do the inspections. Detailed information of
systems and sub-systems on the aircraft can be found in the applicable chapters of this maintenance
manual and the Engine Maintenance Manual (EMM). On the inspection sheets, reference is made to
the applicable inspection, repair, removal and installation procedures in this manual, the EMM and
Pilatus-issued Service Bulletins. It is the responsibility of the owner or operator to make sure that the
mechanics who do the inspections have access to these documents as well as the inspection sheets.
6. Inspection Terms and Definitions
Compare a measurement of time, pressure, temperature, resistance, dimension or

CHECK
other quantity with a specific figure for that measurement.
Look at the condition of an item for damage, etc., as follows:

Chafing
Contamination
Corrosion
Cracks
Deterioration
Discoloration due to overheating
Distortion
EXAMINE Faulty or broken locking devices.
Fractures
Fraying
Insecurity of attachment
Loose clips or fasteners
Loose or missing rivets
Leaks
Scoring
Wear
REMOVE Disconnect a component or system and take it away from its correct position.
INSTALL Put a component in its correct position and attach it correctly.
REPLACE Remove an item and install a new or serviceable item in its place.
DISCONNECT Loosen and remove cables, pipes or controls.
Use of special equipment to make sure that a component or system operates

FUNCTIONAL TEST
correctly.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-20-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OPERATIONAL Show by normal operation and with no special equipment or measurements, that a
TEST system or component operates correctly.
LUBRICATE Apply lubricant.
Fill to the correct level, pressure or quantity. Where necessary, this also includes:
Removal of caps or covers
Examination of caps, covers, gaskets, seals, etc.
FILL
Installation of caps, covers, etc.
Installation of locking devices if applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
05-20-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 4
05-20-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
100 HOUR/ANNUAL INSPECTION
1. General
This section gives details of the inspections necessary for a 100 hour/annual inspection.
For Periodic Inspections the sections used are:
• Airframe 05-22-01
• Engine 05-22-02
• Electrics/Instruments 05-22-03
• Avionics 05-22-04
Inspection procedures have been prepared in the style of work sheets. Operators may copy pages for
use as on the job work sheets.
CAUTION: IF REVISIONS ARE ISSUED FOR THIS SECTION, OPERATORS MUST MAKE SURE
THAT OLD WORK SHEET COPIES ARE DESTROYED. NEW WORK SHEETS MUST
THEN BE COPIED FROM THE REVISED PAGES.
In each section, work items are grouped into aircraft areas or systems. The maintenance manual
chapters, listed with each group, must be referred to during the inspection.
A component found to be defective during inspection or overhaul must be replaced or overhauled.
During inspection or overhaul make sure that:
• Life expired components are replaced

• Components due for overhaul are replaced
• Out of phase maintenance is done as necessary
Refer to 05-10-00 for component lives and components subject to overhaul.
2. Recommended Inspection Frequency
A periodic inspection must be done at each 100 flying hours or each year whichever occurs first.
If the aircraft is not flown, a 100 Hour/Annual inspection must be done each year.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-22-00 Mar 14/95
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
100 HOUR / ANNUAL INSPECTION - AIRFRAME
Item Inspection Operation Sign
Aircraft - General
1 External surfaces Examine, particularly for fuel, oil and hydraulic

leaks
2 Aircraft external Wash (Ref. 12-20-01, Page Block 701)
3 Aircraft preparation Position aircraft in maintenance hangar

Remove and examine the protective covers,
blanks and restraints. Replace if damaged, torn or
does not properly install
4 Placards and Markings Examine and replace as necessary (Ref. 11-00-00,

Page Block 201)
5 Aircraft lifting Put the aircraft on jacks (Ref. 07-10-00, Page

Block 201)
6 Fuselage Remove access panels and fairings
7 Fuselage - internal Remove cockpit and cabin seats and interior

fuselage linings
8 Wings Remove access panels and fairings (not fuel

tanks)
9 Engine cowls Remove
10 Empennage Remove access panels and fairings
Chapter 21 - Air Conditioning
11 Engine bleed air line and hoses Examine
12 Air inlet screens, filters and hoses Clean and examine
13 Mixer unit Examine
14 Butterfly vents - passenger cabin Examine
15 Emergency shut-off valve Examine
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-22-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
16 System components, pipes, cables, Examine

controls and linkages
17 System cables, controls and linkages Lubricate (Material No. P04-037)
18 Air conditioning system Check operation during engine ground run checks
19 Pilot and Co-pilot seats Examine seat and seat attachments

Make sure that the seat adjustment mechanism
operates correctly
Lubricate moving parts (Material No. P04-011)
20 Pilot and Co-pilot seats harnesses Examine

Inertial reel system - Operational test
21 Passenger seats Examine seats, seat attachments and seat

harnesses. If seats with Torso Restraint System
are installed, make sure the backrest release
mechanism operates correctly. Lubricate moving
parts (Material No. P04-028)
22 Linings and curtains Examine
23 Emergency locator transmitter Examine

(if installed) Check battery expiry date
24 Fire extinguisher (if installed) Examine

Check expiry date
25 First aid kit (if installed) Examine

Check expiry date
26 Crash axe (if installed) Make sure it is stored correctly
27 Stretchers (if installed) Examine stretchers and mountings
28 Parachute dispatch system Examine

(if installed) Signal light system - Operational test
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-22-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 27 - Flight Controls - General
29 Control column Examine

Check for excessive play at Teflon bearing at
base of column by pulling up and pushing down on
column. Maximum play is 0,2 mm (0,008 in.).
30 Control lock Examine
31 Rudder pedals Examine

Check for excessive play and full and free range of
movement
Especially examine the brake pedal at the weld for
cracks
Chapter 27 - Flight Controls - Ailerons
32 Aileron control system Examine system including stops, cables, pulleys,

guides, and bellcranks. Refer to 27-00-00, Page
Block 601 if defects are found
33 Aileron controls Do a functional test (Ref. 27-10-00, Page Block

501)
34 Aileron to rudder interconnect spring Examine
35 Aileron trim system cable and chains Check cable and chain tension
(Mechanical system) Lubricate chains with grease (Material No.
P04-037)
36 Aileron trim tab screw actuator Examine

(Mechanical system)
37 Aileron trim tab electrical actuator Examine

(Electrical system)
38 Aileron trim system Check neutral settings, sense and range of

(Mechanical or Electrical trim tab movement
systems) Check cockpit indicator (Ref. 27-15-00, Page
Block 501)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
05-22-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 27 - Flight Controls - Rudder
39 Rudder control system Examine system including stops, cables, pulleys,

40 Rudder Do a functional test (Ref. 27-20-00, Page Block

501)
41 Rudder trim control cables Check tension and freedom of movement

(Mechanical system) (Ref. 27-25-00, Page Block 501)
42 Rudder trim tab bellcrank lever Examine

(Mechanical system)
43 Rudder trim tab electrical actuator Examine

(Electrical system)
44 Rudder trim tab Do an inspection / check

(Mechanical or Electrical trim tab (Ref. 27-25-00, Page Block 601)
systems) Check neutral settings and range of movement
Check cockpit indicator
(Ref. 27-25-00, Page Block 501)
Chapter 27- Flight Controls - Elevator
45 Elevator control system Examine system including stops, cables, pulleys,

46 Elevator control system Do a functional test (Ref. 27-30-00, Page Block

501)
47 Elevator balance tabs Check neutral settings, sense and range of

movement (Ref. 27-32-00, Page Block 501)
Chapter 27 - Flight Controls - Stabilizer
48 Horizontal stabilizer trim actuator

Mechanical system Examine
Lubricate (Ref. 27-45-01, Page Block 201)
Electrical system Examine
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 4
05-22-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
49 Horizontal stabilizer trim actuator Examine.

attachments On the lugs, look for cracks and signs of excessive
asymmetrical wear.
50 Horizontal stabilizer trim system
Electrical system Do a functional test (Ref. 27-40-00, Page Block

501)
Mechanical system Lubricate chains (Material No. P04-037)

Lubricate handcranks (Material No. P04-002)
Chapter 27 - Flight Controls - Flaps
51 Flap screw actuators Examine

(Mechanical system) Lubricate (Material No. P04-037)
52 Flap control cables and chains Check tension

(Mechanical system) Lubricate chains with grease (Material No.
P04-037)
Lubricate deflecting sprocket bearings
(Ref. SL 028) (Material No.P04-037)
Lubricate handcranks (Material No. P04-002)
53 Flap Operating Handle Examine the leaf-springs

(Mechanical system) (Ref. 27-52-12, Page Block 601)
54 Flap position indicators Examine

(Mechanical system) Make sure that painted bands are visible from
pilots seat
55 Flap actuator and support bracket Examine

(Electrical system)
55A Flap control system - Bellcranks, Examine

levers and push/pull rods
(Electrical system)
56 Flaps Do a functional test (Ref. 27-50-00, Page Block

501)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 5
05-22-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 28 - Fuel System
57 Water collector tank and fuel filter Drain a minimum of 0,25 litre (0,5 pint) of fuel from
each drain valve
Make sure that there is no water in the fuel
58 Fuel filter Examine
59 Fuel shut-off valve Examine
60 Main fuel tanks Examine vents, filler caps and seals
61 Fuel pipes and hoses Examine
62 Air Maze fuel filter Examine inlet pipe and adjacent oil hose for
chafing
63 Fuel flow transmitter Examine
64 Engine driven fuel pump (EDP Examine
65 EDP Part No.: 968.84.51.101 Examine for fuel leaks and pushed out gasket
(Vendor Part No.: RG15980L1). material
If the Vendor Part No. is If fuel leaks are found or the gasket material
RG15980L1/M, these inspections are between the EDP housing and relief valve is
not necessary. pushed out, replace the EDP (Ref. 28-20-03, Page
Block 401)
Check the torque of the screws that attach the

EDP relief-valve body to the valve housing
The minimum torque must be 2,6 Nm (23 lb in.)
If the torque is less, remove the lockwire and
torque screws diagonally in sequence to between
2,6 and 2,83 Nm (23 and 25 lbf in.)
Safety the screws with lockwire.
66 Fuel system Set shut-off valve to OPEN and then set the AUX F
PUMP to ON
Look for leaks on complete fuel system and
unusual noise from the fuel pump
Set AUX F PUMP to OFF and then set shut-off
valve to CLOSE
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 6
05-22-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 28 - Fuel System - Underwing Tanks (If installed)
67 Underwing tanks Examine
68 Transfer pump filters Examine and clean
69 Underwing tank system Check operation
Chapter 32 Landing Gear and Brakes
70 Brakes Check brake pad wear (Ref. 32-42-00, Page Block

601)
71 Hydraulic pipes Examine
72 Brake system Check brake fluid level

Apply brakes, examine system for leaks
73 Park brake system Examine

Make sure system operates correctly
74 Mainwheel tires Examine
75 Mainwheels Remove (Ref. 32-41-11, Page Block 401)

Examine bearings, axles and wheels
Lubricate bearings with grease (Material No.
P04-003 or P04-031)
76 Brake discs Examine

Check for wear (Ref. 32-42-00, Page Block 601)
77 V-struts Examine (Ref. 32-11-11, Page Block 601)
78 V-struts attachments Examine

Lubricate (Material No. P04-002)
79 Main landing gear shock struts Examine

Check fluid level (Ref. 12-12-32, Page Block 301)
80 Mainwheels Install (Ref. 32-41-11, Page Block 401)

Inflate tire (Ref. 12-14-32, Page Block 301)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 7
05-22-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
81 Mainwheel - dirt scraper (If installed) Examine
82 Tail landing gear Examine

Make sure there are no cracks in the welded
seams
Check the locking-lever pivot pins (Ref. 32-51-13,
Page Block 601)
83 Tailwheel tire Examine
84 Tailwheel Remove (Ref. 32-41-12, Page Block 401)

Examine bearings, axle and wheel
Lubricate bearings with grease (Material No.
P04-003 or P04-031)
85 Tailwheel Install (Ref. 32-41-12, Page Block 401)

Inflate tire (Ref. 12-14-32, Page Block 301)
86 Steering system Examine

Check cable tension and range of movement
(Ref. 32-71-11, Page Block 401)
87 Debris guard (If installed) Examine
88 Ski installation (Aircraft Post SB 153) Examine (Ref. 32-76-00, Page Block 601)
Chapter 35 - Oxygen System (If Installed)
89 Oxygen bottle(s) and attachment Examine

brackets
90 Oxygen system pipes, flexible tubes Examine

and fittings
91 Oxygen regulators Examine
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 8
05-22-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 52 - Doors
92 Pilot’s, Co-pilot’s doors (if installed) Examine

Remove safety wire
Make sure that the emergency release mechanism
and latching mechanism operate correctly
Do the check of the vertical play (Ref. 52-10-00,
Page Block 201)
Lubricate mechanism (Material No. P04-011)
Install safety wire (Material No. P02-021)
93 Cabin RH / LH hinged doors (if Examine

installed) Make sure that the latching mechanism operates
correctly
94 Cabin RH / LH sliding door (if Examine door, sliding rails, rollers, stops and seals
installed) Make sure that the latching mechanism operates
correctly
95 Cabin trap-door (if installed) Remove trap-door hatch cover

Examine doors, hinges and seal
Make sure that the latching mechanism and door
release mechanism operate correctly
Test door for correct operation
96 Access panels and fasteners Examine
97 Fuselage - external Examine
98 Fuselage - internal Examine the structures that follow:

- cockpit floor
- cabin floor
- cabin floor T-rails
- door frames
- accessible frames, stringers and skin
99 Fuselage Make sure that the drain holes are not blocked
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 9
05-22-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
100 Empennage Examine internal skin and structures as far as

possible
Examine panels and fasteners
Make sure that the water drain holes are not
blocked
101 Dorsal fin Examine
102 Vertical stabilizer Examine
103 Rudder - support structure Examine rudder support brackets, torque tube,
control rod attachment points and attaching parts
104 Rudder Examine rudder skin and structure, balance weight

attachment and mountings for static discharge
wicks
105 Rudder upper attachment Remove access panel EL4

Examine the attachment bolt and lockwire for
security
Install access panel EL4
106 Rudder trim tab Examine tab, hinge, control rod attachment point
and attaching parts
107 Horizontal stabilizer Inspection/Check (Ref. 55-10-00, Page Block 601)
108 Horizontal stabilizer actuator Examine the attachment brackets
109 Elevator support structure Examine elevator support brackets, hinge

bearings, control rod attachment points, control
lever and attaching parts
110 Elevator Examine skin and structure, fixed tab (H4 only)
and mountings for static discharge wicks
111 Elevator attachments Remove access panels ET1 and EB1

Examine the attachment bolts and lock wire for
security
Install access panels ET1 and EB1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 10
05-22-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
112 Elevator balance tab Examine tab, hinges, control attachment points
and attaching parts
Lubricate hinges (Material No. P04-011)
113 Windows and windshields Examine
114 Emergency window (If installed) Examine
Chapter 57 - Wings
115 Access panels and fasteners Examine
116 Wing - external Examine skin and structure, particularly in area of

fuel tanks, all access holes and external
component or equipment attaching points. Look for
loose rivets along the main spar (this can indicate
advanced corrosion of the spar cap)
117 Wing - internal Examine internal skin and structure, particularly in

the area of fuel tank, as far as possible. Look for
signs of corrosion on the upper and lower main
spar caps
118 Wings Make sure that the drain holes are not blocked
119 Wing struts - external Examine attachment brackets

Examine strut exterior
120 Wing struts - internal Examine
121 Wing tips Examine
122 Aileron support structure Examine aileron support brackets, hinge bearings,
123 Ailerons Examine aileron skin and structure, balance arms

and static discharge wicks
124 Aileron - balance tabs Examine balance tabs, tab control rods, rod ends,
support brackets, hinges and attaching parts
Lubricate hinges (Material No. P04-011)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 11
05-22-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
125 Flap support structure Examine flap support brackets, hinge bearings,
control rod attachments, actuator support bracket
and attaching parts
126 Flaps Examine structure and skin. Use a mirror and light
to examine the skin of the flaps and slats for cracks
in the areas where the angles are attached
General - Close Up NOTE: Do these steps when the engine, electrical

and avionic inspections are complete
127 Access panels and fairings Install
128 Fuselage - internal Install internal linings
129 Engine cowls Install
130 Aircraft Remove the aircraft from jacks (Ref. 07-10-00,

Page Block 201)
131 Aircraft Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of
tools and other items
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 12
05-22-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
100 HOUR / ANNUAL INSPECTION - ENGINE
1 Spinner dome Remove
2 Propeller de-icer boots, slip-ring and Examine

brushes
(If installed)
3 Slip-ring (Beta) Examine

Check gap between slip-ring and carbon block is
no more than 0,50 mm (0.02 in.)
4 Blade clamps Check alignment
5 Spinner body and backplate Examine
6 Blades Examine
7 Spinner Dome Install
8 Engine compartment Clean engine, engine compartment and cowlings
9 Engine compartment Examine

Make sure water drain holes are not blocked
10 Powerplant and accessories Examine

(Refer to P&WC EMM 72-00-00 Periodic
Inspection and do the 100 hour and minor
inspection items)
11 Engine external Examine
12 Engine flexible and rigid pipes Examine
13 Engine cowling and seals Examine
14 Fireshields and seals Examine
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-22-02 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
15 Shockmounts Examine
16 Support ring Examine
17 Support struts Examine
18 Electrical harnesses Examine
Chapter 72 - Engine
19 Compressor inlet screen Clean

Examine
20 Gas generator case Examine
21 Propeller shaft oil seal Examine, look for oil leaks
22 Accessories Examine
23 HP fuel pump Examine
24 HP fuel pump outlet filter Examine, replace if contaminated

(Ref. P&WC EMM 73-10-02, Page Block 201)
25 Fuel control unit Examine

Check for leaks from vent
(Ref. P&WC EMM 73-20-00, Page Block 201)
26 Starting flow control unit Examine
27 Propeller governor Examine
28 Air pipes Examine
29 Fuel pipes Examine
30 Gas generator case drain valves Examine
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-22-02 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
31 Igniter exciter Examine
32 Ignition cables Examine
Chapter 76 - Engine Controls
33 Idle control system Examine
34 Power control system Examine
35 Propeller control system Examine
36 Engine controls Lubricate rod ends with grease

(Material No. P04-002)
37 Emergency fuel control system Examine

Do a functional test
(Ref. 76-20-00, Page Block 501)
Chapter 78 - Exhaust
38 Exhaust duct Examine
39 Exhaust stubs Examine
Chapter 79 - Oil
40 Oil cooler system Examine

Flap - Do an operational test
41 Oil filter Examine

Clean
(Ref. 79-21-11, Page Block 701)
42 Chip detector Do a functional test

(Ref. 79-31-11, Page Block 501)
43 Scavenge oil pump Examine
44 Oil filler cap and dipstick Examine
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
05-22-02 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
45 Oil separator Examine

(Aircraft Post SB 75 only)
General
46 Powerplant Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of
47 Powerplant Do a functional test

(Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 501)
48 Powerplant Do a deceleration check

(Post P&WC SB 1568 only) (Ref. EMM 71-00-00, Power Plant Adjustment/
Test)
NOTE: Not required if FCU is identified with

‘RE52’ or ‘SB 73-3’, or with a serial
number that has the letter ‘F’ as a prefix.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 4
05-22-02 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
100 HOUR / ANNUAL INSPECTION - ELECTRICS AND INSTRUMENTS
1 Cockpit blower motor Examine

Operationally test
2 Cabin blower motor Examine

(if installed) Operationally test
3 Battery mountings Examine attachment fittings, ventilation hoses,

cable connectors, wiring
4 External power receptacle Examine
5 Starter/Generator Examine
6 Starter/Generator Examine QAD adaptor and clamp
7 Starter and power generation relays Examine

Functionally test during engine ground run
8 Voltage regulator Examine

9 Cockpit - switches and circuit Examine

breakers Make sure that placards are readable
10 Cables, plugs, connectors, relays, Examine in these areas:

terminal blocks - engine compartment
- cockpit
- fuselage
- empennage
- wings
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-22-03 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
11 Bonding Examine bonding leads in these areas:

- engine compartment
- cockpit
- fuselage
- empennage
- wings
- landing gear
Chapter 27 - Flying Controls
12 Aileron trim actuator Examine

Operationally test
13 Rudder trim actuator Examine

Operationally test
14 Flap actuator Examine

Operationally test
15 Horizontal stabilizer actuator Examine

Operationally test
Chapter 28 - Fuel
16 Auxiliary fuel pump Operationally test
17 Underwing fuel pumps Operationally test

(if installed)
Chapter 30 - Ice and Rain Protection
18 Pitot tube and static port heaters Operationally test
Chapter 31 - Indicating/Recording
19 Instrument panel shockmounts Examine
20 Instruments Examine
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-22-03 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
21 Annunciator panel (if installed) Examine
Chapter 33 - Lights
22 Navigation lights Examine

Operationally test
23 Anti-collision strobe lights or beacons Examine

Operationally test
24 Landing lights Examine

Operationally test
25 Cockpit lights Examine

Operationally test
26 Instrument lights Examine

Operationally test
27 Warning lights Examine

Operationally test
28 Passenger cabin lights Examine

Operationally test
29 Pitot tube Examine
30 Static Ports Examine
31 Deleted
32 Pipes - pitot, static and vacuum Examine
33 Vertical speed indicator Reset to zero
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
05-22-03 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
34 Airspeed indicator Check, calibrate if necessary
35 Gyro operated instruments Operationally test
36 Magnetic compass Check correction card date is valid
Chapter 37 - Vacuum
37 Vacuum system suction regulator Clean filter
38 Vacuum system Examine

Replace air filter if contaminated
39 Vacuum system pressure regulator Examine
40 Vacuum system ejector Examine
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 4
05-22-03 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
100 HOUR / ANNUAL INSPECTION - AVIONICS
Chapter 23 - Communications and Chapter 34 - Navigatiom
1 Antennas Examine
2 Headsets and microphones Clean

Examine
3 Avionic equipment Examine
4 Avionic connectors and cables Examine
5 Avionic equipment racks and shock Examine

mounts
6 All avionics systems Examine switches and circuit breakers
7 All avionics systems Operationally test
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-22-04 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-22-04 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PARTIAL OVERHAUL
1. General
This section gives the instructions for a partial overhaul
The tasks related to a partial overhaul are divided into the subjects that follow:
• Engine 05-23-02
• Electrics / Instruments 05-23-03
The instructions are given in tabular format so that the pages can be copied and used as work sheets.
CAUTION: IF REVISIONS ARE ISSUED FOR THIS SECTIOIN, OPERATORS MUST DISCARD
COPIES OF OLD PAGES THAT HAVE NOT BEEN USED. THE REVISED PAGES CAN
THEN BE COPIED TO MAKE NEW WORK SHEETS.
In each of the four subjects, work items are grouped into aircraft areas or systems. The maintenance
manual chapters, listed in each group, must be referred to during the inspection. Where applicable,
instructions include Chapter-Section-Subject references to tasks in the maintenance manual.
A component found to be defective during an inspection must be replaced or overhauled as applicable.
During these inspections it must be made sure that:

• Reference is made to 05-10-00 for component lives and components subject to overhaul
NOTE: For engine and propeller component life limits, reference must be made to the
applicable Service Bulletin or Service Letter issued by the manufacturer.
2. Partial Overhaul
A Partial Overhaul must be done when or before the aircraft completes 3500 flying hours, or at 7 years
if this occurs first.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-23-00 Nov 30/03
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PARTIAL OVERHAUL - AIRFRAME
Aircraft - General
1 External surfaces Examine for fuel and oil leaks
2 Landing gear shock struts Examine for leaks
3 Brake system Examine for hydraulic leaks
4 Fuel system Defuel (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301)
5 Aircraft - external Wash (Ref. 12-20-01, Page Block 701)


Page Block 201)
8 Aircraft Raise on jacks (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201)
9 Fuselage Remove access panels and fairings
11 Wings Remove access panels and fairings
12 Main fuel tank access panels Remove
13 Underwing fuel tanks (If installed) Remove
14 Air inlet screen and hoses Examine
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-23-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
18 System components and pipes Examine
20 System controls Examine

21 Air conditioning system and Check during engine ground run checks
emergency shut-off control Reset valve and replace indicator thread (Material
No. P09-006)
22 Pilot and Co-pilot seats Examine

Adjustment mechanism - Operational test
23 Pilot and Co-pilot seat harnesses Examine

Check inertial reel system operates correctly
24 Seat attachments Examine

28 Fire extinguisher (If installed) Examine
29 First aid kit (If installed) Examine
30 Crash axe (If installed) Make sure it is stored correctly
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-23-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
31 Stretchers (If installed) Examine
32 Stretcher mounts (If installed) Examine
33 Parachute equipment (If installed) Examine:

- protective tube (for sliding door)
- left side door handle cover
- external step-board
- static-line attachments
- parachute bench
34 Parachute dispatch system (If Examine

installed) Signal light system - Operational test
35 Flap actuator jacks Remove

(Mechanical system only)
36 Controls Examine
Control column Check for excessive play at Teflon bearing at
base of column by pulling up and pushing down on
column.
Maximum play is 0,2 mm (0,008 in.)
Flap and horizontal stabilizer
handcranks (Mechanical system only) Lubricate (Material No. P04-002)
38 Rudder pedal assembly torque tube Remove

(up to MSN 623) Examine
Do a crack detection test with dye penetrant
Install
39 Rudder pedal assembly torque tube Examine for excessive wear

(from MSN 624) Lubricate (Material No. P04-002)
40 Rudder pedal bar Examine
41 Bellcranks and levers Examine
42 Flight control cables Examine

Check tension
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
05-23-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
43 Aileron control rods Examine
44 Aileron trim screw actuator Check for backlash. The maximum backlash
(mechanical system) is 0,3 mm (0.012 in.).
45 Elevator control rods Examine
46 Flap control rods Examine

(Electrical system only)
47 Flap control cables Examine

48 Horizontal stabilizer actuator Examine
49 Flap actuator jacks Examine

50 Control rod bearings Lubricate (Material No. P04-002)
51 Control cable pulleys Examine
52 Aileron to rudder interconnect spring Deleted - A new life limit is added to the Overhaul
and Replacement Schedule Chapter 27 - Flight
Controls
(Ref. 05-10-10, Page Block 1)
53 Flap actuator jacks Install

54 Fuel filter bypass Do a functional test with a dummy filter

56 Main fuel tanks Clean

Examine internal seals
Repair sealing if required (Ref 28-10-00, Page
Block 801)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 4
05-23-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
57 Fuel tank float valves Remove

Examine
Gently blow through the valve to make sure it seals
correctly
Install
58 Fuel tank vents Examine
59 Tank filler caps Examine
60 Fuel collector tank Examine
61 Water collector tank Examine
63 Engine driven fuel pump Examine

Check fuel flow indication (Ref. 28-40-00, Page
Block 501)
65 Fuel system Do a Functional test (Ref. 28-20-00, Page Block

501)
66 Underwing tanks, filler caps, seals, Examine

hoses and pylons
67 Transfer pump Examine and clean filters
68 Underwing tank system Do a Functional test (Ref. 28-20-00, Page Block

501)
Chapter 32 - Landing Gear and Brakes
69 Brake linings Check brake lining wear (Ref. 32-42-00, Page

Block 601)
70 Brake system Drain
71 Brake discs Check for wear (Ref. 32-42-00, Page Block 601)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 5
05-23-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
72 Brake system Examine pipes and hoses
73 V-struts Do the partial overhaul inspection procedure

(Ref. 32-11-11, Page Block 601)
75 Mainwheels and tires Examine
76 Main gear shock struts Examine

77 Tail landing gear Remove (Ref. 32-71-11, Page Block 401)
78 Tailwheel and tire Examine
79 Tail shock strut Examine

81 Tail landing gear Examine fuselage attachment points and adjacent

structure
83 Tailwheel steering Examine cables and springs

84 Brake system Lubricate moving parts of controls (Material No.

P04-037)
85 Brake system Flush system, fill with new fluid and bleed the
system
86 Brake system Apply the brakes and look for leaks
88 Tail landing gear Install (Ref. 32-71-11, Page Block 401)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 6
05-23-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
89 Steering system With a spring balance, check the system spring

box assemblies are pre-loaded to 37 Kg ± 2 Kg
(81 lb ± 4,5 lb).
Check cable tension (Ref. 32-51-11, Page Block
401) and the rudder system range of movement
(Ref. 27-20-00, Page Block 501)
Lubricate moving parts of controls (Material No.
P04-002)

brackets

and fittings
Chapter 52 - Doors
93 Pilot, Co-pilot doors (If installed) Examine

Latching handles - Do an Operational test
Remove safety wire
Emergency release mechanism - Do an
Operational test
94 Cabin hinged doors (If installed) Examine

Latching mechanism - Do an Operational test
95 Cabin sliding door (If installed) Remove

Examine rollers, rails and door
Examine seals and stops
Install door
96 Cabin trap-door (If installed) Remove trap-door hatch cover

Latching and release mechanism - Do an
Operational test
97 Access door - RH rear fuselage Latching mechanism - Do an Operational test

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 7
05-23-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
99 Fuselage - internal Examine
101 Wing attachment brackets and Examine

adjacent structure Use a light and magnifying glass
102 Fuselage - wing strut attachment Examine

brackets and structure internal and Use a light and magnifying glass
external
103 V-strut attachment brackets Examine
104 Access panels Examine panels, fairings and fasteners
105 Elevators Remove (Ref. 55-21-11, Page Block 401)
106 Rudder Remove (Ref. 55-41-11, Page Block 401)
107 Empennage - internal Examine as far as possible

blocked
108 Dorsal fin and attachments Examine
110 Rudder hinge bearings Replace
111 Rudder torque shaft upper and lower Replace (Ref. 27-22-01, Page Block 401)
bearing
112 Empennage Examine panels, fairings and fasteners
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 8
05-23-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
113 Torque tube Examine
114 Rudder and trim tab Examine
115 Horizontal stabilizer Check for excessive play at attachment points by

rocking stabilizer ends and listening for movement
at attachment points.
116 Horizontal stabilizer Remove (Ref. 55-11-11, Page Block 401)
117 Horizontal stabilizer Examine
118 Elevator and trim tab Examine
119 Elevator control bellcrank Examine
120 Elevator hinge bearings Replace
121 Horizontal stabilizer Install (Ref. 55-11-11, Page Block 401)
122 Rudder Install (Ref. 55-41-11, Page Block 401)
123 Elevators Install (Ref. 55-21-11, Page Block 401)
124 Windscreens Examine
125 Cabin - two round windows Examine
126 Door windows Examine
127 Emergency window (If installed) Examine seals
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 9
05-23-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 57 - Wings
128 Ailerons Remove (Ref. 57-61-11, Page Block 401)
129 Flaps Remove (Ref. 57-51-11, Page Block 401)


spar caps
132 Wing - fuselage attachments Examine
133 Wing - strut attachment brackets Examine
134 External stores attachments Examine
138 Ailerons Remove balance arms

Examine
Install balance arms
Examine mountings for the static discharge wicks
Lubricate bearings (Material No. P04-002)
139 Aileron - tabs Examine tabs, tab control rods, support brackets,
hinges and attaching parts
140 Flap support structure control rod Examine support brackets and hinge bearings,
attachments, actuator support bracket
and attaching parts
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 10
05-23-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
141 Flaps Examine
142 Wing struts Examine (Ref. 57-00-01, Page Block 601)
143 Ailerons Install (Ref. 57-61-11, Page Block 401)
144 Flaps Install (Ref. 57-51-11, Page Block 401)
Aircraft - General

501)
146 Elevator controls Do a functional test (Ref. 27-30-00, Page Block

501)
147 Rudder controls Do a functional test (Ref. 27-20-00, Page Block

501)

501)
149 Aileron trim Do a functional test (Ref. 27-15-00, Page Block

501)
150 Horizontal stabilizer trim Do a functional test (Ref. 27-40-00, Page Block
501)
151 Rudder trim Do a functional test (Ref. 27-25-00, Page Block

501)
153 Main fuel tank access panels Examine seals
154 Main fuel tank access panels Install
155 Fuselage Install access panels and fairings
156 Empennage Install access panels and fairings
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 11
05-23-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
157 Wings Install access panels and fairings
158 Underwing fuel tanks (If required) Install
159 Aircraft Lower off jacks (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 12
05-23-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PARTIAL OVERHAUL - ENGINE
1 Spinner Remove
2 Propeller de-icer boots Examine

(If installed)


Lubricate with grease (Material No. P04-016)
(Remove one Zerk fitting)
(Ref. Hartzell Propeller Maintenance Manual)
5 Blades Examine
Disconnect the pitch change mechanism and
make sure the blades are free to turn
Connect the pitch change mechanism and safety
with lockwire

Check for full and free range of movement
8 Engine Do a compressor wash (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block

701)
9 Engine and engine compartment Clean engine, engine compartment and cowlings
10 Engine Examine as far as accessable, all tubes, electrical

wiring, control linkages, hoses and cowlings
Lubricate ball-end fitting of starting control rod,
FCU rod and propeller interconnect rod with
grease (Material No. P04-002)
11 Engine compartment Examine all hoses and pipes

Examine compartment structure
Make sure that the drain holes are not blocked
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-23-02 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
12 Engine shockmounts Examine
15 Sand filters (If installed) Clean
16 Engine cowlings and seals Examine
19 Deleted
20 Fuel drain collector tank Examine
Chapter 72 - Engine
21 Compressor inlet screen Remove

Examine
22 Compressor Examine as far as possible
23 Compressor inlet screen Install
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-23-02 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 73 - Engine Fuel and

Control

Clean filters (Ref. P&WC EMM 73-10-02)

(Ref. P&WC EMM 73-20-00)
32 Spark igniters (If installed) Examine (Ref. P&WC EMM 74-20-00)
33 Glow plugs (If installed) Examine (Ref. P&WC EMM 74-20-02)
36 Engine control system Examine

Chapter 79 - Oil
38 Oil filter Clean (Ref. 79-21-11, Page Block 701)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
05-23-02 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
39 Chip detector Remove

Clean
Examine
Check operation as follows:
Connect detector, short across detector poles,
energize aircraft electrical system and check that
CHIP warning is activated (if installed)
Install and connect chip detector
General
41 Powerplant Do a functional test (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block

501)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 4
05-23-02 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PARTIAL OVERHAUL - ELECTRICS AND INSTRUMENTS
General
1 Battery mounts Examine attachments, ventilation hoses, cable

connectors and wiring
2 Battery compartment Examine
4 Starter/Generator Examine brushes, commutator, exterior surfaces

Functionally test

7 Cockpit - switches, circuit breakers Examine

Make sure that placards are readable
8 Cables looms, plugs, connectors Examine in:

relays, terminal blocks - engine compartment
- cockpit
- fuselage
- empennage
- wings
9 Bonding leads Examine in:

- cockpit
- fuselage
- empennage
- wings
- landing gear

Operationally test
11 Passenger cabin blower motor Examine

Operationally test
Chapter 23 - Communications
12 Static discharge wicks Examine
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-23-03 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Operationally test

Operationally test

Operationally test
16 Horizontal stabilizer actuator (Main Examine

and Alternate systems) Operationally test
Chapter 28 - Fuel
17 Auxiliary pump Operationally test
18 Pitot and static port heaters Operationally test
Chapter 33 - Lights
19 Navigation Lights Examine

Operationally test
20 Anti-collision strobe lights Examine

Operationally test
21 Landing Lights Examine

Operationally test

Operationally test

Operationally test

Operationally test

Operationally test
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-23-03 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
27 Static ports Examine
28 Pitot and static systems Functionally test system for leaks
29 Pitot and static pipes and connectors Examine
31 Altimeter Check barometric scale for accuracy

Calibrate if necessary
32 Airspeed indicator Check for accuracy, calibrate if necessary
35 Magnetic compass Check the correction card date is valid
36 Pitot tube Make sure that the tube has cooled

Install the cover
Chapter 37 - Vacuum
37 Vacuum suction regulator Clean the filter
38 Vacuum system air filter Examine

Replace if contaminated

valve
41 Vacuum pipes and connectors Examine
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
05-23-03 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 4
05-23-03 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PARTIAL OVERHAUL - AVIONICS
General
1 Antennas Examine
2 Headsets and microphones Examine

Examine cables and connectors as far as possible
4 Avionic equipment shockmounts Examine
5 Avionic equipment racks Examine
6 Switches and circuit breakers Examine
7 Avionic systems Operationally test
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-23-04 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-23-04 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMPLETE OVERHAUL
1. General
This section gives details of the inspections necessary for a Complete Overhaul.
For Complete Overhaul the sections used are:
• Engine 05-24-02
• Electrics/Instruments 05-24-03
Inspection procedures have been prepared in the style of work sheets. Operators may copy pages for
use as on the job work sheets.
CAUTION: IF REVISIONS ARE ISSUED FOR THIS SECTION, OPERATORS MUST MAKE SURE
THAT OLD WORK SHEET COPIES ARE DESTROYED. NEW WORK SHEETS MUST
TEN BE COPIED FROM THE REVISED PAGES.
In each section, work items are grouped into aircraft areas or systems. The maintenance manual
chapters, listed with each group, must be referred to during the inspection.
A component found to be defective during inspection or overhaul must be replaced or overhauled.
During these inspections make sure that:

• Refer to 05-10-00 for component lives and components subject to overhaul
NOTE: For the engine and propeller component life limits refer to the Service Bulletin or
Service Letter issued by the manufacturer.
2. Complete Overhaul
A Complete Overhaul must be done when or before the aircraft completes 7000 flying hours or at 14
years if this occurs first.
When a Complete Overhaul is done the aircraft maintenance cycle starts again.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-24-00 Mar 14/95
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMPLETE OVERHAUL - AIRFRAME
Aircraft - General
1 External surfaces Examine for fuel and oil leaks
2 Landing gear shock struts Examine for leaks
3 Brake system Examine for hydraulic leaks
4 Fuel system Defuel (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301)
5 Aircraft - external Wash (Ref. 12-20-01, Page Block 701)


Page Block 201)
8 Aircraft Raise on jacks (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201)
9 Fuselage Remove access panels, fairings and cabin /

cockpit linings
11 Wings Remove access panels and fairings
12 Main fuel tank access panels Remove
13 Underwing fuel tanks (if installed) Remove
14 Air inlet screen filter and hoses Examine, clean filter and screen
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-24-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
18 System components and pipes Examine
20 System controls Examine

21 Air conditioning system and Check during engine ground run checks
emergency shut-off control Reset valve and replace indicator thread (Material
No. P09-006)
22 Pilot and Co-pilot seats Examine

Adjustment mechanism - Operational test
23 Pilot and Co-pilot seat harnesses Examine

Check inertial reel system operates correctly

28 Fire extinguisher (if installed) Examine
29 Emergency locator transmitter Deleted from this section
30 First aid kit (if installed) Examine
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-24-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
31 Crash axe (if installed) Make sure it is stored correctly
32 Stretchers (if installed) Examine
33 Stretcher mounts (if installed) Examine
34 Parachute equipment (if installed) Examine:

- protective tube (for sliding door)
- left side door handle cover
- external step-board
- static-line attachments
- parachute bench
35 Parachute dispatch system Examine

(if installed) Signal light system - Operational test
36 Aileron control rods Remove
37 Flap actuator jacks Remove

38 Elevator control rods Remove
39 Flap control rods Remove

40 Controls
Control column Examine
Check for excessive play at Teflon bearing at base
of column by pulling up and pushing down on
column
Flap and horizontal stabilizer
handcranks (Mechanical system only) Lubricate (Material No. P04-002)
42 Rudder pedal assembly torque tube Remove

(Up to MSN 623) Examine
Do a crack detection test (see NOTE A at the end
of this Section)
Install
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
05-24-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
43 Rudder pedal assembly torque tube Examine for excessive wear

(From MSN 624) Do a crack detection test (see NOTE A at the end
of this Section)
Install
44 Aileron, rudder, elevator and flap Remove

bellcranks and levers Examine
Install
45 Flight control cables Examine

Check tension
46 Aileron control rods Examine

Do a crack detection test (see NOTE B at the end
of this Section)
47 Aileron trim screw actuator Check for backlash. The maximum backlash
(mechanical system) is 0,3 mm (0.012 in.).
48 Elevator control rods Examine

Do a crack detection test (see NOTE B at the end
of this Section)
49 Flap control rods Examine

(Electrical system only) Do a crack detection test (see NOTE B at the end
of this Section)
50 Flap control cables Examine

51 Flap actuator jacks Examine

52 Control rod bearings Lubricate (Material No. P04-002)
53 Control cable pulleys Examine

54 Aileron to rudder interconnect spring Deleted - A new life limit is added to the Overhaul
and Replacement Schedule Chapter 27 - Flight
Controls
(Ref. 05-10-10, Page Block 1)
55 Horizontal stabilizer trim control lever Remove

(Mechanical trim only) Clean
Examine
Lubricate
Install
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 4
05-24-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
56 Aileron control rods Install
57 Elevator control rods Install
58 Flap control rods Install

59 Flap actuator jacks Install

60 Fuel filter bypass Do a functional test with a dummy filter

62 Main fuel tanks Clean

Examine internal sealing
Repair sealing if required (Ref 28-10-00, Page
Block 801)
63 Fuel tank inward vent-valves Examine

Replace floats
(Ref. 28-10-11, Page Block 401)
64 Underwing fuel system vent-valves Examine

(if underwing tanks are installed) Replace floats
(Ref. 28-15-14, Page Block 401)
65 Fuel tank vents Examine
66 Tank filler caps Examine
67 Fuel collector tank Examine
68 Water collector tank Examine
70 Engine driven fuel pump Examine
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 5
05-24-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Check fuel flow indication (Ref. 28-40-00, Page
Block 501)
72 Fuel system Do a functional test

(Ref. 28-20-00, Page Block 501)
73 Underwing tanks, filler caps, seals, Examine

hoses and pylons
74 Transfer pump Examine and clean filters
75 Underwing tank system Do a functional test (Ref. 28-20-00, Page Block

501)
Chapter 32 - Landing Gear and Brakes
76 Brake linings Check brake lining wear (Ref. 32-42-00, Page

Block 601)
77 Brake system Drain
78 Brake discs Check for wear (Ref. 32-42-00, Page Block 601)
79 Brake system Examine pipes and hoses
80 V-struts Remove (Ref. 32-11-11, Page Block 401)
81 V-struts Do the complete overhaul inspection procedure

(Ref. 32-11-11, Page Block 601)
83 Mainwheels and tires Examine
84 Main gear shock struts Examine

85 Tail landing gear Remove (Ref. 32-71-11, Page Block 401)
86 Tailwheel and tire Examine
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 6
05-24-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
87 Tail shock strut Examine

89 Tail landing gear Examine fuselage attachment points and adjacent

structure
91 Tailwheel steering Examine cables and springs

92 V-strut Install (Ref. 32-11-11, Page Block 401)
93 Brake system Lubricate moving parts of controls (Material No.

P04-037)
94 Brake system Flush system, fill with new fluid and bleed the
system
95 Brake system Apply the brakes and look for leaks
97 Tail landing gear Install (Ref. 32-71-11, Page Block 401)
98 Steering system With a spring balance, check that the system

spring box assemblies are pre-loaded to between
34 and 39 kg (75 and 86 lb). Check cable tension
and system range of movement (Ref. 32-71-11,
Page Block 501)
Lubricate moving parts of controls (Material No.
P04-002)

brackets

and fittings
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 7
05-24-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter 52 - Doors
102 Pilot, Co-pilot doors (if installed) Examine

Latching handles - Do an Operational test
Remove safety wire
Emergency release mechanism - Do an
Operational test
103 Cabin hinged doors (if installed) Examine

104 Cabin sliding door (if installed) Remove

Examine rollers, rails and door
Examine seals and stops
Install door
105 Cabin trap-door (if installed) Remove trap-door hatch cover

Latching and release mechanism - Do an
Operational test
106 Access door - RH rear fuselage Examine

108 Fuselage - internal Examine
110 Wing attachment brackets and Examine

adjacent structure
111 Fuselage - wing strut attachment Examine

brackets and structure internal and Use a light and magnifying glass
external
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 8
05-24-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
112 V-strut attachment brackets Examine
114 Elevators Remove (Ref. 55-21-11, Page Block 401)
115 Rudder Remove (Ref. 55-41-11, Page Block 401)
116 Empennage - internal Examine as far as possible

blocked
117 Dorsal fin and attachments Examine
119 Rudder hinge bearings Replace
120 Rudder torque shaft upper and lower Replace (Ref. 27-22-01, Page Block 401)
bearing
121 Empennage Examine panels, fairings and fasteners
122 Torque tube Examine
123 Rudder and trim tab Examine
124 Horizontal stabilizer Check for excessive play at attachment points by

rocking stabilizer ends and listening for movement
at attachment points
125 Horizontal stabilizer Remove (Ref. 55-11-11, Page Block 401)
126 Horizontal stabilizer Examine
127 Elevator and trim tab Examine
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 9
05-24-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
128 Elevator control bellcrank Examine
129 Elevator hinge bearings Replace
130 Horizontal stabilizer Install (Ref. 55-11-11, Page Block 401)
131 Rudder Install (Ref. 55-41-11, Page Block 401)
132 Elevators Install (Ref. 55-21-11, Page Block 401)
133 Windscreens Examine
134 Cabin - two round windows Examine
135 Door windows Examine
136 Emergency window (if installed) Examine seals
Chapter 57 - Wings
137 Ailerons Remove (Ref. 57-61-11, Page Block 401)
138 Flaps Remove (Ref. 57-51-11, Page Block 401)
139 Wing struts Remove (Ref. 57-00-01, Page Block 401)
140 Wings Remove (Ref. 57-00-00, Page Block 401)

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 10
05-24-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

spar caps
143 Wing - fuselage attachments Examine

Examine attachment bushes
144 Wing - strut attachment brackets Examine
145 External stores attachments Examine
149 Ailerons Remove balance arms

Examine
Install balance arms
Examine mountings for the static discharge wicks
Lubricate bearings (Material No. P04-002)
150 Aileron - tabs Examine tabs, tab control rods, support brackets,
hinges and attaching parts
151 Flap support structure Examine hinge bearings, control rod attachments,
actuator support brackets and attaching parts
152 Flap support structure control rod Examine support brackets and hinge bearings,
attachments, actuator support bracket
and attaching parts
153 Flaps Examine
154 Wing struts Examine (Ref. 57-00-01, Page Block 601)
155 Wings Install (Ref. 57-00-00, Page Block 401)
156 Wing struts Install (Ref. 57-00-01, Page Block 401)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 11
05-24-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
157 Ailerons Install (Ref. 57-61-11, Page Block 401)
158 Flaps Install (Ref. 57-51-11, Page Block 401)
Aircraft - General

501)
160 Elevator controls Do a functional test (Ref. 27-30-00, Page Block

501)
161 Rudder controls Do a functional test (Ref. 27-20-00, Page Block

501)

501)
163 Aileron trim Do a functional test Ref. 27-15-00, Page Block

501)
164 Horizontal stabilizer trim Do a functional test (Ref. 27-40-00, Page Block
501)
165 Rudder trim Do a functional test (Ref. 27-25-00, Page Block

501)
167 Main fuel tank access panels Examine seals
168 Main fuel tank access panels Install
169 Fuselage Install access panels and fairings
170 Empennage Install access panels and fairings
171 Wings Install access panels and fairings
172 Underwing fuel tanks (If required) Install
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 12
05-24-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
173 Aircraft Lower off jacks (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201)
NOTE A: You can do a Fluorescent Dye Penetrant Inspection or a Magnetic Particle Inspection:
• Only persons qualified and certified to NDT Level II (or higher) National Aerospace Standard
NAS 410, European Standard EN 4179, or any other equivalent standards shall do a
Magnetic Particle Inspection.
• Pilatus recommend that persons qualified and certified to NDT Level II (or higher) National
Aerospace Standard NAS 410, European Standard EN 4179, or any other equivalent
standards, do a Fluorescent Dye Penetrant Inspection (Ref. SRM 51-00-09).
NOTE B: You can do a Fluorescent Dye Penetrant Inspection or an Eddy Current Inspection:
• Only persons qualified and certified to NDT Level II (or higher) National Aerospace Standard
NAS 410, European Standard EN 4179, or any other equivalent standards, shall do an Eddy
Current Inspection (Ref. SRM 51-00-09).
• Pilatus recommend that persons qualified and certified to NDT Level II (or higher) National
Aerospace Standard NAS 410, European Standard EN 4179, or any other equivalent
standards, do a Fluorescent Dye Penetrant Inspection (Ref. SRM 51-00-09).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 13
05-24-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 14
05-24-01 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMPLETE OVERHAUL - ENGINE
1 Spinner Remove
2 Propeller de-icer boots Examine

(If installed)


Lubricate with grease (Material No. P04-016)
(Remove one Zerk fitting)
(Ref. Hartzell Propeller Maintenance Manual)
5 Blades Examine
Disconnect the pitch change mechanism and
make sure the blades are free to turn
Connect the pitch change mechanism and safety
with lockwire

8 Engine Do a compressor wash (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block

701)
9 Engine and engine compartment Clean engine, engine compartment and cowlings
10 Engine Examine as far as accessable, all tubes, electrical

wiring, control linkages, hoses and cowlings
Lubricate ball-end fitting of starting control rod,
FCU rod and propeller interconnect rod with
grease (Material No. P04-002)
11 Engine compartment Examine all hoses and pipes

Examine compartment structure
Make sure that the drain holes are not blocked
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-24-02 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
12 Engine shockmounts Examine
15 Sand filters (If installed) Clean
16 Engine cowlings and seals Examine
19 Deleted
20 Fuel drain collector tank Examine
Chapter 72 - Engine
21 Compressor inlet screen Remove

Examine
22 Compressor Examine as far as possible
23 Compressor inlet screen Install
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-24-02 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Clean filters (Ref. P&WC EMM 73-10-02)

(Ref. P&WC EMM 73-20-00)
32 Spark igniters (If installed) Examine (Ref. P&WC EMM 74-20-00)
33 Glow plugs (If installed) Examine (Ref. P&WC EMM 74-20-02)
36 Engine control system Examine

Chapter 79 - Oil
38 Oil filter Clean (Ref. 79-21-11, Page Block 701)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
05-24-02 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
39 Chip detector Remove

Clean
Examine
Check operation as follows:
Connect detector, short across detector poles,
energize aircraft electrical system and check that
CHIP warning is activated (if installed)
Install and connect chip detector
General
41 Powerplant Do a functional test (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block

501)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 4
05-24-02 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMPLETE OVERHAUL - ELECTRICS AND INSTRUMENTS
General
1 Battery mounts Examine attachments, ventilation hoses, cable

connectors and wiring
2 Battery compartment Examine
4 Starter/Generator Examine brushes, commutator, exterior surfaces

Functionally test

7 Cockpit - switches, circuit breakers Examine

Make sure that placards are readable
8 Cables looms, plugs, connectors Examine in:

relays, terminal blocks - engine compartment
- cockpit
- fuselage
- empennage
- wings
9 Bonding leads Examine in:

- cockpit
- fuselage
- empennage
- wings
- landing gear

Operationally test
11 Passenger cabin blower motor Examine

Operationally test
Chapter 23 - Communications
12 Static discharge wicks Examine
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-24-03 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Operationally test

Operationally test

Operationally test
16 Horizontal stabilizer actuator (Main Examine

and Alternate systems) Operationally test
Chapter 28 - Fuel
17 Auxiliary pump Operationally test
18 Pitot and static port heaters Operationally test
Chapter 33 - Lights
19 Navigation Lights Examine

Operationally test
20 Anti-collision strobe lights Examine

Operationally test
21 Landing Lights Examine

Operationally test

Operationally test

Operationally test

Operationally test

Operationally test
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-24-03 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
27 Static ports Examine
28 Pitot and static systems Functionally test system for leaks
29 Pitot and static pipes and connectors Examine
31 Altimeter Check barometric scale for accuracy

Calibrate if necessary
32 Airspeed indicator Check for accuracy, calibrate if necessary
35 Magnetic compass Check the correction card date is valid
36 Pitot tube Make sure that the tube has cooled

Install the cover
Chapter 37 - Vacuum
37 Vacuum suction regulator Clean the filter
38 Vacuum system air filter Examine

Replace if contaminated

valve
41 Vacuum pipes and connectors Examine
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
05-24-03 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 4
05-24-03 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMPLETE OVERHAUL - AVIONICS
General
1 Antennas Examine
2 Headsets and microphones Examine

Examine cables and connectors as far as possible
4 Avionic equipment shockmounts Examine
5 Avionic equipment racks Examine
6 Switches and circuit breakers Examine
7 Avionic systems Operationally test
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-24-04 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-24-04 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS
1. General
Unscheduled maintenance checks are necessary if unusual incidents occur.
These checks must be done before the next flight following the incident.
Depending on the severity of an incident, it may be advisable to remove the wings, horizontal stabilizer,
elevator, rudder and landing gear to allow a more comprehensive inspection to be done.
If necessary contact Pilatus Aircraft Limited for further advice.
2. Unscheduled Maintenance Checks - Airframe
These checks must be done after the following incidents occur:
• High g-loads 05-51-01

• Hard or overweight landing 05-51-02
• Tail down landing 05-51-03
• Overspeed, more than VNE 05-51-04
• Overspeed with flaps extended (VFE) 05-51-05
• Engine overtorque 05-51-08
• Sudden propeller stoppage or impact 05-51-09
• Lightning strike 05-51-12
• Flight through volcanic ash or smoke 05-51-13
3. Unscheduled Maintenance Checks - Engine
These checks must be done after the following incidents occur (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00, Page Block
601):
• Engine overspeed
(Gas generator or propeller)
• Overtorque
• Sudden propeller stoppage
(Overhaul propeller overspeed governor, in addition to P&WC EMM prescribed actions)
• Lightning strike
• Loss of oil pressure
• Contamination by fire extinguisher agents
• Flight through volcanic ash or smoke
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-50-00 May 14/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-50-00 May 14/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HIGH g-LOADS - UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS
1. General
These checks must be done when high g-loads that are more than the design limits occur during flight.
If loose or cracked paint is found during this check, it can indicate that the structure of the aircraft is
damaged.
2. Procedure
A. General
(1) Do an alignment and symmetry check.
B. Fuselage
(1) Internal Examine.
(2) External Examine.
(3) Wing attachments Examine.
C. Engine Compartment
(1) Structure Examine.
(2) Engine mount ring Examine.
(3) Support struts Examine.
(4) Fireproof bulkhead Examine.
(5) Fuselage attachment longerons Examine.
D. Wings
(2) Structure Look for fuel leaks.
(3) Wing struts Examine.
(4) Wing strut attachments Examine.
(5) Underwing tanks Examine.

(If installed)
(6) Underwing tank pylons Examine.

(If installed)
(7) Pylon to wing attachments Examine.

(If installed)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-51-01 Nov 30/03
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Flight Controls
(1) Aileron Examine
(2) Aileron support structure Examine.
(3) Aileron tabs Examine.
(4) Flaps Examine.
(5) Flap support structure Examine.
(6) Vertical stabilize Examine.
(7) Dorsal fin Examine.
(8) Rudder Examine.
(9) Rudder support structure Examine.
(10) Rudder trim tab Examine.
(11) Horizontal stabilizer Examine.
(12) Horizontal stabilizer attachments Examine.
(13) Horizontal stabilizer actuator Examine.

attachment brackets
(15) Elevator Examine.
(16) Elevator trim tab Examine.
(17) Elevator support structure Examine.
(18) All flight controls Check rigging.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-51-01 Nov 30/03
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HARD OR OVERWEIGHT LANDING - UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS
1. General
damaged.
A. Hard Landing
A hard landing is when the aircraft lands with a high sink rate or high sideslip, or both.
B. Overweight Landing
This is when the aircraft lands at a weight which is more than the maximum approved.
2. Procedure
A. Engine Compartment
(6) Engine shockmounts Examine.
(7) Engine Do the engine heavy/hard landing inspection

(Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00).
B. Main Landing Gear
(1) V struts Examine.
(2) V strut attachments Examine.
(3) Shock strut Examine.
(4) Shock strut attachments Examine.
(5) Main wheels and tires Examine.
(6) Main wheels bearings Examine.
(7) Brake units Examine.
C. Tail Landing Gear
(1) Tail landing gear Examine.
(2) Tail gear steering system Examine.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-51-02 Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Fuselage
(1) Wing attachments Examine.
(3) Main landing gear attachments Examine.
(4) Tail landing gear attachments Examine.
E. Wings
(2) Wing struts Examine.
(3) Underwing tanks Examine.
(4) Underwing tank pylons Examine.
(5) Pylon to wing attachments Examine.
F. Flight Controls
(1) Horizontal stabilizer Examine.
(2) Horizontal stabilizer attachments Examine.

attachment brackets
(5) Elevator Examine.
(6) Elevator trim tab Examine.
(7) Elevator support structure Examine.
(8) All controls Check rigging.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-51-02 Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAIL DOWN LANDING - UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS
1. General
A tail down landing is when the tail wheel touches the ground before the main wheels.
If loose or cracked paint is found during this check, it may indicate that the structure of the aircraft is
damaged.
2. Procedure
A. General
(1) Do an alignment and symmetry check
B. Fuselage
(1) From frame 12 rearward Examine
(2) Horizontal stabilizer attachments Examine
(3) Tail landing gear attachments Examine
C. Flight Controls
(1) Horizontal stabilizer Examine
(3) Horizontal stabilizer actuator Examine

attachment brackets
(5) Horizontal stabilizer Check rigging
(6) Elevator Examine
(7) Elevator attachments Examine
(8) Elevator Check rigging
(9) Rudder Examine
(10) Rudder attachments Examine
(11) Rudder Check rigging
D. Tail Landing Gear
(1) Wheel and tyre Examine
(2) Tail landing gear Examine
(3) Tail gear steering system Examine
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-51-03 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-51-03 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OVERSPEED - MORE THAN VNE - UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS
1. General
This check must be done if an airspeed of more than the never exceed speed (VNE) is indicated.
damaged.
2. Procedure
A. Wings
(1) Structure Examine
(2) Structure Look for fuel leaks
(3) Wing struts Examine
(4) Wing strut attachments Examine
(5) Underwing tanks Examine
(6) Underwing tank pylons Examine
(7) Pylon to wing attachments Examine
B. Flight Controls
(1) Ailerons Examine
(2) Aileron support structure Examine
(3) Flaps Examine
(4) Flap support structure Examine
(5) Vertical stabilizer Examine
(6) Dorsal fin Examine
(7) Rudder Examine
(8) Rudder support structure Examine
(9) Horizontal stabilizer Examine

attachment brackets (Ref. 53-30-00, Page Block 601)
(Ref. 55-11-11, Page Block 601)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-51-04 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(13) Elevator Examine
(14) Elevator support structure Examine
(15) All flight controls Check rigging
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-51-04 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OVERSPEED - MORE THAN VFE WITH FLAPS EXTENDED - UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS
1. General
This check must be done if an airspeed of more than the maximum permitted with flaps extended (VFE)
is indicated.
damaged.
2. Procedure
A. Flight Controls
(1) Flaps Examine
(2) Flap support structure Examine
(3) Flap actuating mechanism Examine
(4) Flap actuator Examine
(5) On the electrical flap system: If the flaps were deployed or retracted at
VFE +10 knots or more - Send the actuator for
overhaul with details of the incident
(6) The internal overload clutch may have operated under these conditions. The actuator may
not operate correctly after the clutch has operated.
(7) Flap actuator attachments Examine
(8) All flight controls Check rigging
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-51-05 Nov 30/03
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENGINE OVERTORQUE - UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS
1. General
A. This check must be done if the maximum permitted engine torque for the PC-6 installation is
exceeded (Ref 71-00-00, Maintenance Practices).
B. If the overtorque is more than 53.5 psi during normal operation refer to the Engine Maintenance
Manual.
2. Procedure
A. Engine Compartment
(6) Engine shockmounts Examine.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-51-08 Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SUDDEN PROPELLER STOPPAGE - UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS
1. General
A sudden propeller stoppage occurs when the propeller rotation stops due to contact with a hard object.
A propeller strike occurs when either a rotating propeller hits an object, or a stationary propeller is hit by
a moving object.
2. Procedure When Sudden Propeller Stoppage Occurs
A. Remove the power plant access panels (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
B. Remove the propeller (Ref. 61-10-01, Page Block 401) and replace or overhaul.
C. Examine the engine (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00).
D. Examine the engine mounting (visually and using a straight edge) for distortion.
If the frame is distorted, reject the frame.
E. Examine the firewall for distortion.
F. Install a new or overhauled propeller (Ref. 61-10-01, Page Block 401).
G. Install the power plant access panels (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
H. Do the adjustment/test of the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 501).
3. Procedure When A Propeller Strike Occurs
A. Remove the power plant access panels (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
B. Examine the propeller.
WARNING: WHEN A PROPELLER BLADE IS BENT OR TWISTED, MAJOR REPAIR WILL BE

NECESSARY AND AN OVERHAUL OF THE PROPELLER MUST BE DONE.
CAUTION: PROPELLER BLADES MUST BE REPAIRED IMMEDIATELY AFTER DAMAGE IS

FOUND, OR BLADE FAILURE CAN OCCUR.
Minor damage to the propeller blades can be repaired if the damage is less than the permitted
limits (Ref. 61-10-00, Page Block 801).
C. Examine the engine (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00).
D. Install the power plant access panels (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-51-09 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-51-09 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LIGHTNING STRIKE - UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS
1. General
Do this check if the aircraft is hit by lightning or it is suspected that it has been hit by lightning.
2. Procedure
A. Find the point at which the lightning hit the aircraft.
B. Examine the propeller for signs of signs of arc damage.
C. Look for secondary damage such as burns or pits near the area where the lightning hit.
D. Examine the aircraft for signs of discharge damage.
E. Examine the static dischargers and nav/position lights.
F. Examine the airframe and engine bonding leads between the area where the lightning hit and the
discharge point.
G. If the lightning hit the aircraft on a control surface examine the hinge and bearings on the control
surface.
H. Operationally test the flight controls and make sure that the movement is full and smooth.
I. Operationally test all electrical and avionic equipment.
J. Do a swing check on the main and standby compass systems.
K. Examine the engine (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-51-12 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-51-12 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLIGHT THROUGH VOLCANIC ASH OR SMOKE - UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE CHECKS
1. General
Do this check before the next flight if the aircraft was flown (or you suspect it was flown) through
volcanic ash or volcanic smoke. The purpose of the check is to find:
• Abrasion or erosion of surfaces

• Damage to the aircraft and/or engine
• Deterioration of the aircraft systems
• Quantities of collected volcanic ash
2. Procedure
A. Aircraft Exterior
(1) Do a visual examination of the areas that follow for contamination, abrasion and damage:
• The exterior surfaces of the fuselage

• All parts of the aircraft that extend into the airflow
• Stabilizers
• Wings
• Flight control surfaces
• Antennas
• Windshield, side and cabin windows
• Landing gear
• All exterior lights
B. Fuselage Interior
(1) Do a visual examination of all the aircraft compartments which have access panels or
doors.
(2) Do a visual examination of all the aircraft compartments which have vents and/or NACA
inlets.
C. Engine Area
(1) If the emergency shut-off valves for the air-conditioning were closed during the flight, reset
the valves.
(2) Clean the air-inlet screens and filters for the air conditioning system.
(3) If the aircraft is equipped with a cabin ventilation system, remove and clean the filter.
(4) Clean the engine-compressor inlet-screen.
(5) If the aircraft is equipped with a sand filter installation, remove and clean the sand filters
(Ref. 71-12-00, Page Block 701).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
05-51-13 May 14/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Examine the engine oil cooler for contamination. If necessary, clean the heat exchanger
matrix with a soft bristle brush and/or low pressure air.
(7) Examine the propeller for contamination, abrasion and damage.
D. Pitot/Static System
(1) Disconnect the pitot/static air pipes from the:
• Vertical speed indicator

• Altimeter(s)
• Airspeed indicator
(2) Remove the pitot/static drain traps.
(3) Blow clean, dry, low pressure air through the pitot/static air pipes from the pitot head and
static ports.
(4) Install the pitot/static drain traps.
(5) Connect the pitot/static air pipes to the:
• Vertical speed indicator

• Altimeter(s)
• Airspeed indicator
(6) Do a pitot/static system leak check (Ref. 34-11-00, Page Block 501).
E. Aircraft Cleaning
(1) Do a wash of the aircraft (Ref. 12-20-01, Page Block 701). When you do this, do a rinse of
the engine air intake.
F. Detailed Examination/Tests
(1) Do an operational test of the flight controls to make sure that the movement is full, free and
smooth.
(2) If the aircraft has, or is suspected to have, been struck by a coronal discharge (St. Elmo’s
Fire), do the inspection for lightning strike (Ref. 05-51-12, Page Block 1).
(3) Examine the engine (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00, Page Block 601 - Aircraft Flown through
Volcanic Ash or Smoke).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
05-51-13 May 14/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALIGNMENT AND SYMMETRY - INSPECTION / CHECK
1. General
These checks are done by taking selected measurements for comparison with the measurements taken
at the same points on the aircraft when the aircraft was prepared for delivery at the manufacturers.
The checks should only be done under the following conditions:
A. The aircraft must be parked in a hangar for a minimum of one hour before the check is done.
B. The aircraft must not be exposed to direct sunlight.
C. The aircraft must be on jacks.
D. Underwing fuel tanks must be removed.
If the measurements taken are outside the permitted tolerances the aircraft must not be flown until
Pilatus Aircraft Ltd advice is received.
A Recorded Aircraft Build Status Form is delivered with each aircraft and gives the results of the
symmetry check that is done before the aircraft leaves Pilatus.
2. Reference Points and Dimensions (Ref. Fig. 1)
A Reference Point (RP) is identified with contrasting paint (usually colored red).
The forward outer corners of the horizontal stabilizer are also used as reference points for horizontal
stabilizer symmetry check.
Reference Dimensions (A, B and C) are distances between two reference points as shown in Figure 1.
3. Job Set Up Information
A. Tools and Equipment
Part No. Description Remarks
- Inclinometer With built-in spirit level

- Transit theodolite
- Tape measure Steel high precision, mm,
seven meters long
4. Job Set Up
A. Remove the underwing fuel tanks (if installed) (Ref. 28-11-15, Page Block 401).
B. Refuel the aircraft (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301).
C. Raise the aircraft on to jacks (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
D. Level the aircraft (Ref. 08-20-00, Page Block 201).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 601
05-57-01 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Procedures
A. Lateral Leveling Check (Ref. Fig. 1)
(1) Position the theodolite in front of the aircraft.
(2) Suspend the tape measure vertically from the left Reference Point RP6. The zero mark on
the tape must be at the center of the painted rivet head.
(3) Adjust the theodolite tripod to allow readings to be taken on the tape.
(4) Level the theodolite:
(a) Level the theodolite base, and rotate through 360°, checking every 90° to ensure
base is level.
(b) Level theodolite head by turning leveling adjuster to match bubble halves visible
through small leveling eyepiece.
(5) Zoom and focus the theodolite on the tape. Make a note of the reading.
(6) Suspend tape measure from right Reference Point RP6, with zero mark on tape measure
at center of painted rivet head, approximately 1 m of tape exposed, and scale on tape
measure facing theodolite.
(8) Compare readings noted from the right and left reference points.
(9) If the readings are not identical, adjust the main jacks and repeat this procedure.
B. Longitudinal Leveling Check (Ref. Fig. 1)
(1) Put the theodolite in position at the side of the aircraft.
(2) Suspend the tape measure from RP1a with the zero mark on the tape at the center of the
painted rivet head.
(3) Adjust the height of the theodolite tripod to allow a reading to be taken on the tape.
base is level.
(6) Suspend the tape from RP1b with the zero mark on the tape at the center of the painted
rivet head.
(8) Compare readings noted from the forward and aft reference points.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 602
05-57-01 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(9) If the readings are not identical, adjust the tail stand and repeat this procedure.
C. Deformation and Symmetry Check (Ref. Fig. 1, 2 and 3)
(1) Put the theodolite in position so that readings can be taken from RP1b right and from RP2,
3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8, on the left and right wings.
(2) Adjust the theodolite tripod to allow readings to be taken at a level approximately 100 to
200 mm below lowest point of fuselage.
base is level.
(4) Take reading from measuring tape suspended from the right side RP1b.
(5) Enter reading taken from RP1b right in the appropriate space on the In-Service Check
Form.
(6) Suspend a measuring tape from RP2 under right wing and take reading from tape. Record
the reading on the In Service Check Form.
(7) Repeat the procedure for RP3 through to RP8 right and RP2 through to RP8 left.
(8) Measure dimensions A, B and C left and right. Record the dimensions on check form.
WARNING: IF THE PERMITTED DEVIATIONS ARE NOT IN LIMITS, THE AIRCRAFT MUST
NOT BE FLOWN UNTIL ADVICE FROM PILATUS AIRCRAFT LTD HAS BEEN
RECEIVED AND ANY RECTIFICATION WORK NECESSARY IS COMPLETED.
(9) Compare the recorded deviation and permitted deviation. If the readings are not in limits
send copies of the check sheets to Pilatus Aircraft Ltd. with a report of the incident, and
details of damage that was found. Pilatus will advise repair or inspection procedures that
are required to return the aircraft to service.
6. Job Close Up
A. Install the underwing fuel tanks (if removed) (Ref. 28-11-15, Page Block 401).
B. Lower the aircraft and remove the jacks (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
C. Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 603
05-57-01 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1c
C
1b
7
4
5
1a
3
2
3
8
C
4
5
A
B
2/3
7
4/5
H4 AIRCRAFT ONLY
6/7
6327
Reference Points and Dimensions

Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 604
05-57-01 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
IN SERVICE ALIGNMENT AND SYMMETRY CHECK
REASON FOR CHECK: DATE:
Reference Points 1a 1b 1c 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C
Left
Right NA NA NA
In Service Alignment and Symmetry Check Sheet

Figure 2
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 605
05-57-01 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STRUCTURAL DEFORMATION COMPARISON TABLE
A/C MSN: Recorded Aircraft Build Status

Date: In-Service Check Results
Reason for Check: Deviation from Build Status
Permitted Deviation
Remarks
Wing Torsional Deformation Check
2-3 left 5
2-3 right 5
Difference Must not be more than 20
4-5 left 12
4-5 right 12
6-7 left 15
6-7 right 15
Wing Bending Deformation Check
4-2 left 10
6-4 left 15
5-3 left 10
7-5 left 15
4-2 right 10
6-4 right 15
5-3 right 10
7-5 right 15
Horizontal Stabilizer Deformation Check
8 left - 1c 9
8 right - 1c 9
Symmetry Check
A left
A right
Difference (L - R)* 12
B left
B right
C left
C right
Maximum difference between 1a, 1b
2
and 1c
* Subtract right from left and indicate if the result is positive or negative
NOTE: All dimensions are in mm.
Structural Deformation Comparison Table

Figure 3
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 606
05-57-01 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 06 - DIMENSIONS AND AREAS

Chapter
Section
Subject Pages Date
List of Effective 1 Jan 31/22
Pages 2 Jan 31/22
Table of Contents 1 Jun 14/92
06-00-00 1 Jan 31/22

2 Jan 31/22
3 Jan 31/22
4 Jan 31/22
5 Jan 31/22
6 Jan 31/22
7 Jan 31/22
8 Jan 31/22
06-40-00 1 Jun 30/21

2 Jun 30/21
3 Jun 30/21
4 Jun 30/21
06-50-00 1 Jun 14/92

2 Jun 14/92
Page 1
06-LEP Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
06-LEP Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 06 - DIMENSIONS AND AREAS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
DIMENSIONS AND AREAS 06-00-00

General 1 All
Capabilities 1 All
Airworthiness 1 All
Dimensions and General Data 2 All
Structural Design Criteria 2 All
Weight and Balance 3 All
Protective Treatment and Surface Finish 3 All
Fuel and Oil 3 All
Performance 4 All
Power Plant 4 All
Propeller 4 All
ACCESS PANELS 06-40-00

General 1 All
Access Panels 1 All
DRAIN HOLES 06-50-00
General 1 All
Page 1
06-CONT Jun 14/92
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DIMENSIONS AND AREAS
1. General
The Pilatus PC-6/B2-H2 and B2-H4 Turbo-Porter are single engine, high wing monoplanes with
conventional three-point fixed landing gear. The aircraft are powered by a P&WC PT6A-27 free turbine
engine, with a three-bladed, fully feathering and reversing constant speed Hartzell HC-B3TN-3C or -3D
propeller.
Distinctive features include:
• Sturdy, simple construction requiring a minimum of maintenance

• STOL (Short Take-off and Landing) capability
• Excellent climbing ability and low speed handling qualities
• Agreeable flight characteristics with good manoeuvrability
• Large CG range
• Spacious cabin with wide removable doors and generous floor hatch
• Large, versatile payload capability
• Wide-track landing gear, with main gear well forward of the CG.
2. Capabilities
The Turbo-Porter has been designed as a multi-purpose utility airplane with STOL characteristics and
with a maximum take-off weight of 2200 kg (4850 lb) (H2 aircraft) or 2800 kg (6173 lb) (H4 aircraft),
when operating in the passenger or cargo transport role. The airplane can be easily adapted to a wide
variety of applications.
3. Airworthiness
The aircraft complies with the US Civil Air Regulation Part 3 (CAR 3), Normal Category and Special
Conditions for turbine engines issued by the US Federal Aviation Administration (FAA).
Type Approval is certificated by:
• The Swiss Federal Office for Civil Aviation (FOCA) Type Certificate No. F 56-10.
• The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) Type Certificate No. 7A15
• Many other airworthiness authorities around the world.
Special operations of B2-H2 aircraft are approved under CAR 8, up to a maximum take-off weight of
2767 kg (6100 lb). The Aircraft Flight Manual Supplements give details of the permitted operations at
this weight.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
06-00-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The structural design criteria applicable to the respective model is given below.
H2 Aircraft H4 Aircraft
Maximum take off weight 2200 kg (4850 lb) 2800 kg (6173 lb)
Maximum landing weight 2200 kg (4850 lb) 2660 kg (5865 lb)
Maximum zero fuel weight - 2400 kg (5292 lb)
Limit load factor at basic design + 3.72 g/- 1.49 g + 3.58 g/-1.43 g
Air speeds (IAS):
Max. speed (VNE) 151 kts 151 kts
Max. structural cruising speed 118 kts 119 kts
Manoeuvring speed 106 kts 119 kts
Max. speed with flaps down (VFE) 82 kts 95 kts
Stalling speed flaps up 51 kts 58 kts
Stalling speed flaps down (VSO) 45 kts 52 kts
Specific floor loading in cabin 488kg/sq m (100 lb/sq.ft) Maximum
Trap door loading 300 kg (660 lb) Maximum
(150 kg (330 lb) each door)
4. Dimensions and General Data (Ref. Fig. 1 and Fig. 2)
The principal dimensions of the PC-6 are as follows:
Wing span 15,2 m (49.86 ft) 15,87 m (52.07 ft)
Overall length 10,9 m (35.76 ft) 10,9 m (35.76 ft)
Height 3,2 m (10.5 ft) 3,2 m (10.5 ft)
Wing area 28,8 m (310.0 ft) 30,15 m (324.5 ft)
5. Weight and Balance
Basic empty weight (standard configuration) 1220 kg (2690 lb) 1270 kg (2800 lb)
unusable fuel included, without passenger
seats and radios
Load: Pilot 77 kg (170 lb) 77 kg (170 lb)
Fuel: full 509 kg (1122 lb) 509 kg (1122 lb)
Oil 13,2 kg (29 lb) 13,2 kg (29 lb)
Takeoff weight: 2200 kg (4850 lb) 2800 kg (6173 lb)
Maximum zero fuel weight 2400 kg (5292 lb)
Center of Gravity Range, % MAC
- at 1450 kg (3200 lb) or less 11% - 34% 11% - 38%
- at 2200 kg (4850 lb) 25% - 34% -
- at 2800 kg (6100 lb) 32% - 38% -
Straight line variation between points given.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
06-00-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Protective Treatment and Surface Finish
The airplane is constructed using standard jigs, fixtures and tools, enabling a high degree of
interchangeability and easy replacement of all parts.
All airplane components are protected against corrosion using the following methods:
Aluminum alloy - Alodine 1200 treatment and zinc-chromate primer.
Steel - Cadmium/chromium process or baked enamel coating.
Magnesium castings - Black cauterization process and Epoxy resin paint.
7. Fuel and Oil
A. Fuel
Designation:
Type - Aviation kerosene that conforms to the specifications given in the Airplane Flight Manual
(AFM), latest revision.
Usable (later versions) - Total 170 US gallons (644 liters) in integral wing fuel tanks.
Usable (early versions) - Total 128 US gallons (485 liters) in integral wing fuel tanks.
B. Engine Oil
Type:
Synthetic turbine oil that conforms to the specifications given in the Airplane Flight Manual
(AFM), latest revision.
Capacity - Approximately 3.2 US gal. (12.5 liters).
C. Hydraulic Fluid
For brakes and landing gear shock absorbers:
Type - MIL-H-5606/DTD-585 (UNIVIS J43).
8. Performance
All the relevant performance data concerning the PC-6/B2-H2 or H4 Turbo-Porter is given in the
approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) and AFM Supplements.
9. Power Plant
Manufacturer Pratt and Whitney Canada
Model PT6A-27
Type Free turbine, three axial plus one centrifugal stage

compressor. Annular combustion chamber. Single
stage gas generator turbine. Single-stage power
turbine.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
06-00-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Propeller shaft gear ratio 1:0.0663.
Power output 680 SHP, flat rated at sea level to 550 SHP, available
for take-off and maximum continuous.
Gas generator RPM 37,468 (100 %)
Power turbine RPM 33,235 (100 %)
Propeller RPM 2200 2000
Maximum Torque (psi) 42.5 47.3
US Type Certificate No. E4EA
Weight dry Approximately 136 kg (300 lb).
10. Propeller
Manufacturer Hartzell
Type Three blade, constant speed, reversing and
feathering.
Model HC-B3TN-3C or -3DHC-B3TN-3D
Blades T-10173C or CHT-10178CR or CRK,
T-10178C or CHT-10178C or CH
T-10178CK or CHK (mod to drawing 190.02.01.124)
T-10178CN or CNK
T-10178 CNR or CNRK
Diameter
Maximum 101 in. 101 in.
Minimum 99 in. 99 in.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 4
06-00-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Aircraft Dimensions (B2-H2)

Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 5
06-00-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Aircraft Dimensions (B2-H4)

Figure 2
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 6
06-00-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1550
DATUM
1235
FUSELAGE STATION POINTS 919

602
286
0
-343
FRAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 12A
STATION 2000 2650 3400 4200 5100 5700 6342 6984 7626 8268 8910 9325 9894
3000
(WING LEADING EDGE)
DORSAL FIN AND

RUDDER STATION POINTS
1900
1587
1260 1244
1048
WING RIB STATION POINTS 838
563
289
0
6930
6600 922 292
6270 2065 1313 591 0
5940
5610
128 US GALLON TANK
5219
4836
1801
4512
1428
4188 1342.5
1086
3864 829.5
170 US GALLON TANK
3510 573
316.5
3150
2820
2490 STABILIZER AND
2160 ELEVATOR STATION POINTS
1801 2400 2320

1548 2084 2007
1324 1678
1769
1086 1664
829.5 1454 1252
573 1139
665 FROM CENTERLINE 316.5 839
0 824
509 426
225
FUSELAGE CENTER LINE 194
6308
ALL DIMENSIONS IN MM
Station Diagram
Figure 3
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 7
06-00-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 8
06-00-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ACCESS PANELS
1. General
This Page Block identifies the access panels installed on the PC-6 aircraft.
Each access panel is given a code of two letters and a number. The letters show where the access
panels are installed on the aircraft.
The first letter shows the area on the aircraft where the access panel is installed. The second letter
shows side of the aircraft (top, bottom, left or right).
The letters used are:
First Letter Area Second Letter Side

E Empennage B Bottom
F Fuselage L Left
L Left wing R Right
P Powerplant T Top
R Right wing
2. Access Panels (Ref. Fig. 1)
The location of the access panels is shown in Figure 1.
EFFECTIVITY: All
06-40-00
Page 1
Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LB 16
LT 2
LT 1
PT 1
FT 2
LB 16
LB 15
FT 3
LB 14
ET 2 1 FT 1
LB 13 RT 1
ET 1
LB 12
RT 2
LB 11
LB 10
LB 9 LB 7
LB 6
LB 4 LB 8
EB 1
LB 5
LB 2
LB 3 EB 2
PB 2 FB 1 FL 1 LB 1
FB 2 1
PB 3 FB 8
RT 3
FB 9 RB 14
FB 3 FB 7
PB 1 FB 4
FR 1 FB 6
FB 5
RB 2 RB 1
RB 4
RB 6 RB 3
RB 5
RB 8
RB 7
RB 9
RB 10
RB 12 RB 11
NOTE: H2 AIRCRAFT DO NOT HAVE EXTENDED WING TIPS.
OTHER ACCESS PANELS CAN DEPEND ON THE
RB 13
MODIFICATION STANDARD OF THE AIRCRAFT.
MSN 996 AND SUBSEQUENT AND AIRCRAFT

1
POST SB 55-003 AND POST SB 55-005 (PART 3) ONLY
RB 14
6752
Access Panels
Figure 1 (Sheet 1 of 2)
EFFECTIVITY: All
06-40-00
Page 2
Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
EL 5
EL 4
EL 3
PT 1 PL 1 FT 1 LB 16 EL 2
EL 1
PB 1
FL 2
RB 14 FT 1 PR 1 PT 1
ER 6
FR 2 PB 1
6751
Access Panels
EFFECTIVITY: All
06-40-00
Page 3
Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
06-40-00
Page 4
Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIRFRAME DRAIN HOLES
1. General (Ref. Fig 1)
Drain holes are included to prevent the build up of fluids within the airframe structure.
These fluids are water, which can cause corrosion of the structure, and fuel and oil which can give a
danger of fire or explosion.
The drain holes must be regularly checked for blockage.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
06-50-00 Jun 14/92
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DRAIN HOLE
6349
Drain Holes
Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
06-50-00 Jun 14/92
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 07 - LIFTING AND SHORING

Chapter
Section
Subject Pages Date
List of Effective 1 Dec 31/11
Pages 2 Dec 31/11
07-00-00 1 Jun 14/91
07-10-00 201 Dec 31/11

202 Dec 31/11
203 Dec 31/11
204 Dec 31/11
205 Dec 31/11
206 Dec 31/11
207 Dec 31/11
208 Dec 31/11
07-20-00 201 Jun 14/91
Page 1
07-LEP Dec 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
07-LEP Dec 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 07 - LIFTING AND SHORING

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
LIFTING AND SHORING 07-00-00

Description and Operation
General 1 All
Lifting 1 All
Shoring 1 All
JACKING 07-10-00
Maintenance Practices 201 All
SHORING 07-20-00
Page 1
07-CONT Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LIFTING AND SHORING - DESCRIPTION
1. General
This topic contains information relating to lifting and lowering the aircraft with hydraulic jacks, lifting the
aircraft with a sling, and shoring the aircraft for long term maintenance or storage.
2. Lifting
A. Lifting the aircraft on jacks
The aircraft has three jack points. Each jack point has a jack pad installed; two are located at
each fuselage wing strut end fitting and the other is located at the rear tie down point.
Hydraulic jacks are used to lift the aircraft at the main jack pads. An adjustable tail stand is used
to support the rear fuselage at the tail jack pad. When lifting the aircraft tail, two people are
required, one to lift and lower the aircraft tail, and the other to put the tail stand in position.
B. Lifting the aircraft with a sling
Lifting the aircraft with a sling is normally done to move the aircraft for crash recovery or, for quick
removal to clear a runway.
An aircraft lifting sling, specially designed for attachment to the two lifting points, is used to lift the
aircraft.
3. Shoring
During long term maintenance, change, repair or storage of the aircraft should be shored to give
additional support for a jacked aircraft.
Shoring equipment should consist of locally manufactured trestles made of steel, aluminium or heavy
timber. Profile boards must be put on top of these trestles. Surfaces which touch the aircraft structure
should be covered with heavy duty felt to prevent damage to the aircraft skin and paint finish.
The trestles must be shaped to make sure that the lifting equipment can be removed, installed and
operated without problems.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
07-00-00 Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
JACKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
This section gives the following lifting procedures:
• Lifting and lowering the aircraft with jacks

• Lifting and lowering the aircraft on main jacks and a tail stand
• Lifting and lowering a main wheel
• Lifting the aircraft with a sling
2. Lifting and Lowering the Aircraft with Jacks
A. General (Ref. Fig. 201)
Lifting the aircraft should be done on firm and level ground. The lifting site should be protected
from wind or, if possible, the aircraft should be lifted inside a hanger.
Jack pads are installed on the fuselage to lift the complete aircraft. Three jack pads are found at
the following locations:
• One near each fuselage wing strut end fitting

• One at the aft end of the fuselage
B. Tools and Equipment
6690.0036.01 Wheel Chocks Or equivalent

or
990.00.00.909 Wheel Chocks Or equivalent
110.85.06.006 Main Jack Or equivalent
or
or
or
968.85.81.215 Adapter, Main Jack For use with jacks 968.85.81.213 / 223
or
968.85.81.222 Adapter Kit For use with jacks 968.85.81.213 / 223
- Tail Jack Minimum lifting capacity: 200 kg (450 lb)
Minimum height: 45 cm (18 in.)
Minimum lifting height: 35 cm (14 in.)
- Ballast 70 kg (150 lb)
- Ballast suspension bar
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
07-10-00 Dec 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Lifting the aircraft (Ref. Fig. 201)
WARNING: DO NOT LIFT THE REAR OF THE AIRCRAFT UNTIL BALLAST WEIGHTS HAVE BEEN
INSTALLED.
(1) Put the aircraft on to level and firm ground.
(2) Make sure that there are no obstructions around or above the aircraft.
(3) Put the wheel chocks in position.
(4) Put the main jacks below the forward fuselage jack pads.
(5) Put the tail jack below the tail jack pad.
(6) Install the ballast suspension bar through the rear fuselage and install ballast.
(7) Operate the jacks slowly and evenly until the main wheels and tail wheel are clear of the
ground.
D. Lowering the aircraft (Ref. Fig. 201)
(1) Make sure there are no obstructions around or below the aircraft.
(2) Operate the jacks to lower the aircraft until the main wheels and tail wheel touch the
ground.
(4) Remove the jacks from the aircraft.
(5) Remove the tail ballast and the ballast suspension bar.
(6) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
3. Lifting and Lowering the Aircraft on Main Jacks and a Tail Stand
Lifting the aircraft should be done on firm and level ground. The lifting site should be protected
from wind or, if possible, the aircraft should be lifted inside a hanger.
Jack pads are installed on the fuselage to lift the complete aircraft. Three jack pads are found at
the following locations:
• One near each fuselage wing strut end fitting

• One at the aft end of the fuselage
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
07-10-00 Dec 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6690.0036.01 Wheel Chocks Or equivalent

or
990.00.00.909 Wheel Chocks Or equivalent
or
or
968.85.81.213 Main Jack Or equivalent.
or
110.85.06.007 Tail Stand Or equivalent
or
968.85.81.214 Tail Jack Or equivalent
968.85.81.215 Adapter, Main Jack For use with jacks 968.85.81.213 / 223
or
968.85.81.222 Adapter Kit For use with jacks 968.85.81.213 / 214 / 223
- Ballast 70 kg (150 lb)
- Ballast suspension bar
C. Lifting the aircraft (Ref. Fig. 201)
(1) Lift the aircraft with a sling (Ref. Para. 5).
(2) Put the main jacks below the forward fuselage jack pads.
(3) Put the tail stand below the tail jack pad.
(4) Lower the aircraft on to the jacks and tail stand.
(5) Adjust the jacks and tail stand as necessary until the aircraft is level.
(6) Make sure that the tail stand lock device locks around the tail jack pad and that the stand
legs are firmly in contact with the ground.
(7) Install the ballast suspension bar through the rear fuselage and install the ballast.
(8) Remove the sling and the ropes.
D. Lowering the aircraft
(1) Prepare to lift the aircraft with a sling (Ref. Para. 5).
(2) Remove the tail ballast and the ballast suspension bar.
(3) Lift the aircraft off the jacks and tail stand with the sling (Ref. Para. 5).
(4) Remove the jacks and the tail stand from the aircraft.
(5) Make sure there are no obstructions around or below the aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 203
07-10-00 Dec 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Lower the aircraft to the ground.
(8) Remove the sling and the ropes.
(9) If necessary, remove the control-surface gust-locks.
4. Lifting and Lowering a Main Wheel
The aircraft main wheels can be lifted at the ski attachment brackets with a suitable round metal
bar installed through the holes in the bracket and a hydraulic bottle jack used to lift the aircraft.
The lifted wheel should be lifted no more than is necessary to obtain ground clearance.
6690.0036.01 Wheel chocks

- Bottle jack
- Metal bar (round)
C. Lifting a Main Wheel (Ref. Fig. 201)
WARNING: BEFORE LIFTING, THE WHEEL CHOCKS MUST BE INSTALLED TO STOP

ACCIDENTAL MOVEMENT OF THE AIRCRAFT.
(3) Apply the park brake.
(5) Install the round metal bar through the holes in the ski attachment bracket.
(6) Put the jack below the jack point to be lifted.
(7) Operate the jack until the wheel is clear of the ground.
D. Lowering a Main Wheel
(1) Make sure that there are no obstructions around or below the wheel to be lowered.
(2) Operate the jack to lower the aircraft until the main wheel touches the ground.
(3) Remove the round metal bar from the ski attachment bracket and the jack from the aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 204
07-10-00 Dec 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Lifting the Aircraft with a Sling
You can lift the complete aircraft with a lifting sling and a hoist or a mobile crane. Two tapped
holes are located on the top of the fuselage adjacent to the wing attachment fittings. A sling with
lifting lugs is then installed to lift the aircraft.
CAUTION: THE TOTAL WEIGHT OF THE AIRCRAFT MUST NOT BE MORE THAN THE
MAXIMUM LOAD CAPACITY OF THE LIFTING SLING.
You can use the sling P/N 6690.0018.00 to lift an aircraft with a total weight not more than 1500
kg (3300 lb).
If the total weight of the aircraft is more than 1500 kg (3300 lb), you can use the sling P/N
110.85.06.118 which has a maximum load capacity of 1850 kg (4078 lb).
When you lift the aircraft it must remain in a level attitude. Ropes attached to the wing attachment
points and the fuselage tail permit the aircraft to be maneuvered in a stable attitude.
Maximum capacity 1500 kg

6690.0018.00 Sling
(3300 lb)
Maximum capacity 1850 kg
110.85.06.118 Sling
(4078 lb)
- Rope
Minimum capacity 2250 kg
- Lifting equipment
(5000 lb)
C. Procedure (Ref. Fig. 202)
(3) Defuel the aircraft (Ref. 12-11-28, Page block 301).
(4) If necessary, install the control-surface gust-locks (Ref. 10-10-00, Page block 201).
(5) Make sure that all the doors are closed and that no equipment will become loose when
lifting the aircraft.
(6) Install the sling to the attachment points at the top of the fuselage. Make sure that the
attachment screws are fully screwed down.
(7) Attach ropes to the wing and to the tail tie down attachment points.
(8) With personnel positioned at each rope and a supervisor co-ordinating the lifting
operation, slowly lift the aircraft off the ground. Make sure the aircraft is kept in a level
attitude when the aircraft is lifted.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 205
07-10-00 Dec 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B
B
C C A HOLE THROUGH FUSELAGE FOR
BALLAST SUSPENSION BAR
REAR END
OF FUSELAGE
TAIL JACK PAD
C
B
WING STRUT
END FITTING
FORWARD FUSELAGE
JACK PAD
SKI ATTACHMENT
BRACKET
6291
Aircraft Jack Points

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 206
07-10-00 Dec 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LIFTING SLING
6292
Aircraft Lifting with a Sling

Figure 202
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 207
07-10-00 Dec 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 208
07-10-00 Dec 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SHORING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
Shoring equipment is installed to make sure that the aircraft is well supported for long term storage,
major modification and repair.
Shoring equipment is used with jacking equipment. It should be shaped so that the jacking equipment
can be temporary removed, if required.
2. Shoring Equipment
Shoring equipment is not classified as special equipment and is therefore manufactured locally as
required. The materials from which the shoring equipment is manufactured depend upon what is
available locally. In general, steel, aluminium alloy or timber may be used providing that the strength
of the finished equipment is sufficient to take the weight of the aircraft, with a safety factor of five or
more.
3. Installation of Shoring Equipment
A. Procedure
(1) Put the aircraft in position.
(2) Jack the aircraft (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201) to a height which will permit the shoring
equipment to be positioned.
(3) Slowly open the jack hydraulic valves and slowly lower the aircraft on to the trestles. At
the same time lower the tail on to the rear trestle. Close the jack hydraulic valves.
(4) The aircraft weight should now rest completely on the jacks and trestles.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
07-20-00 Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 08 - LEVELING AND WEIGHING

Chapter Chapter
Section Section
List of Effective 1 Jul 30/15
Pages 2 Jul 30/15
08-10-00 201 Jul 30/15

202 Jul 30/15
203 Jul 30/15
204 Jul 30/15
08-20-00 201 Jun 14/91
Page 1
08-LEP Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
08-LEP Jul 30/15
'ePILATUS!!EF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 08 LEVELING AND WEIGHING

-
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
LEVELING AND WEIGHING 08-00-00
WEIGHING AND BALANCING 08-10-00

LEVELING 08-20-00
Page 1
08-CONT Jun 1 4/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WEIGHING AND BALANCING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
The following weighing procedure is used to get the basic empty weight of the aircraft.
The aircraft can be weighed in two ways:
• Weighing equipment installed under the wheels

• Weighing equipment installed on the aircraft sling
Mechanical, hydrostatic or electronic weighing equipment can be used to weigh the aircraft. The
manufacturers instructions for use of the equipment must be followed.
Part No. Designation Remarks
6690.0018.00 Aircraft lifting sling

- Weighing equipment
3. Job Set Up
A. Clean the exterior of the aircraft.
B. Defuel the aircraft (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301).
C. Fill the engine oil tank (Ref. 12-10-03, Page Block 301).
D. Make sure that all the equipment specified in the equipment list is installed (Ref. Airplane Flight
Manual).
E. Move the aircraft to an enclosed building.
4. Procedure
A. Weigh the Aircraft using Weighing Equipment under the Wheels
NOTE: If applicable, you must obey the instructions in your local “National Weighing
Requirements” when you do the following weighing procedure.
(1) Install the weighing equipment below the left and right main wheels:
(a) Put the two pieces of weighing-equipment in position, directly in front of each of the
left and right main wheels.
(b) Make sure that the brakes are in the off position.
(c) Carefully move the aircraft until the left and right main wheels are in position on the
two pieces of weighing equipment.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
08-10-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Make sure that the aircraft cannot move off the weighing equipment. Do not apply
the brakes to do this.
(2) Install the third piece of weighing equipment for the tail wheel:
(a) Put the third piece of weighing equipment on the tool that you will use to lift the tail
of the aircraft.
NOTE: You need a tool (e.g fork lift truck, jack) to lift and hold the aircraft in the
horizontal position. The aircraft must be lifted under the tail wheel and not
at the tail jacking point.
(b) Put the lifting tool with the related weighing equipment in position directly below the
tail wheel, and lift the aircraft. Do this until the aircraft is level (Ref. 08-20-00, Page
Block 201).
(3) Make sure that all the cabin doors are closed.
(4) Use a copy of the table to record and calculate the results (Ref. Para. 4.C.(2), Table 1,
Weighing on Wheels).
NOTE: Make sure that you subtract the weight of the items you installed in Para.
4.A.(1)(d) from the weight recorded on the main wheels.
(5) Lower the tail of the aircraft and remove the related lifting tool and tail-wheel weighing-
equipment.
(6) Remove the items that you installed in Para. 4.A. (1)(d) to make sure that the aircraft did
not move during the weighing procedure.
(7) Move the aircraft until you can remove the main-wheel weighing-equipment.
(8) Remove the main-wheel weighing-equipment.
B. Using Weighing Equipment on the Aircraft Sling
(1) Install the aircraft lifting sling.
(2) Install the weighing equipment on the lifting equipment.
(3) Make sure all the cabin doors are closed.
(4) Lift the aircraft until the wheels are clear of the ground.
(5) Install the required weight(s) on the tow bar attachment on the tail landing gear. Do this
until the aircraft is level (Ref. 08-20-00, Page Block 201).
(6) Use a copy of the table to record and calculate the results (Ref. Para. 4.C.(2), Table 2,
Using a Sling).
(7) Remove the weight(s) from the tow bar attachment on the tail landing gear.
(8) Lower the aircraft on to the ground.
(9) Remove the lifting sling and weighing equipment.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
08-10-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Centre of Gravity and Percentage Mean Aerodynamic Chord (% MAC) Calculation
(1) Centre of Gravity
The Centre of Gravity (C of G) is calculated from a datum which is in front of the aircraft
which is:
• 3,0 meters from the wing leading edge

• 10,42 m from the tail wheel (Pre SB 169)
• 10,465 m from the tail wheel (Post SB 169)
• 2,65 m from the mainwheels
• 3,4 m from the aircraft sling point.
The moment is the weight measured multiplied by the arm (the distance from the datum).
The C of G position is the total of the moments divided by the total weight of the aircraft.
(a) For C of G when aircraft weighed with weighing equipment under the wheels:
C of G position = total weight on mainwheels x 2,65 + weight on tail wheel x 10,42 (10.465)
total weight of aircraft
(b) For C of G when aircraft weighed with weighing equipment on aircraft sling:
C of G position = total weight on aircraft sling x 3,4 + weight at tail wheel x 10,42 (10.465)
total weight of aircraft
NOTE: For C of G when aircraft weighed with weighing equipment on aircraft

sling, the weight at tail wheel can be a downward (+) or an upward (-)
value.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 203
08-10-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) C of G as % MAC
The front of the MAC is 3,0 meters from the datum and is 1.90 meters long.
Calculate the C of G as a percentage of MAC with the following formula:
% MAC = C of G position - Distance from datum to forward edge of MAC x 100

Length of MAC
Weighing on Wheels
Weight Arm Moment
Tail wheel (Pre SB 169) x 10,42 =
Tail wheel (Post SB 169) x 10.465 =
Main Left x 2,65 =
Main Right x 2,65 =
Total
C of G position from datum =

(total moment/total weight)
As % MAC =
(C of G - 3,0 / 1,9) x 100
Table 1
Using a Sling
Weight Arm Moment
Tail wheel (Pre SB 169) x 10,42 =
Tail wheel (Post SB 169) x 10.465 =
Weight on Sling x 3,4 =
Total
C of G position from datum =

(total moment/total weight)
As % MAC =
(C of G - 3,0 / 1,9) x 100
Table 2
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 204
08-10-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LEVELING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
- Spirit Level
B. Referenced Procedures
Ch-Se-Su Description
07-10-00 Jacking - Maintenance Practices
2. Leveling Procedure
A. Raise aircraft on jacks (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
B. Put the spirit level in position laterally across the seat rails on the cabin floor.
C. Adjust the jacks until the bubble is in the centre of the spirit level.
D. Turn the spirit level through 180 degrees and make sure that the bubble is in the centre.
E. Put the spirit level in position longitudinally across the seat rails on the cabin floor.
F. Adjust the tail jack until the bubble is in the centre of the spirit level.
G. Turn the spirit level through 180 degrees and make sure that the bubble is in the centre.
H. Put the spirit level in position laterally across the seat rails on the cabin floor.
I. Make sure that the bubble is in the centre of the spirit level.
J. Remove the spirit level.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
08-20-00 Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 09 - TOWING AND TAXIING

Chapter Chapter
Section Section
Pages
09-10-00 201 Jun 14/91

202 Jun 14/91
09-20-00 201 Jun 14/91
F = foldout page
Page 1
09-LEP Jun14/91
'ePILATUS!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 09 TOWING AND TAXIING

-
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
TOWING AND TAXIING 09-00-00
TOWING 09-10-00
TAXIING 09-20-00
Page 1
09-CONT Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TOWING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General (Ref. Fig. 201)
A. Forward Towing
Forward towing is done with a rope or cable bridle attached to the main gear ski attachment
brackets. This method of towing is used when towing the aircraft forward over rough or soft
ground.
B. Rearward Towing
Rearward towing is done with a tow bar which engages on to the rear part of the tail wheel fork.
This is the recommended method of towing the aircraft over prepared, hard, even ground. The
tow bar is installed with a shock absorber and prevents damage to the aircraft because of shock
loads.
The minimum radius that the airplane will turn when rearward towing is 9.5 meters (31 ft). This is
done with one brake locked and the tow bar pulled 90° to the aircraft longitudinal axis.
C. Man Handling
A steering arm can be used to manoeuvre the aircraft on the parking apron or in the hangar. The
steering arm engages in to the tail wheel fork.
2. Towing
110.88.06.037 Steering arm

110.88.06.001 Tow bar
- Tow rope
B. Precautions
CAUTION: WHEN MOVING OR TOWING THE AIRPLANE, THE TAIL WHEEL MUST BE
UNLOCKED.
CAUTION: WHEN THE TAIL WHEEL TOW BAR, OR STEERING ARM IS INSTALLED, THE
RUDDER MUST BE UNLOCKED. CARE MUST BE TAKEN NOT TO DAMAGE THE
ELEVATOR WHEN THE TOW BAR IS TURNED MORE THAN 60°.
(1) When towing the aircraft:
• An authorised person must be in the cockpit to apply the brakes in an emergency

• Wing tips and tail must be closely watched to avoid collision with other aircraft and
buildings
• Vehicle movement must be done smoothly to avoid shock loads on the aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
09-10-00 Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STEERING ARM
TOW BAR
6293
Towing Equipment
Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
09-10-00 Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAXIING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Taxiing
A. Precautions
CAUTION: CONTINUOUS USE OF THE BRAKES TO CONTROL TAXIING SPEED MUST BE

AVOIDED TO PREVENT THE BRAKE UNITS FROM OVERHEATING.
(1) When taxiing the aircraft:
• Observe the engine operation safety precautions, in accordance with the Airplane
Flight Manual.
• Taxiing speeds should be kept to a safe minimum. After initial brakes off, the PCL
should be set to IDLE power. If the taxiing speed increases excessively, apply the
brakes to bring the aircraft speed down to near zero then release the brakes.
Repeat the procedure each time the aircraft speed becomes excessive.
• A marshaller and wing tip look-outs should be used to prevent collisions.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
09-20-00 Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 10 - PARKING AND MOORING

Chapter
Section
Subject Pages Date
Pages 2 Jul 30/15
Table of Contents 1 May 31/14

2 May 31/14
10-00-00 1 Jun 14/91
10-10-00 201 Jul 31/12

202 Jul 31/12
203 Jul 31/12
204 Jul 31/12
10-11-00 201 Jul 30/15

202 Jul 30/15
203 Jul 30/15
204 Jul 30/15
10-12-00 201 May 31/14

202 May 31/14
203 May 31/14
204 May 31/14
10-20-00 201 Dec 31/12

202 Dec 31/12
10-30-00 201 Jul 30/15

202 Jul 30/15
Page 1
10-LEP Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
10-LEP Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 10 - PARKING AND MOORING

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
PARKING AND MOORING 10-00-00

Description 1 All
PARKING 10-10-00
STORAGE 10-11-00
COLD WEATHER OPERATION 10-12-00
Maintenance Practices 201 Aircraft with
Kuerzi Cold
Weather Kit
MOORING 10-20-00
RETURN TO SERVICE 10-30-00

Page 1
10-TOC May 31/14
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
10-TOC May 31/14
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PARKING AND MOORING - DESCRIPTION
1. Description
A. Parking
In normal weather conditions the aircraft must be parked on firm level ground. The parking brake
should be applied and wheel chocks put in position. Blanks and covers should be fitted.
B. Mooring
The aircraft should be moored if it is to be parked in the open for long periods and weather
conditions are not good. In bad weather conditions, the aircraft should be parked in a hangar as
structural damage can occur even when moored correctly.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
10-00-00 Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PARKING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
It is recommended that this procedure is followed when the aircraft is parked. This can prevent damage
to the aircraft and engine caused by strong winds or debris.
If strong winds are forecast, the aircraft must be either moored (Ref. 10-20-00, Page Block 201) or
moved to a hangar.
2. Tools and Equipment

110.88.06.054 Cover Engine air intake
110.88.06.101 Cover (Qty 2) Engine exhaust stubs
- Cover Pitot tube
110.88.06.064 Engine cover
110.88.06.285 Propeller restraint Blade model T-10173
110.88.06.286 Propeller restraint Blade model T-10178
6367.0016.52 Rudder gust lock
6367.0029.52 Elevator gust lock
110.88.06.256 Aileron gust lock Right wing
110.88.06.257 Aileron gust lock Left wing
110.88.06.310 Aileron gust lock (H2 only) Right wing (SB137)
110.88.06.311 Aileron gust lock (H2 only) Left wing (SB137)
110.88.06.351 Aileron gust lock (H4 only)
110.88.06.352 Aileron gust lock (H4 only)
110.88.06.314 Warning flag
3. Parking (Ref. Fig. 201 and 202)
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY THE PARK BRAKE IN VERY COLD TEMPERATURES OR IF THE
BRAKES ARE HOT. IF THE PARK BRAKE IS APPLIED IN THESE CONDITIONS, IT
MAY NOT WORK CORRECTLY.
CAUTION: HOT SUNLIGHT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE CANOPY AND THE AIRCRAFT
SURFACE FINISH. PROTECT THE AIRCRAFT FROM THE EFFECTS OF HOT
SUNLIGHT. IF THE AIRCRAFT IS PARKED IN THE OPEN IN HOT AND SUNNY
CONDITIONS, PARK THE AIRCRAFT UNDER AN APPLICABLE AIRCRAFT SHELTER.
A. Put the aircraft on level ground with the nose in to the wind or, in to the forecast wind.
B. If strong winds are forecast or aircraft not is not scheduled to fly, disengage the internal control
lock and install these control surface locks:
• Aileron gust locks

• Elevator gust lock
• Rudder gustlock.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
10-10-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Put the park brake on.
D. Put the wheel chocks in position.
E. Install the propeller restraint.
F. Electrically ground the aircraft.
G. Install the covers. When you do this:
(1) Examine the covers and make sure you can install them correctly.
(2) Replace a cover if it is damaged, torn, or you cannot install it correctly.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
10-10-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C WARNING FLAG
ELEVATOR GUST LOCK
RUDDER GUST LOCK
C
6288
Parking - Maintenance Practices

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 203
10-10-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B
A
C H4 ONLY
AILERON GUST LOCKS
AILERON GUST LOCKS

AIRCRAFT WITHOUT SB 137
A
H2 ONLY
AIRCRAFT WITH SB 137
B
6304
Parking - Maintenance Practices

Figure 202
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 204
10-10-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STORAGE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
- Dessicant 5 kg (10 lb)

- Humidity indicators
- Tyre covers
2. Procedure
A. Airframe
(1) Up to 90 days
(a) Clean the external surfaces of the aircraft (Ref. 12-20-01, Page Block 701).
(b) Inspect the external surface of the aircraft. Remove corrosion and repair surface
finish as necessary.
(c) Close the fuel system valve.
(d) Refuel the aircraft (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301).
CAUTION: HOT SUNLIGHT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE CANOPY AND THE
AIRCRAFT SURFACE FINISH. PROTECT THE AIRCRAFT FROM THE
EFFECTS OF HOT SUNLIGHT. IF THE AIRCRAFT IS PARKED IN THE
OPEN IN HOT AND SUNNY CONDITIONS, PARK THE AIRCRAFT UNDER
AN APPLICABLE AIRCRAFT SHELTER.
(e) If the aircraft is not in a hangar, moor the aircraft (Ref. 10-20-00, Page Block 201).
(f) Remove the battery from the aircraft. Refer to the manufacturers recommendations
for storage of the battery.
(g) Install the tyre covers.
(h) Each week:
(i) Move the aircraft to turn the wheels.
(ii) Check the tyre pressures (Ref. 12-14-32, Page Block 301).
(iii) Drain the water from the fuel system.
(iv) If the aircraft is moored, check that the mooring lines are correctly connected.
(v) Check that the covers are correctly installed.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
10-11-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) More than 90 days
(a) Clean the external surfaces of the aircraft (Ref. 12-20-01, Page Block 701).
(b) Inspect the external surface of the aircraft. Remove corrosion and repair surface
finish as necessary.
(c) Drain the fuel (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301).
(d) Dry the tanks using warm air and keep the tanks open for ventilation. Do not let
unwanted material enter the fuel tanks.
(e) Move the aircraft in to a hangar.
(f) Put the aircraft on jacks (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
(g) Remove the battery from the aircraft. Refer to the manufacturers recommendations
for storage of the battery.
(h) Install tyre covers.
(i) Each week:
(i) Check the tyre pressures (Ref. 12-14-32, Page Block 301).
B. Engine
(1) Up to 7 days
(a) Ground run the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(b) Fill the oil system (Ref. 12-10-03, Page Block 301).
(c) Install the engine covers.
(2) Up to 28 days
(b) Put 2,5 kg (5 lb) of dessicant in to each engine exhaust stub. Make sure that the
dessicant does not touch the engine parts.
(d) Check the humidity indicators each week. Replace the dessicant and indicators if
necessary.
(3) Up to 90 days
(b) Put 2,5 kg (5 lb) of dessicant in to each engine exhaust stub. Make sure that the
dessicant does not touch engine parts.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
10-11-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Preserve the fuel system (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00).
(e) Inspect the humidity indicators each week. Replace the dessicant and indicators if
necessary.
(4) More than 90 days
(b) Put 2,5 kg (5 lb) of dessicant on to racks and place in to each engine exhaust stub.
Make sure that the dessicant does not touch engine parts.
(d) Preserve the fuel system (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00).
(e) Drain the oil system (Ref. 12-10-03, Page Block 301).
(f) Apply preservative oil to the accessory drive ends (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-02-40).
(g) Inspect the humidity indicators each week. Replace the dessicant and indicators if
necessary.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 203
10-11-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 204
10-11-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COLD WEATHER OPERATION - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
This topic gives the procedures for parking the aircraft in cold weather, and for pre-heating the aircraft
before flight after parking.
2. Cold Weather Parking
A. General
If possible, park the aircraft inside a temperature controlled hangar during cold weather. If the
aircraft must be parked outside the following procedures are recommended:
B. Short Term Parking (2 Days or Less)
(1) Do the parking procedure given in 10-10-00, Page Block 201.
(2) Make sure the wheel chocks are in position and release the parking brake.
(3) Make sure the main wheel brakes, the tailwheel steering mechanism and all mudguards
are free of mud or slush which could freeze.
(4) Refuel the aircraft to maximum to prevent condensation in the fuel tanks.
C. Long Term Parking (Between 2 and 7 Days)
NOTE: If the aircraft is to be stored for longer periods, refer to 10-11-00, Page Block 201 for
storage instructions.
(1) Make sure the engine oil level is correct. If necessary replenish the oil system (Ref 12-10-
03, Page Block 301).
(2) If the aircraft must be parked on snow or ice, park the aircraft on wooden planks, or a layer
of sand, to prevent the tires freezing to the ground.
(3) Do the Short Term Parking procedure.
NOTE: If extremely cold conditions are expected you can paint a layer of inhibited glycol
antifreeze solution on surfaces under covers. This will help prevent the covers
freezing to the aircraft.
(4) Remove the aircraft battery (Ref. 24-32-11, Page Block 401).
(5) Store the battery in accordance with the battery manufacturer’s instructions.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with Kuerzi Cold Weather Kit
Page 201
10-12-00 May 31/14
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Pre-heating the Aircraft
A. General
The 110V AC or 230V AC cold weather pre-heater system is installed as a customer option. It
comprises heating elements installed on the battery and around parts of the engine. The system
also has a power socket installed below the RH CB panel to connect an auxiliary ceramic
element heater (Max. 1000W) for the aircraft interior. The power socket has a ‘power on’
indicator light.
The system is energized by an external power supply connected to a receptacle adjacent to the
EPS receptacle. The system gives safe engine starting and equipment temperatures on aircraft
that operate in cold weather conditions.
The system is recommended for use when the ambient temperature is 4 deg C (40 deg F) or
below.
B. Operating Procedures
NOTE: It is recommended to start pre-heating the aircraft a minimum of 6 hours before flight.
(1) If the aircraft is not parked in a temperature controlled hangar, or is parked outside, and
the ambient temperature is 4 deg C (40 deg F) or below:
(a) If the aircraft battery was removed, install it (Ref. 24-32-11, Page Block 401).
(b) Open the access panel for the external ground power supply receptacle.
CAUTION: THE SYSTEM VOLTAGE IS SHOWN ON A PLACARD AT THE EXTERNAL

RECEPTACLE. MAKE SURE THE GROUND POWER SUPPLY IS THE
CORRECT VOLTAGE FOR THE INSTALLED SYSTEM.
(c) Use the adapter cable to connect a 110V AC or 230V AC (as necessary) ground
power supply to the external receptacle.
(d) At the internal power supply socket below the RH CB panel, make sure the ‘power
on’ indicator light is on.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE AUXILIARY HEATER IS THE CORRECT VOLTAGE FOR
THE INSTALLED SYSTEM AND HAS A POWER CONSUMPTION NOT
MORE THAN 1000W.
(e) Put the auxiliary heater in the center of the passenger compartment and connect to
the internal power supply socket.
(f) Make sure the hot air flow from the auxiliary heater cannot damage furnishings or
equipment in the cabin.
(g) Let the aircraft pre-heat for a minimum of 6 hours.
NOTE: It is recommended not to leave the aircraft unattended during pre-heating.
Page 202
10-12-00 May 31/14
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(h) Remove all frost, ice and snow from the:
• Airfoil surfaces
• Control surfaces
• Pitot tubes and static system sensing ports.
• Tailwheel steering mechanism
• Fuel vents.
(i) Make sure that control surface hinges are free of ice.
(j) Apply ant-ice and de-icing fluids as necessary.
(2) Before engine start:
(a) De-energize and disconnect the ground power supply from the external receptacle.
(b) Close the access panel for the external ground power supply receptacle.
(c) Remove and stow the adapter cable.
(d) Disconnect and remove the auxiliary heater from the passenger compartment.
(e) Remove all blanks and covers from the aircraft.
(f) Open the engine cowling panels.
(g) Do a visual examination of the battery and engine heating pads for signs of
overheating.
(h) Close the engine cowling panels.
(3) Engine start:
(a) Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual to make sure the engine oil temperature and
battery voltage are in limits for engine starting.
(b) It is recommended to use a ground power unit to start the engine.
Page 203
10-12-00 May 31/14
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 204
10-12-00 May 31/14
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MOORING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
The aircraft must be moored if it is parked for long periods or when the winds are expected to be more
than 15 knots.
CAUTION: IF YOU EXPECT WIND SPEEDS OF MORE THAN 52 KNOTS IT IS RECOMMENDED

TO PUT THE AIRCRAFT INSIDE A HANGAR. WIND SPEEDS OF MORE THAN 52
KNOTS CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT AND MOORING EQUIPMENT.
6690.0037.00 Mooring rope Qty 3

6690.0039.00 Tent pin 650 mm long
6690.0038.00 Tent pin 400 mm long
Bar
Mooring blocks Minimum weight 70 kg (150 lb)
3. Mooring (Ref. Fig. 201)
A. Aircraft tie down points are located as follows:
• One aluminium alloy tie down bracket is located on the bottom of each wing
• At the rear of the fuselage
• As an alternative method, a bar can be installed through the rear fuselage lifting point.
Ropes connected to each end of the bar are then attached to mooring points.
4. Procedure
A. Park the aircraft (Ref. 10-10-00, Page Block 201).
B. Insert ropes through each wing attachment point. Attach the ends of the rope to the ground
mooring blocks or to suitable mooring points.
C. Insert the rope through the rear tie down point. Attach the ends of the rope to the ground
mooring blocks or to suitable mooring points.
D. Make sure that the ropes are not pulled tight and that all attachments are correctly connected.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
10-20-00 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
B
REAR FUSELAGE
LIFTING POINT
B
MOORING CABLE
ATTACHMENT POINT
REAR TIE DOWN POINT

6289
Mooring - Maintenance Practices

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
10-20-00 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RETURN TO SERVICE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
This topic gives details of the procedures required to return an aircraft to service after storage.
2. Procedure
A. Aircraft stored for up to 90 days
(1) Remove all mooring equipment (Ref. 10-20-00, Page Block 201).
(2) Remove all covers, propeller restraint, static grounding and wheel chocks.
(3) Install the battery (Ref. 24-32-11, Page Block 401).
(4) If the aircraft has been stored for more than 7 days:
(a) Remove the dessicant from each exhaust stub.
(5) If the aircraft has been stored for more than 28 days:
(a) Depreserve the engine fuel system (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00).
B. Aircraft stored for more than 90 days
(1) Remove all mooring equipment (Ref. 10-20-00, Page Block 201).
(2) Remove all covers, propeller restraint, static grounding and wheel chocks.
(3) Remove the aircraft from jacks (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
(4) Install the battery (Ref. 24-32-11, Page Block 401).
(5) Fill the engine oil system (Ref. 12-10-03, Page Block 301).
(6) Depreserve the engine fuel system (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
10-30-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
10-30-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 11 - PLACARDS AND MARKINGS

Chapter
Section
Subject Pages Date
Pages 2 Jul 30/16
Table of Contents 1 Jul 31/11

2 Jul 31/11
11-00-00 1 Jul 31/11

2 Jul 31/11
201 Jul 30/16

202 Jul 30/16
203 Jul 30/16
204 Jul 30/16
11-20-00 1 Jul 31/11

2 Jul 31/11
11-30-00 1 Jul 31/11

2 Jul 31/11
Page 1
11-LEP Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
11-LEP Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 11- PLACARDS AND MARKINGS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
PLACARDS AND MARKINGS 11-00-00

Description 1 All
EXTERIOR PLACARDS AND MARKINGS 11-20-00
Description 1 All
INTERIOR PLACARDS AND MARKINGS 11-30-00
Description 1 All
Page 1
11-TOC Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
11-TOC Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PLACARDS AND MARKINGS - DESCRIPTION
1. General
This Chapter gives the data for the aircraft exterior and interior placards and markings necessary for the
safe and efficient operation and maintenance of the aircraft.
The external placards and markings give warnings and cautions, and provide ground servicing and
rescue instructions. The interior placards and markings give general and emergency information for the
occupants of the cockpit and passenger cabin.
The external color scheme is applied according to the requirements of the individual customer and is
not shown in this Chapter.
For the details, location and part number of individual placards and markings, refer to Chapter 11 of the
aircraft Illustrated Parts Catalog (IPC).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
11-00-00 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
11-00-00 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PLACARDS AND MARKINGS - MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
1. General
This task gives the procedures to install exterior and interior placards and for the installation of silk
screen and/or stencil markings (as applicable).
2. Exterior Placards - Installation
A. Consumable Materials (Ref. 20-31-00)
Material No. Description Remarks

P01-008 Solvent
P02-031 Absorbent paper
B. Procedure
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE
INSTRUCTIONS ON THE CONTAINER AND/OR LOCAL REGULATIONS.
(1) Clean the applicable area with absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with
solvent (Material No. P01-008).
(2) Let the area dry for between 10 and 30 minutes.
(3) Remove the backing strip from the new placard.
(4) Align the placard and press it into position with your fingers. Make sure no air bubbles are
caught between the placard and the surface.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
11-00-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Interior Placards - Installation

- Hot air blower Local supply
- Hand roller (rubber) Local supply
B. Consumable Materials (Ref. 20-31-00)

P01-008 Solvent
C. Procedure
(1) Clean the applicable area with absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with
(2) Let the area dry for between 10 and 30 minutes.
(3) Remove the backing strip from the new placard.
(4) Align the placard and apply it in the correct position. Make sure no air bubbles are caught
between the placard and the surface.
(5) Use the hot air blower to lightly heat the placard and, at the same time, use the rubber
hand roller to press the placard onto the surface.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
11-00-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Silk Screen and Stencil Markings - Installation

- Silk Screen Local supply
- Stencil Local supply
- Spreader Local supply
- Stencil Brush Local supply

P07-010 Paint Color as required
• Hardener
• Thinners
• Retarder
P07-020 Thinners
P07-031 Topcoat, polyurethane gloss Color as required
• Activator
• Curing Solution
C. Procedure - Stencil Markings
(1) Clean the applicable area of the aircraft with absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031)
made moist with thinners (Material No. P07-020) and let the area dry.
(2) Prepare the paint mixture (Material No. P07-031). Mix the materials in the proportions as
given by the manufacturer:
• Topcoat (Material No. P07-031)

• Activator (Material No. P07-031)
• Curing solution (Material No. P07-031)
NOTE: Do not prepare more paint than necessary. It will become hard very quickly.
(3) Put the stencil in position on the aircraft surface. Make sure that you point the stencil in the
correct direction.
(4) Use a stencil brush to apply an even layer of the paint through the stencil, on to the aircraft
surface.
(5) Let the paint dry and then remove the stencil from the aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 203
11-00-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Silk Screen Markings - Installation
(1) Clean the applicable area of the aircraft with absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031)
made moist with thinners (Material No. P07-010). Let the area dry.
(2) Prepare the paint mixture (Material No. P07-010). Mix the materials in the proportions as
given by the manufacturer:
• Paint (Material No. P07-010)

• Retarder (Material No. P07-010)
• Thinners (Material No. P07-010).
NOTE: Do not prepare more paint than necessary. It will become hard very quickly.
(3) Put the silk screen in position on the aircraft surface. Make sure that you point the silk
screen in the correct direction.
(4) Apply a thick layer of paint across one end of the silk screen.
(5) Use a spreader to apply the paint. Hold the spreader at approximately 45° from vertical
and apply an even layer of paint over the silk screen. Do not use pressure.
(6) Hold the spreader at approximately 15° from the vertical. Apply hand pressure to the
spreader and apply the paint to the silk screen in one smooth stroke.
(7) Let the paint dry and then remove the silk screen.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 204
11-00-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTERIOR PLACARDS AND MARKINGS - DESCRIPTION
1. General
The external placards and markings give warnings and cautions, and provide ground servicing and
rescue instructions.
The external color scheme is applied according to the requirements of the individual customer and is
not shown in this Chapter.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
11-20-00 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
11-20-00 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTERIOR PLACARDS AND MARKINGS - DESCRIPTION
1. General
The interior placards and markings give general and emergency information for the occupants of the
cockpit and passenger cabin.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
11-30-00 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
11-30-00 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 12 - SERVICING
Chapter Chapter
Section Section
List of Effective 1 Feb 28/20 12-20-02 201 Jan 30/16
Pages 2 Feb 28/20 202 Jan 30/16
203 Jan 30/16
Table of Contents 1 Jan 30/16 204 Jan 30/16
2 Jan 30/16 205 Jan 30/16
206 Jan 30/16
12-10-03 301 Jul 30/15
302 Jul 30/15 12-21-56 701 Jul 30/17
303 Jul 30/15 702 Jul 30/17
304 Jul 30/15
305 Jul 30/15 12-27-61 301 Feb 28/20
306 Jul 30/15 302 Feb 28/20
303 Feb 28/20
12-10-05 301 Nov 30/03 304 Feb 28/20
302 Nov 30/03
303 Nov 30/03
304 Nov 30/03
12-11-28 301 Jun 14/91
12-12-32 301 Jul 31/11

302 Jul 31/11
303 Jul 31/11
304 Jul 31/11
305 Jul 31/11
306 Jul 31/11
307 Jul 31/11
308 Jul 31/11
309 Jul 31/11
310 Jul 31/11
311 Jul 31/11
312 Jul 31/11
313 Jul 31/11
314 Jul 31/11
315 Jul 31/11
316 Jul 31/11
12-14-32 301 Mar 14/98

302 Mar 14/98
12-20-01 701 Jan 30/15

702 Jan 30/15
703 Jan 30/15
704 Jan 30/15
Page 1
12-LEP Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
12-LEP Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 12 - SERVICING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
SERVICING
OIL SYSTEM 12-10-03
Servicing 301 All
OXYGEN SYSTEM 12-10-05
Servicing 301 Aircraft with
oxygen system
FUEL 12-11-28
Servicing 301 All
LANDING GEAR 12-12-32
Servicing 301 All
TIRES 12-14-32
Servicing 301 All
AIRCRAFT 12-20-01
Cleaning 701 All
SURFACE SEALER 12-20-02
WINDOWS 12-21-56
Cleaning 701 All
PROPELLER 12-27-61
Lubrication 301 All
Page 1
12-TOC Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
12-TOC Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL SYSTEM - SERVICING
1. General
This task gives the procedures to:
• Check the engine oil level

• Replenish the engine oil system
• Drain and fill the engine oil system.
- Drain hose
- Clean container Minimum ca pa city 10 lite rs (3
US ga ls )
B. Expendable Parts
IPC. Ref. Description Remarks
79-11-01, Fig. 01 O-ring (oil cooler) Fig. 301, Item 9

See P&WC IPC for these items:
72-60-00, Fig. 01 O-ring (accessory gearbox) Fig. 301, Item 6
72-10-00, Fig. 07 O-ring (chip detector) Fig. 301, Item 3
C. Consumable Materials (Ref. 20-31-00)
P02-001 Lockwire 0,8 mm (0,032 in.) diameter

P10-004 Engine oil
3. Procedures (Ref. Fig. 301)
CAUTION: DO NOT MIX OIL OF DIFFERENT TYPES OR VISCOSITY.
A. Replenish the Engine Oil Tank
NOTE: The usual oil level is one US quart (0.83 imp quart, 0.95 liter) below the maximum level,
with engine in a horizontal attitude.
(1) If the engine has been stopped for more than 30 minutes before the oil level check is
done, do this step:
(a) Start the engine and operate at ground idle for five minutes (Ref. 71-00-00, Page
Block 201).
(b) Stop the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 301
12-10-03 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Open the access panel PL1.
(3) Remove the oil tank filler cap.
(4) Do a check of the oil tank contents with the dipstick (7).
(5) If the oil level shows on the dipstick:
(a) Replenish the oil tank if necessary (Material No. P10-004).
CAUTION: WHEN THE FILLER CAP IS INSTALLED AND LOCKED, NO MOVEMENT

OF THE CAP IS PERMITTED.
(b) Install the filler cap.
(c) Close the access panel PL1.
(d) Record the quantity of oil added.
(6) If the oil level does not show on the dipstick:
(a) Fill the oil tank to maximum (Material No. P10-004).
(b) Install the filler cap.
(c) Close the access panel PL1.
(d) Start the engine and operate at ground idle for five minutes (Ref. 71-00-00, Page
Block 201).
(e) Open the access panel PL1.
(f) Remove the oil tank filler cap.
(g) Use the dipstick (7) and do a check of the oil tank contents.
(h) Record the quantity of oil added.
(i) Close the access panel PL1
B. Drain and Fill the Oil System
(1) Open the access panels PL1 and PR1.
(2) Remove access panels PT1 and PB1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(3) To drain the oil tank:
(a) Attach a hose to the drain valve (1).
(b) Put an applicable container below the oil tank.
(c) Open the drain valve and let the oil drain.
(d) Close the drain valve (1) and remove the drain hose.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 302
12-10-03 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) To drain the propeller gearbox:
(a) Put an applicable container below the chip detector (2).
(b) Remove the electrical connector (4).
(c) Remove the chip detector (2) and let the oil drain.
(d) Discard the O-ring (3).
(5) To drain the accessory gearbox:
(a) Put an applicable container below the drain plug (5) on the accessory gearbox.
(b) Remove the drain plug (5) and let the oil drain from the accessory gearbox.
(c) Discard the O-ring (6).
(6) To drain the oil cooler:
(a) Put an applicable container below the drain plug (8) on the oil cooler.
(b) Remove and discard the lockwire from the drain plug (8).
(c) Hold the drain tube (10) with a wrench.
(d) Remove the drain plug (8) and let the oil drain.
(e) Discard the O-ring (9).
(7) To install the chip detector:
(a) Install the chip detector (2) with a new O-ring (3).
(b) Torque the chip detector to between 5,1 and 6,2 Nm (45 and 55 lb in.).
(c) Safety the chip detector with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(d) Install the electrical connector (4).
(8) To install the accessory gearbox drain plug:
(a) Install the drain plug (5) with a new O-ring (6).
(b) Torque the drain plug to between 22,7 and 25,4 Nm (200 and 225 lb in.).
(c) Safety the drain plug with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(9) To install the oil cooler drain plug:
(a) Install a new O-ring (9) on the drain plug (8).
(b) Hold the drain tube (10) with a wrench and install the drain plug (8).
(c) Torque the drain plug to between 3,4 and 4,5 Nm (30 and 40 lbf in.).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 303
12-10-03 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Safety the drain plug with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(10) To fill the oil tank:
(a) Remove the filler cap.
(b) Fill the oil tank to maximum (Material No. P10-004).
(c) Install the oil tank filler cap.
(d) Dry motor the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(e) Look for leaks around the drain valve (1), chip detector (2), drain plug (5) and oil
cooler drain plug (8).
(f) Remove the filler cap.
(g) Fill the oil tank to maximum.
(h) Install the oil tank filler cap.
(11) Close the access panels PL1 and PR1.
(12) Install the access panels PT1 and PB1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(13) Make a record of the quantity of oil added.
C. Change of Oil Type
(1) If the engine oil type is changed the oil system must be flushed (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 304
12-10-03 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Oil System - Servicing

Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 305
12-10-03 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 306
12-10-03 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OXYGEN SYSTEM - SERVICING
1. General
Oxygen system replenishment is carried out at a fuselage mounted service panel. The service panel is
on the left side of the rear fuselage.
The service panel is fitted with an oxygen replenishment valve and a system pressure gauge. The
pressure gauge is graduated from 0 to 2000 psi in increments of 250 psi.
Part No. Description
- Warning placards
- Oxygen Trolley
3. Job Set Up
A. Put a warning notice on the battery switch and at the external power unit receptacle to tell
persons not to connect electrical power.
B. Make sure that the oxygen regulators are set to OFF.
4. Procedure (Ref. Fig. 302)
WARNING: MAKE SURE A GROUNDING CABLE IS CONNECTED TO THE AIRCRAFT.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THE OXYGEN CHARGING EQUIPMENT IS ELECTRICALLY BONDED TO

THE AIRCRAFT.
WARNING: DO NOT OPERATE THE AIRCRAFT ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS OR CONNECT GROUND

POWER WHEN THE OXYGEN IS BEING REPLENISHED.
WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW OIL OR GREASE TO TOUCH THE EQUIPMENT. OIL AND GREASE
CAN CAUSE EXPLOSIONS IF THEY CONTAMINATE OXYGEN CHARGING
EQUIPMENT.
WARNING: FILL THE SYSTEM SLOWLY TO PREVENT OVERHEATING.
A. Replenishment
(1) Open access panel to get access to the charging valve and pressure gauge.
(2) Remove the dust cap from the charging valve.
(3) Open the oxygen trolley charging valve for a few seconds to remove any air or
contamination from the oxygen trolley charging hose.
(4) Connect the hose to the charging valve.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with Oxygen Systems
Page 301
12-10-05 Nov 30/03
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Slowly open the oxygen trolley charging valve and fill the oxygen system until the system
pressure is between 1900 and 2000 psi.
(6) Allow the cylinders to cool for one hour and check the system pressure. If necessary, fill
the cylinder with more oxygen to give the correct pressure.
(7) Close the oxygen trolley charging valve and release the oxygen pressure from the
charging hose.
(8) Disconnect the charging hose from the aircraft and install the dust cap on the oxygen
system charging valve.
(9) Close the access panel.
(10) Remove the warning placard from the external power unit receptacle.
B. Discharging
CAUTION: CAUTION: DO NOT LET THE OXYGEN CYLINDER DISCHARGE TO LESS THAN 50
PSI. THIS WILL PREVENT MOISTURE CONTAMINATION OF THE CYLINDER.
(1) Open all the cabin and cockpit doors.
(2) Set controls on the oxygen regulators:
Supply ON
100% OXYGEN/NORMAL NORMAL
EMERGENCY/NORMAL/TEST MASK EMERGENCY
(3) Let the oxygen cylinder discharge until the pressure that remains is not less than 100 psi.
(4) Set controls on the oxygen regulators:
Supply OFF
100% OXYGEN/NORMAL NORMAL
EMERGENCY/NORMAL/TEST MASK NORMAL
(5) Remove the safety clip and close circuit breaker:
BAT SWITCH.
(6) Remove the warning placard from the external power unit receptacle.
Page 302
12-10-05 Nov 30/03
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2300
2243
Cylinder Charging Pressure (psi)
2200
2174
2100 2104
2035
2000 2000
1965
1900 1896
1826
1800
1757
1700
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Temperature (°C)
Oxygen System - Cylinder Charging Pressure

Figure 301
Page 303
12-10-05 Nov 30/03
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PRESSURE GAGE
DUST CAP
A
EXTERNAL CHARGING VALVE
ACCESS PANEL
6377
Oxygen System - Replenishment

Figure 302
Page 304
12-10-05 Nov 30/03
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL - SERVICING
WARNING: BEFORE THE REFUEL OR DEFUEL IS STARTED THE AIRCRAFT AND REFUEL
EQUIPMENT MUST BE GROUNDED.
1. Refuelling Wing or Underwing Fuel Tanks
A. Remove electrical power from the aircraft.
B. Ground the aircraft and refuel equipment.
C. Remove the tank filler cap.
D. Make sure that the fuel nozzle on the refuel equipment is clean.
E. Refuel the tank.
F. Install the filler cap.
G. Disconnect the ground cables.
H. After 15 minutes, drain a minimum of 1 litre (0.25 US gal) of fuel from the water collector tank.
I. If water is found in the fuel, drain more fuel until there is no water in the sample.
J. Reset the fuel totaliser.
2. Defuelling
A. Remove electrical power from the aircraft.
B. Ground the aircraft and refuel equipment.
C. Remove the tank filler cap.
D. Make sure that the fuel nozzle on the refuel equipment is clean.
E. Attach a short piece of flexible hose to the refuel nozzle.
F. Put the hose in to the tank.
G. Remove by suction as much fuel as possible.
H. Put the container in to position under the system drain valve or underwing tank drain valve.
I. Open the water drain valve to drain the tanks completely.
J. Open the fuel filter drain valve and fuel system valve to drain the forward part of the system.
K. Put a warning notice in the cockpit to tell persons not to operate the auxiliary fuel pump.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 301
12-11-28 Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LANDING GEAR - SERVICING
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedures for the servicing of the:
• Main-gear shock-struts
• Tail-leg shock-strut
• Brakes
2. Main-Gear Shock-Strut

6690.0046.00 Funnel, oil filler
or
- Funnel Local supply
- Clear plastic pipe 1m (36 in.) long Connect to filler point and funnel
B. Expendable Parts
IPC Ref. Description Remarks

32-11-12, Fig. 01 Gasket Fig. 301, Item 6

P10-017 Hydraulic fluid Replaces P10-003
D. Procedure
(1) Job Set Up
(a) Lift the aircraft on jacks (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
(2) Replenishment (Ref. Fig. 301)
NOTE: The procedure is given for the right main-gear shock-strut. The procedure for the
left main-gear shock-strut is similar.
(a) Make sure that the shock strut (2) is fully extended.
(b) Cut and remove the lockwire from the vent plug (1).
(c) Remove the vent plug (1) and gasket (6) from the top of the shock strut.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 301
12-12-32 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Remove the lockwire and blanking plug (7) from the oil filler valve (9).
(e) Connect the plastic pipe (4) to the filler valve (9).
(f) Fill the pipe (4) with hydraulic fluid (Material No. P10-017) to approximately the level
line on the strut.
NOTE: It is permitted to mix the hydraulic fluid (Material No. P10-017) with the
hydraulic fluid (Material No. P10-003) which it replaces.
(g) Open the oil filler screw (8).
(h) Slowly add the hydraulic fluid until the level in the pipe is at the level of line (5) on
the shock strut cylinder.
NOTE: The correct fluid level is 67 mm (2,64 in.) below the top of the outer tube.
(i) Tighten the filler screw (8).
(j) Drain the fluid from the plastic pipe (4) and remove the pipe.
(k) Install the blanking plug (7).
(l) Safety the filler valve screw (8) and blanking plug (7) with lockwire (Material No.
P02-001).
(m) Install the vent plug (1) and gasket (6) on the top of shock strut.
(n) Safety the vent plug (1) with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
NOTE: If the welded tag for the lockwire is damaged you can safety the vent plug
to one of the fork ends of the strut with the lockwire.
(o) Remove any unwanted hydraulic fluid and clean the shock strut
(3) Close Up
(a) Lower the aircraft and remove the jacks (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
(b) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 302
12-12-32 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. FUNNEL
2. STRUT
1. VENT PLUG
A
6. GASKET
A 4. PLASTIC PIPE
67 mm (2.64 in.)
B
5. FLUID LEVEL
LINE
D
FW
7. BLANKING PLUG
9. OIL FILLER
VALVE
B
8. OIL FILLER
SCREW
6283
Main-Gear Shock-Strut - Replenishment

Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 303
12-12-32 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Tail-Leg Shock-Strut

6690.0072.00 Dipstick For H2 aircraft
110.85.06.081 Syringe with dipstick gage For H4 aircraft
903.70.32.900 Adapter/gage assembly O Lear 40/250
- Nitrogen trolley

P02-001 Lockwire
C. Procedure
(1) Job Set Up
(a) Lift the aircraft on jacks and let the tail landing gear fully extend (Ref. 07-10-00,
Page Block 201).
(2) Replenishment (Ref. Fig. 302)
CAUTION: DO NOT GET DIRT OR UNWANTED MATERIAL IN THE STRUT DURING

THIS PROCEDURE.
(a) H2 Aircraft (spring strut)
(i) Remove the filler cap (4).
(ii) Check the fluid level with the dipstick.
(iii) Fill the strut with hydraulic fluid (Material No. P10-017) to the correct level.
NOTE: The correct level is between 360 and 385 mm (14.2 and 15.2 in.).
(iv) Install the filler cap and torque it to between 17 and 22,6 Nm (150 and
200 lbf in.).
(b) H4 Aircraft (pneumatic strut)
(i) Remove the dust cap.
(ii) Loosen the charging valve locknut.
(iii) Slowly open the charging valve to release the gas pressure.
(iv) Remove the lockwire and remove the filler valve from the shock-strut.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 304
12-12-32 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(v) Fill the strut with approximately 240 cc (0,63 US gal) of hydraulic fluid
(Material No. P10-017).
(vi) Insert the syringe (1) in to the shock strut so that the syringe nozzle collar (2)
touches the top of the shock-strut (3).
(vii) Use the syringe to remove fluid from the shock strut until no more fluid can be
removed.
NOTE: The correct fluid level is 316 mm (12.44 in.).
NOTE: Make sure that the fluid has no bubbles. If there are bubbles in the
fluid, wait until there are no bubbles in the fluid.
(viii) Install the charging valve on to the shock strut and safety the filler valve with
lockwire.
(ix) Connect the adapter/gage assembly to the shock-strut charging-valve.
(x) Connect the nitrogen trolley to the adapter/gage assembly.
(xi) Open the charging valve and the supply valve on the charging trolley.
(xii) Slowly fill the shock-strut to a pressure of 24,0 bar (348 psi).
(xiii) Close the charging valve on the shock-strut and the supply valve on the
charging trolley.
(xiv) Disconnect the charging trolley from the adapter/gage assembly and remove
the adapter/gage assembly from the shock-strut.
(xv) Tighten the charging valve locknut and install valve dust cap.
(3) Close Up
(a) Lower the aircraft and remove the jacks (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
(b) After one hour, do a check of the shock-strut for signs of air or fluid leaks.
(c) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 305
12-12-32 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
2
AIRCRAFT WITH
PNEUMATIC STRUT
AIRCRAFT WITH
SPRING STRUT
6284
Tail-Leg Shock-Strut - Replenishment

Figure 302
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 306
12-12-32 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Brakes
The aircraft has separate hydraulic brake systems for the left and right mainwheels. This task gives the
procedures to:
• Drain the left and right brake systems (Ref. Para 4.C.(1))
• Fill the left and right brake systems on aircraft with a single (pilot only) system and an integral
reservoir (Ref. Para 4.C.(2))
• Fill the left and right brake systems on aircraft with a single (pilot only) system and a remote
reservoir (Ref. Para 4.C.(3))
• Fill the left and right brake systems on aircraft with a dual (pilot and co-pilot) system and an
integral reservoir (Ref. Para 4.C.(4))
• Fill the left and right brake systems on aircraft with a dual (pilot and co-pilot) system and a
remote reservoir (Ref. Para 4.C.(5))
• Do an operational test of the left and right brake systems by jacking each mainwheel in turn (Ref.
Para 4.C.(6))
• Do an operational test of the left and right brake systems with the aircraft on jacks (Ref. Para
4.C.(7))

110.85.07.303 Bleeding and replenishing rig
or
990.00.00.160 Rig, brake bleeding
or
- Large funnel and plastic tube Local supply
6690.0036.01 Wheel chocks Or equivalent
- Clean container Minimum capacity 3 liters
(1 US gal)
- Clean container Minimum capacity 1 liter
(0,25 US gal)
- Two plastic overflow pipes 600 mm (24 in.) long

P02-001 Lockwire
P10-017 Hydraulic fluid
C. Procedures
(1) Drain (Ref. Fig. 303 or 304)
NOTE: The procedure is given for the right mainwheel brake system. The procedure for
the left mainwheel brake system is similar.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 307
12-12-32 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) Install chocks under the wheels.
(b) Release the park brake.
(c) Place a clean container below the brake-unit bleed-valve (8).
(d) Remove the bleed screw (9), open the bleed valve (8) and let the hydraulic fluid
drain.
(e) Operate the pilot‘s brake pedal until all the hydraulic fluid is drained from the
system.
(f) If a dual system is installed, operate the brake pedal on the co-pilot‘s side until all
the hydraulic fluid is drained from the system.
(g) Install the bleed screw (9).
(2) Fill - Single System with an Integral Reservoir (Ref. Fig. 303)
NOTE: If a replenishment rig is not available, use a large funnel connected to the brake-
unit bleed-valve with a plastic tube. The funnel must be held a minimum of 2,5 m
(8 ft) above the level of the brake fluid reservoir. This gives sufficient pressure to
force hydraulic fluid through the brake system.
NOTE: The procedure is given for the right-mainwheel brake-system. The procedure for
the left-mainwheel brake-system is similar.
(a) Remove the bleed screw (9) from the brake-unit bleed-valve (8).
(b) Connect the supply line (7) from the replenishment rig (5) to the brake-unit bleed-
valve (8).
(c) Remove the vent plug from the top of the master cylinder on the right brake pedal.
(d) Attach an overflow pipe (1) to the vent on the master cylinder and put the opposite
end in to a container.
(e) Pressurize the replenishment rig (5) to between 2,0 and 2,3 bar (30 and 35 psi).
(f) Open the brake-unit bleed-valve (8) and the supply valve (6) at the replenishment
rig (5).
(g) Let the fluid flow into the container until there is steady flow with no bubbles.
(h) Press and release the right brake pedal several times.
(i) Release the brake pedal.
(j) Close the bleed valve (8).
(k) Close the supply valve (6).
(l) Release the air pressure from the replenishment rig (5).
(m) Remove the supply line (7) from the bleed valve (8) and install the bleed screw (9).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 308
12-12-32 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(n) Remove the overflow pipe (1) from the master cylinder.
(o) Use a syringe to remove fluid from the system to get the correct fluid level.
NOTE: The correct fluid level is 9,5 mm (0,375 in.) below the top edge of the
master cylinder.
(p) Install the vent plug in the master cylinder.
(q) Do the operational test of the brake system (Ref. Para. 4.C.(6) or (7)).
(3) Fill - Dual System with an Integral Reservoir (Ref. Fig. 304)
(a) Remove the bleed screw (9) from the brake unit bleed valve (8).
(b) Connect the supply line (7) from the replenishment rig (5) to the brake-unit bleed-
valve (8).
(c) Remove the vent plug from the top of the master cylinder on the co-pilot’s right
brake-pedal.
(d) Attach an overflow pipe (1) to the vent on the master cylinder and put the opposite
end in to a container.
(e) Pressurize the replenishment rig (5) to between 2,0 and 2,3 bar (30 and 35 psi).
(f) Open the brake-unit bleed-valve (8) and the supply valve (6) at the replenishment
rig (5).
(g) Let fluid flow in to the container until there is steady flow with no bubbles.
(h) Press and release the co-pilot’s right brake pedal several times.
(i) Release the brake pedal.
(j) Close the bleed valve (8).
(k) Close the supply valve (6).
(l) Operate the pilot’s right brake pedal to move the shuttle valve.
(m) Remove the overflow pipe (1) from the co-pilot’s master cylinders
(n) Use a syringe to remove fluid from the system to get the correct fluid level.
master cylinder.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 309
12-12-32 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(o) Install the vent plug in the co-pilot’s master cylinder.
(p) Remove the vent plug from the top of the master cylinder on the pilot’s right brake-
pedal.
(q) Attach the overflow pipe (1) to the vent on the master cylinder and put the opposite
end in to the container.
(r) Open the bleed valve (8) and the supply valve (6).
(s) Let the fluid flow into the overflow container until there is steady flow with no
bubbles.
(t) Press and release the pilot’s right brake pedal several times.
(u) Release the brake pedal.
(v) Close the bleed valve (8).
(w) Close the supply valve (6).
(x) Release the air pressure from the replenishment rig (5).
(y) Remove the supply line (7) from the bleed valve (8) and install the bleed screw (9).
(z) Remove the overflow pipe (1) from the pilot’s master cylinder.
(aa) Use a syringe to remove fluid from the system to get the correct fluid level.
master cylinder.
(ab) Install the vent plug in the pilot’s master cylinder.
(ac) Do the operational test of the brake system (Ref. Para. 4.C.(6) or (7)).
(4) Fill - Single System with a Remote Reservoir (Ref. Fig. 303)
(a) Put a container under the manifold (4) to catch spilled hydraulic fluid.
(b) Remove the locking wire from the cap (3) on the manifold (4).
(c) Remove the cap (3).
(d) Connect an overflow pipe (2) to the connection on the manifold (4).
(e) Put the end of the overflow pipe (2) into the container.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 310
12-12-32 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(f) Remove the bleed screw (9) from the brake-unit bleed-valve (8).
(g) Connect the supply line (7) from the replenishment rig (5) to the brake-unit bleed-
valve (8).
(h) Pressurize the replenishment rig to between 2,0 and 2,3 bar (30 and 35 psi).
(i) Open the bleed valve (8) and the supply valve (6) at the replenishment rig (5).
(j) Let fluid flow in to the overflow container until there is steady flow with no bubbles.
(k) Press and release the right brake pedal several times.
(l) Release the brake pedal.
(m) Close the bleed valve (8).
(n) Close the supply valve (6).
(o) Release the air pressure from the replenishment rig (5).
(p) Remove the reservoir cap.
(q) Slowly fill the reservoir with hydraulic fluid (Material No. P10-017) to a level 10 mm
(0,4 in.) below the base of the filter neck.
(r) Install the reservoir cap.
(s) Remove the supply line (7) from the bleed valve (8) and install the bleed screw (9).
(t) Remove the overflow pipe (2) from the manifold (4).
(u) Install the cap (3) on the manifold (4) and secure with lockwire (Material No. P02-
001).
(v) Do the operational test of the brake system (Ref. Para. 4.C.(6) or (7)).
(5) Fill - Dual System with a Remote Reservoir (Ref. Fig. 304)
(a) Put a container under the T-piece (4) to catch spilled hydraulic fluid.
(b) Remove the locking wire from the crossfeed pipe (2) at the T-piece (4).
(c) Remove the crossfeed pipe (2) from the T-piece (4).
(d) Put the end of the crossfeed pipe (2) into the container.
(e) Connect an overflow pipe (3) to the T-piece (4).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 311
12-12-32 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(f) Put the end of the overflow pipe (3) into the container.
(g) Remove the bleed screw (9) from the brake-unit bleed-valve (8).
(h) Connect the supply line (7) from the replenishment rig (5) to the brake-unit bleed-
valve (8).
(i) Pressurize the replenishment rig to between 2,0 and 2,3 bar (30 and 35 psi).
(j) Open the bleed valve (8) and the supply valve (6) at the replenishment rig (5).
(k) Let fluid flow in to the overflow container until there is steady flow with no bubbles.
(l) Press and release the co-pilot’s right brake pedal several times.
(m) Release the brake pedal.
(n) Close the bleed valve (8).
(o) Close the supply valve (6).
(p) Operate the pilot’s right brake pedal to move the shuttle valve.
(q) Open the supply valve (6).
(r) Let fluid flow in to the container until there is steady flow, free of bubbles.
(s) Push down the pilot’s right brake pedal.
(t) Close the bleed valve (8).
(u) Close the supply valve (6). and release the air pressure from the replenishment rig
(5).
(v) Release the brake pedal.
(w) Release the air pressure from the replenishment rig (5).
(x) Remove the supply line (7) from the bleed valve (8) and install the bleed screw (9).
(y) Remove the overflow pipe (3) from the T-piece (4).
(z) Connect the cross-feed pipe (2) to the T-piece (4) and secure with lockwire (Material
No. P02-001).
(aa) Remove the reservoir cap.
(ab) Slowly fill the reservoir with hydraulic fluid (Material No. P10-017) to a level 10 mm
(0,4 in.) below the base of the filter neck.
(ac) Install the reservoir cap.
(ad) Do the operational test of the brake system (Ref. Para. 4.C.(6) or (7)).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 312
12-12-32 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Operational Test - Main Wheel Jacking
NOTE: You can do the test by jacking each main wheel in turn, or by lifting the aircraft on
jacks.
(a) Lift the left main wheel (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
(b) Make sure the right main wheel has wheel chocks in position then release the park
brake.
(c) Get a second person to turn the left main wheel.
(d) Push down the pilot’s left brake pedal.
(e) Make sure the left main wheel stops and cannot turn.
(f) Release the brake pedal.
(g) Examine the brake system for leaks.
(h) If a dual system is installed, do steps (c) thru (g) for the co-pilot’s left brake pedal.
(i) Apply the park brake.
(j) Lower the left main wheel (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
(k) Lift the right main wheel (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
(l) Make sure the left main wheel has wheel chocks in position then release the park
brake.
(m) Get a second person to turn the right main wheel.
(n) Push down the pilot’s right brake pedal.
(o) Make sure the right main wheel stops and cannot turn.
(p) Release the brake pedal.
(q) Examine the brake system for leaks.
(r) If a dual system is installed, do steps (k) thru (q) for the co-pilot’s right brake pedal.
(s) Lower the right main wheel (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
(7) Operational Test - Aircraft on Jacks
(a) Lift the aircraft on jacks (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
(b) Release the park brake.
(c) Get a second person to turn the left main wheel.
(d) Push down the pilot’s left brake pedal.
(e) Make sure the left main wheel stops and cannot turn.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 313
12-12-32 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(f) Release the brake pedal.
(g) Examine the brake system for leaks.
(h) If a dual system is installed, do steps (c) thru (g) for the co-pilot’s left brake pedal.
(i) Get a second person to turn the right main wheel.
(j) Push down the pilot’s right brake pedal.
(k) Make sure the right main wheel stops and cannot turn.
(l) Release the brake pedal.
(m) Examine the brake system for leaks.
(n) If a dual system is installed, do steps (h) thru (m) for the co-pilot’s right brake pedal.
(o) Lower the aircraft (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 314
12-12-32 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
C
A
C INTEGRAL RESERVOIR SYSTEM
(VIEW LOOKING FORWARD)
B B 2
A
REMOTE RESERVOIR SYSTEM
D
7
C
9 RH WHEEL SHOWN
6717
Single Brake System - Servicing

Figure 303
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 315
12-12-32 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
C
A
C INTEGRAL RESERVOIR SYSTEM
B B 2
A
REMOTE RESERVOIR SYSTEM
D
7
C
9 RH WHEEL SHOWN
6718
Dual Brake System - Servicing

Figure 304
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 316
12-12-32 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TYRES - SERVICING
- Nitrogen or air supply Local supply

- Tyre pressure gauge Local supply
2. Inflation
A. When tyres are initially inflated the following precautions are necessary:
(1) The tyre and wheel assembly must be put in a safety cage to prevent injury to the
operator.
(2) Tyres must be inflated slowly to prevent air being trapped between the tyre and the tube.
(3) Use dry air or nitrogen to inflate tyres.
(4) Tyre pressures must be checked and monitored. The wheel assembly must be left for 12
hours and the pressure checked again.
(5) If a decrease in pressure is more than 10% the wheel assembly must be rejected.
3. Tyre Pressures
The values give are for aircraft in the loaded condition. If the aircraft is on jacks with no weight on the
wheels, the tire pressures must be reduced by 5%.
A. Main Wheel
B2 - H2 Aircraft
Max. Take-off Weight - 2200 kg (4850 lbs)
Tyre Type Tyre Size Tyre Pressure
24.00 x 7.7 - 8PR or

Standard 24.00 x 7 - 8PR 2,2 bar (32 psi)
Low Pressure 11-12 - 8PR 0,9 bar (13 psi)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 301
12-14-32 Mar 14/98
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B2 - H4 Aircraft
24.00 x 7.7 - 8PR or

Standard 24.00 x 7 - 8PR 3,3 bar (49) psi
Low Pressure 11-12 - 8PR 1,4 bar (20 psi)
B. Tail Wheel
B2 - H2 Aircraft
Standard 5.00-4 - 6PR 2,2 bar (32 psi)
B2 - H4 Aircraft
Standard 5.00-4 - 6PR 3,2 bar (47 psi)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 302
12-14-32 Mar 14/98
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIRCRAFT - CLEANING
1. General
This procedure must be done on an On-Condition basis, dependent on the local environmental
conditions. Local conditions will not be the same for all operators and must be considered to establish a
wash program. However, in severe zones the aircraft must be washed at least once each week.
The quality of the washwater is also important and the minimum standard for the washwater, as defined
by Pilatus Aircraft Ltd is as follows:
• pH value 6.5 to 8.5

• Chloride concentration 100 mg / l
- Soft-bristle brush
- Fluid spraying equipment
- Clean water supply
- Vacuum cleaner
990.00.00.167 Static-port wash-cover
P01-005 Soap solution

P02-003 Cleaning cloth
P02-004 Chamois leather
P02-005 Sponge
3. Procedure
CAUTION: DO NOT LET THE AIRCRAFT TIRES STAND IN POOLS OF WASHING FLUID FOR
LONG PERIODS. THE DETERGENT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE TIRES.
A. External Surfaces
(1) Make sure the windows are closed.
(2) Make sure that the flaps are out.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 701
12-20-01 Jan 30/15
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: DO NOT USE ADHESIVE TAPE TO COVER THE STATIC PORT.
(3) Make sure that covers or blanks are installed in the following locations:
• Pitot head
• Static port
• Air intake
• Engine air intake.
(4) Prepare the soap solution (Material No. P01-005) in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions.
(5) Flush the aircraft fully with clean water.
(6) Apply soap or detergent solution to a small area (4 to 5 m2) with the spray equipment or
soft bristle brush.
(7) Wait for approximately five minutes and flush off the solution with a pressure water supply
and a soft bristle brush.
(8) Repeat this procedure on the aircraft exterior, until the complete aircraft (including the
landing gear, and flap) has been cleaned.
(9) Remove any remaining exhaust stains or grease marks with an heavy duty cleaner.
(10) Make sure the aircraft tires do not remain in an area wet with washing detergent; flush the
tires with clean water and move the aircraft to a dry area if necessary.
(11) Clean the aircraft windows (Ref. 12-21-56, Page Block 701).
B. Flight Compartments
CAUTION: DO NOT USE TRICHLOROETHANE OR OTHER CHLORINATED

HYDROCARBON SOLVENTS TO CLEAN COMPONENTS IN THE COCKPITS.
THE VAPOR FROM THE SOLVENTS CAN DAMAGE RUBBER COMPONENTS
AND CAUSE DE-BONDING OF POLARIZING FILMS ON INSTRUMENTS.
(1) Prepare the soap solution (Material No. P01-005) in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions.
(2) Make the sponge (Material No. P02-005) moist with the soap solution.
(3) Clean the interior surfaces with the sponge (Material No. P02-005).
(4) Make the sponge (Material No. P02-005) moist with clean water.
(5) Clean the interior surfaces with the sponge (Material No. P02-005).
(6) Use a cleaning cloth (Material No. P02-003) to dry the interior surfaces.
(7) Make the chamois leather (Material No. P02-004) moist with clean water.
(8) Clean the instruments with the chamois leather (Material No. P02-004).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 702
12-20-01 Jan 30/15
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(9) Clean all the seats and floors with the vacuum cleaner.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 703
12-20-01 Jan 30/15
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 704
12-20-01 Jan 30/15
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SURFACE SEALER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
This topic gives the procedures for the:
• Initial application of surface sealer to the complete aircraft (Ref. Para. 3.)
NOTE: For subsequent re-application it is not necessary to do Para. 3.B.(2).
• Removal and re-application of surface sealer for paint touch-up, or to do a repair (Ref. Para. 4.)

- Eye Protection Local supply

P02-037 Micro Fiber Cloths Or equivalent
P02-042 Surface Prep Mitt
P05-014 Cleaner, Exterior Granitize XE3
P05-015 Cleaner, Exterior Granitize XG5
P05-016 Cleaner, Aerolube
P05-018 Polish, Superfine
P05-019 Polish, Medium
P08-082 Surface Sealer Granitize Xzilon 3
P09-043 Tape Adhesive, Transparency
- Atomizer Spray Local Supply
- Latex Gloves Local Supply
- Soft Bristled Brush Local Supply
- Window Wipes Local Supply
3. Complete Application
MANUFACTURERS HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.
A. Preparation
(1) Make sure the windows are closed.
(2) Make sure that the flaps are out.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
12-20-02 Jan 30/16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Make sure covers or blanks are installed on the:
• Pitot head
• Static ports
• Engine exhaust stubs
• Engine air intake
(4) Use the adhesive tape (Material No. P09-043) to protect and seal the:
• Windshield and cabin windows

• Landing lights
• Navigation or position/strobe lights
• Refuel grounding points
B. Procedure
WARNING: BE CAREFUL IF YOU USE THE GRANITIZE XE3 EXTERIOR CLEANER

(MATERIAL NO. P05-014). YOU MUST WEAR LATEX GLOVES AND, IN AREAS
WHERE THERE CAN BE DRIPS (SUCH AS UNDER THE WINGS AND
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER) WEAR EYE PROTECTION. THE CLEANER CAN
CAUSE DAMAGE TO YOUR SKIN AND EYES.
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU CLEAN THE EXHAUST GAS STAINS OR OTHER
RESIDUES. IF YOU APPLY TOO MUCH FORCE, IT WILL DAMAGE THE
SURFACE OF THE PAINT.
WARNING: DO NOT LET CLEANING PRODUCTS COME INTO CONTACT WITH THE
AIRCRAFT TRANSPARENCIES. THE CLEANING PRODUCTS CAN CAUSE
CRAZING AND OTHER DAMAGE.
NOTE: It is recommended that the aircraft is cleaned away from direct sunlight, and
when the external surfaces of the aircraft are cool.
(1) Clean the exterior of the aircraft:
NOTE: Pilatus recommend you use the exterior cleaner XG5 (Material No. P05-015) for
normal cleaning. If the area is very dirty you can use 1 part exterior cleaner XE3
(Material No. P05-014) diluted with 10 parts clean water. For less dirty areas you
can use 1 part exterior cleaner XE3 (Material No. P05-014) diluted with 20 parts
clean water.
(a) Put the exterior cleaner XG5 (Material No. P05-015), or the diluted exterior cleaner
XE3 (Material No. P05-014) mixture in an atomizer spray.
(b) Spray the cleaner directly onto the exterior surface of the aircraft. Do this on a small
area at a time.
(c) Use a soft bristled brush to work the cleaner into seams, joints, and external fittings
(e.g. flap brackets).
(d) When you clean around probes or similar items, spray the cleaner onto a micro fiber
cloth (Material No. P02-037) and apply it using the cloth.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
12-20-02 Jan 30/16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) Leave the cleaner for approximately one minute but do not let the cleaner dry.
(f) Remove the cleaner with a clean micro fiber cloth (Material No. P02-037).
NOTE: If preferred, you can rinse the cleaner off using low pressure water if the
aircraft is positioned on an approved washing facility.
(g) If the cleaner does dry, apply more cleaner, then remove it immediately with a clean
micro fiber cloth (Material No. P02-037).
(2) Remove surface oxidation and contamination:
CAUTION: YOU MUST REMOVE ALL SURFACE OXIDATION AND CONTAMINATION

IN ORDER TO GET A GOOD BOND BETWEEN THE SURFACE SEALER
AND THE PAINT.
(a) Spray a large quantity of cleaner, aerolube (Material No. P05-016) onto the surface
to be cleaned, and also onto the rubber surface of the surface prep mitt (Material
No. P02-042).
(b) Use light hand pressure to move the surface prep mitt (Material No. P02-042) from
side to side across the area. When you can move the mitt freely, the surface is
clean.
NOTE: If the surface prep mitt becomes dirty, wash it in warm soapy water and
allow to dry. Continue the cleaning procedure with a clean surface prep
mitt .
(c) Use a clean micro fiber cloth (Material No. P02-037) to remove all cleaner, aerolube
(Material No. P05-016) from the surface.
(d) Repeat the procedure until the aircraft exterior has a clean, smooth surface.
(3) Apply the surface sealer:
NOTE: It is recommended that two people apply the surface sealer. One person to apply
the surface sealer and one person to remove it with a cloth.
(a) Put a small amount of surface sealer (Material No. P08-082) on a window wipe.
(b) Apply the surface sealer smoothly to a small surface area approximately 0,25 m²
(2,7 ft.²). Make sure that all of the area is wet.
(c) Immediately dry the surface with a clean micro fiber cloth (Material No. P02-037).
Do not let the surface sealer dry. You must turn the micro fiber cloth frequently to
make sure it does not get soaked.
(d) Wait for 20 minutes for the surface sealer to cure then you can apply another coat. It
is recommended to apply a minimum of three coats of the surface sealer.
(e) Repeat the procedure until the aircraft exterior is completely covered with surface
sealer.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 203
12-20-02 Jan 30/16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Close Up
(1) Re-apply the applicable corrosion preventive compounds (CPC) as necessary (Ref. 20-
40-00, Page Block 1).
NOTE: The cleaning procedure can remove CPC from the aircraft.
(2) Remove the adhesive tape from the:
• Windshield and cabin windows

• Landing lights
• Navigation or position/strobe lights
• Refuel grounding points
(3) Remove all equipment and materials from the work area. Make sure that the work area is
clean.
4. Removal and Re-application for Touch-up or Repair
NOTE: If it is necessary to touch-up the paint or repair a small part of the external structure, you must
remove the surface sealer. Sealants and paints will not bond to the aircraft structure if there is
surface sealer on the aircraft skin.
A. Procedure
(1) Use tape, adhesive transparency (Material No. P09-043) to mask around the area that it is
necessary to repair.
(2) Put a small amount of superfine polish (Material No. P05-018) onto a clean window wipe.
(3) Apply the polish onto the repair area and lightly rub the repair area to remove the surface
sealer.
NOTE: If the superfine polish (Material No. P05-018) does not remove the surface
sealer you can use the medium polish (Material No. P05-019).
(4) Remove all remaining polish with a micro fiber cloth (Material No. P02-037).
(5) If you used the medium polish (Material No. P05-019):
(a) Polish the area again using the superfine polish (Material No. P05-018).
(b) Remove all remaining polish with a micro fiber cloth (Material No. P02-037).
(6) Apply exterior cleaner XG5 (Material No. P05-015) directly onto the repair area.
(7) Remove the cleaner with a clean micro fiber cloth (Material No. P02-037). Turn the micro
fiber cloth frequently to make sure it does not get soaked.
(8) Do the touch-up or repair.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 204
12-20-02 Jan 30/16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(9) When the touch-up or repair is completed:
(a) Put a small amount of surface sealer (Material No. P08-082) on a window wipe.
(b) Apply the surface sealer smoothly to the repair area. Make sure that all of the area
is wet.
(c) Immediately dry the surface with a clean micro fiber cloth (Material No. P02-037).
Do not let the surface sealer dry. You must turn the micro fiber cloth frequently to
make sure it does not get soaked.
(d) Wait for 20 minutes for the surface sealer to cure then you can apply another coat. It
is recommended to apply a minimum of three coats of the surface sealer.
(e) Remove the adhesive tape.
B. Close Up
(1) Re-apply the applicable corrosion preventive compounds (CPC) as necessary (Ref. 20-
NOTE: The cleaning procedure can remove CPC from the aircraft.
(2) Remove all equipment and materials from the work area. Make sure that the work area is
clean.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 205
12-20-02 Jan 30/16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 206
12-20-02 Jan 30/16
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WINDOWS - CLEANING
1. General
This topic gives the recommended procedures to clean the outside and inside of the windows, and to
polish out small scratches.
P01-005 Soap solution

P01-008 Solvent White spirit
P02-041 Lint-free cleaning cloths
P02-004 Chamois leather
P02-005 Sponge Paste
P05-002 Plastic/acrylic cleaner
or Fine
P05-004 Plastic/acrylic polish
or
or
3. Cleaning - Acrylic Plastic Windows
CAUTION: USE ONLY THE RECOMMENDED MATERIALS TO CLEAN THE WINDOWS. DO NOT
USE PAPER PRODUCTS ON THE WINDOWS.
A. Cleaning
(1) Outside surface of windows:
(a) Flush the windows with clean water.
(b) Apply soap solution (Material No. P01-005) to the windows and clean them with a
sponge (Material No. P02-005).
(c) Flush the windows with clean water.
(d) Remove all the remaining oil or grease with a lint-free cleaning cloth (Material No.
P02-041) made moist with solvent (Material No. P01-008).
(e) Flush the windows with clean water.
(f) Dry the windows with a chamois leather (Material No. P02-004).
(g) Apply plastic/acrylic cleaner (Material No. P05-011 or P05-012 or P05-013) with a
lint-free cleaning cloth (Material No. P02-041).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 701
12-21-56 Jul 30/17
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Inside surface of windows:
(a) Clean the windows with a chamois leather (Material No. P02-004) and clean water.
(b) Remove all remaining grease and fingerprints with plastic/acrylic cleaner (Material
No. P05-011 or P05-012 or P05-013) and a lint-free cleaning cloth (Material No.
P02-041).
B. Polishing
(1) Remove small scratches from the window with plastic polish (Material No. P05-002 or
P05-004).
(2) If necessary, do the applicable cleaning procedure again.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 702
12-21-56 Jul 30/17
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLER - LUBRICATION
1. General
This task gives the procedure to lubricate the propeller.
Tool No. Description Remarks
110.88.07.065 Safety clip Circuit breaker hold open

- Grease Gun
B. Consumable Materials
Part No. Description Qty Remarks

P04-016 Grease A/R Ref. Hartzell Service Advisory
No 17 for other approved
greases
P04-045 Grease A/R Ref. Hartzell SL HC-SL-61-
366 <1>
NOTE: <1> Hartzell recommend grease (Material No. P04-045) as the preferred alternative.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT YOU OBEY THE INSTRUCTIONS IN HARTZELL SERVICE LETTER
HC-SL-61-366 WHEN YOU LUBRICATE THE PROPELLER WITH GREASE. YOU MUST
DO A CHECK OF THE LUBRICATION LABEL ON THE PROPELLER AND:
• DO NOT MIX DIFFERENT SPECIFICATIONS AND/OR BRANDS OF GREASE

EXCEPT AS NOTED IN THE ACCOMPLISHMENT INSTRUCTIONS SECTION OF
HARTZELL SERVICE LETTER HC-SL-61-366.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE GREASE FITTINGS ARE CLEAN BEFORE YOU CONNECT
THE GREASE GUN. THIS PREVENTS DIRT GETTING INTO THE COMPONENT
DURING THE GREASING PROCEDURE.
CAUTION: REMOVE THE REAR GREASE FITTING BEFORE YOU LUBRICATE THE BLADE
ROOTS. THE SEALS CAN BE DAMAGED IF THE REAR GREASE FITTINGS ARE NOT
REMOVED.
A. Job Set Up
(1) Open and install a safety clip to the circuit breaker:
STARTER.
(2) Remove the screws and washers and remove the propeller spinner dome.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 301
12-27-61 Feb 28/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Lubricate the Blade Roots
(1) Remove the caps from the front grease fittings on the blade roots.
(2) Remove the rear grease fittings and caps from the blade roots.
CAUTION: OBEY THE INSTRUCTIONS IN HARTZELL SERVICE LETTER HC-SL-61-366

WHEN YOU LUBRICATE WITH GREASE.
(3) Use a grease gun to lubricate each blade root with grease (Material No. P04-016 or P04-
045) until clean grease comes out of the rear grease fitting hole.
(4) Install the caps on the front grease fittings.
(5) Install the rear grease fittings and caps.
(6) Remove the unwanted grease from the grease fittings and adjacent area.
C. Lubricate the Link Arms

WHEN YOU APPLY GREASE.
(1) Apply grease (Material No. P04-016 or P04-045) by hand to each end of the link arm.
(2) Remove unwanted grease from the link arms.
D. Lubricate the Piston Guide Rods

WHEN YOU APPLY GREASE.
(1) Apply grease (Material No. P04-016 or P04-045) by hand to each piston guide rod.
(2) Remove unwanted grease from the link arms.
4. Close Up
A. Put the propeller spinner dome into position and install the washers and screws.
B. Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
C. Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
STARTER.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 302
12-27-61 Feb 28/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PISTON GUIDE RODS
LINK ARMS
BLADE ROOT GREASE FITTING

6421
Propeller - Lubrication
Figure 301
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 303
12-27-61 Feb 28/20
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 304
12-27-61 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 20 - STANDARD PRACTICES

Chapter Chapter
Section Section
List of Effective 1 Jul 31/22 20-10-05 (Cont’d) 203 Jul 30/15
Pages 2 Jul 31/22 204 Jul 30/15
205 Jul 30/15
Table of Contents 1 Jun 30/21 206 Jul 30/15
2 Jun 30/21
20-10-06 201 Oct 30/20
20-00-00 201 Jul 30/16 202 Oct 30/20
202 Jul 30/16 203 Oct 30/20
203 Jul 30/16 204 Oct 30/20
204 Jul 30/16 205 Oct 30/20
205 Jul 30/16 206 Oct 30/20
206 Jul 30/16 207 Oct 30/20
208 Oct 30/20
20-10-01 201 Oct 30/20 209 Oct 30/20
202 Oct 30/20 210 Oct 30/20
203 Oct 30/20 211 Oct 30/20
204 Oct 30/20 212 Oct 30/20
205 Oct 30/20 213 Oct 30/20
206 Oct 30/20 214 Oct 30/20
207 Oct 30/20 215 Oct 30/20
208 Oct 30/20 216 Oct 30/20
209 Oct 30/20 217 Oct 30/20
210 Oct 30/20 218 Oct 30/20
211 Oct 30/20 219 Oct 30/20
212 Oct 30/20 220 Oct 30/20
213 Oct 30/20
214 Oct 30/20 20-31-00 1 Jul 31/22
2 Jul 31/22
20-10-02 201 May 30/19 3 Jul 31/22
202 May 30/19 4 Jul 31/22
203 May 30/19 5 Jul 31/22
204 May 30/19 6 Jul 31/22
205 May 30/19 7 Jul 31/22
206 May 30/19 8 Jul 31/22
207 May 30/19 9 Jul 31/22
208 May 30/19 10 Jul 31/22
209 May 30/19 11 Jul 31/22
210 May 30/19 12 Jul 31/22
13 Jul 31/22
20-10-03 201 Feb 28/10 14 Jul 31/22
202 Feb 28/10 15 Jul 31/22
16 Jul 31/22
20-10-04 701 Jun 30/21 17 Jul 31/22
702 Jun 30/21 18 Jul 31/22
19 Jul 31/22
20-10-05 201 Jul 30/15 20 Jul 31/22
202 Jul 30/15
Page 1
20-LEP Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter Chapter
Section Section
20-31-00 (Cont’d) 21 Jul 31/22 20-40-00 (Cont’d) 201 Jul 31/22
22 Jul 31/22 202 Jul 31/22
23 Jul 31/22 203 Jul 31/22
24 Jul 31/22 204 Jul 31/22
25 Jul 31/22 205 Jul 31/22
26 Jul 31/22 206 Jul 31/22
27 Jul 31/22 207 Jul 31/22
28 Jul 31/22 208 Jul 31/22
29 Jul 31/22 209 Jul 31/22
30 Jul 31/22 210 Jul 31/22
31 Jul 31/22
32 Jul 31/22 801 Mar 30/08
33 Jul 31/22 802 Mar 30/08
34 Jul 31/22
35 Jul 31/22 20-40-10 201 Jul 31/22
36 Jul 31/22 202 Jul 31/22
37 Jul 31/22 203 Jul 31/22
38 Jul 31/22 204 Jul 31/22
39 Jul 31/22 205 Jul 31/22
40 Jul 31/22 206 Jul 31/22
41 Jul 31/22
42 Jul 31/22 20-40-20 201 Feb 28/20
43 Jul 31/22 202 Feb 28/20
44 Jul 31/22
45 Jul 31/22 20-50-00 401 Jun 30/21
46 Jul 31/22 402 Jun 30/21
47 Jul 31/22 403 Jun 30/21
48 Jul 31/22 404 Jun 30/21
49 Jul 31/22 405 Jun 30/21
50 Jul 31/22 406 Jun 30/21
407 Jun 30/21
20-40-00 1 Nov 30/03 408 Jun 30/21
2 Nov 30/03 409 Jun 30/21
3 Nov 30/03 410 Jun 30/21
4 Nov 30/03
5 Nov 30/03 20-50-01 201 Sep 30/07
6 Nov 30/03 202 Sep 30/07
7 Nov 30/03 203 Sep 30/07
8 Nov 30/03 204 Sep 30/07
9 Nov 30/03
10 Nov 30/03
11 Nov 30/03
12 Nov 30/03
13 Nov 30/03
Page 2
20-LEP Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 20 - STANDARD PRACTICES

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
STANDARD PRACTICES 20-00-00
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND GENERAL 20-00-00 201 All

MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
LOCKING AND RETAINING DEVICES 20-10-01

TORQUE WRENCHES AND PROCEDURES 20-10-02
EQUIPMENT HANDLING 20-10-03
ELECTRONIC FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS 20-10-04
Cleaning 701 All
WIRE CABLES 20-10-05
PIPES AND FITTINGS 20-10-06
CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST 20-31-00

General 1 All
CORROSION 20-40-00
General 1 All
Repair 801 All
CHEMICAL CONVERSION COATING 20-40-10

20-TOC
Page 1
Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter
Section
CORROSION CONTROL - SEIZED FASTENERS 20-40-20

HELICAL-COIL THREAD INSERTS 20-50-00
Removal / Installation 401 All
BUSHES AND BEARINGS 20-50-01
20-TOC
Page 2
Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND GENERAL MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
This section gives details of the safety precautions and general maintenance practices that must be
observed during maintenance of the aircraft.
2. Safety Precautions
A. Hazardous and Toxic Materials
WARNING: SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN WHEN YOU USE MATERIALS

WHICH ARE THOUGHT TO BE DANGEROUS OR TOXIC. YOU MUST OBEY THE
MANUFACTURER‘S SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR ALL OF THESE MATERIALS.
NOTE: Most materials now have safety precautions included on the packaging.
B. General
WARNING: WHEN YOU DO WORK ON AND AROUND THE AIRCRAFT, YOU MUST OBEY
THE INSTRUCTIONS THAT FOLLOW:
• You must wear the safety approved protective clothing

• You must wear the safety approved protection for your eyes
• You must wear the safety approved protection for your ears in an environment with
an increased level of noise
• You must wear the safety approved shoes
• You must not smoke or use the related combustion sources
• Do not eat food in the work area
• Do not inhale the vapors from solvents, sealants, paints and other materials. Make
sure that the work area has a good supply of clean air when you use these materials
• Do not let the solvents, sealants and paints get on your skin. If necessary, put on
protective clothing
• Make sure that all the equipment used on the aircraft is approved and will not cause
a fire
• Make sure the correct fire extinguisher is available at all times
• Obey the local instructions to discard unwanted materials. Make sure that no
contamination from the unwanted materials gets into the water supplies
• Obey the manufacturer‘s instructions when you mix chemicals such as sealants
• Obey all the local safety regulations.
C. Drilling, Abrading and Removal of Surface Finish
WARNING: YOU MUST WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (GLOVES,

FILTER MASKS AND FACE-SHIELDS/SAFETY-GLASSES/GOGGLES).
ABRASIVE DUST CAN GET IN YOUR LUNGS OR ON YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE
INJURY OR SKIN IRRITATION. DO NOT INHALE DUST. WHEN AUTHORIZED,
MAKE THE AREA MOIST BEFORE YOU MANUALLY ABRADE TO PREVENT
AIRBORNE DUST PARTICLES. WHEN AUTHORIZED, USE A HAND-HELD
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
20-00-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ABRASION/GRINDER/SANDER TOOL THAT IS EXPLOSION PROOF WITH A

SUCTION SYSTEM TO REMOVE DUST PARTICLES. MAKE SURE THAT THE
WORK AREA IS FULLY VENTILATED. OBEY YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS
WHEN YOU DRILL OR ABRADE PAINTS, FILLERS, OR ANY OTHER
MATERIALS. OBEY YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS WHEN YOU COLLECT AND
DISCARD THE DUST AND OTHER UNWANTED MATERIALS.
WARNING: WHEN YOU DRILL OR ABRADE CARBON-FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC

(CFRP) YOU MUST IMMEDIATELY REMOVE THE DUST WITH A VACUUM
CLEANER. CARBON DUST IS ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND EXPLOSIVE.
YOU MUST ONLY USE EXPLOSION-PROOF POWER TOOLS. OBEY YOUR
LOCAL REGULATIONS WHEN YOU ABRADE AND DISCARD DUST.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT YOU REMOVE ALL MASKING MATERIALS AND REMAINING
ADHESIVE FROM THE AIRCRAFT AFTER YOU REPAIR SURFACE
PROTECTION. TAKE EXTRA CARE WHEN YOU MASK THE PROBES AND
SENSORS AS FOLLOWS:
• The pitot probe

• The static ports LH and RH
• The stall warning detector.
WARNING: APPLY THE MINIMUM ADHESIVE MATERIALS NECESSARY TO THESE ITEMS.

WHEN YOU USE ADHESIVE TAPE, THERE IS A RISK THAT SOME TAPE OR
ADHESIVE FROM THE TAPE WILL STAY ON THE PROBES AND SENSORS.
THIS CAN CAUSE INCORRECT INDICATIONS TO THE RELATED COCKPIT
INSTRUMENTS. WHEN NECESSARY, DO A FUNCTIONAL TEST OF THESE
SYSTEMS AFTER YOU REMOVE THE MASKING MATERIALS.
D. Danger Areas
(1) The noise produced by the engine and propeller can damage hearing. Always wear ear
defenders when you work near the aircraft when the engine is running.
(2) Do not go near the propeller when the engine is running.
(3) Do not go into the danger area around the engine when it is running.
(4) Beware of propeller wash behind the aircraft when the engine is running at high power
settings. Make sure that there are no loose articles in the danger area behind the aircraft.
(5) The antennas for communication and navigation equipment (if installed) emit hazardous
radio frequency (RF) energy when operating. Obey the minimum safe working distances
for applicable systems given in Table 201 when the system is operating.
NOTE: The safe working distances do not apply when working inside the cabin or
cockpit. The airframe structure provides shielding against RF energy.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
20-00-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WARNING: OBEY THE DATA FOR THE MINIMUM SAFE DISTANCE FROM ANTENNAS
WHEN YOU DO WORK ON THE AIRCRAFT. RF RADIATION IS DANGEROUS
AND CAN CAUSE:
- RF BURNS AND PERMANENT INJURY TO PERSONNEL.
- ACCIDENTAL OPERATION OF ELECTRO-EXPLOSIVE DEVICES.
- IGNITION OF FLAMMABLE FUMES FROM FUEL, GASES OR LIQUIDS.
System Antenna Minimum Safe

(If Installed) Working Distance
DME (KN63)
DME (KN62A)
Radar Altimeter
TAS (KTA870)
1 meter (3.28 feet)
VHF (GNS430W)
VHF (GIA63W)
XPDR (GTX33)
XPDR (GTX330)
HF radio 3 meters (9.84 feet)
Weather Radar (GWX68) 3,29 meters (10.8 feet)
Weather Radar (RDR2100) 4,57 meters (15.0 feet)
Minimum Safe Working Distance from Antenna
Table 201
E. Electrical
(1) Before work is done on the electrical system open the circuit breaker of the applicable
circuit to make it safe or disconnect the aircraft battery and disconnect external power.
(2) Wait for a minimum of six minutes after power is disconnected before you start work on the
engine ignition system. The voltage and current produced by the ignition unit can kill.
(3) Only use insulated tools when you work on live electrical systems.
F. Engine and Propeller
(1) The synthetic oil used in the engine is harmful if it remains on the skin for a long time.
Wash the skin thoroughly if you get oil on your skin and change clothing which is
contaminated with the oil.
(2) Wash the skin thoroughly if you get fuel on your skin and change clothing which is
contaminated with the fuel.
(3) Wipe up fuel which is spilled immediately. If large amounts are spilled, turn off electrically
operated equipment and get the fire service to remove the spilled fuel.
(4) The synthetic oil used in the engine can damage paint and some rubber components.
Remove spilled oil immediately from the engine and components.
(5) Do not use drained oil again.
(6) Make sure that foreign objects do not get into the engine.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 203
20-00-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) If an engine task is not described in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual, refer to the Pratt &
Whitney Engine Maintenance Manual.
(8) After maintenance work on the engine, do an engine ground run if necessary to look for
leaks (Ref. 71-00-00).
(9) If a propeller task is not described in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual, refer to the Hartzell
Propeller Maintenance Manual.
(10) Wait for a minimum of six minutes after power is disconnected before you start work on the
engine ignition system. The voltage and current produced by the ignition unit can kill.
G. Fuel System
(1) Fuel vapor is highly explosive and harmful to the eyes and skin or if swallowed. Observe
these precautions when you do work on the fuel system:
• Do not smoke, eat or drink.

• Use explosion proof lamps or flashlamps
• Set all unnecessary electrical equipment off
• make sure that the aircraft is electrically grounded
• If you get fuel in your eyes, flush the eyes with water and get medical aid
• If you swallow fuel get medical aid
• If you get fuel on your skin or clothes, wash the skin immediately and change
contaminated clothes
• Before work is done in the fuel tanks, defuel the aircraft and let the tanks vent for at
least three hours
• Wipe up fuel which is spilled immediately. If large amounts are spilled, turn off
electrically operated equipment and get the fire service to remove the spilled fuel.
• Make sure that suitable fire extinguishing equipment is available and personnel are
familiar with it
• Do not use adhesive tape to seal tank openings
• Do not use drained fuel again
• Observe the direction of flow arrows on components
• Do not install cadmium plated components or fasteners in the fuel system.
H. Oxygen System (if installed)
(1) Do not use oils and greases on oxygen system components. An explosion can occur when
oils and greases come into contact with oxygen.
(2) Replenish the oxygen system slowly to prevent excessive heat developing.
I. Hydraulic
(1) The hydraulic fluid used in the aircraft is harmful if it remains on the skin for a long time.
Wash the skin thoroughly if you get hydraulic fluid on your skin and change clothing which
is contaminated with the fluid.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 204
20-00-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Do not use hydraulic fluid again which has been drained from an aircraft system.
(3) Do not smoke, eat or drink when you work with hydraulic fluid.
(4) If you get fuel in your eyes, flush the eyes with water and get medical aid.
(5) If you swallow hydraulic fluid get medical aid.
(6) If you get hydraulic fluid on your skin or clothes, wash the skin immediately and change
contaminated clothes.
(7) The high pressures used in the hydraulic system are dangerous. Do not:
• Loosen or tighten hydraulic unions when the system is pressurized

• use your hands to check for leaks when the system is pressurized
(8) Make sure that the area around hydraulically operated components is clear of personnel
and equipment before you operate the system.
J. Flight Controls
(1) Before you operate a flight control system make sure that:
• All rigging pins are removed

• All control locks are removed
• The area above and below the control surface is free from obstructions
(2) After a flight control system is adjusted, get another person to do a check (an independent
or dual check) of the control system. The check must include:
• a range of movement check

• a check for correct assembly and locking of the area that was adjusted
• a check, with the access panels installed, to make sure that full and free movement
of the control is available
K. Lights
(1) Wait for a minimum of ten minutes after power is disconnected before you start work on
the strobe light power supply units. The voltage and current produced by the power supply
unit can kill.
(2) Do not look directly at the strobe lights when they operate. The eyes can be damaged by
the intensity of the light.
3. General Maintenance practices
A. Only use materials listed in the Consumable Materials List during maintenance procedures.
B. Always use new O-rings, gaskets and seals when a component is installed.
C. Always use new lockwire, safety wire, cotter pins and tab or safety washers when a component
is installed.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 205
20-00-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. If a self locking (stiff nut) can be turned on the bolt or stud by hand, reject the nut.
E. When you have to torque load a self locking nut (stiff-nut), measure the torque necessary to turn
the nut and add this value to the required torque.
F. When a component is replaced, make sure that the serial number, life used and life remaining
are entered in the aircraft records.
G. Always install blanks, covers or dust caps when a system is disconnected. Do not use adhesive
tape.
H. If a torque value is not given in a procedure, refer to the Standard Torque Values section in this
chapter.
I. On completion of a maintenance task, make sure that all tools and equipment are removed. Do a
check of the work area for loose articles such as cotter pins, lockwire and cleaning cloths.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 206
20-00-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LOCKING AND RETAINING DEVICES - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
The purpose of locking devices is to prevent loosening or disengagement of mating components

because of stress, vibration or changes in temperature.
Locking devices must be installed to prevent fretting, distortion or displacement of the locked parts.
The locking devices used must be to the specification given by the aircraft manufacturer in this
maintenance manual.
2. Cotter Pins (Ref. Fig. 201)
A. General
Cotter pins must be a close fit in the bolt, stud or clevis pin. The legs of the cotter pin must be
bent and cut to prevent injury or pick up on clothes or cleaning cloth in accordance with:
• Version A or B for castellated fasteners (Ref. Step 2.B. or 2.C.)

• The details given for rotating parts (Ref. Step 2.D.).
The ends cut from the cotter pins must not be left in the aircraft.
After the legs are bent the cotter pin must be examined for cracks and cuts around the bends.
Cotter pins must only be used once.
B. Version A
NOTE: This version can be used for all cotter pin sizes.
Put the cotter pin into position with the hole axis of the cotter pin head at 90° to the direction of
the bolt axis, so that the head can be inserted into the slot of the castellation.
Bend the top prong bent back over the end of the bolt approximately two thirds of the way across
the bolt end diameter.
Bend the bottom prong downwards onto one of the nut flats. Cut it shorter so it does not touch
the washer or surface of the part if necessary.
C. Version B
NOTE: This version is usually used for thin nuts.
Put the cotter pin into position with the hole axis of the cotter pin head along the same direction
as the bolt axis.
Bend the prongs back outwards in opposite directions. The ends of the prongs must be a tight fit
and must not extend past the flanks. In necessary, bend them into the adjacent slots of the
castellated nut as an alternative.
Press the eyelet into the slot to fix it in position if there is too much movement.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
20-10-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Rotating Parts (Ref. Fig. 202)
(1) Install the cotter pin in accordance with Figure 202.
(2) Make sure that the prongs of the cotter pin are long enough to cover 60° minimum.
(3) Make sure that the prongs of the cotter pin are shorter than the tangent line for clevis pins
with diameter more than or equal to 4 mm (0.157 in).
NOTE: The prongs of the cotter pin can be longer than the tangent line for clevis pins
with diameter less than 4 mm (0.157 in).
3. Locking Plates (Ref. Fig. 203)
Locking plates are installed over the nut or bolt head and are held by a screw. The screw is locked by a
spring or shakeproof washer, by peening or with lockwire.
4. Locking Washers (Ref. Fig. 204)
Locking washers can be of the spring, shakeproof or tab type.
A. Spring Washers
Spring washers are usually installed with a plain washer between the spring washer and the
component. This prevents damage to the surface of the component or the protective finish.
B. Shakeproof Washers
You can only use shakeproof washers once. These washers are used as an alternative to spring
washers.
C. Tab Washers
You can only use a tab washer once. Tab washers are installed under the nut or bolt head. The
tabs on the washer are bent against the side of the nut or bolt head to prevent movement. The
tab that prevents movement of the nut or bolt head is to be bent first. After you bend the tabs,
examine the tab washer for signs of cracks.
5. Circlips and Locking Rings (Ref. Fig. 205)
After installation, you must examine circlips and locking rings to make sure that they are correctly
engaged into the groove in the component. It is recommended that you replace circlips and locking
rings with new items each time you remove them.
6. Lockwire (Ref. Fig. 206)
A. General
The type of lockwire used is given in the procedures of this manual.
Do not overstress the lockwire or it can break during service due to vibration. Bend the ends of
the lockwire back so that they can not cause injury to personnel.
Safety the lockwire with the angle of approach of the lockwire not less than 45° to the rotational
axis of the component to be locked. The line of approach must be tangential to the parts.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
20-10-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Install locking tabs with the tab and the lockwire in line.
Do not use lockwire more than once.
Do not use lockwire to lock emergency controls as the lockwire will prevent operation of the
control. Only indicator thread or special copper shear wire must be used.
Control cable turnbuckles must be safetied by the method shown. Before the turnbuckle is
safetied, a check must be done to make sure that the end fittings extend past the inspection hole
and are in safety. The lockwire must cross twice between the body of the turnbuckle and each
end fitting. The twisted ends must then be bent and pushed into the hole to prevent fouls.
The lockwire is inserted into the hole and a small tension force applied.
CAUTION: DO NOT MISTAKE LEFT HAND OR RIGHT HAND THREADS. THE TENSION OF
THE LOCKWIRE MUST BE APPLIED IN THE DIRECTION OF ROTATION TO
TIGHTEN THE FASTENER AND THUS LOCK IT IN POSITION. DAMAGE TO THE
AIRCRAFT AND/OR EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR IF THE LOCKWIRE TENSION IS
APPLIED IN THE WRONG ROTATIONAL DIRECTION.
Install the lockwire to give tension in the rotational direction necessary to tighten the fastener.
This prevents fastener rotation in the direction to loosen it.
Care must be taken during installation of the lockwire into the fastener holes:
• Do not scratch the lockwire at the edges of the fastener holes as you push it through the
holes
• Do not bend the lockwire around sharp edges and corners.
B. Double Twist Method
NOTE: The double-twist method is the most common lockwire installation method.
For the double-twist method the lockwire is usually twisted with safetying pliers. When this is not
possible due to restricted access:
• Use flat pliers or

• Twist by hand.
Make sure that the lockwire angle is not more than 60° when you use flat pliers or your hands.
Unless specifically instructed in the procedures of a specific chapter:
• Do not safety more than the maximum of three fasteners together

• Do not safety fasteners together more than 100 mm (3.937 in) / 150 mm (5.906 in) apart
• Do not exceed the maximum lockwire length of 600 mm (23.622 in).
Safety the lockwire with an additional attachment point when the distance is more than:
• 100 mm (3.937 in) for three fasteners

• 150 mm (5.906 in) for two fasteners.
Twist the lockwire in a clockwise direction. Change the direction when three fasteners are
safetied to prevent lockwire movement over the fastener head and tension loss.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 203
20-10-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: CUT THE LOCKWIRE ENDS TO BETWEEN 10 AND 15 mm (0.394 AND 0.591 in)
AND BEND THEM BACK TOWARDS THE FASTENER HEAD. THE ENDS OF THE
LOCKWIRE ARE SHARP AND CAN CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONNEL IF THEY
ARE NOT BENT BACK.
Insert the top lockwire into the safety hole for the clockwise direction and the bottom lockwire for
the counter-clockwise direction. Twist the lockwire counter-clockwise at the lockwire end.
Apply the correct number of twists when you safety with lockwire in accordance with Table 201.
Diameter of Lockwire mm (in) Number of Twists per cm
≤ 0.5 (0.020) 2 to 3.5

>0.5 (0.020) 1 to 2.5
Table 201 - Correct Number of Twists
NOTE: One twist is a full 360° turn of the pair of lockwires.
C. Single Lockwire Method
Use this method when only specifically instructed in the procedures of a specific chapter. When
you safety with the single lockwire method:
• Do not exceed the maximum lockwire length of 600 mm (23.622 in)

• Safety as many fasteners as needed with the maximum length of lockwire
• Safety a minimum of three fasteners together
• Do not safety fasteners together more than 50 mm (1.969 in) apart.
Safety the lockwire and twist it as shown in the example given (Ref. Fig. 206)
Safety the ends of the lockwire with the double-twist method (Ref. Step 6.B.).
7. Control Cable Turnbuckles
Before you safety a turnbuckle you must do a check to make sure that the end fittings extend past the
inspection hole and are in safety.
All new cable turnbuckles are safetied using locking clips. Align the grooves in the turnbuckle barrel and
the terminal and insert the straight end of the locking clip into the hole. When the clip is fully inserted,
insert the hook into the hole in the turnbuckle barrel. The hook lip must engage on the edge of the
barrel to lock in position.
Use locking clips one time only.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE LOCKWIRE TO SAFETY A TURNBUCKLE DESIGNED TO BE SAFETIED

WITH A LOCKING CLIP. DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT AND/OR EQUIPMENT CAN
OCCUR.
Older control cable turnbuckles that do not use locking clips must be safetied with lockwire by the
method shown in Figure 205. The lockwire must cross twice between the body of the turnbuckle and
each end fitting. The twisted ends must then be bent and pushed into the hole to prevent fouls.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 204
20-10-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8. Self Locking Fasteners
Self-locking nuts are used in different parts of the aircraft. Nuts, made of all metal, or nuts with a nylon
insert are used.
These fasteners must be replaced if they can install them on the bolt, screw or stud, with finger
pressure only, until the threads show from the nut. If the new nut can be installed by finger pressure,
also replace the bolt, screw or stud.
A minimum of one thread of the bolt, screw or stud must show from the nut when it is fully tightened.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 205
20-10-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TOP PRONG COVERS

APPROXIMATELY TWO THIRDS PRONGS BENT PRONGS BENT
ACROSS THE DIAMETER INTO ADJACENT TIGHTLY AGAINST
OF THE THE BOLT END SLOTS NUT FLATS
VERSION A VERSION B
BOTTOM PRONG MUST

BE BENT DOWNWARDS
ONTO A NUT FLAT
BUT NOT TOUCH
THE WASHER OR PART
S6338
Cotter Pins
Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 206
20-10-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
WASHER COTTER PIN
EXAMPLE WITH WASHER CLEVIS PIN
A
RING COTTER PIN
EXAMPLE WITH RING CLEVIS PIN
TANGENT
60°
MINIMUM
SECTION COTTER PIN
A-A
TYPICAL
60°
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM
LENGTH OF
PRONGS
96665
Cotter Pins - Rotating Parts

Figure 202
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 207
20-10-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
S6339
Locking Plate
Figure 203
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 208
20-10-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SINGLE COIL DOUBLE COIL CRINKLE CUP
SPRING WASHERS
SHAKEPROOF WASHERS
TAB WASHERS
S6340
Types of Washers
Figure 204
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 209
20-10-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTERNAL EXTERNAL INTERNAL EXTERNAL
CIRCLIPS
WIRE TYPES SHEET/PLATE TYPES
LOCKING RINGS
INTERNAL EXTERNAL EXTERNAL/INTERNAL

S6341
Circlips and Locking Rings

Figure 205
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 210
20-10-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ROTATIONAL DIRECTION TO TIGHTEN FASTENER
LOCKING WIRE
TENSION DIRECTION
FASTENER LOCKING WIRE
LOCKING WIRE
TENSION DIRECTION
TYPICAL SECTION THROUGH FASTENER AT LOCKING WIRE HOLES -

DOUBLE TWIST METHOD
TYPICAL SAFETYING PLIERS - DOUBLE TWIST METHOD
MAXIMUM 60°
MAXIMUM ANGLE WHEN YOU TWIST THE LOCKWIRE WITH FLAT PLIERS OR BY HAND - DOUBLE TWIST METHOD
96662
Lockwire
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 211
20-10-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INSERT THE TOP

LOCKWIRE IN THE
SAFETY HOLE FOR
CLOCKWISE DIRECTION
TWIST THE LOCKWIRE CHANGE THE DIRECTION
IN A CLOCKWISE WHEN THREE FASTENERS
DIRECTION ARE SAFETIED
= 100 mm (3.937 in.)
INSERT THE BOTTOM

LOCKWIRE IN THE
SAFETY HOLE FOR
COUNTER-CLOCKWISE
DIRECTION
EXAMPLE OF THREE FASTENERS - DOUBLE-TWIST METHOD
TWIST THE LOCKWIRE

COUNTER-CLOCKWISE
AT THE LOCKWIRE END
EXAMPLE OF LOCKWIRE END TWIST - DOUBLE-TWIST METHOD

96663
Lockwire
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 212
20-10-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXAMPLE OF SEVERAL FASTENERS SAFETIED - SINGLE LOCKWIRE METHOD
Lockwire
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 213
20-10-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CORRECT INCORRECT
12 mm (0.5 in.)
90°
90°
NOT LESS
THAN 45°
CLOSED
END OF
WIRE
CORRECT INCORRECT
USE OF POSITION
TABS OF TAB
INCORRECT
INSTALLATION
OF WIRE
TWISTED END TO BE TUCKED INSPECTION HOLE

INTO HOLE IN SWAGED FITTINGS
TO PREVENT FOULS
CABLE SWAGED FITTINGS CABLE
TWISTED END TO BE TUCKED

INTO HOLE IN TURNBUCKLE
TO PREVENT FOULS
FORK END INSPECTION HOLE

S6342
Lockwire
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 214
20-10-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TORQUE WRENCHES AND PROCEDURES - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
This task gives data about:
• The use of torque wrenches

• Standard torque tightening procedures and values
• Calculation of the correct indication on a torque wrench when you use an extension.
2. Definition of Torque
Torque is the force that causes a movement around an axis. A torque is applied to nuts, bolts and other
fasteners to make sure they do not become loose or have too much stress. You use a torque wrench
with an applicable extension to apply the correct amount of torque to the fastener. In the Aircraft
Maintenance Manual (AMM) the torque is given in Newton meters (Nm) and pounds-force inches (lbf
in).
Torque is calculated by the formula below:
Torque = Force applied x Distance from axis to which the force is applied.
3. Standard Torque Tightening Procedures and Values (Ref. Table 201 thru Table 206)
Torque values for nuts, bolts and screws are given in the relevant procedure in this manual.
Unless otherwise specified in the relevant procedure, all torque figures are for dry threads (as received
condition).
If no torque figure is given in the relevant procedure, then the values given in Table 201 thru Table 206
must be used. These standard values are for dry threads (no lubricant, as supplied), lubricated (all
greases) and sealant.
Before you torque tighten a nut, bolt or screw, clean the threads and, if applicable, apply the lubricant
specified in the maintenance procedure.
NOTE: Corrosion Preventative Compound (CPC) must not be applied to threads.
When castellated nuts, which are safetied with cotter pins, are torque tightened, the cotter pin holes
must align when the nut is tightened between the minimum and maximum values. If the holes do not
align, the nut must be replaced, or the washer under the nut must be replaced with one of a different
thickness until the holes align. Do not loosen the nut to align the cotter pin holes.
The torque necessary to turn a self-locking nut is not included in the standard values given in the
tables. To correctly torque a self-locking nut use the following procedure:
• Find the torque necessary to turn the nut on the bolt approximately one turn before the nut makes
contact
• Add this torque figure to the values in the tables.
NOTE: If a self-locking nut can be turned by hand on the bolt, it must be replaced.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
20-10-02 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Use of Torque Wrenches (Ref. Fig. 201)
A. General
Make sure that torque wrenches are regularly calibrated.
Set the torque wrench to the required figure and check the torque on a calibrated source before
use.
Clean the threads (if necessary) and, if applicable, apply the lubricant specified in the
maintenance procedure.
Hold the wrench handle at the center and apply torque slowly and evenly until the required value
is reached.
On castellated nuts which are safetied with a cotter pin, the cotter pin holes should align when
the nut is tightened between the minimum and maximum values. If the holes do not align, the nut
must be replaced, or the washer under the nut must be replaced with one of a different thickness
until the holes align. Do not loosen the nut to align the cotter pin holes.
B. Calculation of the Torque when a Drive Extension is Used
If an extension or adapter is used with the torque wrench, the torque set on the wrench must be
calculated using this formula:
Indicated Torque = Specified Torque x L

L +X
Where:
L is the distance from the center of the wrench handle to the center of the the wrench
drive.
X is the length of the extension.
For example: A fastener which requires a torque of 2,0 Nm, with a wrench distance of 450 mm
and an extension 50 mm long, will require a set torque of:
Indicated Torque = 2,0 x 450 = 1,8 Nm

450 + 50
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
20-10-02 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
X L
EXTENSION HAND GRIP
71583
Torque Wrenches and Extensions

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 203
20-10-02 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Bolt Type STEEL, CADMIUM PLATED Tensile strength: 125 ksi

Shear strength: 75 ksi
Bolt AN3-AN20 or equivalent
Nut type STEEL, CADMIUM PLATED / DRY-FILM Strength class: 125 - 160 ksi
LUBRICATED
Nut MS21042 or equivalent
Installation condition No Lubricant (as supplied) Lubricated (all greases) Sealant
Thread UNF / UNJF Standard Tightening Torque (T)
Dash - no.
in mm Nm [lbf in]
1.3 - 1.5 1.1 - 1.2 1.2 - 1.3
3 0.1900-32 4.826 x 0.79
(12 - 13) (10 - 11) (11 - 12)
5.1 - 5.5 4.0 - 4.3 4.4 - 4.8
4 0.2500-28 6.350 x 0.91
(45 - 49) (35 - 38) (39 - 42)
10.1 - 11 7.9 - 8.5 8.8 - 9.5
5 0.3125-24 7.937 x 1.06
(89 - 97) (70 - 75) (78 - 84)
18.2 - 19.7 13.9 - 15.1 15.6 - 16.9
6 0.3750-24 9.525 x 1.06
(161 - 174) (123 - 134) (138 - 150)
29 - 31 22 - 24 25 - 27
7 0.4375-20 11.112 x 1.27 (257 - 274) (195 - 212) (221 - 239)
44 - 48 33 - 36 38 - 41
8 0.5000-20 12.700 x 1.27
(389 - 425) (292 - 319) (336 - 363)
63 - 68 48 - 51 54 - 58
9 0.5625-18 14.287 x 1.41
(558 - 602) (425 - 451) (478 - 513)
87 - 94 66 - 71 74 - 81
10 0.6250-18 15.875 x 1.41
(770 - 832) (584 - 628) (655 - 717)
152 - 165 114 - 124 129 - 140
12 0.7500-16 19.050 x 1.59
(1912 - 2071) (1009 - 1097) (1142 - 1239)
242 - 262 182 - 197 206 - 223
14 0.8750-14 22.225 x 1.81
(2142 - 2319) (1611 - 1744) (1823 - 1974)
360 - 390 271 - 293 307 - 332
16 1.000-12 25.400 x 2.12
(3186 - 3452) (2399 - 2593) (2717 - 2938)
Tightening torques for 125 ksi steel bolts

Table 201
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 204
20-10-02 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Bolt Type STEEL, CADMIUM PLATED Tensile strength: 160ksi

Bolt NAS6603-NAS6620 or equivalent
Nut type STEEL, CADMIUM PLATED / DRY-FILM Strength class: 125 - 160 ksi
LUBRICATED
Nut MS21042 or equivalent
Dash - no.
in mm Nm [lbf in]
1.9 - 2.1 1.6 - 1.7 1.7 - 1.8
3 0.1900-32 4.826 x 0.79
(17 - 19) (14 - 15) (15 - 16)
7.3 - 7.9 5.7 - 6.1 6.3 - 6.8
4 0.2500-28 6.350 x 0.91
(65 - 70) (50 - 54) (56 - 60)
14.4 - 15.6 11.2 - 12.1 12.4 - 13.5
5 0.3125-24 7.937 x 1.06
(127 - 138) (99 - 107) (110 - 120)
26 - 28 20 - 21 22 - 24
6 0.3750-24 9.525 x 1.06
(230 - 248) (177 - 186) (195 - 212)
41 - 44 31 - 34 35 - 38
7 0.4375-20 11.112 x 1.27
(363 - 389) (274 - 301) (310 - 336)
62 - 68 47 - 51 53 - 58
8 0.5000-20 12.700 x 1.27
(549 - 602) (416 - 451) (469 - 513)
89 - 96 68 - 73 76 - 82
9 0.5625-18 14.287 x 1.41
(788 - 850) (602 - 646) (673 - 726)
124 - 134 93 - 101 106 - 115
10 0.6250-18 15.875 x 1.41
(1097 - 1186) (823 - 894) (938 - 1018)
216 - 234 162 - 176 184 - 199
12 0.7500-16 19.050 x 1.59
(1912 - 2071) (1434 - 1558) (1629 - 1761)
344 - 372 258 - 280 293 - 317
14 0.8750-14 22.225 x 1.81
(3045 - 3292) (2283 - 2478) (2593 - 2806)
512 - 554 385 - 417 436 - 472
16 1.000-12 25.400 x 2.12
(4532 - 4903) (3408 - 3691) (3859 - 4178)

Table 202
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 205
20-10-02 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Bolt Type STEEL, CADMIUM PLATED Tensile strength: 180ksi

Shear strength: 108ksi
Bolt MS21250 or equivalent
Nut type STEEL, CADMIUM PLATED Strength class: 180 ksi
Nut NAS1804 or equivalent
Dash - no.
in mm Nm [lbf in]
2.2 - 2.4 1.8 - 1.9 1.9 - 2.1
3 0.1900-32 4.826 x 0.79
(19 - 21) (16 - 17) (17 - 19)
8.3 - 9.0 6.5 - 7.1 7.2 - 7.8
4 0.2500-28 6.350 x 0.91
(73 - 80) (58 - 63) (64 - 69)
16.6 - 17.9 12.9 - 13.9 14.3 - 15.5
5 0.3125-24 7.937 x 1.06
(147 - 158) (114 - 123) (127 - 137)
30 - 32 23 - 25 26 - 28
6 0.3750-24 9.525 x 1.06
(266 - 283) (204 - 221) (230 - 248)
47 - 51 36 - 39 40 - 44
7 0.4375-20 11.112 x 1.27
(416 - 451) (319 - 345) (354 - 389)
72 - 78 55 - 59 61 - 67
8 0.5000-20 12.700 x 1.27
(637 - 690) (487 - 522) (540 - 593)
102 - 111 78 - 84 88 - 95
9 0.5625-18 14.287 x 1.41
(903 - 982) (690 - 743) (779 - 841)
142 - 154 108 - 116 122 - 132
10 0.6250-18 15.875 x 1.41
(1257 - 1363) (956 - 1027) (1080 - 1168)
248 - 269 187 - 202 212 - 229
12 0.7500-16 19.050 x 1.59
(2195 - 2381) (1655 - 1788) (1876 - 2027)
395 - 428 297 - 322 337 - 365
14 0.8750-14 22.225 x 1.81
(3496 - 3788) (2629 - 2850) (2983 - 3231)
589 - 638 443 - 479 502 - 543
16 1.000-12 25.400 x 2.12
(5213 - 5647) (3921 - 4240) (4443 - 4806)

Table 203
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 206
20-10-02 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Bolt Type CRES, PASSIVATED Tensile strength: 125 ksi

Bolt AN173-AN186 or equivalent
Nut type STEEL, CADMIUM PLATED / DRY-FILM Strength class:
LUBRICATED CRES, SILVER PLATED 125 ksi - 160 ksi
Nut MS21042, MS21043 or equivalent
Installation condition No Lubricant (as supplied) Lubricated (all greases)
Dash - Thread UNF / UNJF Standard Tightening Torque (T)
no. in mm Nm [lbf in]
1.2 - 1.3 0.9 - 1.0
3 0.1900-32 4.826 x 0.79
(11 - 12) (8.0 - 8.9)
4.6 - 5.0 3.4 - 3.7
4 0.2500-28 6.350 x 0.91
(41 - 44) (30 - 33)
9.0 - 9.9 6.7 - 7.2
5 0.3125-24 7.937 x 1.06
(80 - 88) (59 - 64)
16.1 - 17.4 11.6 - 12.5
6 0.3750-24 9.525 x 1.06
(142 - 154) (103 - 111)
25 - 27 18 - 20
7 0.4375-20 11.112 x 1.27
(221 - 239) (159 - 177)
39 - 42 28 - 30
8 0.5000-20 12.700 x 1.27
(345 - 372) (248 - 266)
56 - 60 40 - 43
9 0.5625-18 14.287 x 1.41
(496 - 531) (354 - 381)
77 - 83 54 - 59
10 0.6250-18 15.875 x 1.41
(682 - 735) (478 - 522)
135 - 147 95 - 103
12 0.7500-16 19.050 x 1.59
(1195 - 1301) (841 - 912)
217 - 243 152 - 165
14 0.8750-14 22.225 x 1.81
(1921 - 2151) (1345 - 1460)
324 - 351 228 - 246
16 1.000-12 25.400 x 2.12
(2868 - 3107) (2018 - 2177)
Tightening torques for 125 ksi CRES bolts

Table 204
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 207
20-10-02 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Bolt Type CRES, PASSIVATED Tensile strength: 160 ksi

Bolt NAS6703-NAS6720 or equivalent
Nut type STEEL, CADMIUM PLATED / DRY-FILM Strength class:
LUBRICATED CRES, SILVER PLATED 125 - 160 ksi
Installation condition No Lubricant (as supplied) Lubricated (all greases)
Dash - Thread UNF / UNJF Standard Tightening Torque (T)
1.7 - 1.8 1.3 - 1.4
3 0.1900-32 4.826 x 0.79
(15 - 16) (12 - 13)
6.5 - 7.0 4.8 - 5.2
4 0.2500-28 6.350 x 0.91
(58 - 62) (42 - 46)
12.9 - 14.0 9.4 - 10.2
5 0.3125-24 7.937 x 1.06
(114 - 124) (83 - 90)
23 - 25 16.3 - 17.7
6 0.3750-24 9.525 x 1.06
(204 - 221) (144 - 157)
35 - 38 26 - 28
7 0.4375-20 11.112 x 1.27
(310 - 336) (230 - 248)
55 - 60 39 - 42
8 0.5000-20 12.700 x 1.27
(487 - 531) (345 - 372)
78 - 85 56 - 60
9 0.5625-18 14.287 x 1.41
(690 -752) (496 - 531)
108 - 117 76 - 83
10 0.6250-18 15.875 x 1.41
(956 - 1036) (673 - 735)
191 - 207 134 - 145
12 0.7500-16 19.050 x 1.59
(1690 - 1832) (1186 - 1283)
305 - 331 214 - 232
14 0.8750-14 22.225 x 1.81
(2699 - 2930) (1894 - 2053)
456 - 494 321 - 347
16 1.000-12 25.400 x 2.12
(4036 - 4372) (2841 - 3071)
Tightening torques for 160 ksi CRES bolts

Table 205
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 208
20-10-02 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Screw/Bolt Type STEEL, CADMIUM PLATED / Tensile strength: 125 - 160 ksi
CRES, PASSIVATED Shear strength: 75 - 95 ksi
Screw/Bolt NAS514, NAS1352 or equivalent

Nut type STEEL, CADMIUM PLATED / Strength class: 125 - 160 ksi
DRY-FILM LUBRICATED CRES,
SILVER PLATED
Installation condition No Lubricant (as supplied) / Lubricated (all greases)
Dash - Thread UNF / UNJF Tightening Torque (T)
Max. 0.28
02 0.0860-56 2.18 x 0.45
(Max. 2.5)
Max. 0.68
04 0.1120-40 2.84 x 0.63
(Max. 6.0)
Max. 0.79
06 0.1380-32 3.50 x 0.79
(Max. 7.0)
Max. 1.0
08 0.1640-32 4.16 x 0.79
(Max. 8.9)
Tightening torques for steel and CRES screws/bolts with UNC/UNJC thread
Table 206
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 209
20-10-02 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 210
20-10-02 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EQUIPMENT HANDLING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
This topic gives information for the handling of line replaceable units (LRUs).
2. Cockpit Instruments and Displays
Cockpit instruments and display units show the pilot information about the flight situation of the aircraft.
The units have either cathode ray tube (CRT) or liquid crystal display (LCD) screens with an anti-
reflective coating and/or optical filters, which can be easily damaged.
Refer to 20-10-04, Page Block 701 for information about cleaning the display screens and bezels.
Obey these safety precautions when you handle the units:
A. Remove rings and other jewellery before you handle instruments or display units to prevent
scratch damage.
B. Wear clean protective gloves when you handle instruments or display units.
C. Handle instruments or display units with care.
D. If the instrument or display unit has a protective film installed, do not remove the film until the unit
is installed on the aircraft.
3. Electronic and Electro-Mechanical LRUs
A. Handle LRUs with care.
B. Always install blanking caps on electrical connectors.
C. Make sure you use electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures necessary to protect the LRU and
its components from electrostatic discharge.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
20-10-03 Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
20-10-03 Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRONIC FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS - CLEANING
1. General
This topic gives information for the cleaning of electronic flight instruments with display screens and
bezels. Examples of electronic flight instruments are:
• Multi-Function Display (MFD)

• Global Positioning System (GPS)
• GTX 330 Transponder.

P01-011 Solvent
- Lint-free, non-abrasive cloth Local supply
- Microfiber cloth Local supply
Local supply (alternative to
- Glass cleaner, Zip-Chem X-405
P01-011)
- Denatured alcohol Local supply
3. Procedures
MANUFACTURER’S HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE A CLEANER THAT HAS ACETONE, THINNER, BENZENE, ETHYL
ALCOHOL, TOLUENE, ETHYL ACID, AMMONIA, METHYL CHLORIDE, OR ALKALINE
BASED SOLVENTS. THESE CHEMICALS CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE DISPLAY
SCREEN ANTI-GLARE COATING.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE PAPER MATERIALS TO REMOVE DUST FROM THE DISPLAY SCREEN.
CAUTION: DO NOT STICK ANY MATERIAL ONTO THE DISPLAY SCREEN. YOU CAN CAUSE
DAMAGE TO THE ANTI-GLARE COATING.
A. Preparation
(1) De-energize the aircraft electrical system (Ref. 24-00-00, Page Block 201).
(2) Remove rings or other jewellery that can cause damage to the display screen.
B. Clean the Display Screens
(1) Use a clean, dry, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth to remove large dust particles.
(2) Fold a clean microfiber cloth around a small piece of rigid plastic (credit card size). Make
sure the cloth covers all of the rigid plastic.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 701
20-10-04 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Make the microfiber cloth moist with solvent (Material No. P01-011) or glass cleaner (Zip-
Chem X-405).
(4) Use the moist microfiber cloth as a brush at an angle of approximately 30 degrees to the
screen. Use only light pressure to wipe the screen in a circular motion. Start at the center
of the screen and wipe outwards to the edges.
(5) If necessary, carefully clean the screen with a clean, dry, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth. Use
only light pressure to clean the screen.
C. Clean the Display Bezel
(1) Use a clean, dry, lint-free, non-abrasive cloth to remove large dust particles.
(2) Make a microfiber cloth moist with denatured alcohol. Do not make the cloth wet.
(3) Carefully clean the display bezel with the moist microfiber cloth.
(4) Dry the display bezel with a clean, dry microfiber cloth.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 702
20-10-04 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WIRE CABLES - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
This topic gives the data and procedures for:
• The cutting of wire cables

• The installation of end fittings on wire cables
NOTE: Some specific data is given for the cables used to operate the trap doors.
2. Job Set-Up Information
For use with Nicopress

51-C-887 Crimping Pliers (Nicopress)
sleeves P/N 941.91.31.201
Used to seal the ends of cut
- Welding Equipment
cables (local supply)
For cable end sleeves (local
- Soldering Equipment
supply)
- Red Sealing Paint P/N 910.33.82.152

- Adhesive Tape Local supply
3. Procedures
A. Cutting of a Wire Cable
(1) Make a mark on the cable to show the cut position.
(2) Wind adhesive tape around both sides of the cut position to prevent unwinding of the cable
strands.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE A WELDING OR CUTTING TORCH TO CUT THE CABLE.
(3) Cut the cable using a mechanical cutting/separating tool.
NOTE: Some crimping pliers also incorporate a cable cutter.
(4) Use a welding torch to weld the cut strands together to prevent unwinding.
NOTE: The welding of the strands is only necessary when the cable is cut to it’s final
length.
(5) Remove the adhesive tape.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
20-10-05 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation of a Cable End Sleeve (Ref. Fig. 201)
(1) Measure 11 mm from the end of the cable and make a mark on the cable.
(2) Put the cable end sleeve on the cable in line with the mark.
NOTE: 6,5 mm of cable should come through the cable end sleeve.
(3) Spread the wire ends of the cable to make a cone shape.
(4) Bend the end 4 mm (approximately) of the wires and guide them into the cable end sleeve.
(5) Pull the cable end sleeve up so that the cone shape of the cable fills the cable end sleeve.
(6) Solder the cable into the cable end sleeve.
C. Installation of a Nicopress Swaging Sleeve (Ref. Fig. 202)
(1) Adjust the Nicopress crimping pliers to give the correct crimp diameter in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: For Nicopress sleeves Pilatus P/N 941.91.31.201 (used for the trap door cables)
the crimp diameter is between 4,3 and 4,7 mm (0.170 and 0.185 in.).
(2) Put the Nicopress sleeve on the cable.
(3) Form the end of the cable into the a loop.
(4) If a wire thimble AN100 (Pilatus P/N 941.91.08.1XX) is to be installed, form the cable
tightly around the thimble.
(5) Put the end of the cable loop through the Nicopress sleeve.
(6) Push the Nicopress sleeve against the point of the thimble (if installed), or to the position
to give the correct diameter cable loop.
(7) Make sure that a minimum 3 mm (0.12 in.), or one cable diameter (whichever is greater),
comes through the Nicopress sleeve.
(8) If necessary, cut and remove unwanted cable as follows:
(a) Remove the thimble (if installed) and the Nicopress sleeve.
(b) Cut the cable (Ref. Para. 3.A.)
(9) Put the thimble (if installed) and the Nicopress sleeve in the installed positions.
(10) If a thimble is not installed, make sure the cable loop is the correct diameter.
(11) Position the crimping pliers (Part No. 51-C-887) correctly on the Nicopress sleeve.
NOTE: The Nicopress sleeve is to be crimped three or four times (dependant on the
size). Refer to Fig. 202 for the correct sequence of crimps.
(12) Crimp the Nicopress sleeve as shown on Fig. 202.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
20-10-05 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(13) Examine the crimped Nicopress sleeve and make sure that:
(a) The crimp diameter is correct.
NOTE: For Nicopress sleeves Pilatus P/N 941.91.31.201 (used for the trap door
cables) the crimp diameter is between 4,3 and 4,7 mm (0.170 and 0.185
in.).
NOTE: If the crimp diameter is more than the maximum limit, you can adjust the
crimping pliers and crimp the Nicopress sleeve again.
(b) A minimum 3 mm (0.12 in.), or one cable diameter (whichever is greater), comes
through the Nicopress sleeve.
(c) The thimble (if installed) is held securely.
(d) The Nicopress sleeve is pressed correctly and has no damage.
(14) Apply red sealing paint (P/N 910.33.82.152) on the cable where it comes out of the
Nicopress sleeve.
NOTE: This is done to help detect slippage of the Nicopress sleeve in future inspections.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 203
20-10-05 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
APPROX. 2,5 mm
6,5 mm
11 mm
4,5 mm
MARK
MARK CABLE END
SLEEVE
CABLE 6780
Cable End Sleeve - Installation

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 204
20-10-05 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CRIMP SEQUENCE
NICOPRESS
SLEEVE
3 1 2
THIMBLE
MIN 3 mm 1-1,5 mm
SMALL SLEEVE
(SHOWN WITH THIMBLE)
NICOPRESS CRIMP SEQUENCE

SLEEVE
4 3 1 2
MIN 3 mm 1-1,5 mm
LARGE SLEEVE
(SHOWN WITH NO THIMBLE)
6782
Swaging Sleeve (Nicopress) - Installation

Figure 202
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 205
20-10-05 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 206
20-10-05 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PIPES AND FITTINGS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
Rigid pipe assemblies are used in the aircraft systems to transfer oil, fuel or gas throughout the airframe
and engine. Pipes are connected to each other, system components or bulkheads with pipe fittings.
Standardized MS, Harrison, Permaswage or Swagelok screw connections are used.
A. Pipes
Pipes are straight or angled metallic tubes and are typically made from steel or aluminum. The
pipes have flared or flareless formed ends and a union nut at each end (Ref. Fig. 201).
The primary function of a pipe assembly is to transfer fluids or gases. Pipe assemblies supply
fluids or gases from the source (usually a pump or reservoir) to the point of application.
B. Fittings
Fittings are connectors that directly connect two or more pipes together or a pipe to a system
component/device. The pipe layout, the necessary function and the type of installation
determines the type of fitting used. The two main types of fittings used are:
• Direct pipe connections - Straight or T-connectors for the connection of two or more pipes
• Bulkhead connections - Straight or elbow connectors for the connection of pipes to
bulkheads/openings or system components.
The type of fitting and the type of installation determines if additional parts are necessary (Ref.
Fig. 205). The additional parts that are used with some types of fittings are:
• Support rings
• O-rings
• Washers
• Locknuts.
Refer to the Illustrated Parts Catalog (IPC) for the related parts for each type of fitting.
C. Procedures
The maintenance procedures for pipes and fittings are as follows:
• For removal, Ref. Para. 3.B.

• For the lubrication of screw threads, Ref. Para. 3.C.(1)
• For the lubrication of O-rings, Ref. Para. 3.C.(2)
• For the installation of pipes to fittings/manifolds, Ref. Para. 3.D.
• For the installation of fittings on openings/bulkheads, Ref. Para. 3.E.
• For the installation of fittings on system components/devices, Ref. Para. 3.F.
• For the installation of hoses on SAE AS4131 pipe ends, Ref. Para. 3.G.
• For couplings with a V-mounting ring, Ref. Para. 3.H.
• For leak test, Ref. Para. 3.I.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
20-10-06 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
- Brush Local supply

- Spatula Local supply
- Grease gun Local supply
- Torque wrench Local supply
MS-IG-400 Swagelok control gage Local supply

P01-011 Solvent (alcohol)
P02-001 Lockwire (standard) 0,8 mm (0.032 in) diameter
P02-007 Lockwire (standard) 0,6 mm (0.025 in) diameter
or
P02-041 Lint-free cleaning cloth
P04-004 Grease
P04-030 Grease
P04-035 Anti-seize compound
P04-040 Oxygen paste
P04-041 Grease
P06-004 Leak detector spray
P09-059 Tape
P09-081 Tape
P10-004 Engine oil
P10-017 Hydraulic fluid
3. Procedure - Pipes and Fittings (Ref. Fig. 201 thru 204)
WARNING: OBEY THE SYSTEM SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AS GIVEN IN THE RELATED AMM
CHAPTER.
WARNING: DO NOT USE OIL AND GREASE WHEN YOU DO WORK ON THE OXYGEN SYSTEM
OR COMPONENTS. ONLY THE LUBRICANT TAPE (MATERIAL NO. P09-081) OR
OXYGEN PASTE (MATERIAL NO. P04-040) MUST BE USED. IF OIL AND GREASE
TOUCHES COMPONENTS IN THE OXYGEN SYSTEM, AN EXPLOSION CAN OCCUR.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT NO LUBRICANT GETS INTO THE PIPES, FITTINGS AND
COMPONENTS. IF LUBRICANT GETS INTO THE PIPES, FITTINGS AND
COMPONENTS YOU MUST REMOVE AND CLEAN IT.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
20-10-06 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: WHEN AN UNION NUT OR LOCKNUT IS OVER TIGHTENED, IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO

LOOSEN IT. YOU MUST DO THE FULL REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES AGAIN.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT ARE NOT DAMAGED AND ARE
CALIBRATED AS NECESSARY.
A. Job Set Up
Before you remove and install the pipes and fittings:
• Make sure that you have all the necessary parts (for example pipes, fittings and O-rings)
and installation aids (for example blanking caps, lubricants and tools).
• Make sure that you know the applicable torque values for the screw connections.
B. Removal
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY ANY FORCE TO THE PIPE DURING REMOVAL. YOU MUST
USE THE CORRECT WRENCH TO HOLD THE FITTING/MANIFOLD WHEN YOU
LOOSEN THE UNION NUTS/LOCKNUTS.
CAUTION: WHEN YOU REMOVE THE FITTINGS AND PIPES, MAKE SURE THAT
UNWANTED PARTS OF PTFE TAPE OR LUBRICANT DO NOT CONTAMINATE
THE SYSTEM.
CAUTION: WHEN THERE IS PIPE/FITTING GALLING OR SEIZURE, YOU MUST REPLACE

THE DAMAGED PARTS (PIPE/FITTING/MANIFOLD) TO PREVENT A LEAK IN
THE SYSTEM.
(1) Hold the fitting/manifold with a wrench or suitable holding tool when you loosen the union
nuts and locknuts.
(2) Remove and discard the old O-ring (where applicable) and use a new one for the
installation.
(3) Make sure that you check that the pipes and fittings are clean, undamaged and free from
obstructions.
(4) Install the correct blanking caps to open ends of pipes, fittings/manifolds and system
components/devices.
C. Lubrication Procedures
(1) Lubrication of Screw Threads
(a) Use absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) or a lint-free cloth (Material No. P02-
041) made moist with solvent (alcohol) (Material No. P01-011) to clean the threads
before you apply the lubricant.
(b) Use the applicable lubricant given in Table 201 and follows the applicable lubrication
instructions:
• For wet lubricant application, follow Para. 3.C.(1)(c)

• For PTFE tape application, follow Para. 3.C.(1)(d).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 203
20-10-06 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT YOU USE THE CORRECT LUBRICANT FOR THE
APPLICABLE SCREW THREAD CONNECTION (REF. TABLE 201). WHEN
INSTRUCTED TO USE A DIFFERENT LUBRICANT WITHIN THE
PROCEDURE OF A SPECIFIC CHAPTER TO THAT GIVEN IN TABLE 201:
• YOU MUST OBEY THE SPECIFIC CHAPTER.
Connection Lubricant
General Grease (Material No. P04-041)

CRES to CRES connections Grease (Material No. P04-041) or anti-
seize compound (Material No. P04-035)
when specified in the specific chapter only
Nylon to aluminum connections Grease (Material No. P04-041)
Nylon to nylon connections No lubricant
Air systems Grease (Material No. P04-041) (or tape
(Material No. P09-081) when specified in
the specific chapter only)
Oxygen systems Tape (Material No. P09-059) or oxygen
paste (Material No.P04-040) can be used
up to a pressure of 51 bar (750 psi)
Fuel systems Grease (Material No. P04-030)
Connections with dry lubricant No additional lubricant application is
necessary
Table 201 - Permitted Lubricants and Greases for Screw Connections
(c) Wet Lubricant Application
(i) Before installation, all O-rings, pipe threads and fittings must be lubricated.
Make sure that you only apply lubricant within the permitted areas of
lubrication on pipes and fittings (Ref. Fig. 202).
(ii) Use the correct tool to apply the lubricant. Different application tools can be
used to apply lubricants. The type of lubricant and the surface to be lubricated
can determine the application tool to use:
• Oils can be applied with a brush, but are sometimes supplied in an

aerosol can that lets you apply the oil more accurately.
• Grease can be applied with a brush or a spatula or with a grease gun to
directly apply grease to components.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT NO LUBRICANT GETS INTO THE PIPES,

FITTINGS AND SYSTEM COMPONENTS. IF LUBRICANT GETS
INTO THE PIPES, FITTINGS AND COMPONENTS YOU MUST
REMOVE THE LUBRICANT AND CLEAN THE PARTS.
(iii) Apply a thin layer of the applicable lubricant to the threads.
(iv) Remove unwanted lubricant and make sure that there is no lubricant in non-
permitted areas (Ref. Fig. 202).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 204
20-10-06 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) PTFE Tape Application (Ref. Fig. 204)
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY ANY OTHER TYPE OF THREAD LUBRICANT OR

COMPOUND WHEN YOU USE PTFE TAPE. PTFE TAPE ACTS AS A
THREAD LUBRICANT, ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND AND SEALANT.
(i) Apply tape (Material No. P09-081 or P09-059) to male threads only.
(ii) Apply the tape (Material No. P09-081 or P09-059) with a minimum of:
• One and a half threads remaining uncovered at the start of the screw
threads of the fitting.
(iii) Stretch the tape (Material No. P09-081 or P09-059) around the threads and
make sure that it conforms to the thread contour:
• Start the tape just past the middle of the second thread.
• Wrap the tape in the same direction as the screw thread.
• Wrap the tape one to one and a half times around the circumference for
fittings less than 38.1 mm (1.5 in) diameter.
• Wrap the tape two to four times around the circumference for fittings
more than 38.1 mm (1.5 in) diameter.
• Do not apply tape to the thread run out if possible.
• Do not apply tape to the contact surfaces of the fitting.
(2) Lubrication of O-rings
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT YOU USE A NEW O-RING WHEN YOU INSTALL A
PIPE AND/OR FITTING.
WARNING: YOU MUST LUBRICATE O-RINGS WITH THE CORRECT LUBRICANT

FOR THE RELATED AIRCRAFT SYSTEM (REF. TABLE 202). ONLY THE
OXYGEN PASTE (MATERIAL NO. P04-040) MUST BE USED IN THE
OXYGEN SYSTEM. IF OIL AND GREASE TOUCHES COMPONENTS IN
THE OXYGEN SYSTEM, AN EXPLOSION CAN OCCUR.
(a) Apply a thin layer of the applicable lubricant to the new O-ring (Ref. Table 202).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 205
20-10-06 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Remove the unwanted lubricant.
System System Fluid/Gas Lubricants
Fuel Kerosene Grease (Material No.

P04-030)
Brake hydraulics Hydraulic fluid (Material No.s P10-003, Hydraulic fluid (Material
P10-006 or P10-017) No. P10-017) or Grease
<1>
Gear hydraulics Hydraulic fluid (Material No.s P10-003 or Hydraulic fluid (Material
P10-017) No. P10-017) or Grease
<1>
Oxygen Oxygen Oxygen paste (Material
No. P04-040)
Air Air Grease (Material No.
P04-030) <1>
Engine Engine oil (Material No. P10-004) Engine oil (Material No.
P10-004)
Cooling Compressor oil Compressor oil <1>
Table 202 - Permitted Lubricants for O-rings
NOTE: <1> Grease (Material No. P04-041) can be used as an alternative.
D. Installation of Pipes to Fittings/Manifolds
(1) You must tighten the union nuts and fittings to the torque values given in the related
aircraft maintenance procedure. If no torque values are given, refer to the standard torque
values in:
• Table 203 - for fittings in openings and bulkheads (Ref. Fig. 206)
• Table 204 - for fittings in system components, devices and adapters (Ref. Fig. 207)
• Table 205 - for MS screw fittings (AN-818 union nut / flared pipe ends) (Ref. Fig.
208)
• Table 206 - for mechanically produced pipe ends (Harrison and Permaswage) (Ref.
Fig. 209)
• Table 207 - for IMACA 305 pipe ends
• The installation procedure for Swagelock screw connections (Ref. Para. 3.D.(5)).
(2) Make sure that the correct blanking cap is installed to pipes and fittings that are not
immediately connected during installation. Remove the blanking cap just before
installation.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 206
20-10-06 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Follow the correct installation procedures:
• For Standardized MS, Harrison and Permaswage screw connections, Ref. Para.
3.D.(4)
• For Swagelock screw connections, Ref. Para. 3.D.(5).
NOTE: The procedure to install MS, Harrison and Permaswage screw connections is
not the same as the procedure to install Swagelok screw connections.
(4) Standardized MS, Harrison and Permaswage Screw Connections
CAUTION: THE PIPE IS INSTALLED TO THE FITTING/MANIFOLD BY A THREADED UNION

NUT. YOU MUST CORRECTLY PUT THE UNION NUT INTO POSITION TO
MAKE SURE THAT THE THREAD IS NOT DAMAGED DURING INSTALLATION.
WHEN THERE IS PIPE/FITTING GALLING OR SEIZURE, YOU MUST REMOVE,
DISCARD AND REPLACE THE DAMAGE PARTS (PIPE/FITTING/MANIFOLD) TO
PREVENT A LEAK IN THE SYSTEM.
(a) Apply a thin layer of the applicable lubricant or PTFE tape to the threads of the
fitting/manifold (Ref. Para. 3.C.(1)).
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY LUBRICANT TO PERMASWAGE FITTINGS WITH DRY

LUBRICANT. NO ADDITIONAL LUBRICANT IS NECESSARY.
(b) For fittings/manifolds with an O-ring:
(i) Apply a thin layer of the applicable lubricant to the O-ring (Ref. Para. 3.C.(2)).
(ii) Install the O-ring on the fitting/manifold.
(c) Align the pipe with the connection of the fitting/manifold.
CAUTION: THE PIPE AND THE FITTING MUST MAKE A GOOD CONNECTION. DO
NOT PUT FORCE ON THE PIPE.
(d) Put the pipe fully against the fitting/manifold and tighten each union nut with your
fingers.
(e) Use a wrench to hold the fitting/manifold and a torque wrench to tighten the union
nut(s) to the given torque value. Make sure that the pipe does not turn. When you
cannot get access with a torque wrench for standardized MS screw connections
only:
• Install the union nut(s) with your fingers then tighten approximately one sixth
of a turn with a wrench.
(f) Replenish the applicable system.
(g) Do a leak test (Ref. Para. 3.I.).
(5) Swagelok Screw Connections
fitting/manifold (Ref. Para. 3.C.(1)).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 207
20-10-06 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Align the pipe with the connection of the fitting/manifold.
CAUTION: THE PIPE AND THE FITTING MUST MAKE A GOOD CONNECTION. DO
NOT PUT FORCE ON THE PIPE.
(c) Push the pipe with the clamping rings up to the stop of the fitting/manifold. Make
sure that the pipe fits without any tension in the fitting/manifold.
CAUTION: DO NOT OVER-TIGHTEN THE UNION NUT(S) MORE THAN ONE SIXTH
OF A TURN. IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO DO A CHECK THAT THE UNION
NUT IS OVER-TIGHTENED WITH THE SWAGELOK CONTROL GAGE.
(d) Use a wrench to hold the fitting/manifold and make sure that the pipe does not turn,
then use another wrench to tighten the union nut(s) as follows:
• Tighten approximately one sixth of a turn.
NOTE: This causes a resilient seal in the elastic region of the front of the
clamping ring.
(e) Use the swagelok control gage to do a check that the union nut is sufficiently
tightened. Put the thin end of the gage between the union nut and the fitting, if the
gage:
• Does not fit between the union nut and the fitting - The union nut is sufficiently
tightened (Ref. Fig. 203)
• Fits between the union nut and the fitting - The union nut is not sufficiently
tightened (Ref. Fig. 203).
(f) If the union nut is not sufficiently tightened, gradually tighten it until the control gage
does not fit between the union nut and the fitting.
(g) Replenish the applicable system.
(h) Do a leak test (Ref. Para. 3.I.).
E. Installation of Fittings on Openings/Bulkheads
NOTE: For installation at openings/bulkheads fittings, with two threaded sections on one side
are used.
(1) Obey any instructions for the application of sealant given in the specific chapter
procedure.
(2) Apply a thin layer of the applicable lubricant or PTFE tape to the threads of the fittings
(Ref. Para. 3.C.(1)).
(3) Put the fitting through the opening fully against the bulkhead.
(4) Loosely install the washer and the nut, on the second threaded section of the fitting, at the
other side of the bulkhead.
(5) Align the fitting and hold it in the correct position.
(6) Use a torque wrench and tighten the nut to the applicable torque value.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 208
20-10-06 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Install the pipe (Ref. Para. 3.D.).
F. Installation of Fittings on System Components/Devices
NOTE: There are two procedures to install fittings on components/devices:
• Non-positioning type fitting installation - For straight pipes (Ref. Para. 3.F.(1))
• Positioning type fitting installation - For angled pipes (Ref. Para. 3.F.(2)).
(1) Non-Positioning Type Fitting Installation - for Straight Pipes:
NOTE: The fitting is installed directly on the system component and tightened.
(a) Apply a thin layer of the applicable lubricant to the O-ring (Ref. Para. 3.C.(2)).
(b) Install the O-ring in position on the fitting.
(c) Apply a thin layer of the applicable lubricant or PTFE tape to the threads of the
fitting (Ref. Para. 3.C.(1)).
(d) Install the fitting on the system component/device.
(e) Use a wrench/torque wrench and tighten the fitting to the applicable torque value.
(f) Install the pipe (Ref. Para. 3.D.).
(2) Positioning Type Fitting Installation - For Angled Pipes (Ref. Fig. 205):
NOTE: The fitting is installed on the system component/device and set in the direction
related to the pipe layout. The fitting is tightened with a lock nut.
fittings (Ref. Para. 3.C.(1)).
(b) Loosely install the locknut, on the second threaded section of the fitting, up to the
end of the recess.
(c) Put the support ring in position in the recess on the locknut. Make sure that the cut
point of the support ring is correctly aligned.
(d) Apply a thin layer of the applicable lubricant to the O-ring (Ref. Para. 3.C.(2)).
(e) Install the O-ring on the fitting up against the support ring.
(f) Install the fitting on the system component/device or adapter fully against the
locknut. Turn the fitting, not the locknut.
(g) At the same time, loosen the locknut (maximum one full turn) and correctly position
the fitting. Make sure that the support ring and the O-ring stay in the correct position.
(h) Hold the fitting with a fork wrench or suitable holding tool and with a torque wrench
tighten the locknut to the applicable torque value.
(i) Install the pipe (Ref. Para. 3.D.).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 209
20-10-06 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
G. Installation of Hoses on SAE AS5131 Pipe Ends
For the installation of hoses on SAE AS4131 pipe ends, use oil (Material No. P10-012) as a
lubricant.
H. Installation of Couplings with V-Mounting Ring
For couplings with a V-mounting ring, you must tighten the coupling to the torque value specified
directly on the coupling.
I. Leak Test
(1) After the installation of a pipe assembly, the screw connections and the complete system
must be checked for leaks:
(a) Do a check to make sure that the screw connections are not loose.
(b) For liquid pipe assemblies (for example, hydraulic fluid and fuel):
(i) Do a check to see if fluid leaks from the screw connections.
(ii) Do a check to see if there are drops of fluid on the screw connections and/or
pipe assembly.
(c) For gaseous pipe assemblies (for example, air or oxygen):
(i) Apply a leak detector spray (Material No. P06-004) to the applicable screw
connections.
(ii) Look to see if there are bubbles at the screw connections.
(iii) Do a check to see that the pressure does not decrease in the applicable
system.
(iv) Carefully clean the leak detector spray from the screw connections and the
pipe assembly where necessary.
(2) If you find a leak:
CAUTION: BEFORE YOU TIGHTEN SCREW CONNECTIONS ON PRESSURIZED

SYSTEMS, YOU MUST FIRST RELEASE THE PRESSURE FROM THE SYSTEM.
(a) Tighten the screw connection(s) to the upper torque value limit.
(3) If the screw connection(s) continues to leak:
(a) Replace the O-rings, fittings/manifolds and/or the pipe as necessary.
4. Close Up
A. If necessary, use lockwire (Material No. P02-001 or P02-007) to safety the pipe connection and
fitting.
B. Obey the close up procedures given in the specific chapter if applicable.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 210
20-10-06 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLARED PIPE END FLARELESS PIPE END
MS SCREW CONNECTION HARRISON & PERMASWAGE SCREW CONNETION SWAGELOK PIPE CONNECTORS
96413
Flared / Flareless Pipe and Screw Connections

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 211
20-10-06 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
APPLICATION OF LUBRICANT PERMITTED
APPLICATION OF LUBRICANT NOT PERMITTED
96412
Permitted Areas for the Application of Lubricants on Pipes and Fittings
Figure 202
NUT IS NOT SUFFICIENTLY TIGHTENED NUT SUFFICIENTLY TIGHTENED
SWAGELOK CONTROL GAGE SWAGELOK CONTROL GAGE
UNION NUT
UNION NUT
FITTING
FITTING
SWAGELOK CONTROL GAGE SWAGELOK CONTROL GAGE

FITS BETWEEN UNION NUT AND FITTING DOES NOT FIT BETWEEN UNION NUT AND FITTING
96419
Swagelok Control Gage

Figure 203
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 212
20-10-06 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TYPICAL FITTING
PERMITTED AREAS OF PTFE TAPE APPLICATION

NOTE:
NO PTFE TAPE PERMITTED
PTFE TAPE MUST BE APPLIED
DO NOT APPLY PTFE TAPE IF POSSIBLE
TYPICAL FITTING
2
3
2
1 1
3
TYPICAL FITTING
CORRECT EXAMPLES OF PTFE TAPE APPLICATION
NOTE:
MINIMUM OF ONE AND A HALF THREADS REMAINING UNCOVERED
1
AT THE START OF THE SCREW THREADS OF THE FITTING.
2 START THE TAPE JUST PAST THE MIDDLE OF THE SECOND THREAD.
6865
3 DO NOT APPLY PTFE TAPE TO THE THREAD RUN OUT IF POSSIBLE.
Correct Application of PTFE Tape on Screw Threads

Figure 204
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 213
20-10-06 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SUPPORT RING SUPPORT RING
FITTING FITTING
CORRECT INCORRECT
SUPPORT RING - CUT POINT ALIGNEMENT
FITTING
FITTING
LOCK NUT
SUPPORT RING LOCK NUT
O-RING SUPPORT RING
O-RING
INSTALLATION AND ALIGNMENT TIGHTENED

6864
Positioning Type Fitting Installation - For Angled Pipes

Figure 205
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 214
20-10-06 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FITTINGS OPENING / BULKHEAD FITTING

LOCKNUT IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS5178
96417
Fitting for Openings and Bulkheads
Figure 206
Torque Values for Fittings on Openings and Bulkheads
External Pipe Steel Fitting Aluminum Fitting

Dash Diameter Thread lbf in. Nm lbf in. Nm
No.
inch mm min. max. min. max. min. max. min. max.
-2 .125 3,18 .3125-24 UNJF 47 53 5,3 6,0 38 42 4,3 4,8
-3 .188 4,78 .3750-24 UNJF 95 105 10,7 11,9 76 84 8,6 9,5
-4 .250 6,35 .4375-20 UNJF 133 147 15,0 16,6 104 116 11,8 13,1
-5 .312 7,93 .5000-20 UNJF 180 200 20,3 22,6 133 147 15,0 16,6
-6 .375 9,53 .5625-18 UNJF 256 284 28,9 32,1 161 179 18,2 20,2
-8 .500 12,70 .7500-16 UNJF 475 525 53,7 59,3 266 294 30,1 33,2
-10 .625 15,88 .8750-14 UNJF 665 735 75,1 83,0 342 358 38,6 40,5
-12 .750 19,05 1.0625-12 UNJ 855 945 96,6 106,8 427 473 48,3 53,4
-16 1.000 25,40 1.3125-12 UNJ 1140 1260 128,8 142,4 712 788 80,5 89,0
-20 1.250 31,75 1.6250-12 UNJ 1520 1680 171,7 189,8 855 945 96,6 106,8
-24 1.500 38,10 1.8750-12 UNJ 1900 2100 214,7 237,3 855 945 96,6 106,8
-32 2.000 50,80 2,500-12 UNJ 1900 2100 214,7 237,3 - - - -
Table 203
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 215
20-10-06 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FITTINGS SYSTEM COMPONENTS / DEVICES / ADAPTERS

LOCKNUT IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS5179 AND END FITTINGS¹)
(i.e. AN919, AS5174, etc.)
96418
Fitting for System Components, Devices and Adapters
Figure 207
Torque Values for Fittings on System Components, Devices and Adapters
External Pipe Steel Fitting Aluminum Fitting

Dash Diameter Thread lbf in. Nm lbf in. Nm
No.
-2 .125 3,18 .3125-24 UNJF 52 58 5,9 6,6 52 58 5,9 6,6
-3 .188 4,78 .3750-24 UNJF 95 105 10,7 11,9 76 84 8,6 9,5
-4 .250 6,35 .4375-20 UNJF 133 147 15,0 16,6 104 116 11,8 13,1
-5 .312 7,93 .5000-20 UNJF 180 200 20,3 22,6 133 147 15,0 16,6
-6 .375 9,53 .5625-18 UNJF 256 284 28,9 32,1 161 179 18,2 20,2
-8 .500 12,70 .7500-16 UNJF 475 525 53,7 59,3 266 294 30,1 33,2
-10 .625 15,88 .8750-14 UNJF 665 735 75,1 83,0 342 358 38,6 40,5
-12 .750 19,05 1.0625-12 UNJ 855 945 96,6 106,8 427 473 48,3 53,4
-16 1.000 25,40 1.3125-12 UNJ 1140 1260 128,8 142,4 712 788 80,5 89,0
-20 1.250 31,75 1.6250-12 UNJ 1520 1680 171,7 189,8 855 945 96,6 106,8
-24 1.500 38,10 1.8750-12 UNJ 1900 2100 214,7 237,3 855 945 96,6 106,8
-32 2.000 50,80 2,500-12 UNJ 1900 2100 214,7 237,3 950 1050 107,3 118,6
Table 204
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 216
20-10-06 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MS SCREW CONNECTION WITH FLARED PIPE END UNION NUT ACCORDING TO AN818
96415
MS Screw Fittings (AN-818 Union Nut and Flanged Pipe Ends)
Figure 208
Torque Values for MS Screw Fittings (AN-818 Union Nut / Flared Pipe Ends)
Steel Pipe / Steel Fitting Aluminum Pipe / Aluminum

External Pipe
Dash Fitting
Diameter Thread
No. lbf in. Nm lbf in. Nm
-2 .125 3,18 .3125-24 UNJF 35 50 4.0 5,7 22 30 2,5 3,4
-3 .188 4,78 .3750-24 UNJF 75 100 8,5 11,3 30 45 3,4 5,1
-4 .250 6,35 .4375-20 UNJF 115 150 13,0 17,0 40 60 4,5 6,8
-5 .312 7,93 .5000-20 UNJF 150 200 17,0 22,6 55 75 6,2 8,5
-6 .375 9,53 .5625-18 UNJF 250 300 28,3 33,9 75 115 8,5 13,0
-7 .438 11,13 .6250-18 UNJF 300 350 33,9 39,6 95 140 10,7 15,8
-8 .500 12,70 .7500-16 UNJF 450 500 50,8 56,5 150 225 17,0 25,4
-9 .562 14,27 .8125-16 UNJF 550 600 62,1 67,8 175 270 19,8 30,5
-10 .625 15,88 .8750-14 UNJF 650 700 73,4 79,1 200 315 22,6 35,6
-11 .688 17,48 1.0000-12 UNJ 800 900 90,4 101,7 260 405 29,4 45,8
-12 .750 19,05 1.0625-12 UNJ 900 1000 101,7 113,0 300 450 33,9 50,8
-14 .875 22,22 1.1875-12 UNJ 1050 1200 118,6 135,6 360 540 40,7 61,0
-16 1.000 25,40 1.3125-12 UNJ 1200 1400 135,6 158,2 500 630 56,5 71,2
-18 1.125 28,58 1.5000-12 UNJ 1400 1700 158,2 192,1 540 745 61,0 84,2
-20 1.250 31,75 1.6250-12 UNJ 1500 1800 169,5 203,4 600 810 67,8 91,5
-24 1.500 38,10 1.8750-12 UNJ 1900 2200 214,7 248,6 700 1000 79,1 113,0
-28 1.750 44,45 2.250-12 UNJ 2200 2700 248,6 305,1 800 1150 90,4 129,9
-32 2.000 50,80 2,500-12 UNJ 2500 3000 282,5 339,0 850 1300 96,0 146,9
With O-ring
-4 .250 6,35 .4375-20 UNJF 40 50 4,5 5,7 10 15 1,1 1,7
-6 .375 9,53 .5625-18 UNJF 80 100 9,0 11,3 20 30 2,3 3,4
-8 .500 12,70 .7500-16 UNJF 135 170 15,3 19,2 40 50 4,5 5,7
-10 .625 15,88 .8750-14 UNJF 200 250 22,6 28,3 55 65 6,2 7,3
-12 .750 19,05 1.0625-12 UNJ 270 320 30,5 36,2 90 110 10,2 12,4
Table 205
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 217
20-10-06 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SCREW CONNECTION WITH FLARED OR FLARELESS PIPE END UNION NUT ( HARRISON & PERMASWAGE )
FLARED FLARELESS
96416
Mechanically Produced Pipe Ends (Harrison and Permaswage)
Figure 209
Torque Values for Mechanically Produced Pipe Ends (Harrison & Permaswage)
Steel Pipe / Steel Fitting Aluminum Pipe / Aluminum

External Pipe
Dash Fitting
Diameter Thread
No. lbf in. Nm lbf in. Nm
-2 .125 3,18 .3125-24 UNJF 75 120 8,5 13,6 50 80 5,7 9,0
-3 .188 4,78 .3750-24 UNJF 95 140 10,7 15,8 70 105 7,9 11,9
-4 .250 6,35 .4375-20 UNJF 135 190 15,3 21,5 100 140 11,3 15,8
-5 .312 7,93 .5000-20 UNJF 170 240 19,2 27,1 130 180 14,7 20,3
-6 .375 9,53 .5625-18 UNJF 215 280 24,3 31,6 150 195 17,0 22,0
-8 .500 12,70 .7500-16 UNJF 470 550 53,1 62,1 270 350 30,5 39,6
-10 .625 15,88 .8750-14 UNJF 620 745 70,1 84,2 360 430 40,7 48,6
-12 .750 19,05 1.0625-12 UNJ 855 1055 96,6 119,2 460 550 52,0 62,1
-16 1.000 25,40 1.3125-12 UNJ 1140 1370 128,8 154,8 700 840 79,1 94,9
-20 1.250 31,75 1.6250-12 UNJ 1520 1825 171,7 206,2 850 1020 96,0 115,3
-24 1.500 38,10 1.8750-12 UNJ 1900 2280 214,7 257,6 900 1080 101,7 122,0
-32 2.000 50,80 2,500-12 UNJ 2660 2940 300,5 332,2 1800 2000 203,4 226,0
Table 206
NOTE: For screw connections with flared or flareless pipe ends.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 218
20-10-06 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Torque Values for IMACA 305 Pipe Ends

Aluminum Pipe
External Pipe Diameter
Dash No. lbf in. Nm
inch mm min. max. min. max.
-6 .375 9,53 132 156 14,9 17,6
-10 .625 15,88 252 283 28,5 32
Table 207
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 219
20-10-06 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 220
20-10-06 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CONSUMABLE MATERIALS LIST
General
MANUFACTURER´S HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS AND ALL THE APPLICABLE
LOCAL INSTRUCTIONS. CONSUMABLE MATERIALS CAN BE DANGEROUS AND CAN
CAUSE DEATH OR INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND/OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
The tables that follow give the data for the consumable materials which are recommended for the
maintenance of all Pilatus aircraft types.
The materials are put into groups to show the type of material. The groups are as follows:
P01 - Processing and Cleaning, (Refer to Table 1)

P02 - Processing Sundries, (Refer to Table 2)
P03 - Welding and Metal, (Refer to Table 3)
P04 - Jointing Compounds and Greases, (Refer to Table 4)
P05 - Polishing, (Refer to Table 5)
P06 - Inspecting, (Refer to Table 6)
P07 - Paints, Varnishes and Thinners, (Refer to Table 7)
P08 - Bonding, Adhesives, Fillers and Sealers, (Refer to Table 8)
P09 - General Stores, (Refer to Table 9)
P10 - Oils and Fluids, (Refer to Table 10)
P11 - Fuels, (Refer to Table 11)
P12 - Packing, (Refer to Table 12).
Each material is given an item number which comes after the group number.
A table for each group is divided into five columns:
• Material No.
• Material Name
• Product Name / Alternative Product / Specification
• Pilatus Part No.
• Notes.
The Material No., Material Name, Pilatus Part No., and Notes columns give the products recommended by
Pilatus.
The Product Name / Alternative Product / Specification column is to give alternative products or the
specifications for alternative products, when it is known, for each Pilatus recommended item. Alternative
materials can be used but if there are no alternative materials given only the recommended materials can be
used (except consumable materials with note 1).
The Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) contains data about the trade names, safety hazards, reactions,
spill and leak procedures, special protection data and special precautions. Before you use any consumable
materials, read the MSDS.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Part numbers with a prefix “*” (asterisk) are no longer procurable.
NOTE 1: All listed consumable materials with note 1, in the Notes column can be purchased locally. If locally
purchased consumable materials are used:
• It is the maintainers responsibility to make sure that the relevant maintenance task can be
accomplished in accordance with the applicable AMM instruction.
• It is the maintainers responsibility to make sure that the locally purchased consumable materials
are acceptable to the regulatory authority.
Table 1: Processing and Cleaning
Material Product Name / Alternative Pilatus

Material Name Notes
No. Product / Specification Part No.
P01 - Processing and Cleaning
P01-001 Cleaner (alkaline) Turco 5884 910.21.31.008 -

MIL-PRF-85704 - -
Almon AL-333 - -
Ardrox 624 - -
B & B 3100 - -
Carbitol - -
CLIX - -
Magnus 1214 - -
Rivenaes R-MCS - -
Rivenaes R-MC G21 - -
Softenol PF-Ri II 908.40.34.085 Used for ultrasonic
Surtec 151 908.40.34.089 cleaning
P01-002 Triethanolamine - - -
P01-003 Emulsifier Witconate (HC-59B) - -
Witconate (P-1059B) - -
P01-004 - P01-015 - -
P01-005 Soap solution AERO-KLENE No. 1002 910.21.21.120 -
Ardrox 6484A 910.21.21.128 Not suitable for PC-21
canopies
Ardrox 6025A 910.21.21.127 Not suitable for PC-21
canopies
P01-006 Cleaner P05-003 - -
P01-007 Non leaded gasoline - 908.62.11.101 -
MIL-G-5572F - -
ASTM-D910 - -
P01-008 White spirit Exxsol D40 908.63.81.101 -
P01-009 Solvent Methanol (pure) 908.44.52.003 -
AMS 3004 - -
O-M-232K - -
PWC011-010 - -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 1: Processing and Cleaning (Continued)

Material Name Notes
P01-010 Solvent Methyl-Ethyl-Ketone (MEK) *910.21.61.015 No longer procurable
ASTM D740 - -
MIL-M-13999 - -
O-C-265 - -
Methyl-Ethyl-Ketone (MEK) 908.21.21.014 -
P01-037 - -
P01-011 Isopropyl 104590-00 *908.44.52.005 No longer procurable
(isopropanol) TT-I-735 grade A - -
PWC011-014 - -
P01-035 - -
P01-012 Liquid detergent Teepol - -
MIL-D-16791 - -
P01-013 Solvent Toluene 910.33.90.270 -
TT-T-548 - -
P01-014 Cleaner (detergent) Turboclean 2 - -
MIL-PRF-85704 - -
P01-015 Ethanol (ethyl alcohol) - 908.44.52.006 -
P01-004 - -
MIL-A-6091 - -
AMS3002 - -
O-E-760 type III - -
PWC011-009 - -
P01-016 Acetone O-A-51 910.21.21.001 -
ASTM D329-95 - -
P01-017 Electrical contact Progold G5S-6 908.24.32.024 -
protector
P01-018 - P01-020 - -
P01-019 Cleaning fluid Kontakt Chemie, Kontakt 60 908.18.12.094 -
P01-020 Electrical contact - 908.24.32.026 -
enhancer P01-018 - -
Stabilant 22 - -
P01-021 Corrosion remover PHOS-KLENE 1 SUPER 908.40.32.155 -
P01-022 Corrosion remover Turco 4409 908.40.32.154 -
P01-023 Paint remover P01-034 - -
P01-024 Cleaner (heavy duty) Ardrox 1900C - Do not use on
canopies
P01-025 Cleaner (heavy duty) Zip-Chem Calla 800 - Do not use on
canopies
MIL-PRF-87937D type II - -
P01-026 Disinfectant Virkon S, Antec International - -
P01-027 Cleaner Extreme SIMPLE GREEN 910.21.21.121 -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 1: Processing and Cleaning (Continued)

Material Name Notes
P01-028 Cleaner Zip-Chem X-405, 12 oz. pump 908.64.22.216 -
spray bottle
5 gal. pail 908.64.22.215 -
P01-029 Cleaning wipe Zip-Chem X-405, EFIS cleaner 908.64.22.214 -
kit (wet / dry wipes)
Visial, ALGLAS, Cleansafe - -
screen / sachet
P01-030 - - - Not used
P08-078 - -
P01-031 Cleaner Ultraviolet dye and general 957.30.00.075 -
purpose cleaner
P01-032 Degreaser Sikkens M600 910.09.00.058 -
P01-033 Wipes, presaturated Dispenser for SatWipes 904.49.73.012 -
solvent Diestone DLS
SatWipes Diestone DLS (box of 904.49.73.013
12 rolls of 60 wipes)
P01-034 Paint remover Socostrip, A 0103N 910.10.00.005 -
P01-023 - -
P01-035 Isopropyl 111-77-3 908.21.21.018 -
(isopropanol) P01-011 - -
P01-036 Plastic media Dry Strip, Typ II 908.44.30.020 -
DS2-30/40-G
MIL-P-85891A
P01-037 Solvent DIESTONE DLS 908.21.21.016 20 kg
910.21.21.002 210 l
P01-038 Kit, cleaning Lithofin 9001581 990.00.00.964 -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 4
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 2: Processing Sundries

Material Name Notes
P02 - Processing Sundries

P02-001 Lockwire (standard) NASM20995 919.01.11.104 -
(diameter 0,8 mm (0.032 in))
MS20995C32 - -
P02-002 Aluminum wool - 904.48.83.103 See note 1
P02-003 Cleaning cloth P02-031, for general cleaning - See note 1
P02-041, for application on - See note 1
acrylic surfaces
P02-004 Chamois leather - 904.49.74.204 See note 1
P02-005 Sponge - 904.49.75.303 See note 1
P02-006 Lockwire (heat MS 9226-03 919.01.11.203 -
resistant) (diameter 0,6 mm (0.025 in))
(MS20995C25) - -
P02-008 Lockwire (heat MS 9226-05, Inconel 919.01.11.107 -
P02-009 Abrasive cloth SIA1913 Siawat FC, grade 120 904.47.22.210 See note 1
P02-015 Lockwire (heat MS 9226-04, Inconel 919.01.11.105 -
P02-016 Abrasive pads 3M Scotch-Brite (very fine 904.48.85.107 See note 1
grade)
MS20995C41 - -
P02-018 Abrasive cloth Grade 80 904.47.23.176 See note 1
P02-019 Cloth, cotton - 904.49.71.203 See note 1
P02-041 - -
P02-020 Abrasive pads 3M Scotch-Brite (regular grade) 904.48.85.108 See note 1
P02-021 Lockwire (brass) Diameter 0,5 mm (0.02 in) 919.01.11.117 -
P02-022 Lockwire (heat MS9226-01, Inconel 919.01.11.101 -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 5
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 2: Processing Sundries (Continued)

Material Name Notes
P02-023 - P02-024 - -
P02-024 Abrasive cloth 1913 Siawat FC, grade 600 904.47.22.223 -
P02-025 Cotton wool, polishing - *904.49.73.006 No longer procurable
raw
Wool, polishing - *904.49.73.001 No longer procurable
Cloth, polishing 290099 904.49.73.015 See note 1
P02-031 Absorbent paper For general cleaning 904.49.73.004 See note 1
P02-003 - -
P02-032 Abrasive paper 3M Trizact P3000 D32 MM 907.71.22.791 -
P02-033 Polishing pad Lamb wool pad 904.49.76.362 See note 1
P02-034 Polishing pad Mirror polish (black) 904.49.76.341 See note 1
P02-035 Polishing pad Buff pad (small) 904.49.76.321 See note 1
P02-036 Polishing hood Off polish hood, micro fiber, 904.49.76.361 See note 1
white
P02-037 Micro fiber cloth - *904.49.76.381 No longer procurable
P02-043 - -
P02-038 Cleaning modelling MT-Magic Smooth and Clean, 904.49.76.121 -
material yellow
P02-039 All purpose cleaner All Purpose Cleaner PLUS 904.49.76.141 -
Concentrate D-12
P02-040 Lockwire (heat MS9226-02, Inconel, 919.01.11.102 -
P02-041 Cloth, lint-free VTT Poly Box PT10 *904.49.73.008 No longer procurable
For application on
acrylic surfaces
VTT Poly Togo PT12 904.49.73.016 See note 1
For application on
acrylic surfaces
P02-003 - See note 1
P02-019 - See note 1
P02-042 Surface prep mitt - 910.21.21.006 -
P02-043 Micro fiber cloth - 904.49.76.382 See note 1
(yellow)
P02-037 - -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 6
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 2: Processing Sundries (Continued)

Material Name Notes
P02-044 Abrasive disk SIA 1913 SIA Watt / P120 990.00.04.006 See note 1
diameter 9 x 2 mm (0.354 x
0.08 in)
P02-045 Abrasive disk SIA 1913 SIA Watt / P12 990.00.04.007 See note 1
diameter 11 x 2mm (0.433 x
0.08 in)
P02-046 Cable, safety Safe-T-Cable, C10-121 919.01.11.306 This locking device is
(diameter 0,6 mm (0.025 in)) not a valid alternative
for lockwire and must
only be used when
this Material No. is
instructed in a specific
procedure
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 7
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 3: Welding and Metal

Material Name Notes
P03 - Welding and Metal

P03-001 Welding rod Filler rod 347, AMS 5680, 907.83.32.501 -
Filler rod 347, AMS 5680, 907.83.32.502 -
Filler rod 347, AMS 5680, 907.83.32.503 -
Filler rod 347, AMS 5680, 907.83.32.505 -
P03-002 Welding rod Filler rod 1.7734.2, *907.83.31.911 No longer procurable
Filler rod 1.7734.2, 907.83.31.912 -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 8
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 4: Jointing Compounds and Greases

Material Name Notes
P04 - Jointing Compound and Greases

P04-001 Grease AeroShell Grease 5 *908.21.52.003 No longer procurable
P04-003 and P04-031 - -
P04-002 Grease AeroShell Grease 7 908.20.02.063 -
MIL-PRF-23827C Type II - -
MIL-PRF-81322G - -
G-395 - -
DOD-G-24508A - -
P04-004 Grease Plastilube #3 *908.25.71.501 No longer procurable
P04-041 - -
P04-005 - P04-030 - -
P04-006 Grease AeroShell Grease 17 *908.25.71.803 No longer procurable
P04-037 - -
P04-007 - P04-030 - -
P04-008 Jointing compound Wellseal *907.13.11.923 No longer procurable
P04-017 - -
P04-009 High-temperature Molybdenum Disulfide 908.25.71.802 -
compound Petrolatum
MIL-PRF-83483E - -
P04-010 - P04-009 - -
P04-011 Dry lubricant (air- Molyslip ADF *908.10.09.002 No longer procurable
curing) P04-043 - -
P04-012 Corrosion Mastinox 6856H *910.31.20.040 No longer procurable
preventative
P04-039 - -
P04-013 - P04-003 - -
P04-014 Thermal transfer V5004 *907.13.11.998 No longer procurable
compound
P04-036 - -
P04-015 High-temperature Molykote 1000 908.24.02.004 -
compound
P04-016 Grease AeroShell Grease 6 908.25.71.111 See Hartzell SL
P04-045 - -
P04-017 Jointing compound Hylomar Aerograde PL32 907.13.11.903 -
P04-018 Silicone grease Dow Corning 4 908.20.02.093 -
MIL-S-8660C - -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 9
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 4: Jointing Compounds and Greases (Continued)

Material Name Notes
P04-019 - - * No longer procurable
P04-020 - P04-004 - -
P04-021 - P04-029 - -
P04-022 Paste, installation Molykote G Rapid Plus 908.11.42.203 -
P04-009 - -
P04-023 Grease Gulfflex 2 *908.25.71.101 No longer procurable
P04-016 - -
P04-024 Lubricant Molyslip liquid grease *908.10.09.013 No longer procurable
P04-009 - -
P04-025 - Not used - -
P04-026 - Not used - -
P04-027 Grease Mobilgrease Special *908.21.42.110 No longer procurable
MIL-PRF-23827C Type I - -
G-354 - -
P04-029 Paste, installation Duotempi PMY 45, 60 g tube 908.24.02.001 -
Duotempi PMY 45, 600 g tin 908.24.02.002 -
P04-030 Grease Nyco 65 Vaseline 908.20.02.101 -
S-743 - -
P04-031 Grease Mobil Aviation Grease SHC 100 908.20.02.066 -
P04-032 Grease Isoflex Topas NCA 51 *908.21.42.115 No longer procurable
P04-028 - -
P04-033 Oxygen paste Oxygenoex FF250, tin *908.25.71.700 No longer procurable
Oxygenoex FF250, tube *908.25.71.701 No longer procurable
P04-038 - -
P04-034 Lubricant Ultra-Plus Extra 908.40.01.002 -
P04-035 High-temperature Molykote P-37 908.24.02.003 -
compound
P04-036 Thermal transfer Dow Corning 340 907.13.11.997 -
compound
MIL-G-21164D - -
G-353 - -
P04-038 Oxygen paste Krytox 240AC *908.25.71.702 No longer procurable
P04-040 - -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 10
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 4: Jointing Compounds and Greases (Continued)

Material Name Notes
P04-039 Corrosion preventive Chromate-free CA1000 910.31.20.042 -
Thinners 3924 (0422 / 9000) 910.31.20.043 1 liter
910.31.20.044 5 liters
P04-040 Oxygen paste Krytox 240AZ 908.25.71.703 -
MIL-PRF-27617 Type I - -
P04-042 Grease Royco 27 *908.20.02.067 No longer procurable
P04-041 - -
P04-043 Dry lubricant (air- Tecnite 3402-C LF 908.10.09.004 -
curing)
P04-044 Grease OT20 959.30.06.330 -
P04-045 Grease Nyco Grease GN 3058 908.20.02.094 -
P04-046 Grease Krytox 283AD 908.25.71.704 -
P04-047 Grease Nyebar Type P, 908.10.09.006 -
NYEBAR-TYPE-P-0-2PCT-
60ML
P04-048 Grease, fluoro- Molykote FS-3451 908.20.02.095 -
silicone
P04-049 Lubricant BOELUBE 70307 908.15.12.062 -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 11
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 5: Polishing

Material Name Notes
P05 - Polishing
P05-001 - - - The procedure that
used the P05-001 has
been deleted
P05-002 Plastic / Acrylic MGH No. 17 908.64.22.203 -
cleaner (paste)
P05-003 Plastic / Acrylic MGH No. 18 * No longer procurable
cleaner (liquid)
P05-011, P05-012, P05-013 - -
P05-004 Plastic / Acrylic polish Altuglas No. 2 907.71.22.702 -
(fine)
P05-005 Plastic / Acrylic polish Altuglas No. 1 907.71.22.701 -
(heavy)
Novus No. 3 - -
P05-006 Plastic / Acrylic polish MGH No. 10 908.64.22.201 -
(medium) Novus No. 2 - -
P05-007 Grinding polish Diamant grinding polish M-85 904.49.76.261 -
P05-008 Polish cleaner Cleaning and mirror polish M-83 904.49.76.241 -
P05-009 Sealing Polymer sealing M-20 904.49.76.221 -
P05-010 Fine cleaner Last Touch Detailing spray D- 904.49.76.165 -
155
P05-011 Plastic / Acrylic Zip-Chem X-405, 5 gal. 908.64.22.215 -
cleaner container
Zip-Chem X-405, 12 oz. spray 908.64.22.216 -
P05-003 - -
P05-012 Plastic / Acrylic Burnus Kunststoff-Reiniger, 20 l 908.64.22.217 -
cleaner container
Burnus Kunststoff-Reiniger, 0.5 908.64.22.218 -
l container
P05-003 - -
P05-013 Plastic / Acrylic R 300 Super Surface 908.64.22.219 -
cleaner P05-003 - -
P05-014 Cleaner Zero V.O.C. degreaser - XE3 - 910.21.21.125 -
green
P05-015 Cleaner Hard surface cleaner - XG5 - 910.21.21.005 -
blue
P05-016 Cleaner AeroLube - XAL - pink 910.21.21.124 -
P05-017 Cleaner Spray and Shine XC11 - pink 910.21.21.004 -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 12
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 5: Polishing (Continued)

Material Name Notes
P05-018 Polish (superfine) Metal Polish - XMP-S 910.21.21.008 -
P05-019 Polish (medium) Metal Polish - XMP-M 910.21.21.007 -
P05-020 Polish, final NuShine IIS 910.21.21.009 Leading edge mirror
finish
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 13
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 6: Inspecting

Material Name Notes
P06 - Inspecting
P06-001 Penetrant Ardrox 907PB, aerosol *908.68.12.105 No longer procurable.
Used for dye
AMS2644 Type 2 Method A and -
inspections in
C
accordance with
P06-005 - ASTM E1417, MIL-
STD-2132 or ASTM
E165.
P06-002 Remover Ardrox 9PR88, aerosol 908.68.12.106 Used for dye
AMS2644 Class 2 - inspections in
accordance with
P06-008 - ASTM E1417, MIL-
STD-2132 or ASTM
E165
P06-003 Developer Ardrox 9D1B, aerosol 908.68.12.107 Used for dye
inspections in
AMS2644 Form d and e -
accordance with
P06-006 - ASTM E1417, MIL-
P06-007 - STD-2132 or ASTM
E165
P06-004 Leak detector spray - *907.12.11.004 No longer procurable
MIL-PRF-25567 - -
ECO Leak Finder 907.12.11.005 -
P06-005 Fluorescent penetrant Ardrox 970P25E, 25 l container 908.68.12.113 Used for dye
inspections in
Ardrox 970P25E, 1 l container 908.68.12.117
accordance with
Ardrox 9705 - ASTM E1417, MIL-
AMS2644 Type 1 Method A and - STD-2132 or ASTM
C Sensitivity Level 2 or higher E165
P06-006 Dry developer Ardrox 9D4A 908.68.12.112 Used for dye

AMS2644 Form a - inspections in
accordance with
P06-003 - ASTM E1417, MIL-
P06-007 - STD-2132 or ASTM
E165
Must not be used with
P06-001
P06-007 Wet developer Ardrox 9D1B, 10 l container 908.68.12.111 Used for dye
inspections in
AMS2644 Form d and e -
accordance with
P06-003 - ASTM E1417, MIL-
P06-006 - STD-2132 or ASTM
E165
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 14
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 6: Inspecting (Continued)

Material Name Notes
P06-008 Remover Ardrox 9PR50, aerosol 908.68.12.108 Used for dye
inspections in
AMS2644 Class 2 -
accordance with
P06-002 - ASTM E1417, MIL-
STD-2132 or ASTM
E165
P06-009 A/C system, leak - 957.30.00.070 -
detection dye
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 15
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 7: Paints, Varnishes and Thinners

Material Name Notes
P07 - Paints, Varnishes and Thinners

P07-001 CCC solution Bonderite M-CR 1200S Aero 908.40.32.251 -
(formerly Alodine 1200S)
P07-002 Primer Zinc chromate primer * No longer procurable
P07-003 - -
P07-003 Primer Epoxy primer * No longer procurable
P07-007 - -
P07-004 Primer 8010-0-100-012P (primer) - -
P07-005 Thinner 8010-0-100-0143 (thinner) - -
P07-006 Paint Cockpit grey, Berlacryl 2K acryl 910.04.04.060 -
/ polyurethane (sea grey)
Hardener 042.900.080 (hardener) 910.04.04.057 -
Thinner Berluran (043.000.000) 910.09.00.008 -
P07-007 Primer Epoxy primer, 37035A, Akzo- 910.02.05.031 -
Nobel, green
P07-003 - -
Hardener 92140 (hardener) 910.02.05.032 -
Thinners C25/90 S (200 liters) 910.09.00.101 -
Thinners C25/90 S (5 liters) 910.09.00.104 -
P07-008 Paint (marking) Enictol 234183-125 (red) *910.33.82.150 No longer procurable
P07-045 - -
P07-009 Paint Celoflex 95 paint (anti-erosion) 910.04.04.504 -
Hardener 0778/9000 (hardener) 910.04.04.505 -
Thinners 0470/9000 (thinners) 910.09.00.057 -
P07-010 Paint Series 658-33 (black) 910.07.05.102 -
Paint Series 658-00 (white) 910.07.05.103 -
Paint Series 658-16 (signal red) 910.07.05.104 -
Paint Series 658-603 (gray matt) 910.07.05.105 -
Paint Series 658-16/MT (signal red 910.07.05.107 -
matt)
Paint, hardener Series 600-HDA 910.07.05.101 -
Paint, thinner Series 600-017 910.09.00.508 -
Paint, retarder Series 600-018 910.09.00.904 -
P07-011 Deleted - 910.07.05.102 -
P07-010 - -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 16
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 7: Paints, Varnishes and Thinners (Continued)

Material Name Notes
P07-012 Deleted - 910.07.05.103 -
P07-010 - -
P07-013 Deleted - 910.07.05.104 -
P07-010 - -
P07-014 Deleted - 910.09.00.508 -
P07-010 - -
P07-015 Deleted - 910.09.00.904 -
P07-010 - -
P07-016 Primer 37045, white (barrier primer) 910.02.05.030 -
Hardener S 66/22 R (hardener) 910.04.04.316 -
Thinner C 25/90 S (thinner) 910.09.00.101 -
P07-017 Paint White, Aviox finish 90075 910.04.04.515 -
Hardener - 910.04.04.502 -
P07-018 Paint Snow-white, anti-chafe, 910.07.09.012 -
Celogliss 5456 / 1238
Hardener 0730/9000 910.07.09.014 -
Thinners 0491/9000 910.07.09.013 -
Paint Gray, anti-chafe, Celogliss 5456 910.07.09.015 -
/ 7203
Hardener For Celogliss 5456 910.07.09.014 -
Thinners For Celogliss 5456 910.07.09.013 -
P07-019 Paint Top coat, Nuvovern ACR 910.04.04.022 -
enamel, aluminum
Hardener PUR hardener 910.04.04.050 -
Thinners - 910.09.00.005 -
P07-020 Paint White, Aerodur finish, C21/ *910.04.04.320 No longer procurable
100 UVR, RAL 9010
P07-031 - -
Paint Black, Aerodur finish, C21/ *910.04.04.314 No longer procurable
100 UVR, RAL 9005 equal
(gloss)
P07-031 - -
Paint Black, Aerodur finish, C21/ *910.04.04.416 No longer procurable
100 UVR, RAL 9005 equal
(gloss tinter)
P07-031 - -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 17
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
Paint Red, Aerodur finish, C21/100 *910.04.04.317 No longer procurable
UVR, RAL 3020
P07-031 - -
Paint Red, Aerodur finish, C21/100 *910.04.04.304 No longer procurable
UVR, RAL 3000
P07-031 - -
Paint Blue, Aerodur finish, C21/100 *910.04.04.303 No longer procurable
UVR, RAL 5010
P07-031 - -
Paint Orange, Aerodur finish, C21/ *910.04.04.318 No longer procurable
100 UVR (LF), RAL 2004
P07-031 - -
Paint Yellow, Aerodur finish, C21/ *910.04.04.319 No longer procurable
100 UVR (LF), RAL 1023
P07-031 - -
Paint Gray, Aerodur finish, C21/100 *910.04.04.328 No longer procurable
UVR, 017845 RAL 7030
P07-031 - -
Paint, hardener S66/22R 910.04.04.316 -
Paint, thinners C25/90S 910.09.00.101 -
Paint, thinners Thinners 96184 910.09.00.102 Use at high temp /
humidity
P07-021 CCC touch-up Bonderite M-CR 1132 Aero 908.40.32.252 Do not use
(formerly Alodine 1132),
Touch-N-Prep Pen
TCP touch-up Bonderite M-CR 871 chromate- 908.40.32.256 -
free Touch-N-Prep pen (known
as Alodine 871 Touch-N-Prep)
P07-022 Paint Snow white, ECL-G-1678, *910.04.04.517 No longer procurable
Eclipse HS PUR topcoat paint
P07-031 - -
Snow white 702112 - -
Paint Light gray, ECL-G-11018, 910.04.04.521 -
Eclipse HS PUR topcoat paint,
RAL 7035
Paint Gray, ECL-G-11017, Eclipse *910.04.04.522 No longer procurable
HS PUR topcoat paint, RAL
7040
P07-031 - -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 18
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
Paint Black, ECL-G-92, *910.04.04.523 No longer procurable
RAL 9005
P07-031 - -
Paint Blue, ECL-G-2843, Eclipse *910.04.04.524 No longer procurable
HS PUR topcoat paint, RAL
5017
P07-031 - -
Paint White, ECL-G-1681, Eclipse HS *910.04.04.525 No longer procurable
PUR topcoat paint, RAL 9003
P07-031 - -
Paint Traffic red, ECL-G-3637, *910.04.04.531 No longer procurable
RAL 3020
P07-031 - -
Paint White, ECL-G-1670, Eclipse HS *910.04.04.532 No longer procurable
PUR topcoat paint, RAL 9010
P07-031 - -
Paint White, ECL-G-10 BAC 7067, 910.04.04.534 -
FSB 17925 - -
Paint Red 715045, ECL-G-3701, 910.04.04.535 -
FSB 11350 - -
Paint UK, ECL-G-3818, Eclipse HS 910.04.04.538 -
PUR topcoat paint
CM410A5, orange - -
Paint ECL-G-6663, Eclipse HS PUR *910.04.04.540 No longer procurable
topcoat paint, RAL 2009,
orange 71740
P07-031 - -
Hardener - *910.04.04.536 No longer procurable
P07-031 - -
Activator - 910.04.04.529 -
P07-023 Deleted - - -
P07-024 Varnish RD 1177 blue, 8010-0-100- 910.42.72.701 -
0143
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 19
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
P07-025 Spray filler AKZO Autocryl multi-use HS - -
Base - 910.08.06.010 -
Hardener Autocryl P25 910.08.06.013 -
Thinner Sikkens Plus Reducer Fast 917.00.40.019 -
P07-026 Wash primer ANAC Metaflex FCR - -
Base - 910.02.09.005 -
Hardener Metaflex FCR 910.02.09.006 -
Thinner C25/90S 910.09.00.101 -
P07-027 Conductive paint Pyroflex 7 D 713 - -
Base - 910.04.04.334 -
Hardener 0651 910.04.04.335 -
Thinner C25/90S 910.09.00.101 -
P07-028 Camouflage Dark grey, topcoat: Aerodur 910.04.04.336 -
5000
Light grey 910.04.04.337 -
P07-029 Clearcoat Berlacryl CC 910.04.04.068 -
Hardener - 910.04.04.057 -
Thinner - 910.09.00.009 -
P07-030 Primer FASTBoot primer 907.13.13.091 -
P07-031 Topcoat Polyurethane gloss - -
Alumigrip 4200 snow white 910.04.04.558 -
P07-020 and P07-022 - -
Alumigrip 4200, RAL 7040 910.04.04.562 -
P07-020 and P07-022 - -
Alumigrip 4200, RAL 9005 910.04.04.570 -
P07-020 and P07-022 - -
Alumigrip 4200, RAL 5017 910.04.04.564 -
P07-020 and P07-022 - -
Alumigrip 4200, RAL 9003 910.04.04.565 -
P07-020 and P07-022 - -
Alumigrip 4200, RAL 3020 *910.04.04.561 No longer procurable
P07-020 and P07-022 - -
Alumigrip 4200, RAL 9010 910.04.04.563 -
P07-020 and P07-022 - -
Curing solution *910.04.04.553 No longer procurable
910.04.04.700 -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 20
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
PC-242 - -
P07-020, P07-022 - -
Alumigrip 4200 orange 910.04.04.577 -
(Singapore)
P07-020 and P07-022 - -
Alumigrip 4200, RAL 7037 910.04.04.576 -
P07-020 and P07-022 - -
Alumigrip 4200 B.T. white 910.04.04.566 -
P07-020 and P07-022 - -
Alumigrip 4200, RAL 3003 910.04.04.567 -
P07-020 and P07-022 - -
Alumigrip 4200, RAL 5003 910.04.04.568 -
P07-020 and P07-022 - -
Alumigrip 4200, RAL 7001 910.04.04.569 -
P07-020 and P07-022 - -
Alumigrip 4200, RAL 1023 910.04.04.578 -
P07-020 and P07-022 - -
Alumigrip 4200, RAL 7030 910.04.04.640 -
P07-020 and P07-022 - -
Curing solution PC-242 *910.04.04.553 No longer procurable
910.04.04.700 -
Activator 4950 (standard activator) 910.04.04.555 -
Activator 4951 (medium activator) 910.04.04.556 -
Activator 4952 (fast activator) 910.04.04.559 -
Activator 4953 (decoration activator) - -
P07-032 Paint Berlacryl, graphite pearl 910.04.04.062 -
Hardener - 910.04.04.057 -
Thinner - 910.09.00.009 -
P07-033 Paint Berlacryl, clearcoat 910.04.04.063 -
P07-034 Paint Berlacryl 2K PUR SGL, cockpit 910.04.04.056 -
green
Hardener 042.900.080 910.04.04.057 -
Thinner Berluran (043.000.000) 910.09.00.008 -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 21
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
P07-035 Topcoat, matt-black Aerodex 000744 910.04.04.321 Use until stocks
polyurethane exhausted
P07-040 - -
Paint, hardener S66/22R 910.04.04.316 -
Paint, thinner C25/90S 910.09.00.101 -
Paint, thinner 96184 910.09.00.102 Use at high temp /
humidity
P07-036 Pretreatment, water- Metaflex SP 1050 (sat wipes) 907.13.13.090 -
based (chromate free) Metaflex SP 1050 (spray can) 907.13.13.089 -
Metaflex SP 1050 (can 1 gal.) 907.13.13.088 -
P07-037 Epoxy primer Alumigrip 2111 (base) 910.02.05.046 -
(chromate free)
Curing solution CS6018 - -
Thinner TR-114 - -
Thinner TR-115 - -
P07-038 Topcoat, clear-gloss Alumigrip 4450 clear coat *910.04.04.571 No longer procurable
polyurethane (base)
910.04.04.699 -
Curing Solution For Alumigrip 4450 clear coat: *910.04.04.575 No longer procurable
CS4906 910.04.04.698 -
Activator A4961: high temperature high 910.04.04.573 -
humidity
Activator A4962: cool weather 910.04.04.574 -
Activator A4968: standard *910.04.04.591 No longer procurable
910.04.04.696 -
Activator A4969: fast stripe - spot repair 910.04.04.592 -
P07-039 Topcoat, base-coat Alumigrip 4400 base coat 910.04.04.579 -
polyurethane (base: for example snow white)
Curing Solution For Alumigrip 4400 BC: 910.04.04.584 -
CS4904
Activator A4956 *910.04.04.583 No longer procurable
910.04.04.697 -
humidity
Activator A4965: fast stripe - spot repair 910.04.04.590 -
Activator A4967: cool weather 910.04.04.582 -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 22
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
P07-040 Topcoat Aerowave 5001, matt-black 910.04.54.002 -
water-based polyurethane
P07-035 - -
Curing solution Aerowave: 6002 910.04.54.001 -
P07-041 Primer Polyurethane chromate free, 910.02.04.006 -
PAC 33 CF
Hardener 0736 910.02.04.008 -
Thinner 0433 910.02.04.009 -
P07-042 Primer Polyurethane, PAC 33 910.02.04.005 -
Hardener 0701 910.02.04.007 -
Thinner 0433 910.02.04.009 -
P07-043 Basecoat Alumigrip 4250 910.04.04.339 -
P07-044 Paint Locking varnish, marking, *910.33.82.160 No longer procurable
orange
Cross check, torque marker 910.33.82.161 -
P07-045 Paint Glyptal, marking, red, 910.33.82.152 -
Glyptal 1201 Red Enamel
P07-008 - -
P07-046 Paint Alumigrip 4400, base coat solid 910.04.04.580 -
color, bordeaux purple, RAL
4004
P07-047 Paint Alumigrip 4400, base coat solid 910.04.04.581 -
color, curry yellow, RAL 1027
P07-048 Paint Alumigrip 4400, G10024, white 910.04.04.662 -
Paint Alumigrip 4400, G30021, red 910.04.04.660 -
Paint Alumigrip 4400, G20049, blue 910.04.04.663 -
Paint Alumigrip 4400, E99053, sand 910.04.04.664 -
Paint Alumigrip 4400, G15015, gray 910.04.04.661 -
Paint Alumigrip 4400, FS11136, red 910.04.04.633 -
Paint Alumigrip 4400, FS15044, blue 910.04.04.634 -
Paint Alumigrip 4400, FS17875, white 910.04.04.636 -
Curing solution - 910.04.04.584 -
Activator A4956: standard, for Alumigrip *910.04.04.583 No longer procurable
4400 BC: CS4904
910.04.04.697 -
humidity
Activator A4965: fast stripe – spot repair 910.04.04.587 -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 23
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
P07-049 Paint Alumigrip 4400, CM407G4, red 910.04.04.655 -
Paint Alumigrip 4400, CM427B5, 910.04.04.656 -
yellow
Paint Alumigrip 4400, CM470E4, blue 910.04.04.657 -
Paint Alumigrip 4400, CM495A1, 910.04.04.658 -
white
Paint Alumigrip 4400, blue, RAL5022 910.04.04.659 -
Curing solution For Alumigrip 4400 BC: 910.04.04.584 -
CS4904
910.04.04.697 -
humidity
Activator A4965: fast stripe – spot repair 910.04.04.587 -
P07-050 Paint Topcoat, Nuvovern DL 2K PUR 910.04.04.011 -
SGL, dusty grey, RAL
P07-051 Paint Topcoat, Nuvovern WR glimmer - -
silver grey A103
P07-052 Paint Topcoat, Alumigrip 4200, RAL 910.04.04.639 -
3000
2004
5010
P07-055 Paint Topcoat, Aerowave 5001, grey, 910.04.54.005 -
RAL 7037
P07-056 Primer Epoxy primer 10P8-11 910.02.05.038 -
P07-057 Filler putty, hardener Hardener / Curing solution 6009 910.08.55.002 -
P07-058 Filler (spray), thinner / Thinner, TR-114 910.09.00.103 -
reducer
P07-059 Paint BERLAC Group, stardustgrey 551.30.99.033 -
screws
P07-060 Paint Serie 658, DMY 912.00.00.019 -
P07-061 Primer Aerowave 2001, green, RAL 910.02.55.001 -
6021
Curing solution Curing solution 6005 910.02.55.002 -
P07-062 Filler FRS30, sandy beige 910.08.04.001 -
Hardener FRS hardener 910.08.04.002 -
Thinner FRSL thinner 910.09.00.014 -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 24
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
P07-063 Wash primer Desoprime 7530 910.02.09.010 -
Hardener Desoprime 7530B 910.02.09.009 -
P07-064 Primer Desoprime 7065 910.02.04.010 -
Hardener Desoprime 7065B 910.02.04.011 -
Thinner Desoprime 7065C 910.09.04.001 -
P07-065 Filler Desofill CA8620, kit 910.08.04.003 -
P07-066 Paint Desothane HS CA8800, solid 912.00.00.061 -
Hardener CA8800Z 910.04.04.612 -
Thinner CA8800CT 910.04.04.623 -
Thinner CA8800CTR 910.09.04.008 -
Thinner CA8800CT1 910.09.04.004 -
Thinner CA8800CT2 910.09.04.005 -
Thinner CA8800CT3 910.09.04.006 -
Thinner CA8800CT4 910.09.04.007 -
P07-067 Paint Desothane HS CA8000, mica 912.00.00.060 -
Hardener CA8000B 910.04.04.611 -
Thinner CA8000C 910.04.04.621 -
Thinner CA8000C1 910.09.04.002 -
Thinner CA8000C2 910.09.04.003 -
Thinner CA8000C3 910.04.04.622 -
P07-068 Paint Desothane HS CA8000, 912.00.00.059 -
metallic
Hardener CA8000B 910.04.04.611 -
Thinner CA8000C 910.04.04.621 -
Thinner CA8000C1 910.09.04.002 -
Thinner CA8000C2 910.09.04.003 -
Thinner CA8000C3 910.04.04.622 -
P07-069 Paint Desothane HD 9008, clear coat 910.04.04.618 -
Hardener 9008B 910.04.04.613 -
Thinner 9008CR 910.04.04.624 -
Thinner 9008CS 910.04.04.625 -
Thinner 9008CSR 910.09.04.009 -
Thinner 9008CV 910.09.04.010 -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 25
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
P07-070 Paint Desothane HS 910.04.04.106 -
CA8720M0900C, clear coat,
matt
Hardener CA8000B 910.04.04.611 -
Thinner CA8000C2 910.09.04.003 -
P07-071 Paint Alumigrip 4400, solid 912.00.00.036 -
Curing solution CS4904 910.04.04.584 -
910.04.04.697 -
Activator A4957 910.04.04.586 -
Activator A4965 910.04.04.590 -
Activator A4967 910.04.04.582 -
P07-072 Paint Alumigrip 4400, metallic 912.00.00.067 -
910.04.04.697 -
Activator A4957 910.04.04.586 -
Activator A4965 910.04.04.590 -
Activator A4967 910.04.04.582 -
P07-073 Paint Alumigrip 4400, mica 912.00.00.068 -
910.04.04.697 -
Activator A4957 910.04.04.586 -
Activator A4965 910.04.04.590 -
Activator A4967 910.04.04.582 -
P07-074 Paint Alumigrip 4200 912.00.00.028 -
Curing solution PC-242 *910.04.04.553 No longer procurable
910.04.04.700 -
Activator A4950 910.04.04.555 -
Activator A4951 910.04.04.556 -
Activator A4952 910.04.04.559 -
Activator A4953 910.04.04.648 -
Thinner TR-114 910.09.00.103 -
P07-075 Paint Aerowave 5001, semi gloss 912.00.00.032 -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 26
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
P07-076 Paint Aerowave 5001, matt 912.00.00.020 -
P07-077 Primer, filler - 551.30.99.196 Primer, filler - group
part number
Sherwin-Williams, CM0481968 910.02.05.056 -
Hardener Sherwin-Williams, CM0120828 910.02.05.053 -
Reducer Sherwin-Williams, CM0110933 910.09.00.024 -
Thinner Sherwin-Williams, CM0110944 910.09.00.025 -
P07-078 CCC liquid Bonderite M-CR 1500 AERO 908.40.32.254 -
P07-079 Coating, protective Granitize X20-18 AECI 3 904.49.76.226 -
surface-sealing
P07-080 Paint - 551.30.99.209 Paint - group part
number
Sherwin-Williams, Skyscapes 912.00.00.116 -
Next Generation, Solid, Dummy
SNXXXXX Colors
Hardener Sherwin-Williams, CM0850BH2 910.02.05.059 -
Thinner, slow Sherwin-Williams, CM0850BR1 910.09.00.027 -
Thinner, standard Sherwin-Williams, CM0850B20 910.09.00.026 -
number
Sherwin-Williams, Skyscapes 912.00.00.117 -
Next Generation, Mica, Dummy
SNPXXXXX Colors
Hardener Sherwin-Williams, CM0850BH2 910.02.05.059 -
Thinner, slow Sherwin-Williams, CM0850BR1 910.09.00.027 -
Thinner, extra-slow Sherwin-Williams, CM0850BR0 910.09.00.028 -
number
Sherwin-Williams, Skyscapes, 910.04.04.695 -
clearcoat, CM0850180
Thinner, medium Sherwin-Williams, CM0850CR3 910.09.00.029 -
Thinner, fast Sherwin-Williams, CM0850CR5 910.09.00.030 -
Thinner, extra-fast Sherwin-Williams, CM0850CR7 910.09.00.031 -
Thinner for flow Sherwin-Williams, CM0110944 910.09.00.025 -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 27
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
P07-083 Primer, chromate free - 551.30.99.195 Primer - group part
number
Sherwin-Williams, CM0483712 910.02.05.055 -
P07-084 Adhesion promoter - 551.30.99.197 Adhesion promoter -
group part number
Surface pre-treatment 3M AC-131 BB 910.02.05.051 -
number
Jetglo Express, CM840 series, 912.00.00.100 -
Dummy
Hardener Jetglo Express, CM0840081 910.02.05.054 -
Activator Jetglo Express, CM0840A01 910.04.04.117 -
Activator Jetglo Express, CM0840A02 910.04.04.118
number
Acryglo Conv, Solid, Dummy, 912.00.00.118 -
WXXXXX or TXXXXX colors
Hardener Acryglo Conv, CM0571081 910.02.05.061 -
Activator Acryglo Conv, CM0571082 910.04.04.132 -
Thinner Acryglo Conv, CM0110701 910.09.00.032 -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 28
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
number
Acryglo Conv Metallic, Dummy, 912.00.00.119 -
HLGXXXXX colors
Hardener Acryglo Conv CM0571081 910.02.05.061 -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 29
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 8: Bonding, Adhesives, Fillers and Sealers

Material Name Notes
P08 - Bonding, Adhesives, Fillers and Sealers

P08-001 Caulking putty 3M body caulking *907.13.13.092 No longer procurable
P08-069 - -
P08-002 Sealant, silicone LOCTITE 5368 910.42.12.126 -
P08-003 Sealant P08-018 - -
P08-004 Sealant P08-020 - -
P08-005 Sealant Pro-seal 890 A2 907.13.13.022 -
P08-006 Coating Laminar X-500 * No longer procurable
P08-024 - -
P08-007 Coating PR 1560 * No longer procurable
P08-024 - -
P08-008 Adhesive Miranit 8526 (BALCO-ME) 910.42.22.372 -
P08-009 Adhesive 3M Fastbond 10 *910.42.22.037 No longer procurable
P08-080 - -
MIL-A-21366, A-A-1936 - -
P08-010 Thinners 3M Fastbond 10 910.42.22.038 -
P08-011 Contact adhesive P08-009 - -
P08-012 Thinner P08-010 - -
P08-013 Sealant P08-018 - -
P08-014 Sealant P08-056 - -
P08-015 Adhesive Acrylic, Tensol No.6 910.42.22.393 -
P08-016 Edge sealer P08-041 - -
P08-017 Adhesive LOCTITE 241 910.42.12.123 -
Adhesive LOCTITE 243 910.42.12.128 -
P08-018 Sealant PR 1422B-2, 1,0 liter 907.10.11.232 No longer procurable
in the EU
Available in the USA
P08-071 - -
P08-095 - -
Sealant, PR 1422B-1/2 - -
P08-019 Sealant RTV 123 907.13.11.931 -
P08-020 Sealant PR 1422A-2 - No longer procurable
in the EU
Available in the USA
P08-073 - -
P08-021 Thread sealing LOCTITE 542 910.42.12.121 -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 30
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 8: Bonding, Adhesives, Fillers and Sealers (Continued)

Material Name Notes
P08-022 Sealant Permatex, Form-a-Gasket No. 1 907.12.11.203 -
MIL-S-45180D - -
P08-023 Adhesive P08-059 - -
P08-024 Coating PR 1005-L 907.10.02.001 -
P08-007 - -
AMS-S-4383 - -
P08-025 Thinner Thinner (for e.g. Miranit 8526, 910.42.22.375 -
BALCO ME)
P08-026 Adhesive Bostik M890 910.42.72.111 -
P08-027 Coating Age Master No. 1 908.41.01.001 -
P08-028 Sealant Protective coating, 907.13.13.041 -
BFG A-851-B
P08-029 Adhesive Scotch-Weld 1300L with 910.42.22.052 -
toluene
MIL-A-21366, A-A-1936 - -
P08-030 Filler Putty, aerowave 2501, beige, 910.08.55.001 -
509452
P08-031 Conductive, sealant BFG A-56-B 910.07.19.012 -
P08-032 Sealant P08-057 - -
P08-033 Sealant P08-058 - -
P08-034 Adhesive Araldite, two part adhesive *910.42.62.002 No longer procurable
P08-104 - -
P08-035 Thread sealing LOCTITE 586 910.42.12.130 -
P08-036 Resin Epoxy, Dexter Hysol AE 9396, 2 910.42.72.170 -
part
P08-037 Glass microspheres Cap-o-Sil 910.82.20.910 -
P08-038 Adhesive Epoxy, Araldite, 2 component, 910.42.62.000 -
50 g
P08-039 Sealant LOCTITE 307, 8010-0-000- - -
0021
P08-040 Sealant P08-056 - -
P08-041 Clear sealer 3M 08551 *907.13.13.093 No longer procurable
P08-056 - -
P08-042 Sealant Sikaflex-221 907.13.13.201 -
P08-043 Screw locking LOCTITE 243 910.42.12.128 -
P08-044 Resin Epoxy, Dexter Hysol AE 9395, 910.42.72.169 -
2 part
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 31
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
P08-045 Sealant Silicon, translucent, RTV 907.13.13.102 -
MIL-A-46106 - -
P08-046 Sealant Electrically conductive, PR *907.10.11.271 No longer procurable
1764 Class B
P08-070 - -
P08-047 - P04-029 - -
P08-048 Resin Epoxy, Hysol 9394 A/B, 2 part 907.10.11.272 -
MMM-A-132 - -
P08-049 Honeycomb core Nomex 3.2-80, thickness 14 917.00.25.210 -
mm (0.55 in)
P08-050 Honeycomb core Nomex 3.2-48, thickness 12 917.00.25.227 -
mm (0.50 in)
P08-051 Foam core PMI Rohazell 51WF, thickness 917.33.14.146 -
35 mm (1.37 in)
P08-052 Adhesive Epoxy, 3M DP490 910.42.72.205 -
SW9323-2B/A - Use for field repair
P08-059 - -
P08-053 Filler, spray Filler 2K UP 910.08.06.004 -
P08-054 Resin Epoxy 5052 917.00.40.001 -
Resin Araldite 5052 - -
Hardener Aradur 5052 917.00.40.002 -
P08-055 Ceramic adhesive Resbond 907GF 907.10.11.273 -
MMS3500-11 - -
P08-056 Sealant, fillet acrylic - 551.32.99.004 Sealant group part
black number
PR1829B1/2N-FAP1001 907.10.11.262 With Adhesion
Promoter.
PR1829B1/2N-F1001
is without Adhesion
Promoter
PR1829B2N-FAP1001 907.10.11.263 With Adhesion
Promoter
PR1829B2N-F1001 is
without Adhesion
Promoter
P08-040 - -
P08-057 Sealant PS 892 C12 * No longer procurable
P08-074 - -
P08-058 Sealant PS 892 C24 * No longer procurable
P08-075 - -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 32
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
P08-059 Adhesive Epoxy, SW9323 910.42.72.204 -
P08-060 - -
P08-060 Adhesive Epoxy, EC1614B/A *910.42.72.203 No longer procurable
P08-059 - -
P08-061 Adhesive Epoxy, DP-100FR, 2 part 910.42.62.003 -
P08-062 Adhesive INSUL-Kleber 1000 910.42.22.351 -
P08-063 Adhesive Acrylic, Tensol No. 70 910.42.72.112 -
P08-064 Adhesive Epoxy, Raychem S1005 910.42.72.206 -
P08-065 Adhesive LOCTITE 641 *910.42.12.120 No longer procurable
P08-066 Honeycomb core ECA 3.2-48-3 mm thick 917.00.25.220 -
P08-067 Honeycomb core ECA 3.2-48 6 mm thick 917.00.25.223 -
P08-068 Honeycomb core ECA 3.2-80 9.5 mm thick 917.00.25.206 -
P08-069 Sealant GURISIL, 575.3 Kartusche 300 *910.42.12.112 No longer procurable
cm3
P08-001 - -
P08-103 - -
P08-070 Sealant, interfay - 551.32.99.005 Sealant group part
electrically-conductive number
PR-1764 MB2 907.10.11.274 -
P08-046 - -
P08-071 Sealant, fillet MC-238 B-2 907.10.11.233 Use with adhesive
promoter P08-083
P08-018 - -
P09-095 - -
P08-072 Activator LOCTITE 7649 910.42.12.129 -
P08-073 Sealant MC-780 C-2 907.10.11.235 -
P08-020 - -
P08-074 Sealant MC-780 C-12 907.10.11.236 -
P08-057 - -
P08-075 Sealant MC-780 C-24 907.10.11.237 -
P08-058 - -
P08-076 Adhesive Glyptal-G7526F 908.18.12.095 Used as masking
varnish / CPC
P10-013 - -
P08-077 Honeycomb core ECA 3.2-48 8 mm thick 917.00.25.225 -
P08-078 Coating, silicone ICEX II Quart 908.41.01.002 Rubber de-icer boot
ice adhesion inhibitor
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 33
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
P08-079 Adhesive LOCTITE 222 910.42.12.132 -
P08-080 Adhesive 3M Scotch-Weld 10 910.42.22.041 -
P08-009 - -
P08-081 Release agent Glisseal N 910.82.72.006 -
P08-082 Surface sealer Granitize Xzilon 3 904.49.76.222 -
P08-083 Adhesion promoter MC-110 907.10.11.238 -
For polysulfide sealants
P08-084 Adhesive 2 part CB200, 910.42.62.004 -
40 ml dual pack syringe
cartridge acrylic structural
adhesive
2 component structural kit 910.42.62.006 -
P08-085 Adhesion promoter For polyurethane protective 917.40.67.501 -
86A tape
P08-086 Sealant Polyurethane, two-component 907.13.11.934 -
self-levelling green sealant
P08-087 Filler Putty, Aerowave Filler 2501, 910.08.55.001 -
base
Curing solution 6009 910.08.55.002 -
P08-088 Spray filler 20P20-3, base + curing solution 910.08.06.020 -
Thinner - 910.09.00.103 -
P08-089 Activator LOCTITE 7471, colorless 150 910.42.12.133 -
ml
P08-090 Activator LOCTITE 7471, colorless 500 910.42.12.139 -
ml
P08-091 Threadlocker LOCTITE 242, blue 50 ml 910.42.12.137 -
P08-092 Protective coating PR 1196 907.10.11.230 -
P08-093 Adhesive ADEXIT A211 BG 907.13.13.203 -
P08-094 Sealant MC-780 C-1/3 907.10.11.234 -
P08-095 Sealant, fillet - 551.32.99.003 Sealant group part
number
MC-238 B-1/2 907.10.11.229 Use with adhesive
promoter P08-083
MC-238 B-2 907.10.11.233 Use with adhesive
promoter P08-083
MC-238 B-4 907.10.11.239 Use with adhesive
promoter P08-083
P08-071 - -
P08-096 Sealant, interfay MC-780 C-48 907.10.11.240 -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 34
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
P08-097 Sealer Paint, edge seal, 3950, 1K, 910.04.04.354 -
transparent
P08-098 Sealant MC-780 C-8 907.10.11.228 -
P08-099 Sealant MC-780 C-4 907.10.11.247 -
P08-100 Adhesive L-9120 FST 910.42.72.210 High strength
P08-101 Resin / Hardener Epocast 50-A1 resin / hardener 917.00.40.005 -
9816 (kit)
P08-102 Adhesive Epoxy, 5-minutes 910.42.72.208 -
P08-103 Sealant Dow Corning 744 (DC-744) 907.13.11.935 300 ml cartridge
907.13.11.933 90 ml tube
P08-104 Adhesive Araldite, two part adhesive 910.42.62.011 -
P08-034 - -
P08-105 Sealant, overcoat - 551.32.99.002 Sealant group part
number
MC-780 C-1/3 907.10.11.234 -
MC-780 C-2 907.10.11.235 -
P08-073 - -
P08-094 - -
P08-106 Sealant, interfay - 551.32.99.001 Sealant group part
number
MC-780 C-8 907.10.11.228 -
MC-780 C-1/3 907.10.11.234 -
MC-780 C-2 907.10.11.235 -
MC-780 C-12 907.10.11.236 -
MC-780 C-24 907.10.11.237 -
MC-780 C-48 907.10.11.240 -
MC-780 C-4 907.10.11.247 -
MC-780 C-60 907.10.11.249 -
P08-073 - -
P08-074 - -
P08-075 - -
P08-094 - -
P08-096 - -
P08-098 - -
P08-099 - -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 35
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
P08-107 Sealant, high- - 551.32.99.006 Sealant group part
temperature fillet number
DAPCO 2200 2.5 oz kit 907.10.11.275 -
P08-108 Adhesive XS-9915-0051-2 910.42.22.103 -
Cyanolit 201
P08-110 Adhesive HYSOL EA 956 910.42.72.171 -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 36
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 9: General Stores

Material Name Notes
P09 - General Stores

P09-001 Tape PTFE 01.1040.1212 *917.47.71.103 No longer procurable
P09-059 - -
P09-002 French chalk Talcum powder 908.44.12.203 -
P09-003 Fabric strip 50 mm (2.0 in) wide 918.71.62.032 -
P09-004 Koroseal binding - - -
P09-005 Cable ties MS3367-5-9, PA66, 119 x 3,6 971.32.51.105 -
mm (4.69 x 0.14 in)
SAE-AS3367I, 119 x 3,6 mm - -
(4.69 x 0.14 in)
P09-006 Thread, red indicating - 918.71.03.121 -
P09-007 Glass fiber tape 3M-386, FAR 25.853(a), 25 mm 917.40.80.006 -
(1.0 in) wide
P09-008 Cable ties MS3367-4-9, PA66, (69 x 2,5 971.32.51.104 -
mm (2.72 x 0.10 in))
SAE-AS33671, 69 x 2,5 mm - -
(2.72 x 0.10 in)
P09-009 - P09-024 - -
P09-010 Rubber band 178 x 16 mm (7.00 x 0.63 in) 944.85.82.112 -
P09-011 Lead seal 8,0 x 5,0 mm (0.32 x 0.20 in) 911.21.91.005 -
P09-012 Tape, aluminum Scotch 425, 50 mm (2.0 in) 917.40.91.005 -
wide
FAR25.853(a), L-T-80 - -
MIL-T-23397, TO 1-1-8 - -
P09-013 Tape Armaflex, 50 mm (2.0 in) wide 957.30.00.046 -
P09-014 Cable ties MS3397-1-9, PA66, 160 x 4,8 971.32.51.101 -
mm (6.30 x 0.20 in)
SAE-AS3367I - -
P09-015 Protective tape BAS185-GS3-0.6 946.33.21.296 -
P09-016 - P09-046 - -
P09-017 Cable tie, heat- 180 x 6,0 mm (7.10 x 0.24 in) 971.32.51.206 -
resistant
P09-018 Soldering sleeve Raytronics D142-50 971.19.26.104 -
NAS1745-14
P09-019 Soldering sleeve Raytronics D142-51 971.19.26.105 -
NAS1745-15
P09-020 Glass fiber tape 3M-361, FAR25.853(a), 19 mm 917.40.80.004 -
(0.75 in) wide
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 37
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 9: General Stores (Continued)

Material Name Notes
P09-021 - P09-045 - -
P09-022 Thread - 917.54.16.203 -
P09-023 Lead seal 5,5 x 3,5 mm (0.22 x 0.14 in) 911.21.91.002 -
P09-024 Rope Polyester, white, 3,0 mm (0.12 917.54.26.520 -
in) diameter
P09-025 Polyethylene foil 3M-5423, 19 (0.75) wide x 1000 917.40.69.019 -
mm (39.40 in) long
P09-026 Tape, adhesive 3M-8561, 0,35 x 20 mm (0.014 917.40.68.001 -
x 0.80 in)
P09-027 - P09-044 - -
P09-028 Ident sleeve 12,7 mm Raychem TMS-SCE-1/2-2.0-9 942.94.51.106 -
20 mm (0.80 in) wide
P09-029 String - 918.71.03.071 -
MIL-T-43435B, A-A-52080B - -
A-A-52081B, A-A-52082B - -
A-A-52083B, A-A-52084B - -
P09-030 Sleeve, heat shrink 4,76 mm (0.188 in) diameter 917.99.88.605 -
P09-031 Glass fiber fabric WL8.4548.60, 163 g/m2 917.00.11.002 -
P09-032 Carbon fiber fabric - * No longer procurable
P09-034 Copper wire mesh Lightning strike protection 919.02.30.111 -
72 g/m2
P09-036 Tape, adhesive 0,64 x 19 mm (0.025 x 0.75 in) 917.40.67.312 -
P09-037 Spiralwrap - 917.99.90.002 -
P09-038 - P09-043 - -
P09-039 Masking paper Permafix 045, masking paper, 905.20.10.003 -
300 mm (11.80 in) width
600 mm (23.60 in) width
P09-041 Masking paper Masking paper, 900 mm (35.43 - -
in) width
1500 mm (59.10 in) width
P09-043 Tape PPI 1022, blue 917.40.20.703 -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 38
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
P09-047 Tape, adhesive 25,4 mm (1.0 in) width 917.40.61.108 -
P09-048 Tape, adhesive 76,2 mm (3.0 in) width 917.40.61.113 -
P09-049 Tape, adhesive 0.36*305 3M-8673 917.40.69.152 -
P09-050 Tape Lead, 12 mm 917.40.91.011 -
P09-051 Tape Lead, 50 mm 917.40.91.012 -
P09-052 Tape, aluminum Scotch 425, 25 mm (1.0 in) 917.40.91.003 -
wide
Scotch 425, 12 mm (0.5 in) - Local supply
wide
P09-053 Glass fiber fabric 280g/m2 917.00.11.003 -
P09-054 Carbon fiber fabric 200g/m2 917.00.12.123 -
P09-055 Peel ply 51789 natural - -
P09-056 Cable ties MS3367-5-9, PA66 971.32.51.106 -
SAE-AS3367I - -
P09-057 Tape, adhesive - 971.32.52.802 -
P09-058 Tape PTFT, thread sealing, 12.7 mm *917.47.71.104 No longer procurable
(0.50 in)
P09-059 - -
P09-059 Tape PTFE, P-412 917.47.71.105 -
P09-001 and P09-058 - -
P09-060 Protective tape 3M 910.09.00.309 Typical Application -
application solution Protective boot
P09-061 Tape, adhesive Red 917.40.60.129 -
P09-062 Tape Scotchcal 3652 (yellow), 20 mm 112.36.07.056 -
(0.78 in) wide
P09-063 Tape Scotchcal (yellow) 112.38.07.072 -
P09-064 Tape Silicone red, fiberglass 917.40.60.311 -
P09-065 Cable ties Heat resistant, 150 mm (5.90 in) 971.32.51.161 -
long
P09-066 Cable ties Heat resistant, 210 mm (8.27 in) 971.32.51.162 -
long
P09-067 Tape Silicone (red), 19 mm (0.75 in) 917.40.60.310 -
wide
P09-068 Tape, adhesive, 32 mm (1.26 in) wide 917.40.68.003 -
polyurethane
P09-069 Tape, silicone Black, length 15 m x width 19 917.40.60.313 -
mm
P09-070 Tape, seal Length 15 m x width 7 mm 917.40.60.314 -
(synthetic rubber sealant)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 39
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
P09-071 Heat-shrinkable cap Tyco ES CAP-NO.1-C1-0- 971.19.38.605 -
30mm
P09-072 Tape, anti-chafe GORE tape, PTFE, 25,4 mm (1 917.73.17.060 -
in) wide
P09-073 Tape UHMW 1x36 yard roll CM137 968.29.16.293 -
P09-074 Cable ties MS3367-2-9, PA66 971.32.51.102 -
P09-075 Tape, adhesive F9473PC 917.40.67.004 -
P09-076 Protection sleeve Roundit 2000NX 5-5 917.96.92.151 -
Roundit 2000NX 8-5 917.96.92.152 -
Roundit 2000NX 13-5 917.96.92.153 -
(diameter 13,000 mm (0.512
in))
Roundit 2000NX 19-5 917.96.92.154 -
(diameter 19,000 mm (0.748
in))
Roundit 2000NX 25-5 917.96.92.155 -
(diameter 25,000 mm (0.984
in))
Roundit 2000NX 32-5 917.96.92.156 -
(diameter 32,000 mm (1.260
in))
Roundit 2000NX 40-5 917.96.92.157 -
(diameter 40,000 mm (1.575
in))
P09-077 Tape Tape, red 917.40.20.704 -
P09-078 - P09-046 - -
P09-080 Tape PTFE, Adhesive-backed, 917.40.70.009 -
thickness 0,17 mm (0.0067 in)
P09-081 Tape Foil, PTFE, oneside-etch, 0.5 x 917.40.70.381 -
300 mm
KT - 01 1025 1050
P09-082 Tape, hook self- KLETTOSTAR hook tape, 25 917.47.28.022 -
adhesive mm (0.98 in) width,
15147-45-0025-00-000-1002
P09-083 Tape, loop self- KLETTOSTAR loop tape, 25 917.47.28.023 -
adhesive mm (0.98 in) width,
15244-45-0025-00-000-1002
P09-084 Sleeve, heat shrink 12,7 mm (0.5 in) diameter, 917.99.88.608 -
SFTW-202A 1/2 SCHWARZ
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 40
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
P09-085 Tape, anti-chafe GORE tape, PTFE, 25,4 mm 917.73.17.064 -
(1 in) wide x 0,5 mm thick,
GSC-21-99602-027
(1.25 in) wide x 0,5 mm thick,
GSC-21-99632-027
P09-087 Fastener, loop self- 25 mm (0.985 in) wide 917.47.28.023 -
adhesive 15244-45-0025-00-000-1002
GSC-21-99603-027
P09-089 - P09-085 - -
P09-090 Sleeve, heat shrink Rotima SFTW-202A 3/64 917.99.88.601 -
black SCHWARZ
1,200 mm (0.047 in) diameter
P09-091 Sleeve, solder Raytronics D142-52 971.19.26.106 -
NAS1745-16
P09-092 Sleeve, solder Raytronics D142-62 971.19.26.107 -
P09-093 Sleeve, solder Tyco S200-1-00 971.19.26.100 -
(4,32 mm (0.17 in) wide)
(5,84 mm (0.23 in) wide)
(8,00 mm (0.32 in) wide)
(10,70 mm (0.42 in) wide)
(15,50 mm (0.61 in) wide)
(30,50 mm (1.20 in) wide)
P09-103 Braiding, copper Daetwyler 2929-F/6 919.69.89.107 -
mesh (for wire diameter 0,150 mm
(0.006 in))
P09-104 Braiding, copper Daetwyler 2929-F/8 919.69.89.108 -
mesh (for wire diameter 0,20 mm
(0.008 in))
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 41
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
P09-105 Braiding, copper Raychem RAY90-10.0 917.99.88.904 -
mesh (nominal diameter 10 mm
(0.394 in))
mesh (nominal diameter 4 mm (0.157
in))
mesh (nominal diameter 6 mm (0.236
in))
P09-108 Heat-shrinkable cap Tyco 101A041-25/86-0 971.19.38.606 -
(for diameter 6,40 to 15,20 mm
(0.25 to 0.60 in)
P09-109 Heat-shrinkable cap Tyco 101A031-25/86-0 971.19.38.607 -
(for diameter 4,60 to 10,20 mm
(0.18 to 0.40 in)
P09-110 Tape, adhesive fiber Permacel P212 1948 917.40.80.010 -
glass (100,00 mm (3.94 in) wide)
P09-111 Cable tie, black Kabelbinder KR-serie 971.32.51.207 -
121-63560
PA66
356,00 x 6,00 mm (14.02 x 0.24
in)
P09-112 Plug, sealing Connecteurs Electriques 971.75.18.921 -
Deutsch 028-0102-22
AWG 22
Phenol Air LB 001109.200.42 971.42.31.586 -
AWG 20 Red
Phenol Air LB 001109.300.40 971.42.31.587 -
AWG 16 Blue
Phenol Air LB 001109.400.41 971.42.31.588 -
AWG 12 Yellow
P09-113 Protection sleeve Roundit 2000NX HT 5-5 917.96.92.164 -
(diameter 1.00 - 5,00 mm (0.04
- 0.20 in))
Roundit 2000NX HT 8-5 917.96.92.165 -
(diameter 5,00 - 8,00 mm (0.20
- 0.32 in))
Roundit 2000NX HT 13-5 917.96.92.166 -
(diameter 8,00 - 13,00 mm
(0.32 - 0.51 in))
Roundit 2000NX HT 19-5 917.96.92.167 -
(diameter 13,00 - 19,00 mm
(0.51 - 0.75 in))
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 42
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
Roundit 2000NX HT 25-5 917.96.92.168 -
(diameter 19,00- 25,00 mm
(0.75 - 0.98 in))
Roundit 2000NX HT 32-5 917.96.92.169 -
(diameter 25,00 - 32,00 mm
(0.98 - 1.26 in))
Roundit 2000NX HT 40-5 917.96.92.170 -
(diameter 32,00 - 40,00 mm
(1.26 - 1.58 in))
P09-114 Protection sleeve Roundit 2000NX EMI 6-5 917.96.92.141 -
(diameter 1.00 - 6,00 mm (0.04
- 0.24 in))
Roundit 2000NX EMI 14-5 917.96.92.142 -
(diameter 11,000 - 14,000 mm
(0.433 - 0.551 in))
Roundit 2000NX EMI 30-5 917.96.92.143 -
(diameter 23,00 - 30,00 mm
(0.91 - 1.18 in))
Roundit 2000NX EMI 38-5 917.96.92.144 -
(diameter 30,00 - 38,00 mm
(1.18 - 1.50 in))
P09-115 Protection sleeve Expando HTNS-L/HO-15-5 917.96.92.163 -
(nominal diameter 15,00 mm
(0.59 in)
P09-116 Protection sleeve Monofil mesh hose 917.96.92.106 -
Rilgaine HPA 4/5
(0.16 in))
Monofil mesh hose 917.96.92.107 -
Rilgaine HPA 6/8
(0.24 in))
Rilgaine HPA 10/12
(0.31 in))
Rilgaine HPA 14/16
(0.39 in))
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 43
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
Rilgaine RILG-141-0
(0.55 in))
Rilgaine HPA 18/25
(0.71 in))
P09-117 Sleeve, C-shape Tyco D-150-C-11 971.19.38.213 -
repair (nominal diameter 1,10 mm
(0.04 in))
Tyco D-150-C-12 971.19.38.214 -
(0.06 in))
Tyco D-150-C-13 971.19.38.215 -
(0.09 in))
Tyco D-150-C-14 971.19.38.216 -
(0.11 in))
black SCHWARZ
black SCHWARZ
black SCHWARZ
black SCHWARZ
P09-122 Solder Chemet A4757403 907.86.91.304 -
Sn60% Pb40%
P09-123 Solder Chemet A1086104 907.86.91.305 -
145 °C
P09-124 Solder Felder 18750740 907.86.91.303 -
Sn63% Pb37%
Felder 18751030 907.86.91.306 -
Sn63% Pb37%
P09-125 Flux, solder Felder 25200056 907.85.11.302 -
For solder Sn63% Pb37%
0,25 l
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 44
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Material Name Notes
P09-126 Coating, modified Electrolube DCA200H 910.04.04.373 -
silicone conformal 200ml Aerosol
P09-127 Band, High Intensity Rotima 100-13141-M 919.69.89.120 -
Radiated Field (HIRF)
P09-128 Thread Gruschwitz 13808 917.54.16.201 -
P09-129 Tube, heat shrinkable Raychem 202K142-25 971.19.38.134 -
P09-130 Tube, heat shrinkable 500429 917.99.88.151 -
THERMO-FITRNF-3000
SW,1.5
P09-131 Tube, heat shrinkable 500435 917.99.88.158 -
THERMO-FITRNF-3000SW,39/
1
P09-132 Cable ties, double Panduit PLB2S-C 971.32.51.142 -
loop PA66
combined diameter 45,7 mm
(1.8 in)
loop PA66
(3.0 in)
loop PA66
(4.1 in)
P09-135 Cable tie Ty-Rap TY28MX 971.32.51.112 -
4,80 x 361,00 mm (0.19 x 14.21
in)
P09-136 Tube, heat shrinkable Back Shell, STR, 917.99.88.702 -
152-42-6
VG95343T06B001A
GSC-64-90217-027
AMS3255B Class 2, Type 2,
Form 6
GSC-60-90211-022
AMS3255B Class 2, Type 2,
Form 2
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 45
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 10: Oils and Fluids

Material Name Notes
P10 - Oils and Fluids

P10-001 CPC Lear Chemical ACF-50 908.18.12.087 -
Lear Chemical ACF-50, aerosol 908.18.12.088 -
MIL-C-81309E type III - -
P10-002 - P10-005 - -
P10-003 Hydraulic fluid Castrol Aero HF585B *908.14.12.015 No longer procurable
P10-017 - -
P10-004 Engine oil AeroShell Turbine Oil 560 908.11.02.100 -
AeroShell Turbine Oil 500 908.11.02.102 -
Eastman Turbo Oil 2380 908.11.02.105 -
Mobil Jet Oil II - -
Royco Turbine Oil 500 - -
Turbonycoil 600 - -
Royco Turbine Oil 560 908.11.02.106 -
P10-005 CPC-light Ardrox / Dinitrol AV 8 908.18.12.081 -
Ardrox / Dinitrol AV 8, aerosol 908.18.12.083 -
MIL-PRF-16173 class 1, grade - -
1&4
P10-006 Hydraulic fluid AeroShell Fluid 31 908.14.12.016 -
MIL-PRF-83282D - -
P10-007 Compressor oil BVM 100N 908.12.22.101 -
Reniso KES 100 957.30.00.050 -
P10-008 Refrigerant R-12 *957.30.00.058 No longer procurable
P10-009 - P10-004 - -
P10-010 Refrigerant R-134a 957.30.00.063 -
P10-011 Compressor oil Castrol Icematic SW 32 957.30.00.051 Not to be used on
PC12/45/47/47E
P10-021 - -
P10-012 Oil Hellerine 908.20.02.047 -
P10-013 CPC Ardrox / Dinitrol AV 40 908.18.12.086 -
P10-014 CPC remover Ardrox / Dinitrol AV 980, aerosol 908.18.12.089 -
P01-008 - -
P01-037 - -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 46
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 10: Oils and Fluids (Continued)

Material Name Notes
1&4
P10-016 CPC Ardrox / Dinitrol AV 25, aerosol 908.18.12.084 -
2&3
P10-017 Hydraulic fluid AeroShell Fluid 41 (20 liters) *908.14.12.017 No longer procurable
AeroShell Fluid 41 (5 liters) 908.14.12.018 -
MIL-PRF-5606H - -
MIL-PRF-16173, class 1, grade - -
1&4
P10-019 Oil Sanden SP-10 959.90.20.219 -
P10-020 Smoke oil Shell Morlina HS 10 959.17.12.019 -
Ethylbenzene blended A/R with - -
either:
Automate green HFX – A/R
Automate red IK HF – A/R
Automate blue AHF – A/R
Dyeguard airforce green – A/R
Dyeguard airforce red – A/R
Texaco Canopus 13 white
Unisol liquid green 2BHF-AG –
A/R
Unisol liquid red BHF-AG – A/R
P10-021 Refrigeration lubricant Emkarate RL 100H 957.30.00.059 -
P10-022 Hydraulic fluid Castrol Brayco Micronic 881 908.14.12.020 -
MIL-PRF-87257B or newer -
P10-023 Refrigeration lubricant Emkarate RL 46H 957.30.00.076 -
P10-024 Fluid, assembly Assembly Fluid #1 908.14.12.102 -
P10-025 Oil, penetrating Gasoila Free All 908.10.02.082 -
P10-026 Cutting oil Mobilmet 766 908.15.12.063 -
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 47
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 11: Fuels

Material Name Notes
P11 - Fuels
P11-001 Fuel - - For approved fuels,
refer to AFM Section
1, Certificate
Limitations.
P11-002 Fuel test kit FHR8-2 908.69.11.124 -
P11-003 Biocide, aviation fuel BIOBOR-JF 908.69.11.125 Fuel additive for
curative and
preventative
treatment of micro-
biological biomass in
fuel tanks and
systems
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 48
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Table 12: Packing

Material Name Notes
P12 - Packing
There are no Pilatus Recommended Materials in this section.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 49
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 50
20-31-00 Jul 31/22
'i!PILATUS5'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CORROSION - GENERAL
1. General
Corrosion is the deterioration of a metal because of a reaction with its environment. All types of
corrosion decrease the strength of the part. Corrosion must be found quickly and repaired immediately
or it will become worse and a failure of the part or structure can occur.
Further information about corrosion control is available in FAA Advisory Circular: AC 43-4A - Corrosion
Control tor Aircraft.
2. Types of Corrosion
Each type of corrosion looks different and has a different effect on the material. All corrosion causes the
properties of metal to change and can cause the failure of the part or structure to occur.
A. Uniform Corrosion
Uniform corrosion is caused by the direct effect of water, corrosive gas, salt spray or other
contaminants on a metal surface. On a polished surface the finish will at first become dull. If the
corrosion is not treated, the surface will become rough and will look frosted.
NOTE: It is important to remember that discoloration and dulling of the surface can also be
caused by high temperatures.
B. Galvanic or Dissimilar Metal Corrosion
Galvanic corrosion occurs when different metal types join and there is an electrolyte, usually
water. This type of corrosion frequently occurs when a plated surface is damaged and the base
metal is exposed. The larger the potential difference between the surfaces the faster the
corrosion. Parts which have dissimilar metals are treated on assembly to prevent corrosion.
C. Pitting Corrosion
This type of corrosion is a local corrosion of cavities in the surface of the metal. Pitting corrosion
can be the start of intergranular and stress corrosion. The corrosion usually shows as blisters on
the surface finish. When the surface finish is removed pits can be seen on the surface of the
metal.
D. lntergranular Corrosion
This type of corrosion occurs along the grain boundaries of alloys under certain conditions. The
corrosion causes separation of the grains. This corrosion can cause very small cracks on the
surface of the metal which can only be seen with magnification. This corrosion causes serious
damage to parts and makes structure weak. A part which has, or possibly has, this type of
corrosion must be replaced.
E. Stress Corrosion
This can occur where there is corrosion and a continuous load applied to a part. It can be seen
as very small cracks. This corrosion can also start in areas where loads are applied to the metal
during manufacture. A decrease of metal thickness because of corrosion and the load on the part
can cause a crack.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
20-40-00 Nov 30/03
'e PILATUS :::;r
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F. Crevice Corrosion
Crevice corrosion is caused by water held between the two surfaces of a joint. The corrosion
pushes the parts apart and can cause stress damage to the fasteners.
G. Corrosion Fatigue
This occurs when loads are frequently put on a part which has corrosion. The combination of the
loads and the corrosion can cause cracks at the corrosion pits and a failure of the part can occur.
It may not be possible to see the corrosion and there may be no loss of material.
H. Fretting Corrosion
This corrosion is caused when two surfaces, one metallic, rub against each other. When the
surfaces rub together the protective film on the surface of the metal is removed. The corrosion
makes an abrasive and removes more material from the surface. This makes the damage worse.
This corrosion can cause fatigue cracks and subsequent failure of the part.
This corrosion can also occur between aerodynamic fairings, access panels and service doors
and the structure. This corrosion shows as a black powder on aluminum alloys and brown
powder on steels. The powder also collects on and around the surfaces which touch each other.
I. Biological Corrosion
This type of corrosion is caused by micro-organisms such as bacteria, fungi and algae growing in
areas where water has collected. This usually occurs in areas such as fuel tanks and
aerodynamic fairings. The corrosion shows as green particles on the material surface. If the fuel
tank coating is damaged other types of corrosion can occur.
J. Embrittlement of Highly Stressed Alloys
High-strength, high stress alloys can absorb molecular hydrogen. This can make the metal brittle
and cracks can occur.
Mercury will corrode and embrittle aluminum and titanium along the grain boundaries.
Cadmium and silver particles can make stressed titanium brittle when the temperature is higher
than room temperature.
3. Corrosion in Joints
If there is moisture on the mating surfaces between two components or fasteners when they are
assembled, local corrosion or pitting can occur.
Use of jointing compounds and sealants can reduce the possibility of galvanic corrosion in joints.
Components that can be affected, should be examined regularly for signs of seep stains, powdery
deposits, loose or blistered protective finish or sealant at the edge of the join and fastener holes.
External and internal joints should be assembled wet with jointing compound, epoxy primer or sealant.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page2
20-40-00 Nov 30/03
'e PILATUS :::i"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Metal Groups
Metals can be put into these groups:
Group 1 - Magnesium and its alloys
Group 2 - All aluminum alloys, cadium, zinc and steels
Group 3 - Iron, lead, tin and tin alloys
Group 4 - Stainless steel, titanium, chromium, nickel, copper and their alloys
The metals in Group 1 corrode easily and must have maximum protection against corrosion. The
metals in Group 4 need minimum protection.
Parts which have metals from different groups must be treated on assembly to prevent corrosion.
5. Identification of Corrosion
The size, appearance and type of corrosion is different for each type of metal. Most types of corrosion
can be seen on the surface of the metal, but some types occur in the metal.
A. General - Painted Surfaces
Blisters, swells and flakes on the surface finish of the metal show that there may be corrosion
below the surface finish.
Blisters, swells and cracks on metal surfaces show that there may be intergranular corrosion in
the metal. This also shows that the material may have absorbed hydrogen.
B. Steels
On alloy and carbon steels a red oxide dust (rust) collects on the metal and there are pits on the
surface.
C. Cadmium Plated Components
Cadmium plating is applied to protect steel components and to give a compatible surface when a
part is in contact with other materials. Corrosion of the cadmium shows as a white to brown color
on the surface. This corrosion prevents corrosion of the steel component.
D. Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys
A white or grey dust collects on the surface and the surface can break away.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
20-40-00 Nov 30/03
'SPILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Corrosion Prevention
To prevent corrosion it is recommended that:
•
Aircraft are regularly washed and minor damage to the paint finish is immediately repaired
•
The accessible interior of the aircraft structure is regularly cleaned and examined for signs of
corrosion
•
Drain holes are kept free of debris
•
The interior of the structure is treated with a corrosion preventative
•
Metal components which are not painted are treated with a corrosion preventative
•
Corrosion Preventative Compounds (CPC's) are regularly examined for deterioration of the
protective layer and repaired if necessary.
7. Wash Frequency
The wash procedure must be done on an On-Condition basis dependant on the local environmental
conditions. Environmental conditions will not be the same for all operators and the operator must
consider local conditions to establish a wash program.
Corrosion Severity Zones Wash
Mild At least once each 6 months
Moderate Once each 3 months
Severe Once each week
Wash Frequency
Table 1
These wash frequencies should be done in addition to the scheduled aircraft wash given in Chapter 5.
The different environment operating conditions are categorized by three corrosion severity zones. The
corrosion severity zones for each geographical location are shown in Figure 1, however, local
conditions can be more or less severe.
8. Washwater Quality
The quality of the washwater is also important, therefore Pilatus Aircraft Ltd has defined the standard
that follows:
Element Minimum Quality
pH value 6.5 - 8.5
Chloride concentration (mg I I) 100
Washwater Quality
Table 2
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page4
20-40-00 Nov 30/03
�PILATUS:'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9. Corrosion Preventative Compounds (CPC's)
There are several different Corrosion Preventative Compounds (CPC's) used by Pilatus:
A. Medium to Long Term Protection
This category includes:
• CPC-light
• CPC-highT (High Temperature)
• CPC-heavy
• CPC-lubricating
• CPC-exterior
These are water displacing corrosion preventive compounds that leave a film of different
consistencies and thickness. They are suitable for medium and long-term protection of
components. They require periodical inspection of the film surface (Ref. Table 4).
CPC's can be applied by brush or spraying. Spray application at all joints and surfaces with
airless or airmix spray equipment is the preferred method. For treatment of small areas and
touch-up, aerosol cans are most suitable.
The CPC film must be clear and without any cracks. Joints along stringers and spars must be
filled with a continuous fillet of a corrosion preventative compound. If the CPC film is damaged,
fissured, or cracked then the coating must be repaired by applying a new layer of the applicable
CPC. It is not necessary to remove the old corrosion preventative compound, unless the film is
dark, cloudy, muddy or extremely dry.
B. Short Term Protection
This category includes:
• CPC-temporary
This is a super penetrating, water displacing corrosion preventive compound that leaves an
ultra-thin film.
These give short-term protection and must therefore be reapplied at relatively short intervals
(Ref. Table 4) to maintain the protective layer. They can stop light corrosion already present and
prevent further corrosion until the next inspection or application.
Water displacing compounds can be applied by brush, dipping or spraying. Spray application in a
fine mist with airless spray equipment or aerosol can is the preferred method.
C. Alternative Products
Alternative products are available. However, if an alternative product is used it must not damage
the materials or components or leave any unwanted residue as it dries. Before an alternative
compound is applied, make sure the original layer is removed.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 5
20-40-00 Nov 30/03
'SPILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Material Description.
Pilatus
CPC Intended Use Properties
Material No.
-temporary P10-001 To stop light corrosion and prevent Ultra-thin film

further corrosion occuring until the Super penetrating water
next inspection displacing compound
Does not damage
rubber components
-light P10-005 Moderate corrosion severity zones T hin approx. 0.008 mm

(0.0003 in.)
All airframe areas
Super penetrating water
displacing compound
Brown tinted, hard, firm
film, tack-free and
transparent
-highT P10-013 Areas exposed to high Approx. 0.04 mm

temperatures up to 150 °C (0.002 in.)
(21 O °C with short term Heat resistant
exposure) compound with both
penetrating and
thickness properties
Dry, firm film and
transparent
-heavy P10-015 All airframe areas where a lubricating Approx. 0.03 mm

film is not required (0.001 in.)
Has penetrating and
thickness properties
Brown tinted, soft, waxy
film, tack-free and
transparent
-lubricating P10-016 Where a soft, lubricating film is Approx. 0.03 mm

required (0.001 in.)
Has penetrating and
water displacing
properties
Soft, waxy, lubricating,
tacky film and
transparent
-exterior P10-017 External parts exposed to severe Approx. 0.04 mm

environmental conditions (0.002 in.)
Heat resistant
compound with both
penetrating and
, thickness properties
I
Dry, firm film and
transparent
Corrosion Preventative Compounds (CPC's)

Table 3
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page6
20-40-00 Nov 30/03
'ePILATUS:"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Inspection and Application Frequency
Corrosion inspections must be done when called for on the scheduled inspections. T he corrosion
inspection frequency depends mainly on calendar time and on the local environmental
conditions. Flight hours are not the basic factor.
Local conditions will not be the same for all operators. Aircraft operated in extremely humid,
tropical, cold, damp, salt laden or industrial environmental conditions, could need more frequent
inspections and treatment. Under these conditions, the inspections should be more frequent until
the operator can establish a corrosion control program, based on experience.
The frequency also depends on the location of the aircraft. External locations can be attacked
more by environmentally polluted air and rain, while internal locations can remain wet for a longer
period if water condenses. Also, as different areas of the aircraft have different treatments, the
frequency of the inspections and applications will vary.
Corrosion
Corrosion Preventative Inspection I Application Frequency
Severity Zones
Untreated or Treated with Treated with other CPC

CPC-temporary
Internal External Internal External
Mild 12 months 6 months 24 months 12 months
Moderate 12 months 3 months 12 months 6 months
Severe 6 months weekly 12 months 6 months
Inspection I Application Frequency

Table 4
NOTE: The corrosion severity zones for the different geographical locations are shown in
Figure 1. However, local conditions can be more or less severe.
NOTE: Untreated means without additional corrosion protection treatment.
NOTE: It is recommended to apply an ultra-thin, water displacing corrosion preventative

compound to exposed areas after every wash.
Corrosion preventatives must not be used on the components that follow:
•
Oxygen Systems
•
Brake Disc I Units
•
Drive Belts
• Clutch Assemblies (e.g. air-conditioning compressor or autopilot servo)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page?
20-40-00 Nov 30/03
SPILATUS5r
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DENVER
•
CORROSION SEVERITY ZONE
D MILD
1111 MODERATE
• SEVERE
Corrosion Severity Zones - North America

Figure 1 {Sheet 1 of 6)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Pages
20-40-00 Nov 30/03
'e PILATUS :iii"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D MILD
MODERATE
• SEVERE
Corrosion Severity Zones - South America

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page9
20-40-00 Nov 30/03
'S PILATUSEr
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
KHARTOUM e
D MILD
MODERATE
• SEVERE
8
0
N
Cl)
Corrosion Severity Zones - Africa

EFFECTIVITV: All
Page 10
20-40-00 Nov 30/03
'ePILATUSiF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
..
...
'
" .l
�WELLINGTON
�HRl:HURCH

D MILD
CE! MODERATE
• SEVERE
Corrosion -
Severity Zones South Pacific
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 11
20-40-00 Nov 30/03
'SPILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
)!• : /i{;\,:ii::>
KARACHI
l
MUMBAI
MANILLA
HO CHI MINH / ...�'
D MILD
� MODERATE
• SEVERE
"'
0
0
"'
(J)
Corrosion Severity Zones - Asia

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1 2
20-40-00 Nov 30/03
�PILATUSe'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MOSCOW
•
D MILD
El MODERATE
• SEVERE
Corrosion Severity Zones - Europe and Asia Minor

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 13
20-40-00 Nov 30/03
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CORROSION CONTROL - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
This Page Block gives the maintenance practices for corrosion control. Corrosion Preventative
Compounds (CPCs) are applied to the aircraft during production and applied again during maintenance
to make sure that there is continued corrosion protection. CPCs displace water and contain active
corrosion inhibitors. They form a waxy or solid, non-sticky film and penetrate into crevices and fill in
gaps and thus prevent the entry of corrosive media and to protect parts against corrosion. The CPC
layers are regularly examined for deterioration at frequencies given:
• During the scheduled inspections to examine the aircraft areas/systems in accordance with
Chapter 5
• As part of the Operator’s corrosion control plan based upon local environmental conditions (Ref.
20-40-00 Page Block 1).
It is recommended that CPC layers are repaired as soon as possible when their condition has
deteriorated and must be repaired at the latest after the inspections given above.
This Page Block gives the procedures to examine and repair the CPC layers in the aircraft areas given
in Table 1.

- Magnifier (x10) Local supply
- Ultra-Violet (UV) bright light source Local supply
- Bright light source Local supply
- Inspection mirrors Local supply
- Borescope Local supply
- Airless Application System (AAS) High pressure system.
spray equipment <1> Local supply
- Brush, non-metallic soft-bristled Local supply
- Roller Local supply
- Vacuum cleaner Local supply
- Coating thickness measuring- Wet film gauge
device
NOTE: <1> Suitable AAS spray equipment (that includes wands and jets) as recommended by
the CPC manufacturer or the CPC product in an aerosol spray can be used. The
equipment is to be able to spray the CPC into the required areas in accordance with
the CPC manufacturer’s instructions.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
20-40-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

- Masking tape
- De-ionized water
P01-008 White spirit
P01-032 Degreaser
P01-033 Wipes, presaturated solvent
P01-037 Solvent
P09-039 Masking paper
P09-052 Tape, aluminum
P10-013 CPC
P10-014 CPC remover
P10-015 CPC
P10-016 CPC
P10-018 CPC
3. Procedures
MANUFACTURER´S HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS AND ALL THE
APPLICABLE LOCAL INSTRUCTIONS. CONSUMABLE MATERIALS CAN BE
DANGEROUS AND CAN CAUSE DEATH OR INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND/OR
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
WARNING: YOU MUST PUT ON PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND GOGGLES WHEN YOU APPLY
CPC. PUT ON A RESPIRATOR WHEN YOU WORK IN A CLOSED AREA. DO NOT LET
THE MATERIAL STAY ON YOUR SKIN FOR A LONG TIME. CPC CAN BE TOXIC IF
YOU BREATHE IN THE FUMES FOR A LONG TIME AND CAN CAUSE DEATH OR
INJURY TO PERSONNEL.
A. Job Set Up
(1) Do the aircraft clean procedure (Ref. 12-20-01, Page Block 701).
(2) Make sure that the drain holes are clean and not blocked.
(3) Remove all the access panels as necessary, but not the fuel tank access panels (Ref.
06-40-00, Page Block 1).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
20-40-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Remove the screws and the left and right end plates from the horizontal stabilizer as
necessary.
NOTE: This can be necessary for application or repair of the CPC layers to get access
to the two holes in the end ribs. It is not necessary for examination of the internal
structure when the borescope can get access to these areas through the access
panel and rib lightening holes.
B. Inspection
CAUTION: DO THE EXAMINATION IN A ROOM WITH GOOD LIGHT. EXAMINATIONS DONE

IN POOR LIGHT CONDITIONS CAN CAUSE CORROSION OR DAMAGED CPC
LAYERS TO BE UNDETECTED.
(1) Examine the structure in the specific aircraft areas given in Table 1. Look for corrosion
(Ref. 20-40-00, Page Block 1). Use a bright light source, mirrors, magnifier and borescope
when necessary. If you find corrosion:
• Assess the level of corrosion damage before repair. Repair the damage as soon as
possible.
• For aircraft structure identified in Chapter 51 thru 57 of the SRM, Ref. SRM
51-00-05, Page Block 1.
• For system corrosion, Ref. 20-40-00, Page Block 801.
(2) Examine the structure in the specific aircraft areas given in Table 1. Look for dry,
damaged, deteriorated, contaminated, missing or insufficient application of CPC. Use a
bright light source, mirrors and borescope when necessary:
• CPC is applied in an even and smooth film that fills all gaps and crevices
• A stream of CPC between 3 and 5 mm (0.118 and 0.197 in) on stringers, profiles
and joints makes sure that there is adequate penetration
• Heavy over spray and puddles of CPC are not permitted
• A narrow circle of CPC must be present around rivets and fasteners
• CPC is not a decorative finish and runs and drips are permitted but droplets are not
permitted
• Droplets of CPC show that the surface underneath is contaminated which inhibits
correct penetration
• You must use a (Ultra-Violet) UV bright light source instead of a standard bright light
source for inspection of CPC (Material No. P10-013).
(3) If you find dry, damaged, deteriorated, contaminated, missing or insufficient application of
CPC, you must repair it (Ref. Para 3.C.).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 203
20-40-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Area Components CPC Remarks
General Hinges, access panel fasteners and locking P10-016

mechanisms
Battery compartment (specially around the P10-013
battery), screws and rivets
Springs P10-016
Exterior paints and aircraft skins (when the paint P10-013 Short term
layers are damaged), specially around seams and
fasteners Paint repair Long term, remove the
damaged surface
protection (Ref. SRM
51-00-06) and repair the
surface protection
layers in accordance
with the Aircraft paint
scheme
Bonding points and bonding straps P10-013
Fasteners (bolt heads, nuts, washers, cotter pins P10-013
and lockwire). Refer to the removal and
installation procedures given for the relevant
equipment and/or system and apply the CPC
again
Flight control cables P10-016
Propeller Spinner, backplate and bolt heads and nuts P10-015
Make sure that you do not apply CPC to the
propeller de-icing slip rings
Engine All screws, bolts and nuts that are part of the P10-013 Not screws, bolts and
compartment airframe structure, engine cowls and engine nuts that are part of the
and cowlings mounted accessories engine
Engine frame bolts and nuts
Oil cooler fittings
Compressor wash ring (if installed)
ELU mounting bolts
P&WC Engine parts Ref. P&WC
EMM
Firewall P10-013
Engine mounts - bolt heads P10-013
Shock mounts - bolt heads and nuts
Inertial separation mechanism P10-016
CPC Inspection/Application Areas
Table 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 204
20-40-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Area Components CPC Remarks
Engine Cowling internal surfaces along stringers P10-013

compartment
and cowlings
(Cont’d)
Linkages P10-013
ECS Compressor case P10-013 Do not let the CPC
touch the clutch
Hydraulic Steel fittings P10-013
parts
Landing Gear Non-moving parts P10-013 For example bolt heads,
Area fittings and inside of
axles
Moving parts P10-016
Wing Internal structure P10-018
Fuselage Forward Fuselage
Area of the wing strut fittings P10-018
Areas under the floor P10-018
Internal side of access panels P10-018
Aft Fuselage:
Internal structure FR6 thru FR12. CPC is applied P10-018
half way up the fuselage.
NOTE: External structure aft of FR 12 is
protected with topcoat without CPC.
Horizontal Internal structure P10-018
Stabilizer
Vertical Internal structure P10-018
Stabilizer
CPC Inspection/Application Areas
Table 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 205
20-40-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Repair of CPC
WARNING: DO NOT LET CPC TOUCH THE OXYGEN SYSTEM OR THE OXYGEN SYSTEM
COMPONENTS. AN EXPLOSION CAN OCCUR. THE EXPLOSION OF OXYGEN
SYSTEM CAN CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO
THE EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION: DO NOT LET THE CPC TOUCH:
• BRAKE UNITS AND BRAKE DISCS

• TYRES
• DRIVE BELTS
• CLUTCH ASSEMBLIES (FOR EXAMPLE THE AIR-CONDITIONING
COMPRESSOR OR THE AUTOPILOT SERVO)
• ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT.
MAKE SURE THAT YOU MASK THESE AREAS. DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT
CAN OCCUR.
(1) Apply the Masking Materials
Put masking paper (Material No. P09-039, P09-040, P09-041 or P09-042) and masking
tape around the repair area and the applicable parts and equipment as given below.
NOTE: Parts and system components that did not have CPC applied during production
are masked during the repair procedures.
(a) Wing
(i) Remove the landing lights if necessary (Ref. 57-43-11 or 57-43-12, Page
Block 401).
(ii) Mask all equipment, electrical contacts and connectors.
(iii) Mask all flight control bearings and pulleys and control cables near pulleys
during application of CPC (Material No. P10-018).
NOTE: Masking materials are removed as necessary during application of

CPC (Material No. P10-016) (Ref. Table 1).
(iv) Mask all electrical and mechanical components of the underwing fuel system
(Ref. 28-15-00, Page Block 1).
(b) Fuselage
(i) Mask all equipment, electrical contacts and connectors.
(ii) Mask all flight control bearings and pulleys and control cables near pulleys
NOTE: Masking materials are removed as necessary during application of

CPC (Material No. P10-016) (Ref. Table 1).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 206
20-40-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Stabilizers
(i) Mask all equipment, electrical contacts and connectors.
(ii) Mask all flight control bearings and pulleys and control cables near pulleys
(2) Removal of CPC
(a) If you find that the CPC has deteriorated or the application is not sufficient, apply
CPC again (Ref. Step 3.C.(3)) to the area.
(b) Remove the CPC as follows if it is damaged, cracked, contaminated, a dark-muddy

color or very dry:
(i) Apply CPC remover (Material No. P10-014) to remove the old CPC layer.
(ii) Wait 10 minutes and then clean the area with a non-metallic soft-bristled
brush.
(iii) Make a cleaning cloth (Material No. P02-003) moist with de-ionized water
and fully clean the surface.
(iv) Let the repair area dry.
(3) Application of CPC
NOTE: Application of CPC with a brush or roller does not give sufficient penetration and
thus is only used when high penetration is not necessary, for example:
• Ground terminals
• Fasteners
• For repair application when another method cannot be used due to access
restrictions.
Not all surfaces can be cleaned prior to application.
(a) Make a cleaning cloth (Material No. P02-003) moist with solvent (Material No. P01-
037) or use presaturated solvent wipes (Material No. P01-033) to fully clean the
surface where access is possible.
(b) Use the AAS spray equipment, aerosol, brush or a roller to apply the correct CPC in
accordance with Table 1:
(i) Make sure that the CPC is applied from top to bottom in an even and smooth
film that fills all gaps and crevices. CPC is not a decorative finish and runs
and drips are permitted.
(ii) Make sure that there are no droplets of CPC after application:
• Droplets of CPC show that the surface underneath is contaminated

which inhibits correct penetration
• Remove the CPC (Ref. Step 3.C.(2)) and apply it again when you find
droplets.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 207
20-40-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(iii) Make sure that there is a stream of CPC of between 3 and 5 mm (0.118 and
0.197 in) wide on stringers, profiles and joints for adequate penetration.
(iv) Make sure that there is no heavy over spray or puddles of CPC. This is not
permitted.
(v) Make sure that there is a narrow circle of CPC around rivets and fasteners.
(c) Remove the unwanted CPC when too much is applied:
(i) Make sure that the CPC is applied at the necessary thickness given in the
Technical Data Sheet (TDS). Use a coating thickness measuring-device (wet
film gauge) to measure the thickness.
(ii) Remove the unwanted CPC immediately when there is heavy over spray or
CPC that has collected in puddles or pools with:
• A clean lint-free cleaning cloth (Material No. P02-003)

• Absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) or
• A vacuum cleaner.
(iii) Remove unwanted over spray on areas to be painted or external panels

immediately (Ref. Step 3.C.(2)).
(d) Let the CPC dry in accordance with the times and instructions given in the CPC
TDS:
• The times given in the TDS apply to open structural areas and semi-closed or
fully-closed areas can take longer to dry
• A good air circulation can decrease the time necessary for the CPC to dry.
(e) Make sure that the drain holes are free. Remove the CPC (Ref. Step 3.C.(2)) to
unblock them if necessary.
D. Close Up
(1) Remove all of the masking materials.
(2) Remove all the equipment, tools and materials from the work area. Make sure that the
work area is clean.
(3) Install the landing lights if removed (Ref. 57-43-11 or 57-43-12, Page Block 401).
(4) Install or close the access panels that you removed or opened (Ref. 06-40-00, Page Block
1).
(5) Put the left and right end plates in position on the horizontal stabilizer and install the
screws if removed.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 208
20-40-00 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CORROSION - REPAIR
1. General
You must only use this procedure for minor surface corrosion on components. If the corrosion is more
than minor surface corrosion, it can be possible that you must replace or repair a component, refer to
the Structural Repair Manual.

- Wheel, nylon, not abrasive Non-woven

P02-013 Abrasive paper
P02-014 Abrasive paper
P02-020 Scotch-Brite
P07-007 Epoxy primer
3. Procedure
CAUTION: DO NOT USE STEEL WOOL, WIRE BRUSHES OR EMERY CLOTH TO REMOVE THE
CORROSION.
A. Aluminum Alloy Parts
(1) Use abrasive paper (Material No. P02-013 or P02-014), a nylon wheel or Scotch-Brite
(Material No. P02-020) to remove the corrosion.
(2) Wash the area to remove debris and prepare the surface.
(3) Apply wash primer or chemical conversion coating to the damaged area (Ref. 20-40-10,
Page Block 201).
(4) Let the area become dry. Do not use a cloth to make the area dry.
(5) Apply epoxy primer to the area.
(6) Apply the applicable paint finish as necessary.
(7) On internal structure, apply corrosion preventative (Ref. 20-40-00, Page Block 201).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 801
20-40-00 Mar 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Steel and Stainless Steel Parts
(1) Use abrasive paper (Material No. P02-013 or P02-014), a nylon wheel or Scotch-Brite
(Material No. P02-020) to remove the corrosion.
(2) If applicable, apply epoxy primer (Material No. P07-007) to the area.
(3) Apply the applicable paint finish as necessary.
(4) Apply a corrosion preventative coating (Ref. 20-40-00, Page Block 201).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 802
20-40-00 Mar 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHEMICAL CONVERSION COATING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedure to apply the Chemical Conversion Coating (CCC) to bare
aluminum surfaces before you apply the layers of surface protection. Remaining surface protection
must be removed from the repair area first. There are two procedures to do this task:
• CCC solution (Material No. P07-001) (Ref. Para. 3.B.)

• TCP touch-up (Material No. P07-021) (Ref. Para. 3.C.).
The procedure with the TCP touch-up (Material No. P07-021) (Ref. Para. 3.C.) must only be used for
surfaces with an area less than approximately 2500 mm2 (4 in2) (50 x 50 mm (2 x 2 in)).

- Brush, synthetic Local supply
- Sponge Local supply

P01-010 Solvent
P01-015 Ethanol (ethyl alcohol)
P01-032 Degreaser
P01-033 Wipes, presaturated solvent
P01-037 Solvent
P02-011 Abrasive cloth, grade 240
P02-016 Abrasive pads
P02-019 Cloth, cotton
P07-001 CCC solution
P07-021 TCP touch-up
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
20-40-10 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Procedure
WARNING: OBEY THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS GIVEN IN 20-00-00, PAGE BLOCK 201, WHEN
YOU CUT OR ABRADE METAL. DEATH OR INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND/OR
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR.
CAUTION: USE ONLY THE TOOLS AND MATERIALS GIVEN IN THIS PROCEDURE TO REMOVE
MATERIAL. USE OF INCORRECT ABRASIVE MATERIALS CAN CAUSE CROSS
CONTAMINATION WITH EMBEDDED PARTICLES. THIS CAN CAUSE CORROSION.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE CONSUMABLE PRODUCTS GIVEN IN THIS PAGE BLOCK
ARE IN THEIR EXPIRY DATES. YOU CANNOT APPLY CONSUMABLE PRODUCTS
CORRECTLY THAT ARE EXPIRED.
A. Job Set Up
(1) Make sure that the work area is in the limits for ambient temperature and relative humidity.
Obey the manufacturer’s instructions given in the Technical Data Sheet (TDS) of the
consumable materials.
(2) Make sure that the temperature of the parts and CCC solution (Material No. P07-001) or
TCP touch-up (Material No. P07-021) is more than 18 °C (64.4 °F).
CAUTION: WHEN YOU USE ABRASIVE MATERIALS AND TOOLS IN THIS PROCEDURE:
• MAKE SURE THAT YOU ONLY REMOVE THE SURFACE PROTECTION

AND VERY LIGHTLY ACTIVATE THE BARE ALUMINUM SURFACE
• OBEY THE PROCEDURES FOR MECHANICL REMOVAL OF SURFACE
PROTECTION GIVEN (REF. SRM 51-00-06, PAGE BLOCK 1)
• OBEY THE APPLICABLE LIMITS FOR MATERIAL REMOVAL OF THE
PART.
YOU CAN DO DAMAGE THAT CANNOT BE REPAIRED IF YOU REMOVE TOO

MUCH ALUMINUM FROM THE SURFACE.
(3) Make sure that any remaining surface protection is removed and activate the bare
aluminum surface as follows:
NOTE: Removal of surface protection (and possible corrosion) is usually done in

accordance with a repair procedure for specific or general damage blend-out
before CCC is applied. It is possible that the activation is not necessary if the
bare aluminum surface has been suitably activated as part of the corrosion or
surface protection removal procedures given in the specific repair procedure.
The bare aluminum surface must have the abrasive materials applied in two
directions at 90 degrees to each other when activated.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
20-40-10 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) For large surfaces, use power tools for surface protection removal in accordance
with SRM 51-00-06, Page Block 1 when approved in the specific repair procedure.
NOTE: Removal of surface protection and activation of bare aluminum surfaces is

usually done by hand.
(b) Mask the adjacent surfaces and areas as necessary. Obey the instructions given
(Ref. SRM 51-00-06, Page Block 1).
(c) Use abrasive materials that follow as necessary to mechanically activate the bare
aluminum surfaces by hand:
• Abrasive pads (Material No. P02-016)

• Abrasive cloth, grade 240 (Material No. P02-011)
• Abrasive cloth, grade 400 (Material No. P02-014).
Remove all remaining protection surface and primer layers until bare aluminum is
fully activated. Apply the abrasive materials in two directions at 90 degrees to each
other when you activate the bare aluminum surface. Obey the procedures given
(Ref. SRM 51-00-06, Page Block 1).
(d) Remove the unwanted swarf and debris from the work area. Obey the instructions
given (Ref. SRM 51-00-06, Page Block 1).
(4) Clean the bare aluminum activated surface with one of the methods as follows:
(a) Make a lint-free cotton cloth (Material No. P02-019) moist with:
• White spirit (Material No. P01-008)

• Solvent (Material No. P01-010)
• Ethanol (ethyl alcohol) (Material No. P01-015)
• Degreaser (P01-032) or
• Solvent (P01-037).
Fully clean the bare aluminum surface. Clean the surface until a clean moist cotton
cloth stays clean when applied to the surface.
(b) Use the presaturated solvent wipes (Material No. P01-037) to fully clean the bare
aluminum surface. Clean the surface until a clean presaturated solvent wipe stays
clean when applied to the surface.
B. CCC Solution (Material No. P07-001)
(1) Prepare the CCC solution (Material No. P07-001) as given in the manufacturer‘s
instructions.
NOTE: The powder is dissolved in demineralized water in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions given in the TDS until it is a constant and translucent
light-brown color.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 203
20-40-10 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Apply an equal layer of CCC solution (Material No. P07-001) over the bare aluminum
surface with a brush or sponge:
• Make sure that the surface is fully wet with CCC solution (Material No. P07-001)
• If necessary, apply the CCC solution (Material No. P07-001) again
• Make sure that you do not apply the CCC solution (Material No. P07-001) onto
adjacent areas coated in primer (if necessary use masking materials, Ref. SRM 51-
(3) Keep the wet CCC solution (Material No. P07-001) on the bare aluminum surface for the
necessary reaction time of:
• 30 to 60 seconds when subsequent primer is to be applied

• 2 to 3 minutes when no subsequent primer is to be applied.
Obey the applicable subsequent surface protection instructions given in accordance with
the specific repair procedure.
(4) Apply a second layer of CCC solution (Material No. P07-001) if the bare aluminum surface
dries out before the times given in Step 3.B.(3), do Step 3.B.(2) again.
(5) Make a clean lint-free cleaning cloth (Material No. P02-019) wet with clean tap water and
carefully remove all of the remaining CCC solution (Material No. P07-001).
(6) Let the CCC solution (Material No. P07-001) dry for a minimum of 30 minutes.
C. TCP Touch-up (Material No. P07-021)
(1) Do not apply for surfaces with an area more than approximately 2500 mm2 (4 in2) (50 x 50
mm (2 x 2 in)).
(2) Pushdown on the TCP touch-up (Material No. P07-021) downwards onto a firm, smooth
and clean surface until the tip is wet. The TCP touch-up (Material No. P07-021) is now
ready to use.
(3) Apply the TCP touch-up (Material No. P07-021) to the bare aluminum surface as follows:
(a) Apply it in one direction with a 25% overlap to make sure that the surface is fully
covered.
(b) Make sure that you do not clean the surface with water.
(c) Apply the second layer at 90 degrees to the direction of the first when it is dry
(maximum 5 minutes):
• Make sure that you apply the second layer when the first layer changes from
a glossy surface to light matt to show that it is dry
• Make sure that a 25% overlap is applied also to the second layer to make
sure that the surface is fully covered
• Make sure that you do not clean the surface with water.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 204
20-40-10 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) If drops of solution fall onto the bare aluminum surface during the application of TCP
touch-up (Material No. P07-021):
• Remove them immediately

• Use a dry and clean lint-free cleaning cloth (Material No. P02-019).
Drops of the TCP touch-up (Material No. P07-021) can prevent the adhesion of
subsequent primer layers.
(4) Let the wet solution dry in dust-free air in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions
for 30 minutes. Make sure that nothing touches the surface (for example too much air flow
or contact with a foreign object).
D. Close Up
Continue to apply the subsequent surface protection layers in accordance with the specific repair
procedure.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 205
20-40-10 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 206
20-40-10 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CORROSION CONTROL - SEIZED FASTENERS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
This task gives procedure to remove a seized fastener.

P01-011 Solvent
P10-015 Oil, penetrating
3. Procedure
OPERATOR’S AND MANUFACTURERS’ HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.
CAUTION: DO NOT LET PENETRATING OIL TOUCH ADJACENT NUTS, BOLTS AND
CONNECTIONS. PENETRATING OIL WILL LOOSEN NUTS, BOLTS AND
CONNECTIONS.
A. Apply a layer of penetrating oil (Material No. P10-025) onto the fasteners to be loosened.
B. Let the penetrating oil (Material No. P10-025) penetrate the fastener to be loosened.
C. If necessary apply a layer of the penetrating oil (Material No. P10-025) onto the fastener to be
loosened again.
D. Remove the fastener.
E. Use a lint-free cleaning cloth (Material No. P02-041), made moist with solvent (Material No. P01-
011) to clean the work area.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
20-40-20 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
20-40-20 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HELICAL-COIL THREAD INSERTS - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedure for the removal of unserviceable helical-coil thread inserts and
installation of new replacements.
There are different sizes and types of helical-coil thread insert. Some are of the free running type
(NASM122076 to NASM122275 and NASM124651 to NASM124850) and some are of the self-locking
type (NASM21209). You can install a helical-coil thread insert in a blind hole or in a through hole.
To identify the correct helical-coil thread insert, refer to the applicable data given in the:
• Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM)

• Illustrated Parts Catalogue (IPC) or Illustrated Parts List (IPL) of a Component Maintenance
Manual (CMM)
• Another approved procedure that cross refers to this procedure.
Helical-coil thread inserts can be installed dry or wet with sealant.
Figure 401 shows typical self-locking and free running helical-coil thread insert.
Figure 402 shows the typical equipment from a helical-coil insertion kit.
Figure 403 shows the nominal thread diameter and depth dimensions for through and blind holes. The
dimensions given in Figure 403 are:
• A - This is the nominal bore diameter of a typical installation hole (for reference only)
• B - These dimensions show the depth of the thread that has been cut for a typical through hole
and blind hole (for reference only)
• C - This shows that the installation hole for a blind hole extends below the installed position of the
helical-coil thread insert (for reference only)
• P - This shows the depth to which you must install a replacement helical-coil thread insert
(where P = 0.25 to 0.5 of the thread pitch).
Table 401 gives the nominal thread diameters and minimum and maximum hole diameters with threads
cut for UNF helical-coil thread insert.
Hole Diameter with Threads Cut (mm)

Nominal Thread Nominal Thread
Diameter (in) Diameter (mm) UNF Thread
Minimum Maximum
0.1380 3,50 3,66 3,81
0.1640 4,20 4,32 4,49
0.1900 4,80 5,00 5,18
0.2500 6,40 6,55 6,72
Table 401 - Nominal Hole Diameters
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
20-50-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Hole Diameter with Threads Cut (mm)

Nominal Thread Nominal Thread
Diameter (in) Diameter (mm) UNF Thread
Minimum Maximum
0.3125 7,90 8,17 8,35
0.3750 9,50 9,75 9,93
0.4375 11,20 11,39 11,58
0.5000 12,70 12,97 13,17
0.5625 14,30 14,59 14,79
Table 401 - Nominal Hole Diameters

- Helical-coil insertion kit Local supply
- Vacuum cleaner Local supply
- Compressed air supply Local supply
- Hammer Local supply
- Long nose pliers Local supply
- Air blow gun Local supply
- 0.25 in adapter Local supply
- Air hose Local supply
- Wrench Local supply
- Non-metallic scraper Local supply

P01-010 Solvent As required
P01-011 Solvent (alcohol) As required
P01-015 Ethanol (ethyl alcohol) As required
P01-016 Acetone As required
P02-041 Lint-free cleaning cloth As required
P08-106 Sealant, interfay As required
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
20-50-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Procedure (Ref. Fig. 401, Fig. 402 and Fig. 403)
WARNING: OBEY THE STANDARD PRACTICES GENERAL WARNINGS, CAUTIONS AND

SAFETY RELATED DATA BEFORE YOU DO THE WORK (REF. 20-00-00, PAGE
BLOCK 201).
WARNING: DO NOT POINT A COMPRESSED AIR OUTLET AT YOU OR OTHER PERSONS.

INJURY OR DEATH CAN OCCUR.
CAUTION: WHEN YOU USE COMPRESSED AIR, MAKE SURE IT IS DRY AND FREE FROM OIL.
IF THE AIR IS NOT DRY AND FREE FROM OIL, YOU CAN CONTAMINATE THE
AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE.
NOTE: To find the nominal diameter, length and thread pitch of the helical-coil thread insert you can:
• Use the manufacturer’s P/N (for example MS21209F4-15) to find it on the

manufacturer’s specification (for example MS21209)
• Find the data in the relevant approved publication
• Measure the replacement helical-coil thread insert and/or hole.
A. Job Set Up
Get access to the unserviceable helical-coil thread insert as necessary.
NOTE: The manufacturer of the helical-coil thread insert supplies the helical-coil insertion kit
(Ref. Fig. 402). The helical-coil insertion kit has the equipment that is necessary to:
• Remove the unserviceable helical-coil thread insert

• Clean the installation hole
• Do a check for the correct dimension of the thread in the installation hole
• Install the new helical-coil thread insert
• Break off the tang.
The tap normally used to cut the thread in the hole is not used for thread cutting
because the thread is already cut. It can be used to clean the hole if necessary.
B. Remove the Helical-coil Thread Insert (Ref. Fig. 402)
CAUTION: TAKE CARE WHEN YOU REMOVE THE HELICAL-COIL THREAD INSERT FROM
THE HOUSING. IT IS EASY TO DAMAGE THE THREAD OF THE HOUSING
WITH THE TOOLS.
(1) Put the end of the removal tool (6) in to the end of the unserviceable helical-coil thread
insert. Use the removal tool (6) that is the correct size for the helical-coil thread insert.
(2) Push down on the removal tool (6) and turn it counterclockwise. Continue to do this until
you remove the unserviceable helical-coil thread insert from the installation hole.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
20-50-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) If you cannot remove the unserviceable helical-coil thread insert with the removal tool (6),
you must use the long nose pliers to grip the helical-coil thread insert and pull it from the
hole as follows:
(a) Use a scriber to carefully bend the top end of the helical-coil thread insert away from
the screw thread to point to the center of the hole so it can be gripped by the long
nose pliers.
(b) Grip the end of the helical-coil thread insert with the long nose pliers and carefully
unwind the helicoil from the screw thread.
(4) Examine the hole and the removed helical-coil thread insert and make a note if it was
installed dry or wet with sealant.
C. Clean the Work Area
WARNING: DO NOT POINT A COMPRESSED AIR OUTLET AT YOU OR OTHER PERSONS.

INJURY OR DEATH CAN OCCUR.
CAUTION: WHEN YOU USE COMPRESSED AIR, MAKE SURE THAT IT IS DRY AND FREE
FROM OIL. DAMP AIR OR AIR THAT CONTAINS OIL CONTAMINATES THE
SURFACES OF THE THREADED HOLE. THE SURFACES MUST BE CLEAN
FOR THE CORRECT APPLICATION OF SEALANT.
(1) If necessary, use a non-metallic scraper to remove the sealant from the installation hole
blind hole or through hole). A tap can be used to carefully remove the sealant from the
screw threads in the housing:
• Use the correct size tap the diameter and screw thread of the hole (Ref. Table 401)
• Carefully run the tap down to the necessary depth B (Ref. Fig. 403).
NOTE: The tap that you use to clean the threads for a blind hole and for a through hole
are different.
(2) Use the air hose and the compressed air supply to remove the unwanted materials from
the installation hole (blind hole or through hole) with:
• The air blow gun

• The 0.25 in adapter or
• The vacuum cleaner.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
20-50-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU CLEAN THE HOLE. YOU CAN REMOVE THE PRIMER
LAYERS IF THE ADJACENT SURFACES ARE NOT APPLIED WITH TOPCOAT
AND YOU USE MEK (REF. MATERIAL NO. P01-010)). REPAIR THE SURFACE
FINISH AS NECESSARY (REF. STEP 3.H.(1)) WHEN THE SURFACE FINISH IS
DAMAGED OR REMOVED.
(3) Make a lint-free cleaning cloth (Material No. P02-041) moist with one of the solvents that
follow to clean the installation hole and the new helical thread insert:
• Solvent (Material No. P01-010)

• Solvent (alcohol) (Material No. P01-011)
• Ethanol (ethyl alcohol) (Material No. P01-015)
• Acetone (Material No. P01-016).
(4) Use a clean, dry lint-free cleaning cloth (Material No. P02-041) to dry the area and the
installation hole. If necessary, also use an air gun (with a compressed air supply).
D. Examine the Work Area (Ref. Fig. 402)
(1) Examine the installation hole for signs of damage such as cracks or corrosion.
(2) Examine the threads in the installation hole for signs of damage, such as cracks or
corrosion and wear.
(3) Make sure that the installation hole and the new helical-coil thread insert are at room
temperature.
(4) Use the applicable size go no-go gage (8) (Ref. Table 401) to do a check of the threads in
the installation hole.
(5) If you find damage or if the threads are oversize, contact Pilatus Aircraft Ltd for additional
repair instructions.
E. Apply Sealant to the Helical-coil Thread Insert
(1) Use the notes you made during removal (Ref. Step 3.B.(4)) and follow the applicable
instructions.
(2) Use the sealant given in the approved procedure when instructed to install the helical-coil
thread with a different sealant to interfay sealant (Material No. P08-106).
(3) Do not apply sealant when the helical-coil thread insert was installed dry and there is no
specific instructions to install it wet with sealant given in a specific chapter or approved
procedure.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT YOU USE THE SEALANT WITHIN ITS APPLICATION LIFE.
OBEY THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS. YOU CANNOT APPLY THE
SEALANT CORRECTLY WHEN IT IS OUTSIDE OF ITS APPLICATION LIFE.
(4) Prepare and apply a layer of the interfay sealant (Material No. P08-106) on the external
threads of the helical-coil thread insert.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 405
20-50-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F. Install the Helical-coil Thread Insert (Ref. Fig. 402)
(1) Hold the body (3) of the installation tool (1) and pull the spindle (2) fully up.
(2) Put the helical-coil thread insert through the hole in the body (3) of the installation tool (1).
Make sure that the tang is at the cartridge end (4).
NOTE: One end of the helical-coil thread insert has an open end. The other end has a
tang (Ref. Fig. 401).
(3) Push down the spindle (2) into the body (3) and through the helical-coil thread insert (5).
Make sure that the tang is between the two prongs on the end of the spindle (2). Hold the
installation tool (1) and the helical-coil thread insert (5) in this position.
(4) Put the cartridge end (4) in to the installation hole. Hold the installation tool (1) vertically
and in line with the installation hole.
(5) Carefully turn the spindle (2) clockwise and engage the helical-coil thread insert (5) in the
threads of the installation hole.
(6) Turn the spindle (2) and thus the helical-coil thread insert (5) into the installation hole.
Continue to turn the spindle (2) until the insertion depth (dimension P) is correct (Ref. Fig.
403) where:
P = 0.25 to 0.5 of the thread pitch
(7) For a through installation hole only:
• Make sure that the helical-coil thread insert (5) does not go past the opposite end of
the installation hole
• This is not permitted
• If necessary turn the spindle (2) counterclockwise to get the correct insertion depth.
(8) If necessary, use a clean, dry lint-free cleaning cloth (Material No. P02-041) to remove the
unwanted sealant from the inside of the helical-coil thread insert and the hole.
G. Do a Test of the Helical-coil Thread Insert
(1) Use a screw of the correct size for the helical-coil thread insert to do the test.
(2) For a free running type helical-coil thread insert:
(a) Put a screw of the correct size in to the helical-coil thread insert and turn it with your
fingers.
(b) Make sure that you can turn the screw easily.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 406
20-50-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) If you cannot turn the screw easily:
• Remove the screw

• Remove the helical-coil thread insert
• Install a new helical-coil thread insert of the same size and do the test again
• If the test continues to fail, contact Pilatus Aircraft Ltd for additional
instructions.
(3) For a helical-coil thread insert that has a self locking device:
(a) Put a screw of the correct size in to the helical-coil thread insert and turn it with a
wrench.
(b) Make sure that the screw tightens and the helical-coil thread insert does not turn.
(c) If the screw does not tighten and/or the helical-coil thread insert turns:
• Remove the screw

• Remove the helical-coil thread insert
• Install a new helical-coil thread insert of the same size and do the test again
• If the test continues to fail, contact Pilatus Aircraft Ltd for additional
instructions.
(4) Use the applicable tools (the hammer and the tang break-off tool (7) or the long nose
pliers) to break off the tang.
(5) Use the long nose pliers or the vacuum cleaner to remove the tang.
H. Close Up
(1) If necessary, repair the surface protection around the installation hole.
(2) Continue with the procedures give in the specific chapter or approved procedure.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 407
20-50-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PREDETERMINED
BREAKING POINT
TANG
FREE RUNNING
PREDETERMINED
BREAKING POINT
SELF-LOCKING TANG
96431
Helical Thread Inserts - Typical

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 408
20-50-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 2
4 3
INSTALLATION TOOL
REMOVAL TOOL
96432
Helical-coil Thread Insert - Equipment

Figure 402
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 409
20-50-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A A
B B
C
THROUGH HOLE BLIND HOLE

96433
Helical-coil Thread Insert - Installation Dimensions

Figure 403
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 410
20-50-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BUSHES AND BEARINGS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
This topic gives the procedures to replace the following bushes and bearings that are installed in the
aircraft:
• Clearance fit bushes

• Bonded bushes / bearings
• Press fit bushes / bearings
2. Replacement of Clearance Fit Bushes
P01-010 Solvent Or approved equivalent
P04-012 Corrosion preventative
B. Removal of Clearance Fit Bushes
OPERATOR’S AND MANUFACTURERS’ HEALTH AND SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS.
(1) Remove the bush from the bore in the structure / component. Discard the bush.
(2) Clean the bore in the structure / component with the solvent (Material No. P01-010).
(3) Polish the bore in the structure / component with the Scotch-Brite (Material No. P02-016).
C. Installation of Clearance Fit Bushes
INSTRUCTIONS.
(1) Clean the outer surface of the new bush with the solvent (Material No. P01-010).
(2) Make sure the new bush is free to move in the bore in the structure / component.
(3) Apply a layer of the corrosion preventative (Material No. P04-012) to the outer surface of
the bush and to the bore in the structure / component. Make sure the outer surface of the
bush is completely covered with the corrosion preventative.
(4) Install the bush in the bore of the structure / component.
(5) Remove all the excess corrosion preventative from the structure / component.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
20-50-01 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Replacement of Bonded Bushes / Bearings
A. General
The work area for the replacement of bonded bushes and bearings must be clean, dust and
solvent free. The temperature must be between 60 and 80 °F (15 and 30 °C) with the humidity
not more than 80%.
- Hot air blower or heat lamps 100 to 120 °C
- Non metallic scraper
P07-001 Chemical conversion coating
P08-052 Adhesive Or approved equivalent
D. Removal of Bonded Bushes / Bearings
INSTRUCTIONS.
(1) If the bush is flanged, make a record of its position in the structure / component. This is to
make sure the new bush is bonded in the correct position in the structure / component.
(2) Use the hot air blower and apply heat to loosen the adhesive between the bush / bearing
and the bore in the structure / component.
(3) Use a press or an applicable diameter drift to remove the bush / bearing from the bore in
the structure / component. Discard the bush / bearing.
(4) Use the non metallic scraper and solvent (Material No. P01-010) to remove all the
remaining adhesive from bore in the structure / component. Be careful not to damage the
bore.
(7) Apply a layer of chemical conversion coating (Material No. P07-001) to the surface of the
bore in the structure / component.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
20-50-01 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Installation of Bonded Bushes / Bearings
INSTRUCTIONS.
(1) Clean the bonding surface of the new bush / bearing with the solvent (Material No.
P01-010). Make sure the solvent does not go into bearing surfaces.
(2) If more than 72 hours has passed since the corrosion protection (Material No. P07-001)
was applied to the bore in the structure / component, lightly rub the bonding surface in the
bore with Scotch-Brite (Material No. P02-016). Take care not to remove the corrosion
protection. Clean the bonding surface with the solvent (Material P01-010).
(3) Make sure the new bush / bearing is free to move in the bore in the structure / component.
(4) Mix the two parts of the adhesive (Material No. P08-052).
(5) Apply a layer of adhesive to the applicable surface of the bush / bearing and the bore in
the structure / component. There must be sufficient adhesive applied to fully fill the gap
between the bush/bearing and the bore.
(6) Install the bush/bearing (with the flange, if applicable, in the correct position as recorded
during removal) in the bore of the structure / component. Use a round bar of the correct
diameter (or equivalent) where necessary to install bushes which must align. Put the bar in
position through the bushes immediately after installation of the bushes (while the
adhesive is soft). Keep the bar in position until the adhesive has cured.
(7) Remove all the excess adhesive from the structure / component and allow the adhesive to
dry.
(8) Repair the structure surface finish of the structure / component where necessary.
4. Replacement of Press Fit Bushes / Bearings
- Press Or equivalent
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 203
20-50-01 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Removal of Press Fit Bushes / Bearings
INSTRUCTIONS.
(1) If the bush is flanged, make a record of its position in the structure / component. This is to
make sure the new bush is installed in the correct position in the structure / component.
(2) Use the press or an applicable diameter drift to remove the bush/bearing from the bore in
the structure / component. Discard the bush / bearing.
D. Installation of Press Fit Bushes / Bearings
INSTRUCTIONS.
(1) Clean the outer surface of the new bush / bearing with the solvent (Material No. P01-010).
Make sure the solvent does not go into bearing surfaces.
(2) Apply a layer of the corrosion preventative (Material No. P04-012) to the outer surface of
the bush / bearing and to the bore in the structure / component. Make sure the outer
surfaces of the bush / bearing is completely covered with the corrosion preventative.
(3) Use the press or an applicable diameter drift to install the bush/bearing (if applicable, with
the flange in the correct position as recorded during removal) in the bore of the
structure / component. Only use the minimum force necessary to install the bush / bearing.
(4) Remove all the excess corrosion preventative from the structure / component.
(5) Repair the structure / component surface finish of the structure / component where
necessary.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 204
20-50-01 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 21 - AIR CONDITIONING

Chapter Chapter
Section Section
List of Effective 1 Dec 14/91
Pages
Table of Contents 1 Dec 14/91
21-00-00 1 Dec 14/91

2 Dec 14/91
3 Dec 14/91
4 Dec 14/91
Page 1
21-LEP Dec 14/91
'&PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 21 AIR CONDITIONING

-
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
AIR CONDITIONING 21-00-00

Desciption and Operation 1 All
I
Page 1
21-CONT Dec 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIR CONDITIONING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The heating and ventilation system uses ram air and engine compressor bleed air (P3) for ventilation,
windscreen defrosting, cabin heating and radio equipment cooling.
2. Operation (Ref Fig. 1, 2 and 3)
Air enters the system through the air intake in the front lower cowl and goes through a flexible duct and
blower.
When COLD is selected, the air goes through ducts to the fresh air vents in the cabin, to keep the
radios cool and also to the windscreen defroster.
When HOT is selected, the cabin bleed air regulating valve opens and at the same time the fresh air
regulating valve closes. Hot P3 bleed air goes through the silencer and in to the mixer box where it
mixes with the cold air from the air intake. The warm air then goes to the windscreen defroster.
If CABIN is selected, air goes through ducts to the pilots foot heater and the cabin heater unit.
The emergency shut off control can be operated if smoke or fumes enter the cabin. This control closes
two valves at the firewall. The control can not be be reset in the cockpit after it is operated.
Some aircraft have vents installed in the cabin to give a cold air supply for passengers. A vent is
installed in the left side of the fuselage behind the cabin. Air is drawn into the system by an electric
motor and passes through a large flexible pipe to eye-ball type vents in the cabin roof.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
21-00-00 Dec 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CONTROLS
WINDSCREEN DEFROSTER
FRESH AIR VENTS
EMERGENCY SHUT-OFF
CONTROL CABLE
BLOWER MOTOR
P3 BLEED AIR LINE
CABIN HEATER UNIT
PILOTS FOOT HEATER

6302
Air Conditioning System

Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
21-00-00 Dec 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RAM AIR
P3 BLEED AIR
BLEED AIR
REGULATING VALVE
FILTER
SILENCER
ELECTRIC
POWER
MIXER BOX
FRESH AIR
REGULATING
VALVE
FIREWALL SHUTOFF VALVES
FIREWALL
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER
REGULATING RADIO
VALVE COOLING
FRESH AIR VENTS
PILOT'S FOOT HEATER
CABIN HEATER UNIT

6303
Air Conditioning System - Schematic

Figure 2
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
21-00-00 Dec 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLEXIBLE PIPE
BLOWER
MOTOR
AIR INTAKE
AIR VENT
6336
Cabin Air Vents

Figure 3
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 4
21-00-00 Dec 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 24 - ELECTRICAL POWER

Chapter Chapter
Section Section
List of Effective 1 Jul 30/15 CONFIG 3 401 Jul 30/15
Pages 2 Jul 30/15 402 Jul 30/15
403 Jul 30/15
Table of Contents 1 Jul 30/15 404 Jul 30/15
2 Jul 30/15
CONFIG 1 601 Jul 30/15
24-00-00 1 Jun 14/92 602 Jul 30/15
603 Jul 30/15
201 Jun 14/92 604 Jul 30/15
605 Jul 30/15
24-20-00 1 Jun 14/92 606 Jul 30/15
2 Jun 14/92 607 Jul 30/15
608 Jul 30/15
501 Jun 14/92
24-22-11 401 Jun 14/92 602 Jul 30/15
402 Jun 14/92 603 Jul 30/15
403 Jun 14/92 604 Jul 30/15
605 Jul 30/15
24-30-00 1 Jun 14/92 606 Jul 30/15
2 Jun 14/92 607 Jul 30/15
3 Jun 14/92 608 Jul 30/15
4 Jun 14/92
5 Jun 14/92 24-31-12 401 Jun 14/92
6 Jun 14/92 402 Jun 14/92
7 Jun 14/92 403 Jun 14/92
201 Jun 14/92 24-32-00 201 Dec 14/91

202 Jun 14/92 202 Dec 14/91
501 Sep 30/07 24-32-11 401 Nov 30/03

502 Sep 30/07 402 Nov 30/03
503 Sep 30/07 403 Nov 30/03
504 Sep 30/07
24-34-11 401 Dec 14/91
24-31-11 401 Jun 30/09
CONFIG 1 402 Jun 30/09 24-40-00 1 Mar 14/98
403 Jun 30/09 2 Mar 14/98
404 Jun 30/09
24-60-00 1 Jun 14/92
CONFIG 2 401 Jan 30/15 2 Jun 14/92
402 Jan 30/15 3 Jun 14/92
403 Jan 30/15
404 Jan 30/15
Page 1
24-LEP Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
24-LEP Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 24 - ELECTRICAL POWER

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
ELECTRICAL POWER 24-00-00

Description and Operation 1 All
AC GENERATION 24-20-00
Adjustment / Test 501 Aircraft with AC
power systems
STATIC INVERTERS 24-22-11
Removal / Installation 401 Aircraft with AC
power systems
DC GENERATION 24-30-00
Adjustment / Test 501 All
STARTER-GENERATOR 24-31-11
Removal / Installation CONFIG 1 401 Starter-
Generator
978.91.23.101
Generator
978.91.23.201
Generator
978.91.23.434
Inspection / Check CONFIG 1 601 Starter-
Generators
978.91.23.101
and
978.91.23.201
Inspection / Check CONFIG 2 601 Starter-
Generator
978.91.23.434
Page 1
24-TOC Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter
Section
VOLTAGE REGULATOR 24-31-12

BATTERY 24-32-00
MAIN BATTERY 24-32-11
VOLT - AMMETER 24-34-11
EXTERNAL POWER 24-40-00

DC ELECTRICAL POWER DISTRIBUTION 24-60-00

Page 2
24-TOC Jul 30/15
'5E PILATUS 5!!!F'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRICAL POWER - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The PC-6 aircraft electrical power system is a direct current, 24 volts nominal and 28 volts operational,
single pole, negative ground system.
The standard electrical system comprises the following primary systems:
28V DC (generator) system
24V DC main battery system.
Optional electrical systems include:
115V AC and 26V AC, 400 Hz, dual inverter system.
NOTE: The optional equipment installation depends on operators requirements and avionic
equipment installation.
The aircraft is equipped with a 24V nickel cadmium battery which supplies sufficient power for engine
starts. An external power receptacle is fitted for connection to an auxiliary power source.
For starting, the starter/generator operates as an electric motor to rotate the engine until self-sustaining
combustion and idle speed are reached. With the engine running the starter/generator normally
provides electrical power to the various aircraft busbars and also maintains the battery in a fully
charged state. The generator busbar and the battery busbar are interconnected by a remote controlled
circuit breaker. This protects one busbar from the other in the event of a major short circuit in either
system rendering total electrical system failure unlikely.
Avionic equipment is divided between the battery and generator busbars to preclude total loss of
communication and navigation capabilities. Most systems considered as essential are connected to
the battery radio bus and the secondary equipment connected to the generator radio bus.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
I 24-00-00 Jun 14/92

"EPILATUS!!F'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRICAL POWER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
All precautions necessary to ensure the safety of personnel and equipment are to be taken before
electrical power is connected to the aircraft distribution or user system.
Certain tests must use the aircraft battery as the power source. In general, minimal use of the aircraft
battery should be made during ground tests. Connect an external power supply when possible for
aircraft maintenance and electrical systems operation.
2. Examination of Wiring
Wiring should be examined for signs of damage, deterioration, chafing and security of attachments and
connections. Examine especially at bends, points of support, duct entries, high temperature areas and
areas of possible contamination. Where cables are grouped together, the state of the outer cables
normally indicates the condition of the remainder.
When repairs or modifications to the aircraft are done, examine cable looms, plugs and sockets, and
terminal blocks in the work area to make sure they are free from metallic particles and other materials.
Terminations must be secure with good electrical contact but without strain to the threads, terminal
pillars or studs. Torque loading, where applicable, must be within the limits specified.
3. Bonding
Good bonding is necessary to protect against a build up of high potential differences within the aircraft
which could injure personnel or damage equipment. Good bonding also helps to avoid equipment
malfunction or interference.
A replacement bonding connection or jumper must be of the same current carrying capacity as the one
it replaces. All bonding connectors must be properly locked to prevent intermittent contact caused by
vibration. Connectors and jumpers must not to have sharp bends or be excessively tight or slack.
Corrosion or high resistance found in connections can be treated by cleaning the terminal assembly
with a fine abrasive and using an antioxidant compound to seal the connection. If bonding is through a
holding bolt, remove and clean the area under the head of the bolt. Washers used in connections must
be the type specified by the manufacturer. This reduces the risk of corrosion caused by electrolytic
action between different materials.
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 201
24-00-00 Jun 14/92
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AC GENERATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The standard electrical generation system comprises a 28V DC (generator) system and a secondary
24V DC main battery system.
Optional electrical generation systems include:
• 115V AC and 26V AC, 400 Hz, dual inverter system
2. AC Generation Description
A. General
The optional AC generation system is a dual inverter system. The inverters used require the
operation of a remote INV1/OFF/INV2 facility to switch the system on.
B. Dual Inverter System - Description
The dual inverter system consists of two transistorized static inverters and an inverter selector
switch. The active system is monitored by the central warning system (CWS).
The static inverters convert 28V DC electrical power to 115V AC and 26V AC, 400 Hz. Each
inverter is capable of supplying the total the total load requirements of the aircraft AC systems.
Only one inverter is selected on-line at a time. The remaining inverter is used as a standby
source of power.
The inverters, identified inverter 1 and inverter 2, receive their 28V DC input separately from
different busbars. This prevents complete loss of aircraft AC power if a single DC busbar fails.
A four pole, three position switch is used for inverter selection. The switch is located to the right
of the instrument panel and is placarded INVERTER with marked positions INV 1 - OFF - INV 2.
The CWS monitors the 26V AC output of the on-line inverter and illuminates the INVERTER
caption on the CWS annunciator panel when the voltage falls below 13V AC.
The inverters are protected by circuit breakers located in the cockpit on the main circuit breaker
panel. the circuit breakers are placarded INV1 (BATTERY BUS CB panel) and INV2
(GENERATOR BUS CB panel).
C. Dual Inverter System - Operation
Both inverters are supplied with a positive DC input when power is connected to the DC
distribution system.
When the INVERTER switch is located to the middle (OFF) position the inverters are prevented
from converting the DC input to AC by internal inhibiting circuits. The inhibiting circuits are
controlled by the inverters remote on/off facility routed through the INVERTER switch. The
inverters require the remote on/off facility to be grounded to switch the inverter on.
Selecting the INVERTER switch S207 to the INV 1 or INV 2 position enables the selected
inverter and connects the nominal outputs of 115V AC and 26V AC, 400 Hz to the aircraft AC
distribution system.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
24-20-00 Jun 14/92
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BATTERY BUSBAR +28V DC
INVTR 1
INVERTER
INVERTER
1
1
1
CWS
OFF
INV
2 <13V = ON
GENERATOR BUSBAR +28V DC
INVERTER
INVTR 2
26V AC 400 Hz
115V AC 400 Hz
26V AC BUSBAR
115V AC BUSBAR
INVERTER
2 AC COMMON
REMOTE OFF
TERMINAL
BLOCK
6352
Dual Inverter System Schematic

Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
24-20-00 Jun 14/92
"9PILATUS5F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AC GENERATION-ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. General
This chapter provides Operational Test procedures for dual inverter AC generation systems.
This test can be carried out with the DC busbars energized from the aircraft main battery, the engine
driven generator or an external power supply.
NOTE: When the test is to be carried out using external electrical power, the EPU should be capable
of providing a regulated output of 28V DC (nominal).
If the AC supply remains suspect with either inverter selected, voltage level and frequency checks can
be made at the user system mating connectors, with reference to the aircraft Wiring Manual. Nominal
outputs and tolerances are:
115V AC (RMS)± 5V AC (RMS)
26V AC (RMS)± 2V AC (RMS)
400 Hz± 10 Hz
2. Procedure
A. Dual Inverter System - Operational Test
(1) Set the INVERTER switch to OFF.
(2) Open the INV1 circuit breaker.
(3) Open the INV2 circuit breaker.
(4) Energize the aircraft DC busbars and check that the INVERTER annunciator caption
illuminates.
(5) Select the INVERTER switch to 1 and check that the INVERTER caption remains
illuminated.
(6) Set the INVERTER switch to 2 and check that the INVERTER caption remains illuminated.
(7) Set the INVERTER switch to OFF and close the INV1 and INV2 circuit breakers.
(8) Set the INVERTER switch to 1 a nd check that the INVERTER caption extinguishes.
(9) Set the INVERTER switch to OFF and check that the INVERTER caption illuminates.
(10) Set the INVERTER switch to 2 and check that the INVERTER caption extinguishes.
(11) Set the INVERTER switch to OFF and check that the INVERTER caption illuminates.
(12) Set all electrical power to OFF.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with AC power systems
I 24-20-00
Page
Jun
501
14/92
"E PILATUS !!5F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STATIC INVERTERS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
The static inverters are installed vertically in the engine compartment, on the right side of the firewall
I The following procedures apply to all types of static inverter.
Part Number Description Remarks
3. Removal (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Open and install a safety clip to the following circuit breakers:
INV1 (BATIERY BUS CB panel).
INV2 (GENERATOR BUS CB panel).
(2) Get access to the static inverter installation in the engine compartment.
(3) Disconnect the static inverter electrical connector.
(4) Disconnect the grounding cables (if connected). Retain screw and washer.
(5) Remove the screws and washers securing static inverter.
(6) Make note of the position of the static inverter.
(7) Remove the inverter from aircraft.
4. Installation (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Place the static inverter in position.
(2) Install the static inverter with screws and washers.
(3) Connect the grounding cables.
(4) Connect the static inverter electrical connector.
(5) Remove the safety clip and close the following circuit breakers:
INV1 (BATIERY BUS CB panel).
INV2 (GENERATOR BUS CB panel).
Page 401
24-22-11 Jun 14/92
"ePILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. Test
(1) Do an operational test of the AC generation system (Ref. 24-20-00, Page Block 501 ) .
6. Close Up
(2) Install or close the access panels.
I
Page 402
24-22-11 Jun 14/92
-.SPILATUSEY
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
�
(' �
c�
�
c � �
0 c �
� s:::::;
0 CJ c:::s
0 c CJ
�c
0 CJ �
0 0
�
c INVERTER
0 0
CJ 0
CJ
CJ
CJ
------
SCREW
WASHER
CONNECTOR � I
Static Inverters - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
Page 403
24-22-11 Jun 14/92
'e PILAT USE!"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DC GENERATION SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The standard electrical generation system comprises a primary 28V DC (generator) system and a
secondary 24V DC main battery system. The main source of DC power is the engine driven generator.
The engine driven generator also works as a starter motor to produce the torque required to turn the
engine during start-up.
The secondary source of DC power is provided by a 24 volt nickel cadmium battery. During normal
operation the battery is trickle charged from the generator system. The battery is automatically brought
on line when the generator is tripped, providing that the BATTERY switch has been selected ON.
External DC power can be connected to the aircraft at the external power unit (EPU) receptacle for use
during ground operation. On-line selection of the main battery or generator system causes automatic
electrical disconnection of external power. Engine starting may be carried out by using external power
or by using the aircraft battery.
A DC VOLT/AMP indicator, installed on the right hand instrument panel, allows visual observation of
the main distribution and radio busbars' voltage and load current. In addition, a test voltmeter can be
connected to the generator busbar via jack sockets below the right side of instrument panel.
Captions on the central warning system (CWS) annunciator panel illuminate to indicate battery over
temperature (BATT HOT) and the following off line conditions: generator (GENERATOR), generator
busbar (GEN BUS) and battery busbar (BATT BUS).
NOTE: The optional equipment installation depends on operators requirements and avionic
equipment installation.
2. Generator System - Description (Ref. Fig. 1)
A. General
The DC generator system comprises the generation circuit of the starter-generator unit, voltage
regulator and associated switches and relays.
Knowledge of the control and protection functions of the voltage regulator is required to fully
understand the generator system. These functions are described in the following paragraphs.
B. Voltage Regulation
The voltage regulator is set to a standard voltage of between 27.75V DC and 28.0V DC but can
be adjusted over a range from 26V DC to 30V DC allowing the correct DC voltage to be set at the
busbars. Voltage regulation is maintained to within +0.4/-0.7 volts of the set voltage under
varying conditions of rated load, generator speed, temperature and altitude environment with a
30 millisecond recovery time following load changes.
Regulation is achieved by controlling the generator shunt field current. The generator output
voltage is compared with an internal reference voltage. Any deviation from the nominal set
voltage causes an appropriate change of generator shunt field current.
Under certain failure conditions the generator is de-energized by switching off the generator
shunt field excitation current and is disconnected from the DC busbars by de-energizing
generator relay.
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 1
24-30-00 Jun 14/92
'ePILATUSEF'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Generator (Line Contactor) Control
The voltage regulator line contactor circuit provides the control for connecting the generator
output to the DC busbars. A number of inhibiting signals are used to prevent generator
connection, or to disconnect the generator, when failure conditions are sensed.
With GENERATOR switch selected ON, but prior to the generator being connected, the busbar
voltage is monitored. When the generator output rises to within O.SV DC of the busbar voltage,
the line contactor circuit automatically switches on power to energize the generator relay and
connect the generator to the busbars.
D. Over-voltage Protection
The equipment supplied by the generator is protected from excessive generator voltages by two
separate protection circuits in the voltage regulator.
One circuit measures the voltage at the voltage regulator. When a preset limit is exceeded an
integrator circuit activates. The degree of over-voltage determines the response time of the
integrator circuit. Severe over-voltage causes the generator shunt field excitation current to be
switched off almost immediately along with the simultaneous opening of the line contactor
circuit. Slight over-voltage results in a delayed response. This avoids nuisance tripping of the
generator relay caused by momentary transients. Manual operation of the GEN RESET switch is
required to return the generator on-line after the switch has been latched off by this circuit.
The second protection circuit is used to open the line contactor circuit as soon as the voltage
exceeds 40V DC. The line contactor circuit remains open only during the over-voltage condition
and the generator relay is automatically energized after the fault clears, avoiding the need to
manually reset the system after a temporary over-voltage condition.
E. Under-voltage Protection
If the generator voltage sensed at the voltage regulator falls below20V DC for approximately 10
seconds an under-voltage protection circuit switches off the generator shunt field excitation
current and opens the line contactor circuit. The generator system must be reset manually
following this type of failure.
F. Overload Protection
The overload protection circuit utilizes the voltage developed across the generator interpole
winding to sense the generator output current. Should the voltage exceed a voltage
representing 150% of the generator rating for approximately 1O seconds, the generator shunt
field excitation current is switched off and the line contactor circuit latched open. Manual reset
of the system is required after this type of failure.
G. Reverse Current Protection
The reverse current protection circuit senses the generator interpole voltage at voltage regulator
to determine whether the generator is acting as a load or power source in the system. If current
begins to flow into the generator due to a failure or during a normal engine shut-down the line
contactor circuit is opened following a time delay which is inversely proportional to the amount
of current flow. The time delay prevents needless cycling of the generator relay during a
transient condition. The circuit is not latched open so manual reset of the system is not required
after the fault condition clears.
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page2
24-30-00 Jun 14/92
"9PILATUS!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
H. Reset
Following a latched trip condition the system is manually reset by operating the GEN RESET
switch. Applying the DC positive supply to these terminals momentarily will reset internal relays
in the regulator restoring the regulator from its tripped condition.
The GEN RESET switch is located on the cockpit left side panel.
3. DC Generator System - Operation (Ref. Fig. 1)
A. General
The following conditions are assumed:
BATTERY switch set ON (Ref. 24-40-00 Fig. 1) or external power connected
GENERATOR switch set ON (after engine start).
After starting, the engine accelerates and begins to drive the starter generator, initially producing
a small DC voltage at generator which is fed to VOLT REG 2 circuit breaker and the contacts of
de-energized starter relay. This voltage source is used as the positive DC supply to power the
internal circuits of the voltage regulator which is operational when the generated voltage reaches
20VDC.
When the voltage regulator reaches normal operating conditions the generator output voltage is
monitored and compared with the busbar voltage. When the voltage difference is less than 0.5V
DC, generator relay is energized and the generator output is connected to the busbars. The
output voltage is initially supplied by the generator to the voltage regulator via VOLT REG 2
circuit breaker CB203, starter relay contacts, GEN RESET switch and GENERATOR switch
(selected ON). A break in the circuit caused by opening any one of these devices will remove
the supply and take the generator off-line.
The CWS annunciator panel GENERATOR caption is extinguished by connecting it to ground via
contacts of energized generator relay. The GENERATOR caption illuminates when the relay is
de-energized (generator off-line) and the CWS grounding circuit broken.
Before the generator reaches its operating voltage, the de-energized generator relay provides a
route to ground for the EPU relay energizing circuit. If the battery relay is also de-energized,
external power can be connected to the distribution system. When the generator relay is
energized the generator comes on-line and the external power is automatically disconnected.
Voltage regulator and generator relay are located on the front lower face of firewall bulkhead 1.
Access is through the engine compartment lower access panel.
4. DC System - Test Facilities (Ref. Fig. 1}
A. Over-volt Test Switch
Periodic testing and exercising of the over-voltage protection circuit in the voltage regulator is
achieved using a spring loaded OV TEST switch, located on the cockpit left side panel. With OV
TEST selected, voltage regulator de-energizes generator relay within a few seconds and isolates
the generator.
The GEN RESET switch must be operated to return the generator on-line.
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 3
24-30-00 Jun 14/92
'$PILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. DC Test Socket
Connection to the generator busbar by an external test voltmeter is made through jack sockets
located below the right side instrument panel. To make sure that polarity connection is correct,
the sockets are color coded.
The test socket circuit is protected by POWER SOCKET circuit breaker.
5. Generation System Monitoring (Ref. Fig. 2)
A. DC Indication
During normal operation the generator busbar and the battery busbar are interconnected via the
busbar cross tie contacts of circuit breaker. The busbar voltage level and the amount and
direction of current flowing between the aircraft battery and the main busbars are detected at the
shunt.
The status of the detected voltage and load current is displayed by the VOLT/AMP indicator
connected to over the shunt. The indicator is located on right side instrument panel. To protect
the aircraft system if an indicator fault occurs, two circuit breakers, located on the front lower
face of firewall bulkhead 1 are installed.
The dual VOLT /AMP indicator ranges are:
DC AMPS + 200 to -200
DC VOLTS + 10 to +30
B. Annunciator Panels
The annunciator panel is located on the lower section of the center instrument panel.
The CWS monitors the battery, generator and main busbars, and illuminates the appropriate
caption when necessary. CWS monitoring of certain optional AC systems is achieved by
sampling the 26V AC output from the on-line inverter.
Busbar voltage levels are monitored at the battery busbar and generator busbar via ANN PANEL
circuit breakers.
Captions on the annunciator panel illuminate under the following conditions:
GEN BUS (red) generator busbar off-line
BATI BUS (red) battery busbar off-line
GENERATOR (amber) generator off-line
BATI HOT (amber) over temperature (more than 65 deg C) of main battery or over
temperature system plug disconnected
INVERTER (amber) inverter off-line.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page4
24-30-00
I Jun 14/92
"9PILATUSEF
pc 5..
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Circuit Protection (Ref. Figs. 1 and 2)
A. General
Two fuses which protect the generator and battery busbars are the only fuses used in the aircraft
electrical generation system. The fuses are located on the front lower face of firewall bulkhead 1.
Circuit breakers, each marked with its maximum safe current rating and identified by a placard,
protect all other electrical generation system circuits.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 5
I 24-30-00 Jun 14/92

'ePILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E PU
E PU+VE RELAY
SMALL PIN
�1!!9!1!!i�;tl3Z'·li;��-�0 :
I
I rV
BAITERY 1
I OPEN=ON I - VOLT
E PU+VE � I RELAY - REG2
LARGE PIN � cws :
I
I
-r- I
BAT TERY ...._.,,
.. I < >------<--u
+VE I
I
I
rV I
BAITERY I
RELAY SHUNT I STARTER
BUSBAR
-�� CROSS TIE
� GENERATOR
u-------t B
BUS GEN
a: TIE BUS
<( a: A D E
CD <(
(f) CD
:::> (f)
CD �
(f)
:::>
CD
0
_J
w w
b :::> BUS a:
0 u:::
_J
0
I CD TIE [)_
I-
>- BREAKER !;;: z a:
�
w
a:
w a: :::> w -
I-
w - I I-
z -
�
(f) �
!;;:
al
- -
-
w
(!)
START VOLT M D G L
w
GEN REG z
::J
GEN H
RESET
T COM PARATOR
I A
STARTER
CIRCUI T RESET
K
LINE
CON TAC TOR POWER
C VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
ov
TEST
O_
�----------------- VER
__VO_
_ T_
L_ TE_S_T__, p
ERA
O P_ IN_G_
__T_ PO
_W_E
_R----t
.------� J
a:
0
e::,
STARTER (!)
RELAY z
riv U5
z
w
<J)
NOTE: For simplification, supplies are

shown to main components
and busbars only.
DC Generator System Schematic

Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
24-30-00
Page6
I Jun 14/92
�PILATUS!!F'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
THERMAL SWITCH
MAIN
BATIERY
PLUG DISCONNECT
+
-
-
BATIERY J J
I
__
RELAY c-
EPU
LARGE PIN
EPU +VE
SMALL PIN
rV
BUSBAR
VOLT/AMP CROSS TIE
METER
a:
a'i
en
�
en
:::>
(0
:::> a:
(0 0
� �
a:
UJ UJ
z
�(0 UJ
C)
-
-
ANN ANN
PANEL PANEL
DC System Monitoring Schematic

Figure2
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 7
I 24-30-00 Jun 14/92
'$PILATUS9"'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DC GENERATION - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
This procedure gives details of flashing the field of the starter/generator which can correct the following
problems:
Reversed polarity of the starter/generator output voltage caused by incorrect polarity of residual
magnetism in the field poles.
No output from the starter/generator caused by a loss of residual magnetism in the field poles.
110 .88.07.065 Safety clip Circuit breaker hold open

6V battery
Knife switch
Battery leads
3. Flashing the Field (Ref. 24-31-11, Page Block 401, Fig. 401)
A. Procedure
(1) Set the battery switch to OFF.
(2) Open and install a safety clip to the circuit breaker START GEN on the BATIERY BUS CB
Panel.
(3) Open engine access panels FL1 and FR1.
(4) Tag and disconnect electrical cables from starter/generator terminal block.
(5) Connect negative terminal of locally acquired battery to starter/generator terminal, block
terminal E.
(6) Connect the positive terminal of the locally acquired battery to one side of the open knife
switch.
(7) Connect the other side of the open knife switch to the starter/generator terminal block,
terminal A
(8) Close the knife switch for between 1 and 2 seconds. Open the knife switch.
(9) Disconnect the field flashing leads from starter/generator terminal block, terminals A
and E.
(10) Disconnect the field flashing leads from knife switch.
(11) Connect the aircraft leads to the starter/generator terminal block and remove the tags.
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 201
24-30-00 Jun 14/92
'SPILATUSE:ir
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(12) Close the engine access panels ENG 3 and ENG 5.
(13) Remove the safety clip. Close the START GEN circuit breaker.
(14) Remove warning placards from EPU receptacle and BATTERY switch.
(15) Do DC Power System operational test (Ref. 24-30-00, Page Block 501).
NOTE: If flashing the field does not correct the generator polarity, remove and replace the
starter/generator.
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 202
24-30-00 Jun 14/92
"ePILATUS:
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DC POWER SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. General
This chapter provides the procedures for an operational test and a functional test of the DC power
system.
NOTE: T he Operational Test is not applicable to aircraft with a Battery/APU selector switch.
2. Operational Test
Part N o. Description Remarks
External power supply To give a regulated output

of 28V DC
B. Procedure
(1) Open access panel PL1.
(2) Disconnect the battery hot plug from the battery (if installed).
(3) Set the BATTERY switch to on and make sure that:
•
the BATT HOT caption is on (if installed)
•
the GENERATOR caption is on
•
the BAT T BUS caption is off
•
the GEN BUS caption is off
(4) Set the BATTERY switch to off.
(5) Connect the battery hot plug (if installed).
(6) Close the engine access panel PL 1.
(7) Set the BATTERY switch to on and make sure that:
•
the BATT HOT caption is off (if installed)
•
the voltmeter indicates between 24 and 28 volts
•
the ammeter indication is negative
(8) Connect the external power supply to the aircraft.
(9) Make sure that the voltmeter indication does not change.
(10) Set the BAT TERY switch to off and make sure that:
•
the voltmeter indication changes to the external power supply voltage
•
the ammeter indication is negative
EFFECTIVITY: A ll
Page 501
24-30-00 Sep 30/07
'S:PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(11) Start the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(12) Set the BATTERY switch to on.
(13) Set the GENERATOR switch to on.
(14) Make sure that:
•
the voltmeter shows a generator voltage of 27.75V DC to 28.25V DC
•
the ammeter indication is positive
•
the GENERATOR caption on annunciator panel is extinguished
(15) Operate and hold the OV TES T switch. After a few seconds make sure that:
•
the voltmeter shows battery voltage (between 24 and 28 volts)
•
the GENERATOR caption comes on
(16) Operate and release GEN RESET switch. Make sure that:
•
the voltmeter indication increases to generator voltage of between 27.75V DC and
28.25V DC
•
the GENERATOR caption goes off
(17) Set the GENERATOR switch.to off.
(18) Shut down the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, page Block 201).
(19) Disconnect the external power supply.
(20) Make sure all switches are set to off.
3. Functional Test
Voltmeter Minimum range 0 to 30V,

accuracy 2% FSD
B. Procedure (Ref. Fig. 501)
(1) Connect the test voltmeter to the jack sockets.
(3) Set the GENERATOR SVv'itch to on.
(4) Apply normal aircraft loads (e.g. engine and flight instruments, communications and
navigation systems, instrument and position lights).
(5) Let the generator stabilize, indicated by steady current reading in aircraft ammeter.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 502
24-30-00 Sep 30/07
'ePILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Check that the generator output voltage on the test voltmeter is between 27.75V DC and
28.25V DC.
(7) If output voltage is out of limits, make a record of the voltage and adjust the regulator as
follows:
(a) Shut down the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(b) Remove access panel PB3.
(c) Loosen the retaining screw and move the voltage level adjuster cover plate to get
access to the adjustment screw.
(d) Adjust the voltage level adjustment screw as required to obtain correct voltage level.
NOTE: One complete turn of the screw adjusts the voltage by approximately 0.4
volts. Clockwise rotation of screw increases voltage level, counter
clockwise rotation of screw decreases voltage level.
(e) Move the cover over the voltage level adjuster screw and tighten the retaining
screw.
(8) Do this procedure again until the generator output voltage is in limits.
(9) Switch on additional aircraft loads (e.g. landing light). Make sure the test voltmeter
stabilizes at between 27.75V DC and 28.25V DC.
(10) Switch off all systems not required for engine running. Make sure the test voltmeter
stabilizes at between 27.75V DC and 28.25V DC.
{11) Move the power lever to MAX and make sure the test voltmeter stabilizes at between
27.75V DC and 28.25V DC.
(12) Make sure the aircraft voltmeter shows the same voltage as the test voltmeter.
(13) Shut down the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(14) Remove the voltmeter from the aircraft.
(15) Install access panel PB3.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 503
24-30-00 Sep 30/07
'ePILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COVER PLATE VOLTAGE LEVEL

RETAINING SCREW ADJUSTMENT
AND WASHER COVER PLATE CONNECTOR
Voltage Regulator - Adjustment/Test

Figure 501
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 504
24-30-00 Sep 30/07
'SPILATUS:::?"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STARTER-GENERATOR - REMOVAUINSTALLATION
1. General
This topic gives the procedure for the removal and installation of the starter-generator PIN
978.91.23.101.
Warning signs
B. Expendable Parts
968.20.11.686 Gasket
c. Consumable Materials (Ref. 20-31-00)
P04-004 Grease
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) Make sure the BATTERY MASTER switch is set to OFF.
START GEN (BATTERY BUS CB Panel)
(3) At the EPU receptacle and the BATTERY M ASTER switch, put the warning signs: DO
NOT APPLY ELE CTRICAL POWER in position.
(4) Open the engine panels PL 1 and PR1.
B. Remove the Starter-Generator (Ref. Fig. 401)
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU RE MOVE THE STARTER-GENERATOR. IT WEIGHS

A PPROXIMATELY 10 KG (22 L B).
(1) Move the cover and record the positions of the electrical connections at the starter
generator terminal-block.
(2) Disconnect the electrical connections.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with Starter-Generator

PIN 978.91.23.101 CONFIG 1
Page 401
24-31-11 Jun 30109
'E PILATUSS:-
P C-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: GIVE SUPPORT TO THE STARTER-GENERATOR BEFORE YOU REMOVE THE

CLAMP. THIS IS TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE SPLINES OF THE DRIVE
SH AFT.
(3) Remove the nuts (3) and washers (2).
(4) Carefully move the starter-generator (4) rearwards to disengage the drive shaft.
(5) Remove the starter-generator (4).
(6) Remove and discard the gasket (1).
C. Install the Starter-Generator (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Examine the internal splines in the engine drive-shaft for damage and wear (Ref. P&WC
EMM 72-60-00. Page Block 201).
(2) A pply a layer of grease (Material No. P04-004) to the splines of the starter-generator drive
s haft.
(3) Put the new gasket (1) in position on the engine.
CAUTION: GIVE SUPPORT TO THE STARTER-GENERATOR DURING INSTALLA T ION.

TH IS IS TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE SPLINES OF THE DRIVE SHAFT.
(4) Put the starter-generator (4) in position with the terminal-block at the 9 o'clock position.
(5) Move the starter-generator (4) forwards to engage the drive-shaft.
(6) Install the washers (2) and nuts (3).
(7) Torque tighten the nuts (3) to between 8,5 and 9,6 Nm (75 and 85 !bf.in.).
(8) C onnect the electrical connections at the positions recorded in the removal procedure.
(9) Put the cover over the electrical connections.
D. Job Close Up
(2) Close engine access panels PL1 and PR1.
(3) Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
S TART GEN (BAT TERY BUS CB Panel)
(4) Remove the warning signs from the EPU receptacle and the BAT TERY MASTER switch.
(5) Do a functional test of the DC Generation system (Ref. 24-30-00, Page Block 501)

P/N 978.91.23.101 CONFIG 1
Page402
24-31-11 Jun 30/09
"SPILATUS 5'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Starter-Generator - Removal / Installation

Figure 401

P/N 978.91.23.101 CONFIG 1
Page 403
24-31-11 Jun 30/09
"s:PILATUS:s:'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

P/N 978.91.23.101 CONFIG 1
Page404
24-31-11 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STARTER-GENERATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This topic gives the procedure for the removal and installation of the starter-generator P/N
978.91.23.201. This starter-generator is installed with a QAD adapter.

- Torque Wrench 0 to 50 Nm (0 to 442.5 lbf. in.)
- Warning signs: ’ DO NOT Local manufacture
CONNECT ELECTRICAL
POWER’
P04-004 Grease
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
START GEN (BATTERY BUS CB Panel).
(3) Put warning signs ‘DO NOT CONNECT ELECTRICAL POWER’ at the EPU receptacle
and BATTERY MASTER switch.
(4) Open the engine panels PL1 and PR1.
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU REMOVE THE STARTER-GENERATOR. IT WEIGHS

APPROXIMATELY 10 KG (22 LB).
(1) Move the cover and record the positions of the electrical connections (4) at the starter-
(2) Disconnect the electrical connections (4).

P/N 978.91.23.201 CONFIG 2
Page 401
24-31-11 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SHAFT.
(3) Remove the clamp (2).
(1) The first time you install a starter-generator with a serial number (S/N) up to 1307 do a
check of the brush leads as follows:
NOTE: This check is only necessary on first installation and is not required on starter-
generators S/N 1308 and up.
(a) Remove the air inlet (Ref. 24-31-11, Page Block 601).
(b) Do the check that the brush leads are correctly positioned (Ref. 24-31-11, Page
Block 601).
(c) Install the air inlet (Ref. 24-31-11, Page Block 601).
(3) Examine the QAD adapter (1) for security of attachment to the engine.
(4) Apply a layer of grease (Material No. P04-004) to the splines of the starter-generator drive-
shaft.
CAUTION: GIVE SUPPORT TO THE STARTER-GENERATOR DURING INSTALLATION.

THIS IS TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE SPLINES OF THE DRIVE SHAFT.
(5) Put the starter-generator (3) in position with the terminal-block at the 9 o’clock position.
(7) Make sure the face of the starter-generator (3) is flush against the mounting pad.
(8) Install the clamp (2) as follows:
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE CLAMP IS CORRECTLY ALIGNED AROUND THE QAD
ADAPTER AND THE FLANGES OF THE STARTER-GENERATOR BEFORE IT IS
TIGHTENED. IF THE CLAMP IS MISALIGNED, IT WILL TWIST AND FAIL WHEN
THE NUT IS TIGHTENED.
(a) Connect the clamp (2) and partially tighten the nut of the clamp (2).
(b) Use a rubber or plastic hammer to lightly tap around the circumference of the clamp
(2).
(c) Torque the nut of the clamp (2) to 3,70 Nm (33 lbf. in.).

P/N 978.91.23.201 CONFIG 2
Page 402
24-31-11 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Use a rubber or plastic hammer to lightly tap around the circumference of the clamp
(2) and, at the same time, torque the nut of the clamp (2) to 5,56 Nm (50 lbf in.).
(9) Connect the electrical connections (4) at the positions recorded in the removal procedure,
and torque them to the values shown below:
Terminal Size Torque Nm Torque lbf. in.

3/8 inch 24,9 - 26,6 220 - 235
#10-32 2,6 - 4,0 23 - 35
(10) Put the cover over the electrical connections (4).
D. Job Close Up
(4) Remove the warning signs from the EPU receptacle and the BATTERY MASTER switch.
(5) Do a functional test of the DC Generation system (Ref. 24-30-00, Page Block 501).
(6) After engine shutdown, do a check of the starter-generator clamp to make sure the torque
is correct. If necessary, torque the nut of the clamp to 5,56 Nm (50 lbf in.).

P/N 978.91.23.201 CONFIG 2
Page 403
24-31-11 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 2
A
6306

Figure 401

P/N 978.91.23.201 CONFIG 2
Page 404
24-31-11 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STARTER-GENERATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This topic gives the procedure for the removal and installation of the starter-generator P/N
978.91.23.434. This starter-generator is installed with a QAD adapter.

- Torque Wrench 0 to 50 Nm (0 to 442.5 lbf. in.)
- Warning signs: ’ DO NOT Local manufacture
CONNECT ELECTRICAL
POWER’
P04-004 Grease
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU REMOVE THE STARTER-GENERATOR. IT WEIGHS

14,2 KG (31.2 LB).
(1) Move the cover and record the positions of the electrical connections (4) at the starter-
(2) Disconnect the electrical connections (4).

P/N 978.91.23.434 CONFIG 3
Page 401
24-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SHAFT.
(3) Remove the clamp (2).
(2) Examine the QAD adapter (1) for security of attachment to the engine.
(3) Apply a layer of grease (Material No. P04-004) to the splines of the starter-generator drive-
shaft.
CAUTION: GIVE SUPPORT TO THE STARTER-GENERATOR DURING INSTALLATION.

THIS IS TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE SPLINES OF THE DRIVE SHAFT.
(4) Put the starter-generator (3) in position with the terminal-block at the 9 o’clock position.
(6) Make sure the face of the starter-generator (3) is flush against the mounting pad.
(7) Install the clamp (2) as follows:
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE CLAMP IS CORRECTLY ALIGNED AROUND THE QAD
ADAPTER AND THE FLANGES OF THE STARTER-GENERATOR BEFORE IT IS
TIGHTENED. IF THE CLAMP IS MISALIGNED, IT WILL TWIST AND FAIL WHEN
THE NUT IS TIGHTENED.
(a) Connect the clamp (2) and partially tighten the nut of the clamp (2).
(b) Use a rubber or plastic hammer to lightly tap around the circumference of the clamp
(2).
(c) Torque the nut of the clamp (2) to 3,70 Nm (33 lbf. in.).
(d) Use a rubber or plastic hammer to lightly tap around the circumference of the clamp
(2) and, at the same time, torque the nut of the clamp (2) to 5,56 Nm (50 lbf in.).
(8) Connect the electrical connections (4) at the positions recorded in the removal procedure,
and torque them to the values shown below:
Terminal Size Torque Nm Torque lbf. in.

3/8 inch 24,9 - 26,6 220 - 235
#10-32 2,6 - 4,0 23 - 35
(9) Put the cover over the electrical connections (4).

P/N 978.91.23.434 CONFIG 3
Page 402
24-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Job Close Up
(5) Do a functional test of the DC Generation system (Ref. 24-30-00, Page Block 501).
(6) After engine shutdown, do a check of the starter-generator clamp to make sure the torque
is correct. If necessary, torque the nut of the clamp to 5,56 Nm (50 lbf in.).

P/N 978.91.23.434 CONFIG 3
Page 403
24-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
2
3
A
4
6773

Figure 401

P/N 978.91.23.434 CONFIG 3
Page 404
24-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STARTER-GENERATOR - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. General
This topic gives the procedure for the inspection/check of the brush assemblies of the
starter-generators P/N 978.91.23.101 and 978.91.23.201.
The rate the brushes wear is linear if the operation of the aircraft is the same. For example, if the
brushes wear by approximately 25% after 300 flying hours, then in the next 300 flying hours another
25% wear will occur.
If the brushes are worn to the maximum limit, you must remove the starter-generator and return it to a
facility that can do the brush bed-in process.
If the starter-generator is removed, attach a label to it that gives the reason for removal and the hours
run since the last overhaul.
904.10.89.110 Torque wrench 0 Nm to 5 Nm (0 lbf in. to

44.2 lbf in.)
- Soft brush (non-metallic) Local supply
513.24.09.006 Gage, generator brush Qty 1
- Torch Local supply
- Mirror Local supply
110.88.07.065 Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) Qty 3
- Warning signs ‘DO NOT CONNECT Qty 2
ELECTRICAL POWER’
- Dry air supply (29 PSIG / 200 kPa max) Local supply
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with Starter-Generators P/N

978.91.23.101 and 978.91.23.201 CONFIG 1
Page 601
24-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Remove the Air Inlet (Ref. Fig. 601, Sht. 1)
(1) Record the position of the air inlet (1) on the starter-generator (3).
(2) Remove the four screws (2) that attach the air inlet (1) to the starter-generator (3).
(3) Carefully slide the air inlet (1) to the rear and remove it from the starter-generator (3).
(4) Clean the internal parts of the starter-generator (3), the air inlet (1) and the cover assembly
with a soft brush and dry clean compressed air (29 PSIG / 200 kPa max).
C. Examine the Brush Assemblies (Ref. Fig. 601, Sht. 1)
(1) Examine the brush assemblies for damage:
(a) If there are any chips or cracks, reject the starter-generator (3).
(b) If there are any frayed electrical wires, loose connections or loose rivets, reject the
starter-generator (3).
(2) If necessary, replace the starter-generator (3) (Ref. 24-31-11, Page Block 401).
D. Measure the Brushes for Wear (Ref. Fig. 601, Sht. 2 and 3)
NOTE: It is not possible to use the gage (10) to get a measurement on all of the brushes (5).
(1) For the brushes (5) that you can use the gage (10) to get a measurement:
(a) Put the gage (10) on the highest point of the brush (5).
NOTE: Do not put the gage (10) on the brush spring (7) or the brush spring
support (6).
(b) Measure the distance from the top of the brush (5) to the top (highest point) of the
brush holder assembly (9).
NOTE: Use a torch and a mirror where necessary.
(c) Record the measurement.
(d) Do the above procedure again (where possible) for each brush (5) per brush holder
assembly (9).
(2) For the brushes (5) that you cannot use the gage (10) to get a measurement:
(a) Use a torch and a mirror to visually examine the brushes (5) for similar wear
measured with the gage (10).
(b) If a visually examined brush is shorter than the measured brushes, remove the
starter-generator (Ref. 24-31-11, Page Block 401) and measure the brush with the
gage.
(3) Use the measurement(s) recorded and calculate the projected hours of brush life
remaining, refer to Para. 3. E.

978.91.23.101 and 978.91.23.201 CONFIG 1
Page 602
24-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) If the projected hours of brush life remaining is less than the number of hours until the next
scheduled inspection/check, reject the starter-generator.
(5) If the visual examination determines that the brushes (5) are worn to the maximum limit, or
are estimated to wear to the maximum limit before the next scheduled inspection/check,
reject the starter-generator.
(6) If necessary, replace the starter-generator (Ref. 24-31-11, Page Block 401).
E. Calculate the Projected Hours of Brush Life (Ref. Fig. 601, Sht. 4)
(1) Use the brush wear graph and the measurement(s) that you recorded, to determine the
remaining brush life (%).
NOTE: Use the largest measurement (the brush with the most wear) to determine the
(2) Record the remaining brush life (%).
NOTE: You must know the Time Since Overhaul/Time Since New (TSO/TSN) for the
starter-generator.
(3) Use the “Remaining Brush Life (%)” column and the “TSO/TSN (HOURS)” row on the
Projected Brush-Life Table to determine the projected hours of brush life remaining.
(4) Record the remaining hours of brush life.
F. Do a Check that the Brush Leads are Correctly Positioned (Ref. Fig. 601, Sht. 2)
(1) Make sure that the brush leads (4) are correctly positioned, as shown in Fig. 601, Sht. 2,
Position 2 (Butterflied).
(2) If the brush leads (4) are not correctly positioned:
(a) Push the brush leads (4) away from the shunt lead connection (8) and (at the spring
side) make a bend in the brush leads (4), as shown in Fig. 601, Sht. 2, Position 1.
CAUTION: ARCING CAN OCCUR IF THE INSULATION SLEEVES DO NOT

SUFFICIENTLY COVER THE BRUSH LEADS.
(b) Make sure that the insulation sleeves are pushed up (as much as possible) against
the shunt lead connection (8).
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE BRUSH LEADS ARE CORRECTLY POSITIONED
(BUTTERFLIED) AND DO NOT OVERHANG THE LEADING EDGE
(SPRING SIDE) OF THE BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY. THE BRUSH
LEADS CAN CAUSE HANG UP IF THEY ARE NOT CORRECTLY
POSITIONED OR THEY CATCH ON THE LEADING EDGE OF THE BRUSH
HOLDER ASSEMBLY.
(c) Push the brush leads (4) down and apart to get the correct “Butterflied” position, as
shown in Fig. 601, Sht. 2, Position 2.

978.91.23.101 and 978.91.23.201 CONFIG 1
Page 603
24-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Make sure that the brush leads (4) do not overhang the leading edge (spring side)
of the brush holder assembly (9).
G. Install the Air Inlet (Ref. Fig. 601, Sht. 1)
(1) Carefully put the air inlet (1) in the correct position that you recorded in the removal
procedure and align the holes.
NOTE: Make sure that you do not move the brush leads out of position when you install
the air inlet (1).
(2) Install the four screws (2).
(3) Torque the screws (2) to between 0.87 Nm to 1.16 Nm (7.7 lbf in. to 10.3 lbf in.).
H. Job Close Up

978.91.23.101 and 978.91.23.201 CONFIG 1
Page 604
24-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A A
B
3
2
6769
Starter-Generator - Inspection/Check - Air Inlet Removal/Installation


978.91.23.101 and 978.91.23.201 CONFIG 1
Page 605
24-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F D
E
7
6
5 4 D
8
E
VIEW ON ARROW
POSITION 1
9
4 8
6
5
POSITION 2 (BUTTERFLIED)
96032
Starter-Generator - Inspection/Check - Brush Leads


978.91.23.101 and 978.91.23.201 CONFIG 1
Page 606
24-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6
5
F
VIEW LOOKING FWD
4
10
3
DISTANCE TO
BE MEASURED
2
1
96107
Starter-Generator - Inspection/Check - Brush Wear Measurement


978.91.23.101 and 978.91.23.201 CONFIG 1
Page 607
24-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BRUSH WEAR GRAPH
(METRIC)
100%
75%
REMAINING BRUSH LIFE (%)
50%
25%
BRUSH AT
0% END OF LIFE
0 4 8 12 16 mm
BRUSH BELOW EDGE OF BRUSH HOLDER
PROJECTED BRUSH-LIFE TABLE
USE THE REMAINING BRUSH LIFE PERCENTAGE AND

TSO/TSN TO PROJECT THE HOURS OF BRUSH LIFE REMAINING

15% 20% 25% 30% 35% 40% 45% 50% 55% 60% 65% 70% 75%
1600 282 400 533 686 862 1067 1309 1600 1956 2400 2971 3733 4800
1500 265 375 500 643 808 1000 1227 1500 1833 2250 2786 3500 4500
1400 247 350 467 600 754 933 1145 1400 1711 2100 2600 3267 4200
1300 229 325 433 557 700 867 1064 1300 1589 1950 2414 3033 3900
1200 212 300 400 514 646 800 982 1200 1467 1800 2229 2800 3600
TSO/TSN (HOURS)
1100 194 275 367 471 592 733 900 1100 1344 1650 2043 2567 3300
1000 176 250 333 429 538 667 818 1000 1222 1500 1857 2333 3000
900 159 225 300 386 485 600 736 900 1100 1350 1671 2100 2700
800 141 200 267 343 431 533 655 800 978 1200 1486 1867 2400
700 124 175 233 300 377 467 573 700 856 1050 1300 1633 2100
600 106 150 200 257 323 400 491 600 733 900 1114 1400 1800
500 88 125 167 214 269 333 409 500 611 750 929 1167 1500
400 71 100 133 171 215 267 327 400 489 600 743 933 1200
300 53 75 100 129 162 200 245 300 367 450 557 700 900
200 35 50 67 86 108 133 164 200 244 300 371 467 600
100 18 25 33 43 54 67 82 100 122 150 186 233 300
PROJECTED HOURS OF BRUSH LIFE REMAINING (HOURS)

96108
Starter-Generator - Inspection/Check - Brush Wear Graph and Projected Brush Life Table

978.91.23.101 and 978.91.23.201 CONFIG 1
Page 608
24-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STARTER-GENERATOR - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. General
This topic gives the procedure for the inspection/check of the brush assemblies of the
starter-generator P/N 978.91.23.434.
The rate the brushes wear is linear if the operation of the aircraft is the same. For example, if the
brushes wear by approximately 25% after 300 flying hours, then in the next 300 flying hours another
25% wear will occur.
If the brushes are worn to the maximum limit, you must remove the starter-generator and return it to a
facility that can do the brush bed-in process.
If the starter-generator is removed, attach a label to it that gives the reason for removal and the hours
run since the last overhaul.
904.10.89.101 Torque screwdriver 1 Nm to 5 Nm (8.8 lbf in. to

44.2 lbf in.)
- Soft brush (non-metallic) Local supply
513.24.09.006 Gage, generator brush Qty 1
- Torch Local supply
- Mirror Local supply
110.88.07.065 Safety clip (Circuit breaker hold open) Qty 3
- Warning signs ‘DO NOT CONNECT Qty 2
ELECTRICAL POWER’
- Dry air supply (29 PSIG / 200 kPa max) Local supply
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up

P/N 978.91.23.434 CONFIG 2
Page 601
24-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Remove the Brush Access Cover (Ref. Fig. 601, Sht. 1)
(1) Record the position of the brush access cover (2) on the starter generator (1).
(2) Loosen the screw (3).
(3) Open the brush access cover (2) and slide it rearwards to remove it from the starter
generator (1).
(4) Clean the internal parts of the starter-generator (1) and the brush access cover (2) with a
soft brush and dry clean compressed air (29 PSIG / 200 kPa max).
C. Examine the Brush Assemblies (Ref. Fig. 601, Sht. 2)
(1) Examine the brush assemblies for damage:
(a) If there are any chips or cracks, reject the starter-generator (3).
(b) If there are any frayed electrical wires, loose connections or loose rivets, reject the
starter-generator (3).
(2) If necessary, replace the starter-generator (3) (Ref. 24-31-11, Page Block 401).
D. Measure the Brushes for Wear (Ref. Fig. 601, Sht. 2 and 3)
NOTE: It is not possible to use the gage (10) to get a measurement on all of the brushes (5).
(1) For the brushes (5) that you can use the gage (10) to get a measurement:
(a) Put the gage (10) on the highest point of the brush (5).
NOTE: Do not put the gage (10) on the brush spring (7) or the brush spring
support (6).
(b) Measure the distance from the top of the brush (5) to the top (highest point) of the
brush holder assembly (9).
(c) Record the measurement.
(d) Do the above procedure again (where possible) for each brush (5) per brush holder
assembly (9).
(2) For the brushes (5) that you cannot use the gage (10) to get a measurement:
(a) Use a torch and a mirror to visually examine the brushes (5) for similar wear
measured with the gage (10).
(b) If a visually examined brush is shorter than the measured brushes, remove the
starter-generator (Ref. 24-31-11, Page Block 401) and measure the brush with the
gage.
(3) Use the measurement(s) recorded and calculate the projected hours of brush life
remaining, refer to Para. 3. E.

P/N 978.91.23.434 CONFIG 2
Page 602
24-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) If the projected hours of brush life remaining is less than the number of hours until the next
scheduled inspection/check, reject the starter-generator.
(5) If the visual examination determines that the brushes (5) are worn to the maximum limit, or
are estimated to wear to the maximum limit before the next scheduled inspection/check,
reject the starter-generator.
(6) If necessary, replace the starter-generator (Ref. 24-31-11, Page Block 401).
E. Calculate the Projected Hours of Brush Life (Ref. Fig. 601, Sht. 4)
(1) Use the brush wear graph and the measurement(s) that you recorded, to determine the
NOTE: Use the largest measurement (the brush with the most wear) to determine the
(2) Record the remaining brush life (%).
NOTE: You must know the Time Since Overhaul/Time Since New (TSO/TSN) for the
starter-generator.
(3) Use the “Remaining Brush Life (%)” column and the “TSO/TSN (HOURS)” row on the
Projected Brush-Life Table to determine the projected hours of brush life remaining.
(4) Record the remaining hours of brush life.
F. Do a Check that the Brush Leads are Correctly Positioned (Ref. Fig. 601, Sht. 2)
(1) Make sure that the brush leads (4) are correctly positioned, as shown in Fig. 601, Sht. 3,
Position 2 (Butterflied).
(2) If the brush leads (4) are not correctly positioned:
(a) Push the brush leads (4) away from the shunt lead connection (8) and (at the spring
side) make a bend in the brush leads (4), as shown in Fig. 601, Sht. 3, Position 1.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE BRUSH LEADS ARE CORRECTLY POSITIONED
(BUTTERFLIED) AND DO NOT OVERHANG THE LEADING EDGE
(SPRING SIDE) OF THE BRUSH HOLDER ASSEMBLY. THE BRUSH
LEADS CAN CAUSE HANG UP IF THEY ARE NOT CORRECTLY
POSITIONED OR THEY CATCH ON THE LEADING EDGE OF THE BRUSH
HOLDER ASSEMBLY.
(b) Push the brush leads (4) down and apart to get the correct “Butterflied” position, as
shown in Fig. 601, Sheet 2 of 4, Position 2.
(c) Make sure that the brush leads (4) do not overhang the leading edge (spring side)
of the brush holder assembly (9).

P/N 978.91.23.434 CONFIG 2
Page 603
24-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
G. Install the Brush Access Cover (Ref. Fig. 601, Sht. 1)
(1) Open the brush access cover (2) and slide it forwards to install it on the starter generator
(1).
(2) Put the brush access cover (2) in the position recorded in the removal procedure. Make
sure the vent holes are adjacent to the terminal block.
(3) Torque tighten the screw (3) to between 2,5 to 4,0 Nm (22 to 35 lbf.in).
H. Job Close Up

P/N 978.91.23.434 CONFIG 2
Page 604
24-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A A
1 B
3
6774
Starter-Generator - Inspection/Check - Band Clamp Removal/Installation


P/N 978.91.23.434 CONFIG 2
Page 605
24-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F D
E
7
6
5 4 D
8
E
VIEW ON ARROW
POSITION 1
9
4 8
6
5
POSITION 2 (BUTTERFLIED)
6775
Starter-Generator - Inspection/Check - Brush Leads


P/N 978.91.23.434 CONFIG 2
Page 606
24-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6
5
F
VIEW LOOKING FWD
4
10
3
DISTANCE TO
2
1 BE MEASURED
6777
Starter-Generator - Inspection/Check - Brush Wear Measurement


P/N 978.91.23.434 CONFIG 2
Page 607
24-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BRUSH WEAR GRAPH
(METRIC)
100%
75%
50%
25%
BRUSH AT
0% END OF LIFE
0 4 8 12 16 mm
BRUSH BELOW EDGE OF BRUSH HOLDER
PROJECTED BRUSH-LIFE TABLE
USE THE REMAINING BRUSH LIFE PERCENTAGE AND

TSO/TSN TO PROJECT THE HOURS OF BRUSH LIFE REMAINING

15% 20% 25% 30% 35% 40% 45% 50% 55% 60% 65% 70% 75%
1600 282 400 533 686 862 1067 1309 1600 1956 2400 2971 3733 4800
1500 265 375 500 643 808 1000 1227 1500 1833 2250 2786 3500 4500
1400 247 350 467 600 754 933 1145 1400 1711 2100 2600 3267 4200
1300 229 325 433 557 700 867 1064 1300 1589 1950 2414 3033 3900
1200 212 300 400 514 646 800 982 1200 1467 1800 2229 2800 3600
TSO/TSN (HOURS)
1100 194 275 367 471 592 733 900 1100 1344 1650 2043 2567 3300
1000 176 250 333 429 538 667 818 1000 1222 1500 1857 2333 3000
900 159 225 300 386 485 600 736 900 1100 1350 1671 2100 2700
800 141 200 267 343 431 533 655 800 978 1200 1486 1867 2400
700 124 175 233 300 377 467 573 700 856 1050 1300 1633 2100
600 106 150 200 257 323 400 491 600 733 900 1114 1400 1800
500 88 125 167 214 269 333 409 500 611 750 929 1167 1500
400 71 100 133 171 215 267 327 400 489 600 743 933 1200
300 53 75 100 129 162 200 245 300 367 450 557 700 900
200 35 50 67 86 108 133 164 200 244 300 371 467 600
100 18 25 33 43 54 67 82 100 122 150 186 233 300
PROJECTED HOURS OF BRUSH LIFE REMAINING (HOURS)

6776
Starter-Generator - Inspection/Check - Brush Wear Graph and Projected Brush Life Table

P/N 978.91.23.434 CONFIG 2
Page 608
24-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VOLTAGE REGULATOR- REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Job Set Up
A. Set the BATTERY switch to OFF.
B. Open and install a safety clip to the START GEN circuit breaker.
C. Put a warning sign at the EPU receptacle and the battery switch to tell persons not to connect
electrical power.
D. Open the engine access panel F9.
CAUTION: DO NOT REMOVE THE VOLTAGE REGULATOR MATING CONNECTOR IF STARTER

GENERATOR IS ROTATING OR ELECTRICAL POWER IS CONNECTED TO THE DC
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
A. Get access to voltage regulator (3) by removing plexiglass protective cover.
B. Disconnect the electrical connector (2) from the voltage regulator.
C. Remove the four securing screws and washers (1).
D. Remove the voltage regulator (3).
A. Put the voltage regulator (3) into position.
B. Install the four securing screws and washers (1).
C. Connect the electrical connector (2) to voltage regulator.
D. Install plexiglass protective cover.
E. Close the START GEN circuit breaker.
F. Remove the warning notices from the EPU receptacle and the battery switch.
5. Test
A. Do a DC power System Functional Test (Ref. 24-30-00, Page Block 501).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
24-31-12 Jun 14/92
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Close Up
A. Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
B. Install the engine access panel F9.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
24-31-12 Jun 14/92
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. VOLTAGE REGULATOR
1. SECURING SCREWS
2. CONNECTOR
6393

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
24-31-12 Jun 14/92
"'iiPILATUS!!P'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BATTERY - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
This topic gives safety precautions and general maintenance practices for nickel cadmium batteries.
A. Personal Safety
Nickel cadmium batteries use a solution of potassium hydroxide and distilled water as the
electrolyte.
If electrolyte comes into contact with the skin, wash the affected area with large quantities of
water and neutralize with a solution of boric acid, lemon juice or vinegar. If electrolyte gets into
the eyes, immediately flush the eyes with water and obtain medical help.
Remove rings and other metal jewellery from hands. Do not use brushes with any metal parts
when cleaning batteries. Metal items can cause electrical shorts which can burn the skin or
damage the battery.
Avoid strain and use correct lifting practices when handling heavy batteries. Obtain assistance if
the battery is to be lifted in an awkward position. Do not use the battery vent pipes for lifting
purposes.
B. Aircraft Safety
To avoid build up of heavy gases make sure the battery is correctly connected to the ventilation
system. The ventilation system must be regularly inspected for leaks and obstructions.
When carrying out a visual examination of an installed battery, do not place the removed battery
cover or cell vent caps on any part of the aircraft structure or equipment.
Do not do maintenance on the battery, including electrolyte level adjustment, when the battery is
installed in the aircraft.
C. General Safety
Methods of servicing nickel-cadmium batteries and lead-acid batteries are not the same. The
following safety precautions must be taken:
Tools, equipment and protective clothing, used for servicing one type of battery must not
be used when servicing the other type.
Do not store or service both types of battery in the same room unless the sulphuric acid
fumes of the lead-acid batteries can not come into contact with the nickel-cadmium
batteries.
Do not allow foreign objects, debris or dirt to accumulate on the battery or Installation.
Do not use solvents for battery cleaning. Make sure that plastic parts are free from oil and
grease.
Lubricate the connectors, pole nuts and bolts with neutral petroleum jelly (Material No. P04-005).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
24-32-00 Dec 14/91
"e PILATUSEF'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Use only de-mineralised or distilled water for electrolyte level adjustment. Loss of water will
cause a higher concentration of electrolyte and possible overheating.
3. General Maintenance
Before carrying out work on batteries or battery systems, personnel must be familiar with all relevant
safety precautions.
Examine batteries frequently during their first few months of service. Maintain a record for each battery
to show inspections, test, repairs and maintenance that is done.
Examine batteries installed on aircraft for security, signs of damage and evidence of locally overheated
areas, with particular attention to the battery case, connections and mounting.
Examine connectors for signs of contamination, burns, cracks and bent or p itted terminal fittings.
Make sure vent lines are free from obstruction, leaks or damage.
With battery cover removed, examine tops of cells and vent caps for signs of electrolyte leakage.
Normal deposits may be removed with a cloth or plastic brush but the battery must be removed from
the aircraft for cleaning of excessive deposits.
If the electrolyte level is found to be below the minimum requirement, or an excessive amount of
electrolyte Is seen on top of the cells, remove the battery from the aircraft for servicing.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page202
24-32-00 Dec 14/91
'ePILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAIN BATTERY- REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION
1. General
This topic gives the procedure to remove and install the battery. This procedures is also applicable to
the optional single lead acid type battery.
When the optional single lead acid battery is installed, the CWS BAT HOT caution system (if installed}
does not operate. The battery hot plug is connected to a receptacle, that gives a ground to stop the
CWS BAT HOT caption from coming on.
2. Procedures
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU REMOVE OR INSTALL THE BATTERY. ITS WEIGHT IS
APPROXIMATELY 70 POUNDS (32 KILOGRAMS).
WARNING: BATTERY ELECTROLYTE CAN CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS, CORROSION AND

WARNING: IF ELECTROLYTE IS SPILLED CLEAN THE AFFECTED AREA IMMEDIATEL Y. MAKE

SPILLED ELECTROLYTE NEUTRAL WITH A 3 PERCENT SOLUTION OF ACETIC ACID
OR A 10 PERCENT SOLUTION OF BORIC ACID. CLEAN THE AFFECTED AREA WITH
CLEAN WATER
WARNING: IF YOU GET ELECTROLYTE IN YOUR EYES OR ON YOUR SKIN, GET MEDICAL HELP
IMMEDIATELY.
WARNING: DO NOT USE TOOLS OR EQUIPMENT WHICH HAVE PREVIOUSLY BEEN USED ON
BATTERIES WHICH ARE OF A DIFFERENT TYPE.
A. Job Set Up
(1) Set the BATTERY MASTER switch to OFF.
(2) Open the engine access panel PL1 .
B. Removal (Ref. Fig 401)
(1) If the NiCad battery is installed disconnect the battery hot plug (9).
(2) Disconnect the battery connector (10) from the battery (3).
(3) Loosen the two clamps (2 and 4).
(4) Disconnect the two vent tubes (1 and 5) from the battery (3).
(5) Remove and discard the lockwire from the wingnuts (6).
(6) Loosen the wingnuts (6).
(7) Move the hold down rods (8) away from the battery (3).
(8) Remove the battery (3) from the aircraft.
(9) Examine the battery compartment for damage.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
24-32-11 Nov 30/03
'ePILATUS&'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(10) Make sure the vent tubes (1 and 5) are not blocked.
C. Installation (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Put the battery (3) in position on the tray.
(2) Put the hold down rods (8) in position, with the bushes (7) immediately below the wingnuts
(6).
(3) Tighten the wingnuts (6) with your hand.
(4) Safety the wingnuts (6) with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(5) Install the two vent tubes (1 and 5) on the battery (3).
(6) Tighten the two clamps (2 and 4).
(7) Connect the battery connector (10).
(a) For a NiCad battery do the steps that follow:
(i) If installed, connect the battery hot plug (9).
(b) For a Lead acid battery do the steps that follow:
(i) If installed, make sure that the battery hot plug (9) is connected to the
receptacle.
(8) Set the BATTERY MASTER switch to ON and make sure that:
(a) The battery voltmeter shows more than 24 volts
(b) The BATT HOT caption is OFF (if installed).
D. Job Close Up
(2) Close the access panel PL1.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
24-32-11 Nov 30/03
� PILATUS !!!!!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. CLAMP
4. CLAMP
9. BATTERY HOT PLUG

(IF INSTALLED)
Main Battery - Removal / Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
24-32-11 Nov 30/03
';!!iPILATUS!i!P'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VOLT-AMMETER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
2. Job Set Up
A. Open and install a safety clip to these circuit breakers:
VOLT/AMP METER (Qty 2)(Bulkhead 1 CB Panel, Engine compartment)
3. Removal
A. Loosen the volt/ammeter instrument clamp screw.
B. Pull the volt/ammeter slowly from the instrument panel.
C. Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove the volt/ammeter.
4. Installation
A. Install the electrical connector to volt/ammeter.
B. Install the volt/ameter in the instrument panel. Make sure the electrical cable Is not trapped.
C. Tighten the instrument clamp screw.
D. Remove the safety clips and the close circuit breakers.
6. Test
A. Energize the aircraft electrical system.
B. Check the volt/ammeter for correct operation.
C. Check the instrument lighting on volt/ammeter for correct operation.
D. Set all electrical power to OFF.
s. Close Up
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 401
24-34-11 Dec 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTERNAL POWER - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
External DC power is connected to the DC distribution system via an External Power Unit (EPU)
receptacle and an EPU relay. The EPU relay automatically disconnects external power when the
distribution system or the generator system is in operation. Setting the aircraft main battery or generator
systems to ON causes electrical disconnection of external power by the EPU relay.
2. External Power System (Ref. Fig. 1)
A. General
External DC power is connected to the aircraft through the EPU receptacle located on left side of
the engine compartment. The placard 24 VOLT displayed at the EPU receptacle shows the
minimum EPU voltage that must be applied to the aircraft DC distribution system. An EPU having
a nominal regulated 28 ± 1.0V DC output should be used whenever possible particularly when
carrying out operational and functional testing of electrical/electronic systems.
Aircraft with SB 168 have an overvoltage protection device connected across the main positive
pin and the negative pin of the EPU receptacle. The device has five parallel tranzorb diodes
connected in parallel, which can each withstand a peak pulse of 15000 W, and together can
absorb a peak pulse of 75000 W.
B. Description and Operation
The EPU receptacle has two positive pins and one negative pin. The small positive pin is used in
a polarity reversal protection circuit which prevents external power being connected to the DC
distribution system unless a positive DC voltage is present at the pin. With correct polarity
external DC power connected to the EPU receptacle, a diode in the EPU relay allows current
flow to energize the relay. The energized relay contacts close to complete the circuit from the
external power source to the distribution system.
Aircraft with SB 168 have an overvoltage protection device connected across the main positive
pin and the negative pin of the EPU receptacle. This device protects voltage-sensitive equipment
from voltage surges and ‘spikes’ generated by the external power supply.
The EPU relay energizing circuit is routed to ground through contacts in the via battery relay and
generator relay. When the battery or the generator is on-line the grounding circuit will open to de-
prevent energization of the EPU relay, which effectively disconnects external power from the
system.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
24-40-00 Mar 14/98
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
THERMAL SWITCH
GND = ON
MAIN EPU
BATTERY BATT HOT
RECEPTACLE
OPEN = ON
+ PLUG DISCONNECT + + OVERVOLTAGE
CWS PROTECTION
DEVICE
(POST SB 168)
EPU
RELAY
BATTERY
RELAY
GENERATOR
OPEN = ON
GENERATOR
CWS
RELAY
BATTERY
STARTER
GENERATOR
STARTER
SHUNT RELAY
BUSBAR
CROSS TIE
RCCB
BAT GEN
BUS BUS
BATTERY DIRECT BUSBAR
BATTERY HOT BUSBAR
GENERATOR BUSBAR
BATTERY BUSBAR
BUS TIE
BREAKER
RADIO RADIO
BUS BUS
BAT FILTER
RADIO
BUS
GEN
BATTERY RADIO BUSBAR
NOTE: For simplification, supplies are

RADIO
shown to main components
BUS
and busbars only.
RADIO BUSBAR
GENERATOR
6357
Battery and External Supply Schematic

Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
24-40-00 Mar 14/98
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DC ELECTRICAL POWER DISTRIBUTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The standard DC distribution system comprises the following busbars:
- battery hot busbar
- battery direct busbar
- battery busbar
- generator busbar
- battery radio busbar
- generator radio busbar.
The first four busbars are tied via busbar cross tie circuit breaker (RCCB) to whichever DC power
source is selected for use. Connection to the:
- EPU is via the EPU relay
- main battery is via the battery relay to the RCCB
- generator is via the generator relay to the RCCB
A. Distribution - Standard (Ref. Fig. 1)
The battery hot busbar is connected permanently to the main battery. It can also be supplied
from the generator via the contacts of energized battery relay when the BATTERY switch is
selected ON. EPU power cannot be connected to the battery hot busbar as the EPU relay is de-
energized when the BATTERY switch is selected ON.
The battery direct busbar is connected to the output side of the battery relay.
The standard busbars are divided into two groups comprising three battery and two generator
busbars. During normal operation the two groups are connected through the RCCB. DC power is
distributed in parallel from the selected power source. If a grounding fault occurs in either the
battery or generator supply lines, the RCCB operates and breaks the cross tie connection. This
action isolates the faulty supply line and allows DC distribution to be continued from the
serviceable supply line and allows DC distribution to be continued from the serviceable supply
line through the appropriate group of busbars. The RCCB is reset by closing the BUS TIE
breaker located on the right hand side of the instrument panel.
The battery radio and generator radio busbars are supplied from the battery and generator
busbars respectively. Each radio busbar is connected to its main distribution busbar via a circuit
breaker and switch. In addition, the generator radio busbar is connected through a radio filter.
The switches are placarded RADIO BUS GEN and RADIO BUS BATTERY. When the RADIO
BUS GEN switch is selected to ON, RF interference-free DC power is supplied to the generator
radio busbar. Selecting RADIO BUS BATTERY switch to ON completes the normal DC supply
from the battery busbar to the radio busbar.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
24-60-00 Jun 14/92
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Indicating
A VOLT/AMP indicator, installed on the right hand instrument panel allows visual observation of
the main distribution and radio busbars’ voltage and load current. In addition, a test voltmeter can
be connected to the generator busbar via jack sockets located under the right hand instrument
panel.
Captions on the central warning system (CWS) annunciator panel illuminate to indicate battery
over temperature (BATT HOT) and the following off line conditions: generator (GENERATOR),
generator busbar (GEN BUS) and battery busbar (BATT BUS).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
24-60-00 Jun 14/92
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAIN EPU
BATTERY RECEPTACLE
+ +
BATTERY
EPU RELAY
RELAY
STARTER
RELAY
STARTER
SHUNT RCCB GENERATOR

BAT GEN
BUS BUS
GENERATOR
RELAY
BUS TIE
BREAKER
VOLT/ VOLT/
AMP AMP
METER METER
RADIO RADIO
BUS BUS
V
A O
M L
P T FILTER
POWER
RADIO SOCKET GEN
BUS RADIO
BATTERY BUS
GENERATOR RADIO BUSBAR
BATTERY DIRECT BUSBAR
POWER
BATTERY RADIO BUSBAR
BATTERY HOT BUSBAR
SOCKET
GENERATOR BUSBAR
BATTERY BUSBAR
6358
DC Power Distribution Schematic

Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
24-60-00 Jun 14/92
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 25 - EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS

Chapter Chapter
Section Section
List of Effective 1 Jun 30/21 25-21-01 401 Jul 31/11
Pages 2 Jun 30/21 402 Jul 31/11
403 Jul 31/11
Table of Contents 1 Jun 30/21 404 Jul 31/11
2 Jun 30/21 405 Jul 31/11
406 Jul 31/11
25-00-00 1 Jun 30/09
2 Jun 30/09 25-22-00 401 Nov 21/18
402 Nov 21/18
25-20-01 1 Sep 30/07 403 Nov 21/18
2 Sep 30/07 404 Nov 21/18
3 Sep 30/07 405 Nov 21/18
4 Sep 30/07 406 Nov 21/18
401 Sep 30/07 25-23-01 401 Jun 30/21

402 Sep 30/07 402 Jun 30/21
403 Sep 30/07 403 Jun 30/21
404 Sep 30/07 404 Jun 30/21
405 Sep 30/07
406 Sep 30/07 25-63-00 501 Jun 30/09
407 Sep 30/07 CONFIG 1 502 Jun 30/09
408 Sep 30/07
409 Sep 30/07 CONFIG 2 501 Jun 30/09
410 Sep 30/07 502 Jun 30/09
25-20-03 1 Jun 30/09 25-63-01 401 Jul 31/12

2 Jun 30/09 CONFIG 2 402 Jul 31/12
3 Jun 30/09
4 Jun 30/09
401 Jun 30/09

402 Jun 30/09
403 Jun 30/09
404 Jun 30/09
405 Jun 30/09
406 Jun 30/09
407 Jun 30/09
408 Jun 30/09
409 Jun 30/09
410 Jun 30/09
411 Jun 30/09
412 Jun 30/09
25-LEP
Page 1
Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
25-LEP
Page 2
Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 25 - EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS 25-00-00

LEICA DUAL CAMERA SYSTEM 25-20-01

Description and Operation 1 Aircraft with
Leica Dual
Camera
System
Removal/Installation 401 Aircraft with
Leica Dual
Camera
System
MULTIPLE SENSOR CAMERA INSTALLATION 25-20-03
Multiple Sensor
Camera
Installation
Multiple Sensor
Camera
Installation
PASSENGER SEATS 25-21-00
PASSENGER SEATS WITH TORSO RESTRAINT 25-21-01
SYSTEM
Passenger
Seats P/Ns
112.50.06.839/
840 or
112.50.06.915/
916
PILOT AND CO-PILOT SEAT 25-22-00
PILOT AND CO-PILOT SEAT HARNESSES 25-22-00
seat P/N:
112.50.06.778/
800 or
112.50.06.779/
801
25-TOC
Page 1
Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter
Section
CO-PILOT SEAT 25-23-00

SPECIAL FOUNDATION BOLTS 25-23-00
Removal/Installation 401 All
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT) 25-63-00
Adjustment/Test CONFIG 1 501 Aircraft with
Narco ELT-10
or ELT-910
Adjustment/Test CONFIG 2 501 Aircraft with
Kannad 406 AF
ELT
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER 25-63-01
Removal/Installation CONFIG 2 401 Aircraft with
Kannad 406 AF
ELT
25-TOC
Page 2
Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EQUIPMENT AND FURNISHINGS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The following equipment is, or can be, installed in the aircraft:
• Leica Dual Camera System (Ref. 25-20-01)

• Multiple Sensor Camera Installation (Ref. 25-20-03)
• Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) (Ref. 25-63-00)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
25-00-00 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
25-00-00 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LEICA DUAL CAMERA SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. Description and Operation
For the description and operation of the Leica Dual Camera System, refer to the manufacturer’s
handbook.
2. System Information
Figures 1 and 2 show the aircraft wiring diagram and the system interconnection for the Dual Camera
System.
The table below shows the system summary of all Leica Units for the Dual Camera System ADS 40
and ALS 50
The ADS 40 System has:

Weight
in kg
Unit
SH40 Sensor Head 66.0
PAV30 Gyro Mount 36.5

Protection cover 1.3
Mass Compensator 39.5
CU40 Control Unit 43.0

MM40 Mass Memory 18.9
OI40 Operator Interface 6.3
IS40 Interface Stand 5.6
OC50 Operation Controller 1.6
GI40 Guidance Indicator 0.4
GPS GPS Antenna with L+ & L2 0.3
CABL-1 Cable Harness 5.0
Total weight of the ADS40 system 224.4
The ALS 50 System has:

Weight
in kg
Unit
ALS50 Sensor Head 30.6
with Digital Camera
SC50 Electronic Unit 41.0

LC50 Laser controller 25.0
CABL-2 Cable Harness 5.0
Total weight of the ALS 50 system 101.6
Total weight of the ALS 40 and ALS 50 systems 326.0
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with Leica Dual Camera System
Page 1
25-20-01 Sep 30/07
SEE 24-30-50 1
STARTER/GENERATOR 250Amp. FIREWALL CABIN L/H SIDE
GENERATOR POWER LINE
J230 P230
M2A08 A +28VDC
POWER FOR ADS 40
M3A08N B GND
M1A08
M2A08
M23A08N D GND
POWER FOR ALS 50
M22A08 C +28VDC
CB108
CB109
1
1
40
40
PG100
MISSION 2
MISSION 1
2
2
M1B08
P210
P210
12
7
2
13
8 P004 J004
3 MISSION PWR NO.1 ON
M10A22 55 M10B22 CAP AND STOW AT SWITCH PNL L/H
14
1 M9A22N 9 3
2
GB006 4
X1 X2 MISSION NO.1 ON 1
1 11 M11A22 56 M11B22
S250
MISSION PWR NO.1
K210
MISSION PWR RLY NO.1
M21B08

Figure 1
P220
P220
PC-6
12
7
2
Aircraft Wiring Diagram

13
8
3 MISSION PWR NO.2 ON
M20A22 25 M20B22 CAP AND STOW AT SWITCH PNL L/H
14
2 M29A22N 9 3
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2
4
GB006 X1 X2 MISSION NO.2 ON 1
1 11 M21A22 24 M21B22
S251
MISSION PWR NO.2
K220
MISSION PWR RLY NO.2
25-20-01
EXT PWR RLY/P151/2
24-30-50 2 M4A22 A F M4B22 23 M4C22 C D M4E22
E M4D22
GEN RLY/P202/2
24-30-50 1 M5A22 B G TB001-04
TB055-07
PIL-No
SPECIAL MISSION PWR 110.36.06.925
A
OPTIONAL 24-30-55
Sep 30/07
Page 2
6680
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GI 40
OC 50
PILOT SEAT
DIRECTION OF FLIGHT
LEICA
ADS40
DIGITAL
SENSOR
LEICA
ALS50
LIDAR
OI 40
OPERATOR
INTERFACE
(ADS40)
CABIN
LAPTOP OPTIONAL
L/H SIDE GPS
COMPUTER (FOR TEST
P230 CU40 (ALS50) PURPOSE
CE50
A +28VDC CONTROL ONLY)
CONTROL
B GND ELECTRONICS
ELECTRONICS
D GND UNIT
C +28VDC (ALS50)
(ADS40)
GPS
PWR FOR ADS 40 OPERATORS SEAT

6679
PWR FOR ALS 50
System Interconnection
Figure 2
Page 3
25-20-01 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 4
25-20-01 Sep 30/07
:PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LEICA DUAL CAMERA SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This task gives the procedure to remove and install the complete Leica Dual Camera System.
3. Removal
A. Job Set-Up
Open and install a safety clip to the circuit breakers:
MISSION 1 (CB 109) (Engine Bay CB Panel)

MISSION 2 (CB 108) (Engine Bay CB Panel).
B. Procedure
(1) Remove the Components in the Cockpit (Ref. Fig. 401)
(a) Refer to the Leica installation documentation and remove the cables.
(b) Remove the clamp screw (2), then remove the bracket assembly (3) from the
support fitting (1 ).
(c) In the cockpit, remove the OCSO unit from the bracket assembly (3) (Ref. Leica
installation documentation).
(d) Remove the four screws (5), the washers (6) and the nuts (7) and remove the
support fitting (1) and the clamp plate (4).
(2) Remove the Components in the Cabin (Ref. Fig. 402)
(a) Refer to the Leica installation documentation and remove the cables.
(b) Remove:
•
The power supply cable between the electrical connector P230 and the
electrical splitter box on the side of the camera equipment rack (2)
•
The antenna cable between the antenna connector (adjacent to the electrical
connector P230) and the antenna splitter box on the side of the camera
equipment rack (2).
Then install the cover on the rear cabin wall.
(c) Remove the camera (Ref. Leica installation documentation).
Page 401
25-20-01 Sep 30/07
� PILATUS!!EF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Remove the nut (11) and the washer (10) from each of the four attachment points
for the camera mounting-plate assembly ( 1 5) and remove the camera mounting
plate assembly (15).
(e) Remove the display unit from the pedestal unit (Ref. Leica installation
documentation).
(f) Remove the memory pack from the camera equipment rack (2) (Ref. Leica
NOTE: This is to permit the removal of the LCPSU from the top of the camera
equipment rack (2).
(g) Remove the six nuts (13), the washers (14) and the nuts (1), then remove the
LCPSU from the top of the camera equipment rack (2).
(h) Remove the nut (11) and the washer (10 ) from each of the six attachment points on
the laser mounting-plate assembly (16), then remove the laser mounting-plate
assembly (16 ) (complete with the attached laser scanner and the LCPSU).
(i) Remove the laser scanner from the laser mounting-plate assembly (16) (Ref. Leica
U) Remove the four bolts (1 7) and the washers (18), then remove the pedestal unit
from the laser mounting-plate assembly (16).
(k) Remove the screws (19), then remove the Plexiglass cover from the bottom of the
laser mounting-plate assembly (16).
(I) Remove the screws (21) and the washers (20), then remove the cover (24),
complete with the digital camera.
(m) Remove the washer (23) and the nut (22), then remove the digital camera (Ref.
Leica installation documentation) from the cover (24).
(n) Install the cover (24) with the screws (21) and the washers (20).
(o) Remove the forward facing seat from next to the camera equipment rack (2).
(p) Remove the nut (11) and the washer (10) from each of the four attachment points
and remove the base box assembly (5) complete with the camera equipment rack
(2).
(q) At the base box assembly (5) and camera equipment rack (2), remove:
1 At the FWD inboard and the AFT outboard corners:
• The nuts (7)
• The washers (6)

• The bolts (1)
• The two clamp fittings (12)
• If installed, the shims (4).
Page 402
25-20-01 Sep 30/07
'ePILATUS 5"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 At the FWD outboard and the AFT inboard corners:
•
The nuts (7)
• The washers (6)
•
The bolts (1)
•
The two clamp fittings (3)
•
If installed, the shims (4).
Then remove the camera equipment rack (2) from the base box assembly (5).
(r) Install the memory pack in the camera equipment rack (2) (Ref. Leica installation
documentation).
(s) Remove the components from the camera equipment rack (2) (Ref. Leica
(t) Remove the six seat-rail fitting assemblies (8) and the eight seat-rail fittings (9) from
the seat rails.
C. Job Close-Up
(1) Remove the safety clips and close the circuit breakers:

(2) Remove all tools and materials. Make sure the work areas are clean.
4. Installation
B. Job Set-Up
Open and install a safety clip to the circuit breakers:

C. Procedure
(1) Install the Components in the Cabin (Ref. Fig. 402)
(a) Install the components in the camera equipment rack (2) (Ref. Leica installation
documentation).
(b) Put the camera equipment rack (2) in position on the base box assembly (5).
(c) Attach the camera equipment rack (2) to the base box assembly (5) with:
Page 403
25-20-01 Sep 30/07
�PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
At the FWD inboard and the AFT outboard corners:
•
•
The bolts (1)
•
The washers (6)
•
The nuts (7).
2 At the FWD outboard and the AFT inboard corners:
•
•
The bolts (1)
•
The washers (6)
• The nuts (7).
If necessary, use the shims (4) to make sure there is no tension between the
clamp fittings (3) and (12) and the base box assembly (5).
(d) Remove the memory pack from the camera equipment rack (2) (Ref. Leica
NOTE: This is to permit the installation of the equipment on top of the camera
equipment rack (2).
(e) Put two seat-rail fitting assemblies (8) in position on the right seat rails. Make sure
the spring loaded locking-pin is at the rear when installed.
(f) Put the base box assembly (5), complete with the camera equipment rack (2), in
position on the two seat-rail fitting assemblies (8).
(g) Put two seat-rail fittings (9) in position on the right seat rails in front of the base box
assembly (5).
(h) Lift the base box assembly (5) until the two seat-rail fittings (9) are aligned with the
attachment holes in the base box assembly (5). Lower the base box assembly (5)
and install a washer (10) and a nut (11) on each of the four attachment points.
(i) Install a forward facing seat next to the camera equipment rack (2).
U) Install two seat-rail fittings (9) on the left outboard seat rail.
(k) Install one seat-rail fitting (9) and three seat-rail fitting assemblies (8) on the left
inboard seat rail. Make sure the seat-rail fitting (9) is to the front of the rail. Make
sure the spring loaded locking-pins (of the three seat-rail fitting assemblies (8)) are
at the front when installed.
(I) Install one seat-rail fitting (9), then one seat-rail fitting assembly (8) and then the two
remaining seat-rail fittings (9) on the right inboard seat rail. Make sure the single
seat-rail fitting (9) is to the front of the rail. Make sure the spring loaded locking-pin
(of the seat-rail fitting assembly (8)) is at the front when installed.
EFFECTIVITV: Aircraft with Leica Dual Camera System
Page 404
25-20-01 Sep 30/07
"ePILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(m) Temporarily install the laser mounting-plate assembly (16). Move the seat-rail fitting
assemblies (8) and the seat-rail fittings (9) until:
•
They are aligned with the attachment holes in the laser mounting-plate
assembly (16)
•
The spring loaded locking-pins (of the seat-rail fitting assemblies (8)) are
locked in the correct hole in the seat rail.
(n) Temporarily install the camera mounting-plate assembly (15). Move the seat-rail
fitting assemblies (8) and the seat-rail fittings (9) until:
•
They are aligned with the attachment holes in the camera mounting-plate
assembly (16)
•
The spring loaded locking-pins (of the seat-rail fitting assemblies (8)) are
locked in the correct hole in the seat rail.
(o) Remove the laser mounting-plate assembly (16) and the camera mounting-plate
assembly (15).
(p) Install the laser scanner on the laser mounting-plate assembly (15) (Ref. Leica
(q) Remove the screws (21) and the washers (2 0) then remove the cover
, (24).
(r) Install the digital camera to the cover (24) with the washer (23) and the nut (22)
(Ref. Leica installation documentation).
(s) Install the cover (24), complete with the digital camera, with the screws (21) and the
washers (20).
(t) Install the Plexiglass cover (Ref. Leica installation documentation) to the bottom of
the laser mounting-plate assembly (16) with the screws (19).
(u) Put the laser mounting-plate assembly (16) (complete with the attached laser
scanner and the separate Laser Control and Power Supply Unit (LCPSU)) in
position in the aircraft on the seat-rail fitting assemblies (8) and the seat-rail fittings
(9).
(v) Install a washer (10) and a nut (11) on each of the six attachment points.
(w) Put the LCPSU on top of the camera equipment rack (2) and install the six bolts (1) ,
the washers (14) and the nuts (13).
(x) Install the memory pack in the camera equipment rack (2) (Ref. Leica installation
documentation).
(y) Put the pedestal unit in position on the laser mounting-plate assembly (16) and
install the four bolts (17) and the washers (18).
(z) Install the display unit on the pedestal unit (Ref. Leica installation documentation).
(aa) Put the camera mounting-plate assembly (15) in position on the seat-rail fitting
assemblies (8) and the seat-rail fittings (9).
(ab) Install a washer (10) and a nut (11) on each of the four attachment points.
Page 405
25-20-01 Sep 30/07
'e PILATUSE!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(ac) Install the camera (Ref. Leica installation documentation).
(ad) Remove the cover from the rear cabin wall and connect:
•
The power supply cable between the electrical connector P230 and the
electrical splitter box on the side of the camera equipment rack (2)
•
The antenna cable between the antenna connector (adjacent to the electrical
connector P230) and the antenna splitter box on the side of the camera
equipment rack (2).
(ae) Refer to the Leica installation documentation and install the remaining cables.
(2) Install the Components in the Cockpit (Ref. Fig. 401)
(a) In the cockpit, put the support fitting (1) and the clamp plate (4) in the correct
position for installation.
(b) Install the four screws (5), the washers (6) and the nuts (7).
(c) Attach the OC50 unit to the bracket assembly (3) (Ref. Leica installation
documentation).
(d) Attach the bracket assembly (3) to the support fitting (1) with the clamp screw (2).
(e) Refer to the Leica installation documentation and install the remaining cables.
D. Job Close-Up

(2) Energize the aircraft electrical system.
(3) Do a test of the dual camera system) (Ref. Leica installation documentation).
(4) De-energize the aircraft electrical system.
Page 406
25-20-01 Sep 30/07
� PILATUS !!!!:?"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
<J>l- J.
4
s-i
Camera Installation in the Cockpit - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
Page 407
25-20-01 Sep 30/07
"5 PILATUSEF"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
oor1
.��
I
lo 5
'
�1--9
I
Camera Installation in the Cabin - Removal/Installation

Page 408
25-20-01 Sep 30/07
'ePILATUSe'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Camera Installation in the Cabin - Removal/Installation

Page 409
25-20-01 Sep 30/07
"e PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITV: Aircraft with Leica Dual Camera System
Page 410
25-20-01 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MULTIPLE SENSOR CAMERA INSTALLATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
For the description and operation of the Multiple Sensor Camera system, refer to the manufacturer’s
handbook.
2. System Data
Figures 1 and 2 show the aircraft wiring diagram and the system schematic for the Multiple Sensor
Camera system.
The table below shows the system summary of all units for the Multiple Sensor Camera system for
removal and installation purposes:
The Multiple Sensor Camera system includes:
Unit Qty Weight

in kg
119.80.06.065 ADS40 Mounting Plate 1 6.2

MX-15-100-000-000 Camera Lift 1 59.4
PC6W-101-000-000 IR Camera Support 1 24.4
119.80.06.096 IR Camera Plate 1 4.9
119.80.06.094 Lower Rack Equipped 1 56.9
119.80.06.094 Upper Rack Equipped 1 76.5
119.80.06.097 Basebox Assy 1 9.9
V14 MSII Gyro Stabilized HD Multi-Sensor 1 30.6
incl. Footpedal 1 1.0
incl. Control Laptop 1 2.3
Variocam 2 Variocam 2 Modul W IR1.0_50 LW 5 1.3
QDD-1 Quick Disconnect Device 1 1.5
PC6W-100-002-002 Cineflex Adapter 1 1.0
0308106 REV. 2 Laser Range Finder 1 1.1
030805 REV. 3 Viewer Monitor 22 in. 2 6.0
030804 REV. 3 Cockpit Monitor 8 in. 1 1.5
030804 REV. 3 Cockpit Monitor 8 in. 1 1.5
119.80.06.095 Cockpit Monitor Mounting Structure 1 0.5
112.50.06.325 Operator Seat 1 5.2
903.83.71.112 Crash Axe 1 1.1
119.80.06.104 Case 1 0.6
119.60.06.041 Fire Extinguisher 1 2.3
Electrical Cables - 10.3
Total weight of the system 315.7
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with Multiple Sensor Camera

Installation
Page 1
25-20-03 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SENSOR CAMERA SYSTEM
SENSOR CAMERA SYSTEM

POWER FOR MULTIPLE
POWER FOR MULTIPLE
Kundert Daniel
Zerfass Dieter
6697
Aircraft Wiring Diagram

Figure 1

Installation
Page 2
25-20-03 Jun 30/09
Pilot Workstation
GPS RS232
041 PC-3
040
04 0
10 5
04 1
110
NM 01 060
LRF R S2 32
050 007
12 V 103
NAV MON VG A-PC 1
NM03 010 HD-SDI In
Installation
068
VTR 067
RS 42 2
U 150
161
GPS Emp f. 16 1
061 GPS RS 23 2
NM02 060 012
106 12V olt Panel
007
GPS Antenne
12 V 103 007
28 V
GIMBAL RS232 120
VGA-PC 2 114
011 HD -SDI
IR -Video 065
066
Gimbal PANEL 012 VG A IR ˇ Kameras 1394 001-005
012
LIFT -Platform 068 HD ˇ SDI Ou t
051 LA N
10 0 PC 1
00 1 006 007
IR -1 U
01 3 151
VG A
Foot Control 011 IR-Video
065

00 2 HD-SDI
LRF GIMBAL RS23 2 066
LAN 114
052 GPS-RS232
IR -2 GIMBAL PC 2 061
050 051 05 2 LSR RS23 2
006
Figure 2
to VTR RS42 2
Zy XEL GS-105A 5-Port US B Footswitch 067
PC-6
10 2 013
00 3 U
15 2
IR -3 LIF T 100-106 12 V
System Schematic
12 V 3x CONV / 12V Dist.
140 007 28 V 12 1
10 1
12 2
00 4 16 0
12 3
IR -4 Power Distributor
POWER
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
111
00 5
Su percap 28 V 28V
IR -5
140 12 0
25-20-03
ALL RIGHTS RESERVEDNO REPRODUCTION OR UNAUTHORISED USE IN PART OR WHOLE SHALL
BE MADE OF THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT. ZNr.308KA-WLC-JOP-5 Verkabelung WLC - PC 6 A4
communication
JOP RE V 5 18.03.08
Page 3
Jun 30/09
6698
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

Installation
Page 4
25-20-03 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MULTIPLE SENSOR CAMERA INSTALLATION - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This task gives the procedure to remove and install the main components of the Multiple Sensor
Camera system.
- Warning Signs ‘DO NOT ENERGIZE THE AIRCRAFT ELECTRICAL

SYSTEM’
3. Removal
A. Job Set-Up
(1) Open the fuselage trap doors.
(2) Energize the aircraft electrical system (Ref. 24-00-00, Page Block 201).
(3) Extend the camera lift to move the gyro-stabilized HD multi-sensor to the fully down
position.
(5) At the EPU receptacle and the BATTERY MASTER switch, put the warning signs ‘DO
NOT ENERGIZE THE AIRCRAFT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM’ in position.
B. Procedure
(1) Remove the Components in the Cockpit (Ref. Fig. 401)
(a) Refer to the manufacturer’s installation documentation and disconnect the electrical
cables from the cockpit monitor.
(b) Remove the clamp screw (1), then remove the monitor (2) complete with the screen
support from the support fitting (3).
(c) Cut and remove the lockwire from the four bolts (4) and (8).
(d) Remove the four bolts (4) and (8) and the washers (5) and (7) and remove the
support fitting (3).
(e) Remove the distance block (6) from the cockpit shelf.
(f) Record the route and clipping positions of the electrical cable between the cockpit
monitor and the cabin.
(g) Remove the cable ties and the electrical cable between the cockpit monitor and the
cabin.

Installation Page 401
25-20-03 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Remove the Components in the Cabin (Ref. Fig. 402)
(a) Remove the operator’s seat (12).
(b) Disconnect and remove the foot pedal from the floor (attached with velcro).
(c) Remove the fire extinguisher and bracket (40) from the cabin door frame.
(d) Remove the crash axe (26) from the rear cover panel of the camera lift.
(e) Remove the case from the stowage on the top cover panel of the camera lift.
(f) Remove the IR-Camera Support:
(i) Refer to the manufacturer’s installation documentation and disconnect and

remove the electrical cables between the viewer monitors and the KFP100
rack.
(ii) Remove the cover (37) from the cover (28).
(iii) Remove the viewer monitor(s), as required, to permit removal of the pedestal
unit (27).
(iv) Release the four quick-release fasteners and remove the cover (28) from the
IR-camera framework.
(v) Remove the nuts (35), the washers (36), the bolts (39) and the washers (38)
and remove the pedestal unit (27).
(vi) Refer to the manufacturer’s installation documentation and disconnect and

remove the electrical cables between the IR cameras, the laser range finder
and the KFP100 rack.
(vii) Refer to the manufacturer’s installation documentation and disconnect the

electrical connectors from the five IR-cameras (34).
(viii) Record the positions of the five IR-cameras (34) for the installation
procedure.
(ix) Cut and remove the lockwire from the bolts (32).
(x) Remove the bolts (32) and washers (33) and remove the two forward IR-
cameras (34).
(xi) Remove the bolts (32) and washers (33) and remove the three aft IR-
cameras (34).
(xii) Remove the nuts (30) and washers (31) from the seat-rail fittings (14).
(xiii) Release the seat-rail fittings (13) and remove the IR-camera plate and
framework assembly (29).
(xiv) Record the positions of the six seat-rail fittings (13) and (14) for the
installation procedure.
(xv) Remove the six seat-rail fittings (13) and (14) from the seat rails.

25-20-03 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(g) Remove the Camera Lift:
(i) Remove the front and side cover panels from the camera lift (15). Do not
remove the rear panel.
(ii) Record the routing and clipping of the electrical cables inside the camera lift
(15). If necessary take photographs. You must route and clip the cables
correctly during installation to permit full and free movement of the gyro-
stabilized HD multi-sensor (23).
(iii) Refer to the manufacturer’s installation documentation and disconnect the

electrical cables to the gyro-stabilized HD multi-sensor (23).
(iv) Give support to the gyro-stabilized HD multi-sensor (23). Remove the locking
pin to disconnect the bottom half of the QDD (24) from the top half (25).
(v) Remove the gyro-stabilized HD multi-sensor (23).
(vi) Energize the aircraft electrical system (Ref. 24-00-00, Page Block 201).
(vii) Retract the camera lift to move the lift to the fully up position.
(viii) De-energize the aircraft electrical system (Ref. 24-00-00, Page Block 201).
(ix) Refer to the manufacturer’s installation documentation and disconnect and

remove the electrical cables to the camera lift and the camera lift control-
panel.
(x) Remove the camera lift control-panel from the rear cover panel.
(xi) Remove the rear cover panel.
(xii) Remove the nuts (20), washers (19), bolts (16) and washers (17).
(xiii) Remove the camera lift (15). To do this, tilt the framework backwards to a
horizontal position and remove.
(xiv) Remove the nuts (21) and washers (22) from the seat-rail fittings (14)
(xv) Release the seat-rail fittings (13) and remove the camera mounting-plate
assembly (18).
(xvi) Record the positions of the four seat-rail fittings (13) and (14) for the
(xvii) Remove the four seat-rail fittings (13) and (14) from the seat rails.
(h) Remove the Upper and Lower KFP100 Racks:
(i) Remove the bolts (2) and washers (3).
(ii) Remove the upper KFP100 rack assy (1) from the lower KFP100 rack assy
(4).
(iii) Remove the nuts (9), washers (8), bolts (5) and washers (6).

25-20-03 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(iv) Remove the lower KFP100 rack assy (4).
(v) Remove the nuts (10) and washers (11) from the seat-rail fittings (14).
(vi) Release the seat-rail fittings (13) and remove the base box assembly (7).
(vii) Record the positions of the four seat-rail fittings (13) and (14) for the
(viii) Remove the four seat-rail fittings (13) and (14) from the seat rails.
C. Job Close-Up
(1) Close the fuselage trap doors.
(2) Remove the warning signs.

25-20-03 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Installation
- Warning Signs ‘DO NOT ENERGIZE THE AIRCRAFT ELECTRICAL

SYSTEM’
P02-007 Lockwire
P09-005 or Cable Ties As Required
P09-008 or
P09-014
C. Job Set-Up
(2) At the EPU receptacle and the BATTERY MASTER switch, put the warning signs ‘DO
NOT ENERGIZE THE AIRCRAFT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM’ in position.
D. Procedure
(1) Install the Components in the Cabin (Ref. Fig. 402)
(a) Install the Lower and Upper KFP100 Rack Assemblies:
(i) Install the four seat-rail fittings (13) and (14) in the seat rails at the positions
recorded in the removal procedure.
(ii) Put the base box assembly (7) in the installed position.
(iii) Lock the seat-rail fittings (13).
(iv) Install the washers (11) and nuts (10) on the seat-rail fittings (14).
(v) Put the lower KFP100 rack assy (4) in the installed position.
(vi) Install the bolts (5), washers (6), washers (8) and nuts (9).
(vii) Put the upper KFP100 rack assy (1) on the lower KFP100 rack assy (4).
(viii) Install the bolts (2) and washers (3).

25-20-03 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Install the Camera Lift:
(i) Before you install the camera lift:
• Install the six seat-rail fittings (13) and (14) for the IR-camera plate and
framework assembly (29) in the seat rails at the positions recorded in
the removal procedure.
• Install the four seat-rail fittings (13) and (14) for the mounting-plate as-
sembly (18) in the seat rails at the positions recorded in the removal pro-
cedure.
• Remove the cover panels (if installed) from the camera lift (15).
(ii) Put the mounting-plate assembly (18) in the installed position.
(iii) Lock the seat-rail fittings (13).
(iv) Install the washers (22) and nuts (21) on the seat-rail fittings (14).
CAUTION: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU INSTALL THE CAMERA LIFT. DO NOT

CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE CABIN VENTILATION DUCT.
(v) Install the camera lift (15). To do this, position it horizontally above the
mounting-plate assembly and then tilt it to the vertical position.
(vi) Install the bolts (16), washers (17), washers (19) and nuts (20).
(vii) Install the rear cover panel and the camera lift control-panel.
(viii) Refer to the manufacturer’s installation documentation and install and

connect the electrical cables to the camera lift (15) and the camera lift control-
panel.
(ix) Open the fuselage trap doors.
(x) Energize the aircraft electrical system (Ref. 24-00-00, Page Block 201).
(xi) Extend the camera lift to move the lift to the fully down position.
(xii) De-energize the aircraft electrical system (Ref. 24-00-00, Page Block 201).
(xiii) Hold the gyro-stabilized HD multi-sensor (23) in the installed position.
(xiv) Connect the bottom half of the QDD (24) to the top half (25) and install the
locking pin.
(xv) Refer to the manufacturer’s installation documentation and install and

connect the electrical cables to the gyro-stabilized HD multi-sensor (23).
(xvi) Route and clip the electrical cables inside the camera lift (15). Refer to the
data you recorded during the removal. The cables must be routed correctly to
permit full and free movement of the gyro-stabilized HD multi-sensor (23).
(xvii) Energize the aircraft electrical system (Ref. 24-00-00, Page Block 201).

25-20-03 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(xviii) Retract the camera lift to move the gyro-stabilized HD multi-sensor (23) to the
fully up position. Make sure the electrical cables permit full and free
movement of the gyro-stabilized HD multi-sensor (23) and do not chafe or
become trapped.
(xix) De-energize the aircraft electrical system (Ref. 24-00-00, Page Block 201).
(xx) Install the cover panels on the camera lift (15).
(c) Install the IR-Camera Support:
(i) Put the IR-camera plate and framework assembly (29) in the installed
position.
(ii) Lock the seat-rail fittings (13).
(iii) Install the washers (31) and nuts (30) on the seat-rail fittings (14).
(iv) Install the three aft IR cameras (34) with the bolts (32) and washers (33).
Make sure they are in the correct positions recorded in the removal
procedure.
(v) Safety the bolts (32) with lockwire (Material No. P02-007).
(vi) Install the two forward IR cameras (34) with the bolts (32) and washers (33).
Make sure they are in the correct positions recorded in the removal
procedure.
(vii) Safety the bolts (32) with lockwire (Material No. P02-007).
(viii) Put the pedestal unit (27) in the installed position.
(ix) Install the the bolts (39) and the washers (38), washers (36) and the nuts
(35).
(x) Refer to the manufacturer’s installation documentation and install and

connect the electrical cables between the IR-cameras, the laser range finder
and the KFP100 rack.
(xi) Install the cover (28) on the IR-camera framework.
(xii) Install the viewer monitor(s), as necessary.
(xiii) Refer to the manufacturer’s installation documentation and install and

connect the electrical cables between the viewer monitors and the KFP100
rack.
(xiv) Install the cover (37) on the cover (28).
(d) Install the case in the stowage on the top cover panel of the camera lift and secure it
with the strap.
(e) Install the crash axe (26) on the rear cover panel of the camera lift.
(f) Install the fire extinguisher and bracket (40) on the cabin door frame.

25-20-03 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(g) Install the operator’s seat (12) next to the KFP100 racks.
(h) Install the foot pedal on the floor (attached with velcro) and connect the electrical
connector.
(2) Install the Components in the Cockpit (Ref. Fig 401)
(a) Refer to the data recorded in the removal procedure and install the electrical cable
between the cabin and cockpit (use cable ties Material No. P09-005, P09-008 or
P09-014 as required):
• Route the cable along the right side of the aircraft and attach to the outboard
seat rail with cable ties.
• Route the cable from the right side of the cockpit, under the cockpit shelf, to
the left side. Attach the cable to the structure or existing wire bundles with
cable ties.
• At the left and right sides of the cockpit, attach the cable to the ventilation
ducts with cable ties.
• Make sure the cable is clear of all flight and engine controls.
(b) Put the distance block (6) in the correct position for installation on the shelf.
(c) Install support fitting (3) with the four washers (5) and (7) and bolts (4) and (8).
(d) Safety the bolts (4) and (8) with lockwire (Material No. P02-007).
(e) Install the monitor (2) with the clamp screw (1). Make sure you use the bottom
attachment hole in the screen support so that the monitor (2) is at the highest
possible position.
(f) Refer to the manufacturer’s installation documentation and connect the electrical
cable to the monitor (2).
(g) Make sure the engine and flight controls in the cockpit have full and free movement.
E. Job Close-Up
(3) Do a test of the multiple sensor camera system (refer to the manufacturer’s installation
documentation).
(5) Close the fuselage trap doors.

25-20-03 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
1
3
4
6699
Cockpit Components - Removal/Installation

Figure 401

25-20-03 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
1
2
3
A
4
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
13
14
14
6700
Cabin Components - Removal/Installation


25-20-03 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
15
B
C
16
17
25 24
26 C 23
18
19
20
13
21
22 13
14
14
6701


25-20-03 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E E
D
28
D
40
27
29
39
38
36
30
35 31
37 34
32
33
14
13
14
13 14
14
6702


25-20-03 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PASSENGER SEATS WITH TORSO RESTRAINT SYSTEM - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedures to remove and install the passenger seats with torso restraint
system. It also gives the procedures to stow the seats in the aircraft.
P02-031 Absorbent Paper -

P04-028 Grease Aeroshell 33
3. Procedures
A. Removal
(1) Remove the Seats from the Cabin (Ref. Fig. 401)
NOTE: If you remove the seats for stowage in the aircraft, remove only the 1st and 2nd
row seats. The 3rd row seats stay installed in the cabin.
(a) To help with the installation of the seats, make a mark on the seat rails to show the
correct position of the seat.
(b) Lift the locking pin (6) and turn it through 90° to lock it in the released position.
(c) Slide the seat to a break in the seat rails.
(d) Disengage the seat from the seat rails and remove it from the aircraft.
(2) If Necessary, Stow the Seats (Ref. Figs. 401 and 402)
(a) Remove the backrests from the 1st and 2nd row seats (Ref. Fig. 401):
(i) Remove the safety clips (4).
(ii) Remove the hinge pins and bushings (3) to disengage the front connection
(5).
(iii) Rotate the backrest release handle (2) to disengage the rear connection (1)
and remove the backrest.
(b) Stow the seats (Ref. Fig. 402):
(i) Put the backrests from the 1st and 2nd row seats, with the metal parts up, on
the 3rd row seats and secure them with the seat harnesses. Make sure the
metal parts can not damage the fabric of the seats.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with Passenger Seats P/Ns

112.50.06.839/840 or 112.50.06.915/916
Page 401
25-21-01 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(ii) Put the RH seat bases upside down on top of the LH seat bases.
(iii) Secure the seat bases together using the belt P/N 112.50.06.931.
(iv) Put the seat bases in the rear-fuselage stowage-compartment.
NOTE: The placard installed on the inside of the stowage compartment

door gives data for the storage of seats in the stowage
compartment.
(v) Engage the LH seat bases on the seat rails and slide to the stowed position.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THE SEATS ARE CORRECTLY LOCKED ONTO THE
SEAT STOWAGE RAILS. THE FLIGHT CONTROLS CAN JAM IF THE
SEATS COME OFF THE SEAT STOWAGE RAILS.
(vi) Turn the locking pins through 90° to lock the seat bases in position.
B. Installation
(1) If Necessary, Remove the Seats from Stowage (Ref. Fig. 402)
(a) Lift the locking pins and turn them through 90° to lock them in the released position.
(b) Slide the seat bases to a break in the seat rails, disengage and remove from the
rear-fuselage stowage-compartment.
(c) Remove the belt P/N 112.50.06.931 and remove the RH seat bases.
(d) Release the seat harnesses on the 3rd row seats and remove the backrests for the
1st and 2nd row seats.
(2) Install the Seats in the Cabin (Ref. Fig. 401)
(a) If necessary, install the backrest on the seat:
(i) Rotate the backrest release handle (2) and engage the rear connection (1) of
the backrest.
(ii) Install the hinge pins and bushings (3) to engage the front connection (5).
(iii) Install the safety clips (4).
(b) Lubricate the moving parts of the seat with grease (Material No. P04-028).
(c) Remove unwanted grease with absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031).
(d) Make sure the locking pin (6) is in the released position (lifted and turned through
90°).
(e) Engage the seat on the seat rails.
(f) Slide the seat to the correct position (marked on the seat rails during the removal
procedure.). If necessary, refer to Fig. 401, Sht 2 for the correct seat positions.

112.50.06.839/840 or 112.50.06.915/916
Page 402
25-21-01 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(g) Turn the locking pin (6) through 90° to lock the seat in position.
(3) Job Close-Up
(a) Remove all tools and materials. Make sure the work areas are clean.

112.50.06.839/840 or 112.50.06.915/916
Page 403
25-21-01 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
B
6
5 1
4
B
6724
Passenger Seats - Removal/Installation


112.50.06.839/840 or 112.50.06.915/916
Page 404
25-21-01 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LOCKING PIN
POSITIONS
END OF
SEAT RAIL
696 mm 693 mm
65 mm
SB 2097
Passenger Seats - Removal/Installation


112.50.06.839/840 or 112.50.06.915/916
Page 405
25-21-01 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B
6725
Passenger Seats - Stow

Figure 402

112.50.06.839/840 or 112.50.06.915/916
Page 406
25-21-01 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PILOT AND CO-PILOT SEAT HARNESSES - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This topic gives the procedure for the removal and installation of the pilot and co-pilot seat harnesses.
A. Operator Supplied Parts
Part No. Description Qty. Remarks

959.11.31.111 Lap Strap Assy, Blue A/R For harness replacement
only
CAUTION: YOU MUST OBEY THE AIRCRAFT EFFECTIVITY OF THIS PROCEDURE. THIS
PROCEDURE IS ONLY APPLICABLE TO AIRCRAFT WITH THE SEATS INSTALLED AS
FOLLOWS:
• P/N 112.50.06.778/800
• P/N 112.50.06.779/801.
FOR AIRCRAFT WITH SEAT P/N NOT LISTED ABOVE, CONTACT PILATUS AIRCRAFT
LTD FOR MORE INFORMATION.
A. Removal
CAUTION: WHEN YOU REPLACE THE LAP STRAP ASSY (1), YOU MUST DISCARD ALL
OF THE PARTS OF THE OLD LAP STRAP ASSY (1).
WHEN YOU RETAIN THE LAP STRAP ASSY (1) TO INSTALL IT AGAIN, AFTER
REMOVAL:
• PUSH THE STRAP ENDS THROUGH THE END BUCKLES (2) (AND END
FITTINGS (2) FOR PILOT HORIZONTAL STRAPS ONLY)
• MAKE A LOOP AND PULL THE STRAP ENDS BACK THROUGH THE END
BUCKLES (2).
THIS IS TO KEEP THE PARTS OF THE LAP STRAP ASSY (1) TOGETHER. THE
LAP STRAP ASSY (1) HAS A TIME LIMITED MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE. IT IS
IMPORTANT THAT THE PARTS OF THE SAME LAP STRAP ASSY (1) ARE KEPT
TOGETHER. YOU CANNOT TAKE ONE PART OF A LAP STRAP ASSY (1) AND
INSTALL IT ON ANOTHER LAP STRAP ASSY (1).
(1) Pilot Seat Harness (Ref. Fig. 401)
(a) Remove the nut (5), the washer (4) and the bolt (3) to disconnect the horizontal
straps of the lap strap assy (1) from each aft side of the seat.
(b) Retain the nut (5), the washer (4) and the bolt (3) for installation if they are
serviceable.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with seat P/N:

112.50.06.778/800 or
112.50.06.779/801 Page 401
25-22-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Pull the three strap ends through the end buckles (2) to release each strap from the
end buckle (2).
(d) Pull the three strap ends through the slots in the seat until you can release them
from the seat and the front spacer (6).
(e) Remove all the sections and parts of the lap strap assy (1) from the seat.
(2) Co-pilot Seat Harness (Ref. Fig. 402)
(a) Pull the three strap ends through the end buckles (2) to release them from the
welded bars and the distance piece (3) of the seat.
(b) Remove all the sections and parts of the lap strap assy (1) from the seat.
B. Installation
(1) Pilot Seat Harness (Ref. Fig. 401)
CAUTION: YOU MUST NOT CUT OR DAMAGE THE STRAP WHEN YOU REMOVE
THE STITCHES AND OPEN THE HEM AT THE EACH END OF THE LAP
STRAP ASSY (1). NO DAMAGE IS ALLOWED TO THE STRAPS.
(a) When you install a lap strap assy (1) for the first time only:
• You must cut open and remove the stitches to open the hem at each of the
three strap ends as shown in Fig. 401.
NOTE: The hem is opened to let the strap ends slide through the buckles (2). No
more stitches are applied to the lap strap assy (1) and the hems stay open
at the end of the installation procedure.
(b) Pull the vertical strap end through the end buckle (2), around the end fitting and
back through the end buckle (2) again to release the vertical strap from:
• The end fitting (for installation of new lap strap assy (1) only)
• The end buckle (2).
(c) Discard the end fitting (for installation of new lap strap assy (1) only) and retain the
end buckle (2).
NOTE: The new lap strap assy (1) is supplied with an end fitting at each strap
end. This is not required for the installation at the central front position of
the seat.
(d) Push the vertical strap of the lap strap assy (1) through the central slot at the front of
the seat.
(e) Pull the vertical strap through the retained end buckle (2) and make a loop around
the front spacer (6).
(f) Pull the vertical strap end back through the end buckle (2) and make sure that a
minimum of 100 mm (3.937 in.) of strap is pulled through the end buckle (2).

112.50.06.778/800 or
112.50.06.779/801 Page 402
25-22-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(g) Put the end fittings of the horizontal straps of the lap strap assy (1) into position at
each aft side of the seat and install the bolt (3), washer (4) and nut (5).
(h) Pull the two horizontal strap ends through the end buckles (2), around the end
fittings and back through the end buckles (2) again to release the straps from:
• The installed end fittings

• The end buckles (2).
(i) Retain the end buckles (2).
(j) Push the horizontal strap ends through the seat slots, the retained end buckles (2)
and make a loop around each end fitting of the lap strap assy (1).
(k) Pull the horizontal strap ends back through the end buckles (2) and make sure that
a minimum of 100 mm (3.937 in.) of strap is pulled through each end buckle (2).
(2) Co-pilot Seat Harness (Ref. Fig. 402)
CAUTION: YOU MUST NOT CUT OR DAMAGE THE STRAP WHEN YOU REMOVE
THE STITCHES AND OPEN THE HEM AT EACH THE END OF THE LAP
STRAP ASSY (1). NO DAMAGE IS ALLOWED TO THE LAP STRAP ASSY
(1).
(a) When you install a lap strap assy (1) for the first time only:
• You must cut open and remove the stitches to open the hem at the end of the
horizontal straps of the lap strap assy (1) as shown in Fig. 402.
NOTE: The hem is opened to let the straps slide through the buckles (2). No more
stitches are applied to the lap strap assy (1) and the hem stays open at
the end of the installation procedure.
(b) Pull the three strap ends through the end buckles (2), around the end fittings and
back through the end buckles (2) again to release the straps from:
• The end fittings (for installation of new lap strap assy (1) only)
• The end buckles (2).
(c) Discard the three end fittings (for installation of new lap strap assy (1) only) and
retain the three end buckles (2).
NOTE: The new lap strap assy (1) is supplied with an end fitting at each strap
end. These three end fittings are not required for the installation at the co-
pilot seat.
(d) Push the vertical strap of the lap strap assy (1) through the central slot at the front of
the seat.
(e) Push the vertical strap end through the retained end buckle (2) and around the
distance piece (3) to make a loop.
(f) Pull the vertical strap end back through the end buckle (2) and make sure that a
minimum of 100 mm (3.937 in.) of strap is pulled through the end buckle (2).

112.50.06.778/800 or
112.50.06.779/801 Page 403
25-22-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(g) Pull the horizontal strap ends through the retained end buckles (2) and around the
welded seat bar to make a loop at each side of the seat.
(h) Pull the horizontal strap ends back through the end buckles (2) and make sure that
a minimum of 100 mm (3.937 in.) of strap is pulled through each end buckle (2).
4. Job Close Up
(1) Make sure that all the straps are not twisted and there is no damage to the straps.
(2) Sit in the seat to fasten and test the lap strap assy (1).
(3) Make any necessary adjustments to the straps and inner buckles until you get a firm and
comfortable fit.

112.50.06.778/800 or
112.50.06.779/801 Page 404
25-22-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B
1
MINIMUM
100 mm
(3.937 in)
D
1 2
C
1
AREA WHERE STITCHES
ARE REMOVED
TYPICAL AND THE HEM IS OPENED
AT STRAP ENDS 4 2
5
D
1
STRAPS NOT SHOWN RH SHOWN

FOR CLARITY 6 LH SIMILAR
NOTE:
THE END FITTING OF THE LAP STRAP ASSY (1) IS REMOVED
6834
1
AND DISCARDED AT THE FRONT CENTRAL POSITION ONLY.
Pilot Seat Harness - Removal / Installation

Figure 401

112.50.06.778/800 or
112.50.06.779/801 Page 405
25-22-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 E
B
3 C
MINIMUM
100 mm
(3.937 in)
1 2
1 1
AREA WHERE STITCHES

ARE REMOVED
TYPICAL
AND THE HEM IS OPENED
AT STRAP ENDS
NOTE:
LH SHOWN
THE END FITTING OF THE LAP STRAP ASSY (1) IS REMOVED
6835
1
AND DISCARDED FOR THE CO-PILOT SEAT INSTALLATION AT EACH STRAP END.
RH SIMILAR
Co-pilot Seat Harness - Removal / Installation

Figure 402

112.50.06.778/800 or
112.50.06.779/801 Page 406
25-22-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CO-PILOT SEAT - SPECIAL FOUNDATION BOLTS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedures to remove and install the special foundation bolts for the co-pilot
seat installation.
A. Expendable Parts
25-21-01, Fig. 01 Bolt, special foundation <1> Qty 4, Ref. Fig. 401, Item 5
NOTE: <1> Old standard of special foundation bolts are no longer procurable but remain
airworthy when they are serviceable. New standard of special foundation bolts have a
larger size head. The four special foundation bolts must have the same size head and
be the same part number at each leg position.
3. Procedure
A. Job Set Up
Get access to the co-pilot seat.
B. Removal (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Pull the toggles (2) upwards to compress the springs (3) and disconnect the locking pins
(4) from the special foundation bolts (5) at each leg of the co-pilot seat (1).
(2) Move the co-pilot seat (1) outboard to disengage each leg from the heads of the special
foundation bolts (5).
(3) Remove the co-pilot seat (1) from the aircraft.
(4) Remove the special foundation bolts (5).
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE FOUR SPECIAL FOUNDATION BOLTS ARE THE SAME
PART NUMBER BEFORE YOU INSTALL THEM. THERE ARE DIFFERENT SIZES
OF SPECIAL FOUNDATION BOLT. DO NOT TRY TO INSTALL THE CO-PILOT
SEAT WITH DIFFERENT SIZE SPECIAL FOUNDATION BOLTS AT EACH LEG
POSITION. DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR.
(1) Do a check of the foundation bolts (5). Discard and replace them if they are unserviceable.
(2) Install the special foundation bolts (5).
(3) Put the co-pilot seat (1) in position.
(4) Move the co-pilot seat (1) inboard to engage it on the heads of the special foundation bolts
(5):
EFFECTIVITY: All
25-23-01
Page 401
Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) Pull the toggles (2) upwards to compress the springs (3) and lift the locking pins (4)
clear of the heads of the special foundation bolts (5).
(b) Continue to move from the co-pilot seat (1) inboard until the locking pins (4) are
over the center of the special foundation bolts (5).
(c) Release the toggles (2) and let the locking pins (4) engage in the heads of the
special foundation bolts (5) at each leg of the co-pilot seat (1).
(5) Make sure that the locking pins (4) are correctly engaged in the special foundation bolts
(5) at each leg of the co-pilot seat (1).
D. Close Up
Remove all the equipment, tools and materials from the work area. Make sure that the work area
is clean.
EFFECTIVITY: All
25-23-01
Page 402
Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B
B
B
3
B
4
1 5
5 1
NOTE:
6871
1 THE FOUR SPECIAL FOUNDATION BOLTS MUST BE THE SAME SIZE AND PART NUMBER
Co-Pilot Seat - Special Foundation Bolts - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
25-23-01
Page 403
Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
25-23-01
Page 404
Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT) - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. General
This topic provides the procedures required to do an Operational Test of the NARCO ELT-10 and
ELT-910.
Refer to the manufacturer's maintenance manual for further information on testing of the ELT and
individual components.
2. Operational Test
A. General
NOTE: It is assumed that all circuit breakers are closed and that all electrical circuits are
complete.
B. Procedures
(2) In the cockpit, select:
BATTERY MASTER switch to ON

RADIO MASTER (BAT Radio) switch to ON.
(3) Engage and tune the VHF receiver to 121.5 MHz to monitor the ELT test.
NOTE: It is necessary for the operator to gain permission from Air Traffic Control for a
test transmission to be made, and to secure the services of a nearby aircraft, or
of Air Traffic Control, to monitor transmission if VHF facilities are not available in
transmitting aircraft.
(4) Obtain Air Traffic Control permission to test the ELT.
NOTE: International Air Regulations require that test transmissions are carried out
within the first five minutes of any hour and do not exceed three audio sweeps or
BLEEPS.
(5) On aircraft with remote ELT control panel:
(a) Set the ON/OFF/ARM switch to ON for approximately 1 second and return the
switch to the OFF position.
(b) Check that transmission was clearly heard by the monitoring receiver.
(6) On aircraft without remote ELT control panel:
(a) At the ELT unit in the rear fuselage, set the ELT test switch to ON for approximately
1 second and return the switch to the ARM position.
(b) Check that the transmission was clearly heard by the monitoring receiver.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with Narco ELT-10 or ELT-910 CONFIG 1

Page 501
25-63-00 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) In the front cockpit, select:
BATTERY MASTER switch to OFF

RADIO MASTER (BAT Radio) switch to OFF.
(8) De-energize aircraft electrical system.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with Narco ELT-10 or ELT-910 CONFIG 1

Page 502
25-63-00 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT) - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. General
This topic gives the procedure to do an operational test of the Kannad 406 AF ELT system.
2. Operational Test
A. Procedure
(1) On the ELT unit:
(a) Set the Arm-Off-On switch to Off.
(b) Set the Arm-Off-On switch to Arm and make sure that the ELT unit does a self-test
(approximately 3 seconds) and is serviceable (Ref. Table 501).
(2) In the front cockpit:
(a) On the remote control panel, set the ON-ARMED-RESET TEST switch to RESET
TEST. Make sure that the ELT unit does a self-test (approximately 3 seconds) and is
serviceable (Ref. Table 501).
(b) Set the ON-ARMED-RESET TEST switch to ARMED.
Self-Test Flashes Result
1 long flash System operating correctly.

3 short flashes + 1 short flash Internal battery voltage low.
3 short flashes + 2 short flashes Low transmission power.
3 short flashes + 3 short flashes VCO locking not operating correctly.
3 short flashes + 4 short flashes Aircraft ID number missing.
Self-Test Results
Table 501
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with Kannad 406 AF ELT CONFIG 2

Page 501
25-63-00 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

Page 502
25-63-00 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
These procedures are applicable to the Kannad 406 AF Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) installed
in the rear fuselage. Access to the ELT is through the access door FR2.
The aircraft data that is stored in the programming dongle on the aircraft will automatically download
into the ELT unit when the three-position switch on the ELT is set to ARM for the first time after
installation.
A. Removal
(1) Open the access door FR2.
(2) On the ELT (6), set the ARM-OFF-ON switch (5) to OFF.
(3) Disconnect the electrical connector (3) from the ELT (6).
(4) Disconnect the antenna connector (4) from the ELT (6).
(5) Hold the ELT (6) and pull the hook-and-loop tape strap (2) to release the ELT (6) from the
mounting tray (1).
(6) Remove the ELT (26 from the aircraft.
(7) Put protection (dust caps or bags) on the electrical connectors.
B. Installation
(1) Remove the protection (dust caps or bags) from the electrical connectors.
(2) Put the ELT (6) in the correct position on the mounting tray (1).
CAUTION: WHEN YOU INSTALL THE ELT, MAKE SURE THAT THE HOOK-AND-LOOP
TAPE STRAP (2) IS TIGHT, CORRECTLY FASTENED AND CANNOT BECOME
LOOSE.
(3) Install the ELT (6) to the mounting tray (1) with the hook-and-loop tape strap (2).
(4) Connect the electrical connector (3) to the ELT (6).
(5) Connect the antenna connector (4) to the ELT (6).
(6) Do an Operational Test of the ELT (Ref. 25-63-00, Page Block 501).
(7) On the ELT (6), make sure that the ARM-OFF-ON switch (5) is set to ARM.
(8) Make sure that the work area is clean.
(9) Close the access door FR2.

Page 401
25-63-01 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A 1
4
5
6744
ELT - Removal/Installation
Figure 401

Page 402
25-63-01 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 27 - FLIGHT CONTROLS

Chapter Chapter
Section Section
List of Effective 1 Jun 30/21 27-10-00 (Cont’d) 503 Mar 14/98
Pages 2 Jun 30/21 504 Mar 14/98
3 Jun 30/21 505 Mar 14/98
4 Jun 30/21 506 Mar 14/98
Table of Contents 1 Sep 30/13 27-12-11 401 Jun 14/92

2 Sep 30/13 402 Jun 14/92
3 Sep 30/13 403 Jun 14/92
4 Sep 30/13 404 Jun 14/92
405 Jun 14/92
27-00-00 1 Jun 14/92
2 Jun 14/91 27-14-11 401 Sep 30/07
402 Sep 30/07
201 Jun 30/21 403 Sep 30/07
202 Jun 30/21 404 Sep 30/07
203 Jun 30/21
204 Jun 30/21 501 Sep 30/07
205 Jun 30/21 502 Sep 30/07
206 Jun 30/21
207 Jun 30/21 27-15-00 501 Feb 28/10
208 Jun 30/21 502 Feb 28/10
209 Jun 30/21 503 Feb 28/10
210 Jun 30/21 504 Feb 28/10
211 Jun 30/21
212 Jun 30/21 27-15-11 401 Jul 30/15
213 Jun 30/21 402 Jul 30/15
214 Jun 30/21 403 Jul 30/15
404 Jul 30/15
601 Oct 30/20
602 Oct 30/20 27-15-13 401 Sep 30/07
603 Oct 30/20 402 Sep 30/07
604 Oct 30/20
27-20-00 1 Dec 31/12
27-05-00 401 Jun 30/09 2 Dec 31/12
402 Jun 30/09 3 Dec 31/12
403 Jun 30/09 4 Dec 31/12
404 Jun 30/09 5 Dec 31/12
405 Jun 30/09 6 Dec 31/12
406 Jun 30/09
407 Jun 30/09 501 Jun 30/05
408 Jun 30/09 502 Jun 30/05
503 Jun 30/05
501 Jun 30/09 504 Jun 30/05
502 Jun 30/09 505 Jun 30/05
503 Jun 30/09
504 Jun 30/09 27-22-01 401 May 30/19
402 May 30/19
27-10-00 1 Jun 14/92 403 May 30/19
2 Jun 14/92 404 May 30/19
405 May 30/19
501 Mar 14/98 406 May 30/19
502 Mar 14/98 407 May 30/19
27-LEP
Page 1
Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter Chapter
Section Section
27-22-01 (Cont’d) 408 May 30/19 27-40-00 (Cont’d) 506 Nov 21/18
409 May 30/19 CONFIG 2
410 May 30/19 501 Nov 21/18
502 Nov 21/18
27-22-11 401 Jun 14/92 503 Nov 21/18
402 Jun 14/92 504 Nov 21/18
403 Jun 14/92 505 Nov 21/18
506 Nov 21/18
27-25-00 501 Dec 14/91 507 Nov 21/18
CONFIG 1 502 Dec 14/91 508 Nov 21/18
503 Jun 14/92
504 Dec 14/91 27-45-01 201 Nov 30/03
CONFIG 2 202 Nov 30/03
203 Nov 30/03
CONFIG 2 501 Sep 30/13
502 Sep 30/13 27-45-11 401 Jun 14/92
503 Sep 30/13 CONFIG 1 402 Jun 14/92
504 Sep 30/13
505 Sep 30/13 CONFIG 2/3 401 May 30/19
506 Sep 30/13 402 May 30/19
403 May 30/19
601 Sep 30/13 404 May 30/19
602 Sep 30/13
27-45-12 401 Jun 14/92
27-25-13 401 Mar 30/08 402 Jun 14/92
402 Mar 30/08 403 Jun 14/92
403 Mar 30/08 404 Jun 14/92
404 Mar 30/08 405 Jun 14/92
27-30-00 1 Jun 14/92 27-50-00 1 May 30/19

2 Jun 14/92 2 May 30/19
3 May 30/19
501 Nov 30/03 4 May 30/19
502 Nov 30/03
503 Nov 30/03 CONFIG 1 501 Mar 14/95
504 Nov 30/03 502 Mar 14/95
505 Nov 30/03 503 Mar 14/95
506 Nov 30/03 504 Mar 14/95
505 Mar 14/95
27-31-11 401 Jun 14/92 506 Mar 14/95
402 Jun 14/92 507 Mar 14/95
403 Jun 14/92 508 Mar 14/95
509 Mar 14/95
27-32-00 501 Mar 14/98 510 Mar 14/95
502 Mar 14/98
CONFIG 2 501 Mar 14/95
27-40-00 1 Nov 30/03 502 Mar 14/95
2 Nov 30/03
3 Nov 30/03 27-52-11 401 Jun 14/92
402 Jun 14/92
CONFIG 1 501 Nov 21/18 403 Jun 14/92
502 Nov 21/18 404 Jun 14/92
503 Nov 21/18
504 Nov 21/18 27-52-12 601 Nov 30/08
505 Nov 21/18 602 Nov 30/08
27-LEP
Page 2
Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter
Section
Subject Pages Date
27-52-12 (Cont’d) 603 Nov 30/08
604 Nov 30/08
27-53-11 401 Jun 14/92

402 Jun 14/92
27-LEP
Page 3
Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
27-LEP
Page 4
Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 27 - FLIGHT CONTROLS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
FLIGHT CONTROLS 27-00-00

FLIGHT CONTROL CABLES AND PULLEYS
CONTROL COLUMN 27-05-00

CONTROL-COLUMN BEARING-RINGS
AILERON CONTROLS 27-10-00

AILERON CONTROL CABLES 27-12-11
AILERON / RUDDER INTERLINK CABLES 27-14-11
AILERON BALANCE TABS 27-15-00
AILERON TRIM - CHAINS AND CABLES 27-15-11 Aircraft with
mechanical aileron
trim
Removal / Installation 401
AILERON TRIM ACTUATOR 27-15-13
Removal / Installation 401 All H4 aircraft and
H2 aircraft with
electrical aileron trim
Page 1
27-TOC Sep 30/13
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter
Section
RUDDER CONTROLS 27-20-00

RUDDER
RUDDER TORQUE SHAFT 27-22-01
RUDDER CONTROL CABLES 27-22-11
RUDDER TRIM 27-25-00
Adjustment / Test CONFIG 1 501 Aircraft with elect.
rudder trim
Adjustment / Test CONFIG 2 501 Aircraft with mech.
rudder trim
RUDDER TRIM ACTUATOR 27-25-13
Removal / Installation 401 Aircraft with elect.
rudder trim
ELEVATOR CONTROLS 27-30-00

ELEVATOR CONTROL CABLES 27-31-11
ELEVATOR BALANCE TABS 27-32-00
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER 27-40-00

Adjustment / Test CONFIG 1 501 Aircraft with
electrical system
mechanical system
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM 27-45-01
ACTUATOR
Page 2
27-TOC Sep 30/13
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter
Section
Maintenance Practices CONFIG 2 201 Aircraft with

mechanical system
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER ACTUATOR 27-45-11
Removal / Installation CONFIG 1 401 Aircraft with
electrical trim
mechanical trim
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM CABLES 27-45-12

Removal / Installation 401 H2 aircraft with
mech. stabilizer trim
FLAPS 27-50-00
ELECTRICALLY OPERATED FLAPS
electrical flaps
MECHANICALLY OPERATED FLAPS
mechanical flaps
MECHANICAL FLAP ACTUATOR 27-52-11
Removal / Installation 401 Aircraft with mech.
operated flaps
FLAP OPERATING HANDLE 27-52-12
Inspection / Check 601 Aircraft with
mechanical flap
system
ELECTRICAL FLAP ACTUATOR 27-53-11
Removal / Installation 401 Aircraft with elect.
operated flaps
Page 3
27-TOC Sep 30/13
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 4
27-TOC Sep 30/13
"e PILATUS &"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLIGHT CONTROLS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The aircraft is equipped with a normal flight control system for the ailerons, elevators and rudder.
Control rods and cables are used to operate the controls.
Balance tabs are installed on the aileron and elevator controls to reduce the loads required to operate
the controls during flight.
Trim tabs, which are adjustable in flight, are installed on the aileron and rudder control systems. The
trim control for the pitch axis is by a variable incidence horizontal stabilizer.
A fixed trim tab is installed on the elevator which can be adjusted on the ground.
Flaps are installed on each wing.
I Newer aircraft have electrical operation of the trim tabs, horizontal stabilizer and flaps. Early aircraft
have mechanical operation and can be modified to electrical operation of these controls.
EFFECTIVITV: All
Page 1
27-00-00 Jun 14/92
'e PILATUS !i:iF'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RUDDER
TRIM TAB
VARIABLE INCIDENCE HORIZONTAL

STABILIZER
Flight Controls
Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page2
27-00-00 Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedures to balance the ailerons, elevators and rudder.
The ailerons, elevators and rudder must be balanced after repairs or when they are painted. This also
includes when the balance tab or trim tab of the flight control surface are repaired or painted.
The flight control surfaces are balanced on a test bench. The ailerons and elevators can be balanced
on the aircraft with the control system disconnected when the test bench is not available.
The rudder must be balanced on a test bench.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE BEARINGS OF THE CONTROL SURFACE CAN MOVE
FREELY IF THE BALANCE PROCEDURE IS DONE ON THE AIRCRAFT. THE FLIGHT
CONTROL SURFACE CAN BE BALANCED INCORRECTLY IF THE BEARINGS DO
NOT MOVE FREELY.
The elevators are balanced individually on a test bench. They are balanced together as an assembly
joined by the elevator torque-tube assembly when balanced on aircraft.
Use the formula that follows to calculate the position of the center of gravity (C of G) of the flight control
surface (Ref. Fig. 201, Fig. 203 and Fig. 206):
C of G position ‘X’ = (Upward force ‘P’ to keep control level) x (Distance of upward force from the pivot)
Weight ‘G’ of flight control surface
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
27-00-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Aileron Balance
A. Job Set Up Information
(1) Tools and Equipment
110.85.06.129 Distance connection (Qty 1) For use with Test Bench

110.85.06.128 Balancing connection (Qty 2) For use with Test Bench
- Balancing test bench If available
- Scales or spring balance 0 to 1,5 kg
- Scales or spring balance 0 to 20 kg
(2) Consumable Materials (Ref. 20-31-00)

P08-059 Adhesive, epoxy
- Tape, adhesive Local supply
B. Procedure (Ref. Fig. 201 and 202)
MANUFACTURER'S HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS AND ALL THE
WARNING: IF YOU MUST DRILL OR ABRADE THE COUNTERWEIGHT, OBEY THE

WARNINGS FOR DRILLING, ABRADING AND REMOVAL OF SURFACE FINISH
GIVEN IN 20-00-00, PAGE BLOCK 201.
CAUTION: BALANCE THE AILERONS AS A PAIR WITH THE COUNTERWEIGHT, BALANCE

TAB AND PUSH ROD INSTALLED. THE AILERONS CAN BE BALANCED
INCORRECTLY WHEN NOT DONE AS A PAIR AND/OR AS AN INCOMPLETE
ASSEMBLY.
(1) Remove the ailerons (Ref. 57-61-11, Page Block 401). Keep the balance tabs and push
rods installed on the aileron.
(2) Install the counterweight again on the outboard aileron (Ref. 57-61-11, Page Block 401).
(3) Weigh the ailerons with the balance tab, push rod and counterweight installed.
(4) Off-Aircraft Procedure (Recommended) (Ref. Fig. 201):
(a) Connect the inboard and outboard ailerons together with the distance connection
(P/N 110.85.06.129).
(b) Install balancing connections (P/N 110.85.06.128) on the inboard and outboard
hinges of the aileron assembly.
(c) Install the aileron assembly on the test bench.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
27-00-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Put the balance tab in the neutral position and use adhesive tape to fasten the push
rod to the aileron in the correct position.
(e) Move the aileron assembly until it is level.
(f) Put the scale under the trailing edge 435 mm from the hinge axis.
(g) Make a note of the force ‘P’ necessary to keep the aileron assembly level.
(h) Refer to the Aileron Balance Graph (Fig. 202). If the C of G position is between the
minimum and maximum balance lines the C of G is acceptable.
(i) Remove or add weight as follows if the C of G position is not between the lines on
the graph:
(i) Drill out lead from the bottom surface of the counterweight to remove weight if
the C of G position is below the minimum line (Ref. Fig. 201).
(ii) Add lead to the bottom surface of the counterweight if the C of G position is
above the maximum line. Use adhesive (Material No. P08-059) to bond the
lead in position.
(iii) Do the balance procedure again until the C of G is acceptable.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE COUNTERWEIGHT DOES NOT WEIGH MORE
THAN THE VALUES GIVEN AS FOLLOWS. THE AILERONS CAN BE
OVER WEIGHT IF THE COUNTERWEIGHTS ARE OUTSIDE OF THE
WEIGHT LIMITS.
Aileron Counterweight Maximum Limit
Counterweight type
Aileron Type
111.45.08.001 6106.11
Aileron Part No. 6106.10/6106.0010, Maximum: Maximum:
NOT Reinforced (Do not install balance tabs) 2,2 Kg 2,4 Kg
Aileron Part No. 6106.34 / 6106.0034 /
Maximum: Maximum:
119.99.06.555 and 119.99.06.556, Reinforced
2,9 Kg 3,3 Kg
(With or without balance tabs)
(j) Remove the aileron assembly from the test bench.
(k) Remove the balancing connections (P/N 110.85.06.128) from the aileron assembly.
(l) Remove the distance connection (P/N 110.85.06.129) from the aileron assembly.
(m) Remove the adhesive tape from the push rod.
(5) Close Up
Continue to install the ailerons (Ref. 57-61-11, Page Block 401).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 203
27-00-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
435 mm
CG AILERON
UPWARD FORCE (P) TO KEEP

AILERON SURFACE LEVEL
WEIGHT (G) OF AILERON

ADD OR REMOVE
LEAD IN THIS AREA
A
6793
Aileron Balance Procedure on a Test Bench
Figure 201
(6) On-Aircraft Procedure:
(a) Install the ailerons again on the aircraft but do not connect the control rods (Ref.
57-61-11, Page Block 401).
(b) Put the balance tab in the neutral position and use adhesive tape to fasten the push
rod to the aileron in the correct position.
NOTE: Figure 201 shows the aileron assembly inverted on the test bench. The
rods are at the bottom if you balance the ailerons on-aircraft.
(c) Move the aileron until it is level.
(d) Put the scale under the trailing edge 435 mm from the hinge axis.
(e) Make a note of the force ‘P’ necessary to keep the aileron level.
(f) Refer to the Aileron Balance Graph (Fig. 202). If the C of G position is between the
(g) Remove or add weight as follows if the C of G position is not between the lines on
the graph:
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 204
27-00-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(i) Drill out lead from the bottom surface of the counterweight to remove weight if
the C of G position is below the minimum line (Ref. Fig. 201).
(ii) Add lead to the bottom surface of the counterweight if the C of G position is
above the maximum line. Use adhesive (Material No. P08-059) to bond the
lead in position.
(iii) Do the balance procedure again until the C of G is acceptable.
THAN THE VALUES GIVEN AS FOLLOWS. THE AILERONS CAN BE
OVER WEIGHT IF THE COUNTERWEIGHTS ARE OUTSIDE OF THE
WEIGHT LIMITS.
Aileron Counterweight Maximum Limit
Counterweight type
Aileron Type
111.45.08.001 6106.11
Aileron Part No. 6106.10/6106.0010, Maximum: Maximum:
NOT Reinforced (Do not install balance tabs) 2,2 Kg 2,4 Kg
Aileron Part No. 6106.34 / 6106.0034 /
Maximum: Maximum:
119.99.06.555 and 119.99.06.556, Reinforced
2,9 Kg 3,3 Kg
(With or without balance tabs)
(h) Remove the adhesive tape from the push rod.
(7) Close Up
Continue to install the ailerons (Ref. 57-61-11, Page Block 401).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 205
27-00-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
0.6
0.5
0.42
0.4
Upward Force (P) (Kg)
e
ing
ofH
aft
0.3 m
14m
s
Gi
of
xC
Ma
0.2
0.16
Approved C of G Range
0.1 (C of G is less than 14 mm aft of Hinge)
0.0
-0.1
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Aileron Weight (G) (Kg)
6364
Aileron Balance Graph

Figure 202
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 206
27-00-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Elevator Balance
If available (necessary to
- Balancing test bench
balance a single elevator)
- Tape, adhesive Local supply
B. Procedure to Balance a Single Elevator on a Test Bench (Ref. Fig. 203 and 204)
(1) Remove the elevator (Ref. 55-21-11, Page Block 401). Keep the balance tabs installed on
the elevator.
(2) Weigh the elevator with the balance tab, push rod, access covers, hinge bolt and washers
installed on the elevator.
(3) Install the elevator on the test bench.
NOTE: When you put the elevators on the test bench, one elevator has the push rod at
the top (as shown on Figure 203). The other elevator is inverted and has the
pushrod at the bottom.
(4) Put the balance tab in the neutral position and use adhesive tape to fasten the push rod to
the elevator.
(5) Move the elevator until it is level.
(6) Put the scale under the trailing edge 395 mm from the hinge axis.
(7) Make a note of the force ‘P’ necessary to keep the elevator level.
(8) Refer to the Elevator Balance Graph (Fig. 204). If the C of G position is between the
(9) Remove or add weight as follows if the C of G position is not between the lines on the
graph:
(a) Remove balance weights if the C of G position is below the minimum line.
(b) Add balance weights if the C of G position is above the maximum line.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 207
27-00-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
THAN 2,14 kg. THE ELEVATORS CAN BE OVER WEIGHT IF THE
COUNTERWEIGHTS ARE OUTSIDE OF THE WEIGHT LIMIT.
(c) Do the balance procedure again until the C of G is acceptable.
(10) Close Up
Continue to install the elevator (Ref. 55-21-11, Page Block 401).
C. Procedure to Balance the Complete Elevator Assembly on the Aircraft (Ref. Fig. 203 and
Fig. 205)
(1) Remove the elevators (Ref. 55-21-11, Page Block 401). Keep the balance tabs installed
on the elevators.
(2) Remove the elevator torque-tube assembly from the aircraft (Ref. 55-21-12, Page Block
401).
(3) Weigh the elevators with the balance tab, push rod, access covers, hinge bolts and
washers installed on the elevator.
(4) Weigh the elevator torque-tube assembly with the elevator attachment nuts and washers
installed.
(5) Add the weight in Step 3.C.(3) to the weight in Step 3.C.(4) to get the total weight ‘G’.
(6) Install the elevators (Ref. 55-21-11, Page Block 401) and elevator torque-tube assembly
(Ref. 55-21-12, Page Block 401) on the aircraft, but do not connect the control rods.
(7) Put the balance tabs in the neutral position and use adhesive tape to fasten the rods to the
elevators.
NOTE: Figure 203 shows an elevator on the test bench but it is also applicable for the
on-aircraft balance procedure.
(8) Move the elevator assembly until it is level.
(10) Make a note of the force ‘P’ necessary to keep the elevator assembly level.
(11) Refer to the Elevator Balance Graph (Fig. 205). If the C of G position is between the
graph:
(a) Remove balance weight if the C of G position is below the minimum line.
(b) Add balance weight if the C of G position is above the maximum line.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 208
27-00-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
THAN 2,14 kg. THE ELEVATORS CAN BE OVER WEIGHT IF THE
(13) Close Up
Continue to install the elevators and connect the control rods (Ref. 55-21-11, Page Block
401).
395 mm
CG ELEVATOR

ELEVATOR SURFACE LEVEL
WEIGHT (G) OF ELEVATOR
6794
Elevator Balance Procedure on a Test Bench
Figure 203
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 209
27-00-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
0.6
0.55
0.5
e
Hing
f
to
0.4 af
mm
5
5,
i s2
G
of
C
ax
M
0.3
0.23
0.2 Approved C of G Range

(C of G is less than 25,5 mm aft of Hinge)
0.1
0.0
3.5 4.5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8.5
Elevator Weight (G) (Kg)
6365
Elevator Balance Graph

Figure 204
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 210
27-00-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1.3
1.23
1.2
1.1
1.0 e
Hing
f
to
af
m
m
0.9 7
i s2
G
of
C
ax
M
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.55
0.5
Approved C of G Range
0.4 (C of G is less than 27 mm aft of Hinge)
0.3
0.2
0.1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Elevator Assembly Weight (G) (Kg)
6366
Elevator Assembly Balance Graph

Figure 205
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 211
27-00-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Rudder Balance
110.85.06.125 Center shaft

- Balancing test bench
B. Procedure (Ref. Fig. 206 and Fig. 207)
(1) Make sure that the trim is set to neutral for aircraft with electrical trim.
(2) Remove the rudder (Ref. 55-41-11, Page Block 401). Keep the trim actuating mechanism
and trim tab installed on the rudder.
(3) Weigh the rudder with the trim tab, push rod, actuator, access covers, hinge bolt and
washers installed on the rudder.
(4) Install the center shaft (P/N 110.85.06.125) on the bottom flange of the rudder.
CAUTION: DO NOT LET THE RUDDER TIP OVER (BECAUSE OF THE BALANCE WEIGHT)
WHEN YOU INSTALL THE RUDDER ON THE TEST BENCH. DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR.
(5) Install the rudder on the test bench.
(6) Make sure that the trim tab is in the neutral position.
(7) Move the rudder until it is level.
(9) Make a note of the force ‘P’ necessary to keep the rudder level.
(10) Refer to the Rudder Balance Graph (Fig. 207). If the C of G position is between the
graph:
(a) Remove balance weight if the C of G position is below the minimum line.
(b) Add balance weight if the C of G position is above the maximum line.
THAN 1,8 kg. THE RUDDER CAN BE OVER WEIGHT IF THE
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 212
27-00-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(12) Close Up
Continue to install the rudder (Ref. 55-41-11, Page Block 401).
390 mm
CG RUDDER

WEIGHT (G) OF RUDDER RUDDER SURFACE LEVEL
6792
Rudder Balance Procedure on a Test Bench
Figure 206
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 213
27-00-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
0.6
0.5
0.44
0.4
ge
f Hin
o
aft
m
20m
s
of Gi
x. C
Ma
0.3
0.23
0.2 Approved C of G Range

(C of G is less than 20 mm aft of Hinge)
0.1
0.0
4.5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8.5
Rudder Weight (G) (Kg)
6367
Rudder Balance Graph

Figure 207
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 214
27-00-00 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLIGHT CONTROL CABLES AND PULLEYS - INSPECTION / CHECK
1. General
This task gives the procedure for inspection and check of the flight control cables and pulleys.
For more data about maintenance and inspection of the control cables, refer to FAA AC 43.13-1A,
Acceptable Methods, Techniques and Practices.

- Stainless steel wire brush Local supply

P02-019 Cloth, cotton
P10-016 CPC
3. Procedure
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. READ AND OBEY
THE MANUFACTURERS HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE SOLVENT TO CLEAN THE CABLES.
A. Job Set Up
(1) Use a dry clean cotton cloth (Material No. P02-019) to clean the preservative and dirt from
the cables.
(2) Loosen the cable turnbuckles.
B. Examine the Control Cables (Ref. Fig. 601)
(1) Broken Wires
(a) Carefully pull a clean cotton cloth (Material No. P02-019) along the cable. Broken
wires will catch on the cloth.
(b) Examine the cable which goes over pulleys or through fairleads.
(c) Bend the cable in the area where you find broken wires, or the cable shows signs of
wear. Do not make a kink in the cable.
(d) If you find broken wires - Reject the cable.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 601
27-00-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Wear
(a) If you find external wear, where single wires apparently go together - Reject the
cable.
NOTE: When wires apparently go together, the wires are worn between 40% and
50% of their diameter.
(b) If more than six wires in one area show signs of wear - Reject the cable.
(c) If you find internal wear - Reject the cable.
(3) Corrosion
(a) If you find internal corrosion - Reject the cable.
(b) If you find external corrosion, use a stainless-steel wire brush and carefully remove
the corrosion.
(4) Cable End Fittings
(a) Examine the cable end fittings for signs to make sure that they have not moved.
Reject the cable if there are signs that they have moved.
(b) Examine the cable end fittings for signs of cracks. If you find cracks - Reject the
cable.
(5) Lubrication
(a) Use a clean cotton cloth (Material No. P02-019) and apply CPC (Material No.
P10-016) to the cable.
C. Cable Pulleys (Ref. Fig. 602)
(1) Examine the pulleys for signs of unusual wear and contamination.
(2) Make sure that the pullies turn smoothly.
(3) Examine the pulley attachment brackets and adjacent structure.
D. Close Up
(1) Do the control system, rigging (Ref. 27-10-00, 27-20-00 or 27-30-00 Page Block 501).
(2) Apply CPC (Material No. P10-016) to the cables.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 602
27-00-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STRAND
WORN WIRES BLEND TOGETHER

WIRES ARE BETWEEN 40% AND 50% WORN
BROKEN WIRES
B
6415
Flight Control Cables - Inspection / Check

Figure 601
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 603
27-00-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXCESSIVE CABLE TENSION PULLEY MISALIGNMENT
PULLEY TOO LARGE FOR CABLE CABLE MISALIGNMENT
SEIZED BEARING NORMAL CONDITION

6295
Flight Control Pulleys - Inspection / Check

Figure 602
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 604
27-00-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CONTROL COLUMNS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
Separate procedures are given to remove and install the pilot’s and co-pilot’s control columns. Aircraft
can have curved or straight control columns. The procedures are the same for both types.
Material Number Description Remarks
P02-001 Lockwire Control column gaiter


- Warning sign ‘Do not operate the flight controls’
To prevent movement of the
- Supports
elevators and ailerons
- Blanking caps For electrical connectors
C. Expendable Parts
27-31-01 Fig. 01, Item 115 Cotter pin Pilot’s control column only
27-12-01 Fig. 01, Item 110 Cotter pin Pilot’s control column only
27-11-01 Fig. 01, Item 245 Cotter pin Each end of connecting rod
3. Job Set Up
A. Put a warning sign in the flight compartment to tell personnel ‘Do not operate the flight controls’.
B. Put supports below the elevators and ailerons to prevent movement when you disconnect the
flight controls.
C. Open the access panel FB1 (Ref. 06-40-00, Page Block 1).
4. Remove the Pilot’s Control Column (Ref. Fig. 401)
A. Disconnect the flight controls below the floor:
(1) Remove and discard the cotter pin (20).
(2) Remove the nut (21), washer (22) and bolt (24) to disconnect the elevator pushrod (23).
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 401
27-05-00 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Remove the nut (18), washer (19), bolt (26) with the washer (25) to disconnect the aileron
pushrod (27).
(6) Remove the nut (14), washer (13) and bolt (10) to disconnect the connecting rod (11).
B. Remove the control column (1):
(1) Disconnect the electrical connector for the control column at the floor connector.
(2) Put blanking caps on the electrical connectors.
(3) Remove and discard the lockwire that attaches the gaiter (2) to the bearing flange (15).
(4) Remove the nuts (8), washers (9) and bolts (16).
(5) Remove the control column (1) from the floor complete with the bearing flange (15).
(6) Collect the lower bearing ring (6) and the filler plate (7).
(7) Remove the guide bolt (3) (if installed).
(8) Remove the upper bearing ring (5) and the spacer ring (4) (if installed) from the bearing
flange (15). Push the upper bearing ring (5) and the spacer ring (4) (if installed) over the
spherical bearing and remove them from the control column (1).
5. Remove the Co-pilot’s Control Column (Ref. Fig. 402)
A. Disconnect the connecting rod (9) below the floor:
(2) Remove the nut (7), washer (6) and bolt (5) to disconnect the connecting rod (9).
B. Remove the upper control column (1):
(1) Disconnect the electrical connector for the control column at the floor connector.
(2) Put blanking caps on the electrical connectors.
(3) Release the spring clip to remove the upper control column (1).
(4) Remove and discard the lockwire that attaches the gaiter (2) to the bearing flange (3).
C. Remove the lower control column (10):
(2) Remove the bearing flange (3) with the spacer ring (15) (if installed) and the upper bearing
ring (4).
(3) Remove the lower control column (10) from the floor complete with the bearing flange (3).
(4) Collect the lower bearing ring (11) and the filler plate (14).
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 402
27-05-00 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Install the Pilot’s Control Column (Ref. Fig. 401)
NOTE: If you install new bearing rings, refer to 27-05-00, Page Block 501 for the adjustment
procedure.
A. Install the control column (1):
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE SPHERICAL BEARING AND THE BEARING RINGS ARE
CLEAN. DIRT CAN CAUSE WEAR IN THE BEARING.
(1) Make sure the upper bearing ring (5) and the spacer ring (4) (if required) are installed in
the bearing flange (15).
NOTE: The spacer ring (4) is installed only if required during the adjustment procedure
(Ref. 27-05-00, Page Block 501).
(2) Put the filler plate (7) and the lower bearing ring (6) in position in the floor.
(3) Put the control column (1) through the hole in the filler plate (7) with the spherical bearing
in the lower bearing ring (6).
(4) Connect the flight controls below the floor:
(a) Connect the connecting rod (11) with the bolt (10), washer (13) and nut (14).
(b) Safety the nut (14) with a new cotter pin (12).
(c) Connect the aileron pushrod (27) with the bolt (26), washer (25), washer (19) and
nut (18).
(d) Safety the nut (18) with a new cotter pin (17).
(e) Connect the elevator pushrod (23) with the bolt (24), washer (22) and nut (21).
(f) Safety the nut (21) with a new cotter pin (20).
(5) If the guide bolt (3) is to be installed:
(a) Align the gaps in the upper and lower bearing rings (5) and (6) with the slot in the
spherical bearing.
(b) Put the bearing flange (15) over the bearing rings and align the hole for the guide
bolt (3) with the gaps in the bearing rings.
(c) Install the guide bolt (3). Make sure it engages with the slot in the spherical bearing.
(6) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P04-012) to the bolts (16).
(7) Install the bolts (16), washers (9) and nuts (10).
(8) Attach the gaiter (2) to the bearing flange (15) with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
B. Connect the electrical connector:
(1) Remove the blanking caps from the electrical connectors.
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 403
27-05-00 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Connect the electrical connector.
7. Install the Co-pilot’s Control Column (Ref. Fig. 402)
NOTE: If you install new bearing rings, refer to 27-05-00, Page Block 501 for the adjustment
procedure.
A. Install the lower control column (10):
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE SPHERICAL BEARING AND THE BEARING RINGS ARE
CLEAN. DIRT CAN CAUSE WEAR IN THE BEARING.
(1) Make sure the upper bearing ring (4) and the spacer ring (15) (if required) are in position
on the top of the spherical bearing.
NOTE: The spacer ring (15) is installed only if required during the adjustment procedure
(Ref. 27-05-00, Page Block 501).
(2) Put the filler plate (14) and the lower bearing ring (11) in position in the floor.
(3) Put the lower control column (10) through the hole in the filler plate (14) with the spherical
bearing in the lower bearing ring (11).
(4) Put the bearing flange (3) over the bearing rings.
(5) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P04-012) to the bolts (16).
B. Install the upper control column (1):
(1) Attach the gaiter (2) to the bearing flange (3) with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(2) Install the upper control column (1) in the lower part (10) and secure with the spring clip.
C. Connect the connecting rod below the floor:
(1) Connect the connecting rod (9) with the bolt (5), washer (6) and nut (7).
(2) Safety the nut (7) with a new cotter pin (8).
D. Connect the electrical connector:
(1) Remove the blanking caps from the electrical connectors.
(2) Connect the electrical connector.
8. Job Close Up
A. Remove the supports from below the elevators and ailerons.
B. Do the Adjustment/Test of the Aileron Controls (Ref. 27-10-00, Page Block 501).
C. Do the Adjustment/Test of the Elevator Controls (Ref. 27-30-00, Page Block 501).
D. Do tests of the electrical systems operated by the switches on the control column.
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 404
27-05-00 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Close the access panel FB1 (Ref. 06-40-00, Page Block 1).
F. Remove the warning sign from the flight compartment.
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 405
27-05-00 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
2
16
15 3
14
13
SPHERICAL
12 BEARING
27 17 11
1
18 10
19
25
B
24
26
23 20
22 4
B 21
FLOOR
6682
9
8
Pilot’s Control Column - Removal / Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 406
27-05-00 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
16
3
7
6
15
4 8
5
A
9
SPHERICAL
BEARING
10
11
14
FLOOR
13
12
6683
Co-pilot’s Control Column - Removal / Installation

Figure 402
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 407
27-05-00 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 408
27-05-00 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CONTROL-COLUMN BEARING-RINGS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
P01-008 Solvent
- Dressing paste Local purchase

- Sharp metal scraper
C. Expendable Parts
27-11-01, Fig 01, Item 15 Bearing rings (pair) Pilot’s control column
27-11-01, Fig 01, Item 120 Bearing rings (pair) Co-pilot’s control column
2. Job Set Up
A. Remove the applicable control column (Ref. 27-05-00, Page Block 401).
3. Procedure (Ref. Fig 501)
A. Assemble the bearing pack on the control column:
(1) Install the upper bearing ring:
(a) For the pilot’s control column:
(i) Push the upper bearing ring (8) over the spherical bearing (10) and into the
bearing flange (2).
NOTE: You can carefully open the bearing ring with your fingers to do this.
(b) For the co-pilot’s control column:
(i) Put the upper bearing ring (8) in the bearing flange (2).
(2) Put the bearing flange (2) on the top of the spherical bearing (10).
(3) Put the lower bearing ring (7) and the filler plate (6) on the bottom of the spherical bearing
(10).
(4) Install the bolts (3), washers (4) and nuts (5) to hold the bearing pack together.
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 501
27-05-00 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Do a test of the bearing adjustment:
(1) Hold the control column (1) and move the bearing pack through it’s full range of movement
around the spherical bearing (10):
(a) If the movement is loose and has play, the bearing rings are too loose. Do the steps
that follow:
(i) Remove the nuts (5), washers (4) and bolts (3) and disassemble the bearing
pack.
(ii) Remove the upper bearing ring (8) from the bearing flange (2).
(iii) Put a spacer ring (9) in the bearing flange (2).
(iv) Put the bearing rings (7) and (8) in the bearing flange (2).
(v) Install the filler plate (6), bolts (3), washers (4) and nuts (5) to hold the bearing
pack together.
(vi) Hold the control column (1) and move the bearing pack through it’s full range
of movement around the spherical bearing (10).
(vii) If the movement is still loose and has play, install new bearing rings and do
the test again.
(b) If the movement is smooth and has some friction, but you can move the bearing
pack easily with your hand, the adjustment is correct.
(c) If you cannot move the bearing pack easily with your hand, the bearing rings are too
tight. Do the adjustment given in Step C.
C. Adjust the bearing rings (7) and (8):
(1) Remove the nuts (5), washers (4) and bolts (3) and disassemble the bearing pack.
(2) Apply a layer of dressing paste to the surface of the spherical bearing (10).
(3) Assemble the bearing pack (Ref. Step A.). If required, install the spacer ring (9) in the
bearing flange (2).
(4) Hold the control column (1) and move the bearing pack through it’s full range of movement
around the spherical bearing (10).
(5) Remove the nuts (5), washers (4) and bolts (3) and disassemble the bearing pack.
(6) Examine the bearing rings (7) and (8) for dressing paste.
NOTE: No dressing paste shows a ‘high’ spot on the surface of the bearing ring.
(7) Where you can not see dressing paste, use a sharp metal scraper to scrape a small
amount of material from the surface of the bearing ring.
(8) Use absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) and solvent (Material No. P01-008) to
remove the dressing paste from the spherical bearing (10) and the bearing rings (7) and
(8).
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 502
27-05-00 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(9) Do steps (2) thru (8) again until:
• the bearing rings (7) and (8) show no dressing paste
and
• the movement of the bearing pack (Ref. Step B) is correct.
(10) Do a check of the control column movement:
(a) Assemble the bearing pack (Ref. Step A.).
(b) Hold the bearing pack.
(c) Put the control column in the center position then let it fall forward, aft, left and right
with it’s own weight. If the adjustment of the spherical bearing is correct the control
column should move slowly and smoothly.
(d) If the control column falls quickly, the bearing rings are loose or worn and must be
adjusted or replaced.
(e) If the control column does not move, the bearing rings are too tight. Remove and
adjust the bearing rings.
4. Job Close Up
A. Install the applicable control column (Ref. 27-05-00, Page Block 401).
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 503
27-05-00 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10
9
2
8
7 6 5
SECTION
A-A
TYPICAL
6686
Control-Column Bearing-Rings - Adjustment/Test

Figure 501
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 504
27-05-00 Jun 30/09
"ePILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AILERON CONTROLS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The aileron controls are used to control the aircraft in the lateral axis. Movement of the control column
operates the ailerons on each wing through rods, bellcranks and cables.
An interlink is installed between the aileron and rudder controls to apply a small amount of rudder
control when the ailerons are moved.
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 1
27-10-00 Jun 14/92
'ePILATUS 55!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AILERON DOWN STOP
AILERON UP STOP
CONTROL CABLES
CONTROL COLUMN
Aileron Controls
Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page2
I 27-10-00 Jun 14/92
'e PILATUS 5"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
110.85.06.089 Gauge setting, control column Includes 110.85.06.047

110.85.06.047 Gauge setting, control column For straight control columns
Inclinometer or
Ruler
Tensiometer
B. Expendable Parts
IPC Ref. Description
27-12-01, Fig. 01 Locking clips (to safety

turnbuckles) (if installed)
27-12-01, Fig. 01 Washer (if required)
P02-001 Locking wire 0,8 mm diameter
2. Procedures (Ref. Fig. 501 and 502)
A. Preparation
(1) Remove the gust locks or internal flight control locks.
(2) Make sure that the flaps are in the fully up position.
(3) Remove the access panels:
FB2 from the underside of the fuselage

LB2 and LB14 from the underside of the left wing
RB2 and RB13 from the underside of the right wing
(4) Remove the lining from the left side of the cockpit wall behind the pilots seat to uncover
the control cables and aileron bellcrank.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 501
27-10-00 Mar 14/98
'Si PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Functional Test
NOTE: The control cables are 3,4 mm diameter. Use the 1/8 in. cable riser on tensiometers
calibrated in imperial units.
(1) Put a thermometer in the fuselage and take the temperature after 15 minutes to get the
temperature for the cable tension check.
NOTE: If necessary move the aircraft into a hangar and let the temperature inside the
fuselage stabilize for at least one hour before the temperature is taken.
(2) Install the setting gauge on the pilot's control column.
(3) Make sure that the cable tension at the center of the cables on the left side of the cockpit is
in limits (Ref. Fig. 502).
(4) Make sure that the cable tension at the center of the cables in each wing is in limits.
(5) Use the inclinometer or ruler and make sure that the ailerons are 15 mm± 1 mm
(0.59 in.± 0.04 in.)(2°) below the flap trailing edge.
(6) Remove the setting gauge from the control column.
(7) Move the control column fully left and make sure that:
(a) The right wing aileron is below the flap trailing edge by between 118 mm± 5 mm
(4.65 in.± 0.2 in.)(13.5°).
(b} The left wing aileron is above the flap trailing edge by 138 mm± 5 mm
(5.43 in.± 0.2 in.)(20°).
(8) Move control column fully right and make sure that:
(a) The left wing aileron is below the flap trailing edge by 118 mm± 5 mm (4.65 in.± 0.2
in.)(13.5°).
(b) The right wing aileron is above the flap trailing edge by 138 mm± 5 mm
(5.43 in.± 0.2 in.)(20°).
( 9) If cable tensions or range of movement values are not in the limits, do the aileron system
adjustment procedure.
C. Aileron System Adjustment
(1} Put a thermometer in the fuselage and take the temperature after 15 minutes for the cable
tension check.
NOTE: If necessary move the aircraft into a hangar and let the temperature inside
stabilize for at least one hour before the temperature is taken.
(3) Fuselage control cable tension:
NOTE: The control cables are 3,4 mm diameter. Use the 1/8 in. cable riser on
tensiometers calibrated in imperial units.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 502
27-10-00 Mar 14/98
'e PILATUS:F'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) Remove the locking clips (if installed) or locking wire from the cable turnbuckles.
(b) Adjust the turnbuckles at the underside of the fuselage to give the correct cable
tension (Ref. Fig. 502).
(c) Make sure that the centerline of the aileron bellcrank is parallel to the edge of the
fuselage Frame 3.
(d) If necessary, adjust the turnbuckles at the underside of the fuselage.
(e) Safety the turnbuckles with new locking clips (if installed) or lockwire
(f) On the bellcrank in the right wing, make sure that the center of the rear cable
securing bolt is 60 ± 1 mm (2.36 ± 0.04 in.) from the wing rib.
(g) If necessary, adjust the length of the control rod.
(4) Wing control cable tension:
(a) Remove the locking clips (if installed) or locking wire from the cable turnbuckles.
(b) Adjust the turnbuckles in the wing to give the correct cable tension (Ref. Fig. 502).
(c) On the aileron bellcranks adjacent to the up and down stops, make sure that the
center of the rod securing bolt is 83 mm (3.27 in.) from the wing rib.
(d) Safety the turnbuckles with new locking clips (if installed) or lockwire
(5) Use the inclinometer or ruler and make sure that the ailerons are 15 mm ± 1 mm
(0.59 in. ± 0.04 in.)(2°) below the flap trailing edge.
NOTE: Use either an inclinometer or ruler to measure the range of movement.
(a) Adjust the aileron control rod if necessary.
(b) Remove the setting gauge from the control column.
(6) Range of Movement:
{a) Move the control column fully left and make sure that:
(i) The right wing aileron is below the flap trailing edge by between
118 mm ± 5 mm (4.65 in. ± 0.2 in.)(13.5°). Adjust the stop if necessary.
{ii) The left wing aileron is above the flap trailing edge by 138 mm ± 5 mm
{5.43 in. ± 0.2 in.)(20°).
{iii) There is a 3,5 mm (0.138 in.) gap between the up stop and the bellcrank.
Install or remove washers under the stop bolt head as necessary.
(b) Move control column fully right and check that:
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 503
27-10-00 Mar 14/98
'e PILAT US 5iiF'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(i) The left wing aileron is below the flap trailing edge by 118 mm ± 5 mm
(4 .65 in.± 0.2 in.)(13.5°). Adjust the stop if necessary.
(ii) The right wing aileron is above the flap trailing edge by 138 mm± 5 mm (5.43
in. ± 0.2 in.)(20°).
(iii) There is a 3,5 mm (0.138 in.) gap between the up stop and the change lever.
Install or remove washers under the stop bolt head as necessary.
(c) Safety the turnbuckles with locking clips (if installed) or lockwire (Material No.
P02-001 ).
(7) Freedom of Movement:
(a) Move the control column left and right and make sure that:
(i) The movement is smooth.
(ii) There is no restriction of movement.
(iii) There is no excessive play in the controls.
(8) Sense of Movement:
(a) Move the control column to the left and check that:
(i) The left aileron moves up.
(ii) The right aileron moves down.
(b) Move the control column to the right and check that:
(i) The left aileron moves down.
(ii) The right aileron moves up.
D. Close Up
(2) If the aileron controls were adjusted:
(a) Install the lining to the left side of the cockpit wall behind the pilots seat.
(b) Install the access panels:
FB2 from the underside of the fuselage

LB2 and LB14 from the underside of the left wing
RB2 and RB13 from the underside of the right wing.
(3) Install the gust locks or internal flight control locks as required.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 504
27-10-00 Mar 14/98
'ePILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EQUAL
DISTANCE
_. --
CONTROL COLUMN
SETTING GAGE
EQUAL
DISTANCE
BELLCRANK
CENTER LINE
LEFT AILERON
DOWN STOP
FUSELAGE
FRAME3
AILERON CONTROL ROD
LEFT AILERON
UP STOP
Aileron Controls - Adjustment

Figure 501
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 505
27-10-00 Mar 14/98
'S PILATUS !!5!Y
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
! [_ !
i
i
L
i ; I
-r- -r-
__
:
�
; i V_
'
I
I
'/
I
- .-----
I :
' 1
-1 +--+--' ----+-
·· --+----+--+1- -----
�'
if-----
340
i
--+-I---+__,- I /
'
1 -t--+----,
1
f-+-
/
-1----+--- ___,
330 +--+--+--r- -+--+-�1--t---,1-+-

- +-
- -+--+--+-----,--+--+-�-+--+--+----!---2
/
"
/
I
'
I
II �,.
320 -t---l----l--r-
- ---t-----
-t- '1---,-f ---!-
, --�'l--t---1---t-
-- I
-+---+- --t--.M�'
---1t-+--+-
- -+#f-;---i
--�·.,-----.----t-- ---+--/-..0/
�-t----t-- y-�
,
!
--.
-
1--- --
! -
-i---+l _,__..,.
310 +- '--+.. -
--+- +--+--+--+---+-�--+--+-+---l#--+- -+--+----------1
I
L
I
+-t I • ---+! -,.,,'/

f-1
,- •/: i
i ---
-�
300
i--..-
.,--- �-,..- 1,
---,-----+-
---t---+---
+ ,.---.---t--/=:1=::=:-=-:-,/� _..,.:_-i--�-,------'--=: -==! :
--� -+---+----+-
:
---t---+-
-i- 1-
- -.,...
1 .
/ '
y
I
y 1
C:�
290
Z ·-> I I I I j' f1
- ·- i I � I !
j
V V,
(/l
i , 1----t----+----+----+-----+------i
-t
·�
0
�
§ 280 I
v /I
/1
O>
t--+----+---+---t--·· ...
Q) I '
0
��
I-
� _!/lo
2 70
/'/ I I
)' ' i
�v
I
� § �, I I
--+----+---+--+____,
!
....,
t----+----+- --+----+---+----+--------f---+
- ---f-#-+---+---+----l-__,_----+-f----+---
- '
.!::: �
260
Upper Limit /
-7- -+---+--+
- --
/-
V
- ---+- Lower Limit -
I I
·-
1 ---+-----
-+ ---+---1 ----
--+ __,
-t
g
/1
1
250
Q)
A I i
zt:'. f-+--+----+---+-
I
v I
a: ;
Q)>
8 �,
1 �
240
v
,
i I
�' ;
g
t---+-
- -+-
-- -+-
- --+-
- --+----1-----+-c----�4---+---+---+---+--1- --+----1----+-- I ___,_---+----+---1
230 __,___,. ��II --�·--- / V--1--+- --r---;--.,.�

.._.; ! -+---+-�-+--+--+--__,----t
I I
___ ____
f---+----+---+--
--/'-1-+---fi----+i/I
/
I I
I
---1-�--+--I-- �
220
-�
+-....-+-
.-
i
-+------+--+---+-+--+---+---+---+-+--+----+--+-----,-------1
210 +---_-!__,.I ,.._

)LI__._t1 --..-+ ..�..,. '-.,. �_,_l_:_: _...i_--'1----1..l- ,1 _.._,: ---1--
.--1 '--- ·
T--'--___.___
1 _--1
_._
---74 !v / 1
_ ___
1 1 r--1 -1---+--+-
1 --+--
- :-+-- 1 . 1 --- --
)/i
,
200
�+-------c--
/
�---+--+------t---+-t--+--+--+-------.,.---1--+-+--+--+-----+--+--I
i
--T -
--+----+---+---t- - -- - :
190 +--+-�<-+--+-+---,'--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--t-�
' -1---...-
. 1---+-
- +--+--+---I
+ ----i-
1 ---1
I
-
f-+---1-�+-,--+ ---+---t ---+-+-- ---+-: ---f----+---
1
- --t
1- ---+-
/
i ---+-----+-+-+-
- -t-
- -+-
- --+-
- --+----f-
1 --l -
I
�
180 +....,--
,. -
-+ +--+--+--+- -+-----
1- - --t-1--�I -+---+--t-+--+--+---"-
" 1---+-
- +--+--+---1 :
I
1 ,
170 -1----��---�___. I __
i _._
.... ._ -t-_..__._._
._ ____._�_.__..
I _._
..._ �-----------------'---1
0 10 20 30 40 50
Temperature (°C)
Aileron Control Cable Tension Graph

Figure 502
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 506
27-10-00 Mar 14/98
'ePILATUS !5F'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AILERON CONTROL CABLES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT AILERONS ARE SUPPORTED WHEN THE CONTROL CABLES ARE
DISCONNECTED. THE AILERONS WILL FALL TO THE FULLY DOWN POSITION WHEN THE
CABLES ARE DISCONNECTED.
A. Expendable Parts
Fig. Item Description IPC Ref
401-05 Cotter pin 27-12-01, Fig. 01

401-09 Cotter pin 27-12-01, Fig. 01
401-12 Cotter pin 27-12-01, Fig. 01
401-15 Cotter pin 27-12-01, Fig. 01
401-22 Cotter pin 27-12-01, Fig. 01
402-01 Cotter pin 27-12-01, Fig. 02
402-11 Cotter pin 27-12-01, Fig. 02
402-09 Cotter pin 27-12-01, Fig. 02
8. Consumable Materials (Ref. 20-31-00)
P04-002 Grease MIL-G-23827
c. Referenced Procedures
27-10-00 Ailerons - Adjustment/Test
2. Job Set Up
A. Remove the access panels to get access to the cables in the wings.
B. Remove the access panels get access to the cables under cockpit floor.
C. Remove the lining from the left side cockpit wall behind the pilots seat to get access to the
aileron bellcrank lever.
3. Removal
A. Fuselage Cables (Ref. Fig 401)
(1) Remove the locking wire from the turnbuckles and loosen the turnbuckles.
(2) Remove the cotter pin (5), nut (1), washer (2) and bolt (3). Remove the pulley (4).
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 401
27-12-11 Jun 14/92
'ePILATUS!!!!!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) On aircraft up to MSN 664:
(a) Remove the nut (29), washers (27) and {28), and bolt (26). Remove the pulleys
(30).
(4) On aircraft from MSN 665:
(a) Remove the cotter pin (12), nut (21), washers (13) and (20), and bolt (14). Remove
the pulleys (11).
(b) Remove the cotter pins (15), nuts (16), washers (17), and bolts (19). Remove the
pulleys (18).
(5) Remove the cotter pins (9), nuts (8), washers (7) and the bolts (6). Discard the cotter
pins.
(6) Remove the cotter pins (22), nuts (23), washers (24) and the bolts (25). Discard the cotter
pins.
(7) Remove the cables (10).
B. Wing Cables (Ref. Fig 402)
(1) Remove the locking wire from the turnbuckles and loosen the turnbuckles.
(2) Remove the cotter pins (1 ) , nuts (5), washers (2) and bolts (3) and remove the pulleys (4).
Discard the cotter pins.
(3) Remove the cotter pins (9), nuts (8) and bolts (7). Discard the cotter pins.
(4) Remove the cotter pins (11), nuts (10), washers (12) and bolts (13). Discard the cotter
pins.
(5) Remove the cables (6).
4. Installation
A. Apply grease (Material No. P04-002) to all the bolts.
B. Fuselage Cables (Ref. Fig 401)
(1) Put the cables in position in the fuselage.
(2) Install the bolt (6), washer (7) and nut (8). Safety the nut with a new cotter pin (9).
(4) On aircraft up to MSN 664:
(a) Put the pulleys {30) in position and install the bolt (26), washers (27) and (28), and
nut (29).
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page402
27-12-11 Jun 14/92
'ePILATUS!EF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) On aircraft from MSN 665:
(a) Put the pulleys {11) in position and install the bolt (14), washers (13) and (20), and
nut (21). Safety the nut with a new cotter pin (12).
(b) Put the pulleys (18) in position and install the bolts (19), washers (17), and nuts
(16). Safety the nuts with a new cotter pin (15).
C. Wing Cables (Ref. Fig 402)
(1) Put the cables in position in the wings.
(2) Install the bolts (13), washers (12) and nuts (10). Safety the nuts with new cotter pins (11).
(3) Install the bolts (7) and nuts (8). Safety the nuts with new cotter pins (9).
(4) Put the pulley (4) in position and install the bolt (3), washer (2) and nut (5). Safety the nut
with a new cotter pin (1).
(5) Check that cables run freely through fairleads and pulleys.
(6) Remove any supports from ailerons. Make sure ailerons are not obstructed.
5. Test
A. Rig the aileron control system (Ref 27-10-00, Page Block 501).
6. Close Up
B. Install the access panels.
C. Install the lining in the cockpit.
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 403
27-12-11 Jun 14 /92
'e PILATUS5"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8. NUT
3. BOLT
9. COTIER PIN
30. PULLEYS
rii1 4. PULLEY
5. COTIER PIN �
11. PULLEYS
26. BOLT
AIRCRAFT UP TO MSN 664
25. BOLT
14. BOLT
16. NUT
AIRCRAFT FROM MSN 665
15. COTIER PIN
Aileron Control Cables - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 404
27-12-11 Jun 14/92
�PILATUS!EF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9. COTIERPIN
Aileron Control Cables - Removal/Installation

Figure 402
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 405
27-12-11 Jun 14/92
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AILERON/RUDDER INTERLINK CABLES - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This task gives the procedure to remove and install the aileron/rudder interlink cables.
A. Expendable Parts

27-14-01, Fig. 01 Cotter pin Qty. 2
3. Procedure
A. Job Set Up
(1) Remove the access panels to get access to the aileron/rudder cables.
(1) Remove the lockwire, or locking clips, from the turnbuckles (8).
(2) Disconnect the cables (12) from the springs (13).
(4) Remove the nut (4), washer (5), bolt (2) and the pulleys (1).
(5) Remove and discard the cotter pins (9).
(6) Remove the nuts (10), washers (11), bolts (6) and the shackle (7) from the lever.
(7) Remove the cables (12) from the aircraft.
(8) Remove the shackles (7) from the cables.
(1) Install the shackles (7) on the end of the cable with the turnbuckle (8).
(2) Put the cables (12) in position in the aircraft.
(3) Put the shackles (7) in position at the lever and install the bolts (6), washers (11) and
nuts (10).
(4) Safety the nuts (10) with new cotter pins (9).
(5) Put the pulleys (1) in position and install the bolt (2), washer (5) and nut (4).
(7) Attach the cables (12) to the springs (13).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
27-14-11 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Close Up
(1) Do the aileron/rudder interlink cables, adjustment/test (Ref. 27-14-11, Page Block 501).
(3) Install the access panels.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
27-14-11 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
2
B
A
A
C 5
4
11
10
9
8
C
12
13
6398
Aileron/Rudder Interlink Cables - Removal / Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
27-14-11 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
27-14-11 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AILERON/RUDDER INTERLINK CABLES - ADJUSTMENT / TEST
1. General
This task gives the procedure to tension the aileron/rudder interlink cables after you remove and install
them. It is not necessary to do a check of the forces at the control column.

110.85.06.089 Fixing tube To lock the control column
110.85.07.242 Cable tensionmeter
- Wood blocks Local supply
B. Expendable Parts

27-14-01, Fig. 01 Clips, locking (Qty. 4) Alternative to lockwire
C. Consumable Materials

3. Procedure
A. Adjustment
(1) Put the control column in the neutral position and install the fixing tube.
(2) Put the rudder pedals in the neutral position and install the wood blocks.
(3) Put blocks of wood in position to lock the rudder pedals.
(4) Tighten the turnbuckles (8) until the tension of the cables (12) is between 25 and 29 Kg
(55,1 and 63,9 lb).
(5) Safety the turnbuckles (8) with lockwire (Material No. P02-001) or locking clips (if
installed).
(6) Remove the fixing tube and the blocks of wood.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 501
27-14-11 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
2
B
A
A
C 5
4
11
10
9
8
C
12
13
398
Aileron/Rudder Interlink Cables - Adjustment / Test

Figure 501
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 502
27-14-11 Sep 30/07
"ePILATUS5"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AILERON BALANCE TABS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. General
The aileron balance tabs are set at 0 degrees in relation to the aileron chord line when the aileron is in
the neutral position. As the ailerons hang down by 15 mm when the aircraft is on the ground, the tabs
must be set at 2 degrees up.
I 110.85.06.029 Protractor, aileron tab

110.85.06.047 Gauge, setting, control column For straight control colums
110.85.06.089 Gauge, setting, control column Includes 110.85.06.047
3. Procedure
A. Freedom of Movement
(1) Operate the control column through the full range of aileron movement. Make sure that the
tabs move with no rough operation or restriction of movement.
(2 ) On aircraft with aileron trim:
(a } Operate aileron trim control and make sure that the tabs move with no rough
operation or restriction of movement.
B. Sense of Movement
(1) Move the control column to the left. Make sure that:
(a) The left wing aileron moves up.
(b) The tab moves down.
(c ) The right wing aileron moves down.
(d } The tab moves up.
(2) Move the control column to the right. Make sure that:
(a ) The left wing aileron moves down.
(b) The tab moves up.
( c) The right wing aileron moves up.
(d ) The tab moves down.
(3) On aircraft with aileron trim:
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 501
27-15-00 Feb 28/10
'5PILATUS5"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(i) The right wing tab moves up.
(ii) The trim position indicator shows left wing down.
(a) Move aileron trim control to give a right wing down indication. Make sure that:
(i) The right wing tab moves down.
(ii) The trim position indicator shows right wing down.
C. Neutral Position
(1) On aircraft with aileron trim:
(a) Operate the aileron trim control until the trim position indicator shows wings level.
(2) Install the control column rigging lock to pilots control column.
(3) Check that the tab chord line is set at 2 degrees up in relation to the aileron chord line.
(4) If necessary adjust the tab as follows:
(a) Remove the nut (4), washers (3) and (2), and bolt (1).
(b) Loosen the rod end lock nut.
(c) Adjust the rod end to set the tab at 2 degrees up in relation to the aileron.
(d) Tighten the rod end lock nut.
(e) Put the control rod (5) in position and install the bolt (1), washers (2) and (3), and
nut (4). Make sure that the nut is in safety.
(f) Do a check for freedom of movement of the ailerons and tabs.
(5) Remove the control column rigging lock from the control column.
4. Close Up
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 502
27-15-00 Feb 28/10
�PILATUS::i"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Aileron Tab -Adjustment/Test

Figure 501
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 503
27-15-00 Feb 28/10
�PILATUS5'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 504
27-15-00 Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AILERON TRIM - CHAINS AND CABLES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
P02-001 Lockwire
P02-031 Absorbent Paper
P04-002 Grease
2. Procedures
A. Job Set-Up
(1) Put warning signs in position to tell personnel ‘DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT
CONTROLS’.
(2) Remove the wing access panels RB2, RB6, RB10, RB12 and RB13 (Ref. 06-40-00).
(3) Remove the cockpit ceiling panel(s) as required to get access to the inboard chain.
(1) Make sure the aileron trim is set to the 0 (neutral) position.
(2) At the inboard chain (1), record the position of the chain on the sprocket (2). Do this by
counting the number of links on each side of the sprocket.
NOTE: This is to get the new chains and cables in the correct position in the installation
procedure.
(3) Remove the lockwire and disconnect the turnbuckles (3) and (4).
(4) Remove the bolts (7) and (9), washers (6) and (8), and remove the fairleads (5) and (10)
as required.
(5) At the inboard chain (1):
(a) Remove the circlips (15) and the pins (13).
(b) Remove the circlip (18) the pins (19) and the index (14).
(c) Remove the inboard chain (1) from the sprocket (2).
(6) At the outboard chain (11):
(a) Remove the circlips (18) and pins (19).
(b) Remove the outboard chain (11) from the sprocket (12).
(7) Remove the cables (16) and (17) from the aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with mechanical aileron trim

Page 401
27-15-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Installation (Ref. Fig 401)
(1) Put the new cables (16) and (17) in approximately the installed positions in the wing.
(2) Install the fairleads (5) and (10) with the washers (6) and (8), and the bolts (7) and (9) to
hold the cables in position.
(3) Loosely connect the cables (16) and (17) at the turnbuckles (3) and (4).
(4) Use absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) to clean the sprockets (2) and (12).
(5) Apply a thin layer of grease (Material No. P04-002) to the teeth of the sprockets (2) and
(12).
(6) At the inboard chain (1):
(a) Put the chain (1) around the sprocket (2) in the same position you recorded during
the removal procedure.
(b) At the forward connection connect the chain (1) to the cable (16) with the pins (13)
and circlips (15).
(c) At the rear connection, install the index (14) and connect the chain (1) to the cable
(17) with the pins (19) and circlip (18).
(7) At the outboard chain (11):
(a) Put the chain (11) around the sprocket (12) and connect it to the cables (16) and
(17) with the pins (19) and circlips (18).
(8) Tighten the turnbuckles (3) and (4) to put a small amount of tension on the cables . Make
sure there is no slack in the cables.
(9) Safety the turnbuckles (3) and (4) with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
D. Close-Up
(2) Do the adjustment/test of the aileron trim (Ref. 27-15-00, Page Block 501).
(4) Install the wing access panels RB2, RB6, RB10, RB12 and RB13.
(5) Install the cockpit ceiling panel(s).

Page 402
27-15-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
19
B
13
14
17
A 18
15
16
B 1
C
2
3
A
6
7
10
9
8
12 C
11
C
6731
Aileron Trim / Chains and Cables - Removal/Installation

Figure 401

Page 403
27-15-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

Page 404
27-15-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AILERON TRIM ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
P04-002 Grease
2. Procedures (Ref. Fig 401)
A. Removal
(1) Open the access panel RB13 (Ref. 06-40-00).
(2) Remove the nut (3), the two washers (2), the washer (4) and the bolt (1).
(3) Loosen the lock nut and remove the control rod (5) from the actuator (6).
(4) Disconnect the actuator electric connector from the bulkhead plug inside the access panel.
(5) Remove the bolt (7) and washers (8), (9) and (10). Remove the actuator (6).
B. Installation
(1) Lubricate the bolts (1) and (7) with grease (Material No. P04-002).
(2) Put the actuator (6) and washers (9) and (10) in position in the wing.
(3) Install the bolt (7) and washer (8).
(4) Connect the actuator electric connector to the bulkhead plug.
(5) Install the control rod (5) on the actuator (6). Make sure that distance ‘X’ is between 10,5
and 11,5 mm (0.41 and 0.45 in) and the control rod (5) is aligned correctly for installation.
Tighten the locknut.
(6) Install the bolt (1), the two washers (2), the washer (4) and the nut (3).
(7) Do the adjustment/test of the aileron trim (Ref. 27-15-00, Page Block 501).
(9) Close the access panel RB13.
EFFECTIVITY: All H4 aircraft and H2 aircraft with

electrical aileron trim Page 401
27-15-13 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. BOLT
2. WASHER
A
5. CONTROL ROD
3. NUT
4. WASHER
6. ACTUATOR
10. WASHER
B
9. WASHER
A 8. WASHER
7. BOLT
B
'X'
6345
Aileron Trim Actuator - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All H4 aircraft and H2 aircraft with

electrical aileron trim Page 402
27-15-13 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RUDDER CONTROLS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The rudder controls the yawing movement of the aircraft and is controlled from the rudder pedals
through cables.
A trim-tab is installed on the rudder trailing edge and can be either mechanically or electrically
operated.
2. Description
A. Rudder (Ref. Fig. 1)
The rudder is of all metal construction with a spar, ribs and nose ribs covered with leading edge
panels and ribbed skin panels.
A balance horn is installed forward of the hinge line at the top. The horn provides aerodynamic
balance and contains mass balance weights. The weights must be adjusted to compensate for
changes in balance after repair or refinishing.
The rudder controls are shown on Figure 1 and comprise interconnected adjustable rudder bars
with cables connected to a bellcrank at the bottom of the vertical shaft of the rudder. The co-pilot
rudder pedal installation is optional.
A spring installed between the rear fuselage and the vertical shaft returns the rudder to a position
5° right when the rudder pedals are released.
The rudder control system is connected by cables and springs to the aileron control system to
give a small input to the ailerons when the rudder is operated.
B. Rudder Trim (Ref. Figs 2 and 3)
An electrically or mechanically operated trim-tab is installed which allows the aircraft to be

trimmed to straight flight without constant pressure on the rudder pedals.
The tab is of all metal construction and is installed on the rudder trailing edge with a rubberised
fabric hinge
On most aircraft, a bonding lead is installed between the tab and the rudder.
(1) Electrical trim system (Ref. Fig. 2)
A rudder trim switch located below the center of the instrument panel shelf controls the
actuator. Aircraft yaw trim condition is indicated on the center dial of the triple axis trim
indicator located on left side of the pilots instrument panel.
The tab electric actuator is located inside the rudder leading edge and is connected to the
tab with a push-pull rod.
The system is supplied with 28 VDC through the RUDDER TRIM circuit breaker.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
27-20-00 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Mechanical trim system (Ref. Fig. 3)
A trim control knob/position indicator, located on the left side of the pilot’s seat, is
connected by cables to a bellcrank located in the rudder leading edge. The bellcrank is
attached to the tab with a push-pull rod.
An adjustable friction clamp is installed on the bellcrank. This clamps the bellcrank
between two phenolic blocks to prevent flutter of the tab if a cable breaks or becomes
slack. For this reason the friction clamp must not be lubricated.
3. Operation
Movement of the left or right rudder pedal operates the cables to turn the rudder. Movement of the
rudder pedals also moves a bellcrank in the aileron system. This causes a small deflection of the
ailerons.
When the trim-tab is operated from the switch or control knob in the cockpit, it deflects the trim-tab. The
aerodynamic force on the trim-tab moves the rudder in the opposite direction and lets the aircraft be
trimmed to fly straight with no pressure on the rudder pedals.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
27-20-00 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RUDDER BAR POSITION

ADJUSTING SCREW
CO-PILOTS
RUDDER BAR RUDDER BAR POSITION
ADJUSTING SCREW
AILERON TO RUDDER
PILOTS INTERCONNECT CABLE
RUDDER BAR
PILOT/CO-PILOTS
RUDDER PEDAL RUDDER
CONNECTING ROD CONTROL CABLES
6383
Rudder Controls
Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
27-20-00 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C A
B A
TRIM SWITCH
TRIM POSITION INDICATOR (TYPICAL)
UP UP
TO FLAP TO
LD LD
TRIM TAB
C
ELECTRICAL TRIM
PRE SB 159 SHOWN
ACTUATOR
6748
Electrical Trim System

Figure 2
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 4
27-20-00 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BELLCRANK
TRIM TAB
BOWDEN CABLES
CONTROL KNOB/INDICATOR
A
TURNBUCKLES
PULLEY
6749
Mechanical Trim System

Figure 3
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 5
27-20-00 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 6
27-20-00 Dec 31/12
'e PILATUS !!!F'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RUDDER -ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. General
T he vertical stabilizer centerline is used as the zero datum for the rudder range of movement settings.
T he rudder pedals can be locked in the neutral position by two equal length wooden blocks put
between the pedals and the firewall.
Tensiometer
Rigging tool Local manufacture
Rudder pedal rigging blocks Local manufacture
B. Expendable Parts
27-22-01, F ig. 01 Locking clips To safety turnbuckles

(if installed)
P02-001 Lockwire 0,8 mm diameter
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) OnAircraft with Electrical Rudder Trim
(a) Energize the aircraft electrical system.
(b) Operate the rudder trim switch until the trim indicator is in the center (neutral)
position.
(c) Set all electrical power to OF F.
(2) OnAircraft with Mechanical Rudder Trim
(a) Move the trim lever until the indicator is in the center position.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 501
27-20-00 Jun 30/05
"e PILATUSii'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Functional Test (Ref. Fig. 501 and 502)
(1) Find the temperature in the fuselage.
(2) Move the rudder pedals to the neutral position.
(3) Make sure that the cable tensions are in limits.
(4) Make sure that the rudder is aligned with the center of the vertical stabilizer.
(5) Put the rigging tool in position against the trailing edge of the rudder.
(6) Move the rudder pedals fully to the left. Measure the distance between the pointer and the
rudder:
(a) Make sure that the distance is 234 mm± 11 mm (9.21 in.± 0.4 in.)(30°).
(7) Move the rudder pedals full to the right. Measure the distance between the pointer and the
rudder.
(a) Make sure that the distance is 234 mm± 11 mm (9.21 in. ± 0.4 in.)(30°).
(8) If the range of movement or cable tensions are not in limits, do the rudder system
C. Rudder System Adjustment (Ref. Fig. 501 and 502)
(1) Control Cable Tension:
(a) Find the temperature in the fuselage.
the fuselage stabilize for at least one hour before the temperature is taken.
(b) Move the rudder pedals to the neutral position and install the pedal rigging blocks.
(c) Adjust the rudder cable turnbuckles to get the correct cable tension.
(d) Make sure that the center line of the rudder and the vertical stabilizer are in line.
Adjust the cables as required.
(e) Safety the turnbuckles with new locking clips (if installed) or lockwire
(f) Remove the pedal rigging blocks.
(2) Range of Movement:
(a) Move the rudder pedals to the neutral position.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 502
27-20-00 Jun 30/05
"e PILATUS ii!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Put the pointer in position against the trailing edge of the rudder.
(c) Move the rudder pedals fully to the left. Measure the distance between the pointer
and the rudder:
(i) Make sure that the distance is 234 mm± 11 mm (9.21 in.± 0.4 in.)(30°).
(ii) Adjust the stop in the rear fuselage if necessary.
(d) Move the rudder pedals full to the right. Measure the distance between the pointer
and the rudder.
(i) Make sure that the distance is 234 mm± 11 mm (9.21 in.± 0.4 in.)(30°).
(ii) Adjust the stop in the rear fuselage if necessary.
(e) Tighten the stop lock nuts.
(3) Freedom of Movement
(a) Move the rudder pedals through the full range of movement and check that:
(i) The movement is smooth.
(ii) There is no restriction of movement.
(iii) There is no excessive play in the controls.
(4) Sense of Movement
(a) Push the left rudder pedal forward and make sure that the rudder moves to the left.
(b) Push the right rudder pedal forward and make sure that the rudder moves to the
right.
D. Close Up
(1 ) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 503
27-20-00 Jun 30/05
'ePILATUS:
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LEFT RUDDER STOP

(RIGHT STOP SIMILAR)
RIGGING TOOL
Rudder Range Of Movement - Adjustment I Test

Figure 501
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 504
27-20-00 Jun 30/05
� PILATUS ::ii'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
>.
.0
m
-"O
270 --��-+-��-1-��-+----��---1
z ·::;;
-·-
"O
� 00 260 --��-+-��-1-��-1-+--��----t---1
.2 E
II) CCI
c .....
��250 --��-+-��-t-��--��-t-��,,_��-1---1
Q) S2
jS 0
� � 240 --��-t-��-t---��-+--.t��-1--��---1
"C 0
Q) -
... :::::
·s�
C"
2so --��---r-��----1-�--�-r-��-1--�--1
Q) t::
a: m
� 220 --��---r-��--��-1-�-1-�-r-��-1---1
0
(..)
0
t:..210 --��----��-��-+-��-1---1
150 -+----r--..�.-....--.-.--.�.--;---.---,.�.---r--,--+--i
0 10 20 30 40 50
Temperature (°C)
Rudder Cable Tension Graph

Figure 502
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 505
27-20-00 Jun 30/05
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RUDDER TORQUE SHAFT - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This Page-Block gives the procedure to remove and install the torque shaft assembly used to turn the
rudder. The lower bearing is removed together with the torque shaft assembly.
P01-010 Solvent Or an approved alternative

P02-016 Scotch-Brite Very fine grade
P04-029 Paste, installation
P08-059 Adhesive
P10-015 CPC

- Hot air blower or heat lamps Local supply
- Bearing extraction tools Local supply
- Scraper, non-metallic Local supply
C. Expendable Parts
IPC Fig/Item Description Remarks
27-22-01, Fig 01/180 Bearing If required

27-22-01, Fig 01/250 Bearing, ball If required
27-22-01, Fig 01/45 Cotter pin Qty 2
27-22-01, Fig 01/305 Cotter pin Qty 1
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 401
27-22-01 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Procedures
WARNING: YOU MUST WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (GLOVES, FILTER
MASKS AND FACE-SHIELDS/SAFETY-GLASSES/GOGGLES). ABRASIVE DUST CAN
GET IN YOUR LUNGS OR ON YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE INJURY OR SKIN IRRITATION.
DO NOT INHALE DUST. WHEN AUTHORIZED, MAKE THE AREA MOIST BEFORE YOU
MANUALLY ABRADE TO PREVENT AIRBORNE DUST PARTICLES. MAKE SURE THAT
THE WORK AREA IS FULLY VENTILATED. OBEY YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS
WHEN YOU DRILL OR ABRADE PAINTS, FILLERS, OR ANY OTHER MATERIALS.
OBEY YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS WHEN YOU COLLECT AND DISCARD THE
DUST AND OTHER UNWANTED MATERIALS.
A. Job Set Up
(1) Put a warning sign in the flight compartment to tell personnel ‘Do not operate the flight
controls’.
(2) Remove the rudder (Ref. 55-41-11, Page Block 401).
(1) Disconnect the cables:
(a) Release the tension on the rudder control cables (Ref. 27-22-11, Page Block 401).
(b) Remove and discard the two cotter pins (9).
(c) Remove the nuts (10), the washers (11) and the bolts (13) to disconnect the cables
(12).
(2) Disconnect the spring:
(a) Remove and discard the cotter pin (7) and collect the washer (6).
(b) Hold the spring attachment (5) and remove the pin (4).
(c) Carefully release the tension on the spring attachment (5).
(3) Remove the torque shaft assy:
(a) Remove the bolts (14).
(b) Remove the nuts (3), the washers (2) and the bolts (1).
(c) Carefully lift the torque shaft assy, together with the lower bearing (15) out of the
rear fuselage.
(d) Remove the lower bearing (15) from the rudder control shaft (8).
(e) If a new lower bearing (15) is to be installed, discard the old lower bearing.
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 402
27-22-01 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Remove the upper bearing only if it needs to be replaced as follows:
(a) Carefully put the torque shaft assy onto a suitably protected work bench.
(b) Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with solvent (Material No.
P01-008) and fully clean the areas adjacent to the rivet (18) positions:
• Make sure that you clean inside and outside of the upper end of the torque
shaft assy.
• Clean the areas until clean absorbent paper made moist with solvent stays
clean when applied to the surfaces.
(c) Identify and make a record of the quantity, type and size of rivets (18) installed.
NOTE: There are three different approved configurations of rivet (18) installation
(Ref. Table 401).
RIVET QTY OF
CONFIG ACCEPTABLE RIVET TYPE
DIAMETER RIVETS
Blind Rivet, Universal Head CR3223-5

(P/N 939.19.86.111),
Blind Rivet, Universal Head CR163-5-6
(P/N 939.19.80.711),
Rivet, Universal Head MS20470-AD5
1 4 mm 8 (P/N 939.17.81.026) (Ref. NOTE <1>),
Rivet, Universal Head SN213102
(P/N 939.13.81.026) (Ref. NOTE <1>), or
Rivet, Blind Half-round Monel
NAS1919M05S03U
(P/N 939.19.89.113)
Rivet, Blind Half-round Monel
NAS1919M06S03U
2 4,8 mm 8 (P/N 939.19.89.133) or
Rivet, Universal Head MS20470-AD6
(P/N 939.17.81.034) (Ref. NOTE <1>)
Rivet, Universal Head SN213102
3 5 mm 8
(P/N 939.13.81.034) (Ref. NOTE <1>)
Table 401 - Approved Design - Rivet Configurations
NOTE: <1> The P/N given are dummy Part Numbers, the specific grip length is as
required.
(d) Mark a line across the upper surfaces of the drilled flange (16) and the rudder
control shaft (8) with a permanent marker.
NOTE: This is to make alignment of the rivet holes easier during installation of the
drilled flange (16).
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 403
27-22-01 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) Remove the rivets (18) as follows:
CAUTION: USE A DRILL STOP TO MAKE SURE THAT YOU DO NOT DRILL TOO
DEEP AND INTO THE DRILLED FLANGE (16).
(i) Mark the center of each rivet head with a center punch or equivalent. Make
sure that the punch mark is dead center with precision.
(ii) Set the drill stop to depth ‘D’ (where ‘D’ is just less than ‘H’ and ‘H’ is the
depth of the rivet head.
(iii) Use the correct size clearance-drill for the rivet type (Ref. Table 401) and drill
into the center of each rivet head to the depth D.
(iv) Insert the shank of the clearance-drill into the hole in the rivet head. Use the
shank as a lever to break the rivet head from the rivet tail.
(v) Use a parallel punch or clearance drift the correct diameter with sufficient
clearance to push the rivet tail through the hole.
(vi) Remove the rivet tails and the swarf from the torque shaft assy.
(f) Remove the drilled flange (16) from the rudder control shaft (8).
(g) Remove the bearing support (17) as follows:
CAUTION: DO NOT USE TOO MUCH HEAT TO REMOVE THE BEARING

SUPPORT (17) OR THE BALL BEARING (19). DO NOT EXCEED
120°C (224°F) FOR MORE THAN 15 MINUTES.
(i) Apply heat and carefully remove the bearing support (17) from the rudder
control shaft (8). Use an extraction tool if necessary.
NOTE: Steps 3.B.(4)(g)(ii) and (iii) are not necessary if the bearing support (17) is
to be replaced as an assembly with the ball bearing assy (19) integral.
(ii) Put the bearing support (17) onto a suitably protected work bench. Apply heat
and remove the ball bearing assy (19) from the bearing support (17). Use an
extraction tool if necessary.
(iii) Discard the ball bearing assy (19).
(iv) Use a non-metallic scraper and absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031)
made moist with solvent (Material No. P01-010) to remove the unwanted
adhesive and fully clean the parts that follow:
• The bearing support (17)

• The drilled flange (16)
• The upper end of the rudder control shaft (8).
Clean the parts until clean absorbent paper made moist with solvent stays
clean when applied to the surfaces.
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 404
27-22-01 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(1) Install the upper bearing onto the torque shaft assy only if it needs to be replaced as
follows:
(a) Install the ball bearing assy (19) into the bearing support (17) as follows:
NOTE: Steps 3.C.(1)(a)(i) thru (vii) are not necessary if the bearing support (17) is
to be replaced as an assembly with the ball bearing assy (19) integral.
(i) Use the Scotch-Brite (Material No. P02-016) to lightly roughen the bonding
surfaces of the bearing support (17) and the outer race of the ball bearing
(19).
(ii) Use absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with the solvent
(Material No. P01-010) and clean the bonding surfaces of the bearing support
(17) and the outer race of the ball bearing assy (19).
(iii) Mix the two parts of the adhesive (Material No. P08-059) in accordance with
(iv) Apply a layer the adhesive (Material No. P08-059) to the:
• Inner surface of the bore of the bearing support (17) and the
• Outer race of the ball bearing assy (19).
Make sure there is sufficient adhesive to get a full bond when the ball bearing
assy (19) is installed.
(v) Put the ball bearing assy (19) into the bearing support (17) and make sure
that it is in the correct position before the adhesive starts to cure.
(vi) Use absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with the solvent
(Material No. P01-010) to remove any unwanted adhesive.
(vii) Let the adhesive (Material No. P08-059) cure in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: The typical cure time is five to seven days at room temperature or
two hours at between 60 and 70°C (128 and 144°F).
(b) Install the bearing support (17) onto the torque shaft assy as follows:
(i) Use the Scotch-Brite (Material No. P02-016) to lightly roughen the bonding
surfaces of the rudder control shaft (8) and the inner race of the ball bearing
(19).
(ii) Use absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with the solvent
(Material No. P01-010) and clean the bonding surfaces of the rudder control
shaft (8) and the inner race of the ball bearing assy (19).
(iii) Mix the two parts of the adhesive (Material No. P08-059) in accordance with
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 405
27-22-01 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(iv) Apply a layer the adhesive (Material No. P08-059) to the:
• Inner surface of the inner race of the ball bearing assy (19) and the
• Outer surface of the rudder control shaft (8) above the bush (20).
Make sure there is sufficient adhesive to get a full bond when the ball bearing
assy (19) is installed.
(v) Put the bearing support (17) onto the rudder control shaft (8) and make sure
that it is in the correct position against the bush (20) before the adhesive
starts to cure.
(Material No. P01-010) to remove any unwanted adhesive.
(c) Install the drilled flange (16) onto the torque shaft assy as follows:
(i) Measure the rivet holes in the rudder control shaft (8) and the drilled flange
(16):
• Make sure that there are eight rivet holes in total of the same size and
within the tolerances given in Table 402.
• If necessary, drill any missing hole positions and increase the rivet hole
diameters to the next size up during Step 3.C.(1)(c)(iii).
• If any of the holes are more than 5,22 mm diameter, contact Pilatus
Aircraft Ltd for repair instructions.
RIVET
CONFIG RIVET HOLE SIZE TOLERANCE
DIAMETER
1 4 mm Between 4,1 and 4,22 mm Diameter

2 4,8 mm Between 4,9 and 5,02 mm Diameter
3 5 mm Between 5,1 and 5,22 mm Diameter
Table 402 - Rivet Hole Size Tolerances
(ii) Put the drilled flange (16) into position on the rudder control shaft (8) and hold
in position with gripper pins or equivalent in each hole. Use the marks you
made during Step 3.B.(4)(d) to align the holes.
(iii) Remove one gripper pin at a time and drill the rivet holes to the correct size if
necessary (Ref. Table 402).
(iv) Remove the drilled flange (16) from the rudder control shaft (8) and deburr
the drilled rivet holes.
(v) Remove all swarf from the torque shaft assy.
(Material No. P01-010) and clean the drilled flange (16) and the upper end of
the rudder control shaft (8).
(vii) Apply a layer of installation paste (Material No. P04-029) to the outer
diameter of the upper end of the rudder control shaft (8) above the bearing
support (17).
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 406
27-22-01 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(viii) Put the drilled flange (16) into position on the rudder control shaft (8) and hold
in position with gripper pins or equivalent in each hole.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT YOU INSTALL EIGHT RIVETS OF THE SAME
SIZE AND SPECIFICATION OF AN APPROVED DESIGN (REF.
TABLE 401) AT EACH HOLE.
(ix) Install eight rivets (18) in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Remove one gripper pin at a time when you install each rivet (18).
(x) Use absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with the solvent
(Material No. P01-010) to remove any unwanted installation paste.
(xi) Let the adhesive (Material No. P08-059) cure in accordance with the
NOTE: The typical cure time is five to seven days at room temperature or
two hours at between 60 and 70°C (128 and 144°F).
(xii) Apply CPC (Material No. P10-015) to the upper bore of the rudder control
shaft (8) in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(2) Install the torque shaft assy:
(a) Make sure the lower bearing is clean.
(b) Make sure the bottom part of the rudder control shaft (8) that goes into the lower
bearing is clean.
(c) Put the lower bearing (15) on the bottom of the rudder control shaft (8).
(d) Carefully put the torque shaft assy, together with the lower bearing (15), in the
installed position.
(e) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P04-039) to the bolts (14) and (1).
(f) Install, but do not fully tighten, the bolts (14).
(g) Install the bolts (1), the washers (2) and the nuts (3).
(h) Torque the nuts (3) to 2,83 Nm (25 lbf. in.).
(i) Tighten and torque the bolts (14) to 3,95 Nm (35 lbf. in.).
(3) Connect the spring:
(a) Pull the spring attachment (5) to align the holes and install the pin (4).
(b) Install the washer (6) and a new cotter pin (7).
(4) Connect the cables:
(a) Connect the cables (12) with the bolts (13), the washers (11) and the nuts (10).
(b) Install new cotter pins (9).
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 407
27-22-01 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Make sure the cables (12) are correctly installed on the pulleys in the fuselage (Ref.
27-22-11, Page Block 401).
(d) Temporarily tension the cables (12) at the turnbuckles sufficiently to keep the cables
on the pulleys (Ref. 27-22-11, Page Block 401).
NOTE: The cables are tensioned correctly during the adjustment/test after
installation of the rudder.
D. Job Close Up
(1) Install the rudder (Ref. 55-41-11, Page Block 401).
(2) Remove the warning sign from the flight compartment.
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 408
27-22-01 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B
2 3 A
16
3
2
1
4
6
7
13
12
8
11
A
10
9
B
13
14
12
15
11
10
9
6750
Torque Shaft Assy - Removal / Installation

EFFECTIVITY:
Page 409
27-22-01 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SECTION
C 16
B-B
18
17
19
20
18
16
8
6837
Torque Shaft Assy - Removal / Installation

EFFECTIVITY:
Page 410
27-22-01 May 30/19
'S PILATUSiiF'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RUDDER CONTROL CABLES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
A. Expendable Parts
Fig. Item Description IPC Ref.
401-01 Cotter pin 27-22-01, Fig. 01

401-09 Cotter pin 27-22-01, Fig. 01
401-12 Cotter pin 27-22-01, Fig. 01
401-18 Cotter pin 27-22-01, Fig. 01
401-23 Cotter pin 27-22-01, Fig. 01
401-29 Cotter pin 27-22-01, Fig. 01
P02-001 Lockwire
A Remove the access panels from the fuselage to get access to the rudder cables.
3. Removal (Ref.Fig 401)
A Remove the locking wire and loosen the turnbuckles (26).
B. Remove the cotter pins (18), nuts (17), washers (16) and bolts (15). Remove the pulleys (19).
C. Remove the cotter pins (23), nuts (22), washers (21) and bolts (20). Remove the pulleys (24).
D. Remove the cotter pin (1), nut (5), washer (3) and bolt (2). Remove the pulley (4). Discard the
cotter pin.
E. Remove the cotter pin {12), nut (14), washer {11) and bolt (10). Remove the pulley {13). Discard
the cotter pin.
F. Remove the cotter pins (9), nuts (8), washers (7) and bolts (6) and remove the cables from the
rudder torque tube. Discard the cotter pins.
G. Remove the cotter pins (29), nuts (28), washers (27) and bolts (25) and remove the cables from
the control bellcrank. Discard the cotter pins.
H. Remove the rudder control cables.
EFFECTIVITY: All
I 27-22-11
Page
Jun
401
14/92
"EPILATUS!i!F'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Apply grease (Material No. P04-002) to the pulley and cable attachment bolts.
B. Put the cables in position in the aircraft.
C. Install the bolts {25), washers {27) and nuts {28). Safety the nuts with new cotter pins {29).
D. Put the pulleys {19) in position and install the bolts {15), washers {16) and nuts {17). Safety the
nuts with new cotter pins {18).
E. Put the pulleys {24) in position and install the bolt {20), washer {21) and nut {22). Safety the nut
with a new cotter pin {23).
F. Put the pulley (4) in position and install the bolt (2), washer (3) and nut (5). Safety the nut with a
new cotter pin {1).
G. Put the pulley (13) in position and install the bolt {1O), washer (11) and nut (14). Safety the nut
H. Put the cables in position on the torque tube and install the bolts (6), washers (7) and nuts (8).
Safety the nuts with new cotter pins {9).
I. Check that the cables run freely through the pulleys.
5. Test
A. Rig the rudder controls (Ref. 27-20-00, Page Block 501).
6. Close Up
A. Safety the turnbuckles with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
C. Install the access panels.
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page402
27-22-11 Jun 14/92
'9PILATUS!5!7
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
YI
F
/)0
v�"
{t
B
6. BOLT
8. NUT
9. COTIER PIN
COTIER PIN
4. PULLEY
19. PULLEY �
16. WASHER )
17. NUT
18. COTIER PIN
13. PULLEY
21. WASHER
26. TURNBUCKLE
24. PULLEY
28. NUT
Rudder Control Cables - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
I 27-22-11
Page 403
Jun 14/92
'WPLATUSii!"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RUDDER TRIM TAB -ADJUSTMENT/TEST
Protractor
8. Expendable Parts
Cotter Pin 27-25-09, Fig. 01
2. Procedure
A. Freed om of Movement
(1) Operate the trim control. Make sure that:
(a) The tab movement Is smooth with no restrictions.
(b) There is no rough operation, excessive play or restriction of movement.
8. Se nse of Movement
(1) Operate the rudder trim switch. Check that:
(a) When the trim Indicator shows nose left trim, the rudder trim tab moves to the right.
(b) When the trim indicator shows nose right trim, the rudder trim tab moves to the left.
C. Range of Movement
The rudder centerline Is used as the zero datum for the rudder trim tab range of movement
check.
(1) Lock the rudder pedals in the neutral position.
(2) Operate the rudder trim switch untH the trim indicator shows the neutral trim position.
(3) Check that the trim tab centerline Is aligned with the rudder centerline. If necessary adjust
as follows:
(a) On aircraft with SB159:
(i) Remove the cotter pin, nut, washer and bolt. Discard the cotter pin.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with electrical rudder trim

CONFIG 1
I 27-25-00
Page 501
Dec 14/91
";ePILATUSii"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) On aircraft without SB159:
(i) Remove the nut, washer and bolt.
(c) Loosen the lock nut on the rod end. Adjust the length of the push pull rod.
(d) Tighten the locknut. Install the bolt, washer and nut.
(e) On aircraft with SB159:
(i) Safety the nut with a new cotter pin.
(f) Check the trim tab for freedom of movement and range of movement.
(4) Operate the rudder trim switch until the trim indicator shows aircraft nose fully left.
(a) Check with the protractor that the trailing edge of the tab is 5° + 0°, - 0.5° right of
neutral.
(5) Operate the rudder trim switch until the trim indicator shows the aircraft nose fully right.
(a) Check with the protractor that the trailing edge of the tab Is 7° + 0.5°, - 0° left of
neutral.
NOTE: The range of movement is controlled by internal stops in the electrical actuator. If
the range of movement Is Incorrect, replace the actuator.
3. Close Up
B. Remove the rudder pedal locking device.
CONFIG 1
I
Page502
27-25-00 Dec 14/91
'5PILATUSEF'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. BOLT
3. WASHER
AIRCRAFT WITH SB159
AIRCRAFT WITHOUT SB159
Rudder Trim Tab - Adjustment/Test

Figure 501
CONFIG 1
Page 503
27-25-00 Jun 14/92
"'!EPILATUSEP'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Intentionally blank
CONFIG 1
Page504
27-25-00 Dec 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RUDDER TRIM TAB - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
- Protractor
- Spring Balance (0 - 50 N)
- Tensiometer
P01-010 Solvent If required

P02-031 Absorbent Paper If required
2. Procedures
A. Freedom of Movement
(1) Operate the trim control knob. Make sure that:
(a) The tab movement is smooth with no restrictions.
(b) There is no rough operation, excessive play or restriction of movement.
B. Sense of Movement
(1) Operate the rudder trim lever. Check that:
(a) When the trim indicator shows nose left trim, the rudder trim tab moves to the right
of neutral.
(b) When the trim indicator shows nose right trim, the rudder trim tab moves to the left
of neutral.
C. Range of Movement (Ref. Figs. 501 and 503)
The rudder centerline is used as the zero datum for the rudder trim tab range of movement
check.
(1) Lock the rudder pedals in the neutral position.
(2) Move the rudder trim lever to the neutral position.
(3) Check that the trim tab centerline is aligned with the rudder centerline.
(a) If necessary adjust the cable turnbuckles, handtight only, to align the trim tab.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with mechanical rudder trim

CONFIG 2
Page 501
27-25-00 Sep 30/13
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Use the tensiometer and adjust the turnbuckles evenly to get the correct cable
tension (Ref. Fig. 503).
(c) Make sure the trim tab is aligned at the neutral position.
(d) Safety the turnbuckles with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(4) Operate the rudder trim lever to give full left trim.
(a) Check with the protractor that the trailing edge of the tab is 6° ±1° (6,1 mm ± 1 mm
(0.23 in. ± 0.4 in.)) right of neutral.
(5) Operate the rudder trim lever to give full right trim.
(a) Check with the protractor that the trailing edge of the tab is 6° ±1° (6,1 mm ± 1 mm
(0.23 in. ± 0.4 in.)) left of neutral.
D. Rudder-Trim Friction-Brake - Functional Test (Ref. Figs. 501 and 502)
CAUTION: YOU MUST NOT APPLY LUBRICANT TO THE TRIM-TAB FRICTION-BRAKE.
(1) Remove the access panel EL2 and FL2 (Ref. 06-40-00, Page Block 201).
(2) Remove the tension from the rudder-trim operating-cables (Ref, Fig. 501):
(a) Remove the lockwire from the rudder-trim operating-cables.
(b) Loosen the turnbuckles to slacken the rudder-trim operating-cables.
(3) Disconnect the rudder-trim operating-cables from the segment plate (1) (Ref. Fig. 502):
CAUTION: DO NOT DROP THE LOCKWIRE WHEN YOU REMOVE IT. THE
LOCKWIRE CAN BE A LOOSE ARTICLE HAZARD.
(a) Remove the lockwire that safeties the ends of the cables (3) to its related clevis (2).
(b) Remove the ends of the cables (3) from the related clevis (2).
(4) Make sure the segment plate (1) is clean and dry, and is not contaminated with oil or
grease.
(5) If necessary, use absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with solvent
(Material No. P01-010) to clean the segment plate (1).
(6) Use a spring balance to move the trim-tab operating-rod in both directions (forwards and
rearwards). The force required must be between 25 and 30 N (5.62 and 6.74 lbf).
(7) If the force is not in the limits, turn the adjuster nut to get the correct force.
(8) Connect the rudder-trim operating-cables to the segment plate (1):
(a) Put the ends of the cables (3) in the related clevis (2).
(b) Make sure the cables (3) are connected to the correct clevis and are not crossed.

CONFIG 2
Page 502
27-25-00 Sep 30/13
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Safety the ends of the cables (3) to the related clevis with lockwire (Material No.
P02-001) as shown on Figure 502, View C.
(9) Do the adjustment of the Range of Movement (Ref. Para. 2.C.).
(10) Do the test for Freedom of Movement (Ref. Para. 2.A.).
(11) Install the access panels EL2 and FL2.
3. Close Up
B. Remove the rudder pedal locking device.

CONFIG 2
Page 503
27-25-00 Sep 30/13
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
TRIM TAB
TURNBUCKLES
6397
Rudder Trim Tab - Adjustment/Test

Figure 501

CONFIG 2
Page 504
27-25-00 Sep 30/13
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A A
TRIM TAB
B
SPRING BALANCE
ADJUSTER
NUT TRIM TAB
2
3
C
C C
2
LOCKWIRE
6755
Rudder-Trim Friction-Brake - Adjustment/Test

Figure 502

CONFIG 2
Page 505
27-25-00 Sep 30/13
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
33
32
31
30
Upper Limit
29
(To convert Newtons to Kilograms-Force, divide by 10)
28
27
Required Cable Tensions (N)
26
25
24
23
Lower Limit
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
0 10 20 30 40 50
Temperature (°C)
6756
Rudder-Trim Cable-Tension
Figure 503

CONFIG 2
Page 506
27-25-00 Sep 30/13
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RUDDER TRIM TAB - INSPECTION / CHECK
1. General
This Page-Block gives the procedure to examine the rudder trim tab for structural integrity and security
of attachment to the rudder. The trim tab is attached to the trailing edge of the rudder by an upper and
lower rubber strip. The two part rubber strip functions as a hinge to permit movement of the trim tab left
and right. The rubber strips are attached by rivets.

3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) Put a warning sign in the flight compartment to tell personnel ‘Do not operate the flight
controls’.
B. Inspection (Ref. Fig. 601)
(1) Examine the trim tab to rudder attachment for missing, loose or pulled rivets.
(2) Examine the parts of the rubber strip you can see for splits, wear and perishing.
(3) Do a check of the structural integrity of the trim tab:
NOTE: This check is to make sure there are no loose rivets missed by the visual
examination.
(a) At the bottom end of the trim tab:
• Use your hands to hold the leading and trailing edges and then apply a
twisting force (Ref. View B)
• Make sure that the top end of the trim tab does not twist in the opposite
direction.
(4) If any faults are found, refer to SRM 55-20-00 for replacement instructions.
C. Job Close Up
(1) Remove the warning sign from the flight compartment.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 601
27-25-00 Sep 30/13
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B
C
APPLY A TWISTING B
FORCE TO THE TRIM TAB
SECTION
C-C
6754
RUBBER STRIP
Rudder Trim Tab - Inspection / Check

Figure 601
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 602
27-25-00 Sep 30/13
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RUDDER TRIM ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This topic gives the procedure to remove and install the rudder trim actuator on aircraft equipped with
electrically operated rudder trim.

- Blanking caps For electrical connectors
B. Expendable Parts
27-25-01, Fig. 01 Cotter Pin Fig. 401, Item 6
3. Job Set Up
A. Remove the access panel EL2 from the right side of the rudder.
4. Procedures
A. Removal (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Disconnect the electric connector (7).
(2) Put blanks on the electrical connectors.
(3) Remove the cotter pin (6), nut (5), washers (4) and (3), and bolt (2). Discard the cotter pin
(6).
(4) Remove the bolt (8), washer (9) and the two distance pieces (10).
(5) Remove the actuator (1) from the rudder.
(6) Remove the push pull rod from the actuator.
B. Installation (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Install the push pull rod to actuator. The distance between the end face of the actuator ram
and the end face of the push pull rod must be 22 mm.
(2) Put the actuator (1) and the two distance pieces (10) in the installation position.
(3) Install the bolt (8) and washer (9).
(4) Remove the blanks from the electrical connectors.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft equipped with electrically

operated rudder trim
Page 401
27-25-13 Mar 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Connect the electrical connector (7) inside the rudder. Make sure that the rubber grommet
is installed on the cable at the rib cut-out.
(6) Install the bolt (2), washers (3) and (4), and nut (5).
C. Test
(1) Do the adjustment/test of the rudder trim system (Ref. 27-25-00, Page Block 501).
D. Close Up
(2) Install the access panel EL2.

Page 402
27-25-13 Mar 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10
A
B
4
9 5
8 7
6
B
22 mm PUSH-PULL ROD
6333
Rudder Trim Tab Actuator - Removal/Installation

Figure 401

Page 403
27-25-13 Mar 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

Page 404
27-25-13 Mar 30/08
"SPILATUS!E"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELEVATOR CONTROLS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The elevator controls the aircraft in the pitch axis.
The elevator consists of two identical units installed on the trailing edge of the horizontal stabilizer. Left
and right units are connected to the control lever on aircraft centerline.
Elevator movement is controlled by forward and rearward movement of the control column through
rods, levers and cables.
Pitch trim in flight is provided by the variable incidence horizontal stabilizer (Ref. 27-40-00).
2. Component Description
A. Elevators
The elevators are of metal construction with a spar, ribs and nose ribs covered with leading edge
skin and ribbed skin panels. A piano type hinge is attached to the end of the trailing edge for the
balance tab attachment.
A pitch change horn is installed on one end of the elevator .
Mass balance weights are installed in aerodynamic balance horns at the outer end of each
elevator unit. Weights must be adjusted to compensate for changes in center of balance
following repair or refinishing work.
B. Balance Tabs.
Balance tabs are installed with piano type hinges on the inboard trailing edge of each elevator
unit.
Control rods attached to the horizontal stabilizer move tabs in opposite direction to elevator.
Control rod length can be adjusted on the ground.
C. Trim Tabs
Trim tabs are installed on the trailing edge of each elevator unit outboard of the balance tabs.
The trim tabs are rivetted to the elevator units and are adjusted on the ground in response to
Flight Test results.
3. Operation
Movement of the control column forward or aft operates the controls to the elevator.
When the elevator starts to move, the rod to the balance tab moves the tab in the opposite direction.
This reduces the control forces for the pilot.
EFFECTIVITV: All
I
Page 1
27-30-00 Jun 14/92
"'5PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LEVER
ELEVATOR
/
� BALANCE TAB
CONTROL COLUMN
CONTROL CABLES
E- _ - -TY - -
F F_ E _C T -
V I
I : A II
----------- 1 Elevator Controls
Figure 1
I
Page2
27-30-00 Jun 14/92
'ePILATUS::r
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELEVATOR CONTROLS - ADJUSTMENT I TEST

110.85.06.047 Gauge setting, control column
Rigging tool Local manufacture
B. Expendable Parts
27-31-01, Fig. 01 Locking clips (to safety

turnbuckles) (if installed)
55-11-01, Fig. 01 Plug, rubber (if required}
A. Job Set Up
(1) Remove access panel FB7.
(2) On aircraft with electrical trim:
CAUTION: MA XIMUM CONTINUOUS OPERATING (ON) TIME OF HORIZONTA L

STABILIZER ACTUATOR MUST NOT EXCEED 30 SECONDS A ND MUST BE
FOLLOWED BY MINIMUM 5 MINUTES COOLING DOWN (OFF) TIME.
(a) Energize the aircraft electrical system.
(b) Operate the trim switch until the indicator is in the neutral position.
(c) Set all electrical power to OFF.
(3) On aircraft with mechanical trim:
(a) Operate the trim handle until the indicator is in the neutral position.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 501
27-30-00 Nov 30/03
'5PILATUS:'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Functional Test
(1) Find the temperature in the fuselage.
(3) Make sure that the cable tension at the center of the cables is in limits.
(4) Make sure that the elevator centreline is in line with the horizontal stabilizer centreline.
(5) Put the pointer of the rigging tool in position at the center of the elevator trailing edge.
(6) Remove the setting gauge from the pilot's control column.
(7) Move the control column fully rearwards.
(8) Measure from the pointer to the elevator trailing edge. Make sure that the elevator moves
up 204 ± 7 mm (8.03 ± 0.28 in.)(30°).
(9) Move the control column fully forward.
(10) Measure from the pointer to the elevator trailing edge. Make sure that the elevator moves
down 170 ± 7 mm (6.69 ± 0.28 in.)(25°).
(11) If the range of movement or cable tensions are not in limits, do the elevator system
C. Elevator System Adjustment
(1) Control Cable Tension (Ref. Fig. 502)
(a) Find the temperature in the fuselage.
the fuselage stabilize for at least one hour before the temperature is taken.
(b) Install the setting gauge on the pilot's control column.
(c) Remove the locking clips (if installed} or lockwire from the cable turnbuckles (4).
(d) Adjust the turnbuckles (4) in the rear fuselage to give the correct cable tension.
(e) Make sure that the centerline of the elevator is in line with the centerline of the
stabilizer.
(f) If necessary, adjust the turnbuckles.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 502
27-30-00 Nov 30/03
� PILATUS :::;'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(g) Safety the turnbuckles (4) with new locking clips (if installed) or lockwire
(2) Range of Movement
CAUTION: DO NOT USE THE BALANCE TAB TRAILING EDGE TO MEASURE THE
RANGE OF MOVEMENT.
(a) Put the pointer of the rigging tool in position at the center of the elevator trailing
edge.
(b) Remove the setting gauge from the pilot's control column.
(c) Move the control column fully rearwards.
(d) Make sure that the elevator moves up 204 mm± 7 mm (8.03 in. ± 0.28 in.). If
movement is incorrect adjust as follows:
(i) If movement is less than 197 mm (7.76 in.), carefully remove material with a
file from the control lever up stop (1) until the elevator up movement is in
limits.
(ii) If movement is more than 211 mm (8.31 in.), replace the rubber plug (travel
stop)(3) on the stabilizer. Use a file to remove material from the stop to get
the correct dimension.
(e) Move the control column fully forward.
(f) Make sure that the elevator moves down 170 mm ± 7 mm (6.69 in. ± 0.28 in.). If
movement is incorrect adjust as follows:
(i) If movement is less than 163 mm (6.42 in.), carefully remove material with a
file from the control lever down stop (2) until the elevator up movement is in
limits.
(ii) If movement is more than 177 mm (6.97 in.) replace the rubber plug (travel
stop)(3) on the stabilizer. Use a file to remove material from the stop to get
the correct dimension.
(a) Operate control column through the full range of elevator movement. Check for
rough operation, excessive play, or restriction of movement.
(a) Move the control column to the rear. Make sure that the elevator moves up.
(b) Move the control column forwards. Make sure that the elevator moves down.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 503
27-30-00 Nov 30/03
'S PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Close Up
(1) Remove the rigging tool from the trailing edge of the elevator.
(3) Install the access panel FB7.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 504
27-30-00 Nov 30/03
�PILATUSiF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. CONTROL LEVER
UP STOP
2. CONTROL LEVER
DOWN STOP
Elevator - Adjustment/Test
Figure 501
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 505
27-30-00 Nov 30/03
'S PILATUS:;
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
290
I
.,V
280
v
I/
270
.,v
v
/
260
J/
/
0 / ,/
,- 250
>
.0
(])
�/ .. v�
_:g / /
z -�
--o / I/
c:
o
·-
�
en
E
240
v �
v
(/)
c: cu
..... /
v
v
Q) O>
I- 0 Upper Limit
/
.!!? � 230
/
V'
.c 0
ca -
0 en /
"C c:
/
�/
0
Q)
.!:: ]: /
:::J Q) 220 /
C'"Z
Q) t:'.
a: Q) /� v Lower Limit
v
>
c:
0 / ,/
� 210
,/
/'
,
v
:t::..
.
v v
/
v
/
200
v �
v
I/
190
v
v
/
.. v
180
v
I/
170
10 20 30 40 50
0
Temperature (°C)
Elevator Control Cable Tension Graph

Figure 502
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 506
27-30-00 Nov 30/03
'9 PILATUS 5iF'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELEVATOR CONTROL CABLES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING: MAKE SURE THE ELEVATORS ARE SUPPORTED BEFORE THE CABLES ARE
DISCONNECTED. THE ELEVATOR WILL DROP WHEN THE CABLES ARE DISCONNECTED.
A. Expendable Parts
Fig 401-09 Cotter pin 27-31-01, Fig. 01

Fig.401-11 Cotter pin (Qty 2) 27-31-01, Fig. 01
Fig 401-18 Cotter pin (Qty 2) 27-31-01, Fig. 01
8. Consumable Materials (Ref. 20-31-00)
A. Remove the access panels from the underside of the fuselage to get access to the forward end
of the cables and the cable turnbuckles.
3. Removal (Ref. Fig . 401)
A. Remove the locking wire from the turnbuckles.
B. Loosen the turnbuckles.
C. Remove the cotter pins (11), nuts (12), washers (13) and bolts (14). Discard the cotter pins.
D. Remove the cotter pin (9), nut (8), washer (7) and bolt (6), and remove the two pulleys (10).
Discard the cotter pin.
E. Remove the self locking nuts (1), washers (2) and (4), and bolts (5) and remove the fairlead (3).
F. Remove the cotter pin (22), nut (23), washer (24) and bolt (20) and remove the pulley (21).
G. Remove the cotter pins (18), nuts (19), washers (17) and bolts (16). Discard the cotter pins.
H. Remove the cotter pin (32), nut (33), washers (31) and bolt {30) and remove the pulley {34).
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 401
27-31-11 Jun 14/92
"ePILATUSE!!iF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
I. Remove the cotter pin (28), nut (29), washer (27) and bolt (26), and remove the pulley (25).
J. Remove the control cables (15).
A. Apply grease (Material No. P04-002) to the pulley and cable attachment bolts.
B. Identify the correct cable for each cables position.
C. Loosen one turnbuckle on each cable.
D. Put the cable in position in the aircraft.
E. Put the pulley (25) in position and install the bolt (26), washer (27) and nut (29). Safety the nut
F. Put the pulley (34) in position and install the bolt (30), washers (31) and nut (33). Safety the nut
G. Put the cable front ends in position on the control lever and install the bolts (16), washers (17)
and nuts (19). Safety the nuts with new cotter pins (18).
H. Put the pulley (21) in position and install the bolt (20), washer (24) and nut (23). Safety the nut
I. Put the fairlead (3) in position and install the bolts (5), washers (2) and (4), and self locking nuts
(1).
J. Put the pulleys (1O) in position and install the bolt (6), washer (7) and nut (8). Safety the nut with
a new cotter pin (9).
K. Put the cable rear ends in position on the control lever on the elevator and install the bolts (14),
washers (13) and nuts (12). Safety the nuts with new cotter pins (11) .
L. Rig the elevator controls (Ref. 27-30-00, Page Block 501).
M. Safety the turnbuckles with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
5. Close Up
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 402
27-31-11 Jun 14/92
"e PILATUS i!!EF'
PC-6
7. WASHER 8. NUT
9. COTIER PIN
3. FAIRLEAD
5. BOLT
31. WASHER
00 28. COTIER PIN

r---32. COTIERPIN
33. NUT
'-1 34. PULLEY
��
25. PULLEY
26. BOLT
16. BOLT
18. COTIER PIN
21. PULLEY
Elevator Control Cables - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 403
27-31-11 Jun 14/92
'e Pl LATUS 55?"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELEVATOR BALANCE TABS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. General
The elevator centerline is used as the datum for the balance tab settings.
The balance tab neutral setting is at zero degrees deflection to the elevator. The tab centerline is
aligned with elevator centerline.
110.85.06.028 Protractor, elevator tab

110.85.06.0 47 Gauge setting, control column For straight control columns
3. Procedure
A. Set the horizontal stabilizer to the neutral position:
(2) Operate the trim switch until the horizontal stabilizer trim indicator shows neutral.
(3) Remove all electrical power.
B. Install the control column rigging lock on the pilots control column.
C. Check that the balance tab is set at 0° (zero) to the elevator. Adjust the tab as follows:
(1) Remove the nut (5), washers (3) and (4), and bolt (2).
(2) Loosen the lock nut on the control rod end fitting.
(3) Adjust the length of the control rod.
(4) Tighten the lock nut on the control rod end fitting.
(5) Put the control rod in position and install the bolt (2), washers (3) and (4) and self locking
nut (5). Make sure that the nut is in safety.
4. Close Up
B. Remove the control column rigging lock.
C. Check the tab for freedom of movement.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 501
27-32-00 Mar 14/98
� PILATUSEi"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. WASHER
Elevator Balance Tab - Adjustment/Test

Figure 501
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 502
27-32-00 Mar 14/98
�PILATUS!!57
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER • DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The aircraft is equipped with a variable incidence horizontal stabilizer. Two hinge bolts attach the
stabilizer main spar to the rear fuselage and are the pivot point of the stabilizer.
An electrical or mechanical trim actuator is installed to frame 12a in the rear fuselage. The actuator ram
is attached to the stabilizer rear spar.
•
The electrical system is operated by a switch on the hand grip of the control columns and has a
trim position indicator on the instrument panel
•
The mechanical system is operated by a handle in the cabin roof and has an indicator adjacent
to the handle
The horizontal stabilizer is of metal construction with ribs and stringers covered with skin panels.
Brackets are installed to attach the stabilizer to the fuselage and actuator, and to attach the elevators.
3. Operation
The incidence of the stabilizer can be changed to allow the aircraft to fly level with no constant pressure
on the controls. Operation of the switch on the control column or the handle in the roof changes the
stabilizer incidence. The incidence is indicated on a trim indicator on the instrument panel for electrical
systems, or adjacent to the operating handle for mechanical systems.
Post SB-180
Horizontal Stabilizer Trim Warning System
If the horizontal stabilizer trim is not in the correct range for takeoff approximately 20 seconds after the
aircraft lands, or after the system is electrically energized, an audio and visual warning is sent to the
pilot.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
27-40-00 Nov 30/03
'S PILATUS5!57
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
©
I
1-
:1w f::
--
M
-�
UP �
�J �
TRIM POSITION INDICATOR HORIZONTAL STABILIZER

ALTERNATE TRIM SWITCH
AILERON AND
STABILIZER
TRIM SWITCH
Electrical Horizontal Stabilizer Trim Controls

Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page2
27-40-00 Nov 30/03
'ePILATUSe"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FORWARD CABLE
DRIVE CHAIN
TRIM POSITION INDICATOR

DRIVE SPROCKET
TRIM POSITION INDICATOR
ACTUATOR
Mechanical Horizontal Stabilizer Controls

Figure 2
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
27-40-00 Nov 30/03
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER - ADJUSTMENT / TEST
1. General
The tests are written for aircraft equipped with a Triple Trim Indicator. For this indicator the trim
positions are as follows (Ref. Fig. 501):
• Zero trim - Position 4 (center of green band)

• Max nose-up - Position 6
• Max nose-down - Position 2
The green band indicates the safe for take-off range.
Some older aircraft have a different gage but the markings are similar.
3. Procedures (Ref. Fig. 501 and 502)
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE THE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM ACTUATOR FOR MORE
THAN 30 SECONDS AT ONE TIME. LET THE ACTUATOR COOL FOR A MINIMUM OF 5
MINUTES AFTER 30 SECONDS OPERATION.
A. Functional Test
(1) Set the BATTERY switch to ON.
(2) Operate the horizontal stabilizer trim switch on the pilot’s control column until the trim
indicator is at the zero trim position.
(3) Make sure that the perpendicular distance from the top edge of the rear fuselage to the
trailing edge of the stabilizer is 54 mm ± 3,5 (2.13 ± 0.14 in.).
(4) Operate the horizontal stabilizer trim switch on the pilot’s control column until the stabilizer
trailing edge is fully down (Maximum nose-down trim indication).
CAUTION: THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE FUSELAGE AND THE STABILIZER MUST NOT
BE LESS THAN 15 MM (0.59 IN.).
trailing edge of the stabilizer is 15,0 + 3,5, - 0 mm (0.59 + 0.14, - 0 in.).
(6) Operate the horizontal stabilizer trim switch on the pilot’s control column until stabilizer
trailing edge is fully up (Maximum nose-up trim indication).
trailing edge of the stabilizer is between 103,5 and 110,5 mm (4.07 and 4.35 in.).
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with electrical stabilizer trim

CONFIG 1
Page 501
27-40-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(8) Select the ALTERNATE STAB TRIM switch to NOSE DN. Make sure that the STABILIZER
TRIM INDICATOR moves to the FULL NOSE DOWN position.
(9) Select the ALTERNATE STAB TRIM switch to NOSE UP. Make sure that the STABILIZER
TRIM INDICATOR moves to the FULL NOSE UP position.
(10) Select the HORIZONTAL STAB TRIM switch on the pilot’s control column to NOSE
DOWN. At the same time select the ALTERNATE STAB TRIM switch to NOSE UP. Make
sure that the STABILIZER TRIM INDICATOR moves to the FULL NOSE DOWN position.
(11) Select the ALTERNATE STAB TRIM switch to NOSE DOWN. At the same time select the
HORIZONTAL STAB TRIM switch on the pilot’s control column switch to NOSE UP. Make
sure that the STABILIZER TRIM INDICATOR moves to the FULL NOSE UP position.
(12) Operate the trim INTERRUPT switch.
(13) Operate the HORIZONTAL STAB TRIM switch on the pilot’s control column and then
operate the ALTERNATE STAB TRIM switch. Make sure that the trim actuator does not
operate.
(14) Do steps (8) to (12) again for the co-pilot controls.
(15) On aircraft with a Horizontal-Stabilizer Trim Warning-System:
(a) Post-SB 31-001: If any of the functional test work steps that follow fail, do the
procedure for adjustment/test of the horizontal-stabilizer trim warning-system, Ref.
31-57-00, Page Block 501.
(b) Make sure the TRIM WARN circuit breaker is closed.
(c) Operate the horizontal stabilizer trim nose-up to the end of the green band (position
5) and make sure that the warning system does not operate.
(d) Continue to operate the horizontal stabilizer trim past position 5 and make sure the
horizontal-stabilizer trim warning-system comes on immediately.
(e) Operate the horizontal stabilizer trim nose-down to the end of the green band. Make
sure the horizontal-stabilizer trim warning-system does not operate.
(f) Continue to operate the horizontal stabilizer trim nose-down past the end of the
green band. Make sure the horizontal-stabilizer trim warning-system comes on
immediately.
(g) Operate the horizontal stabilizer trim to the zero position. Make sure the horizontal-
stabilizer trim warning-system goes off when the trim indication goes back into the
green band.
(16) Set the BATTERY switch to OFF.
B. Horizontal Stabilizer Trim Adjustment
(a) Set the BATTERY switch to on.

CONFIG 1
Page 502
27-40-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Operate the horizontal stabilizer trim switch on the pilot’s control column until the
stabilizer trailing edge is fully down (Maximum nose-down trim indication).
CAUTION: THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE FUSELAGE AND THE STABILIZER MUST
NOT BE LESS THAN 15 MM (0.59 IN.).
(c) Make sure that the perpendicular distance from the top edge of the rear fuselage to
the trailing edge of the stabilizer is between 15,0 mm + 3,5, - 0 mm (0.59 in. + 0.14,
- 0 in.). If necessary adjust the rod end on the trim actuator as follows:
(i) Remove the nut (2), washer (1), bolt (7) and spacers (4) and (6).
(ii) Loosen the locknut and adjust the rod end.
(iii) Tighten the locknut and safety with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(iv) Install the spacers (4) and (6), bolt (7), washer (1) and nut (2).
(d) Operate the horizontal stabilizer trim switch on the pilot’s control column until the
trim indicator shows zero (neutral) trim position.
(e) Make sure that the perpendicular distance from the top edge of the rear fuselage to
the trailing edge of the stabilizer is between 54,0 mm ± 3,5 mm (2.13 in. ± 0.14 in.).
(f) Operate the horizontal stabilizer trim switch on the pilot’s control column until the
stabilizer trailing edge is fully up (Maximum nose-up trim indication).
(g) Make sure that the perpendicular distance from the top edge of the rear fuselage to
the trailing edge of the stabilizer is between 107,0 mm ± 3,5 (0.59 ± 0.14 in.).
(h) If the neutral and full nose-down trim positions are out of limits - Reject the trim
actuator.
(2) Trim Interrupt System
(b) Select the ALTERNATE STAB TRIM switch to NOSE DN. Make sure that the
STABILIZER TRIM INDICATOR moves to the FULL NOSE DOWN position.
(c) Select the ALTERNATE STAB TRIM switch to NOSE UP. Make sure that the
STABILIZER TRIM INDICATOR moves to the FULL NOSE UP position.
(d) Select the HORIZONTAL STAB TRIM switch on the pilot’s control column to NOSE
DOWN. At the same time select the ALTERNATE STABTRIM switch to NOSE UP.
Make sure that the STABILIZER TRIM INDICATOR moves to the FULL NOSE
DOWN position.
(e) Select the ALTERNATE STAB TRIM switch to NOSE DOWN. At the same time
select the HORIZONTAL STAB TRIM switch on the pilot’s control column to NOSE
UP. Make sure that the STABILIZER TRIM INDICATOR moves to the FULL NOSE
UP position.
(f) Operate the trim INTERRUPT switch.

CONFIG 1
Page 503
27-40-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(g) Operate the HORIZONTAL STAB TRIM switch on the pilot’s control column and
then operate the ALTERNATE STAB TRIM switch. Make sure the trim actuator
does not operate.
(h) Do steps (b) to (f) again for the co-pilot’s controls.
(i) Set the BATTERY switch to off.
(b) Operate the horizontal stabilizer trim switch on the pilot’s control column hand grip.
(c) Check that the stabilizer moves from maximum nose-up to maximum nose-down
trim with no rough operation or restriction of movement.
(d) Set the BATTERY switch to off.
(b) Push the horizontal stabilizer trim switch up (forwards) and make sure that:
(i) The stabilizer leading edge moves up (the angle of incidence increases).
(ii) The trim position indicator shows nose-down trim.
(c) Push the switch down (rearwards) and make sure that:
(i) The stabilizer leading edge moves down (the angle of incidence decreases).
(ii) The trim position indicator shows nose-up trim.
(5) Repeat the check on the co-pilot’s control column.
(6) Set the BATTERY switch to off.

CONFIG 1
Page 504
27-40-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7
6
STABILIZER INCIDENCE -10° NOSE UP

5
2
4
3
DN
107 mm 3
(4.22 in.)
2
1
MAXIMUM
NOSE UP
7
6
STABILIZER INCIDENCE -3° NOSE UP

5
2
4
3
DN
3
2
54 mm ± 3.5 mm 1
(2.13 in. ± 0.14 in.)
ZERO
7
6
STABILIZER INCIDENCE +2°
NOSE UP
5
2
4
3
DN
15 mm + 3.5 mm -0.0 mm) 3
(0.59 in. + 0.14 in. -0.0 in.)
2
1
MAXIMUM
NOSE DOWN
6726
Horizontal Stabilizer - Range of Movement

Figure 501

CONFIG 1
Page 505
27-40-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. WASHER
2. NUT
7. BOLT
4. SPACER
6. SPACER
5. LOCKNUT 3. ROD END

6374
Horizontal Stabilizer Actuator - Adjustment

Figure 502

CONFIG 1
Page 506
27-40-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER - ADJUSTMENT / TEST
1. General
The tension of the control cables changes with different air temperatures. If the aircraft moves to an
area of warmer or colder weather, the cable tensions may need adjustment.
- Tensiometer
B. Consumable Materials (Ref. 20-31-00
3. Procedures
A. Functional Test
(1) Put a thermometer in the fuselage and after 15 minutes take and record the temperature
for the cable tension check.
(2) Operate the control handle to give a 0° trim indication.
(3) On aircraft with SB127 (Control Cable Tensioner):
(a) Adjust the cable tensions until the distance between the centers of the two pulleys is
90 mm ± 2,0 mm (3.54 ± 0.08 in.).
(b) Check that the cable tensions are within limits for the ambient air temperature (Ref.
Fig. 503).
(4) On aircraft without SB127 (Control Cable Tensioner):
(a) Adjust the cable tensions to get the correct cable tension for the ambient air
temperature (Ref. Fig. 503).
(5) Make sure that the distance between the fuselage and the trailing edge of the stabilizer is
54 mm ± 3,5 mm (2.13 in. ± 0.14 in.).
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with mechanical stabilizer trim

CONFIG 2
Page 501
27-40-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Set the trim indicator to maximum nose down. Make sure that:
(a) The distance between the fuselage and the trailing edge of the stabilizer is 15 mm +
3,5, - 0 mm (0.59 in. + 0.14, - 0 in.).
(7) Set the trim indicator to maximum nose up. Make sure that:
(a) The distance between the fuselage and the trailing edge of the stabilizer is 107 mm
± 3,5 mm (4.22 in. ±0.14 in.).
(8) Operate the control from full nose up to full nose down. Make sure that the control moves
with no rough operation or restriction of movement.
(9) If the range of movement or cable tensions are not in limits, do the horizontal stabilizer trim
system adjustment procedure.
(10) On aircraft with a Horizontal-Stabilizer Trim Warning-System:
(a) When the aircraft has a digital pitch-trim indicator installed with numerical read out
of the trim position, apply a tolerance of ± 0.2 units during Steps 3.A.(10)(e) thru (i).
(b) Post-SB 31-001: If any of the functional test work steps that follow fail, do the
procedure for adjustment/test of the horizontal-stabilizer trim warning-system, Ref.
31-57-00, Page Block 501.
(c) Set the BATTERY switch to ON.
(d) Make sure the TRIM WARN circuit breaker is closed.
(e) Operate the horizontal stabilizer trim to the -2 units nose-up position and make sure
that the warning system does not operate.
(f) Operate the horizontal stabilizer trim through the -2 units nose-up position and make
sure the horizontal-stabilizer trim warning-system comes on immediately.
(g) Operate the horizontal stabilizer trim to the +2 units nose-down position. Make sure
the horizontal-stabilizer trim warning-system goes off when the trim indication goes
through the -2 position.
(h) Operate the horizontal stabilizer trim through the +2 units nose-down position and
make sure the horizontal-stabilizer trim warning-system comes on immediately.
(i) Operate the horizontal stabilizer trim to the neutral (0°) position. Make sure the
horizontal-stabilizer trim warning-system goes off when the trim indication goes
through the +2 units nose-down position.
(j) Set the BATTERY switch to OFF.
B. Horizontal Stabilizer Trim System Adjustment
(1) Cable Tension
(a) Operate the control handle to give a 0° trim indication.
(b) Remove the lockwire from the turnbuckles.

CONFIG 2
Page 502
27-40-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) On aircraft with SB127 (Control Cable Tensioner):
(i) Adjust the cable tensions until the distance between the centers of the two
pulleys is 90 mm ± 2,0 mm (3.54 ± 0.08 in.).
(ii) Check that the cable tensions are within limits for the ambient air temperature
(Ref. Fig. 503).
(d) On aircraft without SB127 (Control Cable Tensioner):
(i) Adjust the cable tensions to get the correct cable tension for the ambient air
temperature (Ref. Fig. 503).
(e) Safety the turnbuckles with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(a) Set the trim indicator to 0°. Make sure that:
(i) The distance between the fuselage and the trailing edge of the stabilizer is 54
mm ± 3,5 mm (2.13 in. ± 0.14 in.)
(ii) Adjust the cable turnbuckles if necessary.
CAUTION: THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE FUSELAGE AND THE STABILIZER MUST
NOT BE LESS THAN 15 MM (0.59 IN.).
(b) Set the trim indicator to maximum nose down. Make sure that:
(i) The distance between the fuselage and the trailing edge of the stabilizer is
15 mm + 3,5, - 0 mm (0.59 in. + 0.14, - 0 in.)
(ii) Adjust the stop on the cable if necessary.
(c) Set the trim indicator to maximum nose up. Make sure that:
(i) The distance between the fuselage and the trailing edge of the stabilizer is
107 mm ± 3,5 mm (4.22 in. ± 0.14 in.)
(ii) Adjust the stop on the cable if necessary.
(d) Make sure that when the trim system is at full nose up and full nose down there is
space on the barrel of the operating drum and the actuator for the cable.
(a) Operate the control from full nose up to full nose down. Make sure that the control
moves with no rough operation or restriction of movement.
(a) Operate the control handle to give nose down trim indication and make sure that:
(i) The stabilizer leading edge moves up (the angle of incidence increases).
(ii) The trim position indicator shows nose down trim.

CONFIG 2
Page 503
27-40-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Operate the control handle to give up trim indication and make sure that:
(i) The stabilizer leading edge moves down (the angle of incidence decreases).
(ii) The trim position indicator shows nose up trim.

CONFIG 2
Page 504
27-40-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STABILIZER INCIDENCE -10°
107 mm
(4.22 in.)
5 3 0 3 5 7
DOWN NOSE UP
ELEVATOR TRIM
STABILIZER INCIDENCE -3°
54 mm ± 3.5 mm
(2.13 in. ± 0.14 in.)
5 3 0 3 5 7
DOWN NOSE UP
ELEVATOR TRIM
STABILIZER INCIDENCE +2°
15 mm + 3.5 mm -0.0 mm)

(0.59 in. + 0.14 in. -0.0 in.)
5 3 0 3 5 7
DOWN NOSE UP
ELEVATOR TRIM
6375
Horizontal Stabilizer - Range of Movement

Figure 501

CONFIG 2
Page 505
27-40-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STOP PLATE
CABLE STOPS
TURNBUCKLES
6404
Horizontal Stabilizer Trim - Adjustment/Test

Figure 502

CONFIG 2
Page 506
27-40-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
180
170
160
150
140
(To convert Newtons to Kilograms, divide by 10)
130
Required Cable Tensions (N)
120
110
Upper Limit
100
Lower Limit
90
80
70
60
50
0 10 20 30 40 50
Temperature (°C)
6298
Horizontal Stabilizer Trim - Cable Tensions

Figure 503

CONFIG 2
Page 507
27-40-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CONFIG 2
Page 508
27-40-00 Nov 21/18
�PILATUSe'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HORIZO NTA L STABILIZER TRIM ACTUATOR • MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
This topic gives the procedure for the lubrication of the horizontal stabilizer trim actuator for the
mechanical system only.
2. Job Set Up Inf ormation
A. Expendable P arts
27-45-13, Fig. 01 Tie strap Item 20

27-45-13, Fig. 01 Button, tie strap Item 25

P02-001 Lockwire 0,8 mm dia.
P04-002 Aeroshell Grease 7 MIL-G-23827B
Hylomar SQ 32M
P04-017 Jointing compound
MIL-S-8802 Class A
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) Remove the access panel FL2.
(2) Move the trim control handle to the fully NOSE-UP position.
B. L ubricate the A ctuator Spindle (Ref. Fig. 201)
CAUTIO N: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE

MANUFACTURER'S HEALTH AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.
(1) Remove and discard the tie strap (4) at the bottom of the protective boot (1).
(2) Remove and discard the lockwire.
(3) Remove the guide ring (5).
(4) Carefully lift the protective boot to get access to the spindle (2).
(5) With a cloth made moist with white spirit (Material No. P01-008), clean the grease from the
spindle (2).
(6) Dry the spindle (2) with a lint-free cloth.
(7) Examine the spindle (2) for wear and corrosion.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with mechanical system

CONFIG 2
Page 201
27-45-01 Nov 30/03
'ePILATUS!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(8) Apply a thin layer of grease (Material No. P04-002) to the spindle (2) with a brush.
(9) Carefully push the protective boot (1) in position.
(10) Carefully install the guide ring (5) between the protective boot and the spindle cover (3).
(11) Safety the protective boot with lockwire (Material No. P02-001). Make sure the lockwire is
correctly located in the slot of the guide ring (5).
(12) Install the tie strap (4) correctly around the protective boot (1).
(13) Move the actuator two times through the full range of movement. Make sure the actuator
moves easily and freely without any unusual noises.
C. Examine the Sealing Compounds
(1) Examine the sealing compound (6) around the top edge of the protective boot.
(a) If necessary, apply a thin bead of jointing compound (Material No. P04-017) around
the top edge of the protective boot.
(2) Examine the sealing compound (7) at the top edge of the actuator.
(a) If necessary, apply a thin bead of jointing (Material No. P04-017) around the top
edge of the actuator.
D. Job Close Up
(1) Make sure the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
(2) Install access panel FL2.
(3) Move the trim control handle to a neutral position.

CONFIG2
Page 202
27-45-01 Nov 30/03
'SPILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Horizontal Stabilizer Trim Actuator - Maintenance Practices

Figure 201

CONFIG 2
Page 203
27-45-01 Nov 30/03
'e PILATUS i!F'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Job Set Up
A. Open and tag the following circuit breakers:
STAB TRIM (Bamery Bus CB panel).
B. Remove access panel FL2 from left side rear fuselage.
2. Removal
A. Disconnect the two electrical connectors (12) from the actuator.
B. Remove the nut (3), washer (2), spacers (4) and (6), and bolt (1).
C. Remove nut (11), washer (10), spacers (9), washer (8) and bolt (7).
D. Remove the actuator (5).
3 • Installation
A. Put the actuator in position in rear fuselage. Make sure that the ram is at the top.
B. Put the spacers (9) in position and install the bolt (7), washer (8) and (10), and nut (11).
C. Put the spacers (4) and (6) in position and install the bolt (1), washer (2) and nut (3).
D. Connect the electrical connectors (12).
E. Remove the support from horizontal stabilizer. Make sure that stabilizer is free from obstructions.
4. Test
A. Check the horizontal stabilizer rigging (Ref. 27-40-00, Page Block 501).
5. Close Up
A. Install the access panel FL2.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with electrical trim
CONFIG 1
I 27-45-11
Page 401
Jun 14/92
"t! PILATUS!!!i"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. WASHER
8. WASHER
Horizontal Stabilizer Actuator - Removal/Installation

Figure401
EFFECTIVITV: Aircraft with electrical trim
CONFIG 1
I 27-45-11
Page402
Jun 14/92
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This procedure gives the data and instructions necessary to remove and install the mechanical trim
actuator for the horizontal stabilizer.
This procedure is applicable to:
• Aircraft with mechanical trim with bearing support assemblies (CONFIG 2)

• Aircraft with mechanical trim with a bearing fork (CONFIG 3).
A. Expendable Parts
55-11-01, Fig. 01 Cotter pin Ref. Fig 401, Item 5

55-11-01, Fig. 01 Cotter pin Ref. Fig 401, Item 15
3. Job Set Up
A. Remove the access panel FL2 from left side rear fuselage.
B. Operate the trim control until the trim indicator shows neutral.
C. Put a support between the fuselage and the stabilizer.
4. Removal
CONFIG 2 AND 3:
A. Secure the trim cables to the actuator (6) and the cable drum in the cockpit using adhesive tape.
B. Loosen the trim cable turnbuckles.
CONFIG 2:
C. Remove the cotter pin (5), nut (4), washers (2) and (3), spacer (17) and bolt (1) from the upper
attachment of the actuator (6).
CONFIG 3:
D. Remove the cotter pin (15), nut (14), washer (13), bolt (12), flanged bushes (16) and (18) and
spacer (17) from the upper attachment of the actuator (6).
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with mechanical trim

CONFIG 2/3
Page 401
27-45-11 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CONFIG 2 AND 3:
E. Remove the nut (11), centering plate (10), bolt (7), centering disc (8) and bush (9) from the lower
attachment of the actuator (6).
F. Remove the actuator (6) from the fuselage.
G. Mark the center of the cable and the upper cable.
NOTE: The center of the cable is where it goes through the slot in the actuator.
H. Remove the cable from the actuator (6).
5. Installation
CONFIG 2 AND 3:
A. Hold the actuator (6) with the bellows at the top.
B. Install the cable onto the actuator (6):
(1) Install the center of the trim cable in the slot in the actuator (6). Make sure that the upper
cable is at the top.
(2) Wind the cable on to the upper part of the actuator (6) by 8½ turns.
(3) Wind the cable on to the lower part of the actuator (6) by 7½ turns.
C. Adjust the actuator (6) to give a distance of 317,5 mm (12.5 in) between the centers of the
attachment holes.
D. Put the actuator (6) into position in the rear fuselage.
E. Install the bush (9), bolt (7), centering disc (8), centering plate (10) and nut (11).
CONFIG 2:
F. Install the spacer (17), washer (2), bolt (1), washer (3) and nut (4).
G. Safety the nut (4) with a new cotter pin (5).
CONFIG 3:
H. Install the spacer (17), flanged bushes (16) and (18), bolt (12), washer (13), and nut (14).
I. Safety the nut (14) with a new cotter pin (15).
CONFIG 2 AND 3:
J. Adjust the turnbuckles to give a tension of approximately 44 lb.
K. Operate the control through the complete range 5 times.
L. Adjust the turnbuckles to give a tension of 13 lb ± 2lb.

CONFIG 2/3
Page 402
27-45-11 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Test
A. Rig the trim control system (Ref. 27-40-00, Page Block 501).
7. Close Up
A. Safety the cable turnbuckles.
B. Install the access panel FL2.

CONFIG 2/3
Page 403
27-45-11 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3 4
1 2
5
17
A
CONFIG 2 6
B
12 13 14
15
A 18 17 16
CONFIG 3
6
11
10
9
6839
Horizontal Stabilizer Actuator - Removal/Installation

Figure 401

CONFIG 2/3
Page 404
27-45-11 May 30/19
':PILATUS!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TRIM CABLES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
A. Expendable Parts
401-10 Cotter pin 27-45-01, Fig. 01

401-17 Cotter pin 27-45-01, Fig. 01
401-25 Cotter pin 27-45-01, Fig. 01
401-37 Cotter pin 27-45-01, Fig. 01
401-45 Cotter pin 27-45-01, Fig. 01
A. Remove the access panel FL2.
B. Remove the locking wire from the turnbuckles.
C. Loosen the turnbuckles.
A. Rear Cable
(1) Remove the stabilizer trim actuator (Ref. 27-45-11, Page Block 401).
(2) Remove the cotter pin (45), nut (44), washer (43) and bolt (46).
(3) Remove the pulley (42) and two bushes (41).
(4) Remove the cotter pin (37), nut (36), washer (35) and bolt {34).
(5) Remove the pulleys (39), four bushes (38) and spacer (40).
(6) Remove the cotter pin (25), washer (26) and pin (32).
(7) Remove the nuts (31), washers {30), springs (29), bushes (28), and bolts {27).
{8) Remove the pulleys (33).
(9) Remove the rear cable from the fuselage.
(10) Remove the cable from the actuator.
EFFECTIVITY: H2 aircraft with mechanical stabilizer trim
I
Page 401
27-45-12 Jun 14/92
"ePILATUSE!iF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Forward Cable
(1) Remove the screws {23) and washers (24), and remove the cable stops (22).
(2) Remove the cotter pin (17), nut (18), washer (16) and bolt (21).
(3) Remove the pulleys (20) and four bushes (19).
(4) Remove the cotter pin (1O), nut (11), washer (12) and bolt (13).
(5) Remove the pulleys {14) and four bushes (15).
(6) Remove the cable drum.
(i) Remove the bolt (6), washers (5) and nuts (9) and remove the trim position
indicator (7) and shim (8).
(ii) Remove the screws (2) and nuts (3) and remove the axle (4).
(iii) Remove the cable drum (1).
(7) Remove the forward cable from the cable drum.
A. Install the forward cable on the cable drum.
(1) Find the mid point of the cable and mark with paint.
(2) Feed the cable through the drum and align the mid point with the center of the drum.
(i) Wrap 5 turns of cable around the top of the drum and secure with tape.
(ii) Wrap 61.h turns of the cable around the bottom of the drum and secure with tape.
B. Install the cable drum.
(1) Put the drum (1) in position and install the chain and axle.
(2) Install the screws (2) and nuts (3).
(3) Set the trim indicator to the neutral position.
(4) Put the shim (8) and trim indicator (7) in position and install the bolts (6), washers (5) and
nuts (9).
C. Put the cable in position.
D. Install the pulleys (14). four bushes (15), bolt (13), washer (12) and nut (11).
E. Safety the nut with a new cotter pin (10).
F. Install the pulleys (20), four bushes (19), bolt (21), washer (16) and nut (18).
G. Safety the nut with a new cotter pin (17).
I
Page 402
27-45-12 Jun 14/92
';ePILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
H. Install the cable stops (22), washers (24) and screws (23). Do not fully tighten the screws.
I. Install the rear trim cable.
(1) Find the mid point of the cable and mark with paint.
(2) Adjust the actuator until the distance between the center of the attachment holes is 317,5
mm (12.5 in.).
(3) Install the cable on the actuator with the center at the slot.
(i) Wrap 81h turns around the top of the actuator and secure with tape.
(ii) Wrap 71h turns around the bottom of the actuator and secure with tape.
J. Install the actuator (Ref. 27-45-11, Page Block 401).
K. Put the cable in position.
L. Install the pulleys (42), four bushes (41), bolts (46), washer (43) and nut (44).
M. Safety the nut with a new cotter pin (45).
N. Install the pulleys (39), four bushes (38), spacer (40), bolt (34), washer (35) and nut (36).
0. Safety the nut with a new cotter pin (37).
P. Install the pulleys (33), bushes (28), springs (29), bolt (27), washer (30) and nut (31).
Q. Install the pins (32) and washers (26) and safety with new cotter pins (25).
R. Connect the turnbuckles.
s. Remove the tape from the cable drum and the actuator.
5. Test
A. Rig the stabilizer trim system (Ref. 27-40-00, Page Block 501) .
6. Close Up
A. Make sure that the cable stop screws are tight.
B. Safety the turnbuckles with lockwire (Material P02-001 ) .
D. Install the access panel FL2.
I
Page 403
27-45-12 Jun 14/92
;EiPILATUSe"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. NUT
2. SCREW
4. AXLE
5. WASHER
6. BOLT
7. TRIM INDICATOR
20. PULLEY
13. BOLT
19. BUSH
Stabilizer Trim Cables - Removal/Installation

Figure 401 (Sheet 1)
I
Page 404
27-45-12 Jun 14/92
"'EPILATUS!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
25. GOITER PIN

26. WASHER
22. CABLE STOP
23. SCREW
24. WASHER
33. PULLEY
32. PIN _--�// 31. NUT 30. WASHER

29. SPRING
34. BOLT
35. WASHER
36. NUT
37. COITER PIN
40. SPACER
39. PULLEY
38. BUSH
317,5 MM (12.5 IN.)
41. BUSH
· 42. PULLEY
WASHER
/� 44. NUT I GI
45. GOITER PIN __j
Stabilizer Trim Cables - Removal/Installation
Page 405
I 27-45-12 Juh 14/92

PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLAPS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General (Ref. Fig. 1 and 2)
Flaps are installed to give increased lift during take-off and landing. Each wing has two flap units linked
together and installed on the trailing edge of the wing inboard of the ailerons.
The flaps can have either electrical or manual operation.
• On aircraft with electrical flaps, a single electrical actuator operates the flaps through bellcranks
and rods
• On aircraft with mechanical flaps, an operating handle attached to a drive assembly in the cockpit
roof operates the flaps through chains, cables and screw-jack actuators
The normal flap positions are as follows:
• Normal flight position Flaps fully up

• Take-off position (pre-set electrical system only) Flaps down 28°
• Landing position Flaps down 38°
2. Component Description (Ref. Fig. 1 and 2)
A. Flaps
The flaps are of metal construction with a spar, ribs and nose ribs covered with a leading edge
skin and ribbed skin panels. A slat is attached to the leading edge of the flap unit. Attachment
brackets are installed on each end of the flap.
B. Electrical System
Two systems can be installed with either a pre-set intermediate (take-off) flap position, or from
aircraft MSN 865, a 'step-less' system in which any angle between fully up and the landing
position can be set.
Microswitches installed adjacent to the actuator, are operated by cams installed on the bellcrank.
On aircraft up to MSN 865 four microswitches are installed, one for the up position, one for the
landing position, and two for the take-off position.
On aircraft from MSN 865 and up to MSN 884 (step-less system), operation of the switch causes
the flaps to move in the selected direction when the switch is held in the up or down position.
When the switch is released it returns automatically to the OFF position and the flaps stay at the
position selected. If the switch is not released, the actuator stops when the micro-switch for the
flaps full up or full down position operates.
On aircraft from MSN 885 (step-less system), operation of the switch causes the flaps to move in
the selected direction when the switch is set to the up or down position. When the switch is
returned to the OFF position the flaps stay at the position selected. The switch does not return
automatically to the off position when released. If the switch is not returned to the OFF position,
the actuator stops when the micro-switch for the flaps full up or full down position operates.
The position of the flaps is shown by either a gauge or three lights. The gauge operates from a
signal received from either an external position sensor or a position sensor in the actuator. The
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
27-50-00 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
lights operate from the microswitches installed adjacent to the actuator. A green light shows the
flaps are up, and amber lights show the take-off and landing positions.
C. Mechanical System
The mechanical system has an actuator in each wing, operated from the drive assembly in the
cockpit roof through chains, sprockets and cables.
A position indicator rod is attached to the left flap actuator. The indicator rod sticks through a hole
in the leading edge of the wing and is visible from the cockpit. Painted marks on the rod show the
position of the flaps.
Aircraft from MSN 623 and aircraft with SB 63 have chain tensioners installed to maintain chain
tension during operation.
3. Operation
A. Electrical System
On aircraft up to MSN 864, operation of the switch causes the flaps to move in the selected
direction when the switch is set to the up, take-off or landing position. The actuator stops when
the micro-switch for the selected position operates.
On aircraft from MSN 865 and up to MSN 884, operation of the switch causes the flaps to move
in the selected direction when the switch is held in the up or down position. When the switch is
released it returns automatically to the OFF position and the flaps stay at the position selected. If
the switch is not released, the actuator stops when the micro-switch for the selected position
operates.
On aircraft from MSN 885, operation of the switch causes the flaps to move in the selected
direction when the switch is set to the up or down position. The actuator stops when the micro-
switch for the selected position operates. To stop flap movement before full travel is reached, the
switch must be manually set to the OFF position.
B. Mechanical System
Operation of the handle in the cockpit roof operates the flap screw-jack actuators in each wing
through chains and cables. An indicator rod on the left actuator is visible through the wing
leading edge, and has paint marks to show the flap position.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
27-50-00 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Flap Controls - Electrical System

Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
27-50-00 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Flap Controls - Mechanical System

Figure 2
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 4
27-50-00 May 30/19
"e PILATUS E!!!F"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRICALLY OPERATED FLAPS - ADJUSTMENTffEST
1. General
The flap range of movement is controlled by microswitches and cams installed below the flap actuator
bellcrank. The cams are installed on the bellcrank hinge and rotate with the bellcrank.
On aircraft up to MSN 865, a three position system is installed with the take-off (TO) position controlled
by two microswitches. One microswitch controls the TO position when the flaps extend, and the other
when the flaps retract.
Aircraft from MSN 865 have 'step-less' operation between fully retracted (UP) and fully extended (LO).
The microswitch and cam positions are as follows:
LD - Top cam
UP - Center cam
TO - Bottom cam (2 microswitches, UP to TO, LD to TO )( up to MSN 865 only).
The range of movement adjustments must be made in the following sequence:
• Adjust the control rods and the actuator rod to obtain the correct UP setting
• Adjust the LO cam and microswitch
• Adjust the UP cam and microswitch
• Adjust the TO cam and UP to TO microswitch (up to MSN 865 only)
• Adjust the LD to TO microswitch (up to MSN 865 only)
A. Expendable Parts
501-09 Cotter pin (Qty 2) 27-53-01, Fig 01

501-14 Cotter pin 27-53-01, Fig 01
501A-09 Cotter pin (Qty 2) 27-53-01, Fig 01
501A-11 Cotter pin 27-53-01, Fig.01
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with electrical flaps

CONFIG 1
Page 501
27-50-00 Mar 14/95
� PILATUSE!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Procedure
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE LEFT HINGED PASSENGER DOORS (IF INSTALLED) ARE CLOSED
BEFORE THE FLAPS ARE OPERATED.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE THE AILERON TRAILING EDGE AS THE ZERO DATUM.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT POSSIBLE DAMAGE BY FLAP OVERUN, THE FLAP CIRCUIT BREAKER
MUST BE USED TO THE CONTROL FLAP ACTUATOR UNTIL THE MICROSWITCHES ARE
ADJUSTED.
NOTE: Aircraft can have either three lights or a gauge to show the position of the flaps. On aircraft
with the lights installed, the flaps up position is shown by a green light, and the takeoff and
land positions by amber lights.
A. Functional Test
(1) Set the flaps to up (UP) and make sure that:
(a) The flap trailing edges are level with the wing trailing edge.
(b) The indicator in the cockpit shows UP.
(2) Set the flaps to land (LD) make sure that:
(a) The trailing edge is 290 mm± 14 mm (11.4 in.± 0.55 in.) below the wing trailing
edge.
(b) The indicator in the cockpit shows LD.
(3) On aicraft up to MSN 865, set the flaps to take-off (TO) make sure that:
(a) The trailing edge is 214 mm± 14 mm ( 8.43 in.± 0.55 in.) below the wing trailing
edge.
(b) The indicator in the cockpit shows TO.
(4) If the range of movement is not in limits do the flap system adjustment procedure.
8. Flap System Adjustment {aircraft with three position systems)(Ref. Fig. 501)
(1) Open the FLAP circuit breaker.
(2) Remove the lining from the right and left sides of the passenger cabin roof.
(3) Adjust the UP setting:
(a) Remove the cotter pin ( 14), nut (15), washers (2) and (16), and bolt (1) and
disconnect the actuator. Discard the cotter pin.
(b) Move the actuator to allow operation without the rod hitting the bellcrank.
(c) Set the flaps UP with the flaps selector switch.

CONFIG 1
Page 502
27-50-00 Mar 14/95
'S PILATUS E!F'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Close the FLAP circuit breaker until the actuator stops at the end of travel.
NOTE: The actuator is fully extended when the flaps are UP.
(e) Open the FLAP circuit breaker.
(f) Put the actuator in position and install the bolt (1) and washer (2).
(g) Remove the cotter pins (9), nuts (8), washers (5) and (7), and bolts (4) to
disconnect the right and left control rods from the bellcranks. Discard the cotter
pins.
(h) Loosen the locknuts (6).
(i) Adjust the fork ends until the flap trailing edges are 5 mm (0.2 in.) above the wing
trailing edge. Make sure that the fork-end threads are in safety.
NOTE: Additional adjustment can be made by adjusting the length of the actuator
rod (ram). If the rod length is adjusted make sure that a minimum of
14,5 mm (0.55 in.) of thread length is engaged in the actuator.
(j) Tighten the locknuts (6).
(k) Install the bolts (4), washers (5) and (7), and nuts (8).
(I) Safety the nuts with new cotter pins (9).
(m) Install the washer (16} and nut (15).
(n) Safety the nut with a new cotter pin (14).
(4) Adjust LD cam and microswitch:
(a) Loosen the locking bolt on LO cam (3).
(b) Set the flaps to LD.
(c) Operate the FLAP circuit breaker until the flaps are in the land position.
(d) Make sure that the trailing edge is 290 mm± 14 mm (11.4 in.± 0.55 in.) below the
wing trailing edge.
(e) Move the LD cam (3) until the LD microswitch operates (a click is heard). Tighten
the cam locking bolt.
(f) Set the flaps to UP.
(g) Move the flap away from LD position by using the FLAP circuit breaker.
(h) Set the flaps to LD. Close the FLAP circuit breaker.
(i) Make sure that the flaps stop in the landing position 290 mm± 14 mm
(11.4 in.± 0.55 in.) below the wing trailing edge.
G) Make sure the flap indicator on the pilot's instrument panel shows LO.
EFFECTIVITV: Aircraft with electrical flaps

CONFIG 1
Page 503
27-50-00 Mar 14/95
�PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(k) Open the FLAP circuit breaker.
(5) Adjust the UP cam and microswitch:
(a) Loosen the locking bolt on the UP cam (12).
(b) Set the flaps to UP.
(c) Close the FLAP circuit breaker until the flaps and wing are in line.
(d) Adjust the UP cam (12) until the UP microswitch operates (a click is heard). Tighten
(e) Set the flaps to LD and move the flaps away from the UP position using the FLAP
circuit breaker.
(f) Set the flaps to UP. Close the FLAP circuit breaker.
(g) Make sure the flaps stop in the UP position, level with the wing trailing edge.
(h) Make sure the flap indicator on the pilot's instrument panel shows UP.
(i) Open the FLAP circuit breaker.
(6) Adjust the TO cam and UP-TO microswitch:
(a) Loosen the cam locking bolt on the TO cam (11).
(b) Set the flap selector to LD.
(c) Operate the FLAP circuit breaker to position the flap 214 mm (8.43 in.) below the
wing trailing edge.
(d) Adjust the TO cam (11} until the UP - TO microswitch is operates (a click is heard).
Tighten the cam locking bolt.
(e) Set the flaps to UP and move the flaps to the UP position using the FLAP circuit
breaker.
(f) Set the flaps to TO.
(g) Close the FLAP circuit breaker. Make sure the flaps stop in the TO position
214 mm± 10 mm (8.43 in.± 0.40 in.) down from the wing trailing edge.
(h) Make sure the flap indicator on the pilot's instrument panel shows TO.
(7) Adjust the LD - TO microswitch:
( a) Make sure that the flap is in the TO position 214 mm (8.43 in.) down from the wing
trailing edge.
(b) Loosen the two bolts (10) securing the LD - TO microswitch.

CONFIG 1
Page 504
27-50-00 Mar 14/95
�PILATUS!!!Y
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Adjust the position of the microswitch until the microswitch operates (a click can be
heard). Tighten the bolts (10).
(e) Set the flaps to LD and move the flaps to the LD position using the FLAP circuit
breaker.
(e) Set the flaps to TO.
(f) Close the FLAP circuit breaker. Make sure the flap stops in the TO position
214 mm± 1 Omm (8.43 in. ± 0.40 in.) down from the wing trailing edge.
(g) Make sure the flap indicator on the pilot's instrument panel shows TO.
(8) Close the FLAP circuit breaker.
(a) Operate the flap selector to UP, LAND and TO. Make sure that the flap movement
is smooth and unrestricted.
C. Flap System Adjustment (aircraft with step-less systems)(Ref. Fig. 501A)
(1) Open the FLAP circuit breaker.
(2) Remove the lining from the right and left sides of the passenger cabin roof.
(3) Adjust the UP setting:
(a) Remove the cotter pin (11), nut (12), washers (2) and (13), and bolt (1) and
disconnect the actuator. Discard the cotter pin.
(b) Move the actuator to allow operation without the rod hitting the bellcrank.
(c) Set the flaps UP with the flaps selector switch.
(d) Close the FLAP circuit breaker until the actuator stops at the end of travel.
NOTE: The actuator is fully extended when the flaps are UP.
(e) Open the FLAP circuit breaker.
(f) Put the actuator in position and install the bolt (1) and washer (2).
(g) Remove the cotter pins (9), nuts (8), washers (5) and (7), and bolts (4) to
disconnect the right and left control rods from the bellcranks. Discard the cotter
pins.
(h) Loosen the locknuts (6).
(i) Adjust the fork-ends until the flap trailing edges are 5 mm (0.2 in.) above the wing
trailing edge. Make sure the fork-end threads are in safety.
NOTE: Additional adjustment can be made by adjusting length of actuator rod

(ram). If rod length is adjusted make sure that 14,5 mm (0.55 in.) minimum
thread length is engaged in actuator.

CONFIG 1
Page 505
27-50-00 Mar 14/95
�PILATUS!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
U) Tighten the locknuts (6).
(k) Install the bolts (4), washers (5) and (7), and nuts (8).
(I) Safety the nuts with new cotter pins (9).
(m) Install the washer (13) and nut (12).
(n) Safety the nut with a new cotter pin (11).
(4) Adjust the LD cam and microswitch:
(a) Loosen the cam locking bolt on the LD cam (3).
(b) Set the flaps to LD.
(c) Operate the FLAP circuit breaker until the flaps are in the land position.
(d) Make sure the trailing edge is 290 mm± 14 mm (11.4 in.± 0.55 in.) below the wing
trailing edge.
(e) Move the LD cam (3) until the LD microswitch operates (a click is heard). Tighten
(f) Set the flaps to UP.
(g) Move the flap away from LD position by using FLAP circuit breaker.
(h) Set the flaps to LD. Close the FLAP circuit breaker.
(i) Make sure that the flaps stop in the landing position 290 mm± 14 mm
(11.4 in. ± 0.55 in.) below the wing trailing edge.
(j) Make sure the flap indicator on the pilot's instrument panel shows LD.
(k) Open the FLAP circuit breaker.
(5) Adjust the UP cam and microswitch:
(a) Loosen the cam locking bolt on the UP cam (10).
(b) Set the flaps to UP.
(c) Close the FLAP circuit breaker until the flaps and wing are in line.
(d) Adjust the UP cam (10) until the UP microswitch operates (a click is heard). Tighten
(e) Set the flaps to LD and move the flaps away from the UP position using the FLAP
circuit breaker.
(f) Set the flaps to UP. Close the FLAP circuit breaker.
(g) Make sure that the flaps stop in the UP position, level with the wing trailing edge.

CONFIG 1
Page 506
27-50-00 Mar 14/95
"ePILATUSEF'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
( h) Make sure the flap indicator on the pilot's instrument panel shows UP.
(6) Close the FLAP circuit breaker.
(a) Operate the flap selector to UP and LO. Make sure that the flap movement is
smooth and unrestricted.
D. Close Up
(2) Install the lining to the right and the left sides of the passenger cabin roof.

CONFIG 1
Page 507
27-50-00 Mar 14/95
� PILATUS:E!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
/ 4.BOLT
�
1. BOLT
O.WASHEA
/ 6.LOCKNUT
t;
'
I
7. WASHER
8NUT
13. UP-TO
MICROSWITCH
10.LD-TO
MICROSWITCH
�\
BOLTS
9.COTIER PIN
12.UP CAM
15. NUT
14.COTTER PIN
Flaps - Adjustment/Test
Figure 501

CONFIG 1
Page 508
27-50-00 Mar 14/95
�PILATUSE!F"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1.BOLT
IAI
2. WASHER
7. WASHER
9. COTTER PIN
12. NUT
11. COTTER PIN
Flaps - Adjustment/Test
Figure 501A

CONFIG 1
Page 509
27-50-00 Mar 14/95
'ePILATUSEif"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CONFIG 1
Page 510
27-50-00 Mar 14/95
'ePILATUSEP'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MECHANICALLY OPERATED FLAPS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
A. Put the operating handle in the rear position.
B. Move both flaps screw-jacks to the flaps retracted position.
C. Pre-load the chain tensioners. Use a locally manufactured distance piece 20 mm (0.8 in.) long
and lockwire.
D. Put the chain on the left flap screw-jack sprocket. Make sure that the distance between the end
of the chain and the sprocket is 130 mm± 5 mm (5.12 in.± 0.2 in.)
(1) If the dimension is not correct, reposition·the chain on the operating handle.
E. Turn the operating handle to the right by approximately 22°.
F. Turn the right screw-jack sprocket to the flap down position by 2 teeth.
G. Install the chain on the sprocket.
H. Tension the chains using the turnbuckles until the distance pieces can be removed.
I. Make sure that not more than 10 mm (0.4 in.) of thread shows from the turnbuckles. Tighten the
turnbuckles as necessary.
J. Fully extend the flaps.
(1) On the left wing flap jack - Make sure the distance between the stop and the sprocket is
1,5 mm (0.06 in.).
(2) On the right wing flap jack - Make sure there is no gap between the stop and the sprocket.
K. Operate the flaps to full down and full up. Make sure that the operating handle needs the same
force to lock it in the full up and the full down positions. Adjust the turnbuckles as necessary.
L. Safety the turnbuckles with lockwire (Material No. P02-001 ).
M. Install the chain retainers on the screw-jack sprockets.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with mechanical flaps

CONFIG 2
Page 501
27-50-00 Mar 14/95
�PILATUSE"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLAP ACTUATOR
CHAIN
RIGHT WING
INTERCONNECTING
CABLE
FLAPS UP
LOCALLY MANUFACTURED DISTANCE PIECE
Jr- ',; MM (0.06 IN.) DIAMETER TURNBUCKLE
1---- - -- i46,
0 MM (0.241N.)
I. .I
20 MM (0.8 IN.)
LEFT WING
4,5 MM (0.18 IN.)

SPRING
TENSIONER
CHAIN -----.__
SPRING TENSIONER
DISTANCE PIECE
LOCKING WIRE
FLAP ACTUATOR �
Mechanical Flaps - Adjustment/Test
Figure501
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with mechanical flaps

CONFIG 2
Page502
27-50-00 Mar 14/95
';!EPILATUS!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MECHANICAL FLAP ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Torque wrench Oto 7,5 Nm

(0 to 75 lbfin.)
P04-006 Grease Mil-G-21164

c. Referenced Information
27-50-00 Flaps - Adjustment/Test
2. Job Set Up
A. Extend the flaps.
B. Install a warning notice on the flap handle to tell persons not to operate the flaps.
C. Remove the access panels.
3. Removal
A. Loosen the turnbuckles on the flap operating chains.
B. Remove the bolts (1), washers (2), guide plates (7) and guide (3).
C. Remove the chain from the sprocket.
D. Remove the nut (21) washer (20) and screw (23).

,
E. On the left wing only, remove the flap position indicator (22).
F. Remove the stop (19).
G. Support the flaps.
H. Remove the cotter pin (10), nut (11), washers (12) and (13) and bolt (14).
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with mechanically operated flaps
I
Page 401
27-52-11 Jun 14/92
";E PILATUS !!!!!F'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
I. Turn the spindle (18) counter clockwise and remove from the rear of the wing.
J. Remove the bolts (6) and washers (5) and remove the sprocket assembly (4).
4. Installation
A. Remove the sprocket assembly (4) from the spindle (18).
B. Put the sprocket assembly (4) in position in the wing and install the bolts (6) and washers (5).
C. Torque the bolts to between 4,52 and 5,09 Nm (40 and 45 lbfin.).
D. Apply grease (Material No. P04-006) to the threads of the spindle (18).
E. Install the spindle (18) into the wing from the rear. Turn clockwise to engage the spindle (18)
with the sprocket assembly.
F. Move the flaps so that the end plate (15) can be connected.
G. Install the bolt (14), washers (12) and (13), and nut {11).
H. Safety the nut with a new cotter pin (10).
I. Turn the sprocket until the spindle is in the fully up position.
J. Align the flap trailing edge with the wing and tighten the screw (16) and nut (8).
K. Use the second hole on the actuator as a guide and drill a 5,2 mm hole for the second
attachment screw.
L. Install the second attachment screw (16), washers (9) and (17), and nut (8).
M. Torque both attachment screws to between 5,09 and 5,65 Nm (45 and 50 lbfin.).
N. If a new left screwjack is installed:
(1) Fully extend the flaps.
(2) Put the travel stop (19) in position on the screwjack with a 1,5 mm (0.06 in.) gap between
the stop and the sprocket.
(3) Drill the stop attachment hole.
(4) Install the stop attachment screw (23), flap position indicator (22), washer (20) and nut
(21).
0. If a new right screwjack is installed:
(1) Fully extend the flaps.
(2) Put the travel stop (19) in position on the screwjack.
(3) Mark the position of the stop.
(4) Retract the flaps.
I
Page 402
27-52-11 Jun 14/92
�PILATUS!5!!F'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Move the travel stop 1,0 mm (0.04 in.) towards the sprocket.
(6) Drill the stop attachment hole.
(7) Install the stop attachment screw (23), washer (20) and nut (2 1 ).
P. Rig the flap control system (Ref. 27-50-00, Page Block 501).
Q. Put the guide plates (7) and the guide (3) in position and install the bolts (1) and washers (2).
R. Safety the turnbuckles with lockwire (Material No. P02-001}.
5. Close Up
EFFECTIVITV: Aircraft with mechanically operated flaps
I
Page 403
27-52-11 Jun 14/92
"e PILATUS!EF'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
22. INDICATOR
15. END PLATE

14. BOLT
Flap Actuator - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
I
Page404
27-52-11 Jun 14/92
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLAP OPERATING HANDLE - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedure to check the spring force, and visually examine the leaf-springs,
installed in the overhead flap-operating handle.
- Spring Balance (0-20 N / 0-5 lbf) Local Supply

- x 10 Magnifying Glass Local Supply
- Source of Bright Light Local Supply
B. Expendable Parts
IPC Fig/Item Description Remarks

27-41-11 Fig. 01/115 Leaf Spring Qty 3 if required
A. Check
(1) Attach the spring balance to the operating handle, as near to the end as possible.
(2) Use the spring balance to pull the operating handle vertically down,
• If the force required is less than 13,7 N (3.08 lbf) the leaf-springs are unserviceable.
You must replace the three leaf springs before the next flight.
• If the force required is 13,7 N (3.08 lbf) or more, remove and examine the leaf-
springs.
B. Removal
(1) Remove the nut (1), the washers (2) and (4) and the screw (5).
(2) Remove the three leaf springs (3).
C. Inspection
Visually examine the radius of the leaf spring (3) for signs of cracks. Do this with a X10 magnifier
and a source of bright light. No cracks are permitted. If you find a crack, you must replace the
three leaf springs before the next flight.
NOTE: Post SB 27-003 leaf-springs have 45 degree chamfers adjacent to the attachment hole.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with mechanical flap system.

Page 601
27-52-12 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Installation
(1) Put the three leaf springs (3) in position.
(2) Install the screw (5), the washers (4) and (2) and the nut (1).
E. Check
(1) Do the check of the spring force again (Ref. Para. 3.A.)
F. Close up
(1) Remove all tools and materials. Make sure that the work ares is clean.

Page 602
27-52-12 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
2
CHECK THIS RADIUS

FOR CRACKS
5
SB1800
Flap-Operating Handle Leaf-Springs - Inspection/Check

Figure 601

Page 603
27-52-12 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

Page 604
27-52-12 Nov 30/08
"ePILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELECTRICAL FLAP ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
A. Expendable Parts
401-05 Cotter pin 27-53-01, Fig. 01
2. Job Set Up
A. Open and install a safety clip to the circuit breaker:
FLAP
A. Disconnect the electrical connector from the flap actuator.
B. Remove the cotter pin (5), nut (6), two washers (4) and (7) and bolt (3). Discard the cotter pin.
C. Remove the locking wire and remove the bolt (1) and washer (2).
D. Remove the actuator (8).
4. Installation (Ref. Fig. 401}
A. Put the actuator in position and install the bolt (1) and washer (2).
B. Safety the bolt with locking wire (Material No. P02-001).
C. Put the actuator rod end in position and install the bolt (3), two washers (4) and (5), and nut (6).
D. Safety the nut with new cotter pin.
5. Test
A. Rig the flaps (Ref. 27-50-00, Page Block 501).
6. Close Up
A. Close the circuit breaker FLAP.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with electrical flap operation
I
Page 401
27-53-11 Jun 14/92
"5PILATUS!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
0
A
3. BOLT
4. WASHER
5. COTIERPIN
8. ACTUATOR
Flap Actuator - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with electrical flap operation
I
Page 402
27-53-11 Jun 14/92
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 28 - FUEL
Chapter Chapter
Section Section
List of Effective 1 Jul 31/22 28-15-11 (Cont’d) 402 Jul 30/15
Pages 2 Jul 31/22 403 Jul 30/15
404 Jul 30/15
Table of Contents 1 May 14/10
2 May 14/10 28-15-12 401 Jun 14/91
3 May 14/10 402 Jun 14/91
4 May 14/10 403 Jun 14/91
28-00-00 1 Jul 31/12 28-15-13 401 Mar 14/98

2 Jul 31/12 402 Mar 14/98
3 Jul 31/12
4 Jul 31/12 28-15-14 401 Feb 28/10
5 Jul 31/12 402 Feb 28/10
6 Jul 31/12 403 Feb 28/10
404 Feb 28/10
201 Jun 14/91
202 Jun 14/91 28-20-00 501 Sep 30/07
502 Sep 30/07
28-10-00 601 Dec 14/91 503 Sep 30/07
602 Dec 14/91 504 Sep 30/07
801 Mar 14/95 28-20-03 401 Jul 31/22

802 Mar 14/95 402 Jul 31/22
803 Mar 14/95 403 Jul 31/22
404 Jul 31/22
28-10-11 401 Jun 30/09
402 Jun 30/09 601 Nov 30/03
403 Jun 30/09
404 Jun 30/09 28-21-11 401 Jul 30/15
402 Jul 30/15
28-15-00 1 Jul 30/15 403 Jul 30/15
2 Jul 30/15 404 Jul 30/15
3 Jul 30/15
4 Jul 30/15 28-21-12 401 Jan 30/15
402 Jan 30/15
CONFIG 1 701 Nov 30/08 403 Jan 30/15
702 Nov 30/08 404 Jan 30/15
405 Jan 30/15
CONFIG 2 701 Nov 30/08 406 Jan 30/15
702 Nov 30/08
703 Nov 30/08 701 Mar 14/95
704 Nov 30/08
28-22-11 401 Jun 14/91
28-15-11 401 Jul 30/15 402 Jun 14/91
Page 1
28-LEP Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter Chapter
Section Section
28-22-11 (Cont’d) 403 Jun 14/91
404 Jun 14/91
28-23-11 401 Mar 14/98

402 Mar 14/98
403 Mar 14/98
404 Mar 14/98
28-23-12 401 Jul 31/22

402 Jul 31/22
403 Jul 31/22
404 Jul 31/22
405 Jul 31/22
406 Jul 31/22
28-23-13 401 Mar 14/98

402 Mar 14/98
403 Mar 14/98
28-25-11 401 Nov 30/08

403 Nov 30/08
404 Nov 30/08

402 Nov 30/08
403 Nov 30/08
404 Nov 30/08
28-40-00 501 Sep 30/07

502 Sep 30/07
503 Sep 30/07
504 Sep 30/07
28-41-11 401 Jul 30/15

402 Jul 30/15
403 Jul 30/15
404 Jul 30/15
28-41-12 401 Jun 14/91
Page 2
28-LEP Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 28 - FUEL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
FUEL 28-00-00
FUEL TANK 28-10-00

Repair 801 All
INWARD VENT-VALVE FLOAT 28-10-11
UNDERWING FUEL SYSTEM 28-15-00
Description and Operation 1 Aircraft with u/w
fuel system
UNDERWING FUEL SYSTEM - 28-15-00
FUEL PUMP FILTER
Cleaning / Painting CONFIG 1 701 Aircraft with u/w
fuel system and
fuel transfer
pump P/N
968.84.30.301
or
968.84.30.307
Cleaning / Painting CONFIG 2 701 Aircraft with u/w
fuel system and
fuel transfer
pump P/N
115.55.06.443
UNDERWING TANK 28-15-11
Removal / Installation 401 Aircraft with u/w
fuel system
UNDERWING FUEL TANK PYLON 28-15-12
fuel system
UNDERWING TANK FILTER 28-15-13
fuel system
Page 1
28-TOC May 14/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter
Section
UNDERWING FUEL-SYSTEM VENT-VALVE 28-15-14

FLOAT
fuel system
DISTRIBUTION 28-20-00
ENGINE DRIVEN PUMP 28-20-03
FUEL FILTER ASSEMBLY 28-21-11
FUEL FILTER ELEMENT 28-21-12
Cleaning / Painting 701 Aircraft with SB
126 (Air maze
fuel filter)
FUEL SHUT-OFF VALVE 28-22-11
COLLECTOR TANK 28-23-11
AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP 28-23-12
WATER COLLECTOR TANK 28-23-13
FUEL TRANSFER PUMP 28-25-11
Removal / Installation CONFIG 1 401 Aircraft with u/w
fuel system and
fuel transfer
pump P/N
968.84.30.301
or
968.84.30.307
Removal / Installation CONFIG 2 401 Aircraft with u/w
fuel system and
fuel transfer
pump P/N
115.55.06.443
Page 2
28-TOC May 14/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter
Section
INDICATING 28-40-00
FUEL QUANTITY TRANSMITTER 28-41-11
FUEL QUANTITY INDICATOR 28-41-12
Page 3
28-TOC May 14/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 4
28-TOC May 14/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Fuel is stored in integral fuel tanks in each wing. The tanks each have a capacity of approximately 85
US gallons (321 liters).
A fuel collector tank with an integral auxiliary fuel pump is installed in the fuselage. Fuel passes through
a fuel shut-off valve to the engine driven fuel pump.
Water in the fuel is allowed to drain to a water collector tank through lines installed at the lowest point in
each fuel tank and from a line in the bottom of the collector tank. A drain valve is installed in the bottom
of the tank.
2. Description (Ref. Fig. 1 and 2)
A. Main Tanks
The tanks are located in the area enclosed by main and auxiliary spars, and ribs 1 and 7A. Two
access panels and a filler port are located on the upper surface of each tank, and a float actuated
fuel quantity transmitter is mounted on the inboard rib of each tank.
The inboard section of each tank is vented through the same vent on top of the fuselage. The
outboard part of each tank is vented through a float vent valve. The valve closes when fuel
reaches the valve and opens when fuel is removed.
The tanks are connected to a fuel collector tank and a water collector tank.
B. Fuel Collector Tank
The fuel collector tank is installed in the rear fuselage and is connected to each fuel tank by a
separate pipe. A connection in the bottom of the tank is connected to the water collector tank.
An electrically powered auxiliary fuel pump is installed in the bottom of the tank.
A vent is installed in the top of the tank which attaches to a pipe which connects to the outward
vent system.
C. Water Collector Tank
The water collector tank is installed below the collector tank in the rear fuselage. A pipe carries
fuel from the lowest point of each tank, and also from the collector tank to let water collect in the
tank.
D. Auxiliary Fuel Pump
A 28V DC electrically operated fuel pump (booster pump) is installed in the collector tank. The
pump is operated when high flow rates of fuel are required. It also provides a back-up facility if
the engine driven pump fails.
The pump is controlled by the AUX F PUMP switch on the instrument panel. When the pump is
energized, the caption AUX F PUMP in the annunciator panel, comes on.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
28-00-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Shut-Off Valve
A shut-off valve is located in the engine feed line to the engine at the fireproof bulkhead. The
valve is manually operated from the cockpit and gives an isolation function for an emergency or,
for removing an engine compartment component without draining the fuel system.
F. Fuel Filter
An fuel filter is installed in the engine compartment before the engine driven fuel pump. The filter
removes solid contamination and is installed with a bypass relief valve.
G. Fuel Flow Transmitter
The fuel flow transmitter is installed between the fuel filter and the engine-driven fuel pump. It
supplies electrical signals which are in proportion to the rate of fuel flow. These signals are
transmitted to the signal conditioner.
The signal conditioner changes the frequency signals in to an analog output which is displayed
on the fuel flow indicator and the fuel used totalizer.
The fuel flow indicator displays fuel flow rate and the fuel used totalizer shows the total fuel used.
The totalizer can be reset to zero.
H. Engine Driven Fuel Pump
A low pressure fuel pump is installed on the engine to give a continuous supply of fuel to the high
pressure fuel pump which supplies the fuel control unit. The pump is a vane type with an integral
bypass to allow fuel flow through the pump if there is a failure.
I. Fuel Quantity Indicating System
The fuel quantity indicating system comprises: a float-operated fuel quantity transmitter, a fuel
quantity indicator, a fuel flow meter and a fuel used totalizer.
The fuel quantity transmitter is mounted on the inboard bulkhead of each wing tank.
The fuel quantity indicator, fuel flow meter and the fuel used totalizer are located on the right side
of the instrument panel.
J. Vent System
A modified vent system is installed on the collector tank. A vent line is added between the
outward vent system and the top of the collector tank to let the collector tank fill after prolonged
flight in extreme nose up or down attitudes.
3. Operation (Ref. Fig. 1 and 2)
Fuel is supplied from forward and rear outlets in each tank to make sure there is a continuous supply of
fuel flows at all aircraft attitudes.
Fuel is supplied from the rear outlet in each tank to the fuel collector tank. The front outlets in each tank
supply fuel through the water collector tank to the fuel collector tank.
The position of the two integral fuel tanks gives gravity fuel flow through the collector tank to the engine.
A vent installed in the top of the collector tank, lets the tank fill quickly after prolonged flight at extreme
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
28-00-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
nose up or down operation. Fuel flows from the auxiliary fuel pump in the collector tank and then
through the shut-off valve to a fuel filter.
The fuel filter has a bypass valve to let fuel flow if the filter becomes clogged. The increased pressure
opens the bypass valve and closes a switch to light up the F FILTER caution caption on the annunciator
panel.
Fuel pressure is sensed between the engine driven pump and the fuel control assembly high pressure
pump. Low fuel pressure is indicated when the FUEL PRESS caution caption illuminates on the
annunciator panel.
Fuel flow is measured by a flow transmitter installed downstream of the fuel filter. Signals from the
transmitter drive the fuel flow indicator and the fuel used totalizer positioned on the instrument panel.
The low pressure engine driven fuel pump supplies fuel to the high pressure fuel pump in the engine
fuel system.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
28-00-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INWARD VENT FILLER CAP OUTWARD VENT CROSS VENT
FUEL QUANTITY
TRANSMITTERS
LH FUEL TANK RH FUEL TANK
L R
FUEL
COLLECTOR
FUEL QUANTITY TANK TANK
INDICATOR WATER DRAIN
AUXILIARY PUMP
WATER
COLLECTOR
TANK
AUXILIARY PUMP
SWITCH
DRAIN
SHUTOFF VALVE
ENGINE FIREWALL
PUMP ON LIGHT FILTER

BY-PASS VALVE
FUEL BLEED
RETURN LINE
FILTER BLOCKED
WARNING LIGHT
DRAIN
FUEL FLOW
INDICATOR
FUEL FLOW
TRANSMITTER
CHECK VALVE
FUEL USED ENGINE DRIVEN

TOTALIZER BY-PASS VALVE FUEL PUMP
LOW PRESSURE
WARNING LIGHT
LOW PRESSURE
6275
SWITCH ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel System Schematic

Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 4
28-00-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL QUANTITY
TRANSMITTER
SUPPLY LINES
FUEL
COLLECTOR
VENT LINE
TANK
OUTWARD VENT
AUXILIARY
FUEL PUMP
WATER DRAIN
LINES
FUEL FLOW WATER

TRANSMITTER COLLECTOR
TANK
DRAIN LINE
INWARD VENT
FILLER CAP
FUEL SYSTEM
VALVE CONTROL
FUEL BLEED
RETURN LINE
SHUTOFF VALVE
FUEL DRAIN
6276
Component Location
Figure 2
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 5
28-00-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 6
28-00-00 Jul 31/12
"llPILATUSiF
PC·6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
Fuel air mixtures are explosive. No static discharge or spark production must come in to contact with
fuel air mixtures.
2. Safety precautions
A. Suitable fire-fighting equipment must be available together with personnel trained in their use.
B. The aircraft must be electrically grounded and all ground equipment or containers must be
grounded to the aircraft.
C. Aircraft electric supplies must be switched off, and no live electrical cables should be left
disconnected.
D. Only spark-proof electrical equipment must be operated near to the aircraft.
E. Do not wear any nylon clothing, zips, nailed or metal studded footwear, or carry any matches or
cigarette lighters.
F. Explosion-proof equipment must be used.
G. Air-fed respirators must be worn In areas of high vapour concentrations, for example, near to an
open tank access hole.
3. Refuel/Defuel
A. General
When the aircraft is refuelled or defuelled the above precautions must be observed. In addition
to this, the following precautions must be followed:
(1) The aircraft should be refulled or defuelled in an approved fuel area or in the open air. The
area must be:
(a) Downwind of any building in which fuel vapour may collect.
(b) At least 15 meters (50 ft) from buildings, other aircrafts, motor vehicles, ground
equipment and any potential source of ignition.
(c) At least 60 meters (200 ft) from HF radio transmitters which are in use.
(d) At least 120 meters (400 ft) from radar equipment which is in use.
(2) The refuelling vehicle should be parked so that its escape route Is kept clear.
(3) Before the filler cap is removed, the earth wire on the refuel pipe should be connected to
the earth point provided on the aircraft. The earth wire should remain in position until the
refuel pipe is removed or the filler cap is replaced.
(4) When the aircraft is defuelled the earth wire should be connected first and disconnected
last.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
28-00-00 Jun 14/91
';EPILATUS•
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Contamination Precautions
CAUTION: DO NOT ALLOW UNWANTED MATERIAL OR CONTAMINATION TO ENTER THE

AIRCRAFT FUEL SYSTEM. THIS COULD CAUSE SERIOUS CORROSION OR DAMAGE
TO THE FUEL TANKS AND COMPONENTS, AND MAY RESULT IN ENGINE FAILURE.
A. Ensure that hands, clothing, tools, and all items of equipment are clean and that nothing used
will introduce unwanted material in to the fuel system.
B. When fuel pipes or components are removed or disconnected, clean blanks must be fitted to all
open pipe ends, ducts and ports. Blanks should not be made from material where particles are
easily removed. Blanks must be designed so that it is impossible to connect the components
with a blank in place.
C. Afte r work in an open tank is completed, the interior of the tank must be washed and dried.
D. When jointing compound is used to install a component, care must be taken not to use to much
as surplus compound could enter the fuel system. Surplus compound should be wiped off while
still wet.
E. When a component has been installed, a fuel flow test is to be carried out.
5. Fuel leakage
A. Fuel leakage can be difficult to find. When the tank is to be repaired, care is required to make
sure the tank seal is not damaged.
B. After a connection has been moved the 0-rlng or bonded seal must be replaced.
C. Do not bend or distort the fuel pipes when disconnecting.
D. Do not overtighten connections; where no torque figure is given, tighten a connection to the
standard torque.
6. Fuel Flow Test
A. The test is done to make sure that the system will provide sufficient fuel flow to the engine in
excess of the engine requirements.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page202
28-00-00 Jun 14/91
";EPILATUS!iP"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL TANK- INSPECTION/CHECK
1. General
This procedure gives the details for the detection of fuel leaks from the aircraft wing tank .
Flexible hose
Air supply
Material No. D escript ion R e marks
P01-005 Soa p solution
12-11-28 Fuel - Servicing

28-10-00 Fuel Tank - Repa ir
3. Procedure
A. Locate the general area of fuel leak.
B. Defuel the aircraft (R ef. 12-11-28, Page Block 301 ) .
c. Remove the tank access panels LT1, LT2 or RT1, RT2.
D. Dry the area and examine the seal.
E. If the area of the leak can not be found:
(1) Apply soap solution (Material N o. P01-005) to the area In the tank.
(2) Hold the compressed ai r supply hose close to the external surface of the wing.
I CAUTION: DO NOT USE AN AIR PRESSURE OF MORE THAN 3 BAR (4 5 PS I) OR DAMAGE

COULD BE CAUSED TO THE TANK.
(3) Turn on the air supply.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 601
28-10-00 Dec 14/91
"'ii PILATUS !iii"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Look on the inside of the tank and mark the position of the leak as Indicated by any
bubbles.
E. If the area of the leak can not be found:
(1) Use blanks to seal the fuel outlets and vents.
(2) Pressure the tank to a maximum of 0, 17 bar (2.5 psQ.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE AN AIR PRESSURE OF MORE THAN 0, 17 BAR (2.5 PSI) OR
DAMAGE COULD BE CAUSED TO THE TANK.
(3) Look for leaks.
F. Repair the tank sealant (Ref. 28-10-00, Page Block 801 ) .
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page602
28-10-00 Dec 14/91
�PILATUS!!EF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL TANK- REPAIRS
1. General
There are two types of repair that can be done to the fuel tanks:
A. Minor Repair
A minor repair can be done if the sealant and protective coatings are in good condition. It is not
necessary to remove the old sealant before the new sealant and protective coating is applied.
B. Major Repair
A major repair must be done if the leak is because of deterioration of the old sealant or after
repair to the fuel tank structure. The old sealant must be removed before the new sealant is
applied.
Brushes
Scrapers and spatulas Non-metallic, sharpened
P01-010 Methyl-Ethyl-Ketone (MEK)

P02-002 Aluminum wool
P02-016 Scotch-Brite Very fine grade
P07-001 Alodine 1200S or similar Brush applied
chromate conversion treatment
P08-018 Sealant (PR1422B-2) Cartridge applied
P08-020 Sealant (PR1422A-2) Brush applied
P08-024 Protective coating PR1005-L Brush applied
3. Procedures
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE HEALTH
AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS GIVEN BY THE MANUFACTURERS.
WARNING: OBEY THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS GIVEN IN 28-00-00, PAGE BLOCK 201.
A. Preparation
(1) Find the location of the leak (Ref. 28-10-00, Page Block 601).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 801
28-10-00 Mar 14/95
'e PILATUS E5"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Remove the fuel tank access panels as necessary.
(3) Make sure the inside of the fuel tank is dry.
(4) Clean the inside of the fuel tank with cleaning cloth (Material No. P02-003) made moist
with MEK (Material No. P01-010).
(5) Examine the fuel tank sealant and repair the fuel tank as follows:
(a) If the fuel tank sealant and protective surfaces are in good condition do a minor
repair.
(b) If the fuel tank sealant is loose or damaged, or there is corrosion do a major repair.
8. Minor Repair
(1) Make the repair area rough with aluminum wool (Material No. P02-002) or Scotch-Brite
(2) Clean the repair area with cleaning cloth (Material No. P02-003) made moist with MEK
(3) Use a brush to apply a layer of sealant (Material No. POB-020) to the repair area.
(4) Follow the manufacturer's instructions and let the sealant cure.
(5) Use a brush to apply a layer of protective coating (Material No. POB-024) to the sealant.
Make sure there is sufficient overlap of protective coating around the edges of the new
sealant.
(6) Let the coating become dry to the touch and apply another layer, if required.
(7) Let the protective coating cure for 4 hours at 25°C or 1/2 hour at 25°C plus 2 hours at
40°C.
C. Major Repair
CAUTION: DO NOT CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE WHEN YOU

REMOVE THE OLD SEALANT.
(1) Remove the damaged sealant with scrapers.
(2) Remove the remaining damaged sealant with aluminum wool (Material No. P02-002) or
Scotch-Brite (Material No. P02-016) and MEK (Material No. P01-010).
(3) Examine the repair area for corrosion.
(4) If corrosion is found, remove it wi1h aluminum wool (Material No. P02-002) or Scotch-Brite
NOTE: If the skin thickness has decreased by more than 10% after corrosion removal,
refer to the Structural Repair Manual.
(5) Clean the repair area with cleaning cloth (Material No. P02�003) made moist with MEK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 802
28-10-00 Mar 14/95
�PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Make sure the fuel tank is dry.
(7) Apply Alodine 12008 (Material No. P0?-001) to all bare metal surfaces. After 5 minutes
remove the Alodine with wet cleaning cloths.
(8) Let the repair area become completely dry.
(9) Apply a coat of epoxy primer (Material No. P0?-002) to the bare metal area and let the
primer become dry.
(10) Use a cartridge to apply fillet of sealant (Material No. P08-018} to lap joints in the repair
area.
(11) Use a brush to apply a layer of sealant (Material No. P08-020}.
(12) When the sealant is dry, apply another layer of sealant (Material No. P08-020).
(13) Use a spatula to make the sealant surface smooth. Add further sealant as necessary.
(14) Follow the manufacturer's instructions and let the sealant cure.
(15) Use a brush to apply a layer of protective coating (Material No. P08-024} to the sealant.
Make sure there is sufficient overlap of protective coating around the edges of the new
sealant.
{16) Let the protective coating cure for 4 hours at 25°C or 1/2 hour at 25°C plus 2 hours at
40°C.
D. Close Up
(2) Install the fuel tank access panels as necessary.
(3) Refuel the aircraft (Ref. 12-11-28).
(4) Examine the fuel tank for leaks. Leaks are not permitted.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 803
28-10-00 Mar 14/95
'SPILATUSS:-
P C-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INWARD VENT-VALVE FLOAT- REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This procedure gives the data to replace the float in the wing fuel-tank inward vent-valve. Two types of
float can be installed:
•
Early vent-valves have a cork float and a disc
•
Later vent-valves have a wood float.
It is recommended to install the later wood float in all vent-valves (and discard the disc).
A. Expendable Parts
115.55.06.361 Float Fig. 401 , Item 5
Blank Local supply
P08-043 Loctite Grade 243
3. Procedures
A. Removal
(1 ) Remove the vent-valve (4) from the wing top surface.
(2) Put a blank in the hole in the wing top surface.
(3) Remove the plug (1) complete with the cap from the body of the vent valve (4) .
NOTE: The plug (1) has two opposite holes. You can use a small peg spanner or put two
drills in the holes to turn it. Do not remove the cap from the plug.
(4) Remove and discard the float (5), or the float (3) and disc (2).
(5) Examine the parts of the vent-valve for damage and corrosion. Make sure the vent holes in
the cap are not blocked.
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 401
28-10-11 Jun 30/09
� PILATUS :::?"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
(1) Put the new float (5) in the vent-valve (4 ) .
(2) Apply loctite (Material No. P08-043) to the threads of the plug (1).
(3) Install the plug (1) in the vent-valve (4).
NOTE: The plug (1) has two opposite holes. You can use a small peg spanner or put two
drills in the holes to turn it.
(4) Remove the blank from the hole in the wing top surface.
(5) Install the vent-valve (4) in the wing top surface.
C. Close Up
EFFECTIVITY:
Page402
28-10-11 Jun30/09
'SPILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
/ -1
( CJ-- 2
I
I
I 3
)
l,,, /
It)
0
....
"'
Inward Vent-Valve Float - Removal I Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 403
28-10-11 Jun 30/09
�PILATUS=
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 404
28-10-11 Jun 30/09
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
UNDERWING FUEL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The optional underwing fuel system stores fuel in underwing tanks. The tanks each have a usable
capacity of 246 liters (64 US Gals).
NOTE: Other capacity underwing tanks may be installed.
The system has these components:
• Two underwing tanks

• Two fuel pumps
• Two pressure switches
• Two check valves
• Two time-delay relays
• An EXTERNAL FUEL CONTROL LH PUMP and RH PUMP switch
• An EXTERNAL FUEL CONTROL EMER/NORMAL switch
The system sends an output to:
• The CAWS (Ref. 31-51-00) (if installed)
The power supply to the system is:
• 28V DC through the LH EXT FUEL (BATTERY BUS) circuit breaker

• 28V DC through the RH EXT FUEL (GENERATOR BUS) circuit breaker
2. Component Description (Ref. Fig. 1)
A. Underwing Tank
The tanks are installed on attachment points under each wing pylon. The tanks are of light alloy
construction and contain a filter, a filler cap and a drain valve. An access panel is installed on the
side of the tank. The fuel filter in the bottom of the tank prevents contamination of the main fuel
system.
B. Fuel Pump
A electrical fuel pump is installed in each wing outboard of the main tank. The fuel pumps supply
the wing tanks with fuel from the underwing tanks. The pump has an integral filter.
C. Pressure Switch
The pressure switch is located adjacent to each fuel pump. The pressure switch is used to
illuminate the L FUEL FLOW or R FUEL FLOW caption and switch the fuel pump off.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with underwing fuel system
Page 1
28-15-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Check Valves
A check valve is installed between each fuel pump and underwing tank. The check valve stops
the fuel returning to the underwing tank when the fuel pump stops.
E. Time-Delay Relays
A time-delay relay is installed in each wing. A 30 second time delay, allows pressure changes to
stop on and off operation of the fuel pumps.
F. EXTERNAL FUEL CONTROL LH PUMP and RH PUMP Switches
The three position START/ON/OFF switches identified LH PUMP and RH PUMP are installed on
the RH instrument panel. The switches give control of the system.
G. EXTERNAL FUEL CONTROL EMER/NORM switch
A two position EMER/NORMAL switch is also installed on the RH instrument panel. The switch
gives a direct 28V DC supply to the fuel pumps during an emergency.
3. Operation (Ref. Fig. 2)
When the contents of the main tanks are less than three quarters full, the float switch contacts are
closed.
Fuel transfer starts when the EXTERNAL FUEL CONTROL LH PUMP(RH PUMP) switch is moved to
START. The closed switch contacts give a 28V DC supply to energize the time-delay relay. The
closed contacts of the time-delay relay give a supply to the fuel pump and the pump operates.
Operation of the pump causes the pressure switch contacts to change over, and the L FUEL FLOW
(R FUEL FLOW) caption goes off, and the LF PUMP (RF PUMP) caption comes on.
When the EXTERNAL FUEL CONTROL LH PUMP(RH PUMP) switch is released to the ON position,
the time-delay relay stays energized through the 28V DC supply routed through the closed contacts of
the float switch and the pressure switch.
Fuel is transferred until the supply to the time-delay relay is broken by the pressure switch sensing a
low pressure situation, or when the float switch contacts open (wing tank full). This causes the L FUEL
FLOW (R FUEL FLOW) caption to come on and the LF PUMP (RF PUMP) caption to go off. A 30
second time-delay prevents unnecessary operation of the time-delay relay. Transfer of fuel can be
stopped by selecting the applicable LH PUMP(RH PUMP) switch to off.
During an emergency the EXTERNAL FUEL CONTROL EMER/NORMAL switch can be selected to
the EMERG position to give a 28V DC supply direct to each fuel pump. This supply by-passes the
normal switches, float switches, pressure switches and time-delay relay to operate both pumps
directly.
Page 2
28-15-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PRESSURE SWITCH
FLOAT SWITCH
RELAY
FILLER CAP
VENT
PUMP
CHECK VALVE
UNDERWING TANK
A
ACCESS PANEL
FILTER
DRAIN VALVE
6346
Underwing Fuel System - Component Location

Figure 1
Page 3
28-15-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BATT BUS 28V DC
LH EXT FUEL
EMERGENCY
SWITCH
EXTERNAL FUEL CONTROL
LH PUMP
SWITCH POSITIONS
OFF
ON
START
FUEL TANK LH WING
PRESSURE SWITCH
HI LO
L FUEL FLOW
LF PUMP
TD
RELAY
FUEL PUMP
FLOAT SWITCH
LEFT SYSTEM SHOWN

RIGHT SIMILAR
6361
Underwing Fuel System - Schematic

Figure 2
Page 4
28-15-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
UNDERWING FUEL SYSTEM FUEL PUMP FILTER - CLEANING/PAINTING
- Regulated air supply
B. Expendable Parts
Part No. Description Fig. Item No.
968.84.30.305 Filter (if required) -

968.84.30.306 Gasket -
YOU DO WORK ON THE FUEL SYSTEM.
2. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) Open and install the safety clip to the circuit breaker:
EXT FUEL
(2) Remove the access panels LB7, LB9, RB7 and RB8.
B. Removal
(1) Remove the three bolts and the cover, gasket and filter.
C. Cleaning
WARNING: MAKE SURE YOUR HANDS ARE CLEAN BEFORE YOU CLEAN THE FUEL
FILTER. DO NOT USE COTTON CLOTH TO CLEAN THE FILTER. COTTON CAN
CAUSE FUEL FILTER CONTAMINATION.
(1) Use a regulated air supply from the inner surface of the fuel filter to remove unwanted
material.
(2) If the filter cannot be cleaned or is damaged - Reject the filter.
D. Installation
(1) Put the filter, new gasket and cover in position and install the three bolts.
E. Leak Test
(1) Close the circuit breaker EXT FUEL.
(2) Energize the aircraft electrical system (Ref. AMM 24-40-00, Page Block 1).
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with underwing fuel system and

fuel transfer pump P/N 968.84.30.301 or CONFIG 1
968.84.30.307 Page 701
28-15-00 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Set the NORMAL-EMERG switch to EMERG and check that the pump operates.
(4) Check the pump for leaks. No leaks are permitted.
(5) Set the NORMAL-EMERG switch to NORMAL.
(6) Remove the electrical power from the aircraft (Ref. AMM 24-40-00, Page Block 1).
F. Close Up
(2) Install the access panels LB7, LB9, RB7 and RB8.

968.84.30.307 Page 702
28-15-00 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
UNDERWING-FUEL-SYSTEM FUEL-PUMP FILTER - CLEANING/PAINTING
B. Expendable Parts
Part No. Description Fig. Item No.
968.84.30.305 Filter (if required) Fig 701, Item 3

946.91.27.355 O-ring Fig 701, Item 5
968.84.30.309 O-ring Fig 701, Item 2
2. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
EXT FUEL
(2) Remove the access panels LB7, LB9, RB7 and RB8.
(1) Loosen the clamp (7) and disconnect the tube (8) from the elbow of the pump inlet.
(2) Remove the bolt (6), the bowl (4), the O-ring (2) and filter (3) from the pump (1).
WARNING: MAKE SURE YOUR HANDS ARE CLEAN BEFORE YOU CLEAN THE FILTER (3).
DO NOT USE COTTON CLOTH TO CLEAN THE FILTER. COTTON CAN
CONTAMINATE THE FILTER.
C. Cleaning
(1) Use a regulated air supply to blow through from the inside of the filter (3) to remove
unwanted material.
(2) If the filter (3) is damaged or cannot be cleaned, discard the filter and install a new one.
D. Installation (Ref. Fig. 701)
(1) Remove and discard the O-ring (5) from the bolt (6) and install a new O-ring (5).
(2) Put the filter (3), new O-ring (2) and bowl (4) in position and install the bolt (6).

fuel transfer pump P/N 115.55.06.443
CONFIG 2
Page 701
28-15-00 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Connect the tube (8) to the elbow of the pump oulet and tighten the clamp (7).
E. Leak Test
(4) Check the pump for leaks. No leaks are permitted.
F. Close Up
(2) Install the access panels LB7, LB9, RB7 and RB8.

fuel transfer pump P/N 115.55.06.443 CONFIG 2
Page 702
28-15-00 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A 3
7
8
5
6689
Filter - Removal/Installation
Figure 701

fuel transfer pump P/N 115.55.06.443
CONFIG 2
Page 703
28-15-00 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

Page 704
28-15-00 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
UNDERWING TANK - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THE UNDERWING TANK IS DEFUELLED AND SUPPORTED BEFORE
THE TANK ATTACHMENT BOLTS ARE REMOVED.
- Trestle, Tank Support Local Manufacture
B. Expendable Parts
28-15-01, Fig. 01 Cotter pin (Qty 2) Fig. 401, item 9
P04-006 Grease
2. Job Set Up
A. Defuel the underwing tank (Ref. 12-10-03, Page Block 301).
A. Remove the screws (3) and washers (4). Remove the fairings (1) and (6).
B. Disconnect the fuel transfer pipe (2)
C. Disconnect the tank vent pipe (5).
D. Remove the cotter pins (9), nuts (8) and washers (10). Discard the cotter pins.
E. Hold the weight of the tank (7) and remove the two bolts (12) and washers (11).
F. Lower the tank on to the support trestle at the positions marked "TRESTLE HERE".
G. Install blanks at the tank and wing pipe openings.
A. Lubricate the bolts (12) with grease (Material No. P04-006).
B. Put the tank (7) in position.
C. Install the two bolts (12) with washers (11).
NOTE: Make sure that the cotter pin hole is accessible for cotter pin installation.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
28-15-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Install the washers (10) and nuts (8).
E. Safety the nuts (8) with new cotter pins (9).
F. Remove the blanks from the tank and wing pipe connections.
G. Connect the fuel transfer pipe (2)
H. Connect the tank vent pipe (5).
5. Test
A. Refuel the tank (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301).
B. Energize the aircraft electrical system.
C. Set NORMAL-EMERG switch to EMERG to operate the transfer pump for 5 to 6 seconds.
D. Set NORMAL-EMERG switch to NORMAL and remove the electrical power from the aircraft
electrical system.
E. Check the fuel transfer pipe connections for leaks. No leaks are acceptable.
6. Close Up (Ref. Fig. 401)
A. Put the fairings (1) and (6) in to position.
B. Install the screws (3) and washers (4).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
28-15-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
A
1 FRONT FAIRING
2 TRANSFER PIPE
3 SCREW
4 WASHER
12 ATTACHMENT 5 VENT PIPE

BOLT
11 WASHER
10 WASHER
9 COTTER PIN
6 REAR FAIRING
8 NUT
7 TANK 6259
Underwing Tank - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
28-15-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
28-15-11 Jul 30/15
";E!PILATUSiF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
UNDERWING FUEL TANK PYLON- REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
A. Expendable Parts
401 -03 Cotter pin

401 -05 Cotter pin
401 -10 Seal
401 -13 0-ring
401 -18 0-ring
P04-002 Grease
12-11-28 Fuel -Servicing

28-15-11 Underwing Tank - Removal/Installation
2. Job Set Up
A. Remove the underwing tank (Ref. 28-15-11, Page Block 401).
A. Remove the screws (8) and the access panel (9). Discard the panel seal (10).
B. Remove the cotter pins (3) and (5) . Discard the cotter pins.
c. Remove the nuts (2) and (6), and the washers (1) and (7).
D. Remove the bolts (11) and (15) and the washers (12) and (16).
NOTE: Access to the boltheads is through the access opening.
c. Remove the pylon (4) and the shims (19) and (14) from the tank (17).
D. Remove the 0-rings ( 18) and (13) installed below each shim.
A. Lubricate the bolts (11 ) and (15) with grease (Material No. P04-002).
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with underwing fuel system.
Page 401
28-15-12 Jun 14/91
;aPILATUSE!!"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Install new 0-rings (18) and (13) to the concave face of each shim (14) and (19).
C. Put the shims on to the tank (17) and then put the pylon (4) on to the tank.
D. Install the bolts (11) and (15) with washers (12) and (16).
NOTE: Make sure that the cotter pin hole is accessible for cotter pin installation.
E. Install the washers (1) and (7) and nuts (2) and (6).
F. Torque the nuts (2) and (6) to 101.7 Nm (900 lbfin.). Tighten to align with cotter pin hole.
NOTE: Make sure the shims (14) and (19), and the 0-rings (18) and (13) remain in place.
G. Safety the nuts with new cotter pins (3) and (5).
H. Install a new panel seal (1O) and install the access panel (9) on to the tank (17).
5. Close Up
A. Install the tank onto the aircraft (Ref. 28-15-11, Page Block 401).
6. Test
A. Refuel the aircraft (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301).
B. Look for leaks from the access panel (9) and the seals (13) and (18). No leaks are acceptable.
Page 402
28-15-12 Jun 14/91
wPILATUSIF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3.COTTERPIN
� NUT
�2.
�1.WASHER PYLON
4.
'
' �5.COTTERPIN
C � WASHER
c�m
8. SCREW
13. 0-RING
12. WASHER
11. BOLT
6260
Underwing Fuel Tank Pylon-Removal/Installation
Figure401
Page403
28-15-12 Jun 14/91
'ePILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
UNDERWING T ANK FILTER - REMOVAUINSTALLATION
A. Expendable Parts
28-15-11, Fig. 01 0-ring MS 29512-12
2. Procedures (Ref . Fig. 401)
A. Job Set Up
(1) Defuel the underwing tank (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301).
B. Remova l
(1) Remove the filter (3).
(2) Remove and discard the filter 0-ring (2).
C. Installation
(1) Install a new 0-ring (2) on to filter (3).
(2) Install the filter (3).
D. Test
(1) Refuel the underwing tank (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301).
(2) Check the filter for leaks. No leaks are acceptable.
E. Close Up
EFFECTIVITV: All
Page 401
28-15-13 Mar 14/98
'S PILATUS !!!!!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Underwing Tank Filter - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
28-15-13 Mar 14/98
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
UNDERWING FUEL-SYSTEM VENT-VALVE FLOAT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This procedure gives the data to replace the float in the underwing fuel system vent-valve. Two types of
float can be installed:
• Early vent-valves have a cork float and a disc

• Later vent-valves have a wood float.
It is recommended to install the later wood float in all vent-valves (and discard the disc).
A. Expendable Parts
115.55.06.361 Float Fig. 401, Item 7
- Blanks Local supply
3. Procedures
A. Removal
(1) Remove access panel LB12 or RB11 as applicable (Ref. 06-40-00, Page Block 1).
(2) Disconnect the vent pipe (1) from the adapter (2).
(3) Remove the vent valve (5) from the connector (6).
(4) Remove the plug (8) from the vent-valve (5).
(5) Remove and discard the float (7), or the float (4) and disc (3).
(6) If the vent-valve is not to be installed immediately, put blanks on the open pipe (1) and
connector (6).
(7) Examine the parts of the vent-valve for damage and corrosion. Make sure the vent hole in
the plug (8) is not blocked.
NOTE: It is only necessary to remove the adapter (2) from the plug (8) if the vent hole is
blocked and you must clean the plug (8).
B. Installation
(1) Put the new float (7) in the vent-valve (5).
(2) If necessary, install the adapter (2) in the plug (8).
Page 401
28-15-14 Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Install the plug (8) in the vent-valve (5).
(4) If necessary, remove the blanks.
(5) Install the vent-valve (5) in the connector (6).
(6) Install the vent-pipe (1) on the adapter (2).
(7) Install access panel LB12 or RB11 as applicable (Ref. 06-40-00, Page Block 1).
C. Close Up
Page 402
28-15-14 Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ACCESS
PANEL RB11
A
1
ACCESS PANEL LB12

3
8
4
6
6707
Vent-Valve Float - Removal / Installation

Figure 401
Page 403
28-15-14 Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 404
28-15-14 Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. General
This fuel flow check is used to make sure that sufficient fuel flow is available to supply the engine under
all power settings.
This procedure must be done when parts of the fuel system are disconnected or replaced.
- Stopwatch
Fuel container with measured Minimum capacity 40 liters (10 US
-
graduations in liters or US gals gals)
3. Procedure
A. Job Set Up
(1) Make sure that the aircraft is tail down (10° ± 1° nose up).
(2) Make sure that the aircraft is refuelled to maximum (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301).
(3) Set the fuel-system valve lever to CLOSED.
(4) Open the fuel-filter access panel PB3.
(5) Open the engine access panel PL1.
B. Preparation (Ref. Fig. 501)
(1) Put the fuel container below the fuel filter.
(2) Open the filter drain valve (4) and let the fuel drain.
(3) When the flow of fuel stops, close the drain valve (4).
(4) Remove the outlet hose (2) from between the fuel flow transmitter (3) and the Engine
Driven Pump (EDP) (1).
(5) Turn the outlet hose through 180 degrees, then install the outlet hose (2) to the fuel flow
transmitter (3) with the other end through the access panel PB3.
(6) Put the fuel container below the disconnected end of the outlet hose (2). Do not extend the
length of the hose for the test.
(7) Set the fuel-system valve-lever to OPEN until you get a constant flow of fuel into the
container.
(8) Set the fuel-system valve-lever to CLOSED and empty the container.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 501
28-20-00 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Gravity Flow System
(1) Put the fuel container below the disconnected end of the outlet hose.
(2) Set the fuel-system valve-lever to OPEN for 5 minutes.
(3) Set the fuel-system valve-lever to CLOSED.
(4) Make sure that there is not less than 6,95 liters (1,84 US gals) of fuel in the container.
(5) Empty the container.
D. Auxiliary Fuel Pump System
(1) Put the fuel container below the disconnected end of the outlet hose
(3) Set the AUX F PUMP switch to ON and immediately set the fuel-system valve lever to
OPEN.
(4) After 5 minutes, set the fuel-system valve lever to CLOSED and the AUX F PUMP switch
to OFF.
(6) Make sure that there is not less than 22,1 liters (5,84 US gals) of fuel in the container.
E. Close Up (Ref. Fig. 501)
(1) Remove the outlet hose (2) from the fuel flow transmitter (3).
(2) Install the outlet hose (2) between the fuel flow transmitter (3) and the EDP (1).
(4) Set the fuel-system valve lever to OPEN.
(5) Set the AUX F PUMP switch to ON.
(6) Do a leak check at the outlet hose (2) and the tee adapter (3) connection. No leaks are
permitted.
(7) Set the AUX F PUMP to OFF.
(8) Set the fuel-system valve lever to CLOSED.
(10) Discard the fuel as given in the local regulations.
(12) Close the fuel-filter access panel PB3 and the engine access panel PL1.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 502
28-20-00 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
ACCESS
PANEL PB3
1
4 2
4
6669
Fuel Distribution - Adjustment / Test

Figure 501
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 503
28-20-00 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 504
28-20-00 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENGINE DRIVEN FUEL PUMP - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedure for the removal and installation of the Engine Driven Fuel Pump
(EDFP).
B. Expendable Parts
28-21-01, Fig. 01/40 Seal, O-ring Ref. Fig. 401, Item 3

71-71-01, Fig. 01/130 Seal, O-ring Ref. Fig. 401, Item 6
73-11-01, Fig. 01/10 Gasket Ref. Fig. 401, Item 1
P01-011 Solvent (alcohol)

P04-030 Grease
P04-041 Grease
3. Procedures
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU DO MAINTENANCE ON THE FUEL SYSTEM. THE

MIXTURE OF FUEL AND AIR IS DANGEROUS. IF SPARKS AND FLAMES OCCUR
NEAR THE MIXTURE OF FUEL AND AIR, AN EXPLOSION CAN OCCUR. THE
EXPLOSION CAN CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL AND/OR DAMAGE TO
THE EQUIPMENT.
A. Job Set Up
Open engine cowls PL1 and PR1 (Ref. 06-40-00, Page Block 1).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
28-20-03 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(1) Obey the fuel safety and contamination precautions and the fuel leakage procedures given
(Ref. 28-00-00, Page Block 201).
AUX F PUMP
(3) Release and set the FUEL SYSTEM VALVE switch in the cockpit to CLOSED.
(4) Disconnect the fuel pipes (5) and (9) and the drain pipe (8) from the unions (4) and (7)
(Ref. 20-10-06, Page Block 201).
(5) Remove the nuts (10), washers (11) and the EDFP (2).
(7) If the EDFP is to be replaced:
(a) Remove and keep the unions (4) and (7) (Ref. 20-10-06, Page Block 201).
(b) Remove and discard the O-ring seals (3) and (6).
(8) Install blanks on all open pipes and connections.
(9) Use cleaning cloth (Material No. P02-003) to remove any remaining fuel from the work
area.
(1) Remove blanks from the EDFP (2).
(2) If a replacement EDFP is to be installed:
(a) Use absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) or a lint-free cloth (Material No. P02-
041) made moist with solvent (alcohol) (Material No. P01-011) to clean the threads
of the unions (4) and (7).
(b) Lubricate the O-ring seals (3) and (6) with grease (Material No. P04-030)
(Ref. 20-10-06, Page Block 201).
(c) Install new O-ring seals (3) and (6) on the unions (4) and (7) (Ref. 20-10-06, Page
Block 201).
(d) Lubricate the threads of the unions (4) and (7) with grease (Material No. P04-030)
(Ref. 20-10-06, Page Block 201).
(e) Remove unwanted lubricant and make sure that there is no lubricant in non
permitted areas (Ref. 20-10-06, Page Block 201).
(f) Install the unions (4) and (7) to the replacement EDFP (2) (Ref. 20-10-06, Page
Block 201).
(3) Use cleaning cloth (Material No. P02-003) to clean the mating faces of the EDFP (2) and
the engine.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
28-20-03 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Lubricate the splines of the EDFP (2) and the engine internal splines with grease (Material
No. P04-041).
(5) Install a new gasket (1).
(6) Engage the splines of the EDFP (2) with the engine internal splines. Then install the EDFP
(2) on the engine.
(8) Torque the nuts (10) to between 8,5 and 9,6 Nm (75 and 85 lb in).
(9) Remove the blanks from the pipes (5), (8) and (9).
(10) Make sure that you check that the pipes and fittings are clean, undamaged and free from
obstructions.
(11) Connect the fuel pipes (5) and (9) to the unions (4) (Ref. 20-10-06, Page Block 201).
(12) Connect the drain pipe (8) to the union (7) (Ref. 20-10-06, Page Block 201).
D. Test
AUX F PUMP
(3) Set the FUEL SYSTEM VALVE switch in the cockpit to OPEN.
(4) Set the AUX F PUMP switch in the cockpit to ON.
(5) Do a check of the EDFP for fuel leaks. Fuel leaks are not permitted.
(6) Set the AUX F PUMP switch in the cockpit to OFF.
(8) Close engine cowls PL1 and PR1 (Ref. 06-40-00, Page Block 1).
(10) Stop the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(11) Open engine cowls PL1 and PR1 (Ref. 06-40-00, Page Block 1).
(12) Do a check of the EDFP for fuel leaks. Fuel leaks are not permitted.
E. Close Up
work area is clean.
(2) Close engine cowls PL1 and PR1 (Ref. 06-40-00, Page Block 1).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
28-20-03 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
1
9
11
10
2
4
A
7
8
6645
Engine Driven Fuel Pump - Removal / Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
28-20-03 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENGINE DRIVEN FUEL PUMP (EDFP) - INSPECTION / CHECK
1. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) Open the engine cowls PL1 and PR1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(2) Remove the EDFP (Ref. 28-20-03, Page Block 401).
B. Examine the Pump
(1) Examine the pump drive shaft for backlash:
(a) Push, pull and simultaneously rotate the shaft backwards and forwards.
(b) Measure the backlash at the circumference of the shaft.
(2) If the backlash is 2,5mm (0.1in.) or more - Reject the pump.
C. Job Close Up
(1) Install the EDFP (Ref. 28-20-03, Page Block 401).
(2) Close the engine cowls PL1 and PR1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 601
28-20-03 Nov 30/03
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL FILTER ASSEMBLY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
- Clean container Minimum capacity

3.8 litres (1 US gal)
B. Expendable Parts
28-21-01, Fig. 01A O-ring (Zenith) Fig 401, Item 3

28-21-01, Fig. 01A O-ring (Zenith) Fig 401, Item 6
28-21-01, Fig. 01 O-ring seal (Air Maze) Fig 402, Item 3
28-21-01, Fig. 01 O-ring seal (Air Maze) Fig 402, Item 8
2. Job Set Up
A. Set the fuel system valve lever to CLOSED.
B. Open the fuel filter access panel PB3 and the engine cowl PL1.
C. Open the filter drain valve and drain the fuel in to the container.
3. Removal
A. Aircraft Pre SB126 (Zenith fuel filter) (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Disconnect the electrical cables.
(2) Disconnect the inlet pipe (1) and the outlet pipe (7).
(4) Remove the filter assembly (9).
B. Aircraft Post SB126 (Air Maze fuel filter) (Ref. Fig. 402)
(1) Disconnect the electrical connectors (4).
(2) Disconnect the inlet pipe (1) and the outlet pipe (10).
(3) Remove the nuts (6), washers (7) and (13) and bolts (12).
(4) Remove the filter assembly (11) and base (5).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
28-21-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Installation
A. Aircraft Pre SB126 (Zenith fuel filter) (Fig. 401)
(1) Transfer the following items to the replacement filter assembly:
(a) Inlet adaptor (2). Install a new O-ring (3).
(b) Outlet adaptor (8). Install a new O-ring (6).
(2) Put the filter assembly (9) in to position.
(4) Connect the inlet pipe (1) and the outlet pipe (8).
(5) Connect the electrical cables.
B. Aircraft Post SB126 (Air Maze fuel filter) (Ref. Fig. 402)
(1) Transfer the following items to the replacement filter assembly:
(a) Inlet union (2). Install a new O-ring (3).
(b) Outlet union (9). Install a new O-ring (8).
(2) Put the filter assembly (11) and the base (5) in to position.
(3) Install the bolts (12), washers (13) and (7) and nuts (6).
(4) Connect the inlet pipe (1) and the outlet pipe (10).
(5) Cut the electrical cables (4) to the required length.
(6) Connect the electrical cables.
5. Test
A. Set the fuel system valve lever to OPEN.
B. Energize the aircraft electrical system.
C. Set the AUX F PUMP switch to on.
D. Check the filter assembly for leaks. No leaks are acceptable.
E. Set the AUX F PUMP switch off.
F. De-energize the aircraft electrical system.
6. Close Up
A. Close the fuel filter access panel and the engine LH hinged access panel.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
28-21-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. NUT
1. INLET PIPE
4. WASHER
2. ADAPTOR
A
3. O-RING
6. O-RING
9. FILTER ASSEMBLY 8. ADAPTOR
7. OUTLET PIPE
6263
Fuel Filter Assembly- Removal/Installation (Aircraft Pre SB126)

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
28-21-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
6. NUT
7. WASHER
5. BASE
1. INLET PIPE 4. ELECTRICAL
CONNECTORS
2. UNION PIPE
3. O-RING
12. BOLT
13. WASHER
8. O-RING
11. FILTER ASSEMBLY

9. UNION
10. OUTLET PIPE

6270
Fuel Filter Assembly - Removal/Installation (Aircraft Post SB126)

Figure 402
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
28-21-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL FILTER ELEMENT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Minimum capacity 4 litres

- Clean container
(1 US gal)
B. Expendable Parts
28-21-11, Fig. 01A Seal (Zenith) Fig 401, Item 2

28-21-11, Fig. 01A Filter element (Zenith) Fig 401, Item 3
28-21-11, Fig. 01A Seal (Zenith) Fig 401, Item 9
28-21-11, Fig. 01 Gasket (Air Maze) Fig 402, Item 3
28-21-11, Fig. 01 Gasket (Air Maze) Fig 402, Item 6
Required for Air Maze filter

P02-001 Lockwire
only
2. Procedures
A. Preparation
(1) Set the fuel-system shut-off valve to CLOSED.
(2) Open the fuel-filter access-panel PB3 and the left engine access-panel PL1.
(3) Open the filter drain valve and drain the fuel in to the fuel container.
B. Removal
(1) Aircraft Pre SB 126 (Zenith fuel filter) (Ref. Fig. 401)
(a) Loosen the bolt (10) until the container (12) can be removed.
(b) Remove the container (12) together and the filter element (3). Remove and discard
the filter element.
(c) Remove and discard the seal (2).
(d) Remove the circlip (4) and remove the container bolt (10) and disc (11).
(e) Remove the support (5), felt washer (6), disc (7) and spring (8). Discard the seal (9).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
28-21-12 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Aircraft Post SB 126 (Air Maze fuel-filter) (Ref. Fig. 402)
(a) Remove the lockwire between the filter head (1) cap nut (5) and drain valve (7).
(b) Remove the filter-bowl cap-nut (5). Discard the gasket (6).
(c) Remove the filter bowl (8) and discard the gasket (3) from the groove in the filter
head.
(d) Remove the filter element locknut (9) and the retaining nut (10).
(e) Remove the filter element (4).
(f) Clean the filter element (Ref. 28-21-12, Page Block 701).
C. Installation
(1) Aircraft Pre SB 126 (Zenith fuel filter) (Ref. Fig. 401)
(a) Install a new seal (9) on to the bolt (10).
(b) Put the disc (11) on to the container bolt (10) and install the bolt in to the container
(12).
(c) Assemble the spring (8), disc (7), felt washer (6) and support (5) on to the bolt (11).
Lock together with the circlip (4).
(d) Install a new seal (2) to the filter head (1).
(e) Install a new filter element (3) in to the container (12).
(f) Put the container (12) into position and attach with the bolt (10).
(2) Aircraft Post SB 126 (Air Maze fuel-filter) (Ref. Fig. 402)
(a) Do a check of the fuel-filter bypass:
(i) Energize the aircraft electrical system.
NOTE: When you do the next step a second person is required to monitor
the annunciator panel in the cockpit.
(ii) At the bottom of the filter head (1):
• Press and release the head of the spring-loaded poppet-valve piston to

make sure it has free movement
• On the cockpit annunciator panel, make sure the F FILTER caution cap-
tion comes on when you press the piston head
• On the cockpit annunciator panel, make sure the F FILTER caution cap-
tion goes off when you release the piston head.
(iii) De-energize the aircraft electrical system.
(b) Install the filter element (4) onto the stud (2) and install the nut (10).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
28-21-12 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Torque the nut (10) to between 1,13 and 1,7 Nm (10 and 15 lbf. in.).
(d) Install the locknut (9). Hold the retaining nut and torque the locknut to between 4,5
and 6,8 Nm (40 and 60 lbf. in.).
(e) Install a new gasket (3) in the filter head (1).
(f) Install a new gasket (6) on the filter-bowl cap-nut (5).
(g) Install the filter bowl (8) and secure with the cap nut (5).
(h) Torque the cap nut (5) to between 9,0 and 13,6 Nm (80 and 120 lbf. in.).
(i) Safety the cap nut to the drain valve (7) and to the lug on the filter head (1) with
lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
D. Test
(1) Make sure that the drain valve on the fuel filter is closed.
(2) Set the fuel-system shut-off valve to OPEN.
(4) Set the AUX F PUMP switch on and examine the filter for fuel leaks. No leaks are
permitted.
(5) On the cockpit annunciator panel, make sure the F FILTER caution caption does not
illuminate.
(6) Set the AUX F PUMP switch to off.
(7) Set the fuel-system shut-off valve to CLOSED.
E. Close Up
(2) Close the fuel-filter access-panel PB3 and the left engine access-panel PL1.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
28-21-12 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
1. FILTER HEAD
2. SEAL
12. CONTAINER
3. FILTER ELEMENT
4. CIRCLIP
5. SUPPORT
11. DISC
6. FELT WASHER
7. DISC
8. SPRING
10. BOLT
9. SEAL
6264
Fuel Filter Element - Removal/Installation (Aircraft Pre SB 126)

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
28-21-12 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. FILTER
HEAD
10. RETAINING NUT 2. STUD
9. LOCKNUT 3. GASKET
8. FILTER BOWL
4. FILTER ELEMENT
7. DRAIN VALVE
6. GASKET
5. CAP-NUT
6274
Fuel Filter Element - Removal/Installation (Aircraft Post SB 126)

Figure 402
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 405
28-21-12 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 406
28-21-12 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL FILTER ELEMENT - CLEANING
- Clean container
- Stiff bristle brush
2. Job Set Up
A. Remove the fuel filter element (Ref. 28-21-12, Page Block 401).
3. Procedure
A. Clean the filter element using a stiff brush and white spirit (Material No. P01-008).
B. Flush the filter with clean white spirit (Material No. P01-008) to remove all contamination.
C. Use the regulated air supply to remove the white spirit from the filter. Make sure the filter element
is completely clean.
D. Install the fuel filter element (Ref. 28-21-12, Page Block 401).
4. Test
NOTE: If the filter blockage indicator comes on during this test, clean or replace the filter element.
B. Set the AUX F PUMP switch to on.
C. Set the fuel system valve to open.
D. Make sure that the fuel filter blockage indicator does not illuminate.
E. Set the fuel system valve to closed.
F. Set the AUX F PUMP SWITCH to off.
G. Set all electrical power to OFF.
5. Close Up
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with SB126 (Air Maze fuel filter)
Page 701
28-21-12 Mar 14/95
;EPILATUS!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL SHUTOFF VALVE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
A. Expendable Parts
401 - 19 Washer (Qty 2) 28-22-11, 01-45
P02-001 Lockwire
P08-009 Thread sealing compound Wellseal
C. Referenced Procedures
12-11-28 Fuel - Servicing

28-20-00 Fuel Distribution System -Adjustment/Test
D. Open, safety and tag theAUX F PUMP circuit breaker.
2. Job Set Up
A. Set the fuel system valve lever to OPEN.
B. Defuel the aircraft (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301).
A. Disconnect the fuel inlet pipe (8).
B. Disconnect the fuel outlet pipe (7).
C. On aircraft without SB132
(1) Remove the nut (14), washer (15) and screw (17).
(2) Move the connecting tube (18) along the torque tube (16) and remove the rubber washers
(19).
(3) Remove the screws (12) and washers (11). Remove the valve.
(4) Remove the lockwire from the screw (20) and the connecting piece (13).
(5) Remove the screw (20) and washer (21). Remove the connecting piece (13).
EFFECTIVITY:All
Page 401
28-22-11' Jun 14/91
"ePILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
O. On aircraft with SB132
(1) Remove the nut (22), washer (23) and screw (3).
(2) Remove the nut (25) , washer (26) and screw (1).
(3) Move the connecting tube (2) along the torque tube (24).
(4) Remove the screws (4) and washers (5). Remove the valve.
4. Installation
A. Transfer the following Item to the replacement valve:
(1) Inlet pipe adapter (9). Apply thread sealing compound (Material No. P08-009) to the
adaptor threads.
B. On aircraft without SB132
(1) Install the connecting piece (13) to the valve (1O) and attach with the screw (20) and
washer (21).
(2) Safety the screw (20) with wire (Material No. P02-001) .
(3) Make sure that the fuel system valve lever and the valve are set to the open position.
(4) Put the valve in position install the screws (12) and washers (11).
(5) Install the rubber washers (19) on to the connecting piece (13).
(6) Move the connecting tube (18) along the torque tube (16) and connect to the valve.
(7) Install the screw (17), washer (15) and nut (14).
C. On aircraft with SB132
(1) Make sure that the fuel system valve lever and the valve are set to the open position.
(2) Put the valve (6) in position and install the screws (4) and washers (5).
(3) Move the connecting tube (2) along the torque tube (24) and connect to the valve.
(4) Install the screw (1), washer (26) and nut (25 ).
(5) Install the screw (3), washer (23) and nut (22).
D. Connect the fuel inlet pipe (8).
E. Connect the fuel outlet pipe (7).
F. Check the fuel system valve lever for full and free movement.
5. Close Up
A. Refuel the aircraft (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page402
28-22-11 Jun 14/91
"'EPILATUS!E!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Test
B. Remove the tag and close the circuit breaker AUX F PUMP.
C. Set the fuel system valve to open.
D. Set the AUX F PUMP switch to on.
E. Check the valve and connections for leaks. No leaks are acceptable.
F. Set the AUX F PUMP switch to off.
G. Remove the electrical power from the aircraft system.
H. Do a fuel flow check (Ref. 28-20-00, Page block 501 ) .
I. Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page403
28-22-11 Jun 14 /91
"'!5 PILATUS&"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3.SCREW
24. TORQUE TUBE

25. NUT
23. WASHER
22. NUT
AIRCRAFT WITH SB132
17. SCREW 18. CONNECTING TUBE
20. SCREW
16. TORQUE TUBE _____.
13. CONNECTING PIEC �@J

12. SCREW / -
11. WASHER
10. SHUTOFF
VALVE
�
�
9.ADAPT ��
�
AIRCRAFT WITHOUT SB132
8. FUEL INLET PIPE

6265
Fuel Shutoff Valve - Removaljlnstallation

Figure401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page404
28-22-11 Jun 147911
'ePILATUS:?'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COLLECTOR TANK - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
P09-001 PTFE tape
A. Removal
AUX F PUMP
(2) Defuel the aircraft (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301) .
(3) Open access panel FR2.
(4) Disconnect the auxiliary pump electrical connectors (10) .
(5) Remove the nut (12) , washer (11) and screw (9) to disconnect the tank bonding strap (8) .
(6) Disconnect the following pipes:
(a) Fuel pipes ( 1) at the top of the tank.
(b) Vent pipe (18) at the top of the tank.
(c) Water drain pipe ( 1 5) at the rear of the tank.
(d) Fuel pipe (13) at the auxiliary pump.
(e) Drain pipe ( 1 4) at the auxiliary pump.
(7) Hold the collector tank (3) and remove the nuts ( 5) and bolts (17) .
( 8) Remove the attaching straps (4) and the packing (6) .
(9) Remove the collector tank from the mounting bracket.
B. Installation
(1) Transfer the following items on to the replacement tank:
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 4 01
28-23-11 Mar 1 4/98
'S PILATUSE!F'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) Auxiliary pump (Ref. 28-23-12, Page Block 401).
(b) Adapters (2). Use PTFE tape (Material No. P09-001) to make a good seal.
(c) Water drain pipe elbow (16). Use PTFE tape (Material No. P09-001) to make a good
seal and to give the correct elbow position.
(d) Tank bonding strap (8).
(2) Put the collector tank (3) in position on to the mounting bracket.
(3) Put the packing (6) in position and install the attaching straps (4) and (7).
(4) Install the bolts (17) and nuts (5). Make sure the packing (6) is correctly installed behind
the attaching strap connection.
(5) Connect the following pipes:
(a) Drain pipe (14) at theauxiliary pump.
(b) Fuel pipe (13) at the auxiliary pump.
(c) Water drain pipe (15) at the rear of the tank.
(d) Fuel pipes (1) at the top of the tank.
(e) Vent pipe (18) at the top of the tank.
(6) Install the screw (9), washer (11) and nut (12) to connect the bonding strap (8) to the tank
mounting bracket.
(7) Connect the electrical connectors (10).
C. Test
(1) Refuel the aircraft (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301) .
(2) Check the collector tank and pipe connections for leaks. No leaks are acceptable.
(3) Remove the tag and close the circuit breaker:
AUX F PUMP
(5) Set the AUX F PUMP switch to on.
(6) Check the AUX PUMP caption on the annunciator panel illuminates.
(7) Check, by listening at the tank, that the auxiliary pump operates.
(8) Set the AUX F PUMP switch to off.
(9) Set all electrical power to off.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
28-23-11 Mar 14/98
'ePILATUS57
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Close Up
(2) Close access panel FR2.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
28-23-11 Mar 14/98
'SPILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. FUEL PIPES
18 VENT PIPE 1
�
-----�
3. COLLECTOR TANK
i I 4. ATTACHING STRAP
.._____l.!----li! 5. I NUT
17. BOLT
6. PACKING
7. ATTACHING STRAP
16. ELBOW
15. WATER DRAIN PIPE
11. WASHER
12. NUT
�
14. DRAIN PIPE
13. FUEL PIPE
Collector Tank - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
28-23-11 Mar 14/98
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedures to remove and install the auxiliary fuel pump.

- Torque wrenches Local supply
B. Expendable Parts

28-23-11, Fig. 01 O-ring seal Ref. Fig. 401, Item 2

P01-011 Isopropyl (isopropanol)
P04-030 Grease
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU DO MAINTENANCE ON THE FUEL SYSTEM. THE MIXTURE OF
FUEL AND AIR IS DANGEROUS. IF SPARKS AND FLAMES OCCUR NEAR THE MIXTURE
OF FUEL AND AIR, AN EXPLOSION CAN OCCUR. THE EXPLOSION CAN CAUSE INJURY
OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL AND/OR DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT YOU OBEY THE STADARD PRACTISE PROCEDURES GIVEN (REF.
20-10-06, PAGE BLOCK 201) WHEN YOU DISCONNECT AND CONNECT PIPE ASSEMBLIES
AND UNION FITTINGS OF THE FUEL SYSTEM. DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT AND
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
28-23-12 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Job Set Up
AUX F PUMP
(2) Defuel the aircraft (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301).
B. Removal
(1) Make a note of the position of the auxiliary fuel pump (3) and its connections.
(2) Disconnect the fuel and drain pipes from the fitting (8) and flared tube union (7)
(Ref. 20-10-06, Page Block 201).
(3) Remove the bolts (5), washers (4) and the bonding strap (9).
(4) Remove the auxiliary fuel pump (3) and the O-ring seal (2). Discard the O-ring seal (2).
(5) Remove the flared tube union (7) and discard the O-ring seal (6) (Ref. 20-10-06, Page
Block 201).
(6) Keep the auxiliary fuel pump (3) until you have the replacement if you need to replace it.
NOTE: It can be necessary to remove the fitting (8) from the old auxiliary fuel pump (3)
and install it on the replacement.
(7) Install protective caps and blanks on the auxiliary fuel pump (3) and the collector tank assy
(1).
C. Installation
(1) Remove the protective caps and blanks .
(2) If a replacement auxiliary fuel pump (3) does not have the fitting (8) installed:
(a) Remove the fitting (8) from the old auxiliary fuel pump (3) as follows:
(i) Hold the bolt (10) with a wrench and remove the fitting (8) and O-ring seal
(15). Discard the O-ring seal (15).
(ii) Remove the bolt (10), washer (11), O-ring seal (12), cap (13) and O-ring seal
(14). Discard the O-ring seals (12) and (14).
(iii) Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with isopropyl
(isopropanol) (Material No. P01-011) and fully clean:
• The bolt (10)

• The washer (11)
• The cap (13)
• The fitting (8).
(b) Install the fitting (8) in the new auxiliary fuel pump (3) as follows:
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
28-23-12 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(i) Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with isopropyl
(isopropanol) (Material No. P01-011) and fully clean the holes in the flange of
the auxiliary fuel pump (3).
(ii) Lubricate the new O-ring seal (12) with grease (Material No. P04-030).
(iii) Put the washer (11), new O-ring seal (12) and cap (13) in position on the bolt
(10).
(iv) Lubricate the new O-ring seals (14) and (15) with grease (Material No.
P04-030).
(v) Put the new O-ring seal (14) in position on the cap (13).
(vi) Put the new O-ring seal (15) in position on the fitting (8).
(vii) Put the bolt (10) with the parts attached through the hole in the flange of the
auxiliary fuel pump (3).
(viii) Carefully install the fitting (8) through the hole in the flange of the auxiliary
fuel pump (3) and onto the threads of the bolt (10).
(ix) Tighten the bolt (10) to hold the fitting (8) in position.
(x) Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with isopropyl
(isopropanol) (Material No. P01-011) and remove the unwanted grease.
(3) Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with isopropyl (isopropanol) (Material
No. P01-011) and fully clean the flared tube union (7).
(4) Lubricate the new O-ring seal (6) with grease (Material No. P04-030) (Ref. 20-10-06, Page
Block 201).
(5) Put the new O-ring seal (6) in position on the flared tube union (7).
(6) Install the flared tube union (7) with a new O-ring seal (6) (Ref. 20-10-06, Page Block 201).
(7) Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with isopropyl (isopropanol) (Material
No. P01-011) and fully clean the slot for the O-ring seal (2) in the flange of the collector
tank assy (1).
(8) Lubricate the new O-ring seal (2) with grease (Material No. P04-030).
(9) Put the new O-ring seal (2) in position in the slot of the flange of the collector tank assy (1).
(10) Put the auxiliary fuel pump (3) in position as noted during removal (Ref. Step 3.B.(1)).
(11) Install the washers (4), bonding strap (9) and bolts (5). Tighten opposite bolts equally until
they are tight.
(12) Connect the fuel and drain pipes to the fitting (8) and flared tube union (7) (Ref. 20-10-06,
Page Block 201).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
28-23-12 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Close Up
work area is clean.
(2) Refuel the aircraft (Ref 12-11-28, Page Block 301).
E. Test
(1) Do a check for leaks around the auxiliary fuel pump (3), fitting (8), flared tube union (7) and
the fuel and drain pipe connections. Leaks are not permitted.
AUX F PUMP.
(5) Do a check that the AUX PUMP caption on the annunciator panel comes on.
(6) Listen at the collector tank assy (1) to do a check that the auxiliary fuel pump (3) operates.
(7) Set the AUX F PUMP switch to OFF.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
28-23-12 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10 11
B
12 C
13
14
10 B
3
3
9 4
11
8 5
12 4
6
5 7
15 13
C
14
15
SECTION
C-C
8
6267
Auxiliary Fuel Pump - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 405
28-23-12 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 406
28-23-12 Jul 31/22
'e PILATUSE!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WATER COLLECTOR TANK- REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
A. Expendable Parts
28-23-01, Fig. 01 Sealing ring

P04-008 Thread sealing compound
P09-001 PTFE tape
A. Preparation
(1) Defuel the aircraft(Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301}.
B. Removal
(1) Remove the lockwire and remove the drain valve(11}, adapter(10) and sealing ring(9).
Discard the sealing ring.
(2) Disconnect the drain pipe(5).
(3) Disconnect the drain hose(16).
(4) Remove the nut {18), washer(17) and screw(4) and disconnect the bonding strap(3).
(5) Remove the nut(15), washer(14) and bolt(13).
(6) Remove the tank {12).
(7) Remove the side and bottom foam linings(8).
C. Installation
(1) Transfer the following items to the replacement tank:
(a) Union(6). Use thread sealing compound(Material No. P04-008) to make a good
seal.
{b) Elbow(1).
NOTE: Before removal of the elbow (1} note the position of the elbow. Use PTFE tape
(Material No. P09-001) as required, to give the correct elbow position.
(c) Bonding strap clamp (2).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
28-23-13 Mar 14/98
"e PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Put the side and bottom foam linings (8) in to position.
(3) Put the tank (12) on to the support structure.
(4) Put the securing strap (7) in to position and install the bolt (13), washer (14) and nut (15).
(5) Put the bonding strap (3) in to position and install the screw (4), washer (17) and nut (18).
(6) Connect the drain pipe (5).
(7) Connect the drain hose (16).
(8) Install the adapter (10) with a new sealing ring (9).
(9) Install the drain valve (11).
(10) Make sure the drain valve (11) is in the closed position.
(11) Safety the drain valve to the aircraft structure with lockwire (Material No.P02-001) .
D. Close Up
(1) Refuel the aircraft (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301) .
E. Test
(1) Check the tank and pipe connections for leaks. No leaks are acceptable.
EFFECTIVITV: All
Page 402
28-23-13 Mar 14/98
"5PILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. ELBOW
�\J\J
\ 5. DRAIN PIPE
6. UNION
13. BOLT
7. SECURING STRAP
8. FOAM LINING
12. TANK
Water Collector Tank - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
28-23-13 Mar 14/98
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL TRANSFER PUMP - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This task gives the procedure to remove and install a fuel transfer pump P/N 968.84.30.301 or
968.84.30.307.
If you must replace a fuel transfer pump P/N 968.84.30.301 or 968.84.30.307 with a fuel transfer pump
P/N 115.55.06.443, refer to CONFIG 2.

110.88.07.065 Safety clip Circuit breaker, hold open
- Blanking caps

P04-017 Jointing compound
P09-044 Heat shrink sleeve
3. Procedure
A. Job Set Up
EXT FUEL
(2) Defuel the aircraft until the main tanks are less than three quarters full (Ref. 12-11-28,
Page Block 301).
(3) Remove the access panels LB7/LB9 or RB7/RB8.
(1) Remove the heat shrink sleeve and disconnect the electrical snap connector on the cable
(11).
(2) Loosen the clamp (9) and disconnect the inlet pipe (8).
(3) Loosen the clamp (2) and disconnect the outlet pipe (3).
(4) Remove the bolts (5), washers (6) and the bonding strap (7).

968.84.30.307 Page 401
28-25-11 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Remove the pump (4).
(6) Put blanking caps on all open connections.
NOTE: If you must replace a pump P/N 968.84.30.301 or 968.84.30.307 with a pump
P/N 115.55.06.443, refer to CONFIG 2.
(1) Remove the blanking caps.
(2) If you install a new pump P/N 968.84.30.301 or 968.84.30.307:
(a) Make a record of the position of the two elbows (1) and (10).
(b) Remove the two elbows (1) and (10).
(c) Install the two elbows (1) and (10) in the new pump with jointing compound (Material
No. P04-017). Make sure that the elbows are in the same positions as recorded.
(3) Put the pump (4) in position and install the bonding strap (7), bolts (5) and washers (6).
(4) Connect the pump inlet pipe (8) and tighten the clamp (9).
(5) Connect the pump outlet pipe (3) and tighten the clamp (2).
(6) Put a heat shrink sleeve (Material No. P09-044) on the cable (11)
(7) Connect the electrical snap connector on the cable (11) and install the heat shrink sleeve.
D. Test
(2) Refuel the aircraft (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301).
(5) Check the pump connections for leaks. No leaks are permitted.
E. Close Up
(2) Install the access panels LB7/LB9 or RB7/RB8.

968.84.30.307 Page 402
28-25-11 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Fuel Transfer Pump - Removal/Installation

Figure 401

968.84.30.307 Page 403
28-25-11 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

968.84.30.307 Page 404
28-25-11 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL TRANSFER PUMP - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This task gives the procedure to remove and install the fuel transfer pump P/N 115.55.06.443. It also
gives the steps required to replace a fuel transfer pump P/N 968.84.30.301 or 968.84.30.307 with a fuel
transfer pump P/N 115.55.06.443. To do this more parts are required. These are listed in the
Expendable Parts Table.

110.88.07.065 Safety clip Circuit breaker, hold open
- Blanking caps

P01-008 Solvent
P09-001 Tape, PTFE Thread sealing
P09-014 Cable tie MS3367-1-9
P09-044 Heat shrink sleeve
C. Expendable Parts
946.21.15.102 Elbow, 90 deg. Only required to replace a pump

971.32.18.105 Retaining clip P/N 968.84.30.301 or 968.84.30.307
971.32.51.102 Cable tie with a pump P/N 115.55.06.443
3. Procedure
A. Job Set Up
EXT FUEL
(2) Defuel the aircraft until the main tanks are less than three quarters full (Ref. 12-11-28,
Page Block 301).
(3) Remove the access panels LB7/LB9 or RB7/RB8.

Page 401
28-25-11 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Replacement of a Pump P/N 968.84.30.301 or 968.84.30.307 with a Pump P/N 115.55.06.443
(1) Remove the pump and the elbows (1) and (10) (Ref. AMM 28-25-11, Page Block 401,
CONFIG 1).
NOTE: Keep one 90 degree elbow for the installation of the new fuel transfer pump.
(3) Use the solvent (Material No. P01-008) and absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) to
clean the kept 90 degree elbow for the installation.
C. Removal of a Pump P/N 115.55.06.443 (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Remove the heat shrink sleeve and disconnect the electrical snap connector on the cable
(14).
(2) Loosen the clamps (2) and (8) and disconnect the outlet pipe (3) and inlet pipe (9).
(3) Remove the bolts (5) and (10), washers (4) and (11), bonding strap (12) and the pump (6).
(1) If you replace a pump P/N 968.84.30.301 or 968.84.30.307 with a pump P/N
115.55.06.443:
(a) Remove the blanking caps from the new pump.
(b) Install the elbows (1) and (7) with PTFE tape (Material No. P09-001)
NOTE: Use one kept 90 degree elbow and the new elbow (P/N 946.21.15.102).
(c) Attach the retaining clip (15) (P/N 971.32.18.105) to the body of the pump (6) with
the cable tie (16) (P/N 971.32.51.102).
(d) Make a loop with the unwanted length of the electrical cable (14) and attach it to the
retaining clip (15) with the cable tie (13) (Material No. P09-014).
(2) Hold the pump (6) in the installed position and install the bonding strap (12), the washer
(11) and the bolt (10).
(3) Install the washer (4) and the bolt (5).
(4) Remove the blanking caps.
(5) Connect the pump inlet pipe (9) and tighten the clamp (8).
(6) Connect the pump outlet pipe (3) and tighten the clamp (2).
(7) Put a heat shrink sleeve (Material No. P09-044) on the cable (14)
(8) Connect the electrical snap connector on the cable (14) and install the heat shrink sleeve.

Page 402
28-25-11 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Test
(5) Check the pump connections for leaks. No leaks are permitted.
F. Close Up
(2) Install the access panel LB7/LB9 or RB7/RB8.

Page 403
28-25-11 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6
15
16
14
13
12
7
11 8
10
9
6687
Fuel Transfer Pump - Removal/Installation

Figure 401

Page 404
28-25-11 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL INDICATING SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. General
This topic gives the procedure for the gravity flow check and the auxiliary fuel pump flow check

- Stopwatch
Fuel container with measured Minimum capacity 40 liters (10 US
-
graduations in liters or US gals gals)
3. Procedure
A. Job Set Up
(1) Make sure that the aircraft is tail down (10° ± 1° nose up).
(2) Make sure that the aircraft is refuelled to maximum (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301).
(3) Set the fuel-system valve-lever to CLOSED.
(4) Open the fuel-filter access-panel PB3.
(5) Open the engine access panel PL1.
B. Preparation (Ref. Fig. 501)
(1) Put the fuel container below the fuel filter.
(2) Open the filter drain valve (4) and let the fuel drain.
(3) When the flow of fuel stops, close the drain valve (4).
(4) Remove the outlet hose (2) from between the fuel flow transmitter (3) and the Engine
Driven Pump (EDP) (1).
(5) Turn the outlet hose through 180 degrees, then install the outlet hose (2) to the fuel flow
transmitter (3) with the other end through the access panel PB3.
(6) Put the fuel container below the disconnected end of the outlet hose (2). Do not extend the
length of the hose for the test.
(8) Set the fuel-system valve-lever to OPEN until you get a constant flow of fuel into the
container.
(9) Set the fuel-system valve-lever to CLOSED and empty the container.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 501
28-40-00 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(10) Reset the fuel used totalizer to zero.
C. Low Fuel Flow Indication Check (Ref. Fig. 501)
(1) Set the fuel-system valve-lever to OPEN.
(2) When the fuel flow has stabilized, record the fuel flow indication.
(3) After 5 minutes set the fuel-system valve-lever to CLOSED.
(4) Record the fuel used from the fuel used totalizer.
(5) Measure the quantity of the fuel in the container.
(6) Make sure the difference between the fuel used totalizer indication and the quantity of fuel
in the container is not more than ± 1 liter ( ± 0.26 US gals).
(7) Calculate the flow rate for 1 hour as follows:
• Quantity of fuel in container after 5 minutes x 12 = Flow rate/hour.
(8) Compare the calculated fuel flow with the actual fuel flow recorded at Step (2):
(a) The difference between the calculated fuel flow and the actual fuel flow must be the
same ± 12,5 liters/hour ( ± 3,3 US gals/hour).
(9) If the difference between the actual and calculated fuel flow is out of limits, replace the
indicators, signal conditioner or fuel flow transmitter.
NOTE: It is recommended that the fuel flow transmitter is replaced first.
D. High Fuel Flow Indication Check using the Auxiliary Fuel Pump System (Ref. Fig. 501)
(2) Move the fuel-system valve-lever towards the CLOSED position to get an indicated fuel
flow of between 189 and 285 liters/hour (50 and 75 US gals/hour). Record the indicated
fuel flow.
NOTE: To make the test easier, you can make an orifice to get the correct fuel flow. Use
a metal blank drilled with a 2,4 mm (3/32 in) hole installed in the end of the
disconnected outlet hose (2). This will give the required fuel flow with the fuel-
system valve-lever fully OPEN.
(3) When the fuel flow is correct and constant, get a second person and do these steps at the
same time:
• Reset the fuel totalizer

• Record the quantity of fuel in the container
• Start the stopwatch.
(4) After 5 minutes, set the fuel-system valve-lever to CLOSED and the AUX F PUMP switch
to OFF.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 502
28-40-00 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Record the fuel used from the fuel used totalizer.
(6) Measure the quantity of the fuel in the container and subtract the quantity recorded in Step
(3).
(7) Make sure the difference between the fuel used totalizer indication and the quantity of fuel
in the container is not more than ± 1 liter ( ± 0,26 US gals).
(8) Calculate and record the flow rate for 1 hour as follows:
• Quantity of fuel measured at Step (6) x 12 = Fuel flow rate/hour.
(9) Make sure that the flow rate recorded at Step (8) is not more than ± 12,5 liters/hour ( ± 3.3
US gals/hour) different to the fuel flow indication recorded in Step (2).
(10) If the difference between the actual and calculated fuel flow is out of limits, replace the
indicators, signal conditioner or fuel flow transmitter.
NOTE: It is recommended that the fuel flow transmitter is replaced first.
E. Close Up (Ref. Fig. 501)
(1) If necessary, remove the orifice from the outlet hose (2).
(2) Remove the outlet hose (2) from the fuel flow transmitter (3).
(3) Install the outlet hose (2) between the fuel flow transmitter (3) and the EDP (1).
(5) Set the fuel-system valve lever to OPEN.
(7) Do a leak check at the outlet hose (2) and the tee adapter (3) connection. No leaks are
permitted.
(8) Set the AUX F PUMP switch to OFF.
(10) Discard the fuel in accordance with local regulations.
(12) Close the fuel-filter access panel PB3.
(13) Close the engine access panel PL1.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 503
28-40-00 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
ACCESS
PANEL PB3
1
4 2
4
6669
Fuel Distribution - Adjustment / Test

Figure 501
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 504
28-40-00 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL QUANTITY TRANSMITTER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
- Plastic knife or scraper
B. Expendable Parts
28-41-09, Fig. 01 Gasket
P01-015 Solvent
P08-071 Sealant
A. Preparation
B. Removal
(1) Remove the cabin interior trim which covers the wing inboard rib.
(2) Disconnect the electrical cable (7).
(3) Remove sealant from around the transmitter flange and boltheads (4). Use a plastic knife
or scraper.
(4) Remove the bolts (4) and washers (3).
CAUTION: DO NOT LET SEALANT OR PIECES OF GASKET GO INTO THE FUEL TANK.
(5) Remove the transmitter (2) from the wing tank.
C. Installation
(1) Clean the tank flange, transmitter flange and around the heads of the bolts with absorbent
paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with solvent (Material No. P01-015).
(2) Install a new gasket (1) on to the transmitter (2).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
28-41-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Install the transmitter in to the wing tank so that the bend in the float arm (8) points down.
(4) Install the washers (3) and bolts (4).
(5) Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. P08-071) around the transmitter flange and around
each bolt head.
(6) Connect the electrical cable (7).
D. Test
(2) Check that the fuel quantity indicator shows empty.
(3) Remove the electrical power from the aircraft electrical system.
(4) Refuel aircraft (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301).
(5) Energize aircraft electrical system.
(6) Check that the fuel quantity indicator shows full.
(8) Look for leaks around the fuel quantity transmitter. No leaks are acceptable.
E. Close Up
(1) Install the cabin interior trim.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
28-41-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. BOLT
2. FUEL QUANTITY
TRANSMITTER 3. WASHER
A 5. NUT
6. WASHER
1. GASKET 7. ELECTRICAL
CABLE
8. FLOAT ARM
6271
Fuel Quantity Transmitter - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
28-41-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
28-41-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL QUANTITY INDICATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Removal
A. Loosen the dome-head screw.
B. Pull out the indicator from the instrument panel to get access to the electrical connector.
C. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the indicator.
2. Installation
A. Connect the fuel quantity indicator to the electrical connector.
B. Push the indicator into the instrument panel.
C. Tighten the dome-head screw to secure the indicator to the instrument clamp.
3. Close Up
B. Check that the fuel quantity indicator operates.
C. Remove the electrical power from the aircraft electrical system.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
28-41-12 Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 30 - ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION

Chapter
Section
Subject Pages Date
Pages 2 Jul 31/11
Table of Contents 1 Mar 14/95
30-00-00 1 Jun 14/91
30-60-00 1 Mar 14/95

2 Mar 14/95
3 Mar 14/95
4 Mar 14/95
30-60-00 501 Mar 14/95
601 Jul 31/11

602 Jul 31/11
30-60-01 401 Mar 14/95

402 Mar 14/95
30-60-02 401 Mar 14/95

402 Mar 14/95
Page 1
30-LEP Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
30-LEP Jul 31/11
'ePILATUS!!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 30 - ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION 30-00-00

PROPELLERS/ROTORS 30-60-00
propeller de-ice
Adjustment/Test 501 Aircraft with
propeller de-ice
Inspection/Check 601 Aircraft with
propeller de-ice
PROPELLER DE-ICE TIMER 30-60-01
propeller de-ice
PROPELLER DE-ICE BRUSHES 30-60-02
propeller de-ice
Page 1
30-CONT Mar 14/95
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ICE PROTECTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The aircraft has the following ice protection systems:
• Pitot tube heating

• Static pressure port heating
• Fuel Control Unit (FCU) sense line heating
• Optional propeller de-icing
All the systems are electrically operated.
A. Pitot Tube
An integral 28V DC heating element is installed in the pitot head. The circuit is protected by a
circuit breaker placarded ANTI-ICE.
B. Static Pressure Ports
The static pressure ports have integral electrical heating elements. 28V DC is supplied to the
heating element from the 28V DC battery busbar. The circuit is protected by a circuit breaker
placarded ANTI-ICE.
C. Fuel Control Unit Anti-Icing
An heating element is installed in the engine Fuel Control Unit (FCU) P3 sense line tube. Power
for the FCU heating element is supplied from the 28V DC generator busbar. A circuit breaker
placarded FCU HEATER and located on the right side of the instrument panel, protects the FCU
heating circuit.
D. Propeller
The optional propeller de-icing system uses a slip ring to transmit power to heater mats installed
on the propeller blades.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
30-00-00 Jun 14/91
"e PILATUS !!!!"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLER DE-ICE SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The optional propeller de-ice system uses heaters to prevent ice formation on the propeller blades. The
system has these components:
• three heater elements
• a slip ring assembly
• a brush block
• a timer
• an ammeter
• a PROP DE ICE switch
The system sends an output to the annunciator panel.
The power supply for the propeller de-ice system is:
• 28V DC through the PROP DE-ICE circuit breaker
A. Heater Elements
The heater elements increase the temperature of the leading edges of the propeller blades. A
heater is installed on the inner part of the leading edge of each propeller blade. The heater
elements are an assembly of elements between layers of rubber. The rubber is bonded to the
propeller blades. They are connected to the slip ring assembly.
B. Slip Ring Assembly
The slip ring assembly connects the power supply to the heater elements on the propeller. It is
installed on the rear of the propeller and has two slip rings.
C. Brush Block
The brush block connects the power supply to the slip ring assembly. It is installed on the
reduction gearbox casing. It has two brushes that touch the three slip rings.
D. Timer
The timer controls the frequency of the power supply to the heater elements. It is installed on the
right side of the fierwall in the engine compartment.
E. Ammeter
The ammeter measures the amount of current used by the heater elements during operation.
The ammeter is installed in the right instrument panel.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with propeller de-ice
Page 1
30-60-00 Mar 14/95
"e PILATUSE?'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F. PROP DE ICE Switch
The PROP DE ICE switch is a two position rocker switch. It is installed in the right instrument
panel.
During normal engine operation, power is supplied from the GENERATOR BUS through the PROP DE
ICE circuit breaker to the PROP DE ICE switch. After selection of the PROP DE ICE switch, the timer
supplies power in a constant cycle to the heater elements, on for 90 seconds, then off for 90 seconds.
During timer operation the ammeter will show the amount of current used by the heater elements and
the annunciator panel will show the PROP DE-ICE caption.
Page2
30-60-00 Mar 14/95
-
6
._ PILATUS 5!!F'
PC-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROP
DE-ICE
PROP DE-ICE SWITCH
.
Propeller De-ice System - Component Location
Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft w1"th prope II er de-ice
30-60-00
Page3
Mar 14/95
� PILATUSEF'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERATOR BUS 28V DC
PROP DE-ICE
PROP DE-ICE
r--------------
1 I
�------�
PROP DE-ICE '
!_ _____________ �
AMMETER
TIMER
-
-
-
-
SLIP RING ASSEMBLY
HEATER ELEMENT
Propeller De-ice System - Schematic

Figure 2
Page4
30-60-00 Mar 14/95
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLER DE-ICE SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
- Stopwatch
2. Job Set Up
A. Make sure the area around the propeller is clear of objects.
B. Make sure the IGNITION and STARTER switches are off.
3. Procedure
WARNING: YOU MUST TURN THE PROPELLER DURING THIS TEST TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT.
NOTE: Two persons are required for this test.
A. In the cockpit, set the BATTERY switch to on.
B. Turn the propeller.
C. Set the PROP DE ICE switch to on. Make a note of the time.
D. Make sure that the timer switches off after approximately 90 seconds.
E. Make sure the annunciator panel PROP DE-ICE caption comes on and the ammeter indication is
in the green arc.
F. Set the PROP DE ICE switch off and make sure that:
• The heater elements on each propeller blade are hot

• The PROP DE-ICE caption is off
• The ammeter shows zero
G. Make sure the heater elements go cool.
H. Set the BATTERY switch to off.
Page 501
30-60-00 Mar 14/95
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLER DE-ICE BRUSHES - INSPECTION/CHECK

- Access platform 1 m (3 ft)
2. Job Set Up
A. Make sure the STARTER and IGNITION switches are set to off.
B. Open and install a safety clip on this circuit breaker:
PROP DE-ICE (GENERATOR BUS).
C. Put the access platform in position at the propeller.
D. Remove the access panels PT1 and PB1.
3. Procedure
A. Examine the propeller slip ring - Reject the slip ring if you find damage.
B. Do a check of the brush wear as follows (Ref. Fig. 601):
(1) Put a piece of wire into the two inspection holes in the brush block. if the wire goes into a
hole by more than 9 mm (0.35 in.), replace the applicable brush (Ref. 30-60-02, Page
Block 401).
4. Close Up
A. Make sure the work area is clear of tools and other items.
B. Install the access panels PT1 and PB1.
C. Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
D. Remove the access platform.
Page 601
30-60-00 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BRUSH
BLOCKS
A
INSPECTION
HOLES
BRACKET
BRACKET
B
BRUSH
BLOCKS
6727
Propeller De-Ice Brushes - Inspection / Check

Figure 601
Page 602
30-60-00 Jul 31/11
'ePILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLER DE-ICE TIMER- REMOVALJINSTALLATION
A. Open and install a safety clip on this circuit breaker:
B. Open access panel PR1.
C. Tag the electrical connections (5).
D. Remove the screws (6) and washers (7) and disconnect the electrical connections (5) from the
de-ice timer.
E. Remove the nuts (1), washers (2) and screws (3) that secure the de-ice timer to the structure.
F. Remove the de-ice timer.
A. Put the de-ice timer (4) in position on the structure and install the washers (2), screws (3) and
nuts (1 ).
B. Identify the electrical connections (5).
C. Put the electrical connections (5) in the correct position for installation and install the washers (7)
and the screws (3). Remove the identification tags.
D. Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
E. Do the propeller de-ice test procedure (Ref. 30-60-00, Page Block 501).
4. Close Up
B. Close access panel PR1.
Page 401
30-60-01 Mar 14/95
�PILATUSEF'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. NUT
4. DE-ICE TIMER
5. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Propeller De-Ice Timer - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
Page 402
30-60-01 Mar 14/95
� PILATUSE!!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLER DE-ICE BRUSHES - REMOVALJINSTALLATION
2. Job Set Up
A. Make sure the STARTER and IGNITION switches are set to off.
B. Open and install a safety clip on the circuit breakers:
PROP DE-ICE (GENERATOR BUS)

STARTER (BATTERY BUS).
C. Remove the access panels PT1 and PB1.
A. Tag the electrical connections (3).
B. Remove the screws (1) and washers (2) and disconnect the electrical connections (3).
C. Remove the nuts (9), screws (4), washers (8), brushes (7) and shim (6) from the bracket (5).
A. Put the shim (6) and brushes (7) in position and install the screws (4), washers (8) and nuts (9).
B. Identify the electrical connections (3) .
C. Put the electrical connections (3) in position and install the screws (1) and washers (2). Remove
the identification tags.
D. Do the propeller de-ice test procedure (Ref. 30-60-00, Page Block 501).
5. Close Up
B. Install the access panels PT1 and PB1.
C. Remove the safety clip and close this circuit breaker:
PROP DE-ICE (GENERATOR BUS)

STARTER (BATTERY BUS).
Page 401
30-60-02 Mar 14/95
�PILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. ELECTRICAL
CONNECTION (2)
8. WASHER
5. BRACKET
6.SHIM
Propeller De-Ice Brushes - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
Page 402
30-60-02 Mar 14/95
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 31 - INDICATING / RECORDING SYSTEMS

Chapter Chapter
Section Section
List of Effective 1 Nov 21/18 31-51-00 (Cont’d) 4 Jul 30/15
Pages 2 Nov 21/18 CONFIG 2 5 Jul 30/15
6 Jul 30/15
Table of Contents 1 Nov 21/18
2 Nov 21/18 31-51-01 401 Nov 30/03
31-00-00 1 Jul 30/15 31-52-00 1 Nov 30/03

2 Jul 30/15 2 Nov 30/03
3 Nov 30/03
31-30-01 1 Jan 30/16
2 Jan 30/16 501 Nov 30/03
3 Jan 30/16
4 Jan 30/16 31-57-00 1 Nov 21/18
2 Nov 21/18
401 Jan 30/16 3 Nov 21/18
402 Jan 30/16 4 Nov 21/18
403 Jan 30/16 5 Nov 21/18
404 Jan 30/16 6 Nov 21/18
405 Jan 30/16
406 Jan 30/16 501 Nov 21/18
407 Jan 30/16 502 Nov 21/18
408 Jan 30/16 503 Nov 21/18
409 Jan 30/16 504 Nov 21/18
410 Jan 30/16 505 Nov 21/18
411 Jan 30/16 506 Nov 21/18
412 Jan 30/16 507 Nov 21/18
508 Nov 21/18
501 Jan 30/16
502 Jan 30/16 31-57-01 401 Nov 21/18
503 Jan 30/16 402 Nov 21/18
504 Jan 30/16 403 Nov 21/18
505 Jan 30/16 404 Nov 21/18
506 Jan 30/16
31-57-02 401 Nov 21/18
31-51-00 1 Jul 30/15 402 Nov 21/18
CONFIG 1 2 Jul 30/15 403 Nov 21/18
3 Jul 30/15 404 Nov 21/18
4 Jul 30/15
5 Jul 30/15 31-57-03 401 Nov 21/18
6 Jul 30/15 402 Nov 21/18
403 Nov 21/18
CONFIG 2 1 Jul 30/15 404 Nov 21/18
2 Jul 30/15
3 Jul 30/15
Page 1
31-LEP Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
31-LEP Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 31 - INDICATING / RECORDING SYSTEMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
INDICATING / RECORDING SYSTEMS 31-00-00

Description 1 All
RECORDERS 31-30-00
APIBOX SYSTEM 31-30-01
Description and Operation 1 Aircraft with an
APIBOX System
Removal / Installation 401 Aircraft with an
APIBOX System
Adjustment / Test 501 Aircraft with an
APIBOX System
CENTRAL ADVISORY AND WARNING SYSTEM 31-51-00

Description and Operation CONFIG 1 1 101 thru 947
Description and Operation CONFIG 2 1 948 and up
ANNUNCIATOR PANEL 31-51-01
Removal / Installation 401 Aircraft with
CAWS
STALL WARNING SYSTEM 31-52-00

HORIZONTAL-STABILIZER TRIM WARNING-SYSTEM 31-57-00

Trim Warning
System
Adjustment / Test 501 Aircraft with
Trim Warning
System
WARNING TONE GENERATOR 31-57-01
Trim Warning
System
Page 1
31-TOC Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter
Section
WEIGHT-ON-WHEELS SWITCH (WOW) 31-57-02

Trim Warning
System
PROXIMITY SWITCH 31-57-03
Trim Warning
System
Page 2
31-TOC Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INDICATING / RECORDING SYSTEMS - DESCRIPTION
1. General
The indicating / recording systems include:
A. APIBOX System (Ref. 31-30-01)
(If installed)
The APIBOX is a flight data and monitoring system, similar to a Cockpit Voice and Flight Data
Recorder (CVFDR).
NOTE: The APIBOX System does not fulfil any specific requirements of a certified CVFDR.
The recorded data is stored on a SD memory card and on a crash and fire-proof memory unit.
With the corresponding debriefing software, the data can be read from the SD memory card to
provide post-flight analysis.
B. Central Advisory and Warning System (Ref. 31-51-00)
The central advisory and warning system (CAWS) uses lighted warning, caution and advisory
captions to alert and inform the pilot of any aircraft system faults. An aural warning is also given
to the pilot when a warning or caution caption comes on.
C. Stall Warning System (Ref. 31-52-00)
The stall warning system gives the pilot an aural warning when the aircraft approaches a stall
condition.
D. Horizontal-Stabilizer Trim Warning System (Ref. 31-57-00)
Post SB-180
The horizontal-stabilizer trim warning-system gives the pilot an aural and visual warning if the
horizontal-stabilizer trim is not in the correct position for takeoff.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
31-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
31-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
APIBOX SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. Description (Ref. Fig 1)
The APIBOX is a flight data and monitoring system, similar to a Cockpit Voice and Flight Data Recorder
(CVFDR). The recorded data is stored on a SD memory card and on a crash and fire-proof memory
unit. With the corresponding debriefing software, the data can be read from the SD memory card to
provide post-flight analysis.
The main components of the system are:
• A power supply unit (APIPWR) which supplies power to all the other units
• A recording unit (APIV2)
• An indicating and data retrieval unit (APISD)
• A main sensors unit and a turbine data acquisition unit (APICAP and i2050)
Figure 1 shows a simplified schematic of the system with all inputs and outputs.
A. Power Supply Unit (APIPWR)
The power supply unit is supplied with 28 VDC from the BATTERY HOT BUS via the API PWR
circuit breaker, and from the BATTERY BUS via the API circuit breaker.
This unit is located in the radio rack and supplies 12 VDC to the other units of the APIBOX
system. It has:
• Two LED indicator lights to show input and output power

• A left push button (marked ON) to start the APIBOX system
• A right push button (marked OFF) to stop the APIBOX system (this forces the system to
shut down even if it is still recording). This button should only be pushed if the Battery
Master Switch is set to OFF
Under normal operation the buttons do not need to be pushed.
B. Recording Unit (APIV2)
This unit is located in the radio rack. It has two SD memory cards installed, one of which is in a
crash and fire-proof part of the unit. Up to 70 hours of flight data and audio signal can be stored,
dependant on the recording setting.
C. Indicating and Data Retrieval Unit (APISD)
This unit is located on the RH side of the cockpit instrument panel. It consists of two LED
indicator lights (green and red), a seven-segment numeric-display, a push button and a SD
memory card slot. The green LED stays ON to indicate that the system has electrical power and
is working normally. The red LED is only used for test purposes and is normally OFF. The
numeric display shows system status and failure codes. A SD memory card can be inserted in
the unit to record the same data as the recording unit. This card can be removed after flight for
post-flight analysis.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with an APIBOX System
Page 1
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Main Sensors Unit (APICAP) and Turbine Data Acquisition Unit (i2050)
The APICAP unit is installed behind the RH side of the cockpit instrument panel. It records
barometric data, incorporates a 3-axis accelerometer, and collects data from:
• The GPS antenna

• The OAT sensor
• An instrument panel temperature sensor
• A 2-axis accelerometer (i1030) located in the tail of the aircraft
• The pilot’s and co-pilot’s headsets (audio)
The i2050 unit is installed in the cockpit, on the RH side of FR1, and collects the following engine
data:
• ITT, Ng, Np, Torque and Fuel Flow
The collected data from the two units are sent via a proprietary bus to the recording unit and also
to the indicating and data retrieval unit.
Two event switches are installed in the cockpit, one adjacent to the PFD and one adjacent to the
MFD. These are used to mark special or unusual events during flight.
3. Operation
The system starts when the Battery Master Switch is set to ON. The green LED indicator on the
indicating and data retrieval unit flashes for up to 30 seconds and then stays ON to show the system is
functional and has started recording. When the system is recording it cannot be switched OFF.
Recording stops automatically when the Battery Master Switch is set to OFF and the aircraft stops
moving.
If the system continues to operate after the aircraft has stopped, the system can be shut down by
pushing the OFF button on the power supply unit.
After flight, the SD card in the indicating and data retrieval unit can be removed and analysed using
debriefing software. The internal memeory in the recording unit can be accessed by connecting a
laptop computer to the unit via RS232.
Page 2
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BATTERY HOT BUS BATTERY BUS
APIPWR API
APIPWR
APIV2 RS232 DATA

DOWNLOAD
SD
APISD CARD
GPS ANTENNA
2-AXIS ACCELEROMETER
OAT SENSOR
INSTRUMENT TEMP SENSOR ITT

APICAP
FUEL QUANTITY TORQUE
TURBINE TORQUE i 2050 FUEL FLOW
STATIC AND
DYNAMIC PRESSURE Ng
Np
INTEGRATED
3-AXIS
EVENT ACCELEROMETER AUDIO
SWITCHES INPUT
6784
APIBOX System - Schematic

Figure 1
Page 3
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 4
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
APIBOX SYSTEM - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This topic gives the data and instructions to remove and install the main components of the APIBOX
system.
Procedures are given for these components:
• The power supply unit (APIPWR), installed in the radio rack in the rear fuselage
• The recording unit (APIV2), installed in the radio rack in the rear fuselage
• The indicating and data retrieval unit (APISD), installed in the instrument panel (RH side)
• The main sensors unit (APICAP), installed behind the instrument panel (RH side)
• The turbine data acquisition unit (i2050), installed on FR1
• The 2-axis accelerometer (i1030), installed on FR12.
110.88.07.065 Safety Clips Circuit breaker hold open

For use with Torque
904.10.87.501 Socket Adapter
Screwdriver
904.10.89.101 Torque Screwdriver 1 to 5 Nm (9 to 44 lb.in.)
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) Open and install safety clips to these circuit breakers:
API (LH CB Panel)

APIPWR (FR1 Electrical Panel)
B. Power Supply Unit (APIPWR) - Removal (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Open the access door FR2 and get access to the radio rack in the rear fuselage (Ref. 06-
(2) Disconnect the electrical connector (5) from the APIPWR unit (1).
(4) Remove the screws (2) and the washers (3) and remove the APIPWR unit (1) from the
brackets (4).
C. Recording Unit (APIV2) - Removal (Ref. Fig. 402)
(1) Open the access door FR2 and get access to the radio rack in the rear fuselage (Ref. 06-
Page 401
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Disconnect the electrical connectors (5) and (6).
(4) Remove the screws (3) and washers (2) and remove the APIV2 unit (1) from the brackets
(4) and (7).
D. Indicating and Data Retrieval Unit (APISD) - Removal (Ref. Fig. 403)
NOTE: A second person is required to help with the removal of this unit.
(1) Remove the RH access panel FT1 (Ref. 06-40-00, Page Block 1).
(2) Lift the cover of the APISD unit (1).
(3) Remove the nuts (5), washers (4) and screws (2).
(4) Carefully pull the APISD unit (1) out of the panel until you can get access to the electrical
connector (3).
(5) Disconnect the electrical connector (3).
E. Main Sensors Unit (APICAP) - Removal (Ref. Fig. 404)
(1) Open the access door FR2 and get access to the ELT in the rear fuselage (Ref. 06-40-00,
Page Block 1).
(2) On the ELT, set the ARM-OFF-ON switch to OFF.
PROP DE-ICE (Generator Bus)
(4) Remove the RH access panel FT1 (Ref. 06-40-00, Page Block 1).
(5) Refer to Fig. 404, View B, and record the installed positions of the pitot/static pipes (2), (3)
and (4).
(6) Loosen the three clamps (1).
(7) Disconnect the pitot/static pipes (2), (3) and (4) and collect the three clamps (1).
(8) Disconnect the electrical connectors (12), (13) and (14) from the APICAP unit (11).
(9) Disconnect the electrical connector (10) from the APISD unit.
(10) Make sure the pitot/static pipes (2), (3) and (4) can pass freely through the grommet in the
instrument panel support structure.
NOTE: This is to permit the RH instrument panel to be removed.
(11) Remove the screws (18) and carefully move the panel (17) sufficiently to get access to the
prop de-ice ammeter and ELT switch electrical connectors.
Page 402
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(12) Disconnect the ELT connector (16).
(13) Record the installed positions of the wires (5) and (19) on the prop de-ice ammeter.
(14) Remove the nuts (7) and lockwashers (6).
(15) Disconnect the wires (5) and (19).
(16) Remove the panel (17).
NOTE: When you remove the panel, carefully pull the pitot/static pipes through the
grommet in the instrument-panel support-structure.
(17) Record the installed positions of the pitot/static pipes (2), (3) and (4) at the connectors on
the APICAP unit (11).
(18) Loosen the three clamps (15).
(19) Disconnect the pitot/static pipes (2), (3) and (4) and collect the three clamps (15).
(20) Remove the screws (8) and the washers (9).
(21) Remove the APICAP unit (11).
(22) Put blanks on all open pitot/static pipes and connectors.
(23) Put blanks on all the electrical connectors.
F. Turbine Data Acquisition Unit (i2050) - Removal (Ref. Fig. 405)
(1) Move the soundproofing fabric to get access to the i2050 unit (installed on FR1 forward of
the co-pilot’s rudder pedals).
(4) Remove the screws (2) and the washers (1) and remove the i2050 unit (4) from the
attachment brackets (3).
G. Accelerometer (i1030) - Removal (Ref. Fig. 406)
(1) Remove the access panel FL2 (Ref. 06-40-00, Page Block 1).
(4) Remove the screws (1) and the washers (2).
(5) Remove the i1030 unit (3).
H. Power Supply Unit (APIPWR) - Installation (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Put the APIPWR unit (1) in the installed position.
Page 403
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Install the APIPWR unit (1) to the brackets (4) with the washers (3) and the screws (2).
(3) Torque tighten the screws (2) to 3,25 Nm (28.8 lb. in.).
(5) Connect the electrical connector (5) to the APIPWR unit (1).
I. Recording Unit (APIV2) - Installation (Ref. Fig. 402)
(1) Put the APIV2 (1) on the shelf in the installed position between the attachment brackets (4)
and (7).
(2) Install the washers (2) and the screws (3).
(5) Connect the electrical connectors (5) and (6) to the APIV2 unit (1).
J. Indicating and Data Retrieval Unit (APISD) - Installation (Ref. Fig. 403)
NOTE: A second person is required to help with the installation of this unit.
(2) Carefully push the APISD unit (1) into the panel until you can connect the electrical
connector (3).
(3) Lift the cover of the APISD unit (1).
(4) Install the screws (2), the washers (4) and the nuts (5).
(5) Install the RH access panel FT1.
K. Main Sensors Unit (APICAP) - Installation (Ref. Fig. 404)
(1) Put the APICAP unit (11) in the installed position and install the washers (9) and screws
(8).
(3) Remove the blanks from the pitot/static pipes and connectors.
CAUTION: YOU MUST CONNECT THE PITOT/STATIC PIPES TO THE CORRECT

CONNECTIONS AS RECORDED IN THE REMOVAL PROCEDURE.
(5) Put the clamps (15) on the pitot/static pipes (2), (3) and (4).
Page 404
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Connect the pitot/static pipes (2), (3) and (4) to the connectors on the APICAP unit (11) in
the positions recorded in the removal procedure.
(7) Tighten the clamps (15).
(8) Support the panel (17) sufficiently close to the installed position to permit connection of the
electrical connectors on the ELT switch and prop de-ice ammeter.
(9) Connect the wires (5) and (19) to the prop de-ice ammeter in the positions recorded in the
removal procedure.
(10) Install the lockwashers (6) and the nuts (7).
(11) Connect the ELT connector (16).
(12) Put the panel (17) in the installed position and install the screws (18).
(13) Connect the electrical connector (10) to the APISD unit.
(14) Connect the electrical connectors (12), (13) and (14) to the APICAP unit (11).
(15) Carefully pull the pitot/static pipes (2), (3) and (4) through the grommet in the instrument
panel support structure.
(16) Put the clamps (1) on the pitot/static pipes (2), (3) and (4).
(17) Connect the pitot/static pipes (2), (3) and (4) to the connectors in the positions recorded in
the removal procedure (Ref. Fig. 404, View B).
(18) Tighten the clamps (1).
(19) Do a pitot/static leak test (Ref. 34-11-00, Page Block 501).
(20) Do the adjustment/test of the ELT (Ref. 25-63-00, Page Block 501).
PROP DE-ICE (Generator Bus)
(22) Do the adjustment/test of the propellor de-icing system (Ref. 30-60-00, Page Block 501).
(23) Install the RH access panel FT1.
L. Turbine Data Acquisition Unit (i2050) - Installation (Ref. Fig. 405)
(1) Put the i2050 unit (4) in the installed position.
(2) Install the washers (1) and the screws (2).
(5) Connect the electrical connector (5).
Page 405
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Put the soundproofing fabric in the correct position.
M. Accelerometer (i1030) - Installation (Ref. Fig. 406)
(1) Put the 1030 unit (3) in the installed position and install the washers (2) and the screws (1).
(5) Install the access panel FL2.
4. Close Up
(1) Remove the safety clips and close these circuit breakers:
API (LH CB Panel)

APIPWR (FR1 Electrical Panel)
(2) Do the related adjustment/tests of the APIBOX system for the replaced component(s)
(Ref. 33-30-01, Page Block 501).
Page 406
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B
1
2
3
3
4 B
2
5
6785
APIPWR - Removal/Installation
Figure 401
Page 407
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
1
B
B
4
5
3
2
6
2
3
6786
APIV2 - Removal/Installation
Figure 402
Page 408
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5
4
A 1
3 2
6787
APISD - Removal/Installation
Figure 403
Page 409
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
B
5 B
6 2 1
7
19
8 4
9 3 1
6
7
18
10
16
17
11
9 12
8
13
C 15
15
15
14
2
4
3
6788
APICAP - Removal/Installation
Figure 404
Page 410
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FRAME 1
A
A
2
1
1
2
4
A8
74
5
6789
i2050 - Removal/Installation
Figure 405
Page 411
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FRAME 12
A
B
A
2
1
B
4
6790
i1030 - Removal/Installation
Figure 406
Page 412
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
APIBOX SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT / TEST
1. General
This Topic gives the system calibration and test procedures required after replacement of a component
of the APIBOX system.
If you replace an i1030, APICAP or APIV2 unit, a system calibration is required, followed by an
operational test.
If you replace an i2050, APIPWR or APISD unit, only an operational test is required.
2. System Calibration
NOTE: Calibration is required after installation of an i1030, APICAP or APIV2 unit.
A. Job Set-Up Information
985.99.12.199 SD Card
- Pilot SD Card (formatted)
Maintenance Notebook with Tera
Term, Debriefing Software
-
Version 1.1.6 and aircraft specific
configuration file installed
- Test Cable, RS232 9P
B. Procedures
(1) i1030 / APICAP - Configuration File Update
NOTE: This procedure is required after installation of an i1030 or APICAP unit.
(a) Level the aircraft (Ref. 08-20-00, Page Block 201).
(b) Connect the Maintenance Notebook to the APIV2 with the supplied Test Cable,
RS232 9P.
(c) On the Maintenance Notebook, start the Tera Term program.
(d) On the Maintenance Notebook:
• Select the Port with the test cable connection

• Set the Port to 8 Bits, no parity, no flow control
• Set the Baud Rate to 4800
(e) Energize the aircraft electrical system.
(f) Set the Battery Master Switch to ON.
Page 501
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(g) On the APIPWR unit (radio rack), make sure the two green LEDs are on.
(h) On the Maintenance Notebook:
• Make sure the hyper terminal is displayed

• Press the keys: $IDATA,7 then ENTER
• Make sure the maintenance menu is displayed
• If the maintenance menu is not displayed, press ENTER three times, then
press $IDATA,7 then ENTER again
(i) If you installed the i1030 unit:
(i) Press key 1 and record the values of:
• AD5
• AD6
(ii) Press keys CTRL + C.
(j) If you installed the APICAP unit:
(i) Press key 2 and record the values of:
• P1
• P2
• ACC1
• ACC2
• ACC3
• ACC4
(ii) Press keys CTRL + C.
(iii) Record the QFE value displayed on the MFD in the cockpit.
(k) Press key Z then disconnect the Test Cable, RS232 9P from the APIV2 unit.
(l) Disconnect the Test Cable, RS232 9P from the Maintenance Notebook.
(m) Remove the Maintenance Notebook and the Test Cable, RS232 9P from the
aircraft.
(n) On the Maintenance Notebook, open the aircraft specific configuration file in the
Editor.
Page 502
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: YOU MUST UPDATE ONLY THE NEW RECORDED VALUES. OTHER
CHANGES TO THE CONFIGURATION FILE ARE NOT PERMITTED.
(o) Update the configuration file with the values recorded as follows:
• CALP1: P1
• CALP2: P2
• CALPRESS: QFE value
• CALACC1: ACC1
• CALACC2: ACC2
• CALACC3: ACC3
• CALACC4: ACC4
• CALACC5: AD5
• CALACC6: AD6
(p) Save the updated configuration file.
(q) Continue with the Parameters Update.
(2) i1030 / APICAP / APIV2 - Parameters Update
NOTE: This procedure is required after installation of an i1030, APICAP or APIV2 unit.
(a) Insert a blank SD card in the card reader of the Maintenance Notebook and format
the card with FAT standard.
(b) Start the debriefing software and log in as ADMIN.
(c) In the debriefing software select ‘Maintenance’ then select ‘Generate a parameters
update card for an Apibox’.
(d) Select the SD card and then:
(i) In the ‘SDCard Filepath’ box, enter ‘parameter.dat’ as the filename.
(ii) In the ‘Source file for update’ box, if you installed the i1030 or APICAP unit,
select the updated configuration file
or
If you installed the APIV2 unit, select the original configuration file and update
the APIBOX ID.
(e) Press ‘generate’ and let the parameters file generate on the SD card.
(f) Remove the SD card from the Maintenance Notebook.
(g) On the aircraft, set the Battery Master Switch to ON.
(h) On the APISD unit (RH instrument panel):
(i) Insert the SD card with the parameters file into the APISD card slot.
Page 503
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(ii) Monitor the display and make sure the message ‘s-e-t-P-a-r-a-m’ is displayed
(one character at a time) and then a flashing letter ‘r’ is displayed.
(iii) Remove the SD card.
NOTE: When you do this the APIBOX system will shut down and restart.
(i) Let the APIBOX system restart and make sure the green LED on the APISD comes
on after not more than 30 seconds and is not flashing.
(j) Set the Battery Master Switch to OFF.
NOTE: If the APIBOX system does not shut down you can press the OFF button
on the APIPWR unit.
(k) Continue with the applicable Operational Test.
3. System Operational Tests
A. i1030 / APICAP / APIV2 - Operational Test
NOTE: This procedure is required after installation of an i1030, APICAP or APIV2 unit.
(1) On the APISD unit insert a Pilot SD card into the card slot.
(2) Set the Battery Master Switch to ON.
(3) Make sure the green LED on the APISD comes on after not more than 30 seconds and is
not flashing.
(4) Let the system record for approximately five minutes.
(5) Set the Battery Master Switch to OFF and check that the green LED on the APISD goes
off.
NOTE: If the APIBOX system does not shut down you can press the OFF button on the
APIPWR unit.
(6) Remove the SD card from the APISD.
(7) Insert the SD card in the card reader of the Maintenance Notebook.
(8) Start the debriefing software and log in as ADMIN.
(9) In the debriefing software open the flight.
(10) Check if the recorded values are correct.
B. i2050 / APIPWR / APISD - Operational Test
NOTE: This procedure is required after installation of an i2050, APIPWR or APISD unit.
(1) Set the Battery Master Switch to ON.
(2) Make sure the two LEDs on the APIPWR come on.
Page 504
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Make sure the green LED on the APISD comes on after not more than 30 seconds and is
not flashing.
(4) Set the Battery Master Switch to OFF and check that the green LED on the APISD goes
off.
NOTE: If the APIBOX system does not shut down you can press the OFF button on the
APIPWR unit.
4. Close Up
A. Make sure the work areas are clean and clear of tools, equipment and other items.
Page 505
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 506
31-30-01 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CENTRAL ADVISORY AND WARNING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The Central Advisory and Warning System (CAWS) continuously monitors the aircraft systems and
gives a warning to the pilot when specified conditions occur.
The CAWS has these components:
• An annunciator panel
• A WARNING / PUSH TO RESET light
• A CAUTION / PUSH TO RESET light
• An ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT TEST switch
2. The CAWS receives signals from the systems that follow:
• DC Generation system (Ref. 24-30-00)

• Battery hot warning (Ref. 24-30-00) (if installed)
• AC Generation system (Ref. 24-20-00) (if installed)
• Fuel distribution system (Ref. 28-20-00)
• Underwing fuel system (Ref. 28-15-00)
• Pitot-static anti-ice system (Ref. 30-00-00)
• Propeller de-ice system (Ref. 30-60-00) (if installed)
• Global Positioning System (GPS) (if installed)
• Crew oxygen system (Ref. 35-00-00) (if installed)
• Oil system magnetic chip-detector (Ref. 79-00-00).
• Vacuum system (Ref. 37-00-00)
• Propeller low pitch system (Ref. 71-00-00)
The annunciator panel sends signals to the audio integrating system.
The power supplies to the CAWS are:
• 28V DC through the ANNUNC (BATTERY BUS) circuit breaker

• 28V DC through the ANNUNC (GENERATOR BUS) circuit breaker
A. Annunciator Panel
The annunciator panel is installed in the main instrument panel. The annunciator panel is in a
rectangular box that has two electrical connectors.
EFFECTIVITY: MSN 101 thru 947

CONFIG 1
Page 1
31-51-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The front of the annunciator panel has 20 captions that show warning, caution or advisory
conditions. The captions have red, amber, or green lenses with two filaments behind the lenses.
The color of the lens shows the type of condition:
• Red Warning captions

• Amber Caution captions
• Green Advisory captions
The green advisory captions show that a system operates.
The annunciator panel gets data from the aircraft systems. It sends signals to the WARNING and
CAUTION PUSH TO RESET captions and a gong warning to the audio integrating system.
B. WARNING and CAUTION PUSH TO RESET Captions
The WARNING and CAUTION PUSH TO RESET captions are installed on the left instrument
panel. The red WARNING PUSH TO RESET caption comes on each time a red caption on the
CAWS annunciator panel comes on. The amber CAUTION PUSH TO RESET caption comes on
each time an amber caption on the annunciator panel comes on. When you push the WARNING
or CAUTION PUSH TO RESET caption, they go off.
C. ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT TEST switch.
The ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT TEST switch is installed on a small panel below the left instrument
panel.
A. Normal Operation
During normal operation the annunciator panel monitors the related systems. If a failure of a
related system occurs:
• The WARNING or CAUTION PUSH TO RESET captions come on

• The related caption on the annunciator panel comes on
• A gong warning is heard in the flight compartment headsets and from the loudspeakers
When the WARNING or CAUTION PUSH TO RESET caption is pushed, the light goes out. The
related caption on the annunciator panel stays on until the signal from the aircraft system stops
or the system is reset.
When the INSTR LIGHT switch is set to on, all the captions on the annunciator panel and the
WARNING and CAUTION PUSH TO RESET captions go dim.

CONFIG 1
Page 2
31-51-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Red Warning Captions
These captions show these warning conditions:
BATT BUS The BATTERY BUS voltage is below 14V DC
GEN BUS The GENERATOR BUS is off line
PROP LOW P The propeller is in a low pitch condition
C. Amber Caution Captions
The captions show these caution conditions:
GPS MSG The GPS (if installed) has a message
BAT HOT The battery temperature sensor (if installed, Ni-Cd battery only) is
not connected or the battery is over temperature
R FUEL FLOW EXTERNAL FUEL CONTROL RH PUMP switch set to ON, and
the float switch contacts are made (if installed)
L FUEL FLOW EXTERNAL FUEL CONTROL LH PUMP switch set to ON, and the
float switch contacts are made (if installed)
FUEL PRESS Low fuel pressure
INVERTER The inverter (if installed) output falls to below 13V AC
SUCTION Vacuum is less than 4.5 Hg or more than 5.2 Hg
GENERATOR The generator is off line
CHIP Metal particles in the engine oil system
OXYGEN The oxygen (if installed) pressure is low
F FILTER The fuel filter is blocked
D. Green Advisory Captions
These captions are for systems which are operated by the pilot. The captions show these
advisory conditions:
PROP DE ICE The propeller de-ice system (if installed) is on
ANTI ICE The pitot-static anti-ice system is on
AUX F PUMP The auxiliary fuel pump is on
L F PUMP The EXTERNAL FUEL CONTROL switch is on (if installed)
R F PUMP The EXTERNAL FUEL CONTROL switch is on (if installed)

CONFIG 1
Page 3
31-51-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Self Test
The CAWS does a self-test when the ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT TEST switch is pressed and held:
• The filaments in the CAWS display unit

• The WARNING and CAUTION PUSH TO RESET lights
• The gong warning
The self-test is satisfactory when:
• All the captions on the annunciator panel come on

• The WARNING and CAUTION PUSH TO RESET captions come on
• The CAUTION PUSH TO RESET caption does not flash (AL5583C only)
• The gong warning is heard

CONFIG 1
Page 4
31-51-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROP FUEL AUX

LOW P SUCTION PRESS F PUMP ANTI ICE
PROP
BATT BUS BATT HOT INVERTER CHIP DE-ICE
L FUEL R FUEL
GEN BUS GENERATOR OXYGEN FLOW FLOW
F-FILTER GPS MSG L F PUMP R F PUMP
6424
CAWS Annunciator Panel - Typical Layout

Figure 1

CONFIG 1
Page 5
31-51-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERATOR BUS BATTERY BUS
ANNUNC ANNUNC
GENERAL
COMPARTMENT
LIGHTING
(REF 33-10-00)
ANNUNCIATOR
LIGHT TEST
DC GENERATION
(REF 24-30-00)
AC GENERATION
(REF 24-20-00)
(IF INSTALLED)
BATTERY HOT
(REF 24-30-00)
(IF INSTALLED)
FUEL
(REF 28-20-00)
ANNUNCIATOR WARNING
UNDERWING FUEL PANEL PUSH TO RESET
(REF 28-15-00)
(IF INSTALLED)
ANTI-ICE
(REF 30-00-00)
PROP DE-ICE
(REF 30-60-00)
(IF INSTALLED) CAUTION
PUSH TO RESET
GPS
(IF INSTALLED)
OXYGEN
(REF 35-00-00)
(IF INSTALLED)
OIL AUDIO INTEGRATING

(REF 79-00-00) SYSTEM
VACUUM
(REF 37-00-00)
PROP LOW PITCH

(REF 71-00-00)
6425
CAWS - Schematic
Figure 2

CONFIG 1
Page 6
31-51-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CENTRAL ADVISORY AND WARNING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The Central Advisory and Warning System (CAWS) continuously monitors the aircraft systems and
gives a warning to the pilot when specified conditions occur.
The CAWS has these components:
• An annunciator panel
• A WARNING / PUSH TO RESET light
• A CAUTION / PUSH TO RESET light
• An ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT TEST switch
2. The CAWS receives signals from the systems that follow:
• DC Generation system (Ref. 24-30-00)

• Battery hot warning (Ref. 24-30-00) (if installed)
• AC Generation system (Ref. 24-20-00) (if installed)
• Fuel distribution system (Ref. 28-20-00)
• Underwing fuel system (Ref. 28-15-00)
• Pitot-static anti-ice system (Ref. 30-00-00)
• Propeller de-ice system (Ref. 30-60-00) (if installed)
• Stabilizer trim (Ref. 27-40-00)
• Crew oxygen system (Ref. 35-00-00) (if installed)
• Oil system magnetic chip-detector (Ref. 79-00-00).
• Vacuum system (Ref. 37-00-00)
• Propeller low pitch system (Ref. 71-00-00)
The annunciator panel sends signals to the audio integrating system.
The power supplies to the CAWS are:
• 28V DC through the ANNUNC PANEL (BATTERY BUS) circuit breaker

• 28V DC through the ANNUNC PANEL (GENERATOR BUS) circuit breaker
A. Annunciator Panel
The annunciator panel is installed in the main instrument panel. The annunciator panel is in a
rectangular box that has two electrical connectors.
EFFECTIVITY: MSN 948 and up

CONFIG 2
Page 1
31-51-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The front of the annunciator panel has 20 captions that show warning, caution or advisory
conditions. The captions have red, amber, or green lenses with two filaments behind the lenses.
The color of the lens shows the type of condition:
• Red Warning captions

• Amber Caution captions
• Green Advisory captions
The green advisory captions show that a system operates.
The annunciator panel gets data from the aircraft systems. It sends signals to the WARNING and
CAUTION PUSH TO RESET captions and a gong warning to the audio integrating system.
B. WARNING and CAUTION PUSH TO RESET Captions
The WARNING and CAUTION PUSH TO RESET captions are installed on the left instrument
panel. The red WARNING PUSH TO RESET caption comes on each time a red caption on the
CAWS annunciator panel comes on. The amber CAUTION PUSH TO RESET caption comes on
each time an amber caption on the annunciator panel comes on. When you push the WARNING
or CAUTION PUSH TO RESET caption, they go off.
C. ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT TEST switch.
The ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT TEST switch is installed on a small panel below the left instrument
panel.
A. Normal Operation
During normal operation the annunciator panel monitors the related systems. If a failure of a
related system occurs:
• The WARNING or CAUTION PUSH TO RESET captions come on

• The related caption on the annunciator panel comes on
• A gong warning is heard in the flight compartment headsets and from the loudspeakers
When the WARNING or CAUTION PUSH TO RESET caption is pushed, the light goes out. The
related caption on the annunciator panel stays on until the signal from the aircraft system stops
or the system is reset.
When the INTERNAL LIGHTS - INSTR/OFF switch is set to INSTR, all the captions on the
annunciator panel and the WARNING and CAUTION PUSH TO RESET captions go dim.

CONFIG 2
Page 2
31-51-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Red Warning Captions
The captions which follow show these warning conditions:
BATT BUS The BATTERY BUS voltage is below 14V DC
GEN BUS The GENERATOR BUS is off line
PROP LOW P The propeller is in a low pitch condition
TRIM The stabilizer trim is not in the safe-for-takeoff range (when

the aircraft is on the ground)
C. Amber Caution Captions
The captions which follow show these caution conditions:
BAT HOT The battery temperature sensor (if installed, Ni-Cd battery only) is
not connected or the battery is over temperature
R FUEL FLOW EXTERNAL FUEL CONTROL RH PUMP switch set to ON, and
the float switch contacts are made (if installed)
L FUEL FLOW EXTERNAL FUEL CONTROL LH PUMP switch set to ON, and the
float switch contacts are made (if installed)
FUEL PRESS Low fuel pressure
INVERTER The inverter (if installed) output falls to below 13V AC
SUCTION Vacuum is less than 4.5 Hg or more than 5.2 Hg
GENERATOR The generator is off line
CHIP Metal particles in the engine oil system
OXYGEN The oxygen (if installed) pressure is low
F FILTER The fuel filter is blocked
D. Green Advisory Captions
The captions which follow are for systems which are operated by the pilot. These captions show
advisory conditions:
PROP DE ICE The propeller de-ice system (if installed) is on
ANTI ICE The pitot-static anti-ice system is on
AUX F PUMP The auxiliary fuel pump is on
L F PUMP The EXTERNAL FUEL CONTROL switch is on (if installed)
R F PUMP The EXTERNAL FUEL CONTROL switch is on (if installed)

CONFIG 2
Page 3
31-51-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Self Test
The CAWS does a self-test when the ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT TEST switch is pressed and held:
• The filaments in the CAWS display unit

• The WARNING and CAUTION PUSH TO RESET lights
• The gong warning
The self-test is satisfactory when:
• All the captions on the annunciator panel come on

• The WARNING and CAUTION PUSH TO RESET captions come on
• The CAUTION PUSH TO RESET caption does not flash (AL5583C only)
• The gong warning is heard

CONFIG 2
Page 4
31-51-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROP FUEL AUX

LOW P SUCTION PRESS F PUMP ANTI ICE
PROP
BATT BUS BATT HOT INVERTER CHIP DE-ICE
L FUEL R FUEL
GEN BUS GENERATOR OXYGEN FLOW FLOW
TRIM F-FILTER L F PUMP R F PUMP
6673
CAWS Annunciator Panel - Typical Layout

Figure 1

CONFIG 2
Page 5
31-51-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERATOR BUS BATTERY BUS
ANNUNC ANNUNC
PANEL PANEL
GENERAL
COMPARTMENT
LIGHTING
(REF 33-10-00)
ANNUNCIATOR
LIGHT TEST
DC GENERATION
(REF 24-30-00)
AC GENERATION
(REF 24-20-00)
(IF INSTALLED)
BATTERY HOT
(REF 24-30-00)
(IF INSTALLED)
FUEL
(REF 28-20-00)
ANNUNCIATOR WARNING
UNDERWING FUEL PANEL PUSH TO RESET
(REF 28-15-00)
(IF INSTALLED)
ANTI-ICE
(REF 30-00-00)
PROP DE-ICE
(REF 30-60-00)
(IF INSTALLED) CAUTION
PUSH TO RESET
STABILIZER TRIM
(REF 27-40-00)
OXYGEN
(REF 35-00-00)
(IF INSTALLED)
OIL AUDIO INTEGRATING

(REF 79-00-00) SYSTEM
VACUUM
(REF 37-00-00)
PROP LOW PITCH

(REF 71-00-00)
6672
CAWS - Schematic
Figure 2

CONFIG 2
Page 6
31-51-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ANNUNCIATOR PANEL - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
2. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
ANNUNC (GENERATOR BUS CB panel)

ANNUNC (BATTERY BUS CB panel)
B. Removal
(1) Release the screws the sufficiently to get access to the connectors.
(2) Disconnect the connectors and remove the annunciator panel.
(3) To remove the bulbs from the annunciator panel, do these steps:
(a) Press the LH side of the applicable caption block.
(b) Open the caption block to get access to rear of the block.
(c) Remove the applicable bulb.
C. Installation
(1) If the old bulbs were removed from the annunciuator panel, do these steps:
(a) Install a new bulb in the applicable caption block.
(b) Close the caption block and press it to make sure it closes correctly.
(2) Connect the connectors to the annunciator panel.
(3) Put the annunciator panel in position and lock the fasteners.
D. Job Close Up
(1) Remove the safety clip and close these circuit breakers:
ANNUNC (GENERATOR BUS CB panel)

ANNUNC (BATTERY BUS CB panel)
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with CAWS
Page 401
31-51-01 Nov 30/03
'ePILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STALL WARNING SYSTEM- DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The stall warning system gives the pilot an aural and visual warning as the aircraft approaches a stall
condition. The system has these components:
•
A stall warning detector
•
A buzzer
•
A stall warning indicator
The system is supplied with 28V DC from the BATTERY BUS through the STALL WARN circuit breaker.
A. Stall Warning Detector
The stall warning detector is installed on the lower surface of the left wing . The stall warning
detector contains a vane that protrudes into the airflow. Inside the stall warning detector is a set
of contacts that will move dependent on vane position. Two screws and nuts attach the stall
warning detector to the wing . Access to the two electrical connections is throug h the adjacent
access panel.
B. Stall Warning Indicator
A stall warning indicator with the words STALL PUSH TO TEST on the front of the indicator is
installed in the left instrument panel.
C. Buzzer
The buzzer is installed on a bracket below the left instrument panel in the footwell. Four screws
attach the buzzer to a bracket. The three electrical connections are at the rear of the buzzer.
During usual operation power from the BATTERY BUS supplies 28V DC to the stall warning indicator
and the buzzer. When the aircraft approaches a stall condition, the direction of the airflow causes the
vane to move upwards, which makes a contact in the stall warning detector. This connects a ground to
operate the buzzer and the stall warning indicator. This g ives the pilot aural and visual warning of a
stall condition.
A test can be made of the stall warning indicator and the buzzer when you press and hold the STALL
WARNING caption.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
31-52-00 Nov 30/03
�PILATUSEF'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STALL
WARNING
DETECTOR
STALL
PUSH TO TEST
STALL WARNING INDICATOR
Stall Warning - Component Location

Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page2
31-52-00 Nov30/03
'ePILATUS:?'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BATIERY BUS 28V DC
STALL WARN
STALL DETECTOR UNIT
-
-
BUZZER
r---- ---- ,
.._ - --------- - .....
STALL WARNING INDICATOR
-
-
Stall Warning - Schematic

Figure 2
EFFECTIVITV: All
Page3
31-52-00 Nov 30/03
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STALL WARNING SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT / TEST
- Access platform 1 m (3 ft)
2. Procedure
A. Set the BATTERY switch to ON.
B. On the left instrument panel, push and hold the STALL PUSH TO TEST indicator.
C. Make sure the STALL PUSH TO TEST indicator comes on, and you can hear the buzzer in the
pilots footwell.
D. Release the STALL PUSH TO TEST indicator.
E. Make sure the STALL PUSH TO TEST indicator goes off, and the buzzer stops.
F. At the left wing, move the vane on the stall detector upwards. Make sure the STALL PUSH TO
TEST indicator comes on, and you hear the buzzer in the pilots footwell.
G. Move the vane on the stall detector downwards, until the STALL PUSH TO TEST indicator goes
off, and you no longer hear the buzzer in the pilots footwell.
H. Set the BATTERY switch to OFF.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 501
31-52-00 Nov 30/03
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HORIZONTAL-STABILIZER TRIM WARNING-SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The horizontal-stabilizer trim warning-system gives the pilot an aural and visual warning if the
horizontal-stabilizer trim is not correct for take-off. The system includes these components:
• Weight-on-wheels switch
• Wiper plate or contact plates
• Proximity switch
• Warning tone generator
• Lighted switch
The system is supplied with 28V DC from the BATTERY BUS through the TRIM WARN circuit breaker.
A. Weight-on-Wheels Switch
The weight-on-wheels (WOW) switch is installed between the V-struts of the main landing gear.
The WOW switch stops the trim warning-system operating during flight.
B. Wiper Plate
Pre-SB 31-001
The wiper plate is installed at the front of the LH rib of the horizontal-stabilizer adjacent to the LH
fairing at the rear of the fuselage. The wiper plate indicates the range of movement of the
horizontal-stabilizer for the proximity switch.
C. Contact Plates
Post-SB 31-001
The contact plates are installed at the front of the LH rib of the horizontal-stabilizer adjacent to
the LH fairing at the rear of the fuselage. The contact plates indicate the range of movement of
the horizontal-stabilizer for the proximity switch. The upper and lower contact plates are
adjustable to let the threshold for nose-up and nose-down be adjusted.
D. Proximity Switch
The proximity switch is installed in the LH fairing of the rear fuselage. The proximity switch
detects the position of the horizontal-stabilizer.
E. Warning Tone Generator
The warning tone generator is installed below the RH instrument panel. The warning tone
generator gives an aural warning to the pilot.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with a Trim Warning System

Page 1
31-57-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F. Lighted Switch
The lighted switch is installed either at the left of the standby magnetic compass, or to the right of
the row of lighted switches below the standby magnetic compass. The lighted switch gives a
visual warning to the pilot.
G. Relay K100 (20 second delay)
The K100 relay is mounted adjacent to the warning tone generator. The relay which has a 20
second delay, opens or closes the circuit to the warning tone generator and the lighted switch.
3. Operation
The BATTERY BUS supplies 28V DC power to the warning tone generator (A100), TRIM WARN lighted
push-switch (DS100), 20 second delay relay (K100) and the proximity switch (S100).
During flight, the WOW switch is in the AIR position and so there is no ground to the circuit. The relay is
de-energized and there is no power supply to the warning tone generator and the lighted push-switch.
When the aircraft is on the ground, the WOW switch is in the GND position which grounds the circuit. If
the trim is not in the correct range for takeoff 20 seconds after landing or 20 seconds after the system is
electrically energized, the proximity switch closes. The relay is then energized, the circuit closes and
power is supplied to the warning tone generator and the lighted push-switch to warn the pilot.

Page 2
31-57-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A TRIM WARNING
LIGHTED SWITCH
STANDBY
MAGNETIC
COMPASS
B
1
E D
A
EXAMPLE OF ALTERNATIVE
LOCATION OF TRIM WARNING
LIGHTED SWITCH
CB100
LEFT CB BOX
FUSELAGE
ASSEMBLY
CENTERLINE
FRAME 1
B
C
INSTRUMENT PANEL
D
EXAMPLE OF ALTERNATIVE WARNING TONE
LOCATION FOR CB100 GENERATOR
C
FWD
6648
Horizontal-Stabilizer Trim Warning-System - Component Location


Page 3
31-57-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
F
WEIGHT ON
WHEELS (WOW) EXPANSION
SWITCH BUSH CAM
FAIRING WOW SUPPORT

ASSEMBLY ANGLE
WIPER
PLATE
(REF.)
PROXIMITY
SWITCH
VIEW LOOKING FWD
CONTACT
PLATES
G
(REF.) PRE SB 31-001
PROXIMITY
SWITCH
VIEW LOOKING FWD
G
POST SB 31-001
6649
Horizontal-Stabilizer Trim Warning-System - Component Location


Page 4
31-57-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BATTERY BUS
28 VDC
CB100 TRIM WARN
WARNING TONE
GENERATOR A100
28V DC
28V DC
DS 100
TRIM
WARN
TEST
GROUND
28V DC
PROXIMITY
SWITCH S100
AIR
28V DC
GROUND
20 SECONDS
DELAY RELAY WEIGHT -ON-WHEELS
K100 SWITCH S101
6650
Horizontal-Stabilizer Trim Warning-System - Schematic

Figure 2

Page 5
31-57-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

Page 6
31-57-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HORIZONTAL-STABILIZER TRIM WARNING-SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT / TEST
1. General
This topic gives the procedure for the adjustment / test of the warning system for the
horizontal-stabilizer trim.
The Operational Test is applicable to all aircraft with the horizontal-stabilizer trim warning system
installed. The Adjustment / Test procedure is only applicable to aircraft post-SB 31-001 and is only
necessary:
• When the trim warning system does not operate properly at the correct horizontal-stabilizer trim
positions or
• When the upper and lower contact plates have failed the check for security of attachment (Ref.
55-10-00, Page Block 601).
- Non-metallic Scraper Local supply
P01-008 Solvent
P08-073 Sealant (MC-780 C-2)
3. Procedure
A. Operational Test
WARNING: BEFORE YOU OPERATE THE HORIZONTAL-STABILIZER, MAKE SURE THE

AREA AROUND THE HORIZONTAL-STABILIZER IS CLEAR OF PERSONS AND
EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION: FOR AIRCRAFT WITH ELECTRICAL HORIZONTAL-STABILIZER TRIM:
• DO NO OPERATE THE HORIZONTAL-STABILIZER TRIM ACTUATOR FOR

MORE THAN 30 SECONDS AT ONE TIME. LET THE ACTUATOR COOL
FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES AFTER 30 SECONDS OF OPERATION.
(1) Lift the aircraft on jacks (Ref. AMM Chapter 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
(3) Make sure the TRIM WARN circuit breaker is closed.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with Trim Warning System

Page 501
31-57-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Operate the horizontal-stabilizer to the fully nose up position. Make sure the
horizontal-stabilizer trim warning-system does not operate.
(5) Operate the horizontal-stabilizer to the fully nose down position. Make sure the
horizontal-stabilizer trim warning-system does not operate.
(6) With the horizontal-stabilizer in the fully nose down position, push and hold the
weight-on-wheels (WOW) switch plunger. Make sure the horizontal-stabilizer trim
warning-system operates after approximately 20 seconds.
(7) Release the WOW switch plunger. Make sure the horizontal-stabilizer trim
warning-system goes off.
(8) Move the horizontal-stabilizer trim to the neutral (0) position.
(9) Lower the aircraft to the ground (Ref. AMM Chapter 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
(10) Operate the horizontal-stabilizer trim to the -2 units nose-up position. Make sure the trim
warning-system does not operate.
(11) Operate the horizontal-stabilizer trim through the -2 units nose-up position. Make sure the
horizontal-stabilizer trim warning-system comes on immediately.
(12) Operate the horizontal-stabilizer trim to the +2 units nose-down position. Make sure the
horizontal-stabilizer trim warning-system goes off when the trim indication goes through
the -2 position.
(13) Operate the horizontal-stabilizer trim through the +2 units nose-down position. Make sure
the horizontal-stabilizer trim warning-system comes on immediately.
(14) Move the horizontal-stabilizer trim to the neutral (0) position. Make sure the
horizontal-stabilizer trim warning-system goes off when the trim indication goes through
the +2 units nose-down position.
B. Adjustment Test
Post-SB 31-001
WARNING: BEFORE YOU OPERATE THE HORIZONTAL-STABILIZER, MAKE SURE THE

AREA AROUND THE HORIZONTAL-STABILIZER IS CLEAR OF PERSONS AND
EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION: FOR AIRCRAFT WITH ELECTRICAL HORIZONTAL-STABILIZER TRIM:
• DO NO OPERATE THE HORIZONTAL-STABILIZER TRIM ACTUATOR FOR

MORE THAN 30 SECONDS AT ONE TIME. LET THE ACTUATOR COOL
FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES AFTER 30 SECONDS OF OPERATION.

Page 502
31-57-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(1) Make sure that the horizontal-stabilizer in the neutral position (Ref. Fig 501).
NOTE: The neutral position is when the vertical distance from the top edge of the rear
fuselage to the trailing edge of the horizontal stabilizer is 54 mm (2.126 in.).
(2) Remove the horizontal-stabilizer (Ref. 55-11-11, Page Block 401).
(3) Adjust the contact plates as follows (Ref. Fig. 502):
(a) Remove the lockwire from the screws (4).
(b) Remove the four screws (4), washers (3), the upper contact plate (1) and the lower
contact plate (2) from the horizontal-stabilizer.
(c) Remove any remaining sealant from the work area and the contact plates with a
Non-metallic Scraper.
(d) Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with solvent (Material No.
P01-008) and fully clean the contact plates and the faying surface of the horizontal-
stabilizer.
(e) Put the upper contact plate (1) and the lower contact plate (2) in position on the
horizontal-stabilizer.
(f) Make sure that the fastener holes are aligned at the mid position of each slot.
(g) Install the four washers (3) and four screws (4) but do not fully torque the screws.
Tighten the screws until the upper contact plate (1) lower contact plate (2) are just
held in position.
(4) Temporarily install the horizontal stabilizer (Ref. 55-11-11, Page Block 401).
(5) Adjust the horizontal-stabilizer trim warning system as follows (Ref. Fig. 502):
(a) Set the BATTERY switch to ON.
(b) Make sure that the TRIM WARN circuit breaker is closed.
(c) Operate the horizontal-stabilizer trim to the -2 units nose-up position (lower green
band edge of the safe-for-take-off position).
(d) Loosen the two screws (4) for the upper contact plate (1) and adjust the position
until the trim warning is not on but at the edge of its activation with precision.
(e) Tighten the screws (4) to hold the upper contact plate (1) in its adjusted position but
do not fully torque the screws. Tighten the screws until the upper contact plate (1) is
just held in position.
(f) Operate the horizontal-stabilizer trim to the +2 units nose-down position (upper
green band edge of the safe-for-take-off position).
(g) Loosen the two screws (4) for the lower contact plate (2) and adjust the position until
the trim warning is not on but at the edge of its activation with precision.

Page 503
31-57-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(h) Tighten the screws (4) to hold the lower contact plate (2) in its adjusted position but
do not fully torque the screws. Tighten the screws until the lower contact plate (2) is
just held in position.
(i) Operate the horizontal-stabilizer to the neutral (0) position (Ref. Fig. 1).
(j) Set the BATTERY switch to OFF.
(6) Remove the horizontal-stabilizer (Ref. 55-11-11, Page Block 401).
(7) Mark out the position of the upper contact plate (1) and the lower contact plate (3) on the
horizontal-stabilizer.
(8) Remove the four screws (4), the four washers (3), the upper contact plate (1) and the
lower contact plate (2) (Ref. Fig. 502).
CAUTION: YOU MUST DO WORK STEPS 3.B.(9) THRU 3.B.(14)(H) BEFORE THE
APPLICATION TIME OF THE SEALANT EXPIRES. OBEY THE SEALANT
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.
(9) Obey the manufacturer’s instructions and apply a layer of sealant (Material No. P08-073)
to the faying surfaces of the:
• Upper contact plate (1)

• Lower contact plate (2)
• Horizontal-stabilizer.
(10) Carefully put in position with the marks you made on the horizontal-stabilizer in work steps
3.B.(8)(f) and 3.B.(8)(j) the:
• Upper contact plate (1)

• Lower contact plate (3).
Remove the marks from the horizontal-stabilizer.
(11) Install the four screws (4), the four washers (34). Torque the screws (4), the run-down
torque must be within 0,113 to 1,130 Nm (1 to 10 lbf in).
(12) Remove any excess sealant with absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with
(13) Install the horizontal stabilizer (Ref. 55-11-11, Page Block 401).
(14) Make sure that the activation thresholds for the trim warning system are correct as follows:
(a) Set the BATTERY switch to ON.
(b) Make sure that the TRIM WARN circuit breaker is closed.
(c) Operate the horizontal-stabilizer trim to the -2 units nose-up position (lower green
band edge of the safe-for-take-off position).

Page 504
31-57-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Make sure that the trim warning is not on but at the edge of its activation with
precision. If necessary do work step 3.B.(5)(d) and (e) again and torque the screws
(5), the run-down torque must be within 0,113 to 1,130 Nm (1 to 10 lbf in).
(e) Operate the horizontal-stabilizer trim to the +2 units nose-down position (upper
green band edge of the safe-for-take-off position).
(f) Make sure that the trim warning is not on but at the edge of its activation with
precision. If necessary do work step 3.B.(5)(g) and (h) again and torque the screws
(5), the run-down torque must be within 0,113 to 1,130 Nm (1 to 10 lbf in).
(g) Operate the horizontal-stabilizer to the neutral (0) position (Ref. Fig. 1).
(h) Set the BATTERY switch to OFF.
(15) Safety the four screws (4) with lockwire (Material No. P02-022) (Ref. Fig. 502 and
20-10-01, Page Block 1).
(16) Do the operational test, Ref. Para 3.A.
C. Close Up

Page 505
31-57-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SECTION
FWD
A-A
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER 54 mm (2.126 in.)
ACCESS PANEL FL2
REAR FUSELAGE
DETAIL OF STABILIZER NEUTRAL POSITION

6827
Horizontal-Stabilizer - Neutral Position

Figure 501

Page 506
31-57-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A A
B
C
C 1
D 3
D
FWD
4 2
6830
Upper and Lower Contact Plates - Adjustment / Test

Figure 502

Page 507
31-57-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

Page 508
31-57-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HORIZONTAL-STABILIZER TRIM WARNING-SYSTEM - WARNING TONE GENERATOR

REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This procedure is only applicable for aircraft with the horizontal-stabilizer trim warning system installed.
3. Job Set Up
A. Make sure the BATTERY MASTER switch is set to OFF.
B. Open and install the safety clip to the circuit breaker:
STAB TRIM WARN (BATTERY BUS CB Panel)
C. If necessary, remove the RH pilot seat.
A. Removal
(1) Remove the top part (1) of the warning tone generator from the base (2).
(2) Remove the nuts (3), washers (4) and screws (6) that attach the base to the support
plate (5).
(3) Disconnect the wire from the pin of the tone generator.
(4) Remove the warning tone generator base (2) from the aircraft.
(5) Keep the two parts of the tone generator together.
B. Installation
(1) Install the base (2) to the support plate (5) with the screws (6), washers (4) and nuts (3).
NOTE: Make sure the tone code is set to 10111 and the tone volume is set to full CW
(maximum).
(2) Connect the wire to the pin of the tone generator.
(3) Attach the top part (1) of the warning tone generator to the base (2).

Page 401
31-57-01 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Job Close Up
A. Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
B. If removed, install the RH pilot seat.
C. Do a test of the horizontal-stabilizer trim warning-system (Ref. 31-57-00, Page Block 501).

Page 402
31-57-01 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A TO PIN C1
ON LIGHTED
SWITCH DS100
W8A20
W1B20
6
W9A20
5
4
3
FWD
6651
Warning Tone Generator - Removal / Installation

Figure 401

Page 403
31-57-01 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

Page 404
31-57-01 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HORIZONTAL-STABILIZER TRIM WARNING-SYSTEM - WEIGHT-ON-WHEELS SWITCH (WOW)

1. General
This procedure is only applicable for aircraft with the horizontal-stabilizer trim warning-system installed.
P02-001 Lockwire 0,8 mm
3. Job Set Up
C. Remove the access panel FB1.
A. Removal
(1) Remove the nuts (1), washers (2), screws (9) and fairing assembly (5).
(2) Make a record of the route of the WOW switch wires.
(3) Remove the screw (12) that grounds the wire of the weight-on-wheels (WOW) switch with
to the aircraft structure.
(4) Disconnect the WOW switch wire with the green identifier from the X2 pin of the K100
relay.
(5) Remove and discard the cable ties (11).
(6) Pull the cable through the grommet (10) and remove it from the aircraft.
(7) If applicable, remove and discard the lockwire from the two locknuts (6) and (7).
(8) Loosen the locknuts (6) and (7) to move the WOW switch clear of the expansion bush cam
(3).

Page 401
31-57-02 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(9) Remove the locknut (6) and the WOW switch (8) from the support angle (4).
(10) Remove the locknut (7) from the WOW switch (8).
B. Installation
(1) Install the locknut (7) to the WOW switch (8).
(2) Install the WOW switch (8) in the support angle (4) and then install locknut (6).
(3) Adjust the locknuts (6) and (7) so that the WOW switch touches the expansion bush cam
(3).
(4) Tighten the two locknuts (6) and (7), make sure the WOW switch still touches the
expansion bush cam (3).
(5) If applicable, safety the two locknuts with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(6) Put the WOW switch cable through the grommet (10).
(7) Install the WOW switch wires along their correct route.
(8) Connect the green wire of the WOW switch to the X2 pin of the K100 relay.
(9) Install the screw (12) to ground the red wire of the WOW switch to the aircraft structure.
(10) Attach the cable to the loom with new cable ties (11).
(11) Install the fairing assembly (5), screws (9), washers (2) and nuts (1).
5. Job Close Up
B. Make sure the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
C. Install the access panel FB1.
D. Do a test of the horizontal-stabiliser trim warning-system (Ref. 31-57-00, Page Block 501).

Page 402
31-57-02 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TO PIN X2 ON
A
RELAY K100
11 1
2
12
10
8 6
7
5
6652
Weight-on-Wheels Switch - Removal / Installation

Figure 1

Page 403
31-57-02 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

Page 404
31-57-02 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HORIZONTAL-STABILIZER TRIM WARNING-SYSTEM - PROXIMITY SWITCH

1. General
This topic gives the procedure for the removal and installation of the proximity switch for the
horizontal-stabilizer trim warning system.
P02-001 Lockwire 0,8 mm
3. Job Set Up
C. Put the horizontal stabilizer in the neutral (0) position.
NOTE: The neutral position is when the vertical distance from the top edge of the rear fuselage
to the trailing edge of the horizontal stabilizer is 54 mm (Ref. Fig. 401).
A. Removal
(1) Open and hold the hinged tab (1) in position and then remove the spring (2) from the tab.
(2) Remove and discard the cotter pin (3) from the inboard-end of the hinge pin (4).
(3) Remove the hinge pin (4) and the tab (1).
(4) Disconnect the electrical connector (6) from the proximity switch (5).
(5) If installed, remove and discard the lockwire from the locknuts (7) and (8).
(6) Release the locknuts (7) and (8).
(7) Remove the locknut (8) and the proximity switch (5) from the aircraft.
(8) Remove the locknut (7) from the proximity switch (5).

Page 401
31-57-03 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
(1) Install the locknut (7) to the proximity switch (5).
(2) Install proximity switch (5) to the mounting plate with the locknut (8).
(3) Set the clearance between the proximity switch (5) and the wiper plate (9) or upper contact
plate (10) and the lower contact plate (11) to 2,0 mm (0.078 in.).
(4) Tighten the locknuts (7) and (8). Make sure the clearance between the proximity switch
and the wiper plate is still 2,0 mm (0.078 in.).
(5) If applicable, safety the locknuts (7) and (8) with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(6) Connect the electrical connector (6) to the proximity switch (5).
(7) Hold the hinged tab (1) in position.
(8) Install the hinge pin (4).
(9) Install a new cotter pin (3) to the inboard-end of the hinge pin (4).
(10) Hold the tab open, attach the spring (2) and close the hinged tab (1).
5. Job Close Up
B. Do a test of the horizontal-stabilizer trim warning-system (Ref. 31-57-00, Page Block 501).

Page 402
31-57-03 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B 5
6
A
8
7
4
A
PRE SB 31-001
B
C
9
REAR FUSELAGE 2
LEFT FAIRING
10
B C
11 POST SB 31-001
6653
Proximity Switch - Removal / Installation

Figure 401

Page 403
31-57-03 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

Page 404
31-57-03 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 32 - LANDING GEAR

Chapter Chapter
Section Section
List of Effective 1 Jul 31/22 32-41-11 (Cont’d) 402 Sep 30/07
Pages 2 Jul 31/22 403 Sep 30/07
404 Sep 30/07
2 Feb 28/20 32-41-12 401 Mar 30/08
3 Feb 28/20 402 Mar 30/08
4 Feb 28/20 403 Mar 30/08
404 Mar 30/08
32-10-00 1 Jun 14/91
2 Jun 14/91 32-42-00 1 Mar 14/98
2 Mar 14/98
32-11-11 401 Jul 30/15 3 Mar 14/98
403 Jul 30/15 601 May 14/95
404 Jul 30/15 602 Mar 14/95
603 Jun 14/91
402 Jul 30/15 32-42-11 401 Jul 30/15
403 Jul 30/15 402 Jul 30/15
404 Jul 30/15 403 Jul 30/15
404 Jul 30/15
601 Jan 30/16
602 Jan 30/16 32-42-12 401 Jun 14/91
603 Jan 30/16 402 Jun 14/91
604 Jan 30/16 403 Jun 14/91
32-11-12 401 Mar 30/08 32-42-13 401 Feb 28/20

402 Mar 30/08 402 Feb 28/20
403 Mar 30/08 403 Feb 28/20
404 Mar 30/08 404 Feb 28/20
405 Feb 28/20
32-11-13 401 Dec 31/12 406 Feb 28/20
CONFIG 1 402 Dec 31/12
403 Dec 31/12 32-42-14 401 Feb 28/20
404 Dec 31/12 402 Feb 28/20
403 Feb 28/20
CONFIG 2 401 Dec 31/12 404 Feb 28/20
402 Dec 31/12
403 Dec 31/12 32-42-15 401 Jun 14/91
404 Dec 31/12 402 Jun 14/91
403 Jun 14/91
32-40-00 1 Nov 30/03
32-51-11 401 Jan 30/15
32-41-11 401 Sep 30/07 402 Jan 30/15
Page 1
32-LEP Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter Chapter
Section Section
32-51-11 (Cont’d) 403 Jan 30/15 32-76-00 (Cont’d) 601 Oct 31/10
404 Jan 30/15 602 Oct 31/10
603 Oct 31/10
32-51-12 401 Jul 31/22 604 Oct 31/10
402 Jul 31/22 605 Oct 31/10
403 Jul 31/22 606 Oct 31/10
404 Jul 31/22
405 Jul 31/22
406 Jul 31/22
32-51-13 601 Feb 28/20

602 Feb 28/20
32-70-00 1 Jun 14/92

2 Jun 14/91
3 Jun 14/91
32-71-11 401 Jan 30/15

402 Jan 30/15
403 Jan 30/15
404 Jan 30/15
32-71-12 401 Mar 14/98

403 Mar 14/98
404 Mar 14/98

402 Mar 14/98
403 Mar 14/98
32-71-13 401 Feb 28/20

402 Feb 28/20
403 Feb 28/20
404 Feb 28/20
405 Feb 28/20
406 Feb 28/20
407 Feb 28/20
408 Feb 28/20
409 Feb 28/20
410 Feb 28/20
32-76-00 301 Oct 31/10

302 Oct 31/10
501 Oct 31/10

502 Oct 31/10
Page 2
32-LEP Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 32 - LANDING GEAR

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
LANDING GEAR
MAIN GEAR 32-10-00

V-STRUT 32-11-11
Removal / Installation CONFIG 1 401 Pre SB-180
Removal / Installation CONFIG 2 401 Post SB-180
SHOCK STRUT 32-11-12
MUDGUARDS / STONE GUARDS 32-11-13
Removal / Installation CONFIG 1 401 P/Ns:
114.35.06.035/036
114.35.06.073/074
114.35.06.083/084
Removal / Installation CONFIG 2 401 P/Ns:
114.35.06.115/116
WHEELS AND BRAKES 32-40-00

MAIN WHEEL 32-41-11
TAIL WHEEL 32-41-12
BRAKES 32-42-00
BRAKE UNIT 32-42-11
SHUTTLE VALVE 32-42-12
Removal / Installation 401 Aircraft with dual
brake system
Page 1
32-TOC Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter
Section
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER 32-42-13

PARK BRAKE VALVE 32-42-14
Removal / Installation 401 Aircraft with remote
reservoir systems
BRAKE LININGS 32-42-15
STEERING
TAIL LANDING-GEAR STEERING CABLE 32-51-11
TAIL LANDING-GEAR STEERING-LOCK 32-51-12
CABLE
LOCKING-LEVER PIVOT PINS 32-51-13
TAIL LANDING GEAR 32-70-00

TAIL LANDING GEAR 32-71-11
TAIL LEG SHOCK STRUT 32-71-12
Removal / Installation CONFIG 1 401 Aircraft up to MSN
884 without SB 169
Removal / Installation CONFIG 2 401 Aircraft from MSN
885 and aircraft with
SB 169
TAIL LANDING GEAR - BOTTOM SUPPORT 32-71-13 All
ASSEMBLY
Removal / Installation 401
Page 2
32-TOC Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter
Section
SKI INSTALLATION 32-76-00

Servicing 301 Aircraft with skis
installed
Adjustment/Test 501 Aircraft with skis
installed
Inspection/Check 601 Aircraft with skis
installed
Page 3
32-TOC Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 4
32-TOC Feb 28/20
"9PILATUS!i!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAIN GEAR - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
A fixed landing gear with two main wheels and a single movable tail wheel is installed. Shock struts are
installed on the main and tail gear to absorb landing and taxiing shocks. The main wheel assemblies
have hydraulic disc brakes installed which are operated from the pilots and co-pilots rudder pedals.
Tail wheel steering is operated through the rudder pedal and can be disconnected from the cockpit.
When disconnected the tail wheel is locked in the central position.
2. Description (Ref. Fig. 1)
Each main leg has a hinged V-strut and an oil/spring shock strut.
A. V-Struts
The V-struts are triangular shaped, steel alloy tubes, welded together. The V-struts are installed
within bearing blocks fitte d to the underside of the fuselage. The rear pivot is threaded to permit
adjustment of V-strut axial play.
Fairings are installed to the forward and rear V-strut attachment points on the underside of the
fuselage. This is to prevent contamination of the bearing blocks with dust particles and to
reduce drag.
A wheel axle, a shock strut attachment lug and a ski attachment bracket are welded to the
outboard end of the V-strut.
B. Shock Strut
The upper end of each shock strut is attached to a bracket installed on the side of the fuselage.
The lower end of each shock strut is bolted to the attachment lug on the V-strut.
Suspension is given by a large coil spring installed in the shock absorber cylinder. This is
Installed between the cylinder base and the strut piston head.
A step is installed on the strut to permit entry in to the cockpit.
C. Brake System
Hydraulically operated disc brakes are operated by toe pedals mounted on the rudder bar. The
parking brake is actuated by a cable operated control (Ref. 32-42-00, Page Block 1).
D. Tail Landing Gear
The tail landing gear is installed at the rear of the aircraft (Ref. 32-70-00, Page Block 1) .
3. Operation
When landing or taxiing, the struts will compress the coil spring and force oil through a hole in the
piston head. This gives shock absorption and damping. On the extension, or return stroke, the oil
returns through a restrictor valve to the lower side of the strut. As the strut nears maximum extension,
the cushioning spring compresses and damps the extension movement.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
32-10-00 Jun 14/91
'ePILATUSE!!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
UPPER FUSELAGE FITTING
WHEEL ASSEMBLY SHOCK STRUT TAIL LANDING GEAR

V-STRUT
6277
Main Landing Gear - Description and Operation

Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page2
32-10-00 Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
V-STRUT - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This procedure is applicable for the LH and RH V-Strut.
6690.0080.00 Tube spanner
B. Expendable Parts
32-11-01, Fig 01 Cotter pin Fig. 401, Item 8
P04-002 Grease
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) Lift the aircraft on jacks (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
(2) Remove the nut, washer and bolt and remove the step from the V-strut.
NOTE: You can see the installation of the step in IPC 32-11-11, Fig. 01.
(3) Remove the mudguard/stone guard (if installed) (Ref. 32-11-13, Page Block 401).
(4) Remove the main wheel (Ref. 32-41-11, Page Block 401).
(5) Remove the brake unit (Ref. 32-42-11, Page Block 401).
(6) Remove the shock strut (Ref. 32-11-12, Page Block 401).
(7) Remove the access panel FB1.
(1) Disconnect the flexible hose (3) at the brake pipe outlet connection (25).
(2) Install blanks at the brake pipe openings.
(3) Remove the nuts (14), washers (13) and screws (16) that attach the brake pipe clamps
(15) to the V-Strut (17). Remove the brake pipe (18) and pipe clamps (15).
EFFECTIVITY: Pre SB-180

CONFIG 1
Page 401
32-11-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Remove the nuts (27), washers (26) and bolts (19) that attach the fairing (20). Remove the
fairing.
(5) Remove the screws (11) and (12) that attach the fairing (10). Remove the fairing.
(6) Remove the screw (5) and washer (4) that attach the earth strap (2) to the V-Strut (17).
(7) Remove the cotter pin (8), nut (7) and washer (9). Discard the cotter pin.
(8) Support both V-Struts.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THE V-STRUTS ARE SUPPORTED BEFORE THE BEARING
BLOCK ATTACHMENT BOLTS ARE REMOVED.
(9) Remove the nuts (21), washers (22) and (24) and bolts (1). Remove the bearing block
(23).
(10) Move the V-Strut forward and remove from the aircraft.
(1) Put the V-Strut in to position.
(2) Engage the V-Strut rear pivot pin in to the bearing block (6).
(3) Engage the bearing block (23) on to both V-Strut forward pivot pins.
(4) Install the bolts (1) washers (24) and (22) and nuts (21) to attach the bearing block (23).
(5) Install washer (9) and nut (7). With the tube spanner, tighten the nut so that the V-Strut can
move freely and there is no axial movement.
(6) Safety the nut with a new cotter pin (8).
(7) Lubricate the bearing blocks (23) and (6) with grease (Material No. P04-002).
(8) Install the washer (4) and screw (5) to attach the earth strap (2) to the V-Strut (17).
(9) Put the brake pipe (18) in to position.
(10) Install the screw (16), washers (13) and nuts (13) to attach the brake pipe clamps (15) to
the V-Strut (17).
(11) Remove the blanks from the brake pipe outlet connections.
(12) Connect the flexible hose (3) at the brake pipe outlet connection (25).
(13) Put the fairing (10) in to position. Install the screws (11) and (12).
(14) Put the fairing (20) in to position. Install the bolts (19), washers (26) and nuts (27).

CONFIG 1
Page 402
32-11-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Job Close Up
(1) Install the shock strut (Ref. 32-11-12, Page Block 401).
(2) Install the brake unit (Ref. 32-42-11, Page Block 401).
(3) Install the wheel (Ref. 32-41-11, Page Block 401).
(4) Install the mudguard/stone guard as required (Ref. 32-11-13, Page Block 401).
(5) Install the step on the V-strut with the bolt, washer and nut.
(7) Lower the aircraft and remove the jacks (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).

CONFIG 1
Page 403
32-11-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A 7. NUT
A 6. BEARING FITTING
8. COTTER PIN
2. EARTH STRAP
1. BOLT 9. WASHER
27. NUT
26. WASHER
10. FAIRING
25. BRAKE PIPE OUTLET
CONNECTION 5. SCREW
4. WASHER
24. WASHER 11. SCREW
3. FLEXIBLE HOSE
23. V-STRUT FITTING
12. SCREW
22. WASHER
21. NUT
20. FAIRING
18. BRAKE PIPE
19. BOLT
17. V-STRUT
16. SCREW
13. WASHER
14. NUT
15. CLAMP
6221
V-Strut - Removal / Installation

Figure 401

CONFIG 1
Page 404
32-11-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
V-STRUT - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This procedure ia applicable for the LH and RH V-Strut.
6690.0080.00 Tube spanner
B. Expendable Parts
32-11-01, Fig 01 Cotter pin Fig. 401, Item 8
P04-002 Grease
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(2) Remove the nut, washer and bolt and remove the step from the V-strut.
(3) Remove the mudguard/stone guard (if installed) (Ref. 32-11-13, Page Block 401).
(5) Remove the brake unit (Ref. 32-42-11, Page Block 401).
(6) Remove the shock strut (Ref. 32-11-12, Page Block 401).
(7) Remove the access panel FB1.
(1) Disconnect the flexible hose (3) at the brake pipe outlet connection (26).
(2) Install blanks to the brake pipe open connections.
(3) Remove the nuts (14), washers (13) and screws (16) that attach the brake pipe clamps
(15) to the V-Strut (17).
EFFECTIVITY: Post SB-180

CONFIG 2
Page 401
32-11-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Remove the brake pipe (18) and pipe clamps (15).
(5) Remove the nuts (28), washers (27) and bolts (19) that attach the fairing (20).
(6) Remove the fairing (20).
(7) Remove the screws (11) and (12) that attach the fairing (10).
(8) Remove the fairing (10).
(9) Remove the screw (5) and washer (4) that attach the earth strap (2) to the V- strut (17).
(11) Support both V-Struts.
WARNING: BEFORE YOU REMOVE THE ATTACHMENT BOLTS FOR THE V-STRUT
FITTING, MAKE SURE THAT THE V-STRUTS ARE SUPPORTED.
(12) Remove the nuts (21), washers (22), support angle (23), washers (25) and bolts (1).
(13) Move the support angle (23) clear of the V-Strut.
(14) Remove the V-Strut fitting (24).
(15) For the LH strut only, remove the expansion bush cam from the front pivot.
(16) Move the V-Strut (17) forward until the rear pivots are clear of the bearing fitting (6).
(17) Remove the V-Strut from the aircraft.
(1) Put the V-Strut in position.
(2) Engage the rear pivots of the V-Strut (17) in the bearing fitting (6).
(3) Install the V-Strut fitting (24) on the forward spigots of the V-Strut.
(4) Install the bolts (1) washers (25), support angle (23), washers (22) and nuts (21) that
attach the V-Strut fitting (23) to the aircraft structure.
(5) Install the washer (9) and nut (7).
(6) With the tube spanner, tighten the nut so that the V-Strut can move freely but without any
axial movement.
(8) For the LH strut only, install the expansion bush cam to the front pivot.
(9) Lubricate the bearing blocks (23) and (6) with grease (Material No. P04-002).
(10) Install the washer (4) and screw (5) that attach the earth strap (2) to the V-Strut (17).
(11) Put the brake pipe (18) in position.

CONFIG 2
Page 402
32-11-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(12) Install the screw (16), washers (13) and nuts (14) that attach the brake pipe clamps (15) to
the V-Strut (17).
(13) Remove the blanks from the open connections.
(14) Connect the flexible hose (3) at the brake pipe outlet connection (26).
(15) Put the fairing (10) in position and then install the screws (11) and (12).
(16) Put the fairing (20) in position and then install the bolts (19), washers (27) and nuts (28).
D. Job Close Up
(1) Install the shock strut (Ref. 32-11-12, Page Block 401).
(2) Install the brake unit (Ref. 32-42-11, Page Block 401).
(3) Install the wheel (Ref. 32-41-11, Page Block 401).
(4) Install the mudguard/stone guard as required (Ref. 32-11-13, Page Block 401).
(5) Install the step on the V-strut with the bolt, washer and nut.
(9) For the LH strut only, do an operational test of the horizontal-stabilizer trim warning system
(Ref. 31-57-00, Page Block 501).

CONFIG 2
Page 403
32-11-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A 7
A 6
8
1 9
28
27
10
26
5
4
25 11
3
24
12
23
22
21
20
18
19
17
16
13
14
15
6663
V-Strut - Removal / Installation

Figure 401

CONFIG 2
Page 404
32-11-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
V-STRUT - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. General
This topic gives the scheduled inspection procedures for the left and right V-struts. Separate
procedures are included for the:
• 100 hr / Annual Inspection

• Partial Overhaul
• Complete Overhaul
2. 100 hr / Annual Inspection
A. Procedure (Ref. Fig. 601)
(1) Examine the external structure of the V-strut for:
• Cracks, corrosion, scratches, nicks and deformation

• Deterioration of the surface finish
(2) When you do the inspection make sure you carefully examine the welded joint areas
indicated by the shaded areas on Figure 601.
(3) If you find damage that is more than 0,127 mm (0.005 in.) deep, reject the V-strut.
(4) If you find damage that is 0,127 mm (0.005 in.) deep or less, refer to Pilatus CMM 02270
for minor repair procedures.
3. Partial Overhaul
- Borescope
(2) Expendable Parts
32-11-11, Fig. 01 Cork Plug

P08-071 Sealant Post SB 170 only
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 601
32-11-11 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Procedure
(1) Remove the V-strut (Ref. 32-11-11, Page Block 401).
(2) Do the 100 hr / Annual Inspection procedure (Para. 2.).
(3) Do an inspection/check of the connecting pins:
(a) If the connecting pins are loose, reject the V-strut.
(b) If the diameter of the pivots on the connecting pins is less than 27,90 mm (1.099
in.):
(i) Replace the connecting pins (Ref. Pilatus CMM 02270).
(4) Examine the strut internally:
(a) Remove and discard the cork plug from the wheel axle.
(b) On aircraft with SB 170, remove the two screws from the top of each strut.
(c) Use a borescope to examine the V-strut internally for corrosion through the axle and
the two inspection holes in the top of the struts.
(d) If corrosion is found, use X-rays or ultrasonic methods to find the depth of the
corrosion.
(e) If the corrosion is more than 0,3 mm (0.01 in.) deep, reject the V-strut.
(f) On aircraft with SB 170, install the two screws in the top of each strut. Apply a bead
of sealant (Material No. P08-071) around each screw.
(g) Fill the strut with corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-005).
(h) Drain the fluid from the strut.
(i) Install a new cork plug in the wheel axle.
(5) Install the V-strut (Ref. 32-11-11, Page Block 401).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 602
32-11-11 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Complete Overhaul
P06-001 Penetrant
P06-002 Remover
P06-003 Developer
B. Procedure
(1) Remove the V-strut (Ref. 32-11-11, Page Block 401).
(2) Do the Partial Overhaul procedure (Para. 3).
(3) Crack detect the following areas with dye penetrant (Material Nos. P06-001, P06-002 and
P06-003):
• the wheel axle

• the welds on the upper cross-tube
• the fuselage attachments
• the shock strut attachment
(4) Examine the V-strut fittings installed on the fuselage:
(a) If cracks are found:
• Replace the fitting
(b) If the diameter of the connecting pin holes is more than 28,2 mm (1.11 in.):
• Replace or repair the fitting
NOTE: The fittings can be repaired by the installation of bushes (Ref. SRM)
(5) Install the V-strut (Ref. 32-11-11, Page Block 401).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 603
32-11-11 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CONNECTING
STRUT
GUIDE TUBE FOR

STEP ASSEMBLY
STRUT
SHOCK STRUT
ATTACHMENT LUG
CORK
PLUG
LH SHOWN SKI
(RH OPPOSITE) ATTACHMENT
BRACKETS
WHEEL AXLE
6791
V-strut - Inspection
Figure 601
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 604
32-11-11 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SHOCK STRUT - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
A. Expendable Parts

32-11-01, Fig 01 Cotter pin Qty. 2
32-11-01, Fig 01 Spacer washer 0,4 mm If required

P04-006 Grease
2. Procedure
A. Job Set Up
(1) Put a block below the mainwheel to support the V-strut.
(2) Disconnect the lower connection:
(a) Remove the cotter pin (9), the nut (8), the washer (7) and the bolt (12).
(b) Move the shock strut (6) and collect the spacer washer(s) (11) and the bush (10).
(c) Discard the cotter pin (9).
(3) Disconnect the upper connection:
(a) Support the shock strut (6).
(b) Remove the cotter pin (1), the nut (2), the special washer (3) the two washers (4)
and the bolt (5).
(c) Discard the cotter pin (1).
(4) Remove the shock strut (6) from the aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
32-11-12 Mar 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(1) Connect the upper connection:
(a) Lubricate the bolt (5) with grease (Material No. P04-006).
(b) Put the shock strut (6) in the installed position and install the bolt (5), the two
washers (4), the special washer (3) and the nut (2).
(c) Safety the nut (2) with a new cotter pin (1).
(2) Connect the lower connection:
(a) Lubricate the bush (10) and the bolt (12) with grease (Material No. P04-006).
(b) Install the bush (10).
CAUTION: A FLANGED BUSH IS INSTALLED IN THE LUG OF THE V-STRUT. YOU

MUST INSTALL THE SPACER WASHER(S) (11) ON THE SIDE OF THE
LUG OPPOSITE TO THE FLANGE.
(c) If you install the same shock strut as you removed, install the removed spacer
washer(s) (11), the bolt (12), the washer (7) and the nut (8).
(d) If you install a new shock strut, install spacer washer(s) (11) as necessary to remove
the play from the lower connection. Install the bolt (12), the washer (7) and the nut
(8).
(e) Safety the nut (8) with a new cotter pin (9).
D. Close Up
(1) Do a check of the hydraulic fluid level in the shock strut. Fill if necessary (Ref. 12-12-32,
Page Block 301).
(2) Remove the block from below the main wheel.
(5) After one hour, examine the shock strut for signs of hydraulic leaks. Leaks are not
permitted.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
32-11-12 Mar 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B
A
5
4
4
3
2
8
7
9
A
10
11
12
B
6685
Shock Strut - Removal / Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
32-11-12 Mar 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
32-11-12 Mar 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MUDGUARDS / STONE GUARDS - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This topic is gives the removal and installation procedures for the mudguards P/N 114.35.06.035/036
and the stone guards P/Ns 114.35.06.073/074 and 114.35.06.083/084.
A. Expendable Parts
32-75-01, Fig 01 Cotter pins Qty 2
3. Procedure
A. Job Set Up
(1) Make sure the aircraft is on firm and level ground.
(3) Remove the chocks as required for access.
(1) Remove and discard the cotter pins (3) and (4).
(2) Remove the nut (2).
(3) Give support to the mudguard/stone guard (1) and remove the bolt (10) and washer (9).
(4) Remove the nut (5) and the washer (6).
(5) Remove the hollow bolt (8) and the guard plate (7).
(6) Remove the mudguard/stone guard (1).
(1) Hold the mudguard/stone guard (1) in the installed position.
(2) Install the guard plate (7) and the hollow bolt (8).
(3) Install the washer (6) and the nut (5).
(4) Install the bolt (10), the washer (9) and the nut (2).
EFFECTIVITY: Mudguards P/N 114.35.06.035/36

Stone guards P/N 114.35.06.073/074 CONFIG 1
Stone guards P/N 114.35.06.083/084 Page 401
32-11-13 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Job Close Up
(1) Put the chocks in position.
(2) Release the park brake.

32-11-13 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10
9
B
B
MUDGUARD SHOWN
STONE GUARD SIMILAR
5
4
1
SB 2187
Mudguards / Stone Guards - Removal / Installation

Figure 401

32-11-13 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

32-11-13 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MUDGUARDS / STONE GUARDS - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This topic gives the removal and installation procedures for the stone guards P/N 14.35.06.115/116.
A. Expendable Parts
32-75-01, Fig 01 Cotter pins Qty 2
3. Procedure
A. Job Set Up
(1) Make sure the aircraft is on firm and level ground.
(3) Remove the chocks as required for access.
(1) Remove and discard the cotter pins (3) and (5).
(2) Remove the nut (2) and washer (4).
(3) Give support to the stone guard (1) and remove the bolt (10).
(4) Remove the nut (6) and the washer (7).
(5) Remove the hollow bolt (9) and the guard plate (8).
(6) Remove the stone guard (1).
(1) Hold the stone guard (1) in the installed position.
(2) Install the guard plate (8) and the hollow bolt (9).
(4) Install the bolt (10), the washer (4) and the nut (2).
EFFECTIVITY: Stone Guards P/N 14.35.06.115/116

CONFIG 2
Page 401
32-11-13 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Job Close Up
(1) Put the chocks in position.
(2) Release the park brake.

CONFIG 2
Page 402
32-11-13 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10
6
B
5
4 1
3
2 SB 2189
Stone Guards - Removal / Installation

Figure 401

CONFIG 2
Page 403
32-11-13 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CONFIG 2
Page 404
32-11-13 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WHEELS AND BRAKES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. Description
A. Main Wheels and Tyres
The magnesium alloy main wheels are of the divided hub type with the two halves attached with
bolts.
Each hub half has a tapered roller bearing installed. The hardened steel outer cup is press
installed in a machined recess in the hub half casting.
The outer rim of the inboard hub half of each main wheel has hardened steel torque keys
installed. These are press installed in to recesses in the hub half and locked with screws. These
torque keys engage in slots in the wheel brake disk.
Two sizes of main wheel can be installed:
• A standard wheel with a 24 x 7.7 tubed tyre

• A larger wheel with a 11.00 - 12 low-pressure tubed tyre
B. Tail Wheel and Tyre
The aluminium alloy tail wheel is of the divided hub type with the two hub halves attached with
studs and nuts.
Each hub half has a tapered roller bearing installed. The steel outer cup of each bearing is a
press fit in a machined recess in the hub casting.
The wheel is installed on to a hollow axle. The wheel axle assembly is then put between the rear
fork of the trailing arm and is attached by a bolt and nut.
The tail wheel has a 5.00 x 4 tubed tyre.
C. Brakes
The aircraft has a hydraulically operated brake system which is mechanically actuated and
operates on each main wheel (Ref. 32-42-00, Page Block 1).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
32-40-00 Nov 30/03
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAIN WHEEL - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
A. Expendable Parts
32-41-01, 01 Cotter pin
P04-003 Grease
or
P04-031 Grease Recommended
2. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) Lift the aircraft on jacks until the main wheel is off the ground (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block
201).
(2) Deflate the tyre to 0,14 bar (2 psi).
(1) Remove the retaining ring (6).
(2) Remove the dust cap (5).
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE ROLLER BEARING DOES NOT FALL OUT WHEN THE
WHEEL IS REMOVED.
(4) Remove the wheel (1) from the axle.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
32-41-11 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: DO NOT MIX DIFFERENT TYPES OF GREASE. IF THE ORIGINAL GREASE IS TO BE

REPLACED WITH A NEW TYPE OF GREASE, MAKE SURE THE BEARINGS ARE
COMPLETELY CLEAN BEFORE PACKING WITH THE NEW GREASE.
(1) Lubricate the wheel axle (2) and axle thread with grease (Material No. P04-003 or
P04-031).
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE ROLLER BEARING DOES NOT FALL OUT WHEN THE
WHEEL IS FITTED.
(2) Make sure the wheel bearings (8) are correctly installed. Lubricate with grease (Material
No. P04-003 or P04-031).
(3) Install the wheel on to the wheel axle (2).
(4) Engage the disc keyways to the drive keys on the wheel.
(5) Install the washer (7) and wheel nut (4).
(6) Turn the wheel and tighten the nut (4) until the wheel has no play.
(7) Loosen the wheel nut 1/6 of a turn so that cotter pin hole is accessible for cotter pin
installation.
(8) Safety the wheel nut with a new cotter pin (3).
(9) Install the dust cap (5) and the retaining ring (6).
D. Job Close Up
(1) Inflate the tyre to the correct pressure (Ref. 12-14-32, Page Block 301).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
32-41-11 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. WHEEL
A
8. ROLLER BEARING
2. AXLE
7. WASHER
4. NUT
3. COTTER PIN
5. DUST CAP
6. RETAINING RING
6219
Main Wheel - Removal / Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
32-41-11 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
32-41-11 Sep 30/07
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAIL WHEEL - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
P04-003 Grease
or
P04-031 Grease Recommended
2. Procedure
A. Job Set Up
(4) Lift the aircraft on a jack until the tail wheel is off the ground (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block
201).
(5) Deflate the tire to 0,14 bar (2 psi).
(1) Remove the nut (9), washer (10) and distance piece (8).
(2) Support the wheel (5).
(3) Remove the bolt (2) and distance piece (3) from the axle (4) and remove the wheel from
the trailing arm (1).
(4) Remove the locknut (7), axle nut (6) and axle (4) from the wheel (5).
CAUTION: DO NOT MIX DIFFERENT TYPES OF GREASE. IF THE ORIGINAL GREASE IS TO BE

REPLACED WITH A NEW TYPE OF GREASE, MAKE SURE THE BEARINGS ARE
COMPLETELY CLEAN BEFORE PACKING WITH THE NEW GREASE.
(1) Lubricate the axle (4), bolt (2) and wheel attachment points on the trailing arm (1) with
grease (Material No. P04-003 or P04-031).
(2) Make sure the wheel bearings are in place. Lubricate with grease (Material No. P04-003 or
P04-031).
(3) Put the axle (4) in position in the wheel (5).
(4) Put the axle nut (6) on to the axle (4) and tighten by hand until contact is made with the
wheel bearing.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
32-41-12 Mar 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Put the locknut (7) on the axle (4), but do not tighten the locknut (7) at this time.
(6) Put the wheel in position with the tire inflation valve on the right side as you look forward.
(7) Put the distance pieces (3) and (8) in position and install the bolt (2).
(9) Tighten the nut (9) until the wheel axle does not turn.
(10) Turn the wheel and tighten the axle nut (6) until the wheel does not turn freely.
(11) Loosen the axle nut (6).
(12) Turn the wheel (5) and tighten axle nut (6) so that there is no play in the bearings.
(13) Hold the axle nut (6) and tighten the locknut (7) on to the axle nut (6).
D. Job Close Up
(1) Inflate the tire to the correct pressure (Ref. 12-14-32, Page Block 301).
(2) Lower the aircraft tail and remove the jack (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
32-41-12 Mar 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. BOLT
A
1. TRAILING ARM
10. WASHER
9. NUT 3. DISTANCE
PIECE
4. AXLE
5. WHEEL
6. AXLE NUT
7. LOCKNUT
6217
8. DISTANCE PIECE
Tail Wheel - Removal / Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
32-41-12 Mar 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
32-41-12 Mar 30/08
'ePILATUS!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BRAKES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
A hydraulically operated brake system is installed in the aircraft. The brake system operates a brake
assembly installed on each wheel and is operated by brake pedals installed on the rudder bar
assembly.
The brake system has the following components:
Master cylinder, brake assembly, brake disc and parking brake.
Aircraft with dual systems have master cylinders and pedals installed on the co-pilots position. Dual
systems have shuttle valves installed to connect the brake lines and to make a single brake line to each
brake assembly.
Park brake valves and a remote reservoir, with a distribution piece, are also installed. On some aircraft,
the reservoir and the park brake valve are contained in the master cylinder.
A. Master Cylinder
The master cylinders are installed on the rudder bar assembly. The piston of each master
cylinder is attached to the fixed top bar of the assembly and the cylinder body is attached to one
arm of a bell-crank lever. The brake pedal forms the other arm of the bell-crank.
B. Reservoir
The brake system has either an external reservoir installed on the pilots rudder control assembly
or, a reservoir which is part of the master cylinder.
With an external reservoir, hydraulic fluid is supplied to the brake master cylinder through the
distribution piece.
C. Shuttle Valve
Aircraft with dual systems have shuttle valves installed where the left and right brake pipes make
a single brake line to the wheel brake unit. They are installed to the cockpit floor brackets found
below the pilots rudder bar assembly.
D. Brake Assembly
The brake unit is machined from magnesium alloy and bolted to the torque flange on the V-strut
axle. It is equipped with an inlet port on the right or left side and can be installed on either side of
the aircraft.
The brake assembly contains a rotating steel disc which is keyed to rotate with the wheel.
Aircraft without SB104 have single cylinder brake units. Aircraft with SB104 have dual cylinder
brake units.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
32-42-00 Mar 14/98
'e Pl LATUS !5!lF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Brake Disc
A steel disc is installed at each brake unit. When the wheel is installed, the disc is keyed to the
wheel so that it rotates with the wheel.
The disc rotates between two brake linings to give brake action when the brakes are applied. The
disc is allowed to move laterally to make sure that there is equal pressure on both brake linings
and to compensate for lining wear.
F. Parking Brake
Where an external reservoir is installed, two park brake valves are installed on to the pilots
rudder pedal assembly. One valve is positioned in each fluid supply line to the associated wheel
brake units.
An integral park brake is installed to each master cylinder which has an integral reservoir.
With the brake pedals pushed in, the master cylinders move up and cause the piston in each cylinder to
travel down. As a result, pressure is increased and closes the circular plate valve. This forces hydraulic
fluid through the brake lines to the disc brakes. When pressure is released from the pedals, the spring,
acting against the head of the piston, pushes the cylinder down and opens the circular plate valve. This
lets the fluid return to the reservoir.
On dual systems, the pilots and co-pilots brake systems are connected with shuttle valves. When the
pilot operates the brakes, pressure builds up within the system and hydraulic fluid moves the shuttle to
open the brake line to the brake unit. The co-pilot can override the pilots braking by use of a greater
force to the brake pedals. When brake pressure is released, hydraulic fluid flows back into the reservoir
located on the top of the pilots rudder bar support.
To apply the park brake, the pilots brake pedals are operated, the park brake handle is pulled and then
the brake pedals are released. The system is released when the pilots brakes are applied, the park
brake handle is pushed in and then the brake pedals are released.
EF FECTIVITY: All
Page 2
32-42-00 Mar 14/98
'ePILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RESERVOIR
CROSS-FEED HOSE
DISTRIBUTOR
PILOTS SIDE CO-PILOTS SIDE
PARK BRAKE CABLES
SHUTTLE VALVES
BRAKE UNITS
Brakes Schematic - Description and Operation

Figure 1
EFFECTIVITV: All
Page 3
32-42-00 Mar 14/98
�PILATUS5'"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BRAKES - INSPECTION/CHECK
6690.0043.00 Gage For twin piston units only

Micrometer
Vernier Callipers
A. Brake lining wear
(1) Set the park brake to on.
(2) On twin piston brake units:
(a) Try to insert the gage between the face of the disc (2) and the flat surface of the
brake unit (1). Replace the brake linings if the gage can be inserted.
(b) If the gage is not available, measure the dimension between the face of the disc (2)
and the flat surface of the brake unit (1) . Replace the brake linings if the dimension
is more than 9,52 mm (0.375 in.).
(3) On single piston brake units:
(a) Measure the dimension between the face of the disc (2) and the flat surface of the
brake unit (1 ). Replace the brake linings if the dimension is more than 4,8 mm
(0.188 in.).
B. Disc wear
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE THE BRAKE SYSTEM WHEN THE BRAKE LININGS HAVE
BEEN REMOVED. MAKE SURE THAT THE BRAKE UNIT PISTONS ARE HELD
IN POSITION WHEN THE BRAKE DISC IS REMOVED.
(2) Remove the brake disc.
(3) Check the brake disc for dishing:
(a) If the dishing is more than 1,58 mm (0.06 in.) - Reject the disc .
(4) Measure the thickness of the disc. If the thickness is less than the following - Reject the
disc:
(a) For twin piston units - 5,7 mm (0.225 in.).
(b) For single piston units - 7,1 mm (0.280 in.).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 601
32-42-00 May 14/95
�PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Measure the width of each keyway:
(a) If the width is more than 30,2 mm (1.188 in.) - Reject the disc.
(6) Put the brake disc between the brake linings.
(7) Install the main wheel (Ref. 32-41-11, Page Block 401) .
3. Close Up
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 602
32-42-00 Mar 14/95
wPILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. BRAKE UNIT
MAXIMUM DIMENSION:
TWIN PISTON UNITS - 9,52 MM (0.375 IN.)
SINGLE PISTON UNITS -4,8 MM (0.188 IN.)
MINIMUM THICKNESS:
TWIN PISTON UNITS - 5,7 MM (0.225 IN.)
MAXIMUM DISHING: SINGLE PISTON UNITS - 7, 1 MM (0.280 IN.)
BRAKE DISC
LcLt-i---r--\-�· ---------___,� _J_

1,58 MM (0.06 IN.)
1 \JI
MAXIMUM WIDTH 30,2 MM (1.1881N.) -I �

6256
Brake System - Inspection/Check

Figure 601
EFFECTIVITY: All
32-42-00
Page603
Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BRAKE UNIT - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
The LH and RH brake units are interchangeable.
There are two procedures to attach the brake unit. The usual procedure has six bolts, 12 washers, six
castellated nuts and six cotter pins. The alternative procedure has six bolts, 12 washers and six
self-locking nuts. The alternative procedure is recommended.
A. Expendable Parts
32-42-11, Fig. 01 Sealing Ring (Gasket) Fig 401, Item 3

32-42-11, Fig. 01 Sealing Ring (Gasket) Fig 401, Item 5
32-42-01, Fig. 01 Cotter pin (For castellated nuts Fig 401, Item 7
only, 6 are required for each unit)
P02-001 Lockwire
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(3) Drain the applicable brake system (Ref. 12-12-32, Page Block 301).
(1) Remove and discard the lockwire from the adaptor (4).
(2) Disconnect the brake pipe (1) from the adaptor (4).
(3) Install blanks to the open connections.
(4) Remove the brake disc (10) from between the brake linings of the brake unit (6).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
32-42-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) If the alternative attaching parts are installed:
(a) Remove the six self-locking nuts (8), the twelve washers (9) and the six bolts (11)
that attach the brake unit (6) to the axle flange.
(6) If the usual attaching parts are installed:
(a) Remove and discard the six cotter pins (7).
(b) Remove the six castellated nuts (8), the twelve washers (9) and the six bolts (11)
that attach the brake unit (6) to the axle flange.
(7) Remove the brake unit (6).
(1) If a replacement brake unit is to be installed:
(a) Remove the bolt (2) and the adaptor (4) from the brake unit (6).
(b) Remove and discard the gaskets (3) and (5) from the adaptor (4).
(c) Install new gaskets (3) and (5) to the adaptor (4).
CAUTION: THE ADAPTOR MUST BE INSTALLED TO THE TOP POSITION OF THE

REPLACEMENT BRAKE UNIT
(d) Loosely install the adaptor (4) with the bolt (2), at the top position on the
replacement brake unit.
(2) Put the brake unit (6) in position on the axle flange.
(3) If the alternative attaching parts are to be installed:
(a) Install the six bolts (11), the twelve washers (9) and the six self-locking nuts (8) that
attach the brake unit (6) to the axle flange.
(b) Torque the nuts (8) to between 3,4 and 4,5 Nm (30 and 40 lb in.).
(4) If the usual attaching parts are installed:
(a) Install the six bolts (11), the twelve washers (9) and the six castellated nuts (8) that
attach the brake unit (6) to the axle flange.
(b) Torque the nuts (8) to between 3,4 and 4,5 Nm (30 and 40 lbf in.).
CAUTION: WHEN YOU DO STEP (C), IF THE CASTELLATED NUTS (8) NEED TO BE
ALIGNED WITH THE COTTER PIN HOLE, MAKE SURE THAT THE
TORQUE VALUE IS NOT MORE THAN THAT GIVEN.
(c) Safety the nuts (8) with new cotter pins (7).
(5) Put the disc (10) between the brake linings of the brake unit (6).
(6) Remove the blanks from the brake pipe and the adaptor.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
32-42-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Connect the brake pipe (1) to the adaptor (4).
(8) Tighten the adaptor bolt (2).
D. Close Up
(1) Install the main wheel (Ref. 32-41-11, Page Block 401).
(2) Fill and bleed the brake system (Ref. 12-12-32, Page Block 301).
(3) Examine the brake unit and connections for leaks.
(4) Safety the adaptor and the bleed valve assembly with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
32-42-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. BRAKE PIPE 2. BOLT
3. GASKET
4. ADAPTOR
5. GASKET
6. BRAKE
UNIT
11. BOLT
A 9. WASHER
7. COTTER PIN
9. WASHER
8. NUT
10. DISC
6. BRAKE
UNIT
ALTERNATIVE 8. NUT
(PREFERRED)
METHOD OF 9. WASHER
ATTACHMENT 11. BOLT
9. WASHER
6644
10. DISC
Brake Unit - Removal / Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
32-42-11 Jul 30/15
'1!!!P
! ILATUSE.F"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SHUTTLE VALVE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
A. Expendable Parts
401 -04 Gasket

401 -05 0-ring
401 -10 0-rlng
401 -11 Gasket
401 -15 0-ring
B. Referenced Procedures
12-12-32 Landing Gear - Servicing
2. Job Set Up
A. Drain the applicable brake system (Ref. 12-12-32, Page Block 301).
B. Remove the access panel FB1.
A. Disconnect the following brake pipe and flexible hoses from the shuttle valve and plug the
openings.
(1) Outlet brake pipe (20).
NOTE: Access is gained through access panel FB1.
(2) Inlet hose (1) from the pilots system.
(3) Inlet hose (13) from the co-pilots system.
B. Remove the nuts (22), washers (21), bolts (9) and spacers (8). Remove th e shuttle valve (6).
A. Transfer the following items to the replacement shuttle valve:
NOTE: Make a note of the angle position of the elbows.
(1) 45 deg. elbow (14). Install a new gasket (11) on to the nut (12). Install a new 0-ring (10).
(2) 90 deg. elbow (2). Install a new gasket (4) on to the nut (3). Install a new 0-ring (5).
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with dual brake system.
Page 401
32-42-12 Jun 14/91
"5PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Install the spacer {18), washer (17) and nut (16) on to the union {19). Install union with a
new 0-ring (15).
B. Make sure the nuts (3), (12) and (16) are tight.
C. Put the shuttle valve (6) In to position.
D. Install the bolts (9), spacers (8), washers (21), and nuts (22) to attach the shuttle valve (6) to the
mounting bracket (7).
E. Remove the plugs from the brake pipe and the flexible hoses.
F. Connect the following brake pipe and flexible hoses to the shuttle valve:
(1) Outlet brake pipe {20).
(2) Inlet hose (1) from pilots system.
(3) Inlet hose (14) from co-pilots system.
5. Close Up
A. Fill and bleed the brake system (Ref. 12-12-32, Page Block 301).
B. Check the shuttle valve connections for leaks.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with dual brake system.
Page 402
32-42-12 Jun 14/91
•PILATUSIF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. INLET HOSE
2. 90 DEG. ELBOW
9. BOLT
8. SPACER
22. NUT
14. 45 DEG. ELBOW
SPACER
6248
==��duu;aall brake
--Aircraft wIth
----
EFFECTIVITV: I system.
Page403
32-42-12 Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This task gives the procedure to remove and install the brake master cylinder. There are two types of
master cylinder. There is the master cylinder with an isolated reservoir and the master cylinder with an
internal reservoir.
For the master cylinder with:
• An isolated reservoir, refer to Para. 3.B.(1) and Para. 3.C.(1)

• An internal reservoir, refer to Para. 3.B.(2) and Para. 3.C.(2).
A. Expendable Parts
32-42-01, Fig. 01 Cotter pin (Qty 2) Isolated reservoir, Fig. 401,

32-42-02, Fig. 01 Items 2 and 13
Cotter pin (Qty 2) Internal reservoir, Fig. 402,
Ref. Note <1>
Items 2 and 15
O-ring seal Internal reservoir, Fig. 402,
Ref. Note <1>
Item 18
NOTE: <1> Pilatus spares for the configuration with internal reservoir (Ref. Fig. 402) are no
longer procurable. For expendable parts details for removal/installation of the brake
master cylinder with internal reservoir contact Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.
P04-011 Spray lubricant

3. Procedure
A. Job Set Up
(1) Drain the applicable wheel brake system (Ref. 12-12-32, Page Block 301).
B. Removal
(1) Master Cylinder with an Isolated Reservoir (Ref. Fig. 401)
(a) Disconnect the inlet hose (16) and outlet hose (14).
(b) Remove and discard the cotter pin (2).
(c) Remove the washers (1), clevis pin (17) and disconnect the fork-end of the master
cylinder (8).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
32-42-13 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Remove and discard the cotter pin (13).
(e) Remove the washers (9), clevis pin (10) and the master cylinder (8).
(f) Install blanking caps on all of the open connections.
(2) Master Cylinder with an Internal Reservoir (Ref. Fig. 402)
(a) Disconnect the outlet hose (16).
(b) If a dual system is installed, disconnect the hose (3).
(c) If installed, remove the nut (4), washer (5) and screw (6) and disconnect the park
brake cable (20).
(e) Remove the washer (1), clevis pin (19) and disconnect the fork-end of the master
cylinder (7).
(f) Remove and discard the cotter pin (15).
(g) Remove the washer (14), clevis pin (13) and the master cylinder (7).
(h) Install blanking caps on all of the open connections.
C. Installation
(1) Master Cylinder with an Isolated Reservoir (Ref. Fig. 401)
(a) Do a check of the brake pedal to make sure that it moves easily and freely.
(b) Remove the adapters (12) and (15) from the removed master cylinder (8).
(c) Install the adapters (12) and (15) on the new master cylinder (8).
(d) Lubricate the clevis pins (10) and (17) with spray lubricant (Material No. P04-011).
(e) Put the master cylinder (8) in position and install the clevis pin (10) and washers (9).
(f) Safety the clevis pin (10) with a new cotter pin (13).
(g) Fully extend the piston rod (4) of the master cylinder (8).
(h) Measure the dimension ‘X‘, between the center of the holes for the clevis pins (10)
and (17).
NOTE: The dimension ‘X‘ must be 205 mm (8,07 in.), ± ½ turn of the fork-end.
(i) Move the brake pedal (11) and measure dimension ‘Y‘, between the brake lever (3)
and the rudder bar (7).
NOTE: The dimension ‘Y‘ must be between 0,2 to 0,5 mm (0,008 to 0,02 in.).
(j) If necessary, loosen the locknut (5) and adjust the fork-end (6) to align the holes for
the clevis pin (17). Tighten the locknut (5).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
32-42-13 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(k) Temporarily install the clevis pin (17).
(l) Remove all unwanted lubricant.
(m) Remove all of the blanking caps.
(n) Connect the inlet hose (16).
CAUTION: HOLD THE OUTLET HOSE WHEN YOU TIGHTEN THE FITTING TO THE
CYLINDER. IF THE HOSE BECOMES TWISTED, THE CORRECT
FUNCTION OF THE BRAKE SYSTEM CAN BE AFFECTED.
(o) Connect the outlet hose (14).
(p) Make sure the clevis pin (17) can be easily removed.
(q) If the clevis pin (17) cannot be easily removed:
(i) Disconnect the outlet hose (14).
(ii) Make sure the outlet hose (14) is not twisted.
(iii) Connect the outlet hose (14) and make sure the clevis pin (17) can be easily
removed.
(r) Install the clevis pin (17) and washers (1).
(s) Safety the clevis pin (17) with a new cotter pin (2).
(t) Do a check of the brake pedal (11) to make sure that it moves the complete range
and that the movement is free.
(u) Make sure that the master cylinder is fully extended with no load on the pedal.
(2) Master Cylinder with an Internal Reservoir (Ref. Fig. 402)
(a) Do a check of the brake pedal to make sure that it moves easily and freely.
(b) If you replace the master cylinder (7):
(i) Remove the adapter (17) from the removed master cylinder (7).
(ii) Remove and discard the O-ring seal (18).
(iii) Use clean hydraulic fluid (Material No. P10-017) and lubricate the new
O-ring seal (18).
(iv) Install the new O-ring seal (18) on the adapter (17).
(c) Lubricate the clevis pins (13) and (19) with spray lubricant (Material No. P04-011).
(d) Put the master cylinder (7) in position and install the clevis pin (13) and washer (14).
(e) Safety the clevis pin (13) with a new cotter pin (15).
(f) Fully extend the piston rod (9) of the master cylinder (7).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
32-42-13 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(g) Measure the dimension ‘X‘, between the center of the holes for the clevis pins (13)
and (19).
NOTE: The dimension ‘X‘ must be 205 mm (8,07 in.), ± ½ turn of the fork-end.
(h) Move the brake pedal (10) and measure dimension ‘Y‘, between the brake lever (11)
and the rudder bar (12).
NOTE: The dimension ‘Y‘ must be between 0,2 to 0,5 mm (0,008 to 0,02 in.).
(i) If necessary, adjust the fork-end (8) to align the holes for the clevis pin (19).
(j) Temporarily install the clevis pin (19).
(k) Remove all unwanted lubricant.
(l) Remove all of the blanking caps.
CAUTION: HOLD THE OUTLET HOSE WHEN YOU TIGHTEN THE FITTING TO THE
CYLINDER. IF THE HOSE BECOMES TWISTED, THE CORRECT
FUNCTION OF THE BRAKE SYSTEM CAN BE AFFECTED.
(m) Connect the outlet hose (16).
(n) Make sure the clevis pin (19) can be easily removed.
(i) Disconnect the outlet hose (16).
(ii) Make sure the outlet hose (16) is not twisted.
(iii) Connect the outlet hose (16) and make sure the clevis pin (19) can be easily
removed.
(o) Install the clevis pin (19) and washer (1).
(p) Safety the clevis pin (19) with a new cotter pin (2).
(q) If a dual system is installed, connect the hose (3).
(r) If necessary, put the park brake cable (20) in position and install the bolt (6),
washer (5) and nut (4).
(s) Do a check of the brake pedal (10) to make sure that it moves the complete range
and that the movement is free.
(t) Make sure that the master cylinder is fully extended with no load on the pedal.
D. Close Up
(1) Fill and bleed the brake system (Ref. 12-12-32, Page Block 301).
(2) Do a check of the master cylinder and connections for signs of leaks. No leaks are
acceptable.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
32-42-13 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6
5
A X
A
2
1
17
16
15
14 13
12
11
10
6253
Brake Master Cylinder, Isolated Reservoir - Removal / Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 405
32-42-13 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2
1
20
19
B
16
17
18
15
7
A
C
14
13
6
X
10
4 5
3
11
C B
12 DUAL SYSTEM ONLY
6254
Brake Master Cylinder, Internal Reservoir - Removal / Installation

Figure 402
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 406
32-42-13 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PARK BRAKE VALVE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This task gives the procedure to remove and install the park brake valves. This procedure is only
applicable to systems with separate park brake valves.
A. Expendable Parts
32-44-01, Fig. 01 Gasket Ref. Fig. 401, Item 5

32-44-01, Fig. 01 Gasket Ref. Fig. 401, Item 11
P04-011 Spray lubricant
3. Procedure
A. Job Set Up
(1) Drain the applicable brake system (Ref. 12-12-32, Page Block 301).
(1) Loosen the locknut (14) and the screw (15). Remove the inner cable (16).
(2) Disconnect the hose (19).
(3) Disconnect the hose (3).
(4) Remove the nuts (8), washers (9) and bolts (1). Remove the park brake valve (7).
(5) Install blanking caps on the open ends of the hoses (3) and (19) and the openings of the
park brake valve (7).
(1) If you need to replace the park brake valve (7), transfer the items that follow to the
replacement park brake valve (7):
(a) Transfer the 90° elbow (2) and locknut (4) and install a new O-ring seal (6) and a
new gasket (5).
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with remote reservoir systems.
Page 401
32-42-14 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Transfer the 45° elbow (13) and locknut (12) and install a new O-ring seal (10) and a
new gasket (11). Make sure that you install the 45° elbow (13) at 45° off-center as
shown (Ref. Fig. 401).
(c) For alternative configuration of the left park vale (7), transfer the union (18) and
install a new O-ring seal (17).
(2) Examine the park brake control cable for freedom of movement.
(3) Lubricate the inner cable (16) with spray lubricant (Material No. P04-011).
(4) Put the park brake valve (7) in to position and install the bolts (1), washers (9) and nuts (8).
(5) Insert the inner cable (16) through the cable clamp.
(6) Adjust the park brake cable as follows:
(a) Make sure that the park brake handle is fully pushed in.
(b) Push down on the park brake actuating lever and pull the inner cable (16) tight.
(c) Tighten the screw (15) to lock the inner cable (16). Tighten the locknut (14).
(7) Remove the blanking caps from the open ends of the hoses (3) and (19) and the openings
of the park brake valve (7).
(8) Connect the hose (3).
(9) Connect the hose (19).
4. Close Up
A. Fill and bleed the applicable wheel brake system (Ref. 12-12-32, Page Block 301).
B. Examine the park brake valve for leaks. No leaks are acceptable.
Page 402
32-42-14 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A B
D C
19
A
18
17
13 2
2 12
2 11 16
10 2 15
14 1
C 13
LEFT VALVE SHOWN

ONLY 12
11
10
9
8
7 6 7
5
13 3
4
B
45°
RIGHT VALVE SHOWN
LEFT VALVE SIMILAR 1
NOTE:
1 THERE ARE TWO VALVES
INSTALLED ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE AIRCRAFT
FOR BOTH SINGLE AND DUAL SYSTEMS.
ALTERNATIVE CONFIGURATION
6859
2
FOR LEFT VALVE ONLY.
Park Brake Valve - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
Page 403
32-42-14 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 404
32-42-14 Feb 28/20
'5PILATUSIF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BRAKE LININGS- REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING: DO NOT MIX OLD AND NEW BRAKE LININGS.
A. Referenced Procedures
07-10-00 Jacking - Maintenance Practices

32-41-11 Main Wheel - Removal/Installation
32-42-00 Brake System - Inspection/Check
2. Job Set Up
A. Lift the aircraft on jacks until the main wheel clears the ground (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
B. Remove the main wheel (Ref. 32-41-11, Page Block 401).
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE THE BRAKE SYSTEM WHEN THE BRAKE LININGS HAVE BEEN
REMOVED. MAKE SURE THAT THE BRAKE UNIT PISTONS ARE HELD IN POSITION
WHEN THE BRAKE DISC IS REMOVED.
A. On aircraft with SB104A (Twin piston brake unit)
(1) Move the disc (1) from between the brake linings (4) and (5). Remove the disc (1) from
the axle (2).
(2) Put a flat screw driver between the worn brake linings and retract each piston.
(3) Remove the brake linings (4) and (5) from the brake unit (3).
B. On aircraft without SB104A (Single piston brake unit)
(1) Move the disc (10) from between the brake linings (7) and (8). Remove the disc (10) from
the axle.
(2) Put a flat screw driver between worn brake linings and retract the piston.
(3) Remove the brake linings (7) and (8) from the brake unit (6).
EFFECTIVITV: All
Page 401
32-42-15 Jun 14/91
�PILATUS!P'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Installation {Ref. Fig. 401)
A. Check thewidth of the keyways and the disc for dishing and thickness (Ref. 32-42-00, Page
Block601).
B. On aircraft with SB104A {Twin piston brake units)
(1) Install the new brake linings (4) and (5). Put the thick linings (4) on the piston side and the
thin linings (5) on the anvil side.
NOTE: The smooth face of the linings mustface thebrake disc.
(2) Put the brake disc (1) in position.
C. On aircraft without SB 104A (Single piston brake units)
(1) Install the new brake linings (7) and (8). Put the thick lining (7) on thepiston side and the
thin lining (8) on the anvil side.
NOTE: The smooth face of the linings must face thebrake disc.
(2) Put the brake disc (1O) in position.
5. Close Up
A. Install the main wheel (Ref. 32-41-11, Page Block 401).
B. Apply thewheel brake to hold the brake disc between the brake linings. Release thebrake;
make sure that the wheel is free to turn.
C. Lower the aircraft and remove thejacks (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block201).
D. Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page402
32-42-15 Jun14/91
"'EPILATUSE"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. BRAKE UNIT
1. DISC
'!) .
...,,.
\\
>-�-�\
TWIN PISTON BRAKE UNIT
(�
l � 4 B LJNING
5. BRAKE LINING
8. BRAKE LINING
SINGLE PISTON BRAKE UNIT
6242
Brake Linings - Removal/Installation

Figure401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page403
32-42-15 Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAIL LANDING-GEAR STEERING-CABLE - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This procedure is applicable to the LH and RH steering cables.
- Tensiometer
- Chocks
B. Expendable Parts
27-22-01, Fig. 01 Cotter pin

- Locking clip, Turnbuckle (Qty 2) P/N 940.17.29.401
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(3) Put wheel chocks in position and lift the aircraft on jacks (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
(4) Move the rudder pedals so that the rudder and tail wheel are in the center position.
(5) Move the tailwheel handle, located on the left side of the pilots seat, to lock mode.
(1) Disconnect the steering cables (18):
(a) For aircraft without a turnbuckle installed in the steering cable:
(i) Remove and discard the cotter pins (8).
(ii) Remove the nuts (7) and washers (6).
(iii) Pull rearwards on the steering cable (18) and remove the bolts (5).
(b) For aircraft with a turnbuckle installed in the steering cable:
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
32-51-11 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(i) Remove and discard the locking clips, then loosen the turnbuckle.
(ii) Remove and discard the cotter pins (8).
(iii) Remove the nuts (7) and washers (6).
(iv) Remove the bolts (5).
(2) Remove the nuts (4), washers (3), bolts (1) and remove the guide (2).
(3) Release the side rudder cable tension.
(4) Remove the cotter pin (13), nut (14), washer (15) and bolt (16) and remove the cable and
cable tensioning assembly (12) from the aircraft. Discard the cotter pin.
(5) Remove the nuts (17) from the shackle (9).
WARNING: DO NOT LOOSEN OR TIGHTEN THE CENTER TIE ROD NUTS ON THE CABLE
TENSIONING ASSEMBLY.
(6) Remove the shackle (9) from the cable tensioning assembly (12).
(7) Remove the shackle (9) from the eye of the cable (18).
(1) Put the shackle (9) through the eye of the cable (18).
(2) Install the shackle (9) to the cable tensioning assembly (12) with the nuts (17).
(3) Put the cable tensioning assembly (12) in position and install the bolt (16), washer (15),
nut (14) and a new cotter pin (13).
(4) Put the guide (2) in position and install the bolts (1), washers (3) and nuts (4).
(5) Do the rudder system adjustment procedure (Ref. 27-20-00, Page Block 501).
(6) Install the bolt (5), washer (6), nut (7) and a new cotter pin (8).
(7) Make sure that the tailwheel handle, located on the left side of the pilots seat, is set to lock.
(8) Adjust the tail landing gear steering cable so that the lock lever finger points along the
aircraft longitudinal axis.
(9) Adjust the steering cable tension:
(a) For aircraft without a turnbuckle installed in the steering cable - adjust the nuts (11)
and (17) to give a cable tension of 15.0 ± 2 Kg (33 lb ± 4.5 lb).
(b) For aircraft with a turn buckle installed in the steering cable - adjust the turnbuckle to
give a cable tension of 15.0 ± 2 Kg (33 lb ± 4.5 lb) and install two new locking clips.
(10) Engage the tail wheel steering and press down the right rudder pedal. Make sure that the
tail wheel moves to the right.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
32-51-11 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Close Up
(2) Lower the aircraft and remove the jack and chocks (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
32-51-11 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B 7
4
A
D 3
2 A
18
C
D
B
16
17 C
15 10
14
13
12
11
6243
Tail Landing Gear Steering Cables - Removal / Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
32-51-11 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAIL LANDING-GEAR STEERING-LOCK CABLE - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedures to remove and install the aft inner bowden cable that operates
the steering lock on the tail landing gear.
NOTE: The new inner bowden cable is supplied as part of the terminal cable.
- Soldering equipment
- Chocks
B. Expendable Parts
32-52-01, Fig. 01/235 Locking clip, turnbuckle Ref. Fig. 401, Item 1
32-52-01, Fig. 01/240 Terminal, cable Ref. Fig. 401, Item 2
32-52-01, Fig. 01/270 Nipple, threaded Ref. Fig. 401, Item 7

P04-022 Grease
P09-123 Solder
P10-016 CPC
A. Job Set Up
(3) Put wheel chocks in position and lift the aircraft on jacks (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
(4) Move the rudder pedals so that the rudder and tail wheel are in the center position.
(5) Set the tailwheel handle to LOCK position at the left side of the pilot’s seat.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
32-51-12 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Removal the Aft Inner Bowden Cable
(1) Remove the nut (11) and washer (10) from the threaded nipple (7).
(2) Disconnect the threaded nipple (7) from the locking lever (9) and remove the washers (8).
(3) Remove and discard the locking clip from the turnbuckle (1).
NOTE: The turnbuckle (1) is between Frame 6 and Frame 7 in the aft fuselage.
(4) Loosen the turnbuckle to unscrew and disconnect the cable terminal (2) from the
turnbuckle (1).
(5) Temporarily stow the inner bowden cable end from the cockpit tail wheel handle (18) (with
turnbuckle (1) attached to the cable terminal (16)).
NOTE: This keeps the inner bowden cable routed correctly around the pulley (17) and
pulleys (12) and (15).
(6) Cut the cable terminal (2) from the aft inner bowden cable (6). Discard the cable terminal
(2).
(7) Pull the aft inner bowden cable (6) out of the bowden conduit (4) from the aft of the
fuselage. Keep the cable end sleeves (3) and (5) attached to the bowden conduit (4).
Discard the aft inner bowden cable (6) and threaded nipple (7).
C. Install the Aft Inner Bowden Cable
(1) Install the washers (8) on the new threaded nipple (7).
(2) Put the threaded nipple (7) in position on the end of the locking lever (9) and install the
(3) Apply grease (Material No. P04-022) to the new aft inner bowden cable (6).
NOTE: The aft inner bowden cable (6) is supplied attached to the new cable terminal (2).
(4) Insert the aft inner bowden cable (6) through the cable end sleeve (5) and into the bowden
conduit (4) and cable end sleeve (3) at frame 12 in the rear fuselage.
(5) Put the aft inner bowden cable (6) in position in the fuselage:
(a) Make sure that the aft inner bowden cable (6) is routed correctly in the cable guides
(13) and (14).
(b) Make sure that the inner bowden cable from the cockpit tail wheel handle (18) is
routed correctly around the pulley (17) and pulleys (12) and (15).
(c) Remove the forward inner bowden cable from stowage and temporarily screw the
new cable terminal (2) into the turnbuckle (1) until the threads are flush with the end
of the turnbuckle (1).
(6) Make sure that the tail wheel handle (18) in the cockpit is set to the LOCK position.
(7) Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with white spirit (Material No.
P01-008) and clean the bore of the threaded nipple (7).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
32-51-12 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(8) Pull the aft inner bowden cable (6) through the threaded nipple (7).
(9) Mark the inner bowden cable (6) at a length of 5 mm (0.2 in) measured from the end of the
threaded nipple (7).
(10) Cut off and discard the unwanted length of inner bowden cable (6) on the cut line.
(11) Remove the nut (11) and washer (10) from the threaded nipple (7).
(12) Remove the threaded nipple (7) from the locking lever (9) and remove the washers (8).
(13) Remove the cable terminal (2) from the turnbuckle (1) and temporarily stow the inner
bowden cable end from the cockpit tail wheel handle (18) (with turnbuckle (1) attached).
NOTE: This keeps the inner bowden cable routed correctly around the pulley (17) and
pulleys (12) and (15).
(14) Pull the inner bowden cable (6) out of the hole in the fuselage at the tailwheel to a
sufficient clearance length as necessary.
(15) Put the end of the inner bowden cable (6) on a suitable clean work surface.
(16) Pull the inner bowden cable (6) through the threaded nipple (7) until it extends 5 mm (0.2
in) from the end of the threaded nipple (7) and solder the connection:
(a) Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with white spirit (Material No.
P01-008) and clean the end of the inner bowden cable (6) to be soldered and the
bore of the threaded nipple (7).
(b) Spread the wire-strand ends of the inner bowden cable (6) to make a cone shape.
(c) Bend the end 3 mm (0.1 in) of each wire-strand 180 degrees inwards towards the
center of the cone shape.
(d) Move the threaded nipple (7) along the inner bowden cable (6) until the cone shape
end of the inner bowden cable (6) is in position in the threaded nipple (7).
(e) Solder the end of the inner bowden cable (6) into the threaded nipple (7) with solder
(Material No. P09-123):
• Make sure that the solder fills the entire bore of the threaded nipple (7)
• Make sure that no solder is on the external threads of the threaded nipple (7).
(17) Pull the cable terminal (2) towards the turnbuckle (1) from the rear fuselage at frame 12.
(18) Install the washers (8) on the threaded nipple (7).
(19) Put the threaded nipple (7) in position in the locking lever (9) and install the washer (10)
and nut (11).
(20) Remove the forward inner bowden cable from stowage and screw the cable terminal (2)
into the turnbuckle (1).
(21) Make sure that the new inner bowden cable (6) is routed correctly in the cable guides (13)
and (14).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
32-51-12 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(22) Make sure that the inner bowden cable from the cockpit tail wheel handle (18) is routed
correctly around the pulley (17) and pulleys (12) and (15).
(23) Tension the turnbuckle (1) until there is no slack in the inner bowden cable (6).
(24) Set the cockpit tail wheel handle (18) to the STEER position.
(25) Make sure that the tail wheel is not locked.
(26) Set the cockpit tail wheel handle (18) to the LOCK position.
(27) Make sure that the tail wheel is locked.
(28) Install new locking clips to lock the turnbuckle (1).
(29) Apply CPC (Material No. P10-016) to the end of the inner bowden cable (6), threaded
nipple (7), washers (8), washer (10) and nut (11).
D. Close Up
work area is clean.
(3) Lower the aircraft and remove the jacks and chocks (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
32-51-12 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D
A 4
C 3
E
B A 5
F
2
6
1
G
7
G
B 8
12 9
10
11
13
F 18 14
D 15
17
16
6771
Tail Landing-Gear Steering-Lock Cable - Removal / Installation

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 405
32-51-12 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SECTION
G-G
7 7
6 6
5 mm
(0.197 in)
APPROXIMATELY
2,5 mm (0.098 in)
MARK AND CUT LINE

6772
Tail Landing-Gear Steering-Lock Cable - Removal / Installation

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 406
32-51-12 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LOCKING-LEVER PIVOT PINS - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedure to do a visual inspection of the two pivot pins for the locking-lever
on the tail landing gear. The pivot pins are part of the bottom support assy and if you find any damage
you must replace the bottom support assy.
2. Job Set-up Information

- Bright Light Source Local Supply
- X10 Magnifier Local Supply
P01-008 Solvent
3. Procedure
A. Inspection (Ref. Fig. 601)
(1) Clean the parts of the pivot pins you can see with solvent (Material No. P01-008) and
absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031).
(2) Use a bright light source and X10 magnifier to examine the two pivot pins for:
• Cracks. Examine carefully for cracks where the pins attach to the bottom support
assy
• Damage and deformation
• Corrosion.
(3) Make sure that the locking lever can rotate freely on the pivot pins.
(4) If a pivot pin is not serviceable, replace the bottom support assy (Ref. 32-71-13, Page
Block 401).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 601
32-51-13 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A A
LOCKING-LEVER
PIVOT PIN
STEERING LEVER
LOCKING-LEVER
PIVOT PIN
6703
Locking-Lever Pivot Pins - Inspection

Figure 601
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 602
32-51-13 Feb 28/20
'$PILATUS5F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAIL LANDING GEAR - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
A tail landing gear has a single wheel installed in a trailing arm suspension unit.
A shock strut is used to give suspension for the tail wheel. The tail wheel is connected by cables to the
rudder controls to give tail wheel steering. The tail wheel can be locked in a central position for take off
and landing.
A debris guard can be installed to protect the tail landing gear during take off and landing. This guard
must be installed if the aircraft is used for parachute operations.
The tail landing gear has the following components:
Strut housing, shock strut, trailing arm, tail wheel and a tail steering system.
A. Shock Strut
I
H2 aircraft have a spring strut which uses a coil spring and H4 aircraft have a pneumatic strut
which uses air for suspension as the spring. Both struts use oil to control the movement of the
strut.
The strut is contained within the strut housing. The strut is pivot-mounted at its upper end and
attached to the trailing arm at its lower end.
B. Strut Housing
The upper part of the strut housing is installed in to a bearing mounting block which is bolted to
the fuselage bulkhead.
The lower part of the strut housing has installed the trailing arm and the tail wheel steering
mechanism. The strut housing moves within a cam plate which is attached to the fuselage
bulkhead.
C. Trailing arm
The trailing arm is located at the lower end of the strut housing. The trailing arm is fork shaped
and is hinged to an arm which extends from the strut housing. The trailing arm has the tail wheel
installed.
A mud guard is also installed and is attached to both the trailing arm fork and the trailing arm
lever.
D. Tail Wheel Steering System
The tail wheel steering systems gives the aircraft change in direction when taxiing and is
operated from the rudder controls.
With movement of the rudder controls, steering forces are applied to the tail wheel strut housing
by cables. These cables have compression springs attached to the rudder torque tube and
transmit the steering forces through the steering lever to the tail wheel strut housing.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
32-70-00 Jun 14/92
�PILATUS!5"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
When the aircraft is in flight, take-off or landing, the steering system is disengaged and the tail
wheel is locked in the center position .
The steering system has these components:
steering lever with cam follower
cam plate
locking lever.
A two position tailwheel handle, located on the left side of the pilots seat, can be set to either STEER or
LOCK mode.
When the handle is pulled rearward, STEER mode is set. Tension in the control cable causes the
locking lever to lift against a spring loaded pin and to disengage from the slot in the strut housing
flange. This releases the tail leg. At the same time, the rear end of the locking lever is moved down to
let the steering lever engage with the steering slot in rear of the strut housing flange.
Rudder torque tube movement is now transmitted by the steering cables to the engaged steering lever
to rotate the tail leg housing with in its bearing mounting block and cam plate.
Movement of the tail leg is limited to25° either side of center. This is limited by cams installed on the
locking lever. These cams will raise the steering lever out of the steering slot to disengage the tail
wheel steering from the rudder system. The tail leg can now turn more than25°.
When the handle is pushed forward, LOCK mode is set. Tension in the control cable is released and
the locking lever is pushed down by a sprung pin. The locking lever is then engaged in to the slot in the
strut housing and the tail leg is engaged. At the same time, the rear end of the locking lever is moved
up to let the steering lever disengage with the steering slot in the strut housing flange. Rudder torque
tube movement is transmitted to the disengaged steering lever without movement to the tall leg.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page2
32-70-00 Jun 14/91
"'5PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SHOCK STRUT
NAVIGATION LIGHT
RUDDER TORQUE TUBE
CONTROL CABLE
STEERING CABLES
STRUT HOUSING
CAM PLATE
STEERING LEVER
STRUT HOUSING FLANGE
DEBRIS GUARD
MUD GUARD
LOCKING LEVER
TRAILING ARM
WHEEL
6281
Tail Landing Gear

Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page3
32-70-00 Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAIL LANDING GEAR - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
- Tensiometer
B. Expendable Parts
32-51-01, Fig. 01 Cotter pin (Qty 2) Fig. 401, Item 10


P04-002 Grease
2. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) Remove the tail wheel (Ref. 32-41-12, Page Block 401).
WARNING: DO NOT LOOSEN OR TIGHTEN THE CENTER TIE ROD NUTS (12) ON THE
CABLE TENSIONING ASSEMBLY.
(a) Aircraft without a turnbuckle installed in the steering cable:
(i) Remove and discard the cotter pins (10) from the steering lever (7).
(ii) Pull rearwards on the steering cable (22) and remove the nut (9), washer (8)
and bolt (17).
(iii) Disconnect the steering cables (22) from the steering lever (7).
(b) Aircraft with a turnbuckle installed in the steering cable:
(i) Remove and discard the turnbuckle locking clips and loosen the turnbuckle.
(ii) Remove and discard the cotter pins (10) from the steering lever (7).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
32-71-11 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(iii) Remove the nut (9), washer (8) and bolt (17).
(iv) Disconnect the steering cables (22) from the steering lever (7).
(2) Remove the nut (15) and washer (16) from cable end-bolt (21).
(3) Remove the end bolt (21) and washers (20) from the locking lever.
(4) Remove the screws (4) and washers (5).
(5) Move the navigation light (3) clear of the tail leg (6).
(6) Support the tail leg (6).
(8) Remove and discard the lockwire from the bolts (24).
(9) Remove the bolts (24) and the bushes (1) that attach the tail leg (6) to the fuselage
bulkhead.
(10) Remove the tail leg (6) from the aircraft.
(1) Put the tail leg (6) in position.
(2) Install the tail leg to the fuselage bulkhead with the bushes (1) and bolts (24).
(4) Safety the bolts (24) with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(5) Operationally test the tail leg for full and free movement.
(6) Install the spacer washers (20) on the cable end-bolt (21).
(7) Install the end-bolt (21) in the locking lever and install the washer (16) and nut (15).
(8) Check the tension of the cable (23).
(9) Put the tail navigation light (3) in position.
(10) Put the cable clip (2) to the right side of the navigation light (3).
(11) Install the washers (5) and screws (4).
(12) Install the steering cables (22) to the steering lever (7) with the bolts (17), washers (8) and
nuts (9).
(13) Safety the nuts (9) with a new cotter pins (10).
(14) Adjust the tail landing gear steering cable so that the lock lever points along the aircraft
longitudinal axis.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
32-71-11 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) Aircraft without a turnbuckle installed in the steering cable - adjust the nuts (13) and
(14) to give a cable tension of between 15.0 kg ± 2 kg (33 lb ± 4.5 lb).
(b) Aircraft with a turnbuckle installed in the steering cable - adjust the turnbuckle to
give a cable tension of between 15.0 kg ± 2 kg (33 lb ± 4.5 lb). Install two new
turnbuckle locking clips.
(16) Engage the tail wheel steering and push the right rudder pedal. Check that the tail leg
moves to the right.
D. Job Close Up
(1) Lubricate the tail leg and with grease (Material No. P04-002).
(2) Install the tail wheel (Ref. 32-41-12, Page Block 401).
(3) Fill the tail leg with hydraulic fluid (Ref. 12-12-32, Page Block 301).
(4) Do the replenishment of the tail-leg shock-strut (Ref. 12-12-32, Page Block 301).
E. Test
(1) After one hour, examine the tail leg shock-strut for leaks.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
32-71-11 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
1
2
24
23 3
6
B
22
21
20
7
19
18 17 16
15
B 8
14
11
13
12
10
6218
Tail Landing Gear - Removal / Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
32-71-11 Jan 30/15
'ePILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAIL LEG SHOCK STRUT - REMOVAUINST A LLA TION
Oil container 4 liter (1 US gallon)
B. Expendable Parts
P04-006 Grease
P04-002 Grease
A. Removal
(1) Remove the tail landing gear (Ref. 32-71-11, Page Block 401).
(2) Remove cotter pin (14), nut (15), washer (13), bolt (10) and bush (11 ). Discard the cotter
pin.
(3) Separate the lower shock strut from the trailing arm..
(4) On aircraft with a spring strut
(a) Remove the filler cap (5).
(b) Drain the oil from the shock strut.
(c) Remove the circlip (6) and washer (7).
(d) Remove the bearing mounting block (8).
(e) Support the shock strut and remove the swivel pin (9).
(5) On aircraft with a pneumatic strut
(a) Slowly open the charging valve to release the gas pressure.
(b) Remove the circlip (1) and washer (2).

\
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft up to MSN 884 without SB 169

CONFIG 1
Page 401
32-71-12 Mar 14/98
�PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Remove the bearing mounting block (3).
(d) Support the shock strut and remove the swivel pin (4).
(6) Remove the shock strut (12) from the strut housing.
(1) Lubricate the swivel pin with grease (Material No. P04-002).
(2) Put the shock strut (12) in to the strut housing and install the swivel pin (4) or (9).
(3) On aircraft with a spring strut
(a) Install the bearing mounting block (8).
(b) Install the washer (7) and circlip (6).
(4) On aircraft with a pneumatic strut
(a) Install the bearing mounting block (3).
(b) Install the washer (2) and circlip (1).
(5) Lubricate the bush (11) and bolt (10) with grease (Material No. P04-006).
( 6) Make sure that the bush (16) is in position in the trailing arm.
(7) Put the strut in to position. Install bolt (10), bush (11 ) washer (13) and nut (15).
,
NOTE: The connection must be free to pivot with minimum end float.
(9) Install the tail landing gear (Ref. 32-71 - 11, Page Block 401 ).
EFFECTIVITV: Aircraft up to MSN 884 without SB 1 69

CONFIG 1
Page 402
32-71-12 Mar 14/98
'e PILATUS !!!!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. CIRCLIP ------...._�
2.WASHER
--- �
��
3. BEARING
MOUNTING
� I
BLOCK
4. SWIVEL PIN
� 5. FILLER CAP 0
A
� 6.CIRCLIP
PNEUMATIC STRUT
<=@::> 0-7. WASHER
8. BEARING
MOUNTING
BLOCK
SPRING STRUT
10. BOLT
12. SHOCK STRUT
\
13.WASHER
14. COTTER PIN \

��j� !ID
15.NUT
/ �
:&J r
__ _
y 16.BUSH
Tail Leg Shock Strut - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITV: Aircraft up to MSN 884 without SB 169

CONFIG 1
Page 403
32-71-12 Mar 14/98
'ePILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft up to MSN 884 without SB 169

CONFIG 1
Page 404
32-71-12 Mar 14/98
'ePILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAIL LEG SHOCK STRUT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1 10.85.06.00 7 Tail stand

Ballast 120 kg (250 lb)
P04-006 Grease
P04-002 Grease
A. Removal
(1) Raise the tail of the aircraft and attach ballast to the rear fuselage
(Ref. 0 7- 10-00, Page Block 20 1).
(2) Slowly open the charging valve (1) to release the gas pressure in the shock strut.
(3) Remove the nut (8), bolt (5), bush (6) and washer (9), and lower the trailing arm.
(4) Remove the two roll pins (3).
(5) Hold the shock strut and remove the pins (2) and (4).
NOTE: Turn the strut housing to get access to the pins.
(6) Remove the shock strut (10) from the strut housing.
(7) Remove the two pins (11) and (13), and remove the hinge block (14) from the shock strut.
B. Installation
(1) Lubricate the pins (11) and (13) with grease (Material No. P04-002).
(2) Put the hinge block (14) onto the shock strut and install the pins (11) and (13). Make sure
that the two bushes (12) are in position in the block.
(3) Put the shock strut (10) in position in the strut housing and install the pins (2) and (4).
(4) Install the roll pins (3).
(5) Lubricate the bush (6) and bolt (5) with grease (Material No. P04-006).
(6) Make sure that the bush (7) is in position in the trailing arm.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft from MSN 885 and aircraft with

SB 169 CONFIG 2
Page 40 1
32-71-12 Mar 1 4/98
'ePILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Put the trailing arm in to position. Install the bush (6), bolt (5), washer (9) and nut (8).
NOTE: The connection must be free to pivot.
(8) Fill the shock strut (Ref. 12-12-32, Page Block 301 ) .
(9) Remove the tail stand, lower the aircraft tail and remove the ballast
(Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
EFFECTIVITV: Aircraft from MSN 885 and aircraft with

SB 169 CONFIG 2
Page 402
32-71-12 Mar 14/98
'ePILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
13. PIN
14. HINGE BLOCK
2. PIN
3. ROLL PIN
Tail Leg Shock Strut - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft from MSN 885 and aircraft with

SB 169 CONFIG 2
Page 403
32-71-12 Mar 14/98
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAIL LANDING GEAR - BOTTOM SUPPORT ASSEMBLY - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This task gives the procedure to remove and install the bottom support assembly of the tail landing
gear.
• Aircraft with shock absorber (CONFIG 1)

• Aircraft with damper strut assembly (CONFIG 2)
• Aircraft with damper strut assembly from MSN 889 and with SB 169 (CONFIG 3).
A. Expendable Parts
32-51-01, Fig. 01 Cotter pin (Qty 2) Fig. 401, Item 5

32-71-11, Fig. 01 Spring pin (Qty 2) Fig. 401, Item 37
P01-010 Solvent
P02-007 Lockwire (standard) 0,6 mm diameter
P02-020 Abrasive pads
P04-002 Grease
P08-059 Adhesive
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) Remove the tail wheel (Ref. 32-41-12, Page Block 401).
(2) Open the access panel FL2.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
32-71-13 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CONFIG 1, 2 AND 3:
WARNING: DO NOT LOOSEN OR TIGHTEN THE CENTER TIE ROD NUTS (16) ON THE
CABLE TENSIONING ASSEMBLY.
NOTE: During these procedures the top support (22) stays installed on the Aircraft structure
with the navigation light in position.
(a) Aircraft without a turnbuckle installed in the steering cable:
(i) Remove and discard the cotter pins (5) from the lever assembly (2).
(ii) Pull rearwards on the steering cable (14) and remove the nut (4), washer (3)
and bolt (9).
(iii) Disconnect the steering cables (14) from the lever assembly (2).
(b) Aircraft with a turnbuckle installed in the steering cable:
(i) Remove and discard the turnbuckle locking clips and loosen the turnbuckle.
(ii) Remove and discard the cotter pins (5) from the lever assembly (2).
(iii) Remove the nut (4), washer (3) and bolt (9).
(iv) Disconnect the steering cables (14) from the lever assembly (2).
(2) Remove the nut (7) and washer (8) from cable end-bolt (13).
(3) Remove the cable end-bolt (13) and washers (12) from the locking lever assembly (29).
(4) Support the outer strut (1) and attached parts.
CONFIG 1:
(6) Remove the cap (19).
CONFIG 1, 2 AND 3:
(7) Remove the circlip (20), washer (21).
(8) Remove the outer strut (1) and attached parts downwards and away from the aircraft.
(10) Remove the two-part ring bearing (23), eyebolts (33) and lever assembly (2).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
32-71-13 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CONFIG 3:
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the pins (36) from the top connection of the damper strut to
let the bottom support assembly (31) be removed for CONFIG 3 only.
(11) Remove and discard the lockwire from the spring pins (37).
(12) Remove and discard the spring pins (37).
(13) Remove the pins (36) with a puller with a M6 thread.
CONFIG 1, 2 AND 3:
(14) Remove the locking lever assembly (29) and the bottom support assembly (31) and
attached parts together as an assembly.
(15) Remove the nuts (24), washers (25), screws (28) and bottom support assembly (31) with
attached parts.
(16) Remove the circlips (26) and bearings (27).
NOTE: For bottom support assemblies (31) P/N 6403.0077.01 and 114.45.06.047 the bush
(32) is supplied bonded to the bottom support assembly (31). Bottom support (31) P/N
114.45.06.100 is not supplied with a bush (32).
(17) If necessary, remove the bush (32) from the bottom support assembly (31) as follows:
(a) Use a hot air blower or heat lamps (100 to 120 C°) to break the adhesive bond of
the bush (32).
NOTE: The bush (32) is installed with adhesive. The adhesive bond of the bush
(32) will break when heat is applied.
(b) Carefully remove the bush (32).
(18) Remove the lubrication fitting (30) from the bottom support assembly (31).
CONFIG 1, 2 AND 3:
(1) Make sure that all the parts are serviceable before you install them.
(2) Measure the outer diameter of the outer strut (1) in the area where the bush (32) and
bottom support assembly (31) are to be installed:
• Make sure that the diameter is more than 77,91 mm (3.0673 in).
• When the diameter is outside of the above limit, the outer strut (1) must be returned
to Pilatus Aircraft Ltd for repair. Contact Pilatus Aircraft Ltd for more information.
(3) If you need to replace or install the bush (32) into a serviceable bottom support assembly
(31) continue as follows:
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
32-71-13 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) Measure the internal diameter of the bush (32).
NOTE: A new bush (32) is supplied with a inner diameter of 77,5 mm (3.051 in).
(b) Make sure that the internal diameter of a serviceable used bush (32) is less than the
maximum limit for in-service wear (maximum diameter 78,1 mm (3.0748 in)).
(c) If necessary, remove the required material from the bore of the bush (32) with a
lathe. Make sure that the internal diameter is between 78,04 and 78,07 mm (3.0724
and 3.0736 in).
(d) Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with solvent (Material No. P01-
010) to clean the surface of the bore of the bottom support (31). If necessary, use
abrasive pads (Material No. P02-020). Clean the bore until moist clean absorbent
paper stays clean when applied to the surface.
(e) Apply adhesive (Material No. P08-059) to the new bush (32).
(f) Carefully install the bush (32) into the bottom support (31).
(g) Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with solvent (Material No. P01-
010) and remove the unwanted adhesive.
(h) Let the adhesive cure in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(4) If you need to replace the bottom support assembly (31) with integral bush (32):
• Make sure that the internal diameter of the bush (32) is between 78,04 and 78,07
mm (3.0724 and 3.0736 in).
(5) If you need to replace the two-part ring bearing (23):
• Make sure that the new bearing ring (23) is the correct size for the outer strut (1).
• Make sure that you remove the lubrication fitting before you discard the
unserviceable ring bearing (23).
• Install the lubrication fitting into the new ring bearing (23).
NOTE: The two-part ring bearing (23) can be 75 mm, 74,8 mm or 74,6 mm diameter. If
necessary, measure the diameter of the slot on the outer strut (1) to make sure
that it is the correct size.
(6) Install the locking lever assembly (29) to the bottom support assembly (31) as follows:
(a) Measure the internal diameter of the bearings (27). Make sure that they are
between 8,05 mm and 8,1 mm (0.3169 and 0.3189 in). If necessary discard and
replace them.
(b) Apply a layer of grease (Material No. P04-002) on the shafts of the bottom support
assembly (31).
(c) Put the bearings (27) into position onto the shafts of the bottom support assembly
(31) and install the circlips (26).
(d) Put the bottom support assembly (31) into position on the locking lever assembly
(29) and install the screws (28), washers (25) and nuts (24).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
32-71-13 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Install the locking lever assembly (29) and bottom support assembly (31) and attached
parts onto the outer strut (1).
CONFIG 3:
(8) Install the pins (36).
(9) Install the spring pins (37).
(10) Safety the spring pins (37) with lockwire (Material No. P02-007).
CONFIG 1, 2 AND 3:
(11) Apply a layer of grease (Material No. P04-002) on the internal surface of the two-part ring
bearing (23) and its related surface on the outer strut (1).
(12) Put the two-part ring bearing (23) into position on the outer strut (1) and install the lever
assembly (2) with the eyebolts (33), washers (34) and nuts (35).
(13) Put the outer strut (1) and attached parts into position on the aircraft and install the washer
(21) and circlip (20).
CONFIG 1:
(14) Install the cap (19).
CONFIG 1, 2 AND 3:
(16) Operationally test the tail leg for full and free movement.
(17) Install the spacer washers (12) on the cable end-bolt (13).
(18) Install the cable end-bolt (13) in the locking lever assembly (29) and install the washer (8)
and nut (7).
(19) Check the tension of the cable (15).
(20) Install the steering cables (14) to the lever assembly (2) with the bolts (9), washers (3) and
nuts (4).
(21) Safety the nuts (4) with new cotter pins (5).
(22) Adjust the tail landing gear steering cable so that the locking lever assembly (29) points
along the aircraft longitudinal axis.
(a) Aircraft without a turnbuckle installed in the steering cable - adjust the nuts (17) and
(18) to give a cable tension of between 15.0 kg ± 2 kg (33 lb ± 4.5 lb).
(b) Aircraft with a turnbuckle installed in the steering cable - adjust the turnbuckle to
give a cable tension of between 15.0 kg ± 2 kg (33 lb ± 4.5 lb). Install two new
turnbuckle locking clips.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 405
32-71-13 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(24) Engage the tail wheel steering and push the right rudder pedal. Check that the tail leg
moves to the right.
D. Job Close Up
(1) Lubricate the tail leg with grease (Material No. P04-002).
(2) Install the tail wheel (Ref. 32-41-12, Page Block 401).
(3) Do the replenishment of the tail-leg shock-strut (Ref. 12-12-32, Page Block 301).
E. Test
(1) After one hour, examine the tail leg shock-strut for leaks.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 406
32-71-13 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
15
14
1
B
11
14 10
13 C
9
12
8 2
7
3
6 4
B 5
18
17
16
6860
Tail Landing Gear - Bottom Support Assembly - Removal / Installation

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 407
32-71-13 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 408
32-71-13 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 409
32-71-13 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 410
32-71-13 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SKI INSTALLATION - SERVICING
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedure to fill and bleed the hydraulic system for the ski installation. The
system is self-bleeding and is operated to remove air.
P10-017 Hydraulic Fluid
3. Procedure
A. Preparation
(1) Level the aircraft (Ref. 08-20-00, Page Block 201).
B. Fill and Bleed the Hydraulic System
(1) Fill the hydraulic reservoir with hydraulic fluid (Material No. P10-017) to the Max mark.
(2) On the top of the hydraulic reservoir, set the selector switch to SKI.
(3) Operate the hydraulic pump handle until the main skis are in the fully down position.
(4) Set the selector switch to WHEEL.
(5) Operate the hydraulic pump handle until the main skis are in the fully up position.
(6) Do a check of the hydraulic fluid level in the hydraulic reservoir. If necessary, fill the
hydraulic reservoir with hydraulic fluid (Material No. P10-017) to the Max mark.
(7) Do Steps (2) thru (5) again until the hydraulic fluid in the hydraulic reservoir has no
bubbles.
(8) Do a check of the hydraulic fluid level in the hydraulic reservoir. If necessary, fill the
hydraulic reservoir with hydraulic fluid (Material No. P10-017) to the Max mark.
C. Close Up
(1) Make sure the main skis are in the fully up position.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with skis installed
Page 301
32-76-00 Oct 31/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 302
32-76-00 Oct 31/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SKI INSTALLATION - ADJUSTMENT / TEST
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedure to do an operational test of the ski installation.
P10-017 Hydraulic Fluid If required
3. Procedure
A. Preparation
(1) Level the aircraft (Ref. 08-20-00, Page Block 201).
(2) Make sure the level of the hydraulic fluid in the hydraulic reservoir is between the Min and
Max marks.
B. Operational Test
(2) On the top of the hydraulic reservoir, set the selector switch to SKI.
(3) Operate the hydraulic pump handle until the main skis are in the fully down position. When
you do this:
• Count the number of pump strokes required

• The correct number of strokes required is approximately 42
(4) Make sure the indicator pin on the switch assembly is fully out.
(5) Set the selector switch to WHEEL.
(6) Operate the hydraulic pump handle until the main skis are in the fully up position. When
you do this:
• Count the number of pump strokes required

• The correct number of strokes required is approximately 48
(7) Make sure the indicator pin on the switch assembly is fully in.
(8) If the system operates correctly but the number of strokes required is not correct:
• Operate the system several times to remove air

• Do the test again
Page 501
32-76-00 Oct 31/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(9) If the system does not operate correctly or the number of strokes required is still not
correct:
• Examine the ski installation for hydraulic leaks and/or defective components and
replace the unserviceable parts (Ref. PC-6 Service Bulletin 153)
• Do the test again
C. Close Up
(2) If necessary, fill the hydraulic reservoir with hydraulic fluid (Material No. P10-017) to the
Max mark.
Page 502
32-76-00 Oct 31/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SKI INSTALLATION - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedures to do an inspection of the main and tail landing-gear ski
installation and a check of the elevator tension spring.

- Bright Light Source Local Supply
- Spring Balance, 0-100 N (0-22 lbf) Local Supply
P01-008 Solvent
P10-017 Hydraulic Fluid
3. Procedure
A. Preparation
B. Inspection (Ref. Figs. 601 thru 603)
(1) Examine the left and right main skis (Ref. Fig. 601):
(a) Make sure the main skis are clean. If necessary clean the metal parts with solvent
(Material No. P01-008) and absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031).
(b) Use the bright light source and visually examine the:
• Fiberglass nose fairings for damage and cracks

• Metal parts of the skis for damage, corrosion, deformation, general condition
and security of attachment
• Shock absorbers for damage, corrosion, deformation, general condition and
security of attachment
• Limiting cables and rubber bungees for general condition and security of
attachment
Page 601
32-76-00 Oct 31/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
• Actuator and control cylinders for damage, corrosion, deformation, wear,

security of attachment and hydraulic leaks
• Hydraulic pump, reservoir and hoses for damage, deformation, wear, security
of attachment and hydraulic leaks
(c) With the aircraft weight on wheels, make sure that the locking lugs on both skis are
fully engaged in the retraction locks.
(d) Replace all unserviceable parts (Ref. PC-6 Service Bulletin 153).
(e) Do a check of the hydraulic reservoir contents and replenish with hydraulic fluid
(Material No. P10-017) as necessary.
(f) If the reservoir is empty, do the filling and bleeding procedure (Ref. 32-76-00, Page
Block 301).
(2) Examine the tail ski (Ref. Fig. 602):
(a) Make sure the tail ski is clean. If necessary clean the metal parts with solvent
(Material No. P01-008) and absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031).
(b) Use the bright light source and visually examine the:
• Ski for damage, corrosion, deformation, general condition and security of

attachment
• Centering cylinder for damage, corrosion, deformation, general condition and
security of attachment
(c) Replace all unserviceable parts (Ref. PC-6 Service Bulletin 153).
(3) Do a check of the elevator tension spring (Ref. Fig. 603):
(a) Use the bright light source and examine the tension spring for:
• Damage, deformation and corrosion

• Security of attachment
(b) Put the elevator in the fully down position.
(c) Remove the nut (7), washer (6) and attachment screw (1) to disconnect the strap (2)
from the clamp (4). Collect the shims (3) and (5).
NOTE: The shims (3) and (5) are the same.
(d) Attach the spring balance to the tension spring.
(e) Use the spring balance to pull the tension spring until the holes in the clamp and the
strap are aligned. Make sure you can easily install the attachment screw.
(f) If the spring tension is between 55 and 59 N (12.36 and 13.26 lbf) it is correct.
(g) If the spring tension is not correct, adjust the position of the clamp (4) on the
elevator cable to get the correct tension.
Page 602
32-76-00 Oct 31/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(h) Remove the spring balance.
(i) Connect the strap (2) to the clamp (4) with the screw (1), shims (3) and (5), washer
(6) and nut (7).
(4) Do the operational test of the ski installation (Ref. 32-76-00, Page Block 501).
C. Close Up
Page 603
32-76-00 Oct 31/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RUBBER BUNGEL
A
LIMITING CABLE
LIMITING CABLE
ACTUATOR
CYLINDER
CONTROL
CYLINDER
LOCKING LUG
NOSE FAIRING
RETRACTION LEVER
SHOCK ABSORBER
NOTE: SHOWN WITH WHEEL

REMOVED FOR CLARITY
6712
Main Ski - Inspection

Figure 601
Page 604
32-76-00 Oct 31/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CENTERING
CYLINDER
TAIL SKI
6711
Tail Ski - Inspection

Figure 602
Page 605
32-76-00 Oct 31/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FRAME 11
A
TENSION SPRING
B
STRAP
1
SPRING BALANCE
2
CLAMP
3
SCREW
4
5
6
7
B
6713
Elevator Tension Spring - Pre-tension Check

Figure 603
Page 606
32-76-00 Oct 31/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 33 - LIGHTS
Chapter Chapter
Section Section
List of Effective 1 Jul 31/22 33-23-12 401 Jun 14/92
Pages 2 Jul 31/22 402 Jun 14/92
Table of Contents 1 Jan 30/18 33-40-00 1 Jan 30/18

2 Jan 30/18 CONFIG 1 2 Jan 30/18
3 Jan 30/18 3 Jan 30/18
4 Jan 30/18 4 Jan 30/18
33-00-00 1 Jan 30/18 CONFIG 2 1 Jan 30/18

CONFIG 1 2 Jan 30/18 2 Jan 30/18
3 Jan 30/18
CONFIG 2 1 Jan 30/18 4 Jan 30/18
2 Jan 30/18
CONFIG 1 501 Jan 31/22
33-10-00 1 Feb 28/10 502 Jan 31/22
CONFIG 1 2 Feb 28/10 503 Jan 31/22
504 Jan 31/22
CONFIG 2 1 Feb 28/10
2 Feb 28/10 CONFIG 2 501 Jan 31/22
502 Jan 31/22
33-11-00 501 Feb 28/10 503 Jan 31/22
CONFIG 1 502 Feb 28/10 504 Jan 31/22
505 Jan 31/22
CONFIG 2 501 Feb 28/10 506 Jan 31/22
502 Feb 28/10
33-41-11 401 Dec 31/11
33-12-11 401 Jun 14/92 CONFIG 1 402 Dec 31/11
402 Jun 14/92 403 Dec 31/11
403 Jun 14/92 404 Dec 31/11
33-13-11 401 Jun 14/92 CONFIG 2 401 Jul 31/12

402 Jun 14/92 402 Jul 31/12
403 Jun 14/92 403 Jul 31/12
404 Jul 31/12
33-23-00 501 Feb 28/10 405 Jul 31/12
CONFIG 1 502 Feb 28/10 406 Jul 31/12
CONFIG 2 501 Feb 28/10 33-41-12 401 Dec 31/11

502 Feb 28/10 CONFIG 1 402 Dec 31/11
403 Dec 31/11
33-23-11 401 Jun 14/92 404 Dec 31/11
402 Jun 14/92
402 Dec 31/11
Page 1
33-LEP Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter Chapter
Section Section
33-41-12 (Cont’d) 403 Dec 31/11
33-41-13 401 Jun 14/92

402 Jun 14/92
403 Jun 14/92
33-43-11 401 Jan 30/18

402 Jan 30/18
33-43-12 401 Jan 30/18


402 Jan 30/18
403 Jan 30/18
404 Jan 30/18
33-47-11 401 Jan 30/18

403 Jan 30/18
404 Jan 30/18

402 Jan 30/18
403 Jan 30/18
404 Jan 30/18

402 Jan 30/18
403 Jan 30/18
404 Jan 30/18
33-47-12 401 Jan 30/18

403 Jan 30/18
404 Jan 30/18

402 Jan 30/18
403 Jan 30/18
404 Jan 30/18
REPAIR 01 801 Jul 31/22

802 Jul 31/22
803 Jul 31/22
804 Jul 31/22
Page 2
33-LEP Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 33 - LIGHTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
LIGHTS GENERAL 33-00-00

GENERAL COMPARTMENT LIGHTS 33-10-00

INSTRUMENT LIGHTS 33-11-00
Adjustment / Test CONFIG 1 501 101 thru 947
Adjustment / Test CONFIG 2 501 948 and up
UTILITY LIGHT SYSTEM 33-12-11
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL LIGHTING 33-13-11
SYSTEM
COCKPIT / CABIN LIGHT SYSTEM 33-20-00

CABIN LIGHTING SYSTEM 33-23-00
COCKPIT / CABIN LIGHT 33-23-11
DC-DC CONVERTER 33-23-12
EXTERIOR LIGHTS 33-40-00

Page 1
33-TOC Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter
Section
EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM 33-40-00

NAV / POSITION AND STROBE LIGHT 33-41-11
ASSEMBLY
Removal / Installation CONFIG 1 401 101 thru 942
that are
Pre SB 33-001
Removal / Installation CONFIG 2 401 943 and up or
Post SB 33-001
WING STROBE-LIGHT POWER-SUPPLY 33-41-12
UNIT
Removal / Installation CONFIG 1 401 101 thru 942
that are
Pre SB 33-001
Removal / Installation CONFIG 2 401 943 and up or
Post SB 33-001
TAIL LIGHT ASSEMBLY 33-41-13
LANDING LIGHT ASSEMBLY 33-43-11
incandescent
motorized
landing lights
LANDING LIGHT LAMP-UNIT 33-43-12
incandescent
motorized
landing lights
fixed LED
landing lights
UPPER BEACON-LIGHT ASSEMBLY 33-47-11
rotating
beacons
Removal / Installation CONFIG 2 401 Post SB 33-003
Removal / Installation CONFIG 3 401 1022 and up
with fixed LED
beacons
Page 2
33-TOC Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter
Section
LOWER BEACON-LIGHT ASSEMBLY 33-47-12

rotating
beacons
fixed LED
beacons
Minor Repair 01 REPAIR 01 801 Aircraft with
rotating
beacons
Page 3
33-TOC Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 4
33-TOC Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LIGHTS GENERAL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General (Ref. Fig 1.)
The lighting system has these main groups:
• Compartment Lights
• Exterior Lights
Most of the controls for the various lighting systems are located on the cockpit LH side panel (Ref.
Fig.2). Other controls such as integrated switches on assemblies are described in the sub-chapters that
follow.
NAVIGATION/POSITION NAVIGATION/POSITION
(GREEN) AND ANTICOLLISION (RED) AND ANTICOLLISION
(WHITE STROBE) LIGHTS (WHITE STROBE) LIGHTS
LANDING UPPER BEACON (RED)

LIGHT RH LANDING
(POST SB 33-002) LIGHT LH
(POST SB 33-002)
LANDING
LANDING
LIGHT LH
LIGHT RH
(PRE SB 33-002) (PRE SB 33-002)
LOWER BEACON (RED) NAVIGATION/POSITION

TAIL LIGHT (WHITE) 6202
Lights - General Arrangement

Figure 1

CONFIG 1
Page 1
33-00-00 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
VIEW LOOKING FORWARD
BA BA
TT TT
ER ER
Y Y
GE GE
NE NE
RA RA
TO TO
R R
G
RE EN G
RE EN
SE SE
T T
A
F P UX A
F P UX
UM UM
P P
IGN IGN
IT ION IT IO N
ST ST
AR AR
TE TE
R R
OV OV
ST TE TE
ST ST ST
RO PO
PO BE S/S NAV RO PO
S/S NAV
S TR LIG PO BE TR LIG
OF OB HT S
F E OF OB HT
BE F E
AC BE
ON AC
ON
LIG LIG
HT LH HT LH
PO LAN LA
S DIN ND
INSTR GL ING
IGH INSTR LIG
T HT
UP PO
OF S
INS DO F RH RH
TR LIGH WN INS
T LIG TR LIGH
S HT TS LIG
LIGHTS CA HT
BIN LIGHTS CA
BIN
B B
COCKPIT LH SIDE PANEL COCKPIT LH SIDE PANEL
(PRE SB 33-002) (POST SB 33-002)
6321
Lights - Lighting Controls

Figure 2

CONFIG 1
Page 2
33-00-00 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LIGHTS GENERAL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General (Ref. Fig 1.)
The lighting system has these main groups:
• Compartment Lights
• Exterior Lights
Most of the controls for the various lighting systems are located on the cockpit LH side panel (Ref.
Fig.2). Other controls such as integrated switches on assemblies are described in the sub-chapters that
follow.
NAVIGATION/POSITION NAVIGATION/POSITION
(GREEN) AND ANTICOLLISION (RED) AND ANTICOLLISION
(WHITE STROBE) LIGHTS (WHITE STROBE) LIGHTS
LANDING UPPER BEACON (RED)

LIGHT RH LANDING
(POST SB 33-002) LIGHT LH
(POST SB 33-002)
LANDING
LANDING
LIGHT LH
LIGHT RH
(PRE SB 33-002) (PRE SB 33-002)
LOWER BEACON (RED) NAVIGATION/POSITION

TAIL LIGHT (WHITE) 6202
Lights - General Arrangement

Figure 1

CONFIG 2
Page 1
33-00-00 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
ON ON
OF OF
F F
EX EX
T/S T/S
PW TBY PW TBY
R R
BA BA
TT TT
ER ER
Y GE Y GE
N N
O O O O
RE FF N RE FF N
SE SE
T A T A
F P UX F P UX
UM UM
P P
IGN IGN
ITIO IT IO
N N
ST ST
AR AR
TE TE
R R
NA NA
VL VL
PO ST IG PO ST IG
S RO HT S RO HT
BE S BE S
BE BE
AC AC
ON ON
OF OF
F LA F LA
ON ND ON ND
ING ING
OF LIG OF LIG
F HT F HT
S S
INSTR OF INSTR OF
F F
OF UP INT INT
F ER ER
NA NA
INS LL INS L LIG
TR IGH TR HT
DO TS S
WN
CA CA
LIGHTS BIN LIGHTS BIN
OF OF
F F
OF OF
F F
B B
COCKPIT LH SIDE PANEL COCKPIT LH SIDE PANEL
(PRE SB 33-002) (POST SB 33-002)
6674
Lights - Lighting Controls

Figure 2

CONFIG 2
Page 2
33-00-00 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERAL COMPARTMENT LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
There is no standard compartment lighting system. The system is dependent on the requirements of
the operator. A typical compartment lighting system has the following subsystems:
• Cockpit and Cabin Lights

• Utility Light
• Instrument Lighting
2. System Description and Operation (Ref. Fig. 1)
A. Cockpit and Cabin Lights
Two identical overhead light assemblies are installed in the aircraft, one located centrally in the
cockpit and one in the cabin RH side.
Both lights are controlled simultaneously from the CABIN LIGHT switch located on the cockpit
LH side panel. When selected to the up position (on) switches 28V DC to the cockpit, cabin and
CB panel illumination lights from the generator busbar via the circuit breaker which is placarded
FLOOD LIGHT and is located on the GENERATOR BUS CB panel. When the CABIN LIGHTS
switch is set to the down (off) position, the cockpit and cabin lights extinguish and the CB panel
illumination lights are powered and controlled by the dimmer control potentiometer/control box
(DC/DC converter).
B. Utility Light
The utility light is clipped to a mounting on the LH side of the cockpit above the pilot's position.
The utility light has a coiled, flexible lead allowing it to be unclipped from its mounting and moved
about the cockpit as required.
28V DC power is supplied to the light from the battery busbar via a circuit breaker placarded
UTILITY LIGHT. Within the light's housing a variable resistor/switch is used to switch the light on
or off and to vary the intensity of illumination. The intensity of illumination is adjusted by rotating
the base of the light through 360° travel. The off position is identified by a detent 'click' at the end
of its rotation.
C. Instrument Lighting
The instrument lighting system comprises a two-position INSTR LIGHTS switch, a rotary-
movement INSTR LIGHTS dimmer control, both located on the cockpit LH side panel, and a DC
to DC converter located forward of the LH instrument panel mounted on the aft side of frame
FR1. Two map reading type lights used as circuit breaker panel illumination lights are located
below the cockpit front panel, one on each, side mounted on the cross beams.
The DC to DC converter provides a variable regulated DC output of between 0 and 5V DC and 0

and 28V DC from an unregulated 28V DC input. The 28V DC is supplied from the generator
busbar via a circuit breaker and an INSTR LIGHTS switch. At the switch a parallel connection is
made to the dimmer control potentiometer, DC-DC converter and to the annunciator panel (ref.
31-50-10). The variable +28V DC from the dimmer control potentiometer is fed to the control
input of the DC to DC converter which senses the dimmer control variation and adjusts the 0 to
5V DC and 0 to 28V DC output proportionally.

CONFIG 1
Page 1
33-10-00 Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GEN BUS
FLOOD
LIGHT
CABIN LIGHTS
CABIN
LIGHT
GEN BUS
INSTR
LIGHTS
INSTR COCKPIT
LIGHTS LIGHT
DC-DC 0-5V DC
CONVERTER
0-28V DC
DIMMER
CB PANEL
LIGHT RH
CB PANEL
LIGHT LH
0-28V DC LIGHTED 0-5V DC LIGHTED

EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT
ANNUNCIATOR PANEL (31-00-00)
BAT BUS
UTILITY
LIGHT
UTILITY
LIGHT
6348
Interior Lights - Schematic

Figure 1

CONFIG 1
Page 2
33-10-00 Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMPARTMENT LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
There is no standard compartment lighting system. The system is dependent on the requirements of
the operator. A typical compartment lighting system has the following subsystems:
• Cockpit and Cabin Lights

• Utility Light
• Instrument Lighting
2. System Description and Operation (Ref. Fig. 1)
A. Cockpit and Cabin Lights
Two identical overhead light assemblies are installed in the aircraft, one located centrally in the
cockpit and one in the cabin RH side.
Both lights are controlled simultaneously from the INTERNAL LIGHTS - CABIN switch located on
the cockpit LH side panel. When selected to CABIN, the switch connects 28V DC to the cockpit,
cabin and CB panel lights (from the generator busbar) through the CKPT CABIN LIGHT circuit
breaker (on the GENERATOR BUS CB panel). When the CABIN switch is set to OFF, the
cockpit and cabin lights go off and the CB panel lights are powered and controlled by the dimmer
control potentiometer/control box (DC/DC converter).
B. Utility Light
The utility light is clipped to a mounting on the LH side of the cockpit above the pilot's position.
The utility light has a coiled, flexible lead allowing it to be unclipped from its mounting and moved
about the cockpit as required.
28V DC power is supplied to the light from the battery busbar via a circuit breaker placarded
UTILITY LIGHT. Within the light's housing a variable resistor/switch is used to switch the light on
or off and to vary the intensity of illumination. The intensity of illumination is adjusted by rotating
the base of the light through 360° travel. The off position is identified by a detent 'click' at the end
of its rotation.
C. Instrument Lighting
The instrument lighting system comprises a two-position INTERNAL LIGHTS - INSTR switch, a
rotary-movement INSTR LIGHTS dimmer control, both located on the cockpit LH side panel, and
a DC to DC converter located forward of the LH instrument panel mounted on the aft side of
frame FR1. Two map reading type lights used as circuit breaker panel illumination lights are
located below the cockpit front panel, one on each, side mounted on the cross beams.
The DC to DC converter provides a variable regulated DC output of between 0 and 5V DC and 0

and 28V DC from an unregulated 28V DC input. The 28V DC is supplied from the generator
busbar through the INSTR LIGHT circuit breaker and the INSTR switch. At the switch a parallel
connection is made to the dimmer control potentiometer, DC-DC converter and to the
annunciator panel (ref. 31-50-10). The variable 28V DC from the dimmer control potentiometer
is supplied to the control input of the DC to DC converter which senses the dimmer control
variation and adjusts the 0 to 5V DC and 0 to 28V DC output proportionally.

CONFIG 2
Page 1
33-10-00 Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GEN BUS
CKPT CABN
LIGHT
CABIN LIGHTS
CABIN
LIGHT
GEN BUS
INSTR
LIGHT
INSTR COCKPIT
LIGHTS LIGHT
DC-DC 0-5V DC
CONVERTER
0-28V DC
DIMMER
CB PANEL
LIGHT RH
CB PANEL
LIGHT LH
0-28V DC LIGHTED 0-5V DC LIGHTED

EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT
ANNUNCIATOR PANEL (31-00-00)
BAT BUS
UTILITY
LIGHT
UTILITY
LIGHT
6671
Interior Lights - Schematic

Figure 1

CONFIG 2
Page 2
33-10-00 Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INSTRUMENT LIGHTS - ADJUSTMENT TEST
1. General
Instruments found with defective integral lighting during this test must be replaced.
A. Procedure
(2) Open the INSTR LIGHTS circuit breaker.
(3) Set the INSTR LIGHTS switch up.
• Make sure that the instrument integral lighting is off.
(4) Close INSTR LIGHTS circuit breaker.
(5) Select INSTR LIGHTS switch down and make sure that:
• Instrument lighting is at maximum and is not affected by the dimmer control or

Instrument lighting is off.
• Annunciator panel captions which are on are at maximum brightness and are not
affected by the dimmer control.
(6) Select INSTR LIGHTS switch up and make sure that:
• Instrument lighting can be varied by the dimmer control.

• Annunciator panel captions which are lit are automatically dimmed to a fixed level,
and are not affected by dimmer control.
(7) On aircraft with CB panel lighting:
(a) Set the CABIN LIGHTS switch down and make sure that the CB panels lighting can
be varied by the dimmer control.
(b) Set the CABIN LIGHTS switch up and make sure that the CB panels lighting
changes to maximum brightness.
B. Close Up
(1) Set the CABIN LIGHTS switch down.
(2) Set the INSTR LIGHTS switch down.

CONFIG 1
Page 501
33-11-00 Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CONFIG 1
Page 502
33-11-00 Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INSTRUMENT LIGHTS - ADJUSTMENT TEST
1. General
Instruments found with defective integral lighting during this test must be replaced.
A. Procedure
(2) Open the INSTR LIGHTS circuit breaker.
(3) Set the INTERNAL LIGHTS - INSTR switch to INSTR.
• Make sure that the instrument integral lighting is off.
(4) Close INSTR LIGHTS circuit breaker.
(5) Set the INTERNAL LIGHTS - INSTR switch to OFF and make sure that:
• Instrument lighting is at maximum and is not affected by the dimmer control or

Instrument lighting is off.
• Annunciator panel captions which are on are at maximum brightness and are not
affected by the dimmer control.
(6) Select the INTERNAL LIGHTS - INSTR switch to INSTR and make sure that:
• Instrument lighting can be varied by the dimmer control.

• Annunciator panel captions which are lit are automatically dimmed to a fixed level,
and are not affected by dimmer control.
(a) Set the INTERNAL LIGHTS - CABIN switch to OFF and make sure that the CB
panels lighting can be varied by the dimmer control.
(b) Set the INTERNAL LIGHTS - CABIN switch to CABIN and make sure that the CB
panels lighting changes to maximum brightness.
B. Close Up
(1) Set the INTERNAL LIGHTS - CABIN switch to OFF.
(2) Set the INTERNAL LIGHTS - INSTR switch to OFF.

CONFIG 2
Page 501
33-11-00 Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CONFIG 2
Page 502
33-11-00 Feb 28/10
'ePILATUSE"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
UTILITY LIGHT SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Job Set Up
UTILITY LIGHT
A. Utility Light Bulb
(1) Unscrew the front cover (14) from the utility light assembly (13) and remove the bulb (15).
B. Utility Light Assembly
(1) Remove the utility light assembly (13) from its mounting (1).
(2) Remove side panel securing screws (11) and (16).
(3) Remove the side panel (12) from its location.
(4) Cut cable ties (8) from harness (10).
(5) Remove plastic insulating cover (9) from harness (10).
(6) Note the connection of the blue and brown lead terminals (2) and (3) and unclip from
harness (10).
(7) Remove cable securing screw, washer and nut (7) and (6).
(8) Remove utility light (13) with its coiled cable (5) from the aircraft.
4. Installation {Ref. Fig. 401}
A. Utility Light Assembly
(1) Position the utility light coiled cable (5) and secure to bracket (4) using washers screw
and nut (7) and {6).
{2) Insert blue and brown leads {2) and (3) through a tube of plastic insulating wire covering
(9).
{3) Connect the blue and brown leads (2) and (3) to the appropriate connections in the
harness (1O) as noted during removal.
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 401
33-12-11 Jun 14/92
�PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Position plastic insulating cover (9) and fasten to harness (10) using cable ties (8).
(5) Position side panel and secure using screws (11) and (16).
(6) Put utility light (13) into its mounting (1).
B. Utility Light Bulb
(1) Install bulb (15) to the utility light assembly (13 ) and replace the front cover (14).
5. Test
A. Close the UTILITY LIGHT circuit breaker.
B. Do an Operational Test of the cockpit/cabin lights system (Ref 33-23-00, Page Block 501 ).
6. Close Up
EFFECTIVITY: All
402
I
Page
33-12-11 Jun 14/92
"'ePILATUS =='
PC-6-
MAINTENANCE MAN UAL
12. SIDE PANEL 14. FR ONT COVER
SCISSOR-UK E M OVE M ENT

TO UNCLIP T ER M INALS
16. SIDE PANEL

0 M OUNT SCREW
��
T_�
�
COIL ED C AB
BRACKE T B E
��
C URED
SIDE PANEL �'
...... ....... ��-
Utility Light Assembly Removal/I nstallation

-
- --
�
Fiigg1 uu 1re 401
:
EFFECTIVITY Al I
�-- --- -
I
Page 403
33-12-11 Jun 14/92
"ePILATUS!iF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL LIGHTING SYSTEM - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
A. Tool s and Equipment
2. Job Set Up
A. Open and install a safety clip to the FLOOD LIGHT circuit breaker and the INSTR LIGHTS circuit
breaker.
A. Map Light Bulb
(1) Spread outer shell retaining clips (4) enough to pull and remove outer shell (6) from light
assembly.
(2) Remove bulb (5) from light assembly.
B. Map Light Assembly
(1) Unscrew and remove the mounting boot (3) and wire (1 ) .
(2) Remove outer shell retaining clip (4) from light assembly.
(3) Remove the light assembly from its mounting bracket (2).
4. Installation (Ref Fig. 401)

.
A. Map Li g ht Assembly
(1) Position light assembly on its mounting bracket (2).
(2) Install outer shell retaining clip (4) on light assembly.
(3) Install and fasten mounting boot (3) and wire (1)
B. Map Light Bulb
(1) Install bulb (5) to the map light assembly.
(2) Position outer shell (6) and push into position so that retaining clips (4) hold outer shell in
place.
(3) Make sure that illumination from light is aimed at appropriate circuit breaker panel and
adjust color of lens as desired.
C. Close the FLOOD LIGHT circuit breaker and the INSTR LIGHTS circuit breaker.
EFFECTIVITY: All
401
I
Page
33-13-11 Jun 14/92
�PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Test
A. Do an Operational Test of the cockpit/cabin lights system (Ref 33-23-00, Page Block 501 ) .
6. Close Up
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 402
33-13-11 Jun 14/92
"5PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1.WIRE
2. MOUNTING BRACKET
3. MOUNTING BOOT
4. OUTER SHELL
RETAINING CLIP
5. BULB
6. OUTER SHELL
Circuit Breaker Panel Light Assembly - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
I 33-13-11
Page 403
Jun 14/92
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CABIN LIGHTING SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT TEST
1. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
B. Procedure
(1) On the cockpit LH side panel, set the CABIN LIGHT switch up (on).
(2) Make sure that the integral switches on the two cabin lights are set to on.
(3) Make sure the two cabin lights come on.
(4) Set the CABIN LIGHT switch down (off). Make sure the two lights go off.
(5) Open the FLOOD LIGHT circuit breaker (GENERATOR BUS CB panel).
(6) Set the CABIN LIGHT switch up. Make sure that the cockpit and cabin lights do not come
on.
(7) Select CABIN LIGHT switch down.
(8) Close the FLOOD LIGHT circuit breaker.
(9) Set the CABIN LIGHT switch up. Make sure the two cabin lights come on.
(10) Set the CABIN LIGHT switch down.
(a) Set the CABIN LIGHT switch down.
(b) Set the INSTR LIGHTS switch up and make sure that:
• The CB panels lights come on and the intensity can be changed by the
INSTR LIGHTS dimmer control.
(c) Set the CABIN LIGHT switch up and make sure that:
• The CB panel lighting changes to maximum brightness.
C. Close Up
(1) Set the INSTR LIGHTS switch down.
(2) Set the CABIN LIGHT switch down.

CONFIG 1
Page 501
33-23-00 Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CONFIG 1
Page 502
33-23-00 Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CABIN LIGHTING SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT TEST
1. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
B. Procedure
(1) Make sure that the integral switches on the two cabin lights are set to on.
(2) On the cockpit LH side panel, set the INTERNAL LIGHTS - CABIN switch to CABIN.
(3) Make sure the two cabin lights come on.
(4) Set the INTERNAL LIGHTS - CABIN switch to OFF. Make sure the two cabin lights go off.
(5) Open the FLOOD LIGHT circuit breaker (GENERATOR BUS CB panel).
(6) Set the INTERNAL LIGHTS - CABIN switch to CABIN. Make sure that the cockpit and
cabin lights do not come on.
(7) Select INTERNAL LIGHTS - CABIN switch to OFF.
(8) Close the FLOOD LIGHT circuit breaker.
(9) Set the INTERNAL LIGHTS - CABIN switch to CABIN. Make sure the two cabin lights
come on.
(a) Set the INTERNAL LIGHTS - CABIN switch to OFF.
(b) Set the INTERNAL LIGHTS - INSTR switch to INSTR and make sure that:
• The CB panels lights come on and the intensity can be changed by the
INSTR LIGHTS dimmer control.
(c) Set the INTERNAL LIGHTS - CABIN switch to CABIN and make sure that:
• The CB panel lighting changes to maximum brightness.
C. Close Up
(1) Set the INTERNAL LIGHTS - INSTR switch to OFF.

CONFIG 2
Page 501
33-23-00 Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CONFIG 2
Page 502
33-23-00 Feb 28/10
'e PILATUSi!F'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COCKPIT/CABIN LIGHT- REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Job Set Up
A. Open and install a safety clip to the CKPT CABIN LIGHT circuit breaker and the INSTR LIGHT
circuit breaker.
A. Press and hold the catch release (3).
B. Remove the light assembly from its location.
C. To remove the assembly from the aircraft, disconnect the push-fit connectors (5) from their
terminals (4).
D. Remove bulb (1).
A. Install bulb (1).
B. To install the light assembly, connect the push-fit connectors (5) to the assembly terminals (4).
C. Position the retaining clip (2) behind panel location.
D. Press and hold the catch release (3) and install the light assembly.
E. Release the catch release (3) and make sure that the light assembly stays in position.
F. Close the CKPT CABIN LIGHTS circuit breaker and the INSTR LIGHT circuit breaker.
5. Test
A. Do an Operational Test of the cockpit/cabin lights system (Ref 33-23-00, Page Block 501).
6. Close Up
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 401
33-23-11 Jun 14/92
"'EPILATUSE"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
��M ...-=��:-��)
1 rrrifr:�� I
--
�
i
-�-;1
I
I
L______ -- ______
'
_J
�--··�-,,
3. CATCH RELEASE
2. RETAINING CLIP
Cockpit/Cabin Light Assembly - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
I 33-23-11
Page 402
Jun 14/92
•PILATUSl!EF'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DC-DC CONVERTER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Job Set Up
A. Open and install a safety clip to the CKPT CABIN LIGHT circuit breaker and the INSTR LIGHT
circuit breaker.
A. Open acess panel F1.
B. Support the DC-DC converter and remove the screws and washers (3) which secure it to FR1.
C. Disconnect electrical connector (2) from DC-DC converter (1).
D. Remove the DC-DC converter from the aircraft.
A. Connect electrical connector (2) to the DC-DC converter.
B. Position the DC-DC converter (1) and secure to FR1 using washers and screws (3).
c. Close access panel F1.
D. Close the CKPT CABIN LIGHTS circuit breaker and the INSTR LIGHT circuit breaker.
5. Test
A. Do an Operational Test of the cockpit/cabin lights system (Ref 33-23-00, Page Block 501).
6. Close Up
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page401
33-23-12 Jun 14/92
"ePILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COCKPIT VIEW
(LH INSTUMENT PANEL REMOVED)
-
-
--
1. DC-DC CONVERTER
\ \ 2. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
DC-DC Converter - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 402
33-23-12 Jun 14/92
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTERIOR LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The basic exterior lighting system comprises the following subsystems which are described in the
paragraphs that follow:
• Left-wing landing-light (right-wing landing-light optional)

• Position lights (sometimes refered to as navigation lights), and strobe lights
• Upper and lower beacon lights (optional)
A. Landing Lights
Pre SB 33-002 (Ref. Fig. 1, Sht. 1):
The landing lights/motor assemblies are flush-mounted to the lower surface of each wing.
The right-wing landing-light is optional. Two sets of two switches control the operation of
the lights. Each set of switches comprises a LANDING LIGHT - on/off switch and a
LANDING LIGHT POS - UP/OFF/DOWN control switch, one set for each light. The
switches for the right-wing landing-light are optional.
By using the LANDING LIGHT POS - UP/OFF/DOWN switch, each light can be actuated
through 90° from its vertically downward pointing position to fully forward and can be
stopped at any position in between. Power for the LH landing light and its motor is supplied
by the battery busbar via circuit breaker which supplies 28V DC to the on/off and UP/
DOWN switches. The on/off switch supplies the 28V DC directly to the lamp when
switched to the on position. The UP/OFF/DOWN switch supplies 28V DC to either the UP
or DOWN inputs of the motor which will actuate it in forward or reverse directions
accordingly.
Power for the RH landing light and its motor is supplied by the generator busbar via circuit
breaker CB004. Operation is identical to the LH landing light system described above.
Post SB 33-002 (Ref. Fig. 1, Sht. 2):
The LED landing lights are installed in the leading edge of each wing. The right-wing
landing-light is optional. The landing lights are controlled by the LANDING LIGHT - LH and
RH on/off switches.
Power for the left-wing landing-light is supplied from the battery busbar via circuit breaker
CB003 which supplies 28V DC to the on/off switch. The on/off switch supplies the 28V DC
directly to the LED lamp when switched to the on position.
Power for the optional right-wing landing-light is supplied from the generator busbar via
circuit breaker CB004. Operation is identical to the LH landing light system described
above.

CONFIG 1
Page 1
33-40-00 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Position (Navigation), and Strobe Lights
The position and strobe lights system comprises the following:
• A tail light assembly containing a white position light.

• Two wing light assemblies each having a colored position light (red LH and green RH) and
a white xeon strobe light.
• Two power supplies, one for each wing light assembly
• A POS/STROBE switch located on the cockpit LH side panel
The POS/STROBE switch is used to illuminate the position lights only (POS), or the position
lights together with the strobe lights (STROBE). The position lights and strobe light power
supplies are powered by separate 28V DC busbars to ensure operation of at least one system in
the event of a single busbar failure. The power supplies convert the 28V DC to the high-energy
pulses required by the strobe lights. The SYNCH inputs of each power supply are linked to
synchronize the strobe lights.
The battery busbar supplies 28V DC to the tail position light via the POS/STROBE switch and to
the left and right position lights via the respective wing power supplies. Circuit protection is
provided by a circuit breaker which is placarded NAV LIGHTS. The generator busbar supplies
power to the strobe light power supplies.
C. Beacon Lights
Pre SB 33-003:
The optional beacon lights system comprises the following:
• Two incandescent red rotating beacons, located on the upper and lower fuselage
• A BEACON switch located on the cockpit LH side panel
Both beacons are connected to the BEACON/NAV circuit breaker for lighting and motor
power via the BEACON switch.
Post SB 33-003:
• Two flashing red LED fixed beacons, located on the upper and lower fuselage
• A BEACON switch located on the cockpit LH side panel
Both beacons are connected to the BEACON/NAV circuit breaker via the BEACON switch.

CONFIG 1
Page 2
33-40-00 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OPTION GEN BUS

LANDING
LANDING LIGHT ON/OFF RIGHT WING
LIGHT RH LANDING
LIGHT
LANDING LIGHT POS
UP
OFF MOTOR
DOWN
BAT BUS
LANDING
LANDING LIGHT ON/OFF LEFT WING
LIGHT LH LANDING
LIGHT
LANDING LIGHT POS
UP
OFF MOTOR
DOWN
OPTION
UPPER
BEACON BEACON
LOWER
BEACON
TAIL NAV
BAT BUS LIGHT
NAV
NAV
NAV
LIGHT
POWER
SUPPLY
STROBE
RIGHT WING
STROBE
LIGHT
SYNCRONIZATION
NAV NAV
LIGHT
GEN BUS
POWER
STROBE SUPPLY
STROBE LEFT WING
STROBE
LIGHT
POS +
POS/STROBE OFF POS STROBE
NOTE: REFER TO TEXT FOR VARIOUS

6347
BEACON SUPPLY CONNECTIONS:

S042 INTERNAL CONFIGURATION
Exterior Lights - Schematic - Pre SB 33-002


CONFIG 1
Page 3
33-40-00 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OPTION
GEN BUS
LANDING
LANDING LIGHT ON/OFF
LIGHT RH RIGHT WING
LANDING
LIGHT
BAT BUS
LANDING
LANDING LIGHT ON/OFF
LIGHT LH
LEFT WING
LANDING
LIGHT
OPTION
UPPER
BEACON BEACON
LOWER
BEACON
TAIL NAV
BAT BUS LIGHT
NAV
NAV
NAV
LIGHT
POWER
SUPPLY
STROBE
RIGHT WING
STROBE
LIGHT
SYNCRONIZATION
NAV NAV
LIGHT
GEN BUS
POWER
STROBE SUPPLY
STROBE LEFT WING
STROBE
LIGHT
POS +

6817
Exterior Lights - Schematic - Post SB 33-002


CONFIG 1
Page 4
33-40-00 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTERIOR LIGHTS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The basic exterior lighting system comprises the following subsystems which are described in the
paragraphs that follow:
• left wing landing light (right wing landing light optional)

• position lights (sometimes referred to as navigation lights), and strobe lights
• upper and lower beacon lights (optional)
A. Landing Lights
Aircraft with incandescent motorized landing lights - Pre SB 33-002 (Ref. Fig. 1, Sht. 1):
The aircraft has a landing light/motor assembly flush-mounted on the underside of the LH
wing (a RH wing landing light is optional). Two switches, LANDING LIGHTS - ON/OFF and
LANDING LIGHTS - UP/ OFF/DOWN control the operation of the light(s). The switches
are installed on the cockpit LH side panel. If the optional RH landing light is installed, the
switches control the two landing lights.
With the LANDING LIGHTS - UP/OFF/DOWN switch you can move the light(s) through
90° from the vertically downward pointing position to fully forward, and stop at any position
in between. Power for the LH landing light and its motor is supplied by the battery busbar
through the circuit breaker which supplies 28V DC to the two switches. The ON/OFF
switch supplies the 28V DC directly to the light(s) when switched to the ON position. The
UP/OFF/DOWN switch supplies 28V DC to either the UP or DOWN inputs of the motor to
turn it in the forward or reverse direction.
Power for the RH landing light (if installed) and its motor is supplied by the generator
busbar through circuit breaker CB004.
Aircraft with fixed LED landing lights (Ref. Fig. 1, Sht. 2):
The aircraft has a LED landing light installed in the leading edge of the LH wing. A RH
wing landing-light is optional. The LANDING LIGHTS - ON/OFF switch controls the
operation of the landing light. The switch is installed on the cockpit LH side panel. If the
optional RH landing light is installed, the switch controls the two landing lights.
Power for the left-wing landing-light is supplied from the battery busbar via circuit breaker
CB003 which supplies 28V DC to the ON/OFF switch. The ON/OFF switch supplies the
28V DC directly to the LED lamp when switched to the ON position.
Power for the optional right-wing landing-light is supplied from the generator busbar via
circuit breaker CB004. Operation is identical to the LH landing light system described
above.

CONFIG 2
Page 1
33-40-00 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Position (Navigation), and Strobe Lights
The position and strobe lights system comprises the following:
• a tail light assembly containing a white position light.

• two wing light assemblies each having a colored position light (red LH and green RH) and
a white xeon strobe light.
• two power supplies, one for each wing light assembly
• a NAV LIGHTS - POS/STROBE/OFF switch located on the cockpit LH side panel.
The POS/STROBE/OFF switch is used to illuminate the position lights only (POS), or the position
lights together with the strobe lights (STROBE). The position lights and strobe light power
supplies are powered by separate 28V DC busbars to ensure operation of at least one system in
the event of a single busbar failure. The power supplies convert the 28V DC to the high-energy
pulses required by the strobe lights. The outputs of each power supply are linked to synchronize
the strobe lights.
The battery busbar supplies 28V DC to the tail position light through the POS/STROBE/OFF
switch and to the left and right position lights, through the respective wing power supplies.
Circuit protection is provided by the NAV LIGHTS circuit breaker. The generator busbar supplies
power to the strobe light power supplies.
C. Beacon Lights
Aircraft with rotating beacon lights - Pre SB 33-003:
• Two red rotating beacons, located one on the upper, and one on the lower fuselage
• A BEACON/OFF switch located on the cockpit LH side panel
The two beacons lights are supplied with 28V DC from the BAT BUS via the NAV LIGHT
circuit breaker and are operated by the BEACON switch.
Aircraft with fixed LED beacon lights:
• Two flashing red LED fixed beacons, located on the upper and lower fuselage
• A BEACON/OFF switch located on the cockpit LH side panel
The two beacons lights are supplied with 28V DC from the BAT BUS via the NAV LIGHT
circuit breaker and are operated by the BEACON switch.

CONFIG 2
Page 2
33-40-00 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OPTION GEN BUS
RH LDG LANDING LIGHTS RIGHT WING

LIGHT ON/OFF LANDING
LIGHT
LANDING LIGHTS POS
UP
OFF MOTOR
DOWN
BAT BUS
LH LDG LANDING LIGHTS LEFT WING

LIGHT ON/OFF LANDING
LIGHT
LANDING LIGHTS POS
UP
OFF MOTOR
DOWN
OPTION
UPPER
BEACON BEACON
LOWER
BEACON
TAIL POS
BAT BUS LIGHT
NAV
LIGHT
POS
POS
LIGHT
POWER
SUPPLY
STROBE
RIGHT WING
STROBE
LIGHT
SYNCRONIZATION
POS POS
LIGHT
GEN BUS
POWER
STROBE SUPPLY
LIGHT LEFT WING
STROBE
STROBE
LIGHT
POS +

6670
Exterior Lights - Schematic - Pre SB 33-002


CONFIG 2
Page 3
33-40-00 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OPTION
GEN BUS
RH LDG LANDING LIGHTS

LIGHT ON/OFF
RIGHT WING
LANDING
LIGHT
BAT BUS
LH LDG LANDING LIGHTS

LIGHT ON/OFF
LEFT WING
LANDING
LIGHT
OPTION
UPPER
BEACON BEACON
LOWER
BEACON
TAIL POS
BAT BUS LIGHT
NAV
LIGHT
POS
POS
LIGHT
POWER
SUPPLY
STROBE
RIGHT WING
STROBE
LIGHT
SYNCRONIZATION
POS POS
LIGHT
GEN BUS
POWER
STROBE SUPPLY
LIGHT LEFT WING
STROBE
STROBE
LIGHT
POS +

6818
Exterior Lights - Schematic - Aircraft with LED Landing Lights


CONFIG 2
Page 4
33-40-00 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT TEST
1. General
This page block gives the procedures to do an operational test of all the exterior lights.
Not applicable.
3. Procedure
A. Landing Lights - Operational Test
WARNING: DO NOT LOOK DIRECTLY AT THE LANDING LIGHT. THE LIGHT FROM THE
LANDING LIGHT CAN DAMAGE YOUR EYES.
(2) Set the LH LANDING LIGHT switch to on.
(3) Make sure that the left landing light comes on.
(4) Set the LH LANDING LIGHT switch to off. Make sure that the left landing light goes off.
(5) Open the LH LDG LIGHT circuit breaker (LH CB panel).
(6) Set the LH LANDING LIGHT switch to on. Make sure that the left landing light does not
come on.
(7) Select LH LANDING LIGHT switch to off.
(8) Close the LH LDG LIGHT circuit breaker.
(9) Set the LH LANDING LIGHT switch to on. Make sure that the left landing light comes on.
(10) Set the LH LANDING LIGHT switch to off.
(11) Do Steps 3.A.(2) thru (10) for the RH landing light (if installed).
(12) On aircraft Pre SB 33-002:
(a) Set the LEFT LANDING LIGHT POS switch to DOWN and hold until left landing
light completes its travel. Make sure that is fully extended.
(b) Set the LEFT LANDING LIGHT POS switch to UP and hold until left landing light
completes its travel to the stowed position. Make sure that light is fully retracted.
(c) Do Steps 3.A.(12)(a) and (b) for the RH landing light (if installed).
(13) On aircraft Post SB 33-002, if necessary adjust the landing light beam as follows (Ref. Fig.
501):
(a) Turn the top mounting screw (1) by a small amount to loosen it.

CONFIG 1
Page 501
33-40-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Turn the inboard and/or outboard adjusting screw (2) as necessary to adjust the
beam. To get the standard light beam setting:
(i) Turn the inboard adjusting screw (2) counter-clockwise five complete turns.
(ii) Turn the outboard adjusting screw (2) counter-clockwise nine complete turns.
(c) Fully tighten the top mounting screw (1).
B. Position (Navigation) and Strobe Lights - Operational Test
(2) Set the POS/STROBE switch to POS.
(3) Make sure that each position light comes on.
(4) Set the POS/STROBE switch to OFF. Make sure that all position lights go off.
(5) Open the NAV circuit breaker (BATTERY BUS CB panel).
(6) Set the POS/STROBE switch to POS. Make sure that the position lights do not come on.
(7) Select POS/STROBE switch to OFF.
(8) Close the NAV circuit breaker.
(9) Set the POS/STROBE switch to POS. Make sure that all position lights come on.
(10) Set the POS/STROBE switch to STROBE.
(11) Make sure that each wing tip strobe light flashes and that all position lights come on.
(12) Set the POS/STROBE switch to OFF. Make sure that both strobe lights and all position
lights go off.
(13) Open the STROBE circuit breaker (GEN BUS CB panel).
(14) Set the POS/STROBE switch to STROBE. Make sure that the wing tip strobe lights do not
come on and that the position lights do come on.
(15) Select POS/STROBE switch to OFF.
(16) Close the STROBE circuit breaker.
(17) Set the POS/STROBE switch to STROBE. Make sure that the wing tip strobe lights and all
position lights come on.
(18) Set the POS/STROBE switch to OFF.
C. Beacon Lights - Operational Test
(2) Set the BEACON switch to on.

CONFIG 1
Page 502
33-40-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Make sure that the upper and lower beacon lights come on (rotate or flash).
(4) Set the BEACON switch to off. Make sure that the two beacon lights go off.
(5) Open the NAV circuit breaker (BATTERY BUS CB panel).
(6) Set the BEACON switch to on. Make sure that the beacon lights do not come on.
(7) Select BEACON switch to off.
(8) Close the NAV circuit breaker or the BEACON circuit breaker.
(9) Set the BEACON switch to on. Make sure that the two beacon lights operate.
(10) Set the BEACON switch to off.
D. Close Up
(1) Make sure all light switches are set to off.

CONFIG 1
Page 503
33-40-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
LH SHOWN
RH SIMILAR
2 2
B
6873
LED Landing Lights - Adjustment Test

Figure 501

CONFIG 1
Page 504
33-40-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT TEST
1. General
This page block gives the procedures to do an operational test of all the exterior lights.
Not applicable.
3. Procedures
A. Landing Lights - Operational Test
WARNING: DO NOT LOOK DIRECTLY AT THE LANDING LIGHT. THE LIGHT FROM THE
LANDING LIGHT CAN DAMAGE YOUR EYES.
(2) For aircraft with the LH landing light only:
(a) On the cockpit LH side panel, set the LANDING LIGHTS - ON/OFF switch to ON.
(b) Make sure that the landing light comes on.
(c) Set the LANDING LIGHTS - ON/OFF switch to OFF. Make sure that the landing light
goes off.
(d) Open the LH LDG LIGHT circuit breaker (BATTERY BUS CB panel).
(e) Set the LANDING LIGHTS - ON/OFF switch to ON. Make sure that the landing light
does not come on.
(f) Select the LANDING LIGHTS - ON/OFF switch to OFF.
(g) Close the LH LDG LIGHT circuit breaker.
(h) Set the LANDING LIGHTS - ON/OFF switch to ON. Make sure that the landing light
comes on.
(i) Set the LANDING LIGHTS - ON/OFF switch to OFF.
(j) On aircraft equipped with retractable incandescent landing lights:
(i) Set and hold the LANDING LIGHTS position switch to DOWN until the
landing light motor stops. Make sure the light is fully down (90 degree to the
wing bottom surface).
(ii) Set and hold the LANDING LIGHTS position switch to UP until the landing
light stops. Make sure the landing light is flush with the wing bottom surface.
(3) For aircraft with LH and RH landing lights:
(a) On the cockpit LH side panel, set the LANDING LIGHTS - ON/OFF switch to ON.

CONFIG 2
Page 501
33-40-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Make sure that the LH and RH landing lights come on.
(c) Set the LANDING LIGHTS - ON/OFF switch to OFF. Make sure that the LH and RH
landing lights go off.
(d) Open the LH LDG LIGHT circuit breaker (BATTERY BUS CB panel).
(e) Open the RH LDG LIGHT circuit breaker (GENERATOR BUS CB panel).
(f) Set the LANDING LIGHTS - ON/OFF switch to ON. Make sure that the LH and RH
landing lights do not come on.
(g) Select the LANDING LIGHTS - ON/OFF switch to OFF.
(h) Close the LH LDG LIGHT and RH LDG LIGHT circuit breakers.
(i) Set the LANDING LIGHTS - ON/OFF switch to ON. Make sure that the LH and RH
landing lights come on.
(j) Set the LANDING LIGHTS - ON/OFF switch to OFF.
(k) On aircraft Pre SB 33-002:
(i) Set and hold the LANDING LIGHTS position switch to DOWN until the motors
of the LH and RH landing light stop. Make sure the LH and RH lights are fully
down (90 degree to the wing bottom surface).
(ii) Set and hold the LANDING LIGHTS position switch to UP until the motors of
the LH and RH landing light stop. Make sure the LH and RH landing lights are
flush with the wing bottom surface.
(l) On aircraft Post SB 33-002, if necessary adjust the landing light beam as follows
(Ref. Fig. 501):
(i) Turn the top mounting screw (1) by a small amount to loosen it.
(ii) Turn the inboard and/or outboard adjusting screw (2) as necessary to adjust
the beam. To get the standard light beam setting:
• Turn the inboard adjusting screw (2) counter-clockwise five complete

turns
• Turn the outboard adjusting screw (2) counter-clockwise nine complete
turns.
(iii) Fully tighten the top mounting screw (1).
B. Position (Navigation) and Strobe Lights - Operational Test
(2) Set the NAV LIGHTS - OFF/POS/STROBE switch to POS.
(3) Make sure that the three position lights come on.

CONFIG 2
Page 502
33-40-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Set the NAV LIGHTS - OFF/POS/STROBE switch to OFF. Make sure that the three
position lights go off.
(5) Open the NAV LIGHT circuit breaker (BATTERY BUS CB panel).
(6) Set the NAV LIGHTS - OFF/POS/STROBE switch to POS. Make sure that the three
position lights do not come on.
(7) Select NAV LIGHTS - OFF/POS/STROBE switch to OFF.
(8) Close the NAV LIGHT circuit breaker.
(9) Set the NAV LIGHTS - OFF/POS/STROBE switch to POS. Make sure that the three
position lights come on.
(10) Set the NAV LIGHTS - OFF/POS/STROBE switch to STROBE.
(11) Make sure that each wing tip strobe light flashes and that the three position lights come
on.
(12) Set the NAV LIGHTS - OFF/POS/STROBE switch to OFF. Make sure that both strobe
lights and the three position lights go off.
(13) Open the STROBE LIGHT circuit breaker (GEN BUS CB panel).
(14) Set the NAV LIGHTS - OFF/POS/STROBE switch to STROBE. Make sure that the wing tip
strobe lights do not come on and that the three position lights do come on.
(15) Select NAV LIGHTS - OFF/POS/STROBE switch to OFF.
(16) Close the STROBE LIGHT circuit breaker.
(17) Set the NAV LIGHTS - OFF/POS/STROBE switch to STROBE. Make sure that the wing tip
strobe lights and the three position lights come on.
(18) Set the NAV LIGHTS - OFF/POS/STROBE switch to OFF.
C. Beacon Lights - Operational Test
(2) Set the NAV LIGHTS - OFF/BEACON switch to BEACON.
(3) Make sure that the upper and lower beacon lights come on (rotate or flash).
(4) Set the NAV LIGHTS - OFF/BEACON switch to OFF. Make sure that the two beacon lights
go off.
(5) Open the NAV LIGHTS circuit breaker (BATTERY BUS CB panel).
(6) Set the NAV LIGHTS - OFF/BEACON switch to BEACON. Make sure that the beacon
lights do not come on.
(7) Set the NAV LIGHTS - OFF/BEACON switch to OFF.
(8) Close the NAV LIGHTS circuit breaker.

CONFIG 2
Page 503
33-40-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(9) Set the NAV LIGHTS - OFF/BEACON switch to BEACON. Make sure that the beacon
lights operate.
(10) Set the NAV LIGHTS - OFF/BEACON switch to OFF.
D. Close Up
(1) Set all light switches to OFF.

CONFIG 2
Page 504
33-40-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
LH SHOWN
RH SIMILAR
2 2
B
6873
LED Landing Lights - Adjustment Test

Figure 501

CONFIG 2
Page 505
33-40-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CONFIG 2
Page 506
33-40-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NAV / POSITION AND STROBE LIGHT ASSEMBLY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
110.88.07.065 Safety Clip Circuit breaker hold open
P01-008 Solvent Or equivalent

P08-018 Sealant PR 1422B-2
2. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
NAV LIGHT
STROBE LIGHT
B. Remove the Wing NAV/Position Light Bulb (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Remove the dome-head screw (7) and the flat-head screws (8) from the light cover
assembly (6).
(2) Remove the light cover assembly (6) to get access and remove the position light bulb (9).
C. Remove the Wing Tip Fairing LB16 or RB14 (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Support the wing tip fairing (11) and remove the attachment screws.
(2) Move the wing tip fairing (11) until you can get access to the connector (1).
(3) Disconnect the wing light connector (1) from the power supply unit (PSU).
(4) Remove the wing tip fairing (11) from the aircraft.
D. Remove the Wing Light Assembly (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Remove the wing tip fairing (Ref. Para. C.).
(2) Remove the position-light end-cap and disconnect the supply wire.
(3) Remove the dome-head screw (7) and the flat-head screws (8) from the light cover
assembly (6).
(4) Remove the light cover assembly (6).
EFFECTIVITY: 101 thru 942 that are Pre SB 33-001 CONFIG 1

Page 401
33-41-11 Dec 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Remove the nut (2) and disconnect the grounding wire (3).
(6) Remove the pillar screws (5).
(7) Remove the base (4) from the wing tip fairing (11).
(8) Use solvent (Material No. P01-008) and absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) to
remove the old sealant from the wing tip fairing (11).
E. Install the Wing NAV/Position Light Bulb (Ref. Fig. 401)
CAUTION: USE ABSORBENT PAPER (OR EQUIVALENT) TO HANDLE THE NEW BULB.
GREASE FROM YOUR FINGERS CAN CAUSE THE BULB TO FAIL.
(1) Install the new position light bulb (9).
(2) Make sure the lens seating washer (10) is serviceable and correctly installed.
(3) Install the light cover assembly (6) with the flat-head screws (8) and the dome-head screw
(7).
F. Install the Wing Light Assembly (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Apply a layer of sealant (Material No. P08-018) to the mating surface of the base (4).
(2) Install the base (4) with the pillar screws (5).
(3) Remove unwanted sealant with absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with
(4) Connect the grounding wire (3) with the nut (2).
(5) Connect the supply wire and install the position-light end-cap.
(6) Make sure the position light bulb (9) is clean and correctly installed.
(7) Make sure the lens seating washer (10) is correctly installed.
(8) Install the light cover assembly (6) with the flat-head screws (8) and the dome-head screw
(4).
G. Install the Wing Tip Fairing LB16 or RB14 (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Support the wing tip fairing (11) in a position where you can connect the connector (1).
(2) Connect the wing light connector (1) to the PSU.
(3) Install the wing tip fairing (11) with the attachment screws.
H. Test
NAV LIGHT
STROBE LIGHT

Page 402
33-41-11 Dec 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Do an Operational Test of the Nav/Position and Strobe Lights (Ref. 33-40-00, Page Block
501).
I. Close Up

Page 403
33-41-11 Dec 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
1
A
LH LIGHT ASSEMBLY SHOWN
RH SIMILAR
11
POSITION LIGHT
SUPPLY WIRE
POSITION LIGHT
END CAP
10
2
9
3
4
8
6
7
6350
Wing Light Assembly - Removal/Installation

Figure 401

Page 404
33-41-11 Dec 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NAV / POSITION AND STROBE LIGHT ASSEMBLY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This Topic gives separate removal/installation procedures to:
• Replace the complete light assembly

• Replace the flash tube
• Replace the NAV lamp
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
NAV LIGHT
STROBE LIGHT
B. Removal of the Light Assembly (Ref. Fig 401)
(1) Remove the three screws (6).
CAUTION: THE NAV LIGHT LENS IS HELD IN POSITION BY A RUBBER GASKET ONLY.
WHEN YOU REMOVE THE COVER ASSEMBLY MAKE SURE THE NAV LIGHT
LENS DOES NOT FALL OUT AND BREAK.
(2) Remove the cover assembly (5) until you can get access to the electrical connector (2).
(3) If the NAV light lens is loose, remove it.
(5) Remove the three pillar screws (4).
(6) Remove the base (3) from the wing tip until you can get access to the electrical connector
(1).
(7) Disconnect the electrical connector (1) and remove the base (3).
(9) Make sure the electrical connectors (1) and (2) do not get pushed back inside the wing tip.
EFFECTIVITY: 943 and up or Post SB 33-001 CONFIG 2

Page 401
33-41-11 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Installation of the Light Assembly (Ref. Fig 401)
(2) Hold the base (3) near the wing tip and connect the electrical connector (1).
(3) Put the electrical connector (2) through the related hole in the base (3).
(4) Install the base (3) to the wing tip with the three pillar screws (4).
(6) If necessary, install the NAV light lens.
(7) Install the cover assembly (5) with the three screws (6).
D. Removal of the Flash Tube (Ref. Fig 402)
(2) Remove the cover assembly (4), complete with the flash tube (3), until you can get access
to the electrical connector (2).
(3) If the NAV light lens (6) is loose, remove it.
(5) Put a blank on the electrical connector (2).
(6) Make sure the electrical connector (2) does not get pushed back inside the wing tip.
(7) Remove the flash tube (3) from the cover assembly (4).
E. Installation of the Flash Tube (Ref. Fig 402)
(1) Remove the blank from the electrical connector (2).
(2) Connect the electrical connector (2) to the new flash tube (3).
(3) Put the flash tube (3) in the installed position on the three pillar screws (1).
(4) If necessary, install the NAV light lens (6).
(5) Install the cover assembly (4) with the three screws (5).
F. Removal of the NAV Lamp (Ref. Fig 402)

Page 402
33-41-11 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Remove the cover assembly (4), complete with the flash tube (3), until you can get access
to the NAV light lens (6).
(3) Remove the NAV light lens (6).
(4) Remove the NAV lamp (7).
G. Installation of the NAV Lamp (Ref. Fig 402)
(1) Install the new NAV lamp (7).
(2) Make sure the rubber gasket (8) is serviceable and correctly installed.
(3) Install the NAV light lens (6).
(4) Install the cover assembly (4), complete with the flash tube (3), with the three screws (5).
H. Test
NAV LIGHT
STROBE LIGHT
501).
I. Close Up

Page 403
33-41-11 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
LH WING TIP SHOWN
RH SIMILAR
B
3
6
6729
Light Assembly - Removal/Installation

Figure 401

Page 404
33-41-11 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8
7
B
2 1
4
6730
Flash Tube and NAV Lamp - Removal/Installation

Figure 402

Page 405
33-41-11 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

Page 406
33-41-11 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WING STROBE-LIGHT POWER-SUPPLY UNIT - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

- Non-Metallic Scraper Local supply

P04-014 Heat Conducting Paste
2. Procedures
3. Job Set Up
NAV LIGHT
STROBE LIGHT
(1) Support the wing tip fairing and remove the attachment screws.
(2) Move the wing tip fairing until you can get access to the connector (5).
(3) Disconnect the wing light connector (5) from the power supply unit (PSU)(4).
(4) Remove the wing tip fairing from the aircraft.
(5) Disconnect the aircraft power-supply connector (6) from the PSU (4).
(6) Remove the screws (3) and washers (2).
(7) Remove the PSU (4).
B. Installation
(1) Use solvent (Material No. P01-008) and absorbent paper (Material No. (P02-031) to
remove the old heat conducting paste from the mounting plate (1). If necessary, you can
use a non-metallic scraper to do this.
(2) Apply a thin layer of heat conducting paste (Material No. P08-014) to the mating surface
(6) of the new PSU (4).
(3) Install the PSU (4) with the screws (3) and washers (2).

Page 401
33-41-12 Dec 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Connect the aircraft power-supply connector (6) to the PSU (4).
(5) Make sure the protective edging strip (7) is correctly attached.
(6) Make sure the inside of the wing is clean.
(7) Hold the wing tip fairing in a position where you can connect the wing light connector (5) to
the PSU (4).
(8) Install the wing tip fairing with the attachment screws.
NAV LIGHT
STROBE LIGHT
C. Test
501).
D. Close Up

Page 402
33-41-12 Dec 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
WING TIP FAIRING
2
3
B
LH WING POWER SUPPLY SHOWN
RH SIMILAR
6
4
5
6370
Wing Light PSU - Removal/Installation

Figure 401

Page 403
33-41-12 Dec 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

Page 404
33-41-12 Dec 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WING STROBE LIGHT POWER SUPPLY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

2. Procedures
3. Job Set Up
NAV LIGHT
STROBE LIGHT
(2) Support the wing tip fairing and remove the attachment screws.
(3) Move the wing tip fairing until you can get access to the connectors for the wing light
assembly.
(4) Disconnect the connectors for the wing light assembly (Ref. 33-41-11, Page Block 401).
(5) Remove the wing tip fairing from the aircraft.
(1) Record the positions of the connectors (5) and (6).
(2) Disconnect the connectors (5) and (6) from the power supply unit (PSU) (4).
(3) Remove the screws (3), the washers (2) and the PSU (4).
(1) Use solvent (Material No. P01-008) and absorbent paper (Material No. (P02-031) to clean
around the two holes in the mounting plate (1) used for electrical bonding.
(2) Make sure the related lugs on the PSU (4) are clean.
(3) Install the PSU (4) with the screws (3) and the washers (2).
(4) Connect the connectors (5) and (6) in the positions recorded during removal.

Page 401
33-41-12 Dec 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Close Up
(1) Make sure that the inside of the wing is clean and clear of tools and other items.
(2) Hold the wing tip fairing in a position where you can connect the wing light connectors.
(3) Connect the connectors to the wing light assembly (Ref. 33-41-11, Page Block 401).
(4) Install the wing tip fairing with the attachment screws.
NAV LIGHT
STROBE LIGHT
501).

Page 402
33-41-12 Dec 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
LH WING TIP SHOWN
RH SIMILAR
6
5
2
3
6728
PSU - Removal/Installation
Figure 401

Page 403
33-41-12 Dec 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

Page 404
33-41-12 Dec 31/11
;EiPILATUSiF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAIL LIGHT ASSEMBLY- REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
110 88 07 0 65
. . . Safety clip Circuit breaker hold open
POS-013 Sealant Pro Seal 890B-1/2
2. Job Set Up
NAV LIGHT
3. Removal
A. Tail Light Bulb
(1) Remove the lens retaining spring clip (4)
(2) Remove the lens (1), the seating washer (3) and the bulb (2).
B. Tail Light Assembly
(1) Remove tail light securing screw (5), nut and washer.
(2) Withdraw tail light assembly (7) until you can get access to the electrical cable.
(3) Loosen the wire securing screws (6) and remove the electrical cable from the terminals.
(4) Remove the tail light assembly from the aircraft.
(5) Clean the old sealant from the aircraft structure.
A. Tail Nav Light Bulb
(1) Install the bulb (2).
(2) Install the lens (1), making sure that the seating washer (3) is correctly positioned.
(3) Install the lens retaining clip (4).
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 401
33-41-13 Jun 14/92
"'55 PILATUS 5F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Tail Light Assembly
(1) Install the electrical cable to the terminals and tighten the wire securing screws (6).
(2) Apply sealant (1 O) to the tail light assembly.
(3) Put the tail light assembly (7) into position and fasten using the tail light securing screw (5)
and the washer and nut (9).
(4) Clean excess sealant from the aircraft structure.
C. Remove the safety clip and close the NAY circuit breaker.
5. Test
A. Do an Operational Test of the Nav/Position and Strobe Lights (Ref. 33-40-00, Page Block 501).
6. Close Up
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 402
33-41-13 Jun 14/92
;& PILATUSE"'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. TAILLIGHT /
I
SECURING SCREW
I G SCREWS
6. WIRE SECURN
I
I
I
Tail Light Assembly- Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 403
33-41-13 Jun 14/92
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LANDING LIGHT ASSEMBLY - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
2. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) Make sure the landing light is retracted.
(2) Open and install a safety clip to the applicable circuit breaker:
LH LDG LIGHT (Left wing landing light)

RH LDG LIGHT (Right wing landing light).
(1) Support the landing light assembly (2) and remove the screws (3).
(2) Withdraw the landing light assembly and tag the wires (1).
(3) Remove the associated nuts and washers and remove the wiring (1).
(4) Remove the landing light assembly (2) from the aircraft.
(1) Install the wiring (1) to the terminals.
(2) Install the washers and nuts and remove the tags from the wires (1).
(3) Put the landing light assembly (2) in the correct position and install the screws (3).
(4) Make sure the landing light assembly (2) is installed with the crescent shaped reflector
positioned inboard.
3. Close Up
(1) Remove the safety clip and close the applicable circuit breaker:

(2) Do an operational test of the landing lights (Ref. 33-40-00, Page Block 501).
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with incandescent motorized

landing lights
Page 401
33-43-11 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
LH SHOWN
RH SIMILAR
CONTROL UNIT
ASSEMBLY
POWER UNIT
ASSEMBLY
2
SEALED BEAM
LAMP UNIT
ENSURE "CRESCENT" DEFLECTOR

IS POSITIONED INBOARD
6360
Landing Light Assembly - Removal / Installation

Figure 401

landing lights
Page 402
33-43-11 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LANDING-LIGHT LAMP-UNIT - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
2. Procedures
A. Job Set Up

(1) Use needle nose pliers to compress and remove the retaining ring (4).
(2) Remove the lamp unit (5) from the lamp housing to get access to the wires (6).
(3) Give support to the lamp unit (5) and put identification tags on the wires (6).
(4) Loosen the screws (2) and disconnect the wires (6).
(5) Remove the lamp unit (5) from the aircraft.
(1) Connect the wires (6) to the terminals and tighten the screws (2).
(2) Remove the identification tags from the wires (6).
(3) Put the lamp unit (5) in the correct position and install the retaining ring (4).
(4) Make sure the lamp unit (5) is installed with the crescent shaped reflector positioned
inboard.
LH LDG LIGHT (Left wing landing liight)

RH LDG LIGHT (Right wing landing liight).
3. Close Up
(1) Do an operational test of the landing lights (Ref. 33-40-00, Page Block 501).

landing lights CONFIG 1
Page 401
33-43-12 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A A
A
B
LAMP HOUSING
1. KEYWAYS (4 POSITIONS)
6. LAMP POWER SUPPLY WIRING 2. TERMINAL SECURING SCREW
3. KEY
5. SEALED BEAM LAMP UNIT
INSTALL WITH
B
"CRESCENT" DEFLECTOR
POSITIONED INBOARD
4. RETAINING RING
6359
Lamp-Unit - Removal / Installation

Figure 401

landing lights CONFIG 1
Page 402
33-43-12 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LANDING-LIGHT LAMP-UNIT - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

P01-008 Solvent
P08-071 Sealant
1. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
LH LDG LIGHT (Left-wing landing-light)

or
RH LDG LIGHT (Right-wing landing-light)
(1) Remove the screws (13) and special washers (14) which attach the glass cover (15) to the
wing.
(2) Carefully cut the sealant fillet between the glass cover (15) and the wing skin.
(3) Remove the glass cover (15).
(4) Support the landing light (1) and remove the screws (2) and (11), and the washers (3) and
(10).
(5) Move the landing light (1) sufficiently to disconnect the electrical connector (7).
(6) Remove the landing light (1) from the wing.
(7) Put blanking caps (or equivalent) on the electrical connector (7) and receptacle.
(8) Remove the screws (5) and washers (4) and remove the outboard side bracket (6) from
the landing light (1).
(9) Identify the outboard side bracket (6) ‘OUTBD’ to make sure you install it in the same
position in the installation. The side brackets are not interchangeable.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with fixed LED landing lights

CONFIG 2
Page 401
33-43-12 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(10) Remove the screws (9) and washers (8) and remove the inboard side bracket (12) from
the landing light (1).
(11) Identify the inboard side bracket (12) ‘INBD’ to make sure you install it in the same position
in the installation. The side brackets are not interchangeable.
(1) Use solvent (Material No. P01-008) and a non-metallic scraper to remove the old sealant
from the wing and the glass cover (15).
(2) Install the outboard side bracket (6) to the landing light (1) with the washers (4) and screws
(5).
(3) Install the inboard side bracket (12) to the landing light (1) with the washers (8) and screws
(9).
(4) Remove the blanking caps (or equivalent) from the electrical connector (7) and receptacle.
(5) Hold the landing light (1) close to the installed position and connect the electrical
connector (7).
(6) Put the landing light (1) in the installed position and install the screws (2) with the washers
(3), and the screws (11) with the washers (10).
(7) Do the adjustment/test of the landing lights (Ref. 33-40-00, Page Block 501).
(8) Install the glass cover (15) with the special washers (14) and screws (13).
(9) Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. P08-071) between the glass cover (15) and the wing
skin.
(10) Remove unwanted sealant with absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with
LH LDG LIGHT (Left-wing landing-light)

or
RH LDG LIGHT (Right-wing landing-light)
2. Close Up

CONFIG 2
Page 402
33-43-12 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
LH WING SHOWN
15 RH WING SIMILAR
B 2
3 5
4
12
11
14 6
10 7
13
9
B
7
1 6821
Sealed-Beam Lamp-Unit - Removal / Installation

Figure 401

CONFIG 2
Page 403
33-43-12 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CONFIG 2
Page 404
33-43-12 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
UPPER BEACON-LIGHT ASSEMBLY - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION

- Non-metallic scraper Local supply

P01-008 Solvent
P08-071 Sealant
2. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
NAV LIGHT or LIGHTS BEACON or LIGHTS NAV AND BEACON
NOTE: If necessary, you can refer to the Aircraft Wiring Diagram Manual to find the
correct circuit breaker.
(1) Upper Beacon Bulbs
(a) Remove the clamp screw (1) and remove the clamp (2).
(b) Remove the lens (3) from the beacon assembly (6).
(c) Remove the bulbs (4).
(2) Upper Beacon Assembly
(a) Remove the screws (7).
(b) Remove the beacon assembly (6) until you can get access to the electrical
connector (5). Record the position of the electrical connector (5).
(c) Cut and remove the lockwire from the electrical connector (5).
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with rotating beacons

CONFIG 1
Page 401
33-47-11 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Disconnect the electrical connector (5).
(e) Remove the beacon assembly (6) from the aircraft.
(f) Put blanks on the electrical connectors.
(g) Use solvent (Material No. P01-008) and a non-metallic scraper to remove the old
sealant from the aircraft structure.
(1) Upper Beacon Bulbs
(a) Install the bulbs (4) into the sockets.
(b) Put the lens (3) onto the beacon assembly (6).
(c) Install the clamp (2) with the clamp screw (1).
(2) Upper Beacon Assembly
(a) Remove the blanks from the electrical connectors.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR ON THE BEACON

ASSEMBLY IS POSITIONED LATERALLY. ELECTRICAL INTEFERENCE
WITH OTHER EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR IF THE CONNECTOR IS NOT
CORRECTLY POSITIONED.
(b) Apply sealant (Material No. P08-071) to the mating surface of the beacon-assembly
mounting-flange (8) and the aircraft structure.
(c) Connect the electrical connector (5).
(d) Safety the electrical connector (5) with lockwire (Material No. P02-007).
(e) Install the beacon assembly (6) with the electrical connector in the same position as
recorded in the removal procedure.
(f) Install the screws (7).
(g) Use absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with solvent (Material No.
P01-008) to remove unwanted sealant.
D. Test
(2) Do an operational test of the beacon lights (Ref. 33-40-00 Page Block 501).
E. Close Up

CONFIG 1
Page 402
33-47-11 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A A
4
6379
Upper Beacon-Light Assembly - Removal / Installation

Figure 401

CONFIG 1
Page 403
33-47-11 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CONFIG 1
Page 404
33-47-11 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL


P01-008 Solvent
P08-071 Sealant
P09-008 Cable Tie
2. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) On the LH circuit breaker panel, open and install a safety clip to the applicable circuit
breaker:
NAV LIGHT (BATTERY BUS)

or
BEACON (GENERATOR BUS)
(2) Remove the cabin ceiling panel to get access to the light assembly and electrical
connector.
NOTE: Two persons are required to do this procedure, one inside the cabin and one on top of
the fuselage.
(1) Cut and remove the cable tie (8) to release the electrical connector assembly from the
cable mount.
(2) Disconnect the electrical connector P062 (6) from the receptacle J062 (7).
(3) Remove the four screws (1), the washers (4) and the nuts (5).
(4) Remove the beacon assembly (2) from the aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft Post SB 33-003

CONFIG 2
Page 401
33-47-11 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Carefully remove the gasket (3) from the fuselage. If necessary use solvent (Material No.
P01-008) and a non-metallic scraper to do this.
NOTE: The gasket (3) is installed with sealant.
from the aircraft structure.
NOTE: Two persons are required to do this procedure, one inside the cabin and one on top of
the fuselage.
(1) Make sure a new gasket (3) is installed on the beacon light (2).
NOTE: A gasket is supplied with the new beacon light.
(2) Apply a thin layer of sealant (Material No. P08-071) around the hole in the fuselage skin.
(3) Install the beacon light (2) with the screws (1), the washers (4) and the nuts (5).
(4) Connect the electrical connector P062 (6) to the receptacle J062 (7).
(5) Attach the connector assembly to the cable mount with a cable tie (8) (Material No. P09-
008).
(6) Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. P08-071) around the edges of the beacon light.
(7) Use absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with solvent (Material No. P01-
008) to remove unwanted sealant.
D. Test

or
E. Close Up
(2) Install the cabin ceiling panel.

CONFIG 2
Page 402
33-47-11 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4
5
8
6
7
6819

Figure 401

CONFIG 2
Page 403
33-47-11 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CONFIG 2
Page 404
33-47-11 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

P01-008 Solvent
P08-071 Sealant
2. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) On the LH circuit breaker panel, open and install a safety clip to the circuit breaker:
(1) Remove the four screws (1)
(2) Remove the beacon assembly (2) sufficiently to get access to the electrical connector
assembly.
(4) Carefully remove the gasket (3) from the fuselage. If necessary use solvent (Material No.
P01-008) and a non-metallic scraper to do this.
NOTE: The gasket (3) is installed with sealant.
from the aircraft structure.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft MSN 1022 and up with fixed LED

beacons CONFIG 3
Page 401
33-47-11 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Hold the beacon assembly (2) close to the installed position and connect the electrical
connector P062 (6) to the receptacle J062 (7).
(3) Apply a thin layer of sealant (Material No. P08-071) around the hole in the fuselage skin.
(4) Put the electrical connector assembly through the hole in the skin.
(5) Install the beacon light (2) with the screws (1).
(6) Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. P08-071) around the edges of the beacon light.
D. Test
E. Close Up

beacons CONFIG 3
Page 402
33-47-11 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5
6822

Figure 401

beacons CONFIG 3
Page 403
33-47-11 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

beacons CONFIG 3
Page 404
33-47-11 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LOWER BEACON-LIGHT ASSEMBLY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This Topic gives separate removal/installation procedures to:
• Replace one, or both, light bulbs

• Replace the complete beacon assembly
NOTE: A new beacon assy requires a minor repair to permit installation.
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
NOTE: If necessary, you can refer to the Aircraft Wiring Diagram Manual to find the
correct circuit breaker.
(1) Lower Beacon Bulb(s):
(a) Hold the lens (1) then loosen the clamp securing screw (3) and remove the clamp
(2).
(b) Remove the lens (1) from the beacon assembly (6).
(c) Remove the bulb(s) (4).
(2) Lower Beacon Assembly:
(a) Remove the screws (7) that attach the mounting panel (11).
(b) Lower the mounting panel (11), complete with the beacon assembly (6), until you
can get access to the electrical connector (8).

CONFIG 1
Page 401
33-47-12 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Cut and remove the lockwire from the electrical connector (8).
(d) Disconnect the electrical connector (8).
(e) Remove the mounting panel (11) complete with the beacon assembly (6).
(f) Remove the screws (5), nuts (9) and washers (10) to remove the beacon assembly
(6) from the mounting panel (11).
(g) Put blanks on the electrical connectors.
(1) Lower Beacon Bulb(s):
(a) Install the bulb(s) (4).
(b) Hold the lens (1) in position on the beacon assembly (6).
(c) Install the clamp (2) and tighten the clamp securing screw (3).
(2) Lower Beacon Assembly:
(a) If you will install a new beacon assembly, do Minor Repair 01 (Ref. 33-47-12, Page
Block 801).
(b) Remove the blanks from the electrical connectors.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR IS POSITIONED TO AVOID

CONTACT WITH OTHER EQUIPMENT. ELECTRICAL FAULTS CAN
OCCUR IF THE CONNECTOR IS NOT CORRECTLY POSITIONED.
(c) Put the beacon assembly (6) in the mounting panel (11) with the electrical connector
on the RH side (viewed in the direction of flight).
(d) Install the beacon assembly (6) to the mounting panel (11) with screws (5), washers
(10) and nuts (9).
(e) Hold the mounting panel (11) complete with the beacon assembly (6) close to the
installed position and connect the electrical connector (8).
(f) Safety the electrical connector (8) with lockwire (Material No. P02-007).
(g) Install the mounting panel (11) with the screws (7).
D. Test
(2) Do an Operational Test of the Beacon Lights (Ref. 33-40-00 Page Block 501).
E. Close Up

CONFIG 1
Page 402
33-47-12 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A 9
10
11
B
4
3
6384
Light Assembly - Removal/Installation

Figure 401

CONFIG 1
Page 403
33-47-12 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CONFIG 1
Page 404
33-47-12 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LOWER BEACON-LIGHT ASSEMBLY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION


P01-008 Solvent
P08-071 Sealant
P09-008 Cable Tie
2. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) On the LH circuit breaker panel, open and install a safety clip to the applicable circuit
breaker:

or
(1) Give support to the beacon light (6) and remove the four screws (4).
(2) Remove the plate (3), complete with the beacon light, sufficiently to get access to the
electrical connector (2).
(3) Cut and remove the cable tie (1) to release the electrical connector assembly from the
cable mount.
(5) Remove the four screws (7), the washers (8) and the nuts (9).
(6) Remove the beacon light (6) from the plate (3).
from the plate (3).
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with fixed LED beacons

CONFIG 2
Page 401
33-47-12 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Install the beacon light (6) on the plate (3) with the four screws (7), the washers (8) and the
nuts (9).
(3) Hold the beacon light assy near to the installed position and connect the electrical
connector P061 (2) to the receptacle J061 (10).
(4) Attach the connector assembly to the cable mount with a cable tie (1) (Material No. P09-
008).
(5) Install the plate (3), complete with the beacon light, with the four screws (4).
(6) Apply a fillet of sealant (Material No. P08-071) around the edges of the beacon light (6).
D. Test

or
(2) Do an Operational Test of the Beacon Lights (Ref. 33-40-00 Page Block 501).
E. Close Up

CONFIG 2
Page 402
33-47-12 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10
9
8
A
6
6820
Lower Beacon Light - Removal/Installation

Figure 401

CONFIG 2
Page 403
33-47-12 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CONFIG 2
Page 404
33-47-12 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LOWER BEACON-LIGHT ASSEMBLY - MINOR REPAIR 01
1. General
This Page Block gives the data to do the minor repair required to permit installation of a new lower
beacon assembly.
This repair removes material from the flange of the beacon assembly so that it aligns with the edges of
the mounting panel.

P07-007 Primer
P07-021 TCP touch-up
3. Procedures
YOU CUT OR ABRADE METAL.
A. Job Set Up
(1) Remove the old beacon assembly (Ref. 33-47-12, Page Block 401).
(2) Remove the lens and bulbs from the new beacon assembly (Ref. 33-47-12, Page Block
401).
NOTE: This is to prevent damage when you do the repair.
B. Minor Repair (Ref. Fig. 801)
(1) Temporarily install the new beacon assy in the mounting panel. Make sure that the
electrical connector is located on the right side (viewed in the direction of flight).
(2) Make marks (cut lines) on the flange of the beacon assembly to align with the edges of the
mounting panel.
(3) Remove the beacon assembly from the mounting panel.
(4) Put absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) inside the beacon assembly to prevent the
entry of swarf and debris.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with rotating beacons REPAIR 01

Page 801
33-47-12 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Use suitable cutting tools to remove material from the flange as marked.
(6) Deburr the cut edges.
(7) Remove all swarf and debris from inside the beacon assembly. Make sure the beacon
assembly is clean.
(8) Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with solvent (Material No. P01-008)
and clean the cut edges.
(9) Apply TCP touch-up (Material No. P07-021) to all bare metal areas (Ref. 20-40-10, Page
Block 201).
(10) Let the TCP touch-up dry in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(11) Apply a layer of primer (Material No. P07-007) to the repair area.
(12) Let the primer dry in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(13) If necessary, apply topcoat paint to the repair area to match the aircraft color scheme and
let the topcoat dry in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(14) Remove the absorbent paper from the beacon assembly.
C. Close Up
work area is clean.
(2) Install the bulbs and lens (Ref. 33-47-12, Page Block 401).
(3) Install the new beacon assembly (Ref. 33-47-12, Page Block 401).

Page 802
33-47-12 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BEACON
ASSY
MATERIAL TO BE
REMOVED (BOTH SIDES)
CONNECTOR POSITION
ON RH SIDE WHEN
INSTALLED IN THE AIRCRAFT
MOUNTING PANEL
VIEW FROM BELOW

6757
Repair to Permit Installation of a New Lower Beacon Asembly

Figure 801

Page 803
33-47-12 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

Page 804
33-47-12 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 34 - NAVIGATION
Chapter
Section
Subject Pages Date
List of Effective 1 May 14/10
Pages 2 May 14/10
34-11-00 1 Mar 14/95

2 Mar 14/95
34-11-00 501 Feb 28/10

502 Feb 28/10
34-21-00 501 May 14/10

502 May 14/10
503 May 14/10
504 May 14/10
505 May 14/10
506 May 14/10
507 May 14/10
508 May 14/10
Page 1
34-LEP May 14/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
34-LEP May 14/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 34 - NAVIGATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM 34-11-00

STANDBY MAGNETIC COMPASS 34-21-00
Page 1
34-TOC Mar 14/95
� PILATUS !5!!F'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM- DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The pitot-static system supplies pressure in proportion to airspeed and altitude to aircraft systems.
• A pitot head
• Two static ports
The system gives outputs to:
• The vertical speed indicator
• The altimeter(s)
• The airspeed indicator
The system gets an input from the anti-ice system.
The system sends an output to the annunciator panel (if installed).
A. Pitot Head
The pitot head supplies the pitot pressure, through pipelines, to the aircraft systems. The pitot
head is installed on the lower surface of the left wing and points in the direction of flight. The pitot
head is a metal hollow probe installed on an aerodynamically-shaped support. The pitot head
has an electrical connector, a heating element and a pitot connection.
B. Static Ports
The static ports supply static pressure, through pipelines, to the aircraft systems. They are
installed each side of the rear fuselage. The static ports are connected together to keep
pressure errors, because of aircraft yaw, to a minimum. Each static port has a flat face with
pressure inlet holes, a heating element and a static connection.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
34-11-00 Mar 14/95
'e PILAT US !iiF'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STATIC PORTS
PITOTHEAD
WATER DRAIN TRAPS
Pitot-Static System Component Location

Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page2
34-11-00 Mar 14/95
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedure for:
• A pitot system leak check

• A static system leak check

513.34.09.001 Pitot-static test set or equivalent
- Static port blank
- Stop-watch
3. Procedures
A. Pitot System Leak Check
(1) Remove the cover from the pitot head.
(2) Connect the pitot line of the pitot-static test set to the pitot head.
(3) Slowly increase the pitot pressure until the aircraft airspeed indicator shows 120 knots.
(4) Close the pitot valve.
(5) Make sure the indication on the airspeed indicator does not decrease by more than 9
knots in one minute. If the leak rate of the airspeed indicator is more than 9 knots, find and
repair the leak.
NOTE: To overcome friction errors, tapping of instrument surrounds is permitted but do

not tap the instrument glass.
(6) Slowly let the pressure in the pitot system return to ambient pressure.
(7) Disconnect the pitot-static test set from the pitot head.
(8) Install the cover on the pitot head.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 501
34-11-00 Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Static System Leak Check
CAUTION: DO NOT LET THE VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR SHOW MORE THAN 4000 FEET
PER MINUTE WHEN STATIC PRESSURE IS INCREASED OR RELEASED. THE
INSTRUMENT CAPSULES CAN BE DAMAGED.
(1) Install the static port blank on the left static port.
(2) Connect the static line of the pitot-static test set to the right static port.
(3) Set the altimeter to show zero altitude (QFE).
(4) Slowly decrease the pressure in the static system and make sure that:
• the altimeters show an increase in height

• the Vertical Speed Indicators (VSI) show an UP indication
• the Airspeed indicators (ASI) show a small increase in velocity when static pressure
is evacuated
(5) Close the tester static pressure valve when the altimeters show approximately 1000 feet.
(6) Make sure the indication on the altimeters does not decrease more than 100 feet in one
minute. If the decrease is more than 100 feet, find and repair the leak.
(7) Slowly let the pressure in the static system return to ambient pressure.
(8) Remove the static port blank from the left static port.
(9) Disconnect the static line of the pitot-static test set from the left static port.
(10) Make sure the left and right static ports are clear.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 502
34-11-00 Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STANDBY MAGNETIC COMPASS - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. General
A compass swing must be done when:
• the standby magnetic compass is replaced

• the deviation recorded on a previous compass swing is not the same on a check swing
• every two years (VFR operation)
• every year (IFR operation)
A check swing must be done when:
• a modification, repair or major replacement of magnetic material is done

• the aircraft has been struck by lightning
• the aircraft has been subject to magnetic crack detection examination
• an important change is made to the electrical or avionics installation circuits near the compass
• the aircraft has been in long term storage
• you think the system is not accurate
The procedure must be done on an approved compass calibration area using either a compass rose or
datum compass to give the aircraft heading.
The datum compass must be approximately 25 meters (75 feet) from the aircraft and aligned with the
aircraft's longitudinal axis at each heading. The compass reading is then compared with the datum
compass reading.
When you use a datum compass it is not necessary for the aircraft to be exactly on the applicable swing
heading. Sightings taken within ± 2° of the heading are acceptable.
NOTE: When you use a datum compass you must remember to make allowance for the direction you
are facing when you calculate the datum heading. Depending on the type of datum compass
in use it may indicate 180° if you are facing the nose of the aircraft when it is positioned on a
heading of 000°.
NOTE: A worked example of how to complete a compass swing data sheet and calculate the
coefficients is given at Fig. 502.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 501
34-21-00 May 14/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. Compass Swing
or equivalent non-magnetic
E2/84/02 Corrector key
screwdriver
- Compass rose or
- Datum compass
B. Procedure
(1) Put the aircraft in position on the compass calibration area.
(2) Remove the pitot tube cover.
(3) In the cockpit:
(a) Make sure the ANTI ICE switch is set to off.
(b) Make a note of the standby compass heading.
(c) Place a metallic object, e.g. a screwdriver, close to the standby compass and make
the heading shown deflect by 30°.
(d) Wait 30 seconds and remove the metallic object.
(e) Wait until the standby compass has settled and make sure the heading shown is
within ± 3° of the heading previously noted.
(4) Do this procedure again, deflecting the compass in the opposite direction.
(5) If the compass does not return to its original heading ± 3° it must be replaced.
(7) Set these systems to on:
• generator
• inverter (if installed)
• communications and navigation systems
• navigation lights and strobe or anti-collision beacons
CAUTION: DO NOT SET THE ANTI-ICE SWITCH TO ON FOR MORE THAN 30 SECONDS.
LET THE COMPONENTS GET COLD BEFORE YOU REPEAT THE OPERATION.
(8) Position the aircraft on magnetic heading 000°, wait 10 seconds then:
(a) Set the ANTI ICE switch to on.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 502
34-21-00 May 14/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Make a note of the heading shown on the compass and the datum heading.
(c) Set the ANTI ICE switch to off.
(d) Set the INSTR LIGHTS switch to on.
(e) Turn the INSTR LIGHTS through its full range and make sure the compass does not
deflect. Set the INSTR LIGHTS switch to off.
(f) Do this procedure again on magnetic headings 090° and 180°.
(9) Calculate these values:
• the deviation on heading 000° (North)(compass heading minus datum heading)

• the deviation on heading 180° (South)(compass heading minus datum heading)
• the coefficient ‘C’ (deviation North minus deviation South divided by 2, sign
changed, e.g. plus becomes minus)
• the ‘Corrected Compass Heading’ (compass heading South plus coefficient ‘C’)
(10) If the calculated coefficient is more than 2°:
(a) Adjust the ‘C’ corrector with the corrector key (or equivalent non-magnetic
screwdriver) until the compass shows the ‘Make Compass Read’ value’.
(b) Make a note of the heading shown on the compass and the datum heading.
(d) Set the INSTR LIGHTS switch to on.
(e) Turn the INSTR LIGHTS through its full range and make sure the compass does not
deflect. Set the INSTR LIGHTS switch to off.
(12) Calculate these values:
• the compass deviation on heading 090° (East)(compass heading minus datum

heading)
• the compass deviation on heading 270° (West)(compass heading minus datum
heading)
• the coefficient ‘B’ (deviation East minus deviation West divided by 2, sign changed)
• the ‘Corrected Compass Heading’ value (compass heading West plus
coefficient ‘B’)
(13) If the calculated coefficient is more than 2°:
(a) Adjust the ‘B’ corrector with the corrector key (or equivalent non-magnetic
screwdriver) until the compass shows the Corrected Compass Heading value.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 503
34-21-00 May 14/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(14) Do a calibration swing as follows:
(a) Position the aircraft on each of the following headings, 000° (N), 090° (E), 180° (S),
270° (W) and at each heading wait 10 seconds then:
(i) Set the ANTI ICE switch to on.
(ii) Make a note of the heading shown on the compass and the datum heading.
(iii) Set the ANTI ICE switch to off.
(b) Calculate the coefficient ‘A’ (deviation North + South + East + West divided by 4). If
the error is more than 3° do the following procedure:
(i) Loosen the standby compass securing screws.
(ii) Slowly turn the compass to cancel the average error.
NOTE: If the average error is sign plus, rotate the unit to move the vertical
lubber line right. If the average error is sign minus, rotate the unit to
move the vertical lubber line left.
(iii) Tighten the compass securing screws.
(15) Repeat the procedure and make sure that the coefficient ‘A’ is less than 3°. If the
coefficient ‘A’ cannot be made less than 3°, the compass must be replaced.
(b) Make a note of the heading shown on the compass in the 'Steer' column of the
deviation card (Ref. Fig. 501).
(d) Do this procedure again on these headings:
• 030°, 060°, 090°, 120°, 150°, 180°, 210°, 240°, 270°, 300° and 330°.
(18) Remove the aircraft from the compass calibration area.
(19) Record the compass swing data in the aircraft log book.
CAUTION: LET THE PITOT TUBE BECOME COOL BEFORE YOU INSTALLTHE
PROTECTIVE COVER.
(20) Install the pitot tube cover.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 504
34-21-00 May 14/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Check Swing
A. General
A check swing consists of placing the aircraft on four headings 90° apart and comparing the
deviations with those recorded on the deviation card. If there is any difference between these
deviations a full compass swing must be done.

- Compass rose or
- Datum compass
C. Procedure
(1) Put the aircraft in position on the compass calibration area.
(2) Remove the pitot tube cover.
(3) In the cockpit, make sure the ANTI ICE switch is off.
(5) Set normal flight conditions with exception of the ANTI ICE switch:
• generator on-line
• inverter on (if installed)
• communications and navigation systems on
• navigation lights and strobe or anti-collision beacons on
CAUTION: DO NOT SET THE ANTI ICE SWITCH TO ON FOR LONGER THAN 30
SECONDS. LET THE COMPONENTS GET COLD BEFORE YOU REPEAT THE
OPERATION.
(6) Position the aircraft on magnetic heading 000° (N), wait 10 seconds then:
(b) Make a note of the heading shown on the compass.
(d) Do this procedure again on these headings 090° (E), 180° (S) and 270° (W).
(7) Compare the compass headings with the 'Steer' figure on the existing deviation card. If
there is more than ± 3° difference on any heading a full compass swing must be done.
(8) Switch off the inverter, communications and navigation systems.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 505
34-21-00 May 14/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(10) Remove the aircraft from the compass calibration area.
WARNING: LET THE PITOT TUBE BECOME COOL BEFORE YOU INSTALL THE
PROTECTIVE COVER.
(11) Install the pitot tube cover.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 506
34-21-00 May 14/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMPASS SWING DATA SHEET
A/C TYPE ...................................................... DATE .........................................................
SERIAL No. ....................................................... PLACE .........................................................
STANDBY COMPASS SERIAL No

TRADESMAN
CORRECTION SWING (COEFFICIENTS C AND B)
APPROX. DATUM COMPASS DEVIATION TOTAL COEFFICIENT= CORRECTED
HEADING HEADING HEADING + OR - DEVIATION TOTAL COMPASS
(a) (b) (a) - (b) DEVIATION  2 HEADING
000 N C=
180 S
090 E B=
270 W
CALIBRATION SWING (COEFFICIENT A)

HEADING HEADING HEADING + OR - DEVIATION TOTAL HEADING
(d) (e) (d) - (e) DEVIATION  4
000 N
090 E A=
180 S
270 W
For N 30 60 E 120 150

Steer
For S 210 240 W 300 330
Steer
DATE
Compass Swing Data Sheet and Deviation Card

Figure 501
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 507
34-21-00 May 14/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COMPASS SWING DATA SHEET
A/C TYPE ................PC-6.......................... DATE .........14 March 95.........................................
SERIAL No. ................HB-ABC............................ PLACE ..................Stans...................................
STANDBY COMPASS SERIAL No. XXXXSC - 123
TRADESMAN XXXXXI Wood

CORRECTION SWING (COEFFICIENTS C AND B)
HEADING HEADING HEADING + OR - DEVIATION TOTAL COMPASS
(a) (b) (a) - (b) DEVIATION  2 HEADING
000 N 001 359 +2 C=

4 XXX2 176
180 S 176 178 -2
090 E 091 092 -1 B=

3 271.5
XXX1.5
270 W 272 270 +2
CALIBRATION SWING (COEFFICIENT A)

HEADING HEADING HEADING + OR - DEVIATION TOTAL HEADING
(d) (e) (d) - (e) DEVIATION  4
000 N 0 359 +1 359
090 E 090 091 -1 A= 091

XXX0 XXXX0
180 S 178 179 -1 179
270 W 272 271 +1 271
Compass Swing Data Sheet - Worked Example

Figure 502
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 508
34-21-00 May 14/10
'ePILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 35 OXYGEN
Chapter Chapter
Section Section
Subject Page Date Subject Page Date
List of Jun 14/92

Effective
Pages
Table of Dec 14/91

Contents
35-00-00 1 Dec 14/91

2 Dec 14/91
3 Jun 14/92
35-00-00 201 Dec 14/91

202 Dec 14/91
F = foldout page
Page 1
35-LEP Jun 14/92
'9PILATUSi!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER35-0XYGEN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
OXYGEN 35-00-00
oxygen systems
Maintenance Practices 201 Aircraft with
oxygen systems
Page 1
35-CONT
I Dec 14/91
•PILATUSiF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OXYGEN SYSTEM
1. General
Oxygen is stored in two cylinders installed in the rear fuselage. Both cylinders have shutoff valves and
are charged from an external point on the left hand side of the rear fuselage. A system pressure gauge
is mounted at the charging point.
A reducing regulator valve Is installed in the rear fuselage, with a selector valve and demand and
constant flow connectors in the cockpit.
A pressure gauge is installed in the cockpit to show the Pressure in the oxygen bottles.
The location of some components depends on the specification of the aircraft.
A. External Charging Point
The external charging point is accessible through a hinged access panel on the left hand side of
the rear fuselage. The charging valve incorporates a non-return valve and a foced diameter
orifice. Fitted to the charging valve, via a chain, is a screw thread adaptor and a dust cap.
B. Oxygen Cylinders
Each oxygen cylinder is retained by two metal straps onto two brackets which are located aft of
frame 6. Each cylinder has a shut off valve and a pressure gauge. The pressure gauge has a
range of O to 2000 psi.
C. Pressure Reducing Regulator (for Demand Flow)
The regulators purpose is to reduce the pressure of 1800 psi or less to between 70 and 75 psi
which can then be used for oxygen breathing equipment.
D. Demand Regulator
The demand flow regulator is designed to operate on a pressure of between 25 and 85 psi
providing a flow of 100 Liters/minute of oxygen. It functions for any type of demand mask that
has an altitude range from sea level to 36,000 feet. The demand system will be most efficient
between 28,000 to 36,000 feet. The rate of flow through the regulator is governed by the
Individuals requirement.
E. Mask and Outlets
Two face masks with microphones are provided for the pilot and the copilot. Each mask is
connected to Its respective demand regulator outlet via a hose assembly. Oxygen will flow to
the face demand mask only on inhalation. The automatic demand regulator will adjust Itself to
the breathing of the individual and provide the right flow-rate to his rate of breathing. The mask
can be taken off with no loss of oxygen while the mask is connected to the regulator's outlet.
Six or nine constant flow masks can be attached to the outlets located in the overhead rear
cabin outlets. Flow Indicators are used in oxygen tubes to the mask. A red warning indication
shows if there is no flow of oxygen to the mask. The standard connection at each constant flow
mask has a calibrated metering orifice. A therapeutic connection, providing 3 times as much
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with oyxgen systems
I
Page 1
35-00-00 Dec 14/91
"ePILATUSE"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
flow as the standard connection, should be used for persons having a respiratory or cardiac
condition. To prevent passage of foreign matter and clogging of the calibrated metering orifice,
a filter screen is provided in each outlet. If not in use, a constant flow mask must be
disconnected from the outlet to prevent discharge.
3. Operation
High pressure oxygen is taken from the cylinders, through stainless steel tubes to a reducing regulator
valve, mounted on the aft face of frame 6. Low pressure oxygen is then piped through light alloy tubes,
to an electrical pressure transducer which signals to a system contents gauge located on the cockpit
instrument panel. LP oxygen from the regulator is also passed direct to an ON/OFF selector valve
located in an outlet control box above the crew seats. The control box also houses two constant flow
connections and two demand oxygen connections for crew use. Oxygen for passenger use is fed from
the crew control box to three outlet assemblies located in the cabin ceiling, adjacent to each pair of
seats.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with oyxgen systems
I
Page2
35-00-00 Dec 14/91
"5PILATUS!!!F'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OXYGEN CYLINDER
��/� PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
PRESSURE REDUCING REGULATOR
PILOTS OUTLET PANEL
CONSTANT FLOW REGULATOR VALVE
PRESSURE GAUGE
EXTERNAL CHARGING VALVE
Oxygen System - Schematic

Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with oxygen systems
Page3
35-00-00 Jun 14/92
wPILATUS5P'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OXYGEN SYSTEM - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
The following information gives the maintenance requirements for the oxygen system:
A. Discharging, Purging and Replenishing of the system is required If any of the following occur:
(1) System pressure falls below 3.5 bar (50 psi).
(2) If contamination has occurred, or Is suspected.
B. A leak test of the system must be done If any of the following occur:
(1) If any part of the system is disturbed, or any component is removed and installed or
replaced.
The following safety precautions must be observed during oxygen system maintenance:
A. Make sure that fire fighting equipment is available during maintenance of the oxygen system.
B. Make sure that the aircraft is grounded before work is started.
C. Make sure that the oxygen charging equipment is electrically bonded to the aircraft.
D. Do not energize the aircraft electrical system during oxygen system replenishment.
E. Do not replenish the fuel system during oxygen system maintenance.
F. Make sure that all tools are clean and free from oil and grease.
G. Close the shutoff valve on the oxygen cylinder and discharge the pressure from the system pipes
before pipe connectors are disconnected.
H. Open the shutoff valve slowly to avoid excessive heat generation.
I. Replenish the oxygen system slowly to prevent overheating. The minimum to replenish the
system from empty is six minutes.
J. Discharging and replenishment of the oxygen system must be done In a ventilated area.
K. Do not allow open flames or smoking within 15 Metres. (50 Feet.) of the aircraft or charging
equipment.
L Do not use equipment used on different gas systems.
M. Make sure that oxygen charging hoses are clean and capped when not in use. Hoses must be
marked "For oxygen use only''.
N. Do not let the oxygen cylinder pressure go below 7 bar (100 psi) to prevent the entry of moisture.
EFFECTIVITY:
Page 201
35-00-00 Dec 14/91
";E!PILATUSE!F'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
0. If the oxygen cylinder is removed from the aircraft the residual pressure must be marked on the
cylinder.
P. Install blanks on all openings to prevent contamination of the system.
EFFECTIVITY:
Page202
35-00-00 Dec 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 37 - VACUUM
Chapter
Section
Subject Pages Date
Pages 2 Jul 30/15

2 Mar 30/08
37-00-00 1 Jun 30/05

2 Jun 30/05
501 Dec 14/91
37-10-01 401 Jul 30/15

402 Jul 30/15
403 Jul 30/15
404 Jul 30/15
37-10-02 401 Mar 30/08

402 Mar 30/08
403 Mar 30/08
404 Mar 30/08
Page 1
37-LEP Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
37-LEP Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 37 - VACUUM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
VACUUM 37-00-00
PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE 37-10-01

AIR FILTER 37-10-02
Page 1
37-TOC Mar 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
37-TOC Mar 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VACUUM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The vacuum system is installed to power the attitude indicator and directional gyro. Engine bleed air is
used to produce the vacuum.
The vacuum system has these components:
• Pressure regulator
• Ejector
• Check valve
• Suction regulator
• Air filter
Either a vacuum gauge or an annuciator panel caption can be installed on the instrument panel to
monitor the operation of the system.
2. Operation
Engine bleed air, taken from the engine compressor, is reduced in pressure to 15 psi by a pressure
regulator. The air then goes through an ejector to an overboard dump outlet. Low pressure is created
in the ejector as the air goes through a venturi.
A tube is connected to the venturi, and the low pressure caused by the air gives a lower pressure in the
tube.
This low pressure tube is connected to the attitude indicator and directional gyro through a checkvalve
and a suction regulator. Air enters the attitude indicator and directional gyro through an air filter and is
used to turn the gyros.
The suction regulator maintains the vacuum pressure to a value between 4.5 and 5.2 in. Hg.
A check valve is installed to prevent damage to the attitude indicator if the connection to the overboard
dump outlet is blocked or if the pressure regulator is defective.
If installed, a caption SUCTION on the annunciator panel comes on if the vacuum is less than 4.5 in. Hg
or more than 5.2 in. Hg.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
37-00-00 Jun 30/05
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SUCTION
ANNUNCIATOR
PANEL
COMPRESSOR BLEED AIR (P3)
VACUUM
GAUGE
INDICATOR
ATTITUDE
DIRECTIONAL
GYRO
PRESSURE SUCTION
REGULATOR REGULATOR
AIR FILTER
CHECK VALVE
EJECTOR
OVERBOARD DUMP OUTLET

6329
Vacuum System - Schematic

Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
37-00-00 Jun 30/05
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VACUUM - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. General
For adjustment of the vacuum system, refer to 71-00-00, Page Block 501.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 501
37-00-00 Dec 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This topic is only applicable to aircraft with the vacuum system installed.
P02-001 Lockwire 0,8 mm (0.032 in:) dia
B. Expendable Parts
37-11-01, Fig. 01 O-Ring Qty 2
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) Open access panels PL1 and PR1.
(1) Disconnect tube assembly (1).
(2) Disconnect and remove tube assembly (9).
(3) Remove and discard the lockwire from screws (5) and (11).
(4) Remove the three screws (5) and three washers (4).
(5) Remove the three screws (11) and three washers (10).
(6) Remove the pressure regulating valve (6).
(7) Remove the reducer (2).
(8) Remove and discard the O-Ring (3).
(9) Remove the reducer (8).
(10) Remove and discard the O-Ring (7).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
37-10-01 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(1) Install a new O-Ring (7) to the reducer (8).
(2) Install the reducer (8) to the pressure regulating valve (6).
(3) Install a new O-Ring (3) to the reducer (2).
(4) Install the reducer (2) to the pressure regulating valve (6).
(5) Put the pressure regulating valve (6) in position at the bracket (12).
(6) Install the three washers (4) and three screws (5).
(7) Install the three washers (10) and three screws (11).
(8) Safety the screws (5) and (11) with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(9) Connect the tube assembly (1) to the reducer (2).
(10) Install the tube assembly (9).
4. Close Up
(2) Close access panel PL1 and PR1.
(3) Do an engine ground run to do the suction check (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 501).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
37-10-01 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A 1
5
4
12
10
11
7
A
8
9
6668
Pressure Regulating Valve - Removal / Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
37-10-01 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
37-10-01 Jul 30/15
'e PILATUS !F'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIR FILTER - REMOVAUINSTALLATION
1. General
This topic is only applicable to aircraft with the vacuum system installed. There are two types of filter
installed in the system. One type requires the replacement of the complete air filter assembly. If the
other type is installed it is possible to replace only the air filter element. Procedures are given for both
situations.
2. Replace the Air Filter Assembly {Ref. Fig. 401)
A. Removal
(1) Release the clamps (1) and (3).
(2) Disconnect the tubes (2) and (4) from the connectors on the air filter assembly (8).
(4) Remove the air filter assembly (8) and collect the spacer (5).
B. Installation
(1) Install the spacer (5) on the air filter assembly (8).
(2) Put the air filter assembly (8) in the installed position and install the washer (7) and the nut
(6).
(3) Connect the tubes (2) and (4).
(4) Tighten the clamps (1) and (3).
3. Replace the Air Filter Element {Ref. Fig. 402)
A. Removal
(1) Release the clamps (2) and (5).
(2) Disconnect the tubes (1) and (6) from the connectors on the cover (7).
(4) Remove the filter element (9) complete with the cover (7), base (10) and distance piece (8)
from the bolt (11).
(5) Disassemble the air filter:
(a) Remove the cover (7), base (10) and distance piece (8) from the filter element (9).
(b) Discard the filter element (9).
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with Vacuum System
Page 401
37-10-02 Mar30/08
'ePILATUS!EF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
(1) Push the base (10) into the new filter element (9).
(2) Put the base (10) with the filter element (9) in position on the bolt (11) .
(3) Install the distance piece (8) on the bolt (11).
(4) Install the cover (7) on the bolt (11) and push it into the new filter element (9).
(5) Install the washer (4) and nut (3) and tighten until the filter element is held tightly but is not
distorted.
(6) Connect the tubes (1) and (6).
(7) Tighten the clamps (2) and (5).
Page402
37-10-02 Mar30/08
�PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
+
.------
�5'------,
I
(!)
1--@)
6-®
I
Air Filter Assembly - Removal/ Installation

Figure401
Page403
37-10-02 Mar30/08
�PILATUSE!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Air Filter Element - Removal / Installation

Figure 402
Page 404
37-10-02 Mar30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 52 - DOORS
Chapter Chapter
Section Section
List of Effective 1 Jan 30/17 55-30-04 (Cont’d) 403 Jan 30/17
Pages 2 Jan 30/17 404 Jan 30/17
405 Jan 30/17
Table of Contents 1 Jan 30/17 406 Jan 30/17
2 Jan 30/17 407 Jan 30/17
408 Jan 30/17
52-10-00 1 Jun 14/91
2 Jun 14/91
52-10-00 201 Sep 30/13

202 Sep 30/13
203 Sep 30/13
204 Sep 30/13
205 Sep 30/13
206 Sep 30/13
55-30-00 401 Jul 31/12

402 Jul 31/12
403 Jul 31/12
404 Jul 31/12
405 Jul 31/12
406 Jul 31/12
55-30-01 401 Jan 30/15

402 Jan 30/15
403 Jan 30/15
404 Jan 30/15
405 Jan 30/15
406 Jan 30/15
55-30-02 401 Jan 30/17

402 Jan 30/17
403 Jan 30/17
404 Jan 30/17
405 Jan 30/17
406 Jan 30/17
55-30-03 401 Jul 30/16

402 Jul 30/16
403 Jul 30/16
404 Jul 30/16
55-30-04 401 Jan 30/17

402 Jan 30/17
Page 1
52-LEP Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
52-LEP Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 52 - DOORS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
DOORS 52-00-00
DOORS 52-10-00
TRAP DOORS 52-30-00

TRAP-DOOR OPENING CABLE 52-30-01

TRAP-DOOR OPERATING-CABLE 52-30-02
TRAP-DOOR RESTRAINING-CABLES 52-30-03
TRAP-DOOR CLOSING-CABLES 52-30-04
Page 1
52-TOC Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
52-TOC Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DOORS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The aircraft has doors installed in the fuselage for access to the cockpit, cabin and the rear fuselage.
Doors are also installed under a removable cabin floor panel to allow special equipment to be installed
and for stores dropping.
2. Pilots and Co-pilots Door
The pilots door is installed on the left side of the fuselage and the co-pilots door on the right side. Both
doors are attached to the fuselage with an upper and lower hinge on the forward edge. The doors have
installed a fixed acrylic plastic window.
Interior and exterior door handles are installed to open the doors from inside or outside the aircraft.
The interior handle is spring-loaded and locks in a detent. The handle is pulled inboard and back to
open the door. A spring catch, installed on the rear of the main landing gear shock strut, holds the
door in the open position. The exterior handle is L-shaped and is directly connected to the interior
handle. To open the door with the exterior handle, the release button must be pushed to disengage the
interior handle from its detent.
An emergency jettison lever is located on the upper forward door frame. When this is operated the
upper door hinge pin disengages and lets the door to fall free of the aircraft.
3. Sliding Door
The door is of conventional metal construction and has two acrylic plastic windows installed. The door
can be installed on either or both sides of the fuselage. The top edge of the door moves within a guide
rail attached to the fuselage above the cabin door. The bottom of the door is held in position by a
guide rail attached to the fuselage below the door sill.
Stops installed to the ends of the guide rails limit the forward and rearward movement of the door. The
door can only be locked when in the closed position. The door lock is installed at the rear edge of the
door and engages a lock plate on the fuselage.
An internal and an external door handle is installed. To prevent inadvertent operation in flight, the
internal handle is held by spring tension into a detent and must be pulled free of the detent before it can
be turned.
4. Hinge Cabin Doors
Hinge cabin doors can be installed on either or both sides of the fuselage. Each door is attached to the
fuselage with two hinges and has an interior and exterior L-shaped door operating handle. When each
door handle is turned, it retracts a spring-loaded pin at the top and bottom edge of each door. These
pins engage in to the top and bottom fuselage structure when the doors are closed and latched.
At the same time, another pin engages the rear door lever and structure when the forward door is
closed and latched. The rear door lever is intended to prevent the rear door from in flight. The doors are
held in the open position by catches on the wing strut and on the side of the fuselage.
The cabin doors can be used as emergency exits and the airplane can be flown with the doors
removed.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
52-10-00 Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Trap Doors
A removable floor panel, approximately 890 x 585 mm, is installed in the cabin floor. Below the floor
panel are trap doors installed to the bottom of the fuselage. The trap doors are hinged on the sides of
the fuselage and open outward.
The floor panel has a pull ring and cable assembly attached to a spring-loaded pin installed to the left
and right sides of the panel. The pins engage in to the floor structure and keep the panel in place, flush
with the cabin floor. Pulling the ring upward retracts the locking pins and disengages the panel from the
floor.
The trap door is attached to the fuselage bottom with a piano type hinge. The left door has a spring-
loaded locking pin on the inboard forward and rear edges of the door. These pins engage in the
fuselage structure to retain both doors in a closed and locked position. The locking pins are connected
to a bellcrank which is operated by a cable mechanism controlled from the left side of the pilot's seat.
The doors are closed using a door retraction assembly. The assembly consists of a U-shaped handle
and two spring-loaded cables. The handle, installed in a recess in the cabin floor at the forward end of
the hatch, is connected to cables attached to the forward inboard end of each door.
When the door release handle is pulled upward it disengages the left door locking pins from the
fuselage structure. This lets both doors fall open. To close and lock the doors, the U-shaped handle is
pulled upward. This closes the right door first and then engages the left door locking pins. The left
door holds the right door in the closed position.
A visual locking indicator is installed on the inside surface of the left door to show that the doors are
correctly closed and locked. The indicator has a red line on the head of the bellcrank pivot bolt, inside
the door, which is visible through a small sight glass . The doors are locked when the red line is in
parallel alignment with the two locking pins.
6. Equipment Compartment Access Door
A hinged door on the right side of the rear fuselage gives access to the equipment compartment. The
door is approximately 685 mm high and 510 mm wide and is attached with a continuous hinge.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
52-10-00 Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
DOORS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. Pilot’s and Co-pilot’s Doors - Removal/Installation
P02-021 Lockwire Brass, 0,5 mm
(1) Removal
(a) Cut and remove the lockwire from the jettison handle.
(b) Support the door and pull the jettison handle.
(c) Remove the door and collect the washer from the top hinge bracket.
(2) Installation
(a) Engage the plug at the bottom hinge bracket in the hole in the fuselage bracket then
put the door in position.
(b) Align the top hinge brackets and put the washer between the two brackets.
(c) Move the jettison handle up to engage the clevis pin in the brackets.
(d) Safety the jettison handle with lockwire (Material No. P02-021).
2. Pilot’s and Co-pilot’s Doors - Check of the Vertical Play
A. Expendable Parts
52-11-11, Fig 01, Item 200 Cotter Pin, DIN94/1.6*16 If required
(1) Procedure (Ref. Fig. 201)
(a) Refer to Fig. 201, View B and, with the doors closed, make sure the gap between
the flange of the plug and the fuselage bracket is minimal (less than 1,2 mm).
(b) If the gap is 1,2 mm or more:
(i) Remove the door.
(ii) Remove and discard the cotter pin (1).
(iii) Remove the nut (2), the washer (3) and the plug (4).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
52-10-00 Sep 30/13
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(iv) Examine the hinge brackets on the door and the fuselage:
• Replace a bracket if it is distorted or damaged (Ref. SRM 51-00-03) and

do the check again
• If the brackets are serviceable continue the procedure
(v) Install the washer (3) on the plug (4) in the alternative position shown on
Figure 201.
(vi) Install the plug (4) and the washer (3) to the hinge bracket with the nut (2). Do
not install a washer under the nut (2).
(vii) Install the door and do the check again.
(viii) Safety the nut (2) with a new cotter pin (1).
3. Hinge Cabin Doors - Removal/Installation
To remove the hinge cabin doors, support the doors and remove the hinge pins.
4. Sliding Door - Removal/Installation (Ref. Fig. 202)
A. Removal
(1) On aircraft with a rubber stop
(a) Remove the nut (2), washer (3) screw (6) and shim (5).
(b) Remove the stop block (11) and the rubber stop (1) from the guide rail (4).
(2) On aircraft with a spring stop
(a) Remove the screws (7).
(b) Remove the spring stop (8) from the guide rail.
(3) Remove the taper pin (10) from the internal door handle (9) and remove the handle.
(4) Unlock the door and slide rearwards until it is clear of the guide rails.
B. Installation
(1) Put the door in position at the rear of the door opening.
(2) Engage the door flange in to the bottom guide rail and the door rollers in to the top guide
rail.
(3) Slide the door forwards. Check that the door rollers move freely.
(4) Close the door and lock.
(5) Put the internal door handle (9) in position and insert the taper pin (10).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
52-10-00 Sep 30/13
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) On aircraft with a rubber stop
(a) Install the stop block (11) and rubber stop (1) to the guide rail (4).
(b) Install the screw (6), washer (3) and nut (2).
(7) On aircraft with a spring stop
(a) Install the spring stop (8) to the guide rail.
(b) Install the screws (7).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 203
52-10-00 Sep 30/13
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
1
3 (ORIGINAL POSITION)
DOOR BRACKET
B
C 3 (ALTERNATIVE POSITION)
B
DOOR BRACKET
C
PLUG FLANGE
MINIMAL GAP
FUSELAGE
BRACKET
6740
Pilot’s and Copilot’s Doors - Check for Vertical Play

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 204
52-10-00 Sep 30/13
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
NOTE:
A RIGHT SIDE DOOR SHOWN
LEFT SIDE SIMILAR
B
7 3
6 4
C 8
11
9
B
10
6305
Sliding Doors - Removal/Installation

Figure 202
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 205
52-10-00 Sep 30/13
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 206
52-10-00 Sep 30/13
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TRAP DOORS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This Topic gives the procedures to remove the trap doors. The procedures for the LH and RH trap
doors are different.
A. Expendable Parts
52-31-01, Fig 01, Item 25 Cotter Pin 1 each hinge pin
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(2) In the cabin, unhook the two rubber bungees for the trap-door hold-open cables.
NOTE: This allows the trap doors to hang in the vertically down position.
(3) Make sure the area below the trap doors is clear.
(4) Open the trap doors.
B. Remove the LH trap door (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Remove the screws (2) and the access panel (3).
(3) Hold the spring (8) and remove the bolt (6).
(4) Remove the spring (8) from between the levers (9) and collect the spacer (7).
(5) Carefully pull the levers (9) apart sufficiently to remove the barrel of the inner cable (11).
(6) Remove the nut (15) and the bolt (14) from the clamp (13) to release the bowden cable
(12).
(7) Open the clamp (13) sufficiently to remove the bowden cable (12).
NOTE: If you will install the same door, you can attach a length of string to the end of the
inner cable to help guide the bowden cable into the trap door during installation.
(8) Remove the bowden cable (12) from the trap door (5) through the hole at the forward end.
(10) Disconnect the cables (18) and (17) from the spigot (16).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
52-30-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(11) Remove the cotter pin (4).
(12) Give support to the trap door (5) and remove the hinge pin (1).
(13) Remove the trap door (5)
C. Remove the RH trap door (Ref. Fig. 402)
(2) Disconnect the cables (6) and (5) from the spigot (4).
(3) Remove the cotter pin (2).
(4) Give support to the trap door (3) and remove the hinge pin (1).
(5) Remove the trap door (3).
D. Install the RH trap door (Ref. Fig. 402)
(1) Hold the trap door (3) in the open position, align the piano hinge and install the hinge pin
(1).
(2) Install a new cotter pin (2).
(3) Connect the cables (5) and (6) to the spigot (4) with the washer (7) and nut (8).
E. Install the LH trap door (Ref. Fig. 401)
NOTE: If you install a new LH trap door and it is supplied with the bowden cable installed,
remove the bowden cable as given in the removal procedure. Keep the bowden cable
as a spare.
(1) Hold the trap door (5) in the open position, align the piano hinge and install the hinge pin
(1).
(2) Install a new cotter pin (4).
(3) Put the bowden cable (12) through the hole at the forward end of the trap door (5).
NOTE: If you used string in the removal procedure, use it to help guide the bowden
cable into the trap door.
(4) Install the end of the bowden cable (12) in the clamp (13) with the bolt (14) and nut (15).
(5) Carefully pull the levers (9) apart sufficiently to install the barrel of the inner cable (11).
(6) Install the spring (8) and spacer (7) between the levers (9) with the bolt (6) and nut (10).
(7) Connect the cables (17) and (18) to the spigot (16) with the washer (19) and nut (20).
(8) Make sure the area around the trap doors is clear and that they are free to move to the
fully open position.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
52-30-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(9) In the cabin, connect the two rubber bungees for the trap-door hold-open cables onto their
hooks.
NOTE: The RH trap door closes first and is held closed by the LH trap door.
NOTE: To close the trap doors, pull the handle slowly until the closing pins engage with
the pin guides, then close with a short quick pull.
(10) Close and open the trap doors several times to make sure they operate correctly.
(11) If they do not operate correctly, investigate and rectify the cause.
(12) Open the trap doors and, in the cabin, unhook the rubber bungee for the LH trap-door
hold-open cable.
NOTE: This allows the LH trap door to hang in the vertically down position.
(13) Install the access panel (3) with the screws (2).
(14) In the cabin, connect the rubber bungee for the LH trap-door hold-open cable onto its
hook.
F. Close Up
(1) Close the trap doors.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
52-30-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B
B
2
D
3
12
4
C
13
11
14 5
15 C 10
6
20 D
16 7
19
18 9 8
17
6738
LH Trap Door - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
52-30-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8 6
7
5
4 2
3
C
6739
RH Trap Doors - Removal/Installation

Figure 402
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 405
52-30-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 406
52-30-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TRAP-DOOR OPENING CABLE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This Topic gives the procedures to remove and install the inner Bowden cable that opens the trap-
doors.
A. Expendable Parts
IPC Fig/Item. Description Remarks
52-31-21 Fig 01/125 Cable Bowden 1.7MM

52-31-21 Fig 01/40 Sleeve, Cable End, VN374/1.8
- Heat Gun (or equivalent) To loosen adhesive
P01-008 Solvent
P08-061 Adhesive
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
B. Remove the Inner Cable (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) At the LH trap door, remove the screws (5) and the access panel (6).
(3) Hold the spring (8) and remove the bolt (7).
(4) Remove the spring (8) from between the levers (10) and collect the spacer (9).
(5) Carefully pull the levers (10) apart sufficiently to remove the barrel of the inner cable (4).
(6) In the cockpit, pull the trap door opening handle out of its holder.
(7) Cut the inner cable (4) where it enters the handle shaft (2).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
52-30-01 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(8) At the LH trap door, pull the end with the barrel of the inner cable (4) to remove it from the
aircraft.
C. Disassemble the Handle Assy (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Apply heat to the handle assy to loosen the adhesive.
(2) Remove the handle (1) from the handle shaft (2).
NOTE: If you cannot loosen the adhesive to disasemble the handle assy it will be
necessary to obtain a new handle and handle shaft.
(3) Remove the piece of inner cable (4) from the handle shaft (2).
D. Install the Inner Cable (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) At the LH trap door, position the barrel of the new inner cable (4) at the levers (10).
(2) Carefully pull the levers (10) apart sufficiently to install the barrel of the inner cable (4).
(3) Loosely install the bolt (7) and nut (11) to hold the barrel in position.
(4) Push the inner cable (4) through the outer Bowden cable to the cockpit.
(5) Put the handle shaft (2) onto the inner cable (4) and push it fully into its holder.
(6) At the LH trap door, move and hold the levers (10) fully rearward (door latched position).
(7) With the levers (10) held fully rearwards, pull the cockpit end of the inner cable (4) to make
sure there is no slack in the cable.
(8) Cut the inner cable (4) flush with the top of the handle shaft (2).
(9) At the LH trap door, move and hold the levers (10) fully forward (door unlatched position).
NOTE: This will cause the inner cable (4) to come through the handle shaft (2) in the
cockpit.
(10) Cut the cable and install the cable end as follows (Ref. Fig. 401, Sht. 2):
(a) Measure 45 mm from the end of the inner cable (4) and make a mark on the cable.
(b) Cut the inner cable (4) 11 mm above the mark.
(c) Put the cable end (3) on the inner cable (4) in line with the mark.
NOTE: 6,5 mm of cable should come through the cable end (3).
(d) Spread the wire ends of the inner cable (4) to make a cone shape.
(e) Bend the end 4 mm (approximately) of the wires and guide them into the cable end
(3).
(f) Pull the cable end (3) up so that the cone shape of the inner cable (4) fills the cable
end (3).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
52-30-01 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(g) Solder the inner cable (4) into the cable end (3).
(11) Pull the handle shaft (2) fully up to seat the cable end (3) in the recess inside the handle
shaft (2).
(12) At the LH trap door, move the levers (10) fully rearward (door latched position).
NOTE: This will pull the handle shaft (2) into its holder.
(13) Remove the loosely installed nut (11) and bolt (7).
(14) Carefully pull the levers (10) apart sufficiently to install the spring (8) and spacer (9).
(15) Make sure the barrel of the inner cable (4) is correctly located between the levers (10) and
install the bolt (7) and nut (11).
(16) Make sure the area around the trap doors is clear and that they are free to open and close.
(17) Temporarily install the handle (1) in the handle shaft (2).
(18) Close and open the trap doors several times to make sure the opening handle operates
correctly.
(19) If they do not operate correctly, investigate and rectify the cause.
(20) Install the access panel (6) with the screws (5).
(21) Bond the handle (1) into the handle shaft (2) with adhesive (Material No. P08-061).
(22) Remove unwanted adhesive with absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist
with solvent (Material No. P01-008).
E. Close Up
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
52-30-01 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
2
A
A
3
D
4
C
3
45 mm
D
2 C
F 4
4
7
11
E
9
10 8
6753
Trap-Door Operating Cable - Removal/Installation

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
52-30-01 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4 E 4
E
LEVERS FULLY
REARWARD LEVERS FULLY
FORWARD
10 10
CUT HERE
34 mm
CUT HERE
F MAKE A
MARK HERE
LEVERS FULLY
REARWARD 11 mm
G 1
4 F
LEVERS FULLY
FORWARD
2
APPROX. 2,5 mm
6,5 mm
11 mm
4,5 mm
3 3
MARK G MARK
4 4
6770
Trap-Door Operating Cable - Removal/Installation

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 405
52-30-01 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 406
52-30-01 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TRAP-DOOR OPERATING-CABLE - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This Topic gives the procedures to remove and install the wire operating cable that closes the trap-
doors.
A. Expendable Parts
IPC Ref./Pilatus P/N Description Remarks
52-31-22, Fig 01 Cable, Steel, 49 Strand 1,2 m

52-31-22, Fig 01 Sleeve, Cable End, VN374/1.8
52-31-22, Fig 01 Sleeve, Swaging, Wire Rope
- Heat Gun (or equivalent) To loosen adhesive
P01-008 Solvent
P08-061 Adhesive
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(2) Open the trap doors to the fully open position.
NOTE: The fully open position is determined by the type and configuration of the
fuselage steps (if installed).
(3) Put supports under the trap doors to keep them in the fully open position.
(4) Make sure the trap-door closing pull-handle is in the fully ‘in’ position (stowed).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
52-30-02 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Remove the Operating Cable (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Remove the screws (8) from the pulley box (9).
(2) Remove the screws (2) and the cover (1).
(3) Remove the springs (15).
(4) Remove the screws (11) and (12) and the stop (10).
(5) Remove the screw (3) and the two screws (13).
(6) Carefully move the hat section assy (4) complete with the sliding block assy (14) to one
side to get access to the special bracket (6). When you do this, make sure the special
bracket (6) does not move from the trap doors fully open position.
(7) Install the screw (3) in the tube clamp (5) to keep the guide tubes in the installed position.
(8) Use wire cutters, or equivalent, to cut the loop of the cable (7) and disconnect it from the
special bracket (6).
(9) Use wire cutters, or equivalent, to cut and remove the swaging sleeve and loop from the
cable (7).
NOTE: The swaging sleeve and loop are removed to permit you to pull the cable around
the pulleys.
(10) Pull the closing handle to remove the cable (7) from the channel.
(11) Cut the cable (7) where it enters the closing handle.
(12) Disassemble the handle assy (Ref. Fig. 401, Sheet 2):
(a) Apply heat to the handle assy to loosen the adhesive.
(b) Remove the handle (17) from the handle shaft (16).
NOTE: If you cannot loosen the adhesive to disassemble the handle assy it will be
necessary to obtain a new handle and handle shaft.
(c) Remove the piece of cable from the handle shaft (16).
C. Install the Operating Cable (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Install a cable end sleeve (VN374/1.8) on the cable (7) (Ref. 20-10-05, Page Block 201).
(2) Put the new cable (7) through the handle shaft (16).
(3) Make sure the cable end sleeve seats correctly in the recess inside the handle shaft (16).
(4) Temporarily install the handle (17) in the handle shaft (16).
(5) Put the cable (7) through the hole in the pulley box (9) and around the forward pulley.
NOTE: You can move the pulley box to get better access to the pulleys.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
52-30-02 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Put the cable (7) around the pulley in the sliding block assembly (14), then around the
tilted pulley in the pulley box (9) to the special bracket (6) as shown on Figure 401.
(7) Install the pulley box (9) with the screws (8).
(8) Make sure the trap doors are in the fully open position.
(9) Put a Nicopress swaging sleeve (P/N 941.91.31.201) on the cable (7) and put the cable
through the hole in the special bracket (6).
(10) Form a loop and install the Nicopress swaging sleeve (Ref. 20-10-05, Page Block 201).
(11) Remove the screw (3).
(12) Put the hat section assy (4) complete with the sliding block assy (14) in the installed
position.
(13) Make sure the tube clamp (5) is in the correct position and install the screw (3) and the two
screws (13).
(14) Install the stop (10) with the screws (11) and (12).
(15) Install the springs (15).
(16) Remove the supports from the trap doors. Make sure the area is clear.
(17) Operate the trap doors several times to make sure they move from fully open to fully
closed correctly. Make sure the operating handle returns to the fully in (stowed) position
after operation.
(18) Install the cover (1) with the screws (2).
(19) Bond the handle (17) into the handle shaft (16) with adhesive (Material No. P08-061).
(20) Remove unwanted adhesive with absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist
with solvent (Material No. P01-008).
D. Close Up
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
52-30-02 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
A 2
15
15 4
14
13 5
13
B
11
12
10
GUIDE
TUBES
C A
9
7
8
8
6
B
7 MINIMUM 3 mm
6779
Trap-Door Operating-Cable - Removal/Installation

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
52-30-02 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
17
CABLE END SLEEVE

16
7
6808
Trap-Door Operating-Cable - Removal/Installation

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 405
52-30-02 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 406
52-30-02 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TRAP-DOOR RESTRAINING-CABLES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This Topic gives the procedures to remove and install the wire cables that hold the trap-doors in the
fully open position. The procedure for the left and right cables is the same.
NOTE: A new cable is supplied complete with the upper loop and protective PVC hose.
A. Expendable Parts
52-31-22, Fig 01 Cable, Tension As required

52-31-22, Fig 01 Sleeve, Swaging, Wire Rope As required
941.91.08.123 Thimble As required
- Adhesive Tape Local Supply
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
B. Remove the Restraining Cable (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) In the cabin, disconnect the rubber cord assy (1) from the loop (2) of the restraining cable
(3).
(2) At the trap door, remove the nut (6) and washer (5).
(3) Disconnect the closing cable (4) and the restraining cable (3).
(4) Temporarily connect the closing cable (4) and loosely install the washer (5) and nut (6).
(5) Use wire cutters, or equivalent, to cut and remove the loop from the cabin end of the
restraining cable (3).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
52-30-03 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) In the cabin, use adhesive tape to connect the cut end of the old cable (3) to the trap door
end of the new cable.
NOTE: This is to pull the new cable through the aircraft fuselage.
(7) Carefully pull the old cable (3) through the floor until the new cable comes through.
(8) Remove the adhesive tape and discard the old cable.
C. Install the Restraining Cable (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Remove the supports and close the trap doors.
(2) At the trap door end of the cable (3), pull the cable until the bottom of the cable loop in the
cabin touches the aircraft floor. Make sure there is no slack in the cable.
(3) Form a loop around the trap door spigot and install a thimble (P/N 941.91.08.123) and a
Nicopress swaging sleeve (P/N 941.91.31.201) (Ref. 20-10-05, Page Block 201).
(4) Cut and remove the unwanted cable from the cable loop (Ref. 20-10-05, Page Block 201).
(6) At the trap door, remove the nut (6) and washer (5).
(7) Disconnect the closing cable (4).
(8) Connect the restraining cable (3) and the closing cable (4) to the spigot.
(10) In the cabin, connect the rubber cord assy (1) to the loop (2) of the new restraining cable
(3).
(11) Operate the trap doors several times to make sure they move from fully open to fully
closed correctly.
(12) Make sure that the restraining cables hold the doors in the fully open position.
D. Close Up
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
52-30-03 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B
A
LH SHOWN
3
B
LH DOOR
SHOWN
4
6781
5
6
Trap-Door Restraining-Cables - Removal/Installation
Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
52-30-03 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
52-30-03 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TRAP-DOOR CLOSING-CABLES - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This Topic gives the procedures to remove and install the left and right wire cables that close the trap-
doors. It is recommended to replace the two cables at the same time.
A. Expendable Parts
52-31-22, Fig 01 Cable, Steel, 49 Strand 2 x I meter lengths

52-31-22, Fig 01 Sleeve, Cable End, VN374/1.8 As required
52-31-22, Fig 01 Sleeve, Swaging, Wire Rope As required
Local manufacture
- 250 mm Distance Tool
(see NOTE below)
NOTE: You can make the distance tool from a piece of wood 250 mm long x approximately 25
mm x 6 mm. The distance tool is used to set the correct distance between the sliding
block and the stop.
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
B. Remove the Left and Right Closing Cables (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Remove the screws (2) and the cover (1).
(2) Remove the screws (20) and (21) and the stop (19).
(3) Unhook and remove the two springs (24).
(4) Remove the screw (3) and the two screws (22).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
52-30-04 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Carefully move the hat section assy (4) to one side to get access to the special bracket
(15). When you do this, make sure the special bracket (15) does not move from the trap
doors fully open position.
(6) Install the screw (3) in the tube clamps (5) to keep the guide tubes in the installed position.
Do not install the hat section assy (4).
(7) Replace the left closing cable:
(a) Remove the nut (9) and washer (8) from the left trap door.
(b) Disconnect the closing cable (7).
(c) Disconnect the restraining cable (6).
(d) Push the cable (7) through the special bracket (15) to get access to the cable end
sleeve (14).
(e) Use wire cutters, or equivalent, to cut and remove the cable end sleeve (14) from
the cable (7).
(f) Remove the cable (7) from the aircraft.
(8) Replace the right closing cable:
(a) Remove the nut (13) and washer (12) from the right trap door.
(b) Disconnect the closing cable (11).
(c) Disconnect the restraining cable (10).
(d) Push the cable (11) through the special bracket (15) until you can move the sleeve
(18) and get access to the cable end sleeve (16).
(e) Use wire cutters, or equivalent, to cut and remove the cable end sleeve (16) from
the cable (11).
(f) Remove the sleeve (18) with the spring (17).
(g) Remove the cable (11) from the aircraft.
C. Install the Left and Right Closing Cables (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Left closing cable (7):
(a) Install a cable end sleeve (14) on the new cable (7) (Ref. 20-10-05, Page Block
201).
(b) Push the cable (7) through the slot in the special bracket (15) and through the left
guide tube.
(c) Pull the cable (7) to the spigot on the left trap door.
(2) Right closing cable (11):
(a) Put the sleeve (18) with the spring (17) on the new cable (11).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
52-30-04 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Install a cable end sleeve (16) on the new cable (11) (Ref. 20-10-05, Page Block
201).
(c) Push the cable (11) through the slot in the special bracket (15) and through the right
guide tube.
(d) Make sure the sleeve (18) locates in the slot in the special bracket (15).
(e) Pull the cable (11) to the spigot on the right trap door.
(3) Install the hat section assembly (4):
(a) Remove the screw (3) that holds the tube assembly.
(b) Put the special bracket (15) in the installed position.
(c) Install the hat section assembly (4) with the two screws (22) and the screw (3).
Make sure you install the screw (3) through the tube clamp (5).
(d) Install the stop (19) with the screws (20) and (21).
(e) Put the sliding block (23) on the hat section assembly (4).
(4) Connect the right closing cable (11) to the right trap door:
NOTE: Two persons are required to connect the cable.
(a) Use the 250 mm distance tool (locally manufactured) to set the correct distance
between the stop (19) and the sliding block (23). Leave the tool in position.
(b) Manually close the right trap door and hold it in the fully closed position.
(c) Pull the cable (11) to remove all slack but do not compress the spring (17).
(d) Make sure the sliding block (23) stays 250 mm from the stop (19).
(e) Put a Nicopress swaging sleeve (P/N 941.91.31.201) on the cable (11) then make a
loop around the spigot.
(f) Use a pencil to make marks on the cable (11) for the correct position of the
Nicopress swaging sleeve.
(g) Remove the cable (11) from the spigot.
(h) Make a loop in the cable (11) and install the Nicopress swaging sleeve in the
marked position (Ref. 20-10-05, Page Block 201).
(i) Remove the 250 mm distance tool from the hat section assembly (4).
(j) Connect the restraining cable (10) and the closing cable (11) to the spigot and install
the washer (12) and nut (13). Make sure there is no tension on the cable (11) when
the trap door is fully closed.
(k) If necessary, remove unwanted cable (Ref. 20-10-05, Page Block 201).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
52-30-04 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Connect the left closing cable (7) to the left trap door:
NOTE: Two persons are required to connect the cable.
(a) Manually open the right trap door.
(b) Manually move the trap doors to the nearly closed position so that the left trap door
engages with the seal on the right trap door (Ref. Fig. 401, Sheet 2). Make sure the
seal is not twisted.
NOTE: The flange on the bottom of the left trap door holds the right trap door
closed.
(c) With the trap doors held in the nearly closed position, pull the cable (7) to remove all
slack.
(d) Put a Nicopress swaging sleeve (P/N 941.91.31.201) on the cable (7) then make a
loop around the spigot.
(e) Use a pencil to make marks on the cable (7) for the correct position of the Nicopress
swaging sleeve.
(f) Remove the cable (7) from the spigot.
(g) Make a loop in the cable (7) and install the Nicopress swaging sleeve in the marked
position (Ref. 20-10-05, Page Block 201).
(h) Connect the restraining cable (6) and the closing cable (7) to the spigot and install
the washer (8) and nut (9). Make sure there is no tension on the cable (7) when the
trap door is fully closed.
(i) If necessary, remove unwanted cable (Ref. 20-10-05, Page Block 201).
(j) Open the trap doors.
(6) Install the two springs (24).
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT:

THE RIGHT DOOR CLOSES FIRST AND IS HELD IN THE CLOSED
POSITION BY THE LEFT DOOR.
THE LEFT DOOR MAKES CONTACT WITH THE SEAL ON THE RIGHT DOOR
AND THE SEAL IS NOT TRAPPED OR TWISTED.
(8) Carefully operate the trap doors several times to make sure they move from fully open to
fully closed correctly.
(9) Install the cover (1) with the screws (2).
(10) Operate the trap doors to make sure they move from fully open to fully closed correctly.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
52-30-04 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Close Up
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 405
52-30-04 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
B 2
A B
24
24 4
23
5
22
C
22
20
21
A 19 (DOORS OPEN
POSITION)
GUIDE
TUBES
B
RH DOOR
(DOOR FULLY OPEN)
10
13 12 11 6
18
11
17
16 7
8
7
B
14
C 9
LH DOOR
6778
15
(DOOR FULLY OPEN)
Trap-Door Closing-Cables - Removal/Installation
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 406
52-30-04 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SEAL
RIGHT DOOR
LEFT DOOR
D
VIEW ON ARROW D
6807
Trap-Door Closing-Cables - Removal/Installation

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 407
52-30-04 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 408
52-30-04 Jan 30/17
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 53 - FUSELAGE
Chapter
Section
Subject Pages Date
List of Effective 1 Oct 30/20
Pages 2 Oct 30/20

2 Feb 28/20
53-00-01 601 Oct 30/20

602 Oct 30/20
603 Oct 30/20
604 Oct 30/20
605 Oct 30/20
606 Oct 30/20
607 Oct 30/20
608 Oct 30/20
53-28-00 601 Nov 21/18

602 Nov 21/18
603 Nov 21/18
604 Nov 21/18
605 Nov 21/18
606 Nov 21/18
53-30-00 601 Oct 30/20

602 Oct 30/20
603 Oct 30/20
604 Oct 30/20
605 Oct 30/20
606 Oct 30/20
607 Oct 30/20
608 Oct 30/20
609 Oct 30/20
610 Oct 30/20
Page 1
53-LEP Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
53-LEP Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 53 - FUSELAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
FUSELAGE 53-00-00
WING FITTINGS 53-00-01
Fuselage - Wing Fittings - Inspection/Check 601 All
CENTER FUSELAGE 53-28-00

Fuselage / Wing-Strut Fitting - Inspection/Check 601 All
REAR FUSELAGE 53-30-00

Horizontal Trim-Actuator Support-Bracket and 601 All
Frame 12A - Inspection/Check
Page 1
53-TOC Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
53-TOC Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUSELAGE WING FITTINGS - INSPECTION / CHECK
1. General
This procedure is referenced from the AMM Airworthiness Limitations (Ref. 04-00-00, Page Block 1).
The procedure gives the data for a visual and eddy current inspection of the fuselage wing fittings
located on Frame 3 and Frame 4.
If you find damage you must contact Pilatus Aircraft Ltd for additional repair instructions.
- Magnifying glass (x10) Local Supply

- Bright light source Local Supply
- Inspection mirrors Local Supply
- Hot air blower or heat lamps Local Supply
B. Expendable Parts
57-21-01, Fig. 01 Bush Ref. Fig. 601, Item 2


P02-016 Abrasive pads Very fine grade
P07-007 Primer
P08-052 Adhesive
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 601
53-00-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Procedure
WARNING: YOU MUST WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (GLOVES, FILTER MASKS
AND FACE-SHIELDS/SAFETY-GLASSES/GOGGLES). ABRASIVE DUST CAN GET IN YOUR
LUNGS OR ON YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE INJURY OR SKIN IRRITATION. DO NOT INHALE
DUST. WHEN AUTHORIZED, MAKE THE AREA MOIST BEFORE YOU MANUALLY ABRADE
TO PREVENT AIRBORNE DUST PARTICLES. MAKE SURE THAT THE WORK AREA IS
FULLY VENTILATED. OBEY YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS WHEN YOU DRILL OR ABRADE
PAINTS, FILLERS, OR ANY OTHER MATERIALS. OBEY YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS
WHEN YOU COLLECT AND DISCARD THE DUST AND OTHER UNWANTED MATERIALS.
WARNING: DO THIS PROCEDURE IN A ROOM WITH GOOD LIGHT AND GOOD VENTILATION WITH A
DUST FILTER IN ACCORDANCE WITH YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS. YOU CAN FAIL TO
DETECT CRACKS IN POOR LIGHT CONDITIONS. ABRASIVE DUST CAN GET IN YOUR
LUNGS OR ON YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE INJURY OR SKIN IRRITATION.
A. Job Set Up
(1) Remove the left and right wings (Ref. 57-00-00, Page Block 401).
(2) Do this procedure at the same time as the inspection for the wing to fuselage fittings
(Ref. 57-00-03, Page Block 601).
(3) Do this procedure for the left and right sides of the fuselage.
NOTE: The procedure below is for the left side of the fuselage. The right side of the
fuselage is similar.
B. Preparation and Bush Removal (Ref. Fig. 601)
NOTE: The bush (1) is removed from Frame 3 during the left and right wing removal
(Ref. 57-00-00, Page Block 401).
CAUTION: DO NOT USE TOO MUCH HEAT TO REMOVE THE BUSH:
• THE MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE IS 120 °C (248 °F)

• THE MAXIMUM LENGTH OF TIME YOU CAN APPLY HEAT IS 15
MINUTES.
TOO MUCH HEAT CAN CHANGE THE MATERIAL PROPERTIES OF THE

ADJACENT STRUCTURE AND CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT AND/OR
EQUIPMENT.
(1) Use a hot air blower to apply heat to loosen the adhesive between:
• The bush (2) and the surrounding structure of Frame 3

• The bushes (3) and (4) and the surrounding structure of Frame 4.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 602
53-00-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: DO NOT USE TOO MUCH FORCE TO REMOVE THE BUSH. YOU CAN DAMAGE
THE ADJACENT STRUCTURE IF YOU USE TOO MUCH FORCE.
(2) Use a press or an applicable diameter drift to remove the bushes (Ref. 20-50-01, Page
Block 201):
• The bush (2) from Frame 3

• The bushes (3) and (4) from Frame 4.
(3) Discard the bushes (2), (3) and (4).
(4) Use a non-metallic scraper, abrasive pads (Material No. P02-016) and absorbent paper
(Material No. P02-031) made moist with solvent (Material No. P01-010) to remove the
remaining unwanted adhesive from the holes in Frame 3 and Frame 4.
(5) Use a non-metallic scraper to remove any loose paint in the inspection areas.
(6) Remove the unwanted particles from the work area.
010) to fully clean the inspection areas and surrounding structure of Frame 3 and Frame 4.
Clean the parts until clean absorbent paper made moist with solvent stays clean when
applied to the surface.
C. Inspection (Ref. Fig. 601)
(1) Visual Inspection
(a) Visually examine the parts within the inspection areas of Frame 3 and Frame 4 for
signs of cracks, corrosion, security of attachment and any other damage:
• Do this with a magnifying glass (x10), inspection mirrors and a bright light
source
• Examine all forward and aft surfaces and the holes for the bushes
• Examine the surrounding structure of Frame 3 and Frame 4
• Examine all fasteners, attaching parts and rivets
• Damage must be removed if possible or the part must be replaced. Contact
Pilatus Aircraft Ltd for repair instructions.
(b) Measure the diameter of holes in the Frames for the bushes (1), (2), (3) and (4).
Make sure that the holes are:
• Less than or equal to diameter 30,042 mm (1.1828 in) in Frame 3

• Less than or equal to diameter 22,061 mm (0.8685 in) in Frame 4.
When the holes are outside of the limits, contact Pilatus Aircraft Ltd for additional
repair instructions.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 603
53-00-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Non-Destructive Test (NDT) Inspection
(a) It is a requirement that only approved personnel, qualified and certified to the
standards that follow can do the Non-Destructive-Test (NDT) inspection:
• ET Level II National Aerospace Standard NAS 410 or

• European standard EN 4179 or
• MIL-STD-410E.
(b) Do the eddy current inspection for cracks and corrosion (Ref. SRM 51-00-09, Page
Block 1):
• Examine the holes for the bushes (1), (2), (3) and (4) and an area of
surrounding structure 20 mm (0.787 in) from the holes in all forward and aft
surfaces of Frame 3 and Frame 4.
• No crack indications are allowed within these areas. When you find crack
indications, the part must be replaced. Contact Pilatus Aircraft Ltd for repair
instructions.
• Corrosion must be removed if possible or the part must be replaced. Contact
(c) Apply CCC solution (Material No. P07-001) on all bare aluminum surfaces
(Ref. 20-40-10, Page Block 201).
(d) Apply primer (Material No. P07-007) and the applicable paint to the bare metal
surfaces of the parts. Do not apply the primer or paint to the surface of the holes
where you install the new bushes.
D. Install the New Bushes (Ref. Fig. 601)
NOTE: The bush (1) is installed into Frame 3 during the left and right wing installation
(Ref. 57-00-00, Page Block 401).
(1) Use the abrasive pads (Material No. P02-016) to lightly roughen the bonding surfaces of
the new bushes (2), (3) and (4) and the holes.
(2) Use absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with the solvent (Material No.
P01-010) and clean the bonding surface of the new bushes (2), (3) and (4) and the holes.
(3) Put the bushes (2), (3) and (4) in position in the holes to make sure they can be installed
easily, then remove the bushes (2), (3) and (4).
(4) Install the bushes (2), (3) and (4) with adhesive (Material No. P08-052)
(Ref. AMM, 20-50-01, Page Block 201).
(5) Let the adhesive (Material No. P08-052) cure in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
NOTE: The typical cure time is 5 to 7 days at room temperature or 2 hours at 65 ±5 °C

(149 ±9 °F).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 604
53-00-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Close Up
work area is clean.
(2) Make sure that the inspection for the wing to fuselage fittings is done (Ref. 57-00-03, Page
Block 601).
(3) Install the left and right wings (Ref. 57-00-00, Page Block 401).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 605
53-00-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
LH SHOWN
RH SIMILAR
2
C
B
WING TO
FUSELAGE
FITTING
FRAME 3
D 1
E
F
F
LH SHOWN
RH SIMILAR
2
WING TO
FUSELAGE
FITTING
E
FRAME 4
4
G
LH SHOWN
RH SIMILAR
VIEW LOOKING AFT 3
NOTE:
LH SHOWN
6847
AREA OF INSPECTION RH SIMILAR
Fuselage Wing Fittings - Inspection / Check

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 606
53-00-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SECTION
F-F
SECTION H
E-E J J
3
LH SHOWN
RH SIMILAR
4 VIEW LOOKING AFT
SECTION 3
J-J
SECTION
NOTE: H-H
6849
AREA OF INSPECTION
Fuselage Wing Fittings - Inspection / Check

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 607
53-00-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 608
53-00-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUSELAGE - WING STRUT FITTING - INSPECTION / CHECK
1. General
The procedure gives the data for a visual, dye penetrant and eddy current inspection of the wing strut
fittings located on the left and right sides of the center fuselage.
If a wing strut fitting is found to be damaged you must repair the damage (Ref. SRM 53-20-00, Page
Block 1) or replace the wing strut fitting before the next flight. Contact Pilatus Aircraft Ltd for
replacement instructions.

- Hot air blower or heat lamps Local Supply. If required for curing
B. Expendable Parts
53-28-01, Fig. 01 Bush Qty 2

P02-016 Scotch-brite, very fine grade
P08-052 is a suitable alternative for
P08-059 Adhesive
P08-059 for this application
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 601
53-28-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Procedure
WARNING: DO THIS PROCEDURE IN A ROOM WITH GOOD LIGHT AND GOOD VENTILATION
WITH A DUST FILTER IN ACCORDANCE WITH YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.
A. Job Set Up
Remove the left and right wing struts (Ref. 57-00-01, Page Block 401).
B. Remove the Bushes from the Left and Right Wing Strut Fittings (Ref. Fig. 601)
CAUTION: DO NOT USE TOO MUCH HEAT TO REMOVE THE BUSH. DO NOT EXCEED
(1) Use a hot air blower to apply heat to loosen the adhesive between the bush (2) and the
wing strut fitting (1).
CAUTION: DO NOT USE TOO MUCH FORCE TO REMOVE THE BUSH (2). YOU CAN
DAMAGE THE WING STRUT FITTING (1) IF YOU USE TOO MUCH FORCE.
(2) Use a press or an applicable diameter drift to remove the bush (2) from the hole in the
wing strut fitting (1).
(3) Discard the bush (2).
(4) Use the solvent (Material No. P01-010) to remove the unwanted adhesive from the hole in
the wing strut fitting (1).
(5) Use the Scotch-Brite (Material No. P02-016) to polish the hole in the wing strut fitting (1).
(1) Remove loose paint if necessary (Ref. SRM 51-70-15, Page Block 1), then use absorbent
paper (Material No. P02-031) and the solvent (Material No. P01-010) to fully clean the left
and right wing strut fittings (1).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 602
53-28-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Visually examine the left and right wing strut fittings (1) for signs of corrosion. Do this with
a magnifying glass (x10) and a bright light source.
NOTE: You can also use the straight edge of a ruler which will indicate distortion caused
by corrosion.
Minor surface corrosion is permitted (Ref. SRM 51-00-05, Page Block 1). All other
corrosion is not permitted and you must repair the damage (Ref. SRM 53-20-00, Page
Block 1) or replace the damaged wing strut fitting (1).
(3) Remove minor surface corrosion (Ref. SRM 51-00-05, Page Block 1) from the wing strut
fittings (1). This step is only applicable if you have found permitted corrosion.
CAUTION: ONLY PERSONNEL THAT ARE QUALIFIED AND CERTIFIED TO PT LEVEL II

(OR HIGHER) NATIONAL AEROSPACE STANDARD (NAS) 410 OR EUROPEAN
STANDARD EN 4179 OR MIL-STD-410E OR EQUIVALENT AEROSPACE
STANDARD ARE PERMITTED TO DO THE PENETRANT INSPECTION. THE
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR FLUORESCENT PENETRANT INSPECTIONS
ARE DETAILED IN THE ASTM-E-1417 STANDARD PENETRANT INSPECTION
METHODS, EQUIPMENT AND QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS.
(4) Do the dye penetrant inspection to make sure that all the corrosion is removed (Ref. SRM
51-00-09, Page Block 1). If remaining corrosion is found, do Step 3.C.(3) and 3.C.(4) again
if necessary.
(5) Visually examine the left and right wing strut fittings (1) for signs of cracks. Do this with a
magnifying glass (x10) and a bright light source. No cracks are permitted. If you find a
crack, you must repair the damage (Ref. SRM 53-20-00, Page Block 1) or replace the wing
strut fitting (1).
(6) Measure the diameter of the holes in the left and right wing strut fittings (1). Do this at
several positions to make sure the holes are not oval. The maximum permitted diameter is
28,067 mm (1.105 in.). If the diameter of each hole is more than the maximum permitted
diameter at any position, you must repair the damage (Ref. SRM 53-20-00, Page Block 1)
or replace the wing strut fitting (1).
CAUTION: ONLY PERSONS QUALIFIED AND CERTIFIED TO ET LEVEL II (OR HIGHER)

NATIONAL AEROSPACE STANDARD NAS410 OR EUROPEAN STANDARD EN
4179 OR MIL-STD-410E OR EQUIVALENT AEROSPACE STANDARD ARE
PERMITTED TO DO THE EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION.
(7) Do the eddy current inspection as follows:
CAUTION: THE WING STRUT FITTING (1) IS MADE UP OF FOUR STRAPS. MAKE SURE
YOU INSPECT THE EDGES OF ALL FOUR STRAPS ON THE OUTSIDE OF THE
WING STRUT FITTING (1) AND INSIDE THE HOLE.
(a) Do the eddy current inspection (Ref. SRM 51-00-09, Page Block 1) on the left and
right wing strut fittings (1) in the shaded areas shown.
(b) If you find a crack, you must repair the damage (Ref. SRM 53-20-00, Page Block 1)
or replace the wing strut fitting (1).
(c) Apply CCC solution (Material No. P07-001) on all bare aluminum surfaces
(Ref. 20-40-10, Page Block 201).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 603
53-28-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Apply primer (Material No. P07-007) and the applicable paint to the bare metal
surfaces of the wing strut fitting (1). Do not apply the primer or paint to the surface of
the hole where you will install the new bush (2).
D. Install the New Bushes in the Left and Right Wing Strut Fittings (Ref. Fig 601)
(1) Use the Scotch-Brite (Material No. P02-016) to lightly roughen the bonding surfaces of the
new bush (2) and the hole.
P01-010) and clean the bonding surface of the new bush (2) and the hole.
(3) Put the bush (2) in position in the hole to make sure it can be installed easily, then remove
the bush (2).
(4) Mix the two parts of the adhesive (Material No. P08-059) in accordance with the
(5) Apply a layer of the adhesive (Material No. P08-059) to the bonding surface of the bush (2)
and the hole. Make sure there is sufficient adhesive to get a full bond when the bush (2) is
installed.
(6) Put the bush (2) in position in the hole and make sure the bush (2) is in the correct position
before the adhesive starts to cure.
P01-010) to remove the unwanted adhesive.
instructions.
NOTE: The typical cure time is five to seven days at room temperature or two hours at
between 60 and 70°C (128 and 144°F).
E. Close Up
(1) Remove all tools and materials. Make sure that the work areas are clean.
(2) Install the wing struts (Ref. AMM 57-00-01, Page Block 401).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 604
53-28-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
LH SHOWN
RH SIMILAR
2 INSPECT
BOTH SIDES
OF FITTING
INSPECT THE EDGES

6798
OF THE FOUR STRAPS

Fuselage - Wing Strut Fitting - Inspection / Check
Figure 601
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 605
53-28-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 606
53-28-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HORIZONTAL TRIM-ACTUATOR SUPPORT-BRACKET AND FRAME 12A

INSPECTION / CHECK
1. General
This procedure is referenced from the AMM Airworthiness Limitations page-block 04-00-00.
This procedure gives the data and instructions necessary to do an inspection of the horizontal trim-
actuator support-bracket and auxiliary frame 12A.
The inspection is applicable to aircraft with electrical trim (CONFIG 1) or mechanical trim (CONFIG 2).
This inspection must be done at the same time as the inspection of the Horizontal Trim-Actuator
Bearing-Fork or Bearing Support Assemblies (Ref. 55-11-11, Page Block 601).
A. Operator Supplied Parts
Part No. Description Qty. Remarks

112.35.06.081 Washer, oversize 4 Oversize washer if required
(Ref. Fig 601, Item 11)
932.35.14.105 Bolt (NAS6604-5) 1 Oversize bolt if required
932.35.14.109 Bolt (NAS6604-9) 1 Oversize bolt if required
938.07.68.305 Nut (MS21045-4E) 2 Oversize nut if required

P01-008 White Spirit
P02-020 Abrasive Pads Regular grade
P04-039 Corrosion Preventative
P07-001 CCC Solution
P07-007 Primer
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 601
53-30-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Procedures
NOTE: In the procedures that follow:
• CONFIG 1 refers to aircraft with electrical trim

• CONFIG 2 refers to aircraft with mechanical trim and:
• CONFIG 2A has 6 mm bolts installed
• CONFIG 2B has 6,35 mm bolts installed.
A. Job Set Up
CONFIG 1:
(1) Remove the horizontal stabilizer actuator (Ref. AMM 27-45-11, Page Block 401, CONFIG
1).
CONFIG 2:
(2) Remove the horizontal stabilizer actuator (Ref. AMM, 27-45-11, Page Block 401, CONFIG
2). During this procedure use clamps (or equivalent) to make sure the cables stay in
position on spools of the mechanical actuator and operating mechanism.
(3) Use applicable supports to hold the horizontal stabilizer in a position which gives access to
the bottom surface.
CONFIG 1:
(1) Remove the nuts (4), the washers (2) and the bolts (1), and remove the fitting (3) from FR
12A.
(2) Make a record of the part number marking of the fitting (3).
(3) Discard the fitting if it has incomplete or missing part number marking, unless you can
confirm the service history of the fitting from its documentation.
CONFIG 2:
(4) CONFIG 2A:
(a) Remove the nuts (7), the washers (6) and the bolts (5), and remove the connecting
piece (8) from FR12A. Record the quantity of washers (6) installed under the lower
nut (7).
(b) Make a record of the part number marking of the connecting piece (8).
(c) Discard the connecting piece if it has incomplete or missing part number marking,
unless you can confirm the service history of the connecting piece from its
documentation.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 602
53-30-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) CONFIG 2B:
(a) Remove the nuts (12), the washers (11), the bolts (9) and (10), and remove the
connecting piece (8) from FR12A.
(b) Make a record of the part number marking of the connecting piece (8).
(c) Discard the connecting piece if it has incomplete or missing part number marking,
unless you can confirm the service history of the connecting piece from its
documentation.
(1) Do a visual inspection:
(a) Remove loose paint if necessary, then use absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031)
and the white spirit (Material No. P01-008) to clean:
• All surfaces of the fitting (3) or connecting piece (8).

• The location on the surface of FR12A where the fitting (3) or connecting piece
(8) was installed.
(b) Use a 10x magnifier and bright light to visually examine the parts that follow for
damage, cracks and signs of uneven wear. No damage, cracks or uneven wear is
permitted:
• The fitting (3) or connecting piece (8).
If you find uneven wear, contact Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.
(c) Use a 10x magnifier and bright light to visually examine the surface of FR12A where
the fitting (3) or connecting piece (8) was installed for damage, cracks and
corrosion. No damage or cracks are permitted. Remove surface corrosion if found
(Ref. ROM Chap 2 or SRM 51-00-05). Discard the part if less than 90% of the
original material thickness remains after removal of the corrosion.
(2) Do a check of the attachment hole diameters:
CONFIG 1:
(a) Use internal vernier callipers (or equivalent) to do a check of the actuator
attachment hole diameter in the fitting (3).
(b) A hole diameter of more than 9,555 mm (0.3762 in) in the fitting (3) is not permitted.
Replace if necessary (Ref. Table 601 - Component Replacement Data).
(c) Use internal vernier callipers (or equivalent) to do a check of the diameters of the
attachment bolt holes in the fitting (3) and FR12A. Hole diameters of more than 4,85
mm (0.191 in) are not permitted. Replace the component if defective. If necessary,
also replace FR12A, if the applicable holes for the fitting are out of limits (Ref. Table
601 - Component Replacement Data).
NOTE: If the oversize bush (P/N 116.40.06.111) is installed Post-SB-147, contact

Pilatus Aircraft Ltd for more information.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 603
53-30-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CONFIG 2:
(d) Use internal vernier callipers (or equivalent) to do a check of the actuator
attachment hole diameter in the connecting piece (8).
(e) A hole diameter of more than 16.036 mm (0.631 in) in the connecting piece (8) is
not permitted. Replace if necessary (Ref. Table 601 - Component Replacement
Data).
(f) Use internal vernier callipers (or equivalent) to do a check of the diameters of the
attachment bolt holes in the connecting piece (8) and FR12A.
If all of the hole diameters are 6,024 mm (0.23717 in) or less, continue the
procedure from Step 3.D.(2).
If one or more of the holes is more than 6,024 mm (0.237 in) but less than 6,35 mm
(0.25 in):
(i) Use a 6,35 mm (0.25 in) (H7) reamer to increase the diameters of all of the
bolt holes in the connecting piece (8) and FR12A. Deburr the holes.
(g) If one or more holes is 6,374 mm (0.251 in) or more, replace the connecting piece
(8) and/or FR12A (Ref. Table 601 - Component Replacement Data).
Component Part No. Replacement
FR12A (Assembly) 112.35.06.197 Ref. ROM, Chap 2 or SRM,

6201.0134 51-00-03
Fitting 116.40.06.033 Ref. Step 3.D.(1)(b), Pre-drilled
(CONFIG 1)
Fitting 116.40.06.112 Ref. Step 3.D.(1), Final Diameter
(CONFIG 1)
Connecting Piece 6232.0026 Ref. Step 3.D.(2), Pre-drilled
(CONFIG 2)
Table 601 - Component Replacement Data
(3) Do a Non-Destructive Inspection (NDI):
NOTE: As an alternative to the dye-penetrant inspection you can do an eddy current

inspection, which does not require removal of the surface finish. A right-angled
shaft surface-probe with minimal drop is required to inspect in the gap between
the lugs of the components:
• CONFIG 1 aircraft - smallest gap is 12,7 mm (0.5 in).

• CONFIG 2 aircraft - smallest gap is 6 mm (0.24 in).
NOTE: Step 3.C.(3)(a) is only necessary if you will do a dye-penetrant NDI. The eddy
current NDI does not require the removal of surface treatment.
(a) Obey the manufacturers instructions and use the white spirit (Material No.
P01-008), abrasive pads (Material No P02-020) and/or non-metal scrapers to
remove the layers of paint and protection from:
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 604
53-30-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
• All surfaces of the fitting (3) or connecting piece (8)

• The location on the surface of FR12A where the fitting (6) or connecting piece
(8) was installed.
CAUTION: ONLY PERSONNEL QUALIFIED AND CERTIFIED TO THE APPLICABLE

LEVEL II (OR HIGHER) OF NATIONAL AEROSPACE STANDARD NAS 410,
EUROPEAN STANDARD EN 4179 OR MIL-STD-410E, OR EQUIVALENT
AEROSPACE STANDARD, ARE PERMITTED TO DO THE NDI.
(b) Do a dye-penetrant NDI, or the alternative eddy current NDI, as follows:
NOTE: Refer to Airworthiness Limitations Doc. 02334, Appendix J, or SRM 51-00-

09 as applicable for the related inspection procedures.
(i) Do the NDI for cracks in all surfaces of the:
• Fitting (3) or connecting piece (8). Make sure you do a thorough

inspection of the critical areas (Ref. Fig. 603)
• Applicable area of FR12A.
(ii) No crack damage is permitted. You must replace:
• Cracked components (Ref. Table 601 - Component Replacement Data)

• FR12A if cracks are found.
CONFIG 1:
(1) Install the fitting (3):
NOTE: Steps 3.D.(1)(a) and (b) are not necessary when you install a new fitting P/N
116.40.06.112.
(a) Preparation of removed and inspected fitting:
(i) Obey the manufacturers instructions and apply layers of CCC solution
(Material No. P07-001) as necessary to the applicable components and
inspection areas (Ref. ROM Chap 12 or SRM 51-00-06).
(ii) Obey the manufacturers instructions and apply layers of primer (Material No.
P07-007) and paint as necessary to the applicable components and
(iii) Use a permanent marker pen to re-apply the part markings as recorded
during the removal procedure.
(b) Preparation of new fitting P/N 116.40.06.033:
(i) Use a suitable drill and reamer to increase the diameter of the three
attachment holes to between 4,820 and 4,832 mm.
(ii) Obey the manufacturers instructions and apply layers of CCC solution
(Material No. P07-001) as necessary to the reamed holes (Ref. ROM Chap
12 or SRM 51-00-06).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 605
53-30-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Obey the manufacturers instructions and apply layers of corrosion preventative
(Material No. P04-039) on the faying surfaces of FR12A and the fitting (3), nuts (4),
washers (2) and bolts (1).
(d) Put the fitting (3) in position on FR12A and install the bolts (1), washers (2) and
nuts (4).
(e) Obey the manufacturers instructions and use the white spirit (Material No. P01-008)
to remove unwanted corrosion preventative.
CONFIG 2:
(2) Install the connecting piece (8):
NOTE: Step 3.D.(2)(a) is only necessary for installation of a new connecting piece P/N
6232.0026.01.
(a) Preparation of a new connecting piece P/N 6232.0026.01:
(i) Use a suitable drill and reamer to increase the diameter of the two attachment
holes to between 6,000 and 6,012 mm.
(Material No. P07-001) as necessary to the reamed holes (Ref. ROM Chap
12 or SRM 51-00-06).
(b) Do the subsequent steps if all of the hole diameters are 6,024 mm (0.23717 in) or
less:
NOTE: Steps 3.D.(2)(b)(i) thru (iii) are necessary only when you install a
connecting piece that has been removed and inspected.
(i) Obey the manufacturers instructions and apply layers of CCC solution
(ii) Obey the manufacturers instructions and apply layers of primer (Material No.
(iii) Use a permanent marker pen to re-apply the part markings as recorded
during the removal procedure.
(iv) Obey the manufacturers instructions and apply layers of corrosion

preventative (Material No. P04-039) on the faying surfaces of FR12A and the
connecting piece (8), bolts (5), washers (6) and nuts (7).
(v) Put the connecting piece (8) in position on FR12A and install the bolts (5),
washers (6) and nuts (7).
(vi) Obey the manufacturers instructions and use the white spirit (Material No.
P01-008) to remove unwanted corrosion preventative.
NOTE: Steps 3.D.(2)(c) thru 3.D.(2)(c)(vii) changes CONFIG 2A to CONFIG 2B.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 606
53-30-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Do the subsequent steps if one or more of the holes are more than 6,024 mm (0.237
in) but less than 6,35 mm (0.25 in).
NOTE: Step 3.D.(2)(c)(i) is not necessary for holes of diameter between 6.35 and
6.374 mm.
(i) Use a 6,35 mm (0.25 in) (H7) reamer to increase the diameters of the bolt
holes. Make sure there are no sharp edges.
inspection areas and the surfaces of the bolt holes (Ref. ROM Chap 12 or
SRM 51-00-06).
(iii) Obey the manufacturers instructions and apply layers of primer (Material No.
(iv) Use a permanent marker pen to re-apply the part number markings as
recorded during the removal procedure.
(v) Obey the manufacturers instructions and apply layers of corrosion

preventative (Material No. P04-039) on the faying surfaces of FR12A and the
connecting piece (8), bolts (9) and (10), washers (11) and nuts (12).
(vi) Put the connecting piece (8) in position on FR12A and install the longer bolt
(9) in the top hole and the shorter bolt (10) in the lower hole. For each bolt (8)
and (10) install one washer (11) under the head of the bolt and one washer
(11) under the nut (12).
(vii) Obey the manufacturers instructions and use the white spirit (Material No.
P01-008) to remove unwanted corrosion preventative.
E. Close up
CONFIG 1:
(2) Install the horizontal stabilizer actuator (Ref. AMM, 27-45-11, Page
Block 401, CONFIG 1).
CONFIG 2:
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 607
53-30-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
CONFIG 1
FR12A AIRCRAFT WITH 1
ELECTRICAL TRIM
2
3
A
2
4
NOTE:
OUT OF SERVICE
A
CONFIG 2A
FAIRCHILD TYPE AIRCRAFT WITH 5
8
MECHANICAL TRIM
AND 6 mm BOLTS 6
FR12A
RIVET
A
6 CONFIG 2B
7 AIRCRAFT WITH 9
MECHANICAL TRIM
AND 6.35 mm BOLTS
11
6
7
10
8
11
FR12A
11
12
12
11
Horizontal Trim-Actuator Support-Bracket and FR12A - Inspection/Check and Replacement

(Riveted Fairchild Type was Removed by SB-53-001 Rev. 1)
Figure 601
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 608
53-30-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WITHOUT INDEX AFTER WITH INDEX AFTER

PART NUMBER PART NUMBER
NOTE: OUT OF SERVICE
1479
Difference Between Fittings 116.40.06.033

(Fitting Without Index was Removed by SB 53-001 Rev. 1)
Figure 602
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 609
53-30-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CRITICAL AREAS
CRITICAL AREAS
SB2886
Critical Inspection Areas

Figure 603
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 610
53-30-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 55 - STABILIZERS
Chapter Chapter
Section Section
List of Effective 1 Jul 31/22 55-21-11 (Cont’d) 407 Jun 30/21
Pages 2 Jul 31/22 CONFIG 2 408 Jun 30/21
Table of Contents 1 Jul 31/22 55-21-12 401 Jun 30/21

2 Jul 31/22 402 Jun 30/21
403 Jun 30/21
55-10-00 601 Nov 21/18 404 Jun 30/21
602 Nov 21/18 405 Jun 30/21
603 Nov 21/18 406 Jun 30/21
604 Nov 21/18
55-26-11 401 Jun 14/92
55-11-11 401 Jun 30/21 402 Jun 14/92
402 Jun 30/21
403 Jun 30/21 55-31-11 401 Jul 31/22
404 Jun 30/21 402 Jul 31/22
405 Jun 30/21 403 Jul 31/22
406 Jun 30/21 404 Jul 31/22
407 Jun 30/21 405 Jul 31/22
408 Jun 30/21 406 Jul 31/22
601 May 30/19 55-41-11 401 Jun 30/21

602 May 30/19 CONFIG 1 402 Jun 30/21
603 May 30/19 403 Jun 30/21
604 May 30/19 404 Jun 30/21
605 May 30/19 405 Jun 30/21
606 May 30/19 406 Jun 30/21
407 Jun 30/21
55-21-11 401 Jun 30/21 408 Jun 30/21
CONFIG 1 402 Jun 30/21 409 Jun 30/21
403 Jun 30/21 410 Jun 30/21
404 Jun 30/21 411 Jun 30/21
405 Jun 30/21 412 Jun 30/21
406 Jun 30/21
407 Jun 30/21 55-41-11 401 Jun 30/21
408 Jun 30/21 CONFIG 2 402 Jun 30/21
409 Jun 30/21 403 Jun 30/21
410 Jun 30/21 404 Jun 30/21
405 Jun 30/21
CONFIG 2 401 Jun 30/21 406 Jun 30/21
402 Jun 30/21 407 Jun 30/21
403 Jun 30/21 408 Jun 30/21
404 Jun 30/21
405 Jun 30/21
406 Jun 30/21
Page 1
55-LEP Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
55-LEP Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 55 - STABILIZERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section

Horizontal Trim-Actuator Bearing-Fork or Bearing 601 All
Support Assemblies - Inspection/Check
ELEVATOR 55-20-00
ELEVATOR 55-21-11
Removal / Installation CONFIG 1 401 MSN 825 thru
995, Pre SB 55-
003
Removal / Installation CONFIG 2 401 MSN 996 and
subsequent and
Post SB 55-003
TORQUE TUBE ASSEMBLY 55-21-12
ELEVATOR BALANCE TAB 55-26-11
VERTICAL STABILIZER 55-31-00

VERTICAL STABILIZER 55-31-11
RUDDER 55-40-00
RUDDER 55-41-11
995, Pre SB 55-
003
subsequent and
Post SB 55-003
Page 1
55-TOC Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
55-TOC Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER - INSPECTION / CHECK
1. General
This procedure gives the data and instructions necessary to:
• Do a visual inspection of the horizontal stabilizer

• Do a check for play in the horizontal stabilizer hinges
• Do a check for wear in the eye-ends and attachment bolts of the actuator
• Post-SB 31-001: Do a check of the contact plates for correct installation.

- Inspection mirror
- Bright light source Explosion proof
- Torque wrench 0 to 20 Nm (0 to 180 lbf in.)
Warning Sign ‘DO NOT OPERATE THE
- Local manufacture
FLIGHT CONTROLS’
3. Procedure
A. Job Set Up
(1) On aircraft with electrically operated stabilizer trim, open and install a safety clip to the
following circuit breaker:
STAB TRIM
(2) Put a warning sign ‘DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT CONTROLS’ in the cockpit.
(3) Open the access panels FT2 and FT3 (Ref. 06-40-00, Page Block 1).
B. Inspection / Check (Ref. Fig. 601)
(1) Do a general visual inspection of the horizontal stabilizer. Examine the horizontal stabilizer
for:
• Damage and deformation

• Loose rivets
• Corrosion
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 601
55-10-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Examine the left and right hinge brackets for security of attachment to the structure:
• Make sure there are no cracks, loose rivets or loose screws/bolts.

• Use an inspection mirror and bright light source to examine the upset rivet heads
from inside the horizontal stabilizer.
• Get access through the access hole adjacent to the hinge brackets.
(3) Hold the bolt (1) and make sure the locknut (2) is correctly tightened. If necessary, torque
the nut (2) to 14,7 Nm (130 lbf in.).
CAUTION: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU TRY TO MOVE THE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER TO

DO THE CHECK OF THE HINGES. TOO MUCH FORCE CAN CAUSE DAMAGE
TO THE ATTACHMENTS.
(4) Do a check for play in the hinges:
NOTE: Two persons are required for this check.
(a) Get a second person to apply an up and down force to the LH outboard end plate of
the horizontal stabilizer.
(b) At the same time, do a check for movement at the LH hinge bolt. Movement is not
permitted. If there is movement, replace the hinge bolt and/or bush as necessary.
(c) Get a second person to apply an up and down force to the RH outboard end plate of
the horizontal stabilizer.
(d) At the same time, do a check for movement at the RH hinge bolt. Movement is not
permitted. If there is movement, replace the hinge bolt and/or bush as necessary.
(5) Do a check for wear in the actuator eye-ends and/or attachment bolts:
NOTE: Two persons are required for this check.
(a) Get a second person to pull down on the bottom inboard trailing-edge of the
horizontal stabilizer and measure the Dimension X (Ref. Fig. 601, View C).
NOTE: Dimension X is measured between the top of the fuselage tail cone and
the trailing edge of the horizontal stabilizer.
(b) Get the second person to push up on the bottom inboard trailing-edge of the
horizontal stabilizer and measure the Dimension X again.
(c) If the difference between the two measurements is 1,5 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the
system is serviceable. Do the Close-Up procedure.
(d) If the difference between the two measurements is more than 1,5 mm (0.06 in.)
there is too much wear:
(i) Remove the actuator and investigate the cause (Ref. 27-45-11, Page Block
401).
(ii) Replace the worn parts as necessary.
(iii) Install the actuator (Ref. 27-45-11, Page Block 401).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 602
55-10-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(iv) Do the check again.
Post-SB 31-001
(6) Do a check of the upper contact plate (3) and the lower contact plate (4) for correct
installation (Ref. Fig. 601):
(a) Examine for security of attachment to the horizontal-stabilizer.
(b) Make sure that the lockwire is in position and the screws (5) are not loose.
(c) Make sure that there is no evidence of contact plate shift.
(d) If the contact plates are not installed correctly as above, do the adjustment / test
procedure (Ref. 31-57-00, Page Block 501).
C. Job Close Up
(1) On aircraft with electrically operated stabilizer trim, remove the safety clip and close the
circuit breaker:
STAB TRIM
(2) Close the access panels FT2 and FT3 (Ref. 06-40-00, Page Block 1).
(3) Remove the warning sign from the cockpit.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 603
55-10-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
B
D B
C
B
LH SHOWN
HINGE
BRACKETS
D 3
C DIMENSION X
6734
Horizontal Stabilizer - Inspection/Check

Figure 601
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 604
55-10-00 Nov 21/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedures to remove and install the horizontal stabilizer.
• Aircraft with electrical trim with a bearing fork (CONFIG 1)

- Warning sign ‘Do not operate flight controls’

Or equivalent (0 Nm to 5 Nm
904.10.89.110 Torque wrench
(0 to 44.2 lbf in))
Or equivalent (4 to 20 Nm (35
to 177 lbf in))
B. Expendable Parts
55-11-01, Fig. 01 Spacer Ref. Fig. 401, Item 7

27-31-01, Fig. 01 Cotter pin Ref. Fig. 401, Item 10
55-11-01, Fig. 01 Nut, self-locking Ref. Fig. 401, Item 6
55-11-01, Fig. 01 Washer, teflon Ref. Fig. 401, Item 27
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
55-11-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

P04-028 Grease
3. Procedure
A. Job Set Up
(1) Set the horizontal stabiliser to give full nose up trim.
(2) On aircraft with electrical stabilizer trim, open and install a safety clip to the circuit breaker:
STAB TRIM
(3) Remove the elevators (Ref. 55-21-11, Page Block 401).
(4) Remove the access panels FB7 and FB8.
(5) Open the access panels FT2 and FT3 and disconnect the springs.
(6) Put a warning notice in the cockpit to tell personnel ‘DO NOT OPERATE THE FLIGHT
CONTROLS’.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER AND ELEVATORS ARE
CORRECTLY SUPPORTED DURING REMOVAL. DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT
OR EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR IF THE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER AND
ELEVATOR UNITS ARE NOT CORRECTLY SUPPORTED.
(1) Remove the safety clips or lockwire and loosen the turnbuckles to decrease the tension on
the elevator cables.
(2) Remove the cotter pin (37), nut (38), washer (39) and bolt (35) and disconnect the elevator
control cable (36). Discard the cotter pin.
(3) Remove the cotter pin (30), nut (31), washer (32) and bolt (34) and disconnect the elevator
control cable (33). Discard the cotter pin.
(4) Remove the cotter pin (10) (if installed), nut (3), washer (2) and bolt (1) and remove the
pulleys (11). Discard the cotter pin.
NOTE: Aircraft up to MSN 0886 have a nut (3) safetied with a cotter pin (10).
Aircraft from MSN 0887 have a self-locking nut (3) with no cotter pin (10).
(5) Pull the cables (33) and (36) clear of the horizontal stabilizer.
(6) Tie the actuator (23) or (28) to the tail wheel strut with cord to hold the actuator when it is
disconnected from the stabilizer.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
55-11-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Support the stabilizer.
(8) On aircraft with electrical trim (CONFIG 1):
(a) Remove the nut (26), washer (25) and bolt (24).
(b) Disconnect the actuator (28) and remove the teflon washers (27) and the washer
(29). Discard the teflon washers (27).
(c) Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with white spirit (Material No.
P01-008) and fully clean:
• The eye-end of the actuator (28)

• The bolt (24)
• The nut (26).
(9) On aircraft with mechanical trim with bearing support assemblies (CONFIG 2):
(a) Loosen the cable turnbuckles.
(b) Remove the cotter pin (22), nut (21), washers (20) and (19), spacer (45) and bolt
(18). Discard the cotter pin.
(c) Disconnect the actuator (23).
(10) On aircraft with mechanical trim with a bearing fork (CONFIG 3):
(a) Loosen the cable turnbuckles.
(b) Remove the cotter pin (43), nut (42), washer (41), flanged bushes (44), spacer (45)
and bolt (40). Discard the cotter pin.
(c) Disconnect the actuator (23).
(11) On aircraft pre-SB 102A:
(a) Remove the nut (13), washer (12) and bolt (17) from both hinges.
(b) Remove the horizontal stabilizer.
(c) Remove and discard the spacers (14) and (16).
(d) Remove the bush (15) from the hinge brackets.
(12) On aircraft post-SB 102A:
(a) Remove the nut (6), washer (5) and bolt (4) from both hinges.
(b) Remove the horizontal stabilizer.
(c) Remove and discard the spacers (7) and (9).
(d) Remove the flanged bushes (8) from the hinge brackets.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
55-11-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER AND ELEVATORS ARE
CORRECTLY SUPPORTED DURING INSTALLATION. DAMAGE TO THE
AIRCRAFT OR EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR IF THE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER
AND ELEVATOR UNITS ARE NOT CORRECTLY SUPPORTED.
CAUTION: DO NOT GET GREASE ON THE THREADS OF THE BOLTS (17) OR (4). THE
SCREWS CANNOT BE INSTALLED CORRECTLY WITH GREASE ON THE
SCREW THREADS.
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY ANY CORRECTION FACTOR FOR THE GREASE TO THE
TORQUE VALUE OF THE NUTS (6), (13) AND (26). THIS CAN CAUSE THESE
NUTS TO BE TORQUED INCORRECTLY.
(1) On aircraft pre-SB 102A:
(a) Apply grease (Material No. P04-028) to the shank of the bolts (17).
(b) Put the bushes (15) in position.
(c) Put the horizontal stabilizer in position.
(d) Put the new spacers (14) and (16) in position.
(e) Put the bolts (17) through the hinge brackets, spacers (16), bushes (15) and
spacers (14).
(f) Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with white spirit (Material No.
P01-008) and remove the unwanted grease. Make sure that there is no grease on
the threads of the bolts (17).
(g) Put the washers (12) in position on the bolts (17) and install the nuts (13) with your
fingers:
• When you can turn the nuts (13) on the bolts (17) with your fingers, the self-
locking nuts (13) are unserviceable
• When the nuts (13) are unserviceable, you must discard and replace them.
(h) Torque the nuts (13) to between 9 and 10 Nm (80 and 89 lbf in) plus the run-down
torque.
(i) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to the nuts (13), washers (12)
and heads of the bolts (17).
(2) On aircraft post-SB 102A:
(a) Apply grease (Material No. P04-028) to the shank of the bolts (4).
(b) Put the flanged bushes (8) in position.
(c) Put the horizontal stabilizer in position.
(d) Put the new spacers (7) and (9) in position.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
55-11-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) Put the bolts (4) through the hinge brackets, spacers (9), flanged bushes (8) and
spacers (7).
P01-008) and remove the unwanted grease. Make sure that there is no grease on
the threads of the bolts (4).
(g) Put the washers (5) in position on the bolts (4) and install the nuts (6) with your
fingers:
• When you can turn the nuts (6) on the bolts (4) with your fingers, the self-
(h) Torque the nuts (6) to between 9 and 10 Nm (80 and 89 lbf in) plus the run-down
torque.
(i) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to the nuts (13), washers (12)
and heads of the bolts (17).
(3) On aircraft with electrical trim (CONFIG 1):
(a) Apply a layer of grease (Material No. P04-028) to the shank and the threads of the
bolt (24).
(b) Do a check that you can turn the bolt (24) in the nut (26) with your fingers:
• When you can turn the bolt (24) in the nut (26) with your fingers, the self-
locking nut (26) is unserviceable
• When the nut (26) is unserviceable, you must replace it.
(c) Put the actuator (28) into position. Install the new teflon washers (27), washer (29),
bolt (24), washer (25) and nut (26).
(d) Torque the nut (26) to between 2,8 and 3,6 Nm (25 to 32 lbf in) plus the run-down
torque.
(e) Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with white spirit (Material No.
P01-008) and remove the unwanted grease.
(f) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to the head of the bolts (24),
nut (26), washers (29) and (25).
(4) On aircraft with mechanical trim with bearing support assemblies (CONFIG 2):
(a) Put the actuator (23) into position. Install the bolt (18), washers (19) and (20),
spacer (45) and nut (21).
(b) Torque the nut (21) to 5,6 Nm (50 lbf in).
(c) Safety the nut with a new cotter pin (22).
(5) On aircraft with mechanical trim with a bearing fork (CONFIG 3):
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 405
55-11-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) Put the actuator (23) into position. Install the bolt (40), spacer (45), flanged bushes
(44), washer (41) and nut (42).
(b) Torque the nut (42) to 5,6 Nm (50 lbf in).
(6) Put the pulleys (11) into position.
(7) Install the bolt (1), washer (2) and nut (3). Safety the nut with a new cotter pin (10) (if
necessary).
NOTE: Aircraft up to MSN 0686 have a nut (3) safetied with a cotter pin (10).
Aircraft from MSN 0687 have a self-locking nut (3) with no cotter pin (10).
(8) Put the elevator cables (33) and (36) into position.
(11) Install the elevators (Ref. 55-21-11, Page Block 401).
D. Test
(1) Remove the warning notice from the cockpit.
(2) On aircraft with electrical trim, remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
STAB TRIM
(3) Do the adjustment procedure for the horizontal stabilizer (Ref. 27-40-00, Page Block 501).
(4) Do the adjustment procedure for the elevator controls (Ref. 27-30-00, Page Block 501).
E. Close Up
(1) Make sure that the elevator cable and stabilizer turnbuckles are safetied.
work area is clean.
(3) Install the access panels FB7 and FB8.
(4) Connect the springs and close the access panels FT2 and FT3.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 406
55-11-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 3 1 4
A 1
B
10 1
11 9 8 8
7
3 2
A
37 AIRCRAFT POST-SB102A
35 36
39 38
2 3 1
1
12
13
29 25 26 17
10 1
15
11 16
24 14
27
3 2
31
27
34 33 32 30
28
A
AIRCRAFT PRE-SB102A
B
CONFIG 1
AIRCRAFT WITH
NOTE: ELECTRICAL STABILIZER TRIM
WITH BEARING FORK
1 MSN UP TO 0866 ONLY
6840
2 MSN FROM 0887 ONLY
Horizontal Stabilizer - Removal/Installation

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 407
55-11-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
37
35 36
39 38
18 19 20 21
32 31
45
22
34 33 37
30 35 36
23
B
CONFIG 2
AIRCRAFT WITH 39 38
MECHANICAL STABILIZER TRIM
WITH BEARING SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
40 41 42
31
32
43
44 45 44
B 34 33 30
CONFIG 3 23
AIRCRAFT WITH
MECHANICAL STABILIZER TRIM
WITH BEARING FORK
6841
Horizontal Stabilizer - Removal/Installation

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 408
55-11-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
HORIZONTAL TRIM-ACTUATOR BEARING-FORK OR BEARING SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

INSPECTION / CHECK
1. General
This procedure gives the data and instructions necessary to do an inspection of the horizontal trim-
actuator bearing-fork, or bearing support assemblies, installed in the horizontal stabilizer.
This inspection is applicable to:
• Aircraft with electrical trim with a bearing fork (CONFIG 1)

This inspection must be done at the same time as the inspection of the Horizontal Trim-Actuator
Support-Bracket and Frame 12A (Ref. 53-30-00, Page Block 601).

P01-008 Solvent
P02-020 Scotch-Brite Regular grade
P04-039 Corrosion Preventative CA1000
P07-001 CCC Solution Alodine 1200S
P07-007 Primer (Epoxy)
3. Procedures
NOTE: In the procedures that follow:
• CONFIG 1 refers to aircraft with electrical trim with a bearing fork

• CONFIG 2 refers to aircraft with mechanical trim with bearing support assemblies
• CONFIG 3 refers to aircraft with mechanical trim with a bearing fork.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 601
55-11-11 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Preparation (Ref. Fig. 601)
CONFIG 1:
(1) Remove the horizontal stabilizer actuator (Ref. AMM 27-45-11, Page Block 401, CONFIG
1).
the bottom surface.
(3) Make a record of the part number markings of the bearing fork (4).
CONFIG 2:
the bottom surface.
(6) Make a record of the part number markings of the bearing supports (6) and (7).
CONFIG 3:
the bottom surface.
(9) Make a record of the part number markings of the bearing fork (4).
(1) Do a visual inspection:
(a) Remove loose paint if necessary, then use absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031)
and the solvent (Material No. P01-008) to clean:
• The surfaces of the bearing fork (4) or bearing supports (6) and (7) to which
you have access.
(b) Use a 10x magnifier and bright light to visually examine the following parts for
damage, cracks and signs of uneven wear. No damage, cracks or uneven wear is
permitted:
• The bearing fork (4) or bearing supports (6) and (7) to which you have
access.
If you find uneven wear, contact Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 602
55-11-11 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Do a Non-Destructive Inspection (NDI):
NOTE: As an alternative to the dye-penetrant inspection you can do an eddy current

inspection, which does not require removal of the surface finish. A right-angled
shaft surface-probe with minimal drop is required to inspect in the gap between
the lugs of the components:
• CONFIG 1 and 3 aircraft - smallest gap is 12,7 mm (0.5 in).

• CONFIG 2 aircraft - smallest gap is 7,5 mm (0.30 in).
NOTE: Step 3.B.(2)(a) is only necessary if you will do a dye-penetrant NDI. The eddy
current NDI does not require the removal of surface treatment.
(a) Obey the manufacturers instructions and use the solvent (Material No. P01-008),
Scotch-Brite (Material No P02-020) and/or non-metal scrapers to remove the layers
of paint and protection from:
• The surfaces of the bearing fork (4) or bearing supports (6) and (7) to which
you have access.
CAUTION: ONLY PERSONNEL QUALIFIED AND CERTIFIED TO THE APPLICABLE

LEVEL II (OR HIGHER) OF NATIONAL AEROSPACE STANDARD NAS 410,
EUROPEAN STANDARD EN 4179 OR MIL-STD-410E, OR EQUIVALENT
AEROSPACE STANDARD, ARE PERMITTED TO DO THE NDI.
(b) Do a dye-penetrant NDI, or the alternative eddy current NDI, as follows:
NOTE: Refer to Airworthiness Limitations Doc. 02334, Appendix J, or SRM

51-00-09 as applicable for the related inspection procedures.
(i) Do the NDI for cracks in all surfaces of the:
• Bearing fork (4) or bearing supports (6) and (7).
(ii) No crack damage is permitted. You must replace:
• Cracked components (Ref. Table 601 - Component Replacement Data)

• The two bearing supports (6) and (7) if only one is found cracked.
Component Part No. Replacement
Bearing Fork 116.40.06.034 Ref. Para C

(CONFIG 1 and 3)
Bearing Support (Left) 6304.0023.01 Ref. Repair and Overhaul Manual
(CONFIG 2) (ROM), Chap 2 or SRM 51-00-03
Bearing Support (Right) 6304.0023.02 Ref. Repair and Overhaul Manual
(CONFIG 2) (ROM), Chap 2 or SRM 51-00-03
Table 601 - Component Replacement Data
(3) If you find no crack damage:
(a) Obey the manufacturers instructions and apply a layer of CCC Solution (Material
No. P07-001) to all bare metal areas.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 603
55-11-11 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Obey the manufacturers instructions and apply layers of primer (Material No. P07-
007) and paint as necessary to the applicable components (Ref. ROM, Chap 12).
(c) Use a permanent marker pen to re-apply the part number markings as recorded
during the preparation procedure.
C. Replacement (Ref. Fig. 601)
(1) Remove the horizontal stabilizer (Ref. AMM 55-11-11, Page Block 401).
CONFIG 1 AND 3:
(2) Remove the bearing fork (4):
(3) Use a suitable drill to remove the rivets that attach the access panel (1) to the bottom skin
of the horizontal stabilizer. (Ref. ROM Chap 2 or SRM 51-00-03).
NOTE: Some horizontal stabilizers have two access panels (1).
(a) Remove the nuts (5) and (10), washers (3) and (9), the bolts (2) and the screw (8)
then remove the bearing fork (4). Discard the bearing fork (4) only after you have
used it as a template in Step 3.C.(4)(a) and (b).
(b) Obey the manufacturers instructions and apply layers of CCC solution (Material No.
P07-001) as necessary in the rivet holes and on all bare metal surfaces.
(4) Preparation of a new bearing fork (4):
(a) Use a suitable drill to match drill the top two holes in the bearing fork (4) to the holes
in the structure. Use the removed bearing fork (4) as a template. Ream the holes to
final size diameter 4,82 +0,012/-0 mm.
(b) Use a suitable drill and reamer to match drill the third hole in the bearing fork (4) to
the existing 3,2 mm hole in the stringer. Use the removed bearing fork (4) as a
template.
(c) Obey the manufacturers instructions and apply layers of CCC solution (Material No.
P07-001) as necessary to the reamed hole (Ref. ROM Chap 12 or SRM 51-00-06).
(5) Install the new bearing fork (4):
(a) Obey the manufacturers instructions and apply layers of corrosion preventative
(Material No. P07-039) on the faying surfaces of the bearing fork (4) and the
adjacent structure. Also do this on the applicable surfaces of the nuts (5) and (10),
washers (3) and (9), the bolts (2) and the screw (8).
(b) Put the bearing fork (4) in position and install the bolts (2), the screw (8), the
washers (3) and (9) and the nuts (5) and (10).
(c) Obey the manufacturers instructions and use the solvent (Material No. P01-008) to
remove unwanted corrosion preventative.
CONFIG 2:
(d) Replace the bearing supports (6) and (7) (Ref. ROM Chap 2 or SRM
51-00-03).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 604
55-11-11 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CONFIGS 1, 2 AND 3:
(6) Obey the manufacturers instructions and apply layers of CCC solution (Material No. P07-
001) on the faying surfaces of the access panel (1) and adjacent skin.
(7) Put the access panel (1) in position and install rivets (CR3223-4-2) (Ref. ROM Chap 2 or
SRM 51-00-03).
(8) Install the horizontal stabilizer (Ref. AMM 55-11-11, Page Block 401).
D. Close up
CONFIG 1:
CONFIG 2:
CONFIG 3:
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 605
55-11-11 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 1
B
2
A
CONFIG 1 AND 3
3 AIRCRAFT WITH
ELECTRICAL OR MECHANICAL TRIM
8 WITH BEARING FORK
3
5
9
10 4
B
CONFIG 1 AND 3
A 1 1
CONFIG 2
AIRCRAFT WITH
MECHANICAL TRIM 7 6
6838
WITH BEARING SUPPORTS
Horizontal Trim-Actuator Bearing-Fork or Bearing Support Assembly - Inspection/Check

Figure 601
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 606
55-11-11 May 30/19
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
VERTICAL STABILIZER - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
The Page Block gives the procedure to remove and install the vertical stabilizer.

Or equivalent (0 Nm to 5 Nm (0 to
44.2 lbf in))
Or equivalent (4 to 20 Nm (35 to 177
lbf in))
B. Expendable Parts
55-31-01, Fig. 01 Anchor nut Ref. Fig. 401, Item 4


P10-013 CPC
P10-018 CPC
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
55-31-11 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Procedure
A. Job Set Up (Ref. Fig. 401)
CONTROLS’.
(2) Remove the rudder (Ref. 55-41-11, Page Block 401). On aircraft with electrically operated
trim, this opens and installs a safety clip on the circuit breaker:
RUDDER TRIM
(3) Remove the eight screws (2) from the anchor nuts (4) and remove the access panel EL1
(3).
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE VERTICAL STABILIZER IS CORRECTLY SUPPORTED

DURING REMOVAL. DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT OR EQUIPMENT CAN
OCCUR IF THE VERTICAL STABILIZER IS NOT CORRECTLY SUPPORTED.
(1) Remove the 26 screws (5) from the anchor nuts (6) in the skin of the vertical stabilizer (1)
at the stabilizer root rib.
(2) Remove the two bolts (8) and washers (7) from the anchor nuts (9) in the aft fuselage at
the forward spar connection of the vertical stabilizer (1).
(3) Remove the six bolts (11) and washers (10) from the anchor nuts (9) and (13) in the aft
fuselage at the forward spar connection of the vertical stabilizer (1). Disconnect the
bonding strap (12) at one end with it still attached to the aft fuselage.
(4) Remove the four screws (14) from the anchor nuts (13) at the forward spar connection of
the vertical stabilizer (1).
(5) Remove the four bolts (17) and washers (16) from the anchor nuts (15) and (18) that
attach the vertical stabilizer stringers to the aft fuselage.
(6) Remove the four screws (25) from the anchor nuts (24) at the aft splice fittings of the
vertical stabilizer (1).
(7) Remove the two bolts (21) and washers (20) from the anchor nuts (19) that attach the aft
splice fittings of the vertical stabilizer (1) to the aft fuselage.
(8) Hold the vertical stabilizer (1) and remove the six bolts (23) and washers (22) from the
anchor nuts (19) that attach the aft splice fittings of the vertical stabilizer (1) to the aft
fuselage.
(9) Carefully move vertical stabilizer (1) up to remove it from the aft fuselage.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
55-31-11 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE VERTICAL STABILIZER IS CORRECTLY SUPPORTED

DURING INSTALLATION. DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT OR EQUIPMENT CAN
OCCUR IF THE VERTICAL STABILIZER IS NOT CORRECTLY SUPPORTED.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT YOU TORQUE TIGHTEN THE FASTENERS CORRECTLY.
UNLESS SPECIFIC TORQUE VALUES ARE GIVEN, USE THE STANDARD
TORQUE VALUES (REF. 20-10-02, PAGE BLOCK 201). DAMAGE TO THE
AIRCRAFT AND/OR EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR WHEN FASTENERS ARE NOT
TORQUE TIGHTENED CORRECTLY.
(1) Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with white spirit (Material No. P01-
008) and fully clean all the removed screws, bolts and washers to remove the unwanted
remaining CPC.
(2) Do a check of the anchor nuts (4), (6), (9), (13), (15), (18), (19) and (24) as follows:
(a) Try to install a screw or bolt into each anchor nut as follows with your fingers:
• Screw (2) into anchor nuts (4)

• Bolt (8) into anchor nuts (9)
• Bolt (11) into anchor nuts (9) and (13)
• Bolt (17) into anchor nuts (15) and (18)
• Bolt (21) into anchor nuts (19)
• Bolt (23) into anchor nuts (19).
(b) When you can turn the screw or bolt into the anchor nut with your fingers the self-
locking anchor nuts are unserviceable.
(c) Remove and discard the unserviceable anchor nuts and install new replacement
anchor nuts as necessary (Ref. SRM 51-00-03, Page Block 1).
(3) Carefully move the vertical stabilizer (1) down onto the aft fuselage and hold it in position.
(4) Install the six bolts (23) and washers (22) to the anchor nuts (19) to attach the aft splice
fittings of the vertical stabilizer (1) to the aft fuselage.
(5) Install the two bolts (21) and washers (20) to the anchor nuts (19) to attach the aft splice
fittings of the vertical stabilizer (1) to the aft fuselage.
(6) Install the four screws (25) in the anchor nuts (24) at the aft splice fittings of the vertical
stabilizer (1).
(7) Install the four bolts (17) and washers (16) to the anchor nuts (15) and (18) to attach the
vertical stabilizer stringers to the aft fuselage.
(8) Install the four screws (14) to the anchor nuts (13) at the forward spar connection of the
vertical stabilizer (1).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
55-31-11 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(9) Put the end of the bonding strap (12) in position and install the six bolts (11) and washers
(10) to the anchor nuts (9) and (13) at the aft fuselage at the forward spar connection of
the vertical stabilizer (1).
(10) Install the two bolts (8) and washers (7) to the anchor nuts (9) in the aft fuselage at the
forward spar connection of the vertical stabilizer (1).
(11) Install the 26 screws (5) to the anchor nuts (6) in the skin of the vertical stabilizer (1) at the
stabilizer root rib.
(12) Repair the layers of CPC (Material No. P10-018) as necessary in the work area (Ref.
20-40-00, Page Block 201).
(13) Apply CPC (Material No. P10-013) to the heads of the fasteners and washers as follows:
• Screw (2)
• Bolt (7)
• Bolt (11)
• Bolt (17)
• Screw (25)
• Bolt (21)
• Bolt (23).
008) and remove the unwanted CPC.
D. Close Up (Ref. Fig. 401)
work area is clean.
(2) Put the access panel EL1 (3) in position and install the eight screws (2) in the anchor nuts
(4).
(3) Install the rudder (Ref. 55-41-11, Page Block 401). On aircraft with electrically operated
trim, this removes the safety clip and installs the circuit breaker:
RUDDER TRIM
(4) Make sure that the warning notice is removed from the cockpit.
(5) Do the adjustment/test of the rudder (Ref. 27-20-00, Page Block 501).
(6) Do the adjustment/test of the rudder trim tab (Ref. 27-25-00, Page Block 501).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
55-31-11 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
4 A 1
B
2
C
E
3
D
6
C
B F
5
9
D
10
19
11 15
10
22 16
11
13 12
23 17
13
7 8
20 17
18
25
24
21
19
F 14
E 16
6887
10 11
Horizontal Stabilizer - Removal / Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 405
55-31-11 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 406
55-31-11 Jul 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELEVATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedures to remove and install the elevators.

- Striking tool, dia. 5 mm (pin Local supply
punch)
(0 to 44.2 lbf in))
to 177 lbf in))
B. Expendable Parts
55-11-01, Fig. 01 Nut Ref. Fig. 402, Item 4

55-11-01, Fig. 01 Bearing, ball Ref. Fig. 402, Item 2
- Tape Local supply

P02-001 Lockwire (standard)
P04-028 Grease
3. Procedure
A. Job Set Up
circuit breaker:
STAB TRIM
EFFECTIVITY: MSN 825 thru 995, Pre-SB 55-003 and

Pre-SB 55-005 (Part 3) CONFIG 1
Page 401
55-21-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Remove access panel ET1 and/or EB1 as necessary (Ref. AMM. 06-40-00, Page Block 1).
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE ELEVATOR IS CORRECTLY SUPPORTED DURING

REMOVAL. DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT OR EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR IF THE
ELEVATOR IS NOT CORRECTLY SUPPORTED.
(1) Make a note of the trim tab angle if a trim tab is installed.
(2) Remove the nut (3), washer (2) and bolt (1) and disconnect the balance tab pushrod (6).
(3) Remove the nuts (4) and (7), and the washers (5) and (8).
(4) Remove the lockwire from the bolt (10).
(5) Remove the bolt (10) and washer (9).
(6) Remove the elevator.
(7) Hinge Bearing Inspection (Ref. Fig. 402)
(a) Hold the left and right outer integral supports (3) and remove the nuts (4), washers
(5) and screws (1).
(b) Remove the left and right outer integral supports (3) from the horizontal stabilizer.
(c) Examine the bearings (2):
(i) Make sure that the bearings (2) are not loose, damaged, corroded, seized or
worn.
(ii) Remove damaged, loose or worn bearings (2) and install new replacement
bearings (2) (Ref. AMM 20-50-01, Page Block 201).
NOTE: The bearings (2) are bonded or swaged into the outer integral supports
(3).
(8) Anchor Nut Check (Ref. Fig. 401 and Fig. 403)
NOTE: The LH elevator assy and the RH elevator assy can have different types of
anchor nut (11).
(a) Examine the type of anchor nut (nylon insert or metal stop):
(i) Put the tape onto the 5 mm diameter striking-tool (pin punch) at a distance Y
of 8,000 mm (0.315 in) from the end of the tool (Ref. Fig. 403).
(ii) Put the 5 mm diameter striking-tool (pin punch) through the hinge holes for
the bolt (10) as follows:
• Tilt the tool a small amount as you push it through bore of the second
rib attachment fitting
• Continue to push the tool through the bore gently with its leading edge

Page 402
55-21-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
in contact with the surface of the bore

• Do this until you feel the tool edge against the first thread of the anchor
nut (11).
(iii) Measure the distance X:
• Nylon insert type - X is approximately between 2,000 and 3,000 mm

(0.079 and 0.118 in)
• Metal stop type - X is approximately zero.
(b) Make a record of the type of anchor nuts (11) (nylon or metal) installed at each
hinge location.
C. Installation (Ref. Fig. 401 and Fig. 402)
CAUTION: THE TORQUE VALUES GIVEN IN STEP 3.C.(1)(g) DO NOT INCLUDE THE RUN-
DOWN TORQUE. MAKE SURE THAT THE SELF-LOCKING NUT IS
SERVICEABLE AND ADD THE RUN-DOWN TORQUE. THIS IS NECESSARY
FOR THE BOLT (10) TO BE TORQUED CORRECTLY.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE ELEVATOR TO BE INSTALLED IS BALANCED. THE

ELEVATOR BALANCE PROCEDURE IS GIVEN IN 27-00-00, PAGE BLOCK 201.
DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT OR EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR IF THE ELEVATOR
IS NOT CORRECTLY BALANCED.

INSTALLATION. DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT OR EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR IF
THE ELEVATOR IS NOT CORRECTLY SUPPORTED.
(1) Install the Outer Integral Support onto the Elevator (Ref. Fig. 401)
NOTE: The procedure to install the left outer integral support is the same as the right
outer integral support.
(a) Apply a layer of grease (Material No. P04-028) or installation paste (Material No.
P04-029) to the shank and the threads of the bolt (10).
(b) If during Step 3.B.(8)(b), the anchor nut (11) is recorded as nylon type:
• Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with white spirit (Material
No. P01-008) and
• Clean the grease or installation paste from the threads of the bolt (10).
(c) Put the left or right outer integral support into position on the elevator.
(d) Put the washer (9) on the bolt (10) and insert the bolt (10) through the hole in the
elevator rib, bearing and into the anchor nut (11).

Page 403
55-21-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) Do a check that you can turn the bolt (10) in the anchor nut (11) with your fingers:
• When you can turn the bolt (10) in the anchor nut (11) with your fingers, the
self-locking anchor nut (11) is unserviceable
• When the anchor nut (11) is unserviceable, you must do the modification -
Part 3 of SB 55-005.
NOTE: The modification in Part 3 of SB 55-005 removes the anchor nut (11) and
replaces the fastener assembly through the outer integral support.
(f) Measure the run-down torque necessary to turn the bolt (10) in the anchor nut (11).
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY ANY CORRECTION FACTOR FOR THE GREASE OR

INSTALLATION PASTE TO THE TORQUE VALUE OF THE BOLT (10). THIS
CAN CAUSE THE BOLT (10) TO BE TORQUED INCORRECTLY.
(g) Torque the bolt (10) to 5,1 Nm (45 lbf in) plus the recorded run-down torque (Ref.
Step 3.C.(1)(f)).
(h) Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with white spirit (Material No.
P01-008) and remove the unwanted grease or installation paste.
(i) Do a check for gaps between the head of the bolt (10), washer (9) and the rib. No
gaps are allowed.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE THE OLD LOCKWIRE TAB (PRE-SB 55-001) TO

SAFETY THE BOLT (10). THE BOLT (10) IS NOT SAFETIED
CORRECTLY WHEN YOU USE THE OLD LOCKWIRE TAB.
(j) Safety the bolt (10) with lockwire (Material No. P02-007) to the locking screw (12) as
shown (Ref. Fig. 401, View E) (Ref. AMM 20-10-01, Page Block 201).
(k) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to the head of the bolt (10), the
locking screw (12) and the lockwire.
(2) Put the elevator in position on the horizontal stabilizer.
(3) At the center of the elevator (Ref. Fig. 401):
(a) Install the washers (8) and (5) and nuts (7) and (4).
(b) Torque the nuts (7) and (4) to between 3,5 and 4,0 Nm (31 and 36 lbf in) plus the
run-down torque.
(c) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to the washers (8) and (5) and
nuts (7) and (4).
(4) At the outboard hinges (Ref. Fig. 402):
CAUTION: DO NOT GET GREASE OR INSTALLATION PASTE ON THE THREADS OF THE

SCREWS. THE SCREWS CANNOT BE INSTALLED CORRECTLY WITH GREASE
OR INSTALLATION PASTE ON THE SCREW THREADS.
(a) Apply grease (Material No. P04-028) or installation paste (Material No. P04-029) to
the shank of the screws (1).

Page 404
55-21-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Put the screws (1) in position and install the washers (5) and nuts (4) with your
fingers:
• When you can turn the screws (1) in the nuts (4) with your fingers, the self-
(c) Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with white spirit (Material No.
(d) Tighten the nuts (4) and screws (1).
(e) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to the nuts (4), washers (5) and
heads of the screws (1).
(5) Connect the push rod (Ref. Fig. 401):
(a) Put the push rod (6) of the balance tab in position and install the bolt (1), washer (2)
and nut (3).
(b) If a trim tab is installed:
• Adjust the angle of the trim tab to that noted during removal
• Do this again after the next flight.
D. Test
circuit breaker:
STAB TRIM
(3) Do the adjustment/test of the elevator controls (Ref. 27-30-00, Page Block 501).
(4) Do the adjustment/test of the elevator balance tabs (Ref. 27-32-00, Page Block 501).
E. Close Up
work area is clean.
(2) Install access panel ET1 and/or EB1 as necessary.

Page 405
55-21-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C
A
C
B
2
3 B
1
7
8
4
5
6
C
RH SHOWN
LH SIMILAR E
9
10
11
6318
D
Elevator - Removal/Installation

Page 406
55-21-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
11
STRIKING TOOL IN
CONTACT WITH
START OF THREAD
METAL STOP TYPE:

NO GAP
X
NYLON INERT TYPE:
TAPE GAP
5 mm DIAMETER
STRIKING TOOL
SECTION
D-D
10
12
OLD
LOCKWIRE
TAB
MATERIAL No.
P02-007
6866
Figure 401 (Sheet 2of 2)

Page 407
55-21-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B
A
B
1
3
6867
Outer Integral Supports - Removal/Installation

Figure 402

Page 408
55-21-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAPE
5 mm DIAMETER
STRIKING TOOL
6868
Striking Tool, Diameter 5 mm (Pin Punch) - Tape Application

Figure 403

Page 409
55-21-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

Page 410
55-21-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELEVATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedures to remove and install the elevators.

(0 to 44.2 lbf in))
to 177 lbf in))
B. Expendable Parts


P04-028 Grease
3. Procedure
A. Job Set Up
following circuit breaker:
STAB TRIM
(2) Remove the access panels ET1 and ET2 (left elevator) and/or EB1 and EB2 (right
elevator).
CONTROLS’.
EFFECTIVITY: MSN 996 and subsequent and aircraft

Post-SB 55-003 and Post-SB 55-005 CONFIG 2
(Part 3) Page 401
55-21-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ELEVATOR IS NOT CORRECTLY SUPPORTED.
(1) Make a note of the trim tab angle if a trim tab is installed.
(2) Remove the nut (3), washer (2) and bolt (1) and disconnect the balance tab pushrod (6).
(3) Give support to the elevator.
(4) Remove the nuts (4) and (7), and the washers (5) and (8).
(6) Remove the nut (10), the washer (11), the bolt (13) and the washer (12).
(7) Remove the elevator.
(8) Outer Hinge Bearing - Inspection and Replacement (Ref. Fig. 402)
(a) Examine the bearings (2) in the left and right outer integral supports (3):
(i) Make sure that the bearing (2) is not loose, damaged, corroded, seized or
worn.
(ii) When the bearing (2) is damaged, loose, seized or worn bearing (2) remove
the outer integral support (3) and install a new replacement bearing (2).
NOTE: The bearing is bonded or swaged into the outer integral support.
(b) If necessary, remove the outer integral support (3) for bearing (2) replacement:
(i) Hold the outer integral support (3) and remove the nuts (4), washers (5) and
screws (1).
(ii) Remove the outer integral support (3) from the horizontal stabilizer.
(c) Replace the damaged bearing (2) in the outer integral support (3) (Ref. AMM
20-50-01, Page Block 201).

(Part 3) Page 402
55-21-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Installation
CAUTION: THE TORQUE VALUES GIVEN IN STEP 3.C.(d) DO NOT INCLUDE THE RUN-
FOR THE BOLT (10) TO BE TORQUED CORRECTLY.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE ELEVATOR TO BE INSTALLED IS BALANCED. THE

ELEVATOR BALANCE PROCEDURE IS GIVEN IN 27-00-00, PAGE BLOCK 201.

(1) Install the Outer Integral Support - Part 1 (Ref. Fig. 402)
(a) Continue with Step 3.C.(2) if the bearing (2) was not replaced in the outer integral
support (3) during removal (Ref. Step 3.B.(8)).
(b) Do this procedure for left or right outer integral support (3) installation as necessary
when removed for bearing (2) replacement.
CAUTION: DO NOT GET GREASE OR INSTALLATION PASTE ON THE THREADS OF

THE SCREWS. THE SCREWS CANNOT BE INSTALLED CORRECTLY
WITH GREASE OR INSTALLATION PASTE ON THE SCREW THREADS.
(c) Apply grease (Material No. P04-028) or installation paste (Material No. P04-029) to
(d) Put the outer integral support (3) in position on the horizontal stabilizer.
(e) Put the screws (1) in position and install the washers (5) and nuts (4) with your
fingers:
• When the nuts (4) are unserviceable, you must discard and replace them
• Do not fully tighten the screws (1) in the nuts (4).
NOTE: The screws (1) and nuts (4) are installed loose during this Step to let the
outer integral support (3) be adjusted to align with the elevator attachment
brackets.

(Part 3) Page 403
55-21-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Install the Elevator (Ref. Fig. 401)
(a) Put the elevator in the installed position.
(b) Apply a layer of grease (Material No. P04-028) or installation paste (Material No.
(c) Install the bolt (13) the washers (12) and (11) and the nut (10).

INSTALLATION PASTE TO THE TORQUE VALUE OF THE NUT (10). THIS
CAN CAUSE THE NUT (10) TO BE TORQUED INCORRECTLY.
(d) Torque the nut (10) to between 3,2 and 6,2 Nm (32 and 55 lbf in) plus the run-down
torque.
(f) Safety the nut (10) with the new cotter pin (9) (Ref. AMM 20-10-01, Page Block
201).
CAUTION: DO NOT GET CORROSION PREVENTATIVE ON THE BEARINGS.

CORROSION PREVENTATIVE CAN CONTAMINATE AND DAMAGE THE
BEARINGS.
(g) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to the head of the bolts (13),
nut (10), washers (12) and (11) and the cotter pin (9).
(h) Install the washers (5) and (8), and the nuts (4) and (7).
(i) Torque the nuts (4) and (7) to between 3,5 and 4,0 Nm (31 and 36 lbf in) plus the
run-down torque.
(j) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to the nuts (4) and (7) and
washers (5) and (8).
(3) Install the Outer Integral Support - Part 2 (Ref. Fig. 402)
(b) Fully tighten the nuts (4) and screws (1).
(c) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to the nuts (4), washers (5) and
(4) Connect the Control Rod and Adjust the Trim Tab (Ref. Fig. 401)
(a) Put the control rod (6) in position and install the bolt (1), washer (2) and nut (3).
(b) If a trim tab is installed:
• Adjust the angle of the trim tab to that noted during removal
• Do this again after the next flight.

(Part 3) Page 404
55-21-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Test
circuit breaker:
STAB TRIM
(3) Do the adjustment/test of the elevator controls (Ref. 27-30-00, Page Block 501).
(4) Do the adjustment/test of the elevator balance tabs (Ref. 27-32-00, Page Block 501).
E. Close Up
work area is clean.
(2) Install the access panels ET1 and ET2 (left elevator) and/or EB1 and EB2 (right elevator).

(Part 3) Page 405
55-21-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
B
A
10
11
12
13
B
3
7
4
5
6
6759
Figure 401

(Part 3) Page 406
55-21-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B
A
B
1
3
6867
Horizontal Stabilizer - Outer Hinge Bearing - Inspection / Replacement

Figure 402

(Part 3) Page 407
55-21-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

(Part 3) Page 408
55-21-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELEVATOR - TORQUE TUBE ASSEMBLY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedures to remove and install the elevator torque-tube assembly which
includes the elevator actuator lever.
These procedures are applicable to:
• CONFIG 1 - MSN 825 thru 995 and Aircraft pre-SB 55-003 or pre-SB 55-005 (Part 3) - This
configuration uses self-locking nuts with a metal stop
• CONFIG 2 - MSN 996 and subsequent and Aircraft Post-SB 55-003 or post-SB 55-005 (Part 3) -
This configuration uses self-locking castellated nuts with a nylon insert and are safetied with a
cotter pin.
It is necessary to remove and install the elevator torque-tube assembly during on aircraft balancing of
the elevator (Ref. 27-00-00, Page Block 201).

Or equivalent (0 to 5 Nm (0 to
44.2 lbf in))

P04-028 Grease
C. Expendable Parts
55-21-01, Fig. 01 Nut, self locking Ref. Fig. 401, Item 3

55-21-01, Fig. 01 Nut, self locking Ref. Fig. 401, Item 8
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
55-21-12 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Procedure
A. Job Set Up
CONTROLS’.
(2) Remove the elevators (Ref. 55-21-11, Page Block 401).
CAUTION: DO NOT REMOVE A HINGE BOLT BEFORE YOU RELEASE THE TENSION ON
THE CABLES. DO NOT LOOSEN THE CABLES TOO MUCH AS THEY CAN
COME OFF THE PULLEYS. REMOVE ONLY ONE HINGE BOLT AT A TIME.
DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT OR EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR.
(1) Release the tension at the turnbuckles for the elevator operating cables (Ref. AMM
27-31-11, Page Block 401).
(2) Remove and discard the cotter pins (7) (CONFIG 2 only).
(3) Hold the elevator torque-tube assembly (4) or (10) and remove the fasteners:
(a) Remove the nut (3) or (8), the washers (2) or (9) and bolt (1) or (6) from the LH
connecting plate.
(b) Remove the nut (3) or (8), the washers (2) or (9) and the bolt (5) or (11) from the RH
connecting plate.
(4) Remove the elevator torque-tube assembly (4) or (10).
CONFIG ALL:
008) and fully clean the bolts (1) and (5) or (6) and (11).
CONFIG 1:
(2) Apply a layer of grease (Material No. P04-028) to the shank and threads of the bolts (1)
and (5).
(3) Put the elevator torque-tube assembly (4) into position.
(4) Put the bolt (1) and washer (2) into position through the LH connecting plate.
(5) Put the bolt (5) and washer (2) into position through the RH connecting plate.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
55-21-12 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Put the nuts (3) and washers (2) into position on the bolts (1) and (5) and turn them with
your fingers:
• When you can turn the bolts (1) and (5) with your fingers, the self-locking nuts (3)
are unserviceable
(8) Torque the nuts (3) to between 3,1 and 4,1 Nm (27 and 36 lbf in) plus the run-down torque.
CONFIG 2:
CAUTION: DO NOT GET GREASE ON THE THREADS OF THE BOLT. THE BOLTS CANNOT
BE TIGHTENED CORRECTLY WHEN GREASE IS APPLIED TO THE THREADS.
(9) Apply a layer of grease (Material No. P04-028) to the shank of the bolts (6) and (11).
(10) Put the elevator torque-tube assembly (10) into position.
(11) Put the bolt (6) and washer (9) into position through the LH connecting plate.
(12) Put the bolt (11) and washer (9) into position through the RH connecting plate.
(14) Put the nuts (8) and washers (9) into position on the bolts (6) and (11) and turn them with
your fingers:
• When you can turn the bolts (6) and (11) with your fingers, the self-locking nuts (8)
are unserviceable
(15) Torque the nuts (8) to between 3,4 and 4,5 Nm (30 and 40 lbf in) plus the run-down torque.
(16) Safety the nuts (8) with the new cotter pins (7) (Ref. AMM 20-10-01, Page Block 201).
CONFIG ALL:
CAUTION: DO NOT GET CORROSION PREVENTATIVE ON THE BEARINGS. CORROSION

PREVENTATIVE CAN CONTAMINATE AND DAMAGE THE BEARINGS.
(17) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to the heads of the bolts (1) and (5) or
(6) and (11), nuts (3) or (8), washers (2) or (9) and the cotter pins (7) (CONFIG 2 only).
(18) Tighten the turnbuckles sufficiently to keep the elevator operating cables on the pulleys.
NOTE: The cables are tensioned during the adjustment/test of the elevator controls
during elevator installation.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
55-21-12 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Close Up
work area is clean.
(2) Install the elevators (Ref. 55-21-11, Page Block 401).
(3) Make sure that the warning notice is removed from the cockpit.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
55-21-12 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
2 3
2
2
3 5
4
B
CONFIG. 1
6
9
7
9 9
7
10
9
11
B
CONFIG. 2
6872
Elevator - Torque Tube Assembly - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 405
55-21-12 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 406
55-21-12 Jun 30/21
"9PILATUSEF'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ELEVATOR BALANCE TABS-REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
A. Expendable Parts
401-08 Cotter Pin 55-26-01, Fig 01
A. Remove the nut (5), washers (3) and (4), and bolt (2).
B. Disconnect the control rod (1) from the balance tab (6).
C. Remove the cotter pin (8) from the tab hinge pin. Discard the cotter pin.
D. Remove the tab hinge pin (7) and the tab (6).
A. Apply grease (Material No. P04-002) to the hinge pin (7) and bolt (2).
B. Put the tab (6) in position on the elevator and install the hinge pin (7) with the cotter pin hole at
the outer end.
C. Install a new cotter pin (8) through the hinge and the hinge pin.
D. Put the control rod (1) in position and install the bolt (2), washers (3) and (4), and self locking nut
(5). Make sure that the nut is in safety.
E. Check the rigging of the tab (Ref. 27-32-00, Page Block 501).
4. Close Up
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page 401
55-26-11 Jun 14/92
"ePILATUS!F
PC·6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. WASHER
4. WASHER
7. HINGE PIN
Elevator Balance Tab - Removal /Installation

Figure401
EFFECTIVITY: All
I
Page402
55-26-11 Jun 14 /92
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RUDDER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedures to remove and install the rudder.

- Striking tool, dia. 5 mm (pin Local supply
punch)
(0 to 44.2 lbf in))
to 177 lbf in))
B. Expendable Parts

55-31-01, Fig. 01 Bearing, ball Ref. Fig. 403, Item 2
- Tape Local supply

P04-028 Grease
3. Procedure
A. Job Set Up
(1) On aircraft with electrically operated trim:
(a) Open and install a safety clip to the following circuit breaker:
RUDDER TRIM

Page 401
55-41-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Remove the access panel EL4 and FL2.
(2) On aircraft with mechanically operated trim (Ref. Fig. 402):
(a) Remove the three access covers on the left side of the rudder EL2, EL3 and EL4.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE RUDDER IS CORRECTLY SUPPORTED DURING

RUDDER IS NOT CORRECTLY SUPPORTED.
(a) Disconnect the electrical plug (7) from the trim tab connector at the bottom of the
rudder (1).
(a) Remove the lockwire and loosen the rudder trim cable turnbuckles in the rear
fuselage.
(b) Disconnect the trim cables from the rudder trim actuating lever.
(3) Give support the rudder (1).
(4) Remove the nuts (9), washers (8) and bolts (6) which attach the bottom of the rudder (1) to
the torque tube (10).
(5) Remove the lockwire and remove the bolt (4) and washer (3) which attach the rudder (1) to
the outer integral support (5).
(6) Remove the rudder (1).
(7) Top Hinge Bearing Inspection (Ref. Fig. 403)
(a) Hold the top outer integral support (2) and remove the nuts (5), washers (4) and
screws (3).
(b) Remove the top integral support (2) from the vertical stabilizer.
(c) Examine the bearing (1):
1 Make sure that the bearing (1) is not loose, damaged, corroded, seized or
worn.
2 Remove a damaged, loose or worn bearing (1) and install a new replacement
bearing (1) (Ref. AMM 20-50-01, Page Block 201).
NOTE: The bearing (1) is bonded or swaged into the outer integral support
(2).

Page 402
55-41-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(8) Anchor Nut Check (Ref. Fig. 401 and Fig. 404)
(a) Examine the type of anchor nut (nylon insert or metal stop):
(i) Put the tape onto the 5 mm diameter striking-tool (pin punch) at a distance Y
of 8,000 mm (0.315 in) from the end of the tool (Ref. Fig. 404).
(ii) Put the 5 mm diameter striking-tool (pin punch) through the hinge holes for
the bolt (4) as follows:
• Tilt the tool a small amount as you push it through bore of the second
rib attachment fitting
• Continue to push the tool through the bore gently with its leading edge
in contact with the surface of the bore
• Do this until you feel the tool edge against the first thread of the anchor
nut (2).
3 Measure the distance X:
• Nylon insert type - X is approximately between 2,000 and 3,000 mm

(0.079 and 0.118 in)
• Metal stop type - X is approximately zero.
(b) Make a record of the type of anchor nut (2) (nylon or metal) installed at the top hinge
location.
C. Installation (Ref. Fig. 401 and Fig. 403)
CAUTION: THE TORQUE VALUES GIVEN IN STEP 3.C.(1)(g) DO NOT INCLUDE THE RUN-
FOR THE BOLT (4) TO BE TORQUED CORRECTLY
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE RUDDER TO BE INSTALLED IS BALANCED. THE

RUDDER BALANCE PROCEDURE IS GIVEN IN 27-00-00, PAGE BLOCK 201.
DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT OR EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR IF THE RUDDER IS
NOT CORRECTLY BALANCED.

THE RUDDER IS NOT CORRECTLY SUPPORTED.
(1) Install the Outer Integral Support onto the Rudder (Ref. Fig. 401)

Page 403
55-41-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) If during Step 3.B.(8)(b), the anchor nut (2) is recorded as nylon type:
• Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with white spirit (Material
No. P01-008) and
• Clean the grease or installation paste from the threads of the bolt (4).
(c) Put the top outer integral support (5) into position on the rudder (1).
(d) Put the washer (3) on the bolt (4) and insert the bolt (4) through the hole in the
rudder rib, bearing and into the anchor nut (2).
(e) Do a check that you can turn the bolt (4) in the anchor nut (2) with your fingers:
• When you can turn the bolt (4) in the anchor nut (2) with your fingers, the self-
locking anchor nut (2) is unserviceable
• When the anchor nut (2) is unserviceable, you must do the modification - Part
3 of SB 55-005.
NOTE: The modification in Part 3 of SB 55-005 removes the anchor nut (2) and
replaces the fastener assembly through the outer integral support.
(f) Measure the run-down torque necessary to turn the bolt (4) in the anchor nut (2).

(g) Torque the bolt (4) to 5,1 Nm (45 lbf in) plus the recorded run-down torque (Ref.
Step 3.C.(1)(f)).
(h) Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with white spirit (Material No.
(i) Do a check for gaps between the head of the bolt (4), washer (3) and the rib. No
gaps are allowed.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE THE OLD LOCKWIRE TAB (PRE-SB 55-001) TO

SAFETY THE BOLT (4). THE BOLT (4) IS NOT SAFETIED
CORRECTLY WHEN YOU USE THE OLD LOCKWIRE TAB.
(j) Safety the bolt (4) with lockwire (Material No. P02-007) to the locking screw (11) as
shown (Ref. Fig. 1, View E) (Ref. AMM 20-10-01, Page Block 201).
(k) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to the head of the bolt (4), the
locking screw (11) and the lockwire.
(2) Install the Rudder onto the Vertical Stabilizer (Ref. Fig. 401)
(a) Put the rudder (1) in position with the outer integral support (5) in position on the top
of the vertical stabilizer.
(b) Put the rudder trim cables in position on aircraft with mechanically operated trim
only (Ref. Fig. 402).
(c) At the bottom connection with the rudder shaft (10) (Ref. Fig. 401):

Page 404
55-41-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 Apply a layer of grease (Material No. P04-028) or installation paste (Material

No. P04-029) to the shank and threads of the bolts (6).
2 Install the bolts (6), washers (8) and nuts (9).
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY CORRECTION FACTOR FOR THE GREASE OR

INSTALLATION PASTE TO THE TORQUE VALUE OF THE BOLT (6).
THIS CAN CAUSE THE BOLT (6) TO BE TORQUED INCORRECTLY.
3 Torque the bolts (6) to between 2,5 and 3,0 Nm (22 and 27 lbf in) plus the run-
down torque.
4 Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with white spirit (Material
No. P01-008) and remove the unwanted grease or installation paste.
5 Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to the head of the bolts
(6), nuts (9), and washers (8).
6 Connect the electrical plug (7) to the trim tab connector at the bottom of the
rudder on aircraft with electrical trim only.
(d) At the top hinge position (Ref. Fig. 403):
CAUTION: DO NOT GET GREASE OR INSTALLATION PASTE ON THE

THREADS OF THE SCREWS. THE SCREWS CANNOT BE
INSTALLED CORRECTLY WITH GREASE OR INSTALLATION
PASTE ON THE SCREW THREADS.
1 Apply grease (Material No. P04-028) or installation paste (Material No. P04-
029) to the shank of the screws (3).
2 Put the screws (3) in position and install the washers (4) and nuts (5) with
your fingers:
• When you can turn the screws (3) in the nuts (5) with your fingers, the
self-locking nuts (5) are unserviceable
• When the nuts (5) are unserviceable, you must discard and replace
them.
3 Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with white spirit (Material
No. P01-008) and remove the unwanted grease or installation paste.
4 Tighten the nuts (5) and screws (3).
5 Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to the nuts (5), washers
(4) and heads of the screws (3).
(e) On aircraft with mechanically operated trim (Ref. Fig. 402):
1 Connect the trim tab cables to the trim tab actuating lever. Safety the cable
ends with lockwire (Material No. P02-001) (Ref. AMM 20-10-01, Page Block
201).
2 Adjust the rudder trim tab cables to hand tension. Safety the turnbuckles with
lockwire (Material No. P02-001) (Ref. AMM 20-10-01, Page Block 201).

Page 405
55-41-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Test
(2) On aircraft with electrically operated rudder trim, remove the safety clip and close the
circuit breaker:
RUDDER TRIM
E. Close Up
work area is clean.
(2) Install the access panels EL4 and FL2 on aircraft with electrically operated trim.
(3) Install the three access covers on the left side of the rudder EL2, EL3 and EL4 on aircraft
with mechanically operated trim.

Page 406
55-41-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5 D
B
2
D 3
C
4
E
6
10
7
6319
Rudder - Removal/Installation

Page 407
55-41-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2
STRIKING TOOL IN
CONTACT WITH
START OF THREAD
METAL STOP TYPE:

NO GAP
X
NYLON INERT TYPE:
TAPE GAP
5 mm DIAMETER
STRIKING TOOL
SECTION
D-D
E
CONFIG. 1
11
OLD
LOCKWIRE
TAB
MATERIAL No.
P02-007 6869

Page 408
55-41-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TRIM CABLES
AIRCRAFT WITH MECHANICAL RUDDER TRIM

6320
Rudder - Mechanical Rudder Trim

Figure 402

Page 409
55-41-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5
4
B 2
3
6870
Outer Integral Supports - Removal/Installation

Figure 403

Page 410
55-41-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TAPE
5 mm DIAMETER
STRIKING TOOL
6868
Striking Tool, Diameter 5 mm (Pin Punch) - Tape Application

Figure 404

Page 411
55-41-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

Page 412
55-41-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RUDDER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedures to remove and install the rudder.

(0 to 44.2 lbf in))
to 177 lbf in))
B. Expendable Parts
55-41-01, Fig. 01 Cotter Pin Ref. Fig. 401, Item 5


P02-001 Lockwire
P04-028 Grease
3. Procedure
A. Job Set Up
(a) Open and install a safety clip to the following circuit breaker:
RUDDER TRIM
(b) Remove the access panels EL4, EL5 and FL2 (Ref. 06-40-00, Page Block 1).
(2) Remove the four access covers EL2, EL3, EL4 and EL5 (Ref. 06-40-00, Page Block 1) on
aircraft with mechanically operated trim (Ref. Fig. 402) only.

(Part 3) Page 401
55-41-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CONTROLS’.

RUDDER IS NOT CORRECTLY SUPPORTED.
(1) Disconnect the electrical plug (7) from the trim tab connector at the bottom of the rudder
on aircraft with electrically operated trim only.
(a) Remove the lockwire and loosen the rudder trim cable turnbuckles in the rear
fuselage.
(b) Disconnect the trim cables from the rudder trim actuating lever.
(3) Give support to the rudder.
(4) Remove the nuts (9), washers (8) and bolts (6) which attach the bottom of the rudder to
the torque tube (10).
(6) Remove the nut (4), the washer (3) and the bolt (1) with the washer (2).
(7) Remove the rudder.
(8) Top Hinge Bearing - Inspection and Replacement (Ref. Fig. 403)
(a) Examine the bearing (1) in the top outer integral support (2):
(i) Make sure that the bearing (1) is not loose, damaged, corroded, seized or
worn.
(ii) When the bearing (1) is damaged, loose, seized or worn bearing (1) remove
the top outer integral support (2) and install a new replacement bearing (1).
NOTE: The bearing is bonded or swaged into the outer integral support.
(b) If necessary, remove the top integral support (2) for bearing (1) replacement:
(i) Hold the top outer integral support (2) and remove the nuts (5), washers (4)
and screws (3).
(ii) Remove the top outer integral support (2) from the vertical stabilizer.
(c) Replace the damaged bearing (1) in the top outer integral support (2) (Ref. AMM
20-50-01, Page Block 201).

(Part 3) Page 402
55-41-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Installation
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE RUDDER TO BE INSTALLED IS BALANCED. THE

RUDDER BALANCE PROCEDURE IS GIVEN IN 27-00-00, PAGE BLOCK 201.

(1) Install the Top Outer Integral Support - Part 1 (Ref. Fig. 403)
CAUTION: DO NOT GET GREASE OR INSTALLATION PASTE ON THE THREADS OF

THE SCREWS. THE SCREWS CANNOT BE INSTALLED CORRECTLY
WITH GREASE OR INSTALLATION PASTE ON THE SCREW THREADS.
(b) Apply grease (Material No. P04-028) or installation paste (Material No. P04-029) to
(c) Put the top outer integral support (2) in position on the vertical stabilizer.
(d) Put the screws (3) in position and install the washers (4) and nuts (5) with your
fingers:
• When the nuts (5) are unserviceable, you must discard and replace them
• Do not fully tighten the screws (3) in the nuts (5).
NOTE: The screws (3) and nuts (5) are installed loose during this Step to let the
outer integral support (2) be adjusted to align with the elevator attachment
brackets.
(2) Install the Rudder (Ref. Fig. 401)
(a) Put the rudder in the installed position.
(b) Put the rudder trim cables in position on aircraft with mechanically operated trim
(Ref. Fig 402) only.
(c) Apply a layer of grease (Material No. P04-028) or installation paste (Material No.
P04-029) to the shank and threads of the bolt (1).

(Part 3) Page 403
55-41-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Install the bolt (1) the washers (2) and (3) and the nut (4).

INSTALLATION PASTE TO THE TORQUE VALUE OF THE NUT (4). THIS
CAN CAUSE THE NUT (4) TO BE TORQUED INCORRECTLY.
(e) Torque the nut (4) to between 3,2 and 6,2 Nm (32 and 55 lbf in) plus the run-down
torque.
(g) Safety the nut (4) with the new cotter pin (5) (Ref. AMM 20-10-01, Page Block 201).
CAUTION: DO NOT GET CORROSION PREVENTATIVE ON THE BEARINGS.

CORROSION PREVENTATIVE CAN CONTAMINATE AND DAMAGE THE
BEARINGS.
(h) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to the head of the bolts (1), nut
(4), washers (2) and (4) and the cotter pin (5).
(i) Apply a layer of grease (Material No. P04-028) or installation paste (Material No.
P04-029) to the shank and threads of the new bolts (6).
(j) Install the bolts (6), washers (8) and nuts (9).

(k) Torque the bolts (6) to between 2,5 and 3,0 Nm (22 and 27 lbf in) plus the run-down
torque.
(l) Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with white spirit (Material No.
(m) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to the head of the bolts (6),
nuts (9), and washers (8).
(3) Install the Top Outer Integral Support - Part 2 (Ref. Fig. 403)
(b) Fully tighten the nuts (5) and screws (3).
(c) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to the nuts (5), washers (4) and
(4) Connect the Electrical Plug or Trim Tab Cables (Ref. Fig. 401 or Fig. 402)
(a) Connect the electrical plug (7) to the trim tab connector at the bottom of the rudder
on aircraft with electrical trim only.
(b) On aircraft with mechanically operated trim (Ref. Fig. 402):

(Part 3) Page 404
55-41-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Connect the trim tab cables to the trim tab actuating lever. Safety the cable ends
with lockwire (Material No. P02-001) (Ref. AMM 20-10-01, Page Block 201).
(d) Adjust the rudder trim tab cables to hand tension. Safety the turnbuckles with
lockwire (Material No. P02-001) (Ref. AMM 20-10-01, Page Block 201).
D. Test
circuit breaker:
STAB TRIM
E. Close Up
work area is clean.
(2) Install the access panels EL4, EL5 and FL2 (Ref. 06-40-00, Page Block 1) on aircraft with
electrically operated trim only.
(3) install the four access covers EL2, EL3, EL4 and EL5 (Ref. 06-40-00, Page Block 1) on
aircraft with mechanically operated trim (Ref. Fig. 402).

(Part 3) Page 405
55-41-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
1
B 2
5
3
10
7
6758
Figure 401

(Part 3) Page 406
55-41-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TRIM CABLES
AIRCRAFT WITH MECHANICAL RUDDER TRIM

6320
Rudder - Mechanical Rudder Trim

Figure 402

(Part 3) Page 407
55-41-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5
4
B 2
3
6870
Vertical Stabilizer - Hinge Bearing Inspection / Replacement

Figure 403

(Part 3) Page 408
55-41-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 56 - WINDOWS
Chapter
Section
Subject Pages Date
List of Effective 1 Nov 30/03
Pages
56-10-00 601 Nov 30/03
56-10-01 401 Nov 30/03

402 Nov 30/03
403 Nov 30/03
404 Nov 30/03
405 Nov 30/03
406 Nov 30/03
Page 1
56-LEP Nov 30/03
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 56 - WINDOWS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
WINDOWS 56-10-00
WINDSHIELD 56-10-01
Page 1
56-TOC Nov 30/03
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WINDOWS - INSPECTION / CHECK
1. General
The following procedure gives the damage limits for the windshield.
2. Procedure
Examine the windshield for crazing, bubbles and blisters, indentations and pits, and scratches.
A. Crazing
(1) Crazing is acceptable in an area up to 51 mm (2 in.) from the edge of the windshield.
B. Bubbles and Blisters
(1) If there are bubbles and blisters more than 51 mm (2 in.) from the edge of the windshield
- Reject the windshield.
(2) If there are bubbles or blisters more than 1,6 mm (0.06 in.) in diameter on the windshield
C. Indentations and Pits
(1) If there are indentations and pits more than 51 mm (2 in.) from the edge of the windshield
D. Scratches
(1) Minor Scratches
(a) If there are minor scratches which are visible but cannot be felt, with a total length of
scratches in one panel of more than 203 mm (8 in.) - Reject the windshield.
(2) Medium Scratches
(a) If there are medium scratches which can easily be felt with the finger tips, with one
scratch more than 51 mm (2 in.) in length - Reject the windshield.
(b) If the total length of scratches in one panel is more than 203 mm (8 in.) - Reject the
windshield.
(3) Major Scratches
(a) If there are major scratches with a depth of more than 0,4 mm (0.015 in.), or a
length of more than and 51 mm (2 in.) - Reject the windshield.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 601
56-10-00 Nov 30/03
"i!EPILATUS!!!!!!?'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WINDSHIELD- REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION
1. General
On the windshield installed on early aircraft there is a direct vision window at the bottom LH side of the
windshield. On the windshield installed on later aircraft this has been deleted. Figures 401 and 402
show the windshield installed on later aircraft.
Brushes
Scrapers and spatulas Non metallic
B. Consumable Material (Ref. 20-31-00)
P01-018 Stabilant 22A Contact enhancer 15 ML

P02-003 Cloths, cleaning
P08-008 Balco-ME Brush applied
P08-040 Alcon sealant
C. Expendable Parts
401-01,06, 19,23,26 Rubber seal 56-11-01, Fig 01

401-09,18, 20 Rubber seal 56-11-01, Fig 01
401-05 Rubber strip 56-11-01, Fig 01
401-08 Rubber strip 56-11-01, Fig 01
401-10 Rubber strip 56-11-01, Fig 01
401-27 Rubber strip 56-11-01, Fig 01
402-01 ' 10, 26 Rubber seal 56-11-01, Fig 01
402-06,11,27 Rubber seal 56-11-01,Fig 01
402-2 3 Rubber seal 56-11-01, Fig 01
402-05 Rubber strip 56-11-01, Fig 01
402-28 Rubber strip 56-11-01, Fig 01
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) Remove the interior trim from around the windscreen.
(2) Remove the screws, washers and nuts that attach the defroster tube.
(3) Remove the defroster tube.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
56-10-01 Nov 30/03
'S PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WARNING: DO NOT GET ADHESIVES OR CLEANING FLUIDS ON YOUR SKIN OR IN YOUR EYES. PUT
ON PROTECTIVE CLOTHING, GOGGLES AND A FACE MASK. USE CLEANING FLUIDS IN A
WELL VENTILATED AREA.
WARNING: IF YOU GET THE CLEANING FLUIDS ON YOUR SKIN OR IN YOUR EYES, FLUSH WITH
WATER. GET MEDICAL HELP IF YOUR SKIN OR EYES BECOME IRRITATED.
B. Removal
(1) Aircraft with pilot and co-pilot doors (Ref. Fig. 401)
(a) Remove the bolts (16) and the LH and RH bottom fairing strips (17).
(b) Remove the screws (14) and washers (13) and then remove the LH and RH top
fairing strips (12) and frame sections (15).
(c) Remove the nuts (4), washers (3), screws (2) and retaining strip (7) from the
windshield (30).
(d) Remove the nuts (21), washers (22), screws (25), shim (24), the strip (28) and
retaining strip (29) from the windshield.
(2) Aircraft without pilot and co-pilot doors (Ref. Fig. 40 2)
(a) Remove the bolts (13) , washers (14) and the LH and RH top fairings (15).
(b) Remove the nuts (19), washers (20) , bushes (18) and screws (17).
(c) Remove the nuts (8) , washers (9), screws (12) and the LH and RH outboard fairings
(16).
(d) Remove the nuts (4), washers (3), screws (2) retaining strip (7) from the windshield
(31).
(e) Remove the nuts (21 ), washers (22), the shim (24) , screws (25), the strip (29) and
retaining strip (30) from the windshield.
(3) Loosen and remove the windshield.
(4) Remove and discard all the seals.
(5) Remove all remaining adhesive from the metal retaining strips, center strip and from the
fusela ge.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
56-10-01 Nov 30/03
'ePILATUS 5F'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Installation
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE

(1) Clean all metal components with a clean cloth (Material No. P02-003) made moist with
Stabilant 22A (Material No. P01-018).
(2) With a brush, apply a coat of Balco-ME adhesive (Material No.P08-008) to the rubber
strips and rubber extrusions.
(3) Aircraft with pilot and co-pilot doors (Ref. Fig. 401) :
(a) Attach the rubber strips (10) to the fuselage.
(b) Attach the rubber strip (5) and the rubber seals (6) and (26) to the fuselage.
(c) Put the windshield (30) in position.
(d) Install the rubber seals (9), (18) and (20) around the windshield.
(e) Attach the rubber seal (1) to the retaining strip (7).
(f) Attach the rubber seal (23) to the retaining strip (29).
(g) Attach the rubber strip (8) to the LH and RH frame sections (15).
(h) Attach the rubber strip (27) to the strip (28).
(i) Attach the rubber seal (19) to the LH and RH bottom fairings (17).
0) Put the retaining strips (7), (29) and (28) in position.
(k) Install the screws (2), washers (3) and nuts (4).
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE SHIM IS CORRECTLY INSTALLED ON THE CENTER

STRIP.
(1) Install the bolts (25), the shim (24), washers (22) and nuts (21).
CAUTION: IF A NEW WINDSHIELD IS BEING INSTALLED, WHEN YOU INSTALL THE

FRAME SECTIONS (15) MAKE SURE THE FIT IS NOT TOO TIGHT.
(m) Put the LH and RH frame sections (15), retaining strips (11) and top fairings (12) in
position.
(n) Install the screws (14) and washers (13).
(o) Put the LH and RH bottom fairings (17) in position and install the screws (16).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
56-10-01 Nov 30/03
'e PILATUSE!!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Aircraft without pilot and co-pilot doors (Ref. Fig. 402):
(a) Attach the rubber strip (5) and the rubber seals (6) and (27) to the fuselage.
(b) Put the windshield (31) in position.
(c) Install the rubber seals (11) and (23) around the windshield.
(d) Attach the rubber seal (1) to the retaining strip (7).
(e) Attach the rubber seal (26) to the retaining strip (30).
(f) Attach the rubber seal (10) to the LH and RH outboard fairings (16).
(g) Attach the rubber strip (28) to strip (29).
(h) Put the retaining strips (7), (30) and (29) in position.
(i) Install the bolts (2), washers (3) and nuts (4).
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT SHIM IS CORRECTLY INSTALLED ON THE CENTER

STRIP.
(j) Install the screws (25), the shim (24), washers (22) and nuts (21).
(k) Put the LH and RH outboard fairings (16) and top fairings (15) in position.
(I) Install the bolts (13) and washers (14).
(m) Install the screws (17), bushes (18), washers (20), nuts (19), screws (12), washers
(9) and nuts (8).
D. Close Up
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE

(1) Apply sealant (Material No. POB-040) around the external edges of the metal retaining
strips and fairing strips.
(2) Chamfer the edge of the sealant with a spatula and remove unwanted sealant.
(3) Allow the sealant to cure for 24 hours.
NOTE: The curing time for the adhesive and sealant used, changes with temperature
and humidity. It may be necessary to increase the external air temperature to
decrease the curing time of the sealant.
(4) Put the defroster tube in position.
(5) Install the screws, washers and nuts that attach the defroster tube.
(7) Install the trim panels.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
56-10-01 Nov 30/03
�PILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. RUBBER STRIP
10. RUBBERSTRIP
9. RUBBERSEAL
28. STRIP
25.SCREW
18. RUBBER SEAL
Windshield - Aircraft with Pilot and Co-pilot Doors - Removal I Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 405
56-10-01 Nov 30/03
�PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ifrfl I
111/
�[ID 10. RUBBER SEAL
31. WINDSHIELD
27. RUBBER SEAL
C 16. OUTBOARD FAIRING
21. NUT
Windshield - Aircraft without Pilot and Co-pilot Doors - Removal / Installation

Figure 402
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 406
56-10-01 Nov 30/03
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 57 - WINGS
Chapter Chapter
Section Section
List of Effective 1 Jun 30/21 57-00-02 (Cont’d) 603 Jan 30/18
Pages 2 Jun 30/21 604 Jan 30/18
605 Jan 30/18
Table of Contents 1 Feb 28/20 606 Jan 30/18
2 Feb 28/20 607 Jan 30/18
608 Jan 30/18
57-00-00 1 Nov 30/03 609 Jan 30/18
610 Jan 30/18
401 Oct 30/20 611 Jan 30/18
402 Oct 30/20 612 Jan 30/18
403 Oct 30/20 613 Jan 30/18
404 Oct 30/20 614 Jan 30/18
405 Oct 30/20 615 Jan 30/18
406 Oct 30/20 616 Jan 30/18
407 Oct 30/20
408 Oct 30/20 801 Nov 30/08
802 Nov 30/08
57-00-01 401 Oct 30/20 803 Nov 30/08
402 Oct 30/20 804 Nov 30/08
403 Oct 30/20 805 Nov 30/08
404 Oct 30/20 806 Nov 30/08
601 Feb 28/20 57-00-03 601 Feb 28/20

602 Feb 28/20 602 Feb 28/20
603 Feb 28/20 603 Feb 28/20
604 Feb 28/20 604 Feb 28/20
605 Feb 28/20 605 Feb 28/20
606 Feb 28/20 606 Feb 28/20
607 Feb 28/20
608 Feb 28/20 57-26-01 401 Jul 31/11
609 Feb 28/20 402 Jul 31/11
610 Feb 28/20 403 Jul 31/11
611 Feb 28/20 404 Jul 31/11
612 Feb 28/20
601 Jan 30/15
57-00-02 401 Jan 30/18 602 Jan 30/15
402 Jan 30/18 603 Jan 30/15
403 Jan 30/18 604 Jan 30/15
404 Jan 30/18
405 Jan 30/18 57-51-11 401 May 31/14
406 Jan 30/18 402 May 31/14
403 May 31/14
601 Jan 30/18 404 May 31/14
602 Jan 30/18
57-LEP
Page 1
Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter
Section
Subject Pages Date
57-61-11 401 Jun 30/21
402 Jun 30/21
403 Jun 30/21
404 Jun 30/21
405 Jun 30/21
406 Jun 30/21
407 Jun 30/21
408 Jun 30/21
57-62-11 401 Jul 30/15

402 Jul 30/15
57-63-11 601 Jul 30/16

602 Jul 30/16
603 Jul 30/16
604 Jul 30/16
57-LEP
Page 2
Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 57 - WINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
WINGS 57-00-00
WING STRUT 57-00-01

WING STRUT FITTING 57-00-02

Minor Repair - New Access Panels 801 All
WING TO FUSELAGE FITTINGS 57-00-03

WING FITTINGS 57-26-00

AILERON/FLAP SUPPORT-BRACKET 57-26-01
FLAPS 57-51-11
AILERONS 57-61-11
AILERON BALANCE TAB 57-62-11
AILERON COUNTERWEIGHT 57-63-11
Page 1
57-TOC Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
57-TOC Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WINGS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The wings are of conventional metal construction with integral fuel tanks. The wings are attached to the
fuselage with bolts and are braced with wing struts.
A. Wing Construction
The wings are of metal construction with a constant chord throughout the span. The wing rear
spar extends to the outboard end of the integral fuel tank to form the rear side the fuel tank.
Lightweight stringers stiffen the skin panels.
Wing torsion loads are carried by two parallel cells formed by the wing nose section and the box
section located rear of the main spar. Formed sheet metal ribs maintain the wing section shape
and let the wing box absorb hinge loads from the flaps and ailerons. The wings are covered with
a skin of sheet aluminium alloy.
A fixed spoiler of right angle shape, is permanently attached to the top of each wing trailing edge
forward of the flaps.
B. Wing Attachment
The wings are attached to the fuselage at their inboard end by a single bolt through each front
and rear spar. A strut extends from a fitting that projects from the lower surface of each wing to
the lower fuselage attachment fitting. These two struts let the fuselage structure absorb the
ground and flight loads.
C. Wing Flaps
Each wing has a slotted flap assembly installed inboard of the ailerons. Each flap assembly has
two sections which are joined together at the center. The flaps are made of aluminium ribs and
skin and have brackets installed at each end for the pivot bolts. All flap sections are
interchangeable except for some earlier aircraft where the inboard flaps are cut away along the
inner edge.
D. Ailerons
Each wing has an aileron assembly installed outboard of the flaps. Each aileron assembly has
two sections which are joined together at the center. The ailerons are made of aluminium ribs
and skin and have brackets installed at each end for the pivot bolts.
E. Wing Tip Fairings
H4 aircraft have wing tip extensions made from fibreglass. These fairings must not have paint
applied that as an absorbtion factor of more than 0.6, as exposure to sunlight will cause the
fairing to get hot and weaken the fibreglass.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
57-00-00 Nov 30/03
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WINGS - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This task gives the procedure for the removal and installation of the wing assemblies. The procedure is
applicable for the left and right wing.
This procedure does not include special lifting equipment to remove and install the wing.
6690.0030.01 Wing bolt centering pin

6690.0031.01 Wing bolt centering pin
B. Expendable Parts

57-21-01, Fig. 01 Bolt Ref. Fig. 401, Item 3
57-21-01, Fig. 01 Washer Ref. Fig. 401, Item 4
57-21-01, Fig. 01 Cotter pin Ref. Fig. 401, Item 5 and 10
57-21-01, Fig. 01 Bolt Ref. Fig. 401, Item 7
57-21-01, Fig. 01 Washer Ref. Fig. 401, Item 8

P04-028 Grease
P08-009 or P08-011 Adhesive
P08-010 or P08-012 Thinners
P09-003 Fabric Strip
P10-013 CPC
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
57-00-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(3) Disconnect the aircraft battery.
(4) Drain the fuel system (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301).
(6) Install the aileron and flap locks.
(7) Shore the wings with the applicable supports and trestles.
(8) Remove the cabin lining from above the cabin doors.
(9) Remove the access panel LB2 or RB2 from the bottom of the wing.
(10) Remove the screws (1) and the fairing (2).
B. Removal (Ref. Fig. 401, Sheet 1 and 2)
(1) Remove the fabric strip from the gap between the wing and fuselage.
(2) Remove the clamps and then disconnect the fuel lines to the tank fittings.
(3) Loosen the clamp (24) and disconnect the fuel vent pipe (25).
(4) Disconnect the electrical cable (21) from the fuel contents sensor (22):
(a) Remove the nut (20) and washer (19).
(5) On the left wing only:
(a) Disconnect the pitot line.
(6) If installed, disconnect the electrical connector (11).
(7) If a terminal block is installed:
(a) Identify the cables with labels.
(b) Disconnect the cables from the terminal block (11).
(8) Disconnect the aileron control pushrod from the bellcrank:
(a) Remove the cotter pin (26), nut (27), washer (28) and bolt (29).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
57-00-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Discard the cotter pin.
(9) On aircraft with manually operated aileron trim (right wing only):
(a) Remove the aileron trim indicator cover and indicator dial.
(b) Mark the position of the chain on the indicator sprocket.
(c) Disconnect the chain from each end of the trim control cables.
(10) On aircraft with mechanically operated flaps:
(a) Remove the two inboard access panels LB4 and LB6 or RB4 and RB6 from the
bottom of the wing, forward of the main spar.
(b) Disconnect the turnbuckle.
(c) Disconnect the connecting cable.
(11) On aircraft with electrically operated flaps, disconnect the control rod (16):
(a) Remove the nut (18), washers (17) and (15) and bolt (14).
(b) Move the rod (16) clear of the lever (13).
(12) Remove the wing strut (Ref. 57-00-01, Page Block 401).
(13) Remove the cotter pin (10), nut (9) and washer (8) from the wing bolt (7). Discard the
cotter pin.
(14) Remove the cotter pin (5), nut (6) and washer (4) from the wing bolt (3). Discard the cotter
pin.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT YOU HAVE A SUFFICIENT NUMBER OF PERSONS TO LIFT
THE WING. THE WING IS HEAVY. INJURY TO PERSONNEL OR DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR IF THE WING FALLS.
(15) Get a sufficient number of persons to take the weight of the wing.
(16) Remove the two bolts (3) and (7) at the same time.
(17) Remove the wing from the fuselage.
(18) Remove the bush (30).
P01-008) and fully clean the bush (30).
(20) Examine the bush (30). Discard and replace if it is unserviceable. A bush (30) with an
outer diameter of less than 29,949 mm (1.1791 in) and/or inner bush diameter of more
than 25,031 mm (0.985 in) is unserviceable.
(21) Put the wing on applicable trestles.
(22) Install blanks or covers to all openings.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
57-00-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Installation (Ref. Fig. 401, Sheet 1 and 2)
(1) Remove blanks or covers.
(2) Apply grease (Material No. P04-028) to the shank and underneath the shoulder of the
bush (30).
(3) Install the bush (30).
CAUTION: THE WING INSTALLATION BOLTS ARE LIFE LIMITED ITEMS (REF. 04-00-00
PAGE BLOCK 1). ONLY INSTALL FASTENERS WITH SUFFICIENT LIFE
REMAINING. DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT AND/OR EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR
IF YOU INSTALL FASTENERS WITH INSUFFICIENT LIFE.
(4) Do a check of the maintenance records. When there is no sufficient remaining life you
must replace the bolts (3) and (7), washers (4) and (8) and nuts (6) and (9).
P01-008) and fully clean the bolts (3) and (7), washers (4) and (8) and nuts (6) and (9).
(6) Apply grease (Material No. P04-028) to the shank of the bolts (3) and (7) and the threads
of the bolts (3) and (7) and nuts (6) and (9).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT YOU HAVE A SUFFICIENT NUMBER OF PERSONS TO LIFT
THE WING. THE WING IS HEAVY. INJURY TO PERSONNEL OR DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR IF THE WING FALLS.
(7) Get a sufficient number of persons to take the weight of the wing.
(8) Lift the wing in position.
(9) Install the centering pins to the wing attachment bolts and install the bolts (3) and (7) at the
same time.
(10) Remove the centering pins.
(11) Install the washer (8) and nut (9). Do not tighten nut.
(12) Install the washer (4) and nut (6). Do not tighten nut.
(13) Install the wing struts (Ref. 57-00-01, Page Block 401).
(14) Torque the front wing nut (6) to between 16 and 19 Nm (144 and 171 lbf in.) plus the run
down torque.
(15) Torque the aft wing nut (9) to 1 Nm (9 lbf in.) plus the run down torque.
(17) Safety the nuts (9) and (6) with new cotter pins (10) and (5).
(18) Apply CPC (Material No. P10-013) to the heads of the bolts (3) and (7), washers (4) and
(8) and nuts (6) and (9).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
57-00-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(19) Put the aileron control pushrod in position and install the bolt (29), washer (28) and nut
(27).
(21) If installed, connect the electrical connector (11).
(22) If a terminal block is installed:
(a) Connect the cables to the terminal block (11) in the positions identified during Step
3.B.(7)(a).
(b) Remove the labels from the cables.
(23) Put the electrical cable (21) in position on the fuel contents sensor (22).
(25) On aircraft with manually operated aileron trim (right wing only):
(a) Align the mark on the chain to the mark on the indicator sprocket.
(b) Connect the aileron trim chains and cables.
(c) Install the aileron trim indicator cover and indicator dial.
(26) On aircraft with mechanically operated flaps:
(a) Connect the cable.
(b) Connect the turnbuckle.
(27) On aircraft with electrically operated flaps:
(a) Put the control rod (16) in position at the lever (13).
(b) Install the bolt (14), washers (15) and (17) and nut (18).
(28) Connect the vent pipe (25) and tighten the clamp (24).
(29) Connect the fuel lines to tank fittings and then install the clamps.
(30) On the left wing only:
(a) Connect the pitot line.
(31) Install the fabric strips to the gap between the wing and the fuselage:
(a) Cut the fabric strips (Material No. P09-003) to the correct length.
(b) Soak the fabric strips with adhesive (Material No. P08-009 or P08-011) mixed with
thinners (Material No. P08-010 or P08-012). Let the fabric strips dry.
(c) Clean the wing and fuselage area with a cloth made moist with solvent (Material No.
P01-008).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 405
57-00-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Apply adhesive (Material No. P08-009 or P08-011) to the fabric strips (Material No.
P09-003) and to the wing and fuselage joint area.
(e) Install the fabric strips. Make sure that the strips are not tight.
NOTE: The fabric strips must not be tight or movement of the wing during flight
will tear or loosen the strips.
(f) Let the adhesive dry for 24 hours.
(g) Apply primer and paint to repair the surface finish.
D. Job Close Up
(1) Do the rigging procedure for the aileron control system (Ref. 27-10-00, Page Block 501).
(2) Do the rigging procedure for the aileron trim system (Ref. 27-15-00, Page Block 501).
(3) Do the rigging procedure for the flap control system (Ref. 27-50-00, Page Block 501).
work area is clean.
(5) Install the fairing (2) above the cabin doors and secure with the screws (1).
(6) Install the access panels LB2 or RB2, and LB4 and LB6 or RB4 and RB6 (as applicable).
(7) Install the cabin lining from above the cabin doors.
(8) Remove all supports and tresles.
(9) Fill the fuel system (Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301).
(10) Do a leak check of the fuel connections.
(11) Do a leak check of the pitot system (left wing only) (Ref. 34-11-00, Page Block 501).
(12) Connect the aircraft battery.
(13) Do a check of the wing electrical systems.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 406
57-00-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D F
E
A B C
A
LEFT WING SHOWN
RIGHT WING SIMILAR
14
11
15
13
16
12
17
F 18
24
D
29 19
25 20
28
27
22
26 C
E 21
6316
Wings - Removal / Installation

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 407
57-00-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B
C A
A
10 7
9
6
30 3
6309
Wings - Removal / Installation

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 408
57-00-00 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WING STRUTS - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This Page Block gives the procedures to remove and install the left and right wing struts.
- Wing support Local manufacture

- Torque wrench 0 to 85 Nm (0 to 750 lb in)
B. Expendable Parts

57-21-01, Fig. 01 Cotter pins Qty. 2

P04-028 Grease
P10-013 CPC
3. Procedure
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THE WING IS SUPPORTED DURING REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF
THE WING STRUT. THE WING IS HEAVY. INJURY TO PERSONNEL OR DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR IF THE WING IS NOT SUPPORTED DURING WING STRUT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION.
NOTE: The procedure for the left wing strut is the same as the right wing strut.
A. Job Set Up
(2) Support the wing.
(2) Support the wing strut (6) and remove the nut (10), washer (9) and bolt (8) to disengage
the wing strut (6) from the fuselage.
(3) Remove nuts (14), washers (13), screws (12) and safety plate (5).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
57-00-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Support the wing strut (6) and remove the nut (1), washer (15) and bolt (4) to disengage
the wing strut (6) from the wing.
(6) Remove the strut (6) from the wing.
P01-008) and fully clean the bolt (4), washer (15) and nut (1) and the bolt holes in the end
fitting (3).
(2) Apply grease (Material No. P04-028) to the shank, threads and underneath the head of the
bolt (4) and to the threads of the nut (1).
(3) Put the wing strut (6) into position.
(4) Put the end fitting (3) into position on the wing and hold the wing strut (6) in position.
(5) Continue to hold the wing strut (6) and install the bolt (4), washer (15) and nut (1) to
engage the wing strut (6) on the wing.
(7) Torque nut (1) to between 49 and 70 Nm (430 and 620 lbf in) plus the run down torque.
(9) Apply CPC (Material No. P10-013) to the heads of the bolt (4), washer (15), nut (1) and
cotter pin (2).
(10) Put the safety plate (5) into position.
(11) Install the two screws (12), two washers (13) and two nuts (14).
P01-008) and fully clean the bolt (8), washer (9) and nut (10).
(13) Apply grease (Material No. P04-028) to the shank, threads and underneath the head of the
bolt (8) and to the threads of the nut (10) and the bolt holes in the end fitting (7).
(14) Put the end fitting (7) into position on the fuselage and hold the wing strut (6) in position.
(15) Install the bolt (8), washer (9) and nut (10) to engage the wing strut (6) on the fuselage.
(17) Torque the nut (10) to between 49 and 70 Nm (430 and 620 lb in) plus the run down
torque.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
57-00-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(19) Apply CPC (Material No. P10-013) to the heads of the bolt (8), washer (9), nut (10) and
cotter pin (11).
D. Job Close Up
work area is clean.
(2) Remove the wing support.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
57-00-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. COTTER PIN
1. NUT
A
15. WASHER
14. NUT
13. WASHER
8. BOLT
3. END FITTING
6. STRUT
4. BOLT
7. END FITTING
B
12. SCREW
9. WASHER
5. SAFETY PLATE 10. NUT
11. COTTER PIN

6278
Wings Strut - Removal / Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
57-00-01 Oct 30/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WING STRUT - INSPECTION/CHECK
This page block gives the instructions to examine the wing strut and wing strut end-fittings during
inspection and overhaul tasks for damage. The typical damage is surface or exfoliation corrosion.
There are three installation configurations of wing strut end-fittings:
• CONFIG 1 with screws (2) and (3), washers (5) and (7), nuts (6) and no spacers
• CONFIG 2 with spacers (11) and (12), bolts (9), washers (13) and nuts (14)
• CONFIG 3 with bolts (15), washers (16) and (18) and nuts (19) and the spacers machined as
integral parts of the wing strut end-fittings (17) and (20).
Different configurations of wing strut end-fitting (CONFIG 2 or 3) can be installed at each end of the
wing strut (wing or fuselage).
CONFIG 2 wing strut end-fittings (10) are interchangeable with CONFIG 3 wing strut end-fittings (17) or
(20).
CONFIG 2 wing strut end-fittings (10) and CONFIG 3 wing strut end-fittings (17) or (20) are not
interchangeable with CONFIG 1. When no serviceable spares are available for CONFIG 1, you must
replace the wing strut assy (Ref. 57-00-01, Page Block 401).
2. Job Set Up Information (Ref. Fig. 601)
- Inspection equipment
- Scraper, non-metallic
- Brush, stiff bristle
B. Replacement Parts
End-fitting (Plate, Connecting If necessary (Ref. Fig. 601,

57-21-12, Fig. 01
Top) Item 17) P/N 111.50.06.023
End-fitting (Plate, Connecting If necessary (Ref. Fig. 601,
57-21-12, Fig. 01
Bottom) Item 20) P/N 111.50.06.024
57-21-12, Fig. 01 Wing Strut If necessary
If necessary, P/N
57-21-12, Fig. 01 Wing Strut Assy
111.50.06.035
NOTE: Only the parts of the CONFIG 3 wing strut assy are procurable. CONFIG 1 and 2 parts
of the wing strut assy remain airworthy if they are in a serviceable condition.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 601
57-00-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

P07-007 Primer
P08-073 Sealant
3. Job Set Up
A. Remove the wing strut assy (Ref. 57-00-01, Page Block 401).
B. Put the wing strut assy onto a suitably protected work bench.
C. Mark the position of the wing strut end-fittings before removal.
D. Remove the wing strut end-fittings from each end of the wing strut as follows:
CONFIG 1
(1) Remove the nuts (6), washers (5) and (7) and screws (2) and (3).
(2) Remove the wing strut end-fittings (4) from the wing strut (1).
CONFIG 2
(4) Remove the wing strut end-fittings (10) and the spacers (11) and (12) from the wing strut
(1).
CONFIG 3
(5) Remove the nuts (19), washers (16) and (18) and the bolts (15).
(6) Remove the wing strut end-fittings (17) and (20) from the wing strut (1).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 602
57-00-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Procedure (Ref. Fig. 601 and 602)
WARNING: YOU MUST WEAR THE CORRECT PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (GLOVES, FILTER MASKS
AND FACE-SHIELDS/SAFETY-GLASSES/GOGGLES). ABRASIVE DUST CAN GET IN YOUR
LUNGS OR ON YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE INJURY OR SKIN IRRITATION. DO NOT INHALE
DUST. WHEN AUTHORIZED, MAKE THE AREA MOIST BEFORE YOU MANUALLY ABRADE
TO PREVENT AIRBORNE DUST PARTICLES. MAKE SURE THAT THE WORK AREA IS
FULLY VENTILATED. OBEY YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS WHEN YOU DRILL OR ABRADE
PAINTS, FILLERS, OR ANY OTHER MATERIALS. OBEY YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS
WHEN YOU COLLECT AND DISCARD THE DUST AND OTHER UNWANTED MATERIALS.
WARNING: DO THIS PROCEDURE IN A ROOM WITH GOOD LIGHT AND GOOD VENTILATION WITH A
DUST FILTER IN ACCORDANCE WITH YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.
A. Clean the inside and outside surfaces of the wing strut (1) with absorbent paper (Material No.
P02-031) made moist with white spirit (Material No. P01-008). If necessary, use a stiff bristled
brush.
B. Examine the inside and outside surfaces of the wing strut (1) for corrosion:
(1) If you find corrosion more than 300 mm (11.811 in) from each end of the wing strut (1) on
the inside surfaces - you must replace the wing strut (1).
(2) If you find corrosion more than 0,2 mm (0.008 in) deep - you must replace the wing strut
(1).
(3) If you find any other type of damage - replace the wing strut (1) or contact Pilatus Aircraft
Ltd for repair instructions.
C. Wing Strut Corrosion Removal and Blend Out
(1) Corrosion less than 0,2 mm (0.008 in) deep can be blended out from the wing strut (1). Do
the procedure for the relevant surface - inside or outside.
(2) Outside Surface of the Wing Strut
(a) Use a non-metallic scraper to remove any lose flakes of paint and clean the
damaged area with absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with white
spirit (Material No. P01-008).
(b) Use abrasive pads (Material No. P02-016) to remove the damage and give the
blend area a smooth surface finish.
(c) Clean the blend area with absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with
white spirit (Material No. P01-008). Clean the area until clean absorbent paper
made moist with white spirit stays clean when applied to the surface.
(d) Make sure that the blend area is within the limits as follows:
• Minimum length (l) to depth (d) ratio of 20:1

• Minimum width (w) to depth (d) ratio of 10:1
• Maximum blend depth (d) is 0,2 mm (0.008 in).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 603
57-00-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) For overlapping blend areas on the inside and outside surfaces of the wing strut (1):
• Make sure that there is a minimum material thickness (t) of 2,5 mm (0.098 in).
(3) Inside Surface of the Wing Strut
(a) Clean the damaged area with absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist
with white spirit (Material No. P01-008).

(e) For overlapping blend areas on the inside and outside surfaces of the wing strut (1):
• Make sure that there is a minimum material thickness (t) of 2,5 mm (0.098 in).
CAUTION: ONLY PERSONNEL THAT ARE QUALIFIED AND CERTIFIED TO PT LEVEL II

(OR HIGHER) NATIONAL AEROSPACE STANDARD (NAS) 410 OR EUROPEAN
STANDARD EN 4179 OR MIL-STD-410E OR EQUIVALENT AEROSPACE
STANDARD ARE PERMITTED TO DO THE PENETRANT INSPECTION. THE
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR FLUORESCENT PENETRANT INSPECTIONS
ARE DETAILED IN THE ASTM-E-1417 STANDARD PENETRANT INSPECTION
METHODS, EQUIPMENT AND QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS.
(4) Do the dye penetrant inspection to make sure that all the corrosion is removed from the
blend out areas (Ref. SRM 51-00-09, Page Block 1). If remaining corrosion is found, do
Step 4.C.(2) and 4.C.(3) again until it is removed.
(5) Apply CCC solution (Material No.P07-001) on bare aluminum surfaces (Ref. 20-40-10,
Page Block 201).
(6) Apply primer (Material No. P07-007) on top of the CCC solution.
(7) Let the primer dry in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(8) Apply topcoat to repair the surface finish of the outside surface of the wing strut (1) as
necessary.
(9) Apply preservative compound (Material No. P10-005) inside each wing strut (1), Ref.
20-40-00 Page Block 201.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 604
57-00-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Examine the wing strut end-fittings:
CONFIGS 1, 2 AND 3
(1) Examine the wing strut end-fittings (4), (10) or (17) and (20) for corrosion. If corrosion is
found and is more than 0,2 mm (0.008 in) deep - you must replace them (Ref. Step 4.E.).
CONFIG 2
(2) If there is any corrosion in the area where the spacers (11) and (12) touch the wing strut
end-fittings (10) - you must replace the spacers (11) and (12) and wing strut end-fittings
(10) (Ref. Step 4.E.).
CONFIGS 1, 2 AND 3
(3) If surface corrosion is less than 0,2 mm (0.008 in) deep do the steps that follow:
(a) Clean the damaged area with absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist
with white spirit (Material No. P01-008). If necessary use a stiff bristled brush.

CAUTION: ONLY PERSONNEL THAT ARE QUALIFIED AND CERTIFIED TO PT

LEVEL II (OR HIGHER) NATIONAL AEROSPACE STANDARD (NAS) 410
OR EUROPEAN STANDARD EN 4179 OR MIL-STD-410E OR
EQUIVALENT AEROSPACE STANDARD ARE PERMITTED TO DO THE
PENETRANT INSPECTION. THE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR
FLUORESCENT PENETRANT INSPECTIONS ARE DETAILED IN THE
ASTM-E-1417 STANDARD PENETRANT INSPECTION METHODS,
EQUIPMENT AND QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS.
(e) Do the dye penetrant inspection to make sure that all the corrosion is removed from
the blend out areas (Ref. SRM 51-00-09, Page Block 1). If remaining corrosion is
found, do Steps 4.D.(3)(b) thru (d) again until it is removed.
(f) Apply CCC solution (Material No.P07-001) on bare aluminum surfaces (Ref.
20-40-10, Page Block 201).
(g) Apply primer (Material No. P07-007) on top of the CCC solution.
(h) Let the primer dry in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(i) Apply preservative compound (Material No. P10-005) to the wing strut end-fittings
(4), (10), (17) or (20).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 605
57-00-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E. Replacement of Wing Strut End-fittings
(1) Only the replacement wing strut end-fittings (17) and (20) for CONFIG 3 are procurable:
• Different configurations of wing strut end-fitting (CONFIG 2 or 3) can be installed at

each end of the wing strut (wing or fuselage).
• CONFIG 2 wing strut end-fittings (10) are interchangeable with CONFIG 3 wing
strut end-fittings (17) and (20).
• CONFIG 2 wing strut end-fittings (10) and CONFIG 3 wing strut end-fittings (17) and
(20) are not interchangeable with CONFIG 1.
• When no serviceable spares are available for CONFIG 1, you must replace the wing
strut assy (Ref. 57-00-01, Page Block 401).
• When no serviceable spares are available for CONFIG 2, you must replace both
CONFIG 2 wing strut end-fittings (10) with CONFIG 3 wing strut end-fittings (17)
and (20) at each end as necessary.
(2) Replace the wing strut end-fittings (4), (10), (17) or (20) at each end as necessary as
follows.
(3) Replacement of the Top Wing Strut End-fittings
CONFIG 1
(a) Discard the wing strut end-fittings (4), screws (2) and (3), washers (5) and (7), and
nuts (6).
CONFIG 2
(b) Discard the wing strut end-fittings (10), bolts (9), spacers (11) and (12), washers
(13), and nuts (14).
CONFIG 3
(c) Discard the wing strut end-fittings (17), bolts (15), washer (16) and (18) and nuts
(19).
CONFIG 1, 2 AND 3
(d) Install wing strut end-fittings and attaching parts (Ref. Step 4.F.).
(4) Replacement of the Bottom Wing Strut End-fittings
CONFIG 1
(a) Discard the wing strut end-fittings (4), screws (2) and (3), washers (5) and (7), and
nuts (6).
CONFIG 2
(b) Discard the wing strut end-fittings (10), bolts (9), spacers (11) and (12), washers
(13), and nuts (14).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 606
57-00-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CONFIG 3
(c) Discard the wing strut end-fittings (20), bolts (15), washer (16) and (18) and nuts
(19).
CONFIG 1, 2 AND 3
(d) Install wing strut end-fittings and attaching parts (Ref. Step 4.F.).
F. Wing Strut End-fitting Installation
CONFIG 1, 2 AND 3
(1) Fully clean the wing strut end-fittings (4), (10), (17) or (20) with absorbent paper (Material
No. P02-031) made moist with white spirit (Material No. P01-008). Clean the surfaces until
clean absorbent paper made moist with white spirit stays clean when applied to the
surface.
(2) Obey the manufacturer’s instructions and apply layers of sealant (Material No. P08-073) to
the faying surfaces of the:
• The wing strut end-fittings (4), (10), (17) or (20)

• The wing strut (1)
• The spacers (11) and (12) (applicable for CONFIG 2 only).
CONFIG 1
(3) Put the wing strut end-fittings (4) into position in the wing strut (1). Use the marks you
made during Step 3.C. to install any retained wing strut end-fittings (4) at the same
position.
(4) Remove any unwanted sealant with absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist
(5) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P04-012) to the screws (2) and (3), washers (5)
and (7) and nuts (6).
(6) Install the screws (2) and (3), washers (5) and (7) and nuts (6).
(7) Torque the nuts (6) to between 3.5 and 4 Nm (31 to 35 lb in). Do not add the run down
torque.
CONFIG 2
(8) Put the wing strut end-fitting (10) and spacers (11) and (12) into position in the wing strut
(1). Use the marks you made during Step 3.C. to install any retained wing strut end-fittings
(10) at the same position.
(10) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P04-012) to the bolts (9), washers (13) and
nuts (14).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 607
57-00-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(12) Torque the nuts (14) to between 5.7 and 7.9 Nm (50 to 70 lb in) plus the run down torque.
CONFIG 3
(13) Put the wing strut end-fitting (17) or (20) into position in the wing strut (1). Use the marks
you made during Step 3.C. to install any retained wing strut end-fittings (17) or (20) at the
same position.
(15) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P04-012) to the bolts (15), washers (16) and
(18) and nuts (19).
(17) Torque the nuts (19) to between 5.7 and 7.9 Nm (50 to 70 lb in) plus the run down torque.
CONFIGS 1, 2 AND 3
(18) Let the sealant cure in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Close Up
A. Install the wing strut assy (Ref. 57-00-01, Page Block 401).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 608
57-00-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B 5 A
A 3 7
6 CONFIG 1
6 6
5
2 4
1
6
7
2
2
7 3
2
6
4
6
5
7
6
B
CONFIG 1
6842
Wing Strut Assy - Inspection/Check

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 609
57-00-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10
9 11
A
CONFIG 2
12 10
1
13 9
14
13
14
12
10
11
B
CONFIG 2
10
6843

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 610
57-00-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
CONFIG 3
17
15
16
15
18
19
16
18
19
20
B
CONFIG 3
6844

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 611
57-00-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
300 mm
(11.811 in)
TYPICAL DAMAGE
AND BLEND OUT
AREA
WING STRUT
B
t
d
300 mm
B (11.811 in) w
TYPICAL DAMAGE
d AND BLEND OUT
AREA
WING STRUT I
END-FITTING
TYPICAL DAMAGE w
AND BLEND OUT
AREA
SECTION
B-B
I
w
TYPICAL
d
NOTE:
CORROSION REMOVAL ON THE INSIDE SURFACE OF THE WING STRUT MUST BE WITHIN 300 mm (11.811 in) FROM EACH END
OF THE FITTING. FOR CORROSION FOUND ON THE INSIDE SURFACE MORE THAN 300 mm (11.811 in) FROM EACH END OF THE
FITTING, YOU MUST REPLACE THE WING STRUT. CORROSION REMOVAL IS PERMITTED ON ALL OF THE OUTSIDE SURFACE OF
6845
THE WING STRUT.
Wing Strut Assy - Corrosion Removal and Blend Out

Figure 602
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 612
57-00-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WING STRUT FITTING - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This procedure is applicable to both the LH and RH wing strut fitting.
A. The parts below are necessary for the replacement of one wing strut fitting (left or right).
Operators must order the parts from PILATUS as necessary:
New Part No. Description Old Part No. Qty Fig. Item
111.35.06.057 Bolt (8.2 mm Dia 932.53.47.286

1st Oversize) 932.53.46.436
111.35.06.191 Bolt (8.4 mm Dia 111.35.06.057
5 401 1
2nd Oversize)
111.35.06.192 Bolt (8.6 mm Dia 111.35.06.191
3rd Oversize)
6102.0041.00
111.35.06.055
111.35.06.184
111.35.06.193 or 111.35.06.185
Left Wing Strut-Fitting 1 401 4
111.35.06.217 111.35.06.193
111.35.06.195
111.35.06.216
111.35.06.217
6102.0041.00
111.35.06.056
111.35.06.184
111.35.06.194 or 111.35.06.186
Right Wing Strut-Fitting 1 N/A N/A
111.35.06.218 111.35.06.194
111.35.06.195
111.35.06.216
111.35.06.218
938.07.34.104
938.07.65.105
938.07.31.124 Nut 5 401 3
938.07.31.108
938.07.31.124
938.71.51.108
938.78.11.206 Washer 938.78.11.106 5 401 2
938.78.11.206
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Drill - 8,0 mm A/R

Reamer - 8,1 mm A/R For 1st Oversize
Reamer - 8,2 mm A/R
Drill - 8,2 mm A/R
Reamer - 8,3 mm A/R For 2nd Oversize
Reamer - 8,4 mm A/R
Drill - 8,4 mm A/R
Reamer - 8,5 mm A/R For 3rd Oversize
Reamer - 8,6 mm A/R
C. Consumable Materials (Ref. 20-31-00):
Mat. No. Description Qty Remarks
P01-010 Solvent A/R Or Approved Alternative

P02-031 Absorbent Paper A/R
P04-012 Corrosion Preventative A/R
P07-001 Alodine 1200S A/R
P10-013 Corrosion Preventative A/R
3. Procedures
WARNING: WHEN YOU DRILL, CUT OR ABRADE MATERIALS YOU MUST WEAR THE CORRECT
PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (GLOVES, FILTER MASKS AND FACE-SHIELDS/
SAFETYGLASSES/GOGGLES). ABRASIVE DUST CAN GET IN YOUR LUNGS OR ON
YOUR SKIN AND CAUSE INJURY OR SKIN IRRITATION. DO NOT INHALE DUST.
WHEN AUTHORIZED, MAKE THE AREA MOIST BEFORE YOU MANUALLY ABRADE
TO PREVENT AIRBORNE DUST PARTICLES. WHEN AUTHORIZED, USE A HAND-
HELD ABRASION/GRINDER/SANDER TOOL THAT IS EXPLOSION PROOF WITH A
SUCTION SYSTEM TO REMOVE DUST PARTICLES. MAKE SURE THAT THE WORK
AREA IS FULLY VENTILATED. OBEY YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS WHEN YOU DRILL
OR ABRADE PAINTS, FILLERS, OR ANY OTHER MATERIALS. OBEY YOUR LOCAL
REGULATIONS WHEN YOU COLLECT AND DISCARD THE DUST AND OTHER
UNWANTED MATERIALS.
WARNING: OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS WHEN YOU
USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS.
CAUTION: OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS WHEN YOU APPLY THE

CONSUMABLE MATERIALS.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Job Set Up
(1) Remove the left and right wing struts (Ref. 57-00-01, Page Block 401).
(2) Remove the access panels forward and aft of the wing strut fitting. If there are no access
panels in the wing, you must make these openings and the panels (Ref. 57-00-02, Page
Block 801),
(1) Remove the nuts (3), the washers (2) and the bolts (1). Keep two of the bolts (1), the
washers (2) and the nuts (3).
(2) Disassemble and remove the fitting (4) from the wing structure.
C. Preparation of the New Fitting (Ref. Fig. 401)
NOTE: The rear flange of the new fitting has five 8.0 mm diameter holes (A thru E). These
holes are pilot, positioning and alignment holes for the new fitting which align with the
holes of the wing spar.
The forward flange of the new fitting contains only one hole (F). This hole is used as an
alignment hole. The remaining four holes (G, H J and K) in the forward flange are drilled
during installation of the new fitting.
All holes in the new fitting are reamed to the final diameter together with the wing spar
holes for the tight fit bolt installation. All bolts must have the same diameter. If the fitting
was replaced before, the diameter of the existing holes in the new fitting must be
increased to match the wing spar hole diameter first.
(1) Measure the diameter of one removed bolt (1).
(2) Determine the drill and reamer sizes necessary (Ref. Table 1) for the diameter measured
in Step 3.C.(1).
Old Bolt Dia Diameter of Drill Diameter of Reamer P/N of New Bolt
Required for New Fitting Required Required
8.0 mm 8.0 mm 8.1 and 8.2 mm 111.35.06.057
(1st Oversize)
8.2 mm 8.2 mm 8.3 and 8.4 mm 111.35.06.191
(2nd Oversize)
8.4 mm 8.4 mm 8.5 and 8.6 mm 111.35.06.192
(3rd and Maxi-
mum Oversize)
Table 1: Drill and Reamer sizes
(3) If the measured diameter from Step 3.C.(1) is larger than 8.0 mm, use the drill determined
in Step 3.C.(2) to increase the fitting holes (A) thru (E) and (F).
(4) Put the new fitting (4) in position and temporarily install one of the used bolts (1), one of
the used washers (2) and one of the used nuts (3) thru the holes (A) and (F). Tighten the
nut (3).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Install the other used bolt (1) thru the rear flange hole (E) into wing spar hole to align the
fitting (4).
(6) Use the fitting rear flange hole (D) as pilot hole and drill hole (J) in forward fitting flange.
Use the drill determined in Step 3.C.(2). Do not damage the wing spar holes.
(7) Remove the bolt (1), installed in Step 3.C.(5), and install the bolt (1), the other used
washer (2) and the other used nut (3) thru the holes (D) and (J). Tighten the nut (3).
(8) Use the fitting rear flange holes (B), (C) and (E) as pilot holes and drill the holes (G), (H)
and (K) in the fitting forward flange. Do not damage the wing spar holes.
(9) Increase the diameter of the holes (B-G), (C-H) and (E-K) to the next oversize. Use the
two reamers determined in Step 3.C.(2).
(10) Temporarily install the new oversized bolts (1), the new washers (2) and the new nuts (3)
at the holes (B-G) and (E-K), and tighten nuts.
(11) Remove the used bolts (1), the used washer (2) and the used nut (3) installed in Step
3.C.(4) and (7).
(12) Discard all five used bolts (1), washers (2) and nuts (3).
(13) Increase the diameter of the holes (A-F) and (D-J) to the next oversize. Use the two
reamers determined in Step 3.C.(2).
(14) Remove the new bolts (1), the new washers (2) and the new nuts (3) installed in Step
3.C.(10) and remove the new fitting (4) from the wing spar.
(15) If one or more of the holes, reamed in Step 3.C.(9) and (13), in the new fitting (4) and the
wing spar are not circular, determine the next oversize diameter reamers (Ref. Table 1)
and:
(a) Temporarily install the fitting (4). Use the bolts (1), the washers (2) and the nuts (3)
used in Step 3.C.(10) to attach the fitting (4) in holes (A-F) and (E-K).
(b) Increase the diameter of the holes (B-G), (C-H) and (D-J) to the next oversize. Use
the two reamers determined in Step 3.C.(15).
(c) Temporarily install the next oversize bolts (1), the washers (2) and the nuts (3) at the
holes (B-G) and (D-J), and tighten nuts.
(d) Remove the bolts (1), the washers (2) and the nuts (3) installed in Step 3.C.(15)(a).
(e) Increase the diameter of the holes (A-F) and (E-K) to the next oversize. Use the two
reamers determined in Step 3.C.(15).
(f) Remove the bolts (1), the washer (2) and the nuts (3) installed in Step 3.C.(15)(c)
and remove the new fitting (4) from the wing spar.
(16) If one or more of the holes, reamed in Step 3.C.(15), in the new fitting (4) and the wing
spar are not circular, determine the next oversize diameter reamers (Ref. Table 1) and
repeat Step 3.C.(15). If you cannot get the holes circular and the holes are at the
maximum of 8.6 mm, contact Pilatus.
(17) Deburr the holes (A thru H, J and K) in the new fitting and wing spar.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(18) Apply layers of Alodine 1200S (Mat. No. P07-001). Do this on the bare metal surfaces of
the holes in the wing structure and the fitting (4).
(1) Apply layers of the corrosion preventative (Mat. No. P04-012) on the faying surfaces of
new bolts (1), the washers (2) and the nuts (3).
(2) Put the fitting (4) in position in the wing and align the holes.
(3) Install the new bolts (1), the washers (2) and the nuts (3). Make sure that the heads of the
bolts point forward.
(4) Torque the nuts (3) to between 18 and 24 Nm (159.3 and 212.4 lbf in.).
(5) Remove the unwanted corrosion preventative (Mat. No. P04-012) with the absorbent
paper (Mat. No. P02-031) made moist with the solvent (Mat. No. P01-010).
(6) Apply layers of the corrosion preventative (Mat. No. P10-013) on the bolts (1), the washers
(2), the nuts (3) and the fitting (4).
E. Close up
(2) Install the access panels LB10 and RB9 as applicable (Ref. 06-40-00, Page Block 1).
(3) Install the wing struts (Ref. 57-00-01, Page Block 401).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 405
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
SHOWN WITHOUT
SKIN FOR CLARITY
G
2
J 3
K
H
A
B
D
E C
4
6690
Wing Strut Fitting - Removal / Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 406
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WING STRUT FITTING - INSPECTION / CHECK

CHECK 1 - VISUAL INSPECTION
1. General
These procedures are referenced from the AMM Airworthiness Limitations page-block 04-00-00.
The Check 1 procedure gives the data for the Visual Inspection of the LH and RH Wing Strut Fittings.
The Check 2 procedure gives the data for the Eddy Current Inspection of the LH and RH Wing Strut
Fittings.
- Torque wrench 0 to 85 Nm (0 to 750 lb. in.)

- X10 magnifier Local Supply
B. Expendable Parts

57-26-01, Fig. 01 Bearing If necessary
P01-010 Solvent Or an Approved Alternative
CAUTION: DO NOT MIX DIFFERENT TYPES OF GREASE. IF THE ORIGINAL GREASE IS

TO BE REPLACED WITH A NEW TYPE OF GREASE, MAKE SURE THE
BEARINGS ARE COMPLETELY CLEAN BEFORE PACKING WITH THE NEW
GREASE.
P04-001, P04-004 and P04-031 are

P04-028 Grease suitable alternatives for
P04-028 for this application.
P07-001 Alodine 1200S
P07-007 Epoxy Primer
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 601
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P08-052 or P08-060 are suitable

P08-059 Adhesive alternatives for P08-059 for this
application.
3. Procedures
UNWANTED MATERIALS.

A. Job Set Up
(1) Remove loose paint if necessary, then, use absorbent paper (Mat. No. P02-031) and the
solvent (Mat. No. P01-010) to clean the left and right wing strut fittings (1).
(2) Visually examine the left and right fittings (1) for signs of corrosion. Do this with a X10
magnifier and a source of bright light.
by corrosion.
Minor surface corrosion is permitted (Ref. ROM. Chap. 2 and 4). All other corrosion is not
permitted and you must replace the defective fitting (Ref. 57-00-02, Page Block 401).
(3) Remove minor surface corrosion (Ref. ROM. Chap. 2 and 4) from the given fittings (1).
This step in only applicable if you have found permitted corrosion (Ref. Step 3.B.(2).
X10 magnifier and a source of bright light. No cracks are permitted. If you find a crack, you
must replace the fitting (Ref. 57-00-02, Page Block 401) before next flight.
(5) Examine the bearing (2).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 602
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Make sure:
• The bearing ball is free to rotate by hand. If necessary, you can use the attachment
bolt as a lever.
• The bearing ball and housing are not corroded. Remove superficial corrosion with
the absorbent paper (Mat. No. P02-031) and the solvent (Mat. No. P01-010). No
remaining corrosion is permitted.
• The bearing housing is not loose in the wing strut fitting (1)
• The bearing housing is aligned (as shown in Detail B)
• The bearing ball and housing are not worn. No measurable gap is permitted.
If necessary:
• Remove the bearing (Ref. Para. 3.C.)

• Examine the bearing and replace if necessary (Ref. Para. 3.C.)
• Install the bearing (Ref. Para. 3.D.).
NOTE: If you must replace the bearing, do not install the new bearing until you
have done the Eddy Current Inspection.
(6) Apply layers of Alodine 1200S (Mat. No. P07-001), the primer (Mat. No. P07-007) and the
applicable paint on all bare metal surfaces except the bearing housing interfaces.
(7) Lubricate the bearing (2).
(a) Remove the bearing ball:
1 Rotate the bearing ball out of the bearing housing by 90 degrees.
2 Turn it until it aligns with the cut-outs in the bearing housing.
3 Remove the bearing ball.
4 Use absorbent paper (Mat. No. P02-031) and the solvent (Mat. No. P01-010)
to clean the bearing and the bearing housing.
5 Apply a layer of the grease (Mat. No. P04-028) to the mating surfaces of the
bearing and the bearing housing.
(b) Install the bearing ball:
1 Align the bearing ball with the cut-outs in the bearing housing.
2 Install the bearing ball.
3 Turn the bearing by 90 degrees until it is flush in the bearing housing.
C. Removal of the Bearing (Ref. Fig. 601)
NOTE: This procedure is applicable if loose, damaged, corroded, incorrectly aligned or worn
bearings are found.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 603
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: DO NOT USE TOO MUCH HEAT TO REMOVE THE BEARING. DO NOT EXCEED
(1) Use a hot air blower (for heat shrink sleeves) and apply heat to loosen the adhesive
between the bearing and the fitting or the bush.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE TOO MUCH FORCE TO REMOVE THE BEARING. YOU CAN
DAMAGE THE WING STRUT FITTING IF YOU USE TOO MUCH FORCE.
(2) Use a press or applicable diameter drift to remove the bearing (2) from the bore in the
fitting or the bush. If you cannot remove the bearing (2), replace the fitting (Ref. 57-00-02,
Page Block 401).
NOTE: The bearing (2) is removed from the top (wing side) of the wing strut fitting (1).
(3) Use the solvent (Mat. No. P01-010) to remove the unwanted adhesive from the hole in the
fitting or the bush.
(4) Use the Scotch-Brite (Mat. No. P02-016) to polish the hole in the fitting or the bush.
(5) Use the absorbent paper (Mat. No. P02-031) made moist with the solvent (Mat. No.
P01-010) and clean the hole in the fitting or the bush.
(6) For wing strut-fittings P/N 6102.0041.00, 111.35.06.055, 111.35.06.056, 111.35.06.184,

111.35.06.185 and 111.35.06.186:
(a) Do a visual inspection of the bearing hole in the fitting for wear. No wear is
permitted. Replace wing strut fittings that are worn before the next flight
(Ref. 57-00-02, Page Block 401).
(b) Apply a layer of alodine (Mat. No. P07-001) to the surface of the hole and facing.
Install the replacement bearing (2) in the alodined hole in less than 72 hours.
(7) For wing strut-fittings P/N 111.35.06.193, 111.35.06.194,111.35.06.195, 111.35.06.216,

111.35.06.217 and 111.35.06.218:
Do a visual inspection of the bearing hole in the fitting for wear and corrosion. No corrosion
is permitted. Remove all the corrosion and measure the inner diameter of the bush. The
maximum permitted diameter is 32.24 mm (1.27 in.). If the inner diameter of the bush is
more than the maximum permitted diameter, replace the fitting (Ref. 57-00-02, Page Block
401).
(8) Examine the bearing (2). Make sure:
bolt as a lever.
(9) If necessary, discard the old bearing and use a new bearing.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 604
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Installation of the Bearing (Ref. Fig. 601)
P01-010) and clean the bonding face of the bearing (2).
(2) Use the Scotch-Brite (Mat. No. P02-016) to polish the bonding face of the bearing (2).
P01-010) and clean the bonding face of the bearing (2).
(4) Put the bearing (2) in position in the hole. Make sure it can be installed easily. Remove the
bearing (2).
NOTE: Put the bearing (2) in the hole as shown in Detail B, NEW ORIENTATION.
(5) Mix the two parts of the adhesive (Mat. No. P08-059).
(6) Apply a layer of the adhesive (Mat. No. P08-059) to the applicable surfaces of the bearing
(2) and the hole. Make sure there is sufficient adhesive to give a full bond when the parts
are assembled.
(7) Put the bearing (2) in position in the hole. Make sure the bearing (2) is correctly aligned
(Ref. Detail B, NEW ORIENTATION) and push the bearing (2) firmly into the hole to make
sure it is tightly against the flange face.
(8) Remove the unwanted adhesive (Mat. No. P08-059).
CAUTION: DO NOT USE TOO MUCH HEAT. DO NOT EXCEED 120°C (224°F) FOR MORE
THAN 15 MINUTES.
(9) Let the adhesive (Mat. No. P08-059) cure for 5 to 7 days at room temperature or 2 hours at
65 ± 5°C (136 ± 8°F).
E. Close up
(2) Install the wing struts (Ref. AMM. 57-00-01, Page Block 401).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 605
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OLD ORIENTATION
1
B
NEW ORIENTATION
CORRECT BEARING
6692
ALIGNMENT/POSITION
Wing Strut Fitting - Visual Inspection

Figure 601
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 606
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHECK 2 - EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION
1. General
This procedure gives the data for the Eddy Current Inspection (Check 2) of the Wing Strut Fittings and
is applicable to both the LH and RH wing strut fittings.
- Torque wrench 0 to 85 Nm (0 to 750 lb. in.)

- X10 magnifier Local Supply
NORTEC 2000 Eddy Current
- Eddy Current NDT Equipment
Instrument or equivalent
- Shielded Probe and Lead Combination 3 mm Diameter, 500 KHz, 90-degree
7075 Aluminum, 2124 Aluminum or
- Calibration Standard 2024 Aluminum with an EDM slot 0.5
mm deep
B. Expendable Parts

57-26-01, Fig. 01 Bearing If necessary
P01-010 Solvent Or an Approved Alternative
CAUTION: DO NOT MIX DIFFERENT TYPES OF GREASE. IF THE ORIGINAL GREASE IS

TO BE REPLACED WITH A NEW TYPE OF GREASE, MAKE SURE THE
BEARINGS ARE COMPLETELY CLEAN BEFORE PACKING WITH THE NEW
GREASE.
P04-001, P04-004 and P04-031 are

P04-028 Grease suitable alternatives for
P04-028 for this application.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 607
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P07-020 Paint, White
If required, for strut fittings

111.35.06.193, 111.35.06.194,
P08-018 Sealant
111.35.06.195, 111.35.06.216,
111.35.06.217, 111.35.06.218
P08-052 or P08-060 are suitable

P08-059 Adhesive alternatives for P08-059 for this
application.
3. Procedures
UNWANTED MATERIALS.

A. Job Set Up
(1) Remove loose paint if necessary, then, use absorbent paper (Mat. No. P02-031) and the
solvent (Mat. No. P01-010) to clean the left and right wing strut fittings (1).
(2) Visually examine the left and right fittings (1) for signs of corrosion. Do this with a X10
magnifier and a source of bright light.
by corrosion.
Minor surface corrosion is permitted (Ref. ROM. Chap. 2 and 4). All other corrosion is not
permitted and you must replace the defective fitting (Ref. 57-00-02, Page Block 401).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 608
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Remove minor surface corrosion (Ref. ROM. Chap. 2 and 4) from the given fittings (1).
This step in only applicable if you have found permitted corrosion (Ref. Step 3.B.(2).
X10 magnifier and a source of bright light. No cracks are permitted. If you find a crack, you
must replace the fitting (Ref. 57-00-02, Page Block 401) before next flight.
(5) Examine the bearing (2).
Make sure:
bolt as a lever.
• The bearing housing is not loose in the wing strut fitting (1)
• The bearing housing is aligned (as shown in Detail B)
If necessary:
• Remove the bearing (Ref. Para. 3.C.)

• Examine the bearing and replace if necessary (Ref. Para. 3.C.)
• Install the bearing (Ref. Para. 3.D.).
NOTE: If you must replace the bearing, do not install the new bearing until you
have done the Eddy current inspection (Ref. Para. 3.B.(6)).
CAUTION: ONLY PERSONNEL THAT ARE TRAINED AND APPROVED (BY THE LOCAL
AIRWORTHINESS AUTHORITIES) CAN DO THIS PROCEDURE.
(6) Do the non destructive inspection (Eddy Current).
(a) For strut fittings 111.35.06.193, 111.35.06.194,111.35.06.195, 111.35.06.216,

111.35.06.217 and 111.35.06.218 do a check of the sealant bead (Ref. Fig. 602,
Sheet 2):
1 The sealant bead does not require removal for the inspection if:
• The sealant bead between the bush and the fitting is flat and coated (or
was coated) with white paint. If the white paint was loose or flaking, it
should have been removed in Step 3.B.(1)
and
• The sealant bead is in good condition
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 609
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2 The sealant bead does require removal for the inspection if:
• There is a thick, raised, bead of sealant between the bush and the fitting
or
• The sealant bead is loose or damaged
(b) If necessary, remove the sealant bead as follows:
1 Use a non-metallic scraper to remove the sealant.
2 Use the absorbent paper (Mat. No. P02-031) and the solvent (Mat. No.
P01-010) to clean the area where the sealant was applied.
(c) Calibrate the Eddy Current Instrument as follows:
• Frequency 300 - 500 KHz

• Probe selection Absolute
• Refer to the manufacturer‘s handbook and calibrate the instrument for an
80% upscale deflection from the 0.5 mm EDM slot of the calibration standard.
(d) Inspection of the fittings
NOTE 1: Use a non-metallic object to guide the probe as close as possible to all
the edges.
NOTE 2: Specially inspect the areas shown on Figure 602, Detail B.
1 Do the procedure as given in the manufacturer‘s handbook.
2 Put the probe on the lower face of the left fitting.
3 Move the probe across the lower face. Make sure you get as close as
possible to the outer edges of the fitting and as close as possible to the edges
of the bearing (Ref. Detail B).
4 Put the probe on the upper face of the left fitting.
5 Move the probe across the upper face. Make sure you get as close as
possible to the outer edges of the fitting and as close as possible to the edges
of the bearing (Ref. Detail B).
6 Put the probe on the face of the edge of the left fitting.
7 Move the probe across the face of the edge. Make sure you get as close as
possible to the outer edges (Ref. Detail C).
8 If the bearing is removed:
• Put the probe on the inner face of the bearing hole of the left fitting
• Move the probe across the face and around the hole. Make sure you get
as close as possible to the outer edges of the hole.
9 Do Para. 3.B.(6)(b)2 thru 8 again for the right fitting.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 610
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
10 If you find a crack, you must replace the fitting (Ref. 57-00-02, Page Block
401) before next flight.
(e) Apply layers of Alodine 1200S (Mat. No. P07-001), the primer (Mat. No. P07-007)
and the applicable paint on all bare metal surfaces except the bearing housing
interfaces.
(f) For strut fittings 111.35.06.193, 111.35.06.194,111.35.06.195, 111.35.06.216,

111.35.06.217 and 111.35.06.218, apply sealant and /or paint as required (Ref. Fig.
602, Sheet 2):
1 If you removed the sealant, use absorbent paper (Mat. No. P02-031) and
solvent (Mat. No. P01-010) to clean the area between the bush and the
fitting.
2 Apply a thin, flat, bead of sealant (Mat. No. P08-018) between the bush and
the fitting and let the sealant dry.
3 Apply white paint (Mat. No. P07-020) over the sealant bead.
(7) Lubricate the bearing (2).
(a) Remove the bearing ball:
1 Rotate the bearing ball out of the bearing housing by 90 degrees.
2 Turn it until it aligns with the cut-outs in the bearing housing.
3 Remove the bearing ball.
4 Use absorbent paper (Mat. No. P02-031) and the solvent (Mat. No. P01-010)
to clean the bearing and the bearing housing.
5 Apply a layer of the grease (Mat. No. P04-028) to the mating surfaces of the
bearing and the bearing housing.
(b) Install the bearing ball:
1 Align the bearing ball with the cut-outs in the bearing housing.
2 Install the bearing ball.
3 Turn the bearing by 90 degrees until it is flush in the bearing housing.
C. Removal of the Bearing (Ref. Fig. 602)
NOTE: This procedure is applicable if loose, damaged, corroded, incorrectly aligned or worn
bearings are found.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE TOO MUCH HEAT TO REMOVE THE BEARING. DO NOT EXCEED
(1) Use a hot air blower (for heat shrink sleeves) and apply heat to loosen the adhesive
between the bearing and the fitting or the bush.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 611
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: DO NOT USE TOO MUCH FORCE TO REMOVE THE BEARING. YOU CAN
DAMAGE THE WING STRUT FITTING IF YOU USE TOO MUCH FORCE.
(2) Use a press or applicable diameter drift to remove the bearing (2) from the bore in the
fitting. If you cannot remove the bearing (2), replace the fitting (Ref. 57-00-02, Page Block
401).
NOTE: The bearing (2) is removed from the top (wing side) of the wing strut fitting (1).
(3) Use the solvent (Mat. No. P01-010) to remove the unwanted adhesive from the hole in the
fitting or the bush.
(4) Use the Scotch-Brite (Mat. No. P02-016) to polish the hole in the fitting or the bush.
(5) Use the absorbent paper (Mat. No. P02-031) made moist with the solvent (Mat. No. P01-
010) and clean the hole in the fitting or the bush.
(6) For wing strut-fittings P/N 6102.0041.00, 111.35.06.055, 111.35.06.056, 111.35.06.184,

111.35.06.185 and 111.35.06.186:
(a) Do a visual inspection of the bearing hole in the fitting for wear. No wear is
permitted. Replace wing strut fittings that are worn before the next flight.
(b) Apply a layer of alodine (Mat. No. P07-001) to the surface of the hole and facing.
Install the replacement bearing (2) in the alodined hole in less than 72 hours.
(7) For wing strut-fittings P/N 111.35.06.193, 111.35.06.194,111.35.06.195, 111.35.06.216,

111.35.06.217 and 111.35.06.218:
Do a visual inspection of the bearing hole in the fitting for wear and corrosion. No corrosion
is permitted. Remove all the corrosion and measure the inner diameter of the bush. The
maximum permitted diameter is 32.24 mm (1.27 in.). If the inner diameter of the bush is
more than the maximum permitted diameter, replace the fitting (Ref. 57-00-02, Page Block
401).
(8) Examine the bearing (2). Make sure:
bolt as a lever.
(9) If necessary, discard the old bearing and use a new bearing.
D. Installation of the Bearing (Ref. Fig. 602)
010) and clean the bonding face of the bearing (2).
(2) Use the Scotch-Brite (Mat. No. P02-016) to polish the bonding face of the bearing (2).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 612
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
010) and clean the bonding face of the bearing (2).
(4) Put the bearing (2) in position in the hole. Make sure it can be installed easily. Remove the
bearing (2).
NOTE: Put the bearing (2) in the hole as shown in Detail B, NEW ORIENTATION.
(5) Mix the two parts of the adhesive (Mat. No. P08-059).
(6) Apply a layer of the adhesive (Mat. No. P08-059) to the applicable surfaces of the bearing
(2) and the hole. Make sure there is sufficient adhesive to give a full bond when the parts
are assembled.
(7) Put the bearing (2) in position in the hole. Make sure the bearing (2) is correctly aligned
(Ref. Detail B, NEW ORIENTATION) and push the bearing (2) firmly into the hole to make
sure it is tightly against the flange face.
(8) Remove the unwanted adhesive (Mat. No. P08-059).
CAUTION: DO NOT USE TOO MUCH HEAT. DO NOT EXCEED 120°C (224°F) FOR MORE
THAN 15 MINUTES.
(9) Let the adhesive (Mat. No. P08-059) cure for 5 to 7 days at room temperature or 2 hours at
65 + 5°C (136 + 8°F).
E. Close up
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 613
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OLD ORIENTATION
1
B
NEW ORIENTATION
MOVE PROBE AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO THE

OUTER AND INNER EDGES AS INDICATED
ON BOTH SIDES OF THE FITTING SPECIALLY INSPECT THESE AREAS
OF THE UPPER AND LOWER SURFACES
D
1 1
C 2
C B
D CORRECT BEARING
6693
ALIGNMENT/POSITION
Wing Strut Fitting - Inspection
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 614
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SECTION
D-D
SEALANT BEARING
SEALANT BUSH
6694
Wing Strut Fitting - Inspection

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 615
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 616
57-00-02 Jan 30/18
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WING STRUT FITTING - MINOR REPAIR - NEW ACCESS PANELS
1. General
This procedure introduces new access panels and is necessary if you must replace a wing strut fitting
and there are no access panels installed. This procedure is applicable to both the left and right wing
strut fittings.
A. Customer Supplied Parts
Part No. Description Qty each Wing
916.16.35.110 Aluminium Alloy Sheet Size 224 x 84 mm

(8.8 x 3.3 in.)
939.19.86.102 Rivet 34
916.16.35.110 Aluminium Alloy Sheet Size 155 x 155 mm
(6.1 x 6.1 in.)
or
6102.0125.02 Panel 1

P01-010 Solvent
P08-057 Sealant
3. Procedure
A. Job Set-Up
(1) Remove the access panels LB10 and/or RB9 (Ref. AMM. 06-40-00, Page Block 1).
(2) Keep two of the screws (P/N 935.13.16.018) from the access panel. Discard the unwanted
panel and the remaining screws.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 801
57-00-02 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Make an Access Opening in the Skin, Forward of the Fitting (Ref. Fig. 801)
WARNING: OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS WHEN

YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS.

NOTE: This step is only applicable if there is no internal access to the forward flange of the
fitting assembly.
NOTE: The new opening is at the same location (and is the same width) as the circular
(inspection) opening LB10 (left) or RB9 (right). The forward and aft anchor nuts for the
access covers LB10 or RB9 will also be used for the cover of the new opening.
(1) Make marks to show the contours of the opening on the skin. Do this at the location shown
and to the given dimensions (192 x 52 mm (7.6 x 2.0 in.) with 26 mm (1.0 in.) radii at each
end).
(2) Cut the opening in the skin to the contour marks with the applicable cutting tools. Make
sure that there are no sharp edges. Do not remove the forward and aft anchor nuts for the
access covers LB10 or RB9.
(3) Make the cover for the forward access opening:
(a) Make marks to show the center line and contours of the cover on the piece of
aluminium alloy sheet (P/N 916.16.35.110). Do this to the given dimensions
(224 x 84 mm (8.8 x 3.3 in.) with 42 mm (1.7 in.) radii at each end).
(b) Cut the aluminium alloy sheet (P/N 916.16.35.110) at the contour marks with the
applicable cutting tools to make the cover (1). Make sure that there are no sharp
edges.
(c) Make marks to show the locations of the rivet and screw holes around the edges of
the cover (1). Do this at the pitch dimensions shown.
(d) Make the rivet holes at the applicable marks on the cover (1) with a 3,3 mm (0.13
in.) diameter drill. Deburr the holes.
(e) Make the screw holes at the applicable marks on the cover (1) with a 4,0 mm
(0.16 in.) diameter drill. Deburr the holes.
(f) Apply layers of the Alodine 1200S (Mat. No. P07-001) and the primer (Mat. No.
P07-007). Do this on the bare metal surfaces of the cover (1) and the edges of the
opening in the skin.
(4) Make the rivet holes for the cover for the forward access opening in the skin.
(a) Put the cover (1) in position on the skin, align the center lines and hold.
(b) Make the rivet and screw holes in the skin with a 3,3 mm (0.13 in.) and 4,0 mm
(0.16 in.) diameter drill.
(c) Remove the cover and deburr the rivet holes.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 802
57-00-02 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Apply layers of the Alodine 1200S (Mat. No. P07-001) and the primer (Mat. No.
(5) Install the cover for the forward access opening.
(a) Apply layers of the sealant (Mat. No. P08-057) on the faying surfaces of the cover
(1) and the skin.
(b) Put the cover (1) in position on the skin and hold with gripper pins.
(c) Install the rivets (P/N 939.19.86.102) (Ref. ROM. Chap. 2). Apply a layer of the
sealant (Mat. No. P08-057) on each rivet before you install it.
(d) Remove the unwanted sealant (Mat. No. P08-057) with the solvent (Mat. No.
P01-010).
(e) Install the two screws (P/N 935.13.16.018) that you kept at Para. 3.A.(2).
(f) Apply layers of the primer (Mat. No. P07-007) and the applicable paint on the rivet
and screw heads and the exterior surface of the cover (1).
C. If Necessary, Make a New Access Opening in the Skin, Aft of the Fitting (Ref. Fig. 801)
(1) Make marks to show an intersection of center lines and the contours of a circular opening
120 mm (4.7 in.) in diameter. Do this on the skin at the location shown.
(2) Cut the opening in the skin to the contour marks with the applicable cutting tools. Make
sure that there are no sharp edges.
(3) Make the new cover for the aft access opening or use the procured panel
(P/N 6102.0125.02).
NOTE: The steps that follow are only necessary if you do not use the procured panel
(P/N 6102.0125.02).
(a) Make marks to show an intersection of center lines and the contours of a 155 mm
(6.1 in.) diameter circular cover. Do this on a piece of the aluminium alloy sheet
(P/N 916.16.35.110).
(b) Cut the aluminium alloy sheet (P/N 916.16.35.110) at the contour marks with the
applicable cutting tools to make the cover (2). Make sure that there are no sharp
edges.
(c) Make marks to show the locations of the 16 rivet holes around the edges of the
cover (2). Make sure that the holes are of equal pitch, at a diameter of 135 mm
(5.32 in.).
(d) Make pilot holes in the cover (2). Do this at the marks for the rivet holes with a
2,4 mm (0.1 in.) diameter drill. deburr the holes.
(4) Make the rivet holes for the cover for the aft access opening.
(a) Put the cover (2) in position on the skin, align the center lines and hold.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 803
57-00-02 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Make the rivet holes in the cover (2) and the skin. Do this through the pilot holes
with a 3,3 mm (0.13 in.) drill.
(c) Remove the cover (2) and deburr the rivet holes.
(d) Apply layers of the Alodine 1200S (Mat. No. P07-001) and the primer (Mat. No.
(5) Install the cover for the aft access opening cover.
(a) Apply layers of the sealant (Mat. No. P08-057) on the faying surfaces of the cover
(2) and the skin.
(b) Put the cover (2) in position the skin and hold with gripper pins.
(c) Install the rivets (P/N 939.19.86.102) (Ref. ROM. Chap. 2). Apply a layer of the
sealant (Mat. No. P08-057) on each rivet before you install it.
(d) Remove the unwanted sealant (Mat. No. P08-057) with the solvent (Mat. No.
P01-010).
(e) Apply layers of the primer (Mat. No. P07-007) and the applicable paint on the rivet
heads and the exterior surface of the cover (2).
(6) If necessary do Steps 3.B. again to make the access openings in the other wing.
D. Close up
(2) Install the access panels LB10 and RB9 as applicable (Ref. AMM. 06-40-00, Page
Block 1).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 804
57-00-02 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A A
LEFTSIDE SHOWN
RIGHT OPPOSITE
B 43 mm 97 mm
(1.69 in.) (3.82 in.)
= = = = = =
45° 45°
2 m
45° R3 45°
.0 m
5
.)
(1.3 mm
(1 26
in
8 in DO NOT REMOVE
R
.) NUT PLATES
INBOARD
FWD
OPENING FOR
LB10/RB9
45° 45°
45° 45°
= = = = = =
43 mm 97 mm
(1.69 in.) (3.82 in.)
224 mm
(8.82 in.)
R4
2
(1.6 mm
5 in
.)
84 mm SCREW HOLE
(3.3 in.) 1
6695
Access Openings and Covers - Installation (Left Shown, Right Similar)

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 805
57-00-02 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
=
R6
(2. 0 m mm
36 m .5 )
in. 67 6 in.
) R .6
(2
= =
FWD
R
6
(2. 7.5 m
66 m
in.
)
2
Ø 155 mm
(6.10 in.)
6696
Access Openings and Covers - Installation (Left Shown, Right Similar)

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 806
57-00-02 Nov 30/08
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WING TO FUSELAGE FITTINGS - INSPECTION / CHECK
1. General
The procedure gives the data for a visual and eddy current inspection of the wing to fuselage fittings
located on the main and rear spars of the left and right wings.
If you find damage you must contact Pilatus Aircraft Ltd for additional repair instructions.

- Inspection mirrors Local Supply
- Hot air blower or heat lamps Local Supply
B. Expendable Parts

57-26-01, Fig. 01 Bush Ref. Fig. 601, Item 6, Ref. Note <1>
NOTE: <1> Only to be replaced if damaged, Ref. Step 3.B.(8).

P07-007 Primer
P08-052 Adhesive
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 601
57-00-03 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Procedure
WARNING: DO THIS PROCEDURE IN A ROOM WITH GOOD LIGHT AND GOOD VENTILATION
WITH A DUST FILTER IN ACCORDANCE WITH YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS.
A. Job Set Up
(1) Remove the left and right wings (Ref. 57-00-00, Page Block 401).
(2) Do this procedure at the same time as the inspection for the fuselage wing fittings
(Ref. 53-00-01, Page Block 601).
(3) Do this procedure for the left and right wings.
NOTE: The procedures below are for the left wing. The right wing procedures are
similar.
B. Preparation and Bush Removal (Ref. Fig. 601)
CAUTION: DO NOT USE TOO MUCH HEAT TO REMOVE THE BUSH:
• THE MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE IS 120 °C (248 °F)

• THE MAXIMUM LENGTH OF TIME YOU CAN APPLY HEAT IS 15
MINUTES.
(1) Use a hot air blower to apply heat to loosen the adhesive between the bush (2) and the
connecting strap LH (1).
CAUTION: DO NOT USE TOO MUCH FORCE TO REMOVE THE BUSH. YOU CAN DAMAGE
THE CONNECTING STRAP IF YOU USE TOO MUCH FORCE.
(2) Use a press or an applicable diameter drift to remove the bush (2) from the hole in the
connecting strap LH (1) (Ref. 20-50-01, Page Block 201).
(3) Discard the bush (2).
(4) Use a non-metallic scraper, abrasive pads (Material No. P02-016) and absorbent paper
(Material No. P02-031) made moist with solvent (Material No. P01-010) to remove the
remaining unwanted adhesive from the hole in the connecting strap LH (1).
(5) Use a non-metallic scraper to remove any lose paint in the inspection areas.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 602
57-00-03 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
010) to fully clean:
• The connecting strap LH (1)

• The attaching angle RH (3)
• The attaching angle LH (4)
• The fitting LH (5)
• The bush (6)
• The fitting RH (7)
• The angle (8)
• The root area of the wing and surrounding structure.
Clean the parts until clean absorbent paper made moist with solvent stays clean when
applied to the surface.
(8) Do a check of the bush (6) for corrosion, excessive wear or any other damage. If you find
damage, the bush (6) must be removed for the inspection and replaced. Contact Pilatus
NOTE: The inspection is done on the main spar with the bush (6) installed when it is not
damaged.
(1) Visual Inspection
Visually examine the parts within the visual inspection areas for signs of cracks, corrosion,
security of attachment and any other damage:
• Do this with a magnifying glass (x10), inspection mirrors and a bright light source.
• Examine all forward and aft surfaces and the holes for the bushes.
• Examine the surrounding structure of the wing root area.
• Examine all fasteners, attaching parts and rivets.
• Damage must be removed if possible or the part must be replaced. Contact Pilatus
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 603
57-00-03 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Non-Destructive Test (NDT) Inspection
CAUTION: ONLY PERSONS QUALIFIED AND CERTIFIED TO ET LEVEL II (OR HIGHER)

NATIONAL AEROSPACE STANDARD NAS410 OR EUROPEAN STANDARD EN
4179 OR MIL-STD-410E OR EQUIVALENT AEROSPACE STANDARD ARE
PERMITTED TO DO THE EDDY CURRENT INSPECTION.
(a) Do the eddy current inspection for cracks and corrosion (Ref. SRM 51-00-09, Page
Block 1):
• Examine all forward and aft surfaces and the holes for the bushes as far as
possible.
• No crack indications are allowed within these areas. When you find crack
indications, the part must be replaced. Contact Pilatus Aircraft Ltd for repair
instructions.
• Corrosion must be removed if possible or the part must be replaced. Contact
(b) Apply CCC solution (Material No. P07-001) on all bare aluminum surfaces
(Ref. 20-40-10, Page Block 201).
(c) Apply primer (Material No. P07-007) and the applicable paint to the bare metal
surfaces of the parts. Do not apply the primer or paint to the surface of the holes
where you will install the new bush (2).
D. Install the New Bushes (Ref. Fig 601)
(1) Use the abrasive pads (Material No. P02-016) to lightly roughen the bonding surfaces of
the new bush (2) and the hole.
P01-010) and clean the bonding surface of the new bush (2) and the hole.
(3) Put the bush (2) in position in the hole to make sure it can be installed easily, then remove
the bush (2).
(4) Install the bush with adhesive (Material No. P08-052) (Ref. AMM, 20-50-01, Page Block
201).
instructions.
NOTE: The typical cure time is 5 to 7 days at room temperature or 2 hours at 65 ±5 °C

(149 ±9 °F).
E. Close Up
(2) Make sure that the fuselage wing fittings inspection is done (Ref. 53-00-01, Page Block
601).
(3) Install the left and right wings (Ref. 57-00-00, Page Block 401).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 604
57-00-03 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LH SHOWN
B
RH SIMILAR C
A
A
1
2
D
REAR
SPAR
ASSEMBLY
LH SHOWN
RH SIMILAR
4 1 2
SECTION 4
E-E
3
REAR
SPAR
ASSEMBLY E 1 2 E
5
MAIN
SPAR 6
ASSEMBLY
F
8
4
LH SHOWN
LH SHOWN
RH SIMILAR
RH SIMILAR
NOTE:
AREA OF VISUAL INSPECTION
6848
AREA OF NDT INSPECTION
Wing to Fuselage Fittings - Inspection / Check

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 605
57-00-03 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAIN
SPAR
ASSEMBLY
G G
LH SHOWN
RH SIMILAR
VIEW LOOKING AFT
6 8
5
7
SECTION
G-G
NOTE:
6850
AREA OF VISUAL INSPECTION
Wing to Fuselage Fittings - Inspection / Check

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 606
57-00-03 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AILERON/FLAP SUPPORT-BRACKET - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This procedure is applicable to the LH and RH support brackets. There are three support brackets on
each wing.
A. Consumable Materials (Ref. 20-31-00):
P01-008 Solvent Or Approved Alternative

P02-007 Lockwire
P04-012 Corrosion Preventative
P07-001 CCC Solution
3. Procedures

A. Job Set Up
(1) Remove the aileron and/or flap as necessary to remove the damaged support bracket:
• Remove the aileron (Ref. 57-61-11, Page Block 401)

• Remove the flap (Ref. 57-51-11, Page Block 401)
(1) Cut and remove the lockwire from the bolts (3).
(2) Remove the bolts (3), washers (2) and the support bracket (1).
(1) Hold the support bracket (1) in position on the wing and align the holes.
(2) Temporarily install the bolts (3) to make sure the bolt holes align.
(3) If you can not install the bolts (3) because of misalignment of the bolt holes:
(a) Remove the bolts (3) and the support bracket (1).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
57-26-01 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) You can file a small amount of material from three of the four bolt holes in the
support bracket (1) to make the holes align.
(c) Apply a layer of CCC solution (Material No. P07-001) to the filed areas.
(4) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P04-012) on the faying surfaces of the support
bracket (1), the bolts (3) and the washers (2).
(5) Install the support bracket (1) with the washers (2) and bolts (3).
(6) Torque the nuts (3) to between 5,65 and 7,90 Nm (50 and 70 lbf in.).
(7) Remove the unwanted corrosion preventative (Material No. P04-012) with the absorbent
paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with the solvent (Material No. P01-008).
D. Close up
(1) Install the removed aileron and/or flap, as necessary:
• Install the aileron (Ref. 57-61-11, Page Block 401)

• Install the flap (Ref. 57-51-11, Page Block 401)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
57-26-01 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
1
B
3
6721
Support Bracket - Removal / Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
57-26-01 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
57-26-01 Jul 31/11
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AILERON/FLAP SUPPORT-BRACKET - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. General
This procedure gives the data to do a fluorescent dye penetrant inspection on the support brackets, and
visually examine the wing surface where the support brackets attach.
As an option, you can do an eddy current inspection on the support brackets. Only persons qualified
and certified to Eddy Current Inspection Level II (or higher) National Aerospace Standard NAS 410,
European Standard EN 4179, or any other equivalent standards, shall do the eddy current inspection
There are three support brackets on each wing. You must do the inspection on all six support brackets.
- Bright light source

- x10 magnifier
B. Consumable Materials (Ref. 20-31-00):
P01-008 Solvent Or approved alternative

P06-001 Penetrant
P06-002 Remover
P06-003 Developer
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) Remove the ailerons (Ref. 57-61-11, Page Block 401).
(2) Remove the flaps (Ref. 57-51-11, Page Block 401).
(3) Remove the support brackets (Ref. 57-26-01, Page Block 401).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 601
57-26-01 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
WARNING: OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS HEALTH AND SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS WHEN

YOU USE THE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS.
(1) Use the absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with solvent (Material No.
P01-008) to clean the support bracket and the mating surface of the wing lower skin.
(2) Use a bright light source and x10 magnifier to visually examine the mating surface of the
wing lower skin for cracks. If you find a crack(s) contact Pilatus Aircraft Ltd for repair
information.
(3) Use the dye penetrant (Material No’s P06-002, P06-002 and P06-003) to do an inspection
of the support bracket for cracks. Do this on the areas shown shaded on Fig. 601.
(4) If you find a crack(s), replace the support bracket.
(5) If you find no crack(s):
(a) Use the absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with solvent (Material
No. P01-008) to clean the support bracket and the bore of the bush.
C. Close up
(1) Install the support brackets (Ref. 57-26-01, Page Block 401).
(2) Install the ailerons (Ref. 57-61-11, Page Block 401).
(3) Install the flaps (Ref. 57-51-11, Page Block 401).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 602
57-26-01 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
B
WING LOWER
SURFACE
INSPECTION AREAS
C
6722
Support Brackets - Inspection / Check

Figure 601
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 603
57-26-01 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 604
57-26-01 Jan 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FLAPS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
110.88.07.065 Safety Clip CB hold open (aircraft with

electrical flaps only)
- Torque Wrench 0 to 15 Nm (0 to 150 lbf in.)
B. Expendable Parts

57-51-01, Fig. 01 Cotter Pins Qty. 4

P04-002 Grease
P04-029 Paste, Installation
2. Procedures
A. Preparation
(1) Extend the flaps until there is access to the flap push rod (Ref. Fig. 401, Item 11).
(2) On aircraft with electrically operated flaps, open and install a safety clip to the following
circuit breaker:
FLAP
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE FLAPS ARE SUPPORTED DURING REMOVAL.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE INBOARD AILERON IS SUPPORTED WHEN THE
OUTBOARD FLAP HINGE BOLT IS REMOVED.
(1) Remove cotter pin (14), nut (13), washers (12) and (24) and bolt (23). Discard the cotter
pin.
(2) Disconnect the push rod (11) and remove the bushes (10).
(3) Remove the screws (15) and (22) and disconnect the bonding leads (19).
(4) Support the flaps and the inboard aileron.
(5) Remove the cotter pin (18), nut (17), washers (16) and (20) and bolt (21). Discard the
cotter pin.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
57-51-11 May 31/14
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Remove the cotter pin (8), nut (9), washers (7) and (4) and bolt (5). Discard the cotter pin.
(7) Remove the inboard flap.
(8) Remove the nuts (1), washers (2) and screws (3). Remove the door stop (6).
(9) Remove the cotter pin (29), nut (28), washer (27) and (26) and bolt (25). Discard the cotter
pin.
NOTE: The outboard flap/aileron bolt (25) also holds the inboard aileron. Temporarily
install the bolt to hold the aileron after the outboard flap has been removed.
(10) Remove the outboard flap.
(11) Install the outboard flap/aileron bolt (25) to hold the aileron.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE FLAPS ARE SUPPORTED DURING INSTALLATION.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE INBOARD AILERON IS SUPPORTED WHEN THE
OUTBOARD FLAP HINGE BOLT IS REMOVED.
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY ANY CORRECTION FACTOR FOR INSTALLATION PASTE TO

THE TORQUE VALUE OF THE NUTS.
(1) Apply grease (Material No. P04-002) to all bearing surfaces and bushes. Do not get the
grease on the threads of the bolts.
(2) Put the flaps in position. Flaps with a cut away along the inner edge must be installed
inboard.
(3) Support the inboard aileron and remove the flap/aileron bolt (25).
(4) Put the outboard flap into position.
(5) Apply installation paste (Material No. P04-029) to the bolt (25).
(6) Install the bolt (25), washers (26) and (27) and nut (28).
(7) Torque the nut (28) to between 3,2 and 6,2 Nm (28.4 and 55 lbf. in.) plus the run-down
torque.
(9) Put the door stop (6) in position. Install the screws (3), washers,(2) and nuts (1).
(10) Put the inboard flap into position.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
57-51-11 May 31/14
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
torque.
torque.
(19) Install the bonding leads (19) with the screws (15) and (22).
(20) Put the bushes (10) and the push rod (11) in position.
torque.
D. Close Up
(1) On aircraft with electrically operated flaps, remove the safety clip and close the circuit
breaker:
FLAP
(2) Do the functional test of the flaps (Ref. 27-50-00, Page Block 501).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
57-51-11 May 31/14
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C
B
A 1
2
9 3
8
7
6
28
27
4
5
29
C 10
11
26
25
13
12
14
B
15
17
24
23 18
16
22
20 19
21
6310
Flaps - Removal/Installation
Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
57-51-11 May 31/14
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AILERONS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
This Page Block gives the procedures to remove and install the ailerons.
There are two configurations for the installation of the right aileron hinge-bolt (Ref. Fig. 401, View B):
• CONFIG 1 - MSN 825 thru 995 and Aircraft pre-SB 55-003 or pre-SB 55-005 (Part 3) has the
hinge bolt (27) installed into a self-locking nut (34)
• CONFIG 2 - MSN 996 and subsequent and Aircraft Post-SB 55-003 or post-SB 55-005 (Part 3)
has the hinge bolt (27) installed into a castellated nut (34) and safetied with a cotter pin (33).

(0 to 44.2 lbf in))
to 177 lbf in))
B. Expendable Parts

57-61-01, Fig. 01 Cotter pins Ref. Fig. 401, Items 10, 13, 33,
43 and 50

P04-002 Grease
P04-028 Grease
P04-029 Paste, Installation
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(2) Remove the balance tab (Ref. 57-62-11, Page Block 401) to install a new aileron only.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
57-61-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE AILERONS ARE CORRECTLY SUPPORTED DURING
AILERONS ARE NOT CORRECTLY SUPPORTED.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT YOU GIVE SUPPORT TO THE OUTBOARD FLAP WHEN
YOU REMOVE THE INBOARD-FLAP HINGE-BOLT. DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT
OR EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR IF THE OUTBOARD FLAP IS NOT CORRECTLY
SUPPORTED.
(1) Remove the bolts (47) and (45), and washer (46) and remove the counterweight (44) from
the outboard aileron.
(2) Remove the self locking nut (4), washers (3) and (2) and bolt (1) and disconnect the rod
(5) only if you have not removed the balance tab.
(3) Remove the self locking nut (15), washers (16) and (17) and bolt (18) and remove the rod
(5).
(4) Do not let the rod ends turn.
(5) Remove the screw (25) and nut (23) and disconnect the bonding leads (24) from each
aileron unit.
CAUTION: SUPPORT THE AILERONS WHEN THE CONTROL ROD ATTACHMENT BOLT IS
REMOVED. DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT OR EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR IF THE
AILERONS ARE NOT CORRECTLY SUPPORTED.
(6) Remove the cotter pin (10), nut (9), washers (11) and (22) and bolt (21). Discard the cotter
pin (10).
(7) Disconnect the aileron push rod (8) and remove the bushes (6) and (7).
(8) Give support to the outer flap and the ailerons.
(9) On the left wing:
(a) Remove the cotter pin (13), nut (12), special washers (14) and (20), and the bolt
(19). Discard the cotter pin (13).
(10) On the right wing - CONFIG 1 only:
(a) Remove the nut (28), washers (29) and (31), and the bolt (32) to disconnect the rod
(30).
(b) Remove the nut (34), washer (35) and remove the bracket (35) with the bush (36)
and special washer (38).
(c) Remove the bolt (27) and special washer (26).
(a) Remove the nut (28), washers (29) and (31), and the bolt (32) to disconnect the rod
(30).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
57-61-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Remove the cotter pin (33), the nut (34), washer (35) and remove the bracket (35)
with the bush (36) and special washer (38). Discard the cotter pin (33).
(c) Remove the bolt (27) and special washer (26).
(12) Remove the cotter pin (43), nut (42), washer (41), special washer (40) and the bolt (39).
Discard the cotter pin (43).
(13) Remove the inboard aileron. Temporarily install the bolt (39) to hold the outboard flap after
the inboard aileron is removed.
NOTE: The inboard aileron bolt (39) also holds the outboard flap.
(14) Remove cotter pin (50), nut (49), washer (48), special washer (51) and the bolt (52).
Discard the cotter pin (50).
(15) Remove the outboard aileron.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE AILERON TO BE INSTALLED IS BALANCED. THE

AILERON BALANCE PROCEDURE IS GIVEN IN 27-00-00, PAGE BLOCK 201.
DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT OR EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR IF THE AILERON
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE AILERON IS CORRECTLY SUPPORTED DURING

THE AILERON IS NOT CORRECTLY SUPPORTED.
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY ANY CORRECTION FACTOR FOR GREASE OR INSTALLATION

PASTE TO THE TORQUE VALUE OF THE NUTS. THIS CAN CAUSE THE NUTS
TO BE TORQUED INCORRECTLY.
CAUTION: UNLESS OTHERWISE INSTRUCTED, DO NOT GET GREASE ON THE

THREADS OF THE BOLTS. THE BOLTS CANNOT BE INSTALLED CORRECTLY
IF THERE IS GREASE ON THE THREADS.
CAUTION: DO NOT GET CORROSION PREVENTATIVE ON THE BEARINGS. CORROSION

PREVENTATIVE CAN CONTAMINATE AND DAMAGE THE BEARINGS.
(1) Apply grease (Material No. P04-002) to all bearing surfaces and bushes.
(2) Make sure that the outboard flap is supported.
(3) Remove the bolt (39).
(4) Put the inboard aileron in position.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
57-61-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Install the bolt (39), special washer (40), washer (41) and the nut (42).
(7) Torque the nut (42) to between 3,2 and 6,2 Nm (28.4 and 55 lbf in) plus the run-down
torque.
008) and remove the unwanted grease or installation paste.
(10) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to the head of the bolt (39), special
washer (40), nut (42), washer (41) and cotter pin (43).
(11) Put the outboard aileron in position.
(13) Install the bolt (52), special washer (51), washer (48) and the nut (49).
(14) Torque the nut (49) to between 3,2 and 6,2 Nm (28.4 and 55 lbf in) plus the run-down
torque.
008) and remove the unwanted grease or installation paste.
(17) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to the head of the bolt (52), special
washer (51), nut (49), washer (48) and cotter pin (50).
(18) On the left wing:
(a) Apply installation paste (Material No. P04-029) to the bolt (19).
(b) Install the bolt (19), special washers (20) and (14) and nut (12).
(c) Torque the nut (12) to between 3,2 and 6,2 Nm (28.4 and 55 lbf in) plus the run-
down torque.
(d) Make absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) moist with white spirit (Material No.
(f) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to the head of the bolt (19),
special washer (20), nut (12), special washer (14) and cotter pin (13).
(a) Install the bolt (27) and special washer (26).
(b) Put the special washer (38), the bush (36) and the bracket (37) in position.
(c) Install the washer (35) and nut (34).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
57-61-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(d) Do a check that you can turn the nut (34) on the bolt (27) with your fingers:
• When you can turn the nut (34) on the bolt (27) with your fingers, the self-
locking nut (34) is unserviceable
• When the nut (34) is unserviceable, you must replace it.
(e) Torque the nut (34) to between 4,0 and 6,0 Nm (35.4 and 53.1 lbf in) plus the run-
down torque.
(g) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to the head of the bolt (27),
special washer (26), nut (34) and washer (35).
P04-029) to the bolt (27).
(b) Install the bolt (27) and special washer (26).
(c) Put the special washer (38), the bush (36) and the bracket (37) in position.
(d) Install the washer (35) and nut (34).
(e) Torque the nut (34) to between 3,2 and 6,2 Nm (28.4 and 55 lbf in) plus the run-
down torque.
(g) Safety the nut (34) with a new cotter pin (33).
(h) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to the head of the bolt (27), nut
(34), washer (35) and cotter pin (33).
(21) Put the rod (30) in position and install the bolt (32), washers (31) and (29), and nut (28).
(22) Put the bushes (6) and (7) in position and put the control rod (8) in position.
(23) Install the bolt (21), washers (22) and (11) and the nut (9).
(25) Install the balance tab if removed (Ref. 57-62-11, Page Block 401).
(26) Put the rod (5) in position.
(28) Install the bolt (1), washers (2) and (3) and nut (4) to connect the rod (5) only if you did not
remove/install the balance tab.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 405
57-61-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(29) Apply corrosion preventative (Material No. P10-013) to:
• The head of the bolt (32), washers (31) and (29), and nut (28)
• The head of the bolt (21), washers (22) and (11), nut (9) and cotter pin (10)
• The head of the bolt (18), washers (17) and (16) and nut (15)
• The head of the bolt (1), washers (2) and (3) and nut (4).
(30) Put the bonding lead (24) in position and install the screw (25) and nut (23) on each aileron
unit.
(31) On the outboard aileron, do the inspection/check and installation of the counterweight
(Ref. 57-63-11, Page Block 601).
NOTE: The inspection/check procedure is necessary to make sure that the

counterweight attachment bolts have adequate thread engagement.
D. Test
(2) Do the adjustment/test of the aileron control system (Ref. 27-10-00, Page Block 501).
E. Close up
Remove all the equipment, tools and materials from the work area. Make sure that the work area
is clean.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 406
57-61-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3
4
A
6 8
9
1
11
5 10
12
24
33 23 13
25
(CONFIG 2) 14
34
15
20 16
34 (CONFIG 1)
B 21
22
35
36
37 17
19
32
18
38
31
30
29 28
26
6313
27
Ailerons - Removal/Installation
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 407
57-61-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C
A
B 41
42
A
43
40
39
47
B
46
45
49
48
44
(TYPICAL)
50
51
52
6262
Ailerons - Removal/Installation
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 408
57-61-11 Jun 30/21
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AILERON BALANCE TAB - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
A. Expendable Parts
57-66-01, Fig. 01 Cotter Pin Fig. 401, Item 2
P04-002 Grease
2. Removal
A. Remove the nut (11), washers (9) and (10) and bolt (8) which attach the push rod to the tab.
B. Remove the nut (4), washers (3) and (6) and bolt (5). Remove the push rod (7).
C. Remove the cotter pin (2) from the tab hinge pin (1). Discard the cotter pin.
D. Remove the tab hinge pin (1) and the tab (12).
3. Installation
A. Lubricate the tab hinge pin (1) and bolts (5) and (8) with grease (Material No. P04-002).
B. Put the balance tab (12) in position and install the hinge pin (1).
C. Safety the hinge pin with a new cotter pin (2).
D. Put the push rod (7) in position. Install the bolt (8), washers (9) and (10) and nut (11).
E. Install the bolt (5), washers (3) and (6), and nut (4).
4. Test
A. Check the rigging of the aileron balance tabs (Ref. 27-15-00, Page Block 501).
5. Close Up
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
57-62-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1 HINGE PIN
12 BALANCE TAB
2 COTTER PIN
11 NUT
10 WASHER
9 WASHER
8 BOLT
3 WASHER
4 NUT
A 7 ROD 6 WASHER
5 BOLT
6314
Aileron Balance Tab - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
57-62-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AILERON COUNTERWEIGHT - INSPECTION/CHECK
1. General
There are old and new versions of ailerons and counterweights and, Pre SB 57-006, different
combinations of bolts and washers were defined. SB 57-006 introduced a common bolt with the correct
type and quantity of washers required for the different ailerons and counterweights. This makes sure
the bolts have adequate thread engagement.
This procedure reproduces the SB 57-006 check and installation procedures to make sure the
counterweight is installed correctly after removal.
A. Expendable Parts
932.53.47.009 Bolt, NFL22201BE050009L Fig. 601, Item 2

938.78.11.203 Washer, FS3508.021/5.3/12*1,5 Fig. 601, Item 1 (Ref. Table 601)
or
938.78.13.205 Washer, FS3508.021/5.3/12*1 Fig. 601, Item 1 (Ref. Table 601)
P01-008 Solvent
A. Inspection/Check
008) to clean the surface of the aileron around the two aft attachment holes.
CAUTION: THE TWO AFT ATTACHMENT BOLTS MUST BE P/N 932.53.47.009. IF YOU ARE
NOT SURE THAT THE BOLTS ARE CORRECT, DISCARD THEM AND INSTALL
NEW BOLTS P/N 932.53.47.009.
(2) Put a bolt (2) (P/N 932.53.47.009) into one of the two aft attachment holes and turn it until
the threads engage in the anchor nut.
(3) Turn the bolt (2) back until it is released from the anchor nut and hold it in this position.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 601
57-63-11 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) To determine the type of anchor nut installed, measure the Dimension ‘X’ as shown on
Figure 601, Section B - B.
NOTE: Dimension ‘X’ is an approximate dimension.
(5) Do steps (2) thru (4) for the second aft attachment hole.
NOTE: It is possible that the two aft attachment points have different anchor nuts
installed.
(6) For the old version counterweights P/N 6106.0011.00 only, measure the thickness of the
mounting flange as follows:
(a) If necessary, remove any thick paint from the flange to permit an accurate
measurement.
(b) Measure the Dimension ‘Y’, as shown on Figure 601, Section C - C, at the flat
surface where the washer is installed.
B. Installation
(1) For each of the two aft attachment positions, refer to Table 601 and determine the correct
type and quantity of washers to be installed.
Table 601
Counterweight Anchor Nut Flange Thickness Type/Quantity of Washers
P/N Dimension ‘X’ Dimension ‘Y’ 1,5 1,0

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
12* 15* 2,0 2,5 3,0 938.78.11.203 938.78.13.205
6106.0011.00 X X 0 2
(Old Version)
X X 1 0
X X 0 1
X X 2 0
X X 1 1
X X 0 2
111.45.08.001 X No measurement required 0 1
(New Version)
X No measurement required 0 2
111.45.06.005 X No measurement required 0 1
(New Version)
X No measurement required 0 2
* Approximate dimension.
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY GREASE TO THE BOLTS.
(2) Support the counterweight (5) in the installed position.
(3) Install the removed bolt (4) and washer (3).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 602
57-63-11 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) At each of the two aft attachment positions, install a bolt (2) (P/N 932.53.47.009) with the
correct type and quantity of washers (1).
(5) Torque tighten the bolts (2) and (4) to between 3,9 and 4,5 Nm (35 and 40 lbf. in.).
(6) If necessary, apply touch-up paint to repair the surface finish on the flange of the
counterweights.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 603
57-63-11 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SECTION
C-C
TYPICAL
A DIMENSION 'Y'
B
B
B
A C A
OLD VERSION
B
NEW VERSION
C
3
B
4 B
1 B
2 B
3
SECTION
B-B
5
TYPICAL
4
DIMENSION 'X'
SB 2769
Aileron Counterweight Attachment - Inspection/Check and Installation

Figure 601
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 604
57-63-11 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 61 - PROPELLER
Chapter Chapter
Section Section
List of Effective 1 Jan 31/22 61-20-00 (Cont’d) 405 Jan 30/16
Pages 2 Jan 31/22 CONFIG 1 406 Jan 30/16
407 Jan 30/16
Table of Contents 1 Jul 30/16 408 Jan 30/16
2 Jul 30/16
61-00-00 1 Jul 31/12 402 Jul 30/16
2 Jul 31/12 403 Jul 30/16
3 Jul 31/12 404 Jul 30/16
4 Jul 31/12 405 Jul 30/16
5 Jul 31/12 406 Jul 30/16
6 Jul 31/12 407 Jul 30/16
408 Jul 30/16
61-10-00 101 Mar 14/98 409 Jul 30/16
102 Mar 14/98 410 Jul 30/16
501 Jan 31/22 61-42-01 401 May 31/14

502 Jan 31/22 402 May 31/14
503 Jan 31/22 403 May 31/14
504 Jan 31/22 404 May 31/14
505 Jan 31/22
506 Jan 31/22
507 Jan 31/22
508 Jan 31/22
509 Jan 31/22
510 Jan 31/22
511 Jan 31/22
512 Jan 31/22
801 Jul 31/12

802 Jul 31/12
61-10-01 401 Feb 28/20

402 Feb 28/20
403 Feb 28/20
404 Feb 28/20
405 Feb 28/20
406 Feb 28/20
61-20-00 401 Jan 30/16

403 Jan 30/16
404 Jan 30/16
Page 1
61-LEP Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
61-LEP Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 61 - PROPELLER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
PROPELLER 61-00-00
PROPELLER ASSEMBLY 61-10-00

Troubleshooting 101 All
Repairs 801 All
PROPELLER 61-10-01
PROPELLER CONTROL-CABLE ASSEMBLY 61-20-00

Removal / Installation CONFIG 1 401 Cable Assy P/N
115.75.06.265
Removal / Installation CONFIG 2 401 Cable Assy P/N
941.94.11.432
PROPELLER INDICATING 61-40-00
PROPELLER LOW-PITCH INDICATING SYSTEM 61-42-00
LOW-PITCH WARNING MICROSWITCH 61-42-01

Page 1
61-TOC Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
61-TOC Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLER - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
A 3 blade, variable pitch Hartzell HC-B3TN-3C or -3D propeller is installed. The propeller blades are
moved by oil and spring pressure between the feather and reverse positions. When the engine stops,
the blades move to the feathered position by spring pressure.
The propeller speed is controlled by a propeller governor which changes the blade pitch to maintain the
selected speed. A propeller control lever in the cockpit can be used to change the datum of the
propeller governor and give a different propeller speed. A beta valve is installed on the governor, and is
used to control the propeller during low and reverse pitch operation.
Propeller overspeed protection is given by an overspeed governor and free turbine (Nf) governor.
2. Description (Ref. Fig. 1 and 2)
A. Propeller
The propeller has three blades, a spinner assembly and a spider hub unit. The propeller blades
are attached to the spider hub unit with clamps. To change pitch, each blade turns on a needle
roller bearing in the blade and a ball bearing within the blade clamp.
Pitch movement of the blades is controlled by the spider hub unit. The spider hub unit has a
feathering spring, blade position stops, and a hydraulic piston which is installed at the front end
of the propeller spider hub. The piston is connected to each blade by a link to the blade root. A
counterweight is attached to each blade clamp to assist the propeller blades to increase pitch.
Pitch change of the blades is controlled by the propeller governor, with an integral beta valve to
control movement to the reverse pitch position. A hydraulic low pitch stop is installed to prevent
reverse pitch until the power control lever is set to reverse pitch.
The propeller blade angles, taken at the 30 inch station marked on each blade are as follows:
B2-H4 and B2-H2 Aircraft with 10178C or CH blades:
• Feathering pitch plus 85° 30’

• Fine pitch approximately plus 19°
• Minimum pitch in flight (Beta Range)plus 0° 30'
• Maximum reverse pitch minus 10° 30'
B2-H2 Aircraft with 10173C or CH blades:
• Feathering pitch plus 85° 30’

• Fine pitch approximately plus 19°
• Minimum pitch in flight (Beta Range)0°
• Maximum reverse pitch minus 11° 30'
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
61-00-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Propeller Governor
The propeller governor is installed on top of the engine reduction gearbox.
The governor maintains the propeller at a constant speed and changes the pitch of the propeller
to match the load of the engine torque.
The governor controls the flow of oil to the propeller to maintain the set propeller speed. During
low airspeed operations the governor is used to select the required blade angle (beta control) by
adjusting the cockpit propeller control lever.
An oil pump and pressure relief valve are installed to give a supply to the governor. The pump is
driven from the governor drive shaft, which also drives a flyweight type centrifugal governor.
The flyweight governor is used to control the position of a pilot valve which meters the oil
pressure to the propeller to change the blade pitch. A speeder spring sets the datum for the
flyweight governor and the spring pressure is adjustable through the speed adjuster lever and
shaft, which is controlled by the propeller control lever. In the minimum position, the speed
adjuster shaft lifts the pilot valve to feather the propeller.
The propeller governor also has a free turbine (Nf) governor section, which reduces Nf speed if
the propeller overspeeds to 109% or more. This section of the governor bleeds Py air pressure
and so adjusts the fuel metering valve in the FCU to reduce engine power. The Nf governor has
an airbleed lever operated by the flyweight governor, and an orifice lever controlled by the
airbleed lever. A reset post, on which the airbleed lever is installed, is used to reset the datum of
the Nf governor for reverse pitch operation.
For reverse pitch and beta range operation a beta valve is installed, which is attached to the
propeller controls and to the reversing ring on the propeller. The valve is used during operation in
the beta range. The valve controls the flow of oil to and from the propeller, and overrides normal
propeller governor operation.
C. Propeller Overspeed Governor
The propeller overspeed governor is installed in parallel with the propeller governor and
functions as a safety device if the propeller governor fails. If propeller speed exceeds maximum
rpm, the overspeed governor will govern at 106% (2337 rpm).
3. Operation (Ref. Fig. 1 and 2)
When the engine is stopped, the feathering spring moves the piston fully in until the feathering
screws are contacted. As the piston is connected to each blade by an operating link, the blades
move to the feathered position.
When the engine is started, oil is supplied to the propeller governor under pressure. The
propeller governor is in an underspeed condition, so the oil is directed to the piston in the
propeller. This moves the piston and blades towards the minimum fine pitch position. As the
propeller speed increases the flyweights are forced out by centrifugal force. The propeller
governor stops the oil supply to the piston when the operating speed is reached. If the propeller
overspeeds, the governor lets oil go back to the sump, which reduces the pressure in the piston.
The feathering spring then moves the piston and blades to a coarser pitch.
With the engine at constant power, the governor is ‘on-speed’, and no oil is supplied to, or
released from the propeller, so the blade angle stays the same. If the propeller speed reduces,
the governor flyweights are forced inwards due to the speeder spring pressure and the pilot valve
is raised. This lets oil into the propeller and the blade pitch is reduced. This lets the propeller
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
61-00-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
speed increases until the flyweights on the governor are forced outwards and pilot valve moves
to stop the blade pitch change.
Movement of the propeller control lever into the beta range moves the airbleed link which resets
the Nf overspeed governor datum to a value less than the propeller governor. The beta valve
also moves forward which stops the flow of oil to and from the propeller. Further movement lets
oil drain from the propeller into the sump. The feathering spring moves the blades to a coarser
pitch and slows the propeller. As the pitch increases, the slipring moves back and moves the
beta valve back. As the governor is now underspeed, oil is supplied to the propeller to decrease
the blade pitch. The blade pitch decreases until the slipring moves forward and stops the supply
of oil, or until the reverse stop in the propeller is contacted. Power turbine speed (Nf) is controlled
during beta operation by the Nf governor section of the propeller governor.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 3
61-00-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BLADE
A
SPINNER
SPIDER HUB
PISTON
BETA VALVE
SLIP RING
FINE PITCH FEATHERING SPRING
ADJUSTING NUT
6330
Propeller
Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 4
61-00-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AIR BLEED LEVER
Nf GOVERNOR SECTION SPEED ADJUSTING LEVER
AIR BLEED ORIFICE
SPEEDER SPRING
FLYWEIGHTS
Py
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
BETA VALVE
AIR BLEED LINK
TO SUMP
PROPELLER GOVERNOR
GOVERNOR OIL PUMP
OVERSPEED
GOVERNOR
TO SUMP
TO PROPELLER
ENGINE OIL SUPPLY

6331
Propeller Control System

Figure 2
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 5
61-00-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 6
61-00-00 Jul 31/12
'ePILATUS!!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLER - TROUBLESHOOTING
1. General
This topic gives the troubleshooting procedures for the propeller assembly.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 101
61-10-00 Mar 14/98
"S PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ABNORMAL GREASE LEAKAGE OR VIBRATION PREREQUISITES:
None
WARNING: ABNORMAL GREASE LEAKAGE OR VIBRATION CAN BE AN INDICATION OF A FAILING

PROPELLER BLADE OR BLADE RETENTION COMPONENT. AN IN-FLIGHT BLADE
SEPARATION CAN RESULT IN A CATASTROPHIC AIRCRAFT ACCIDENT.
+
Remove the spinner
NOTE: Do not clean
the hub area before you
look for leaks.
Examine the hub and Reject the propeller.
blade clamps for cracks YES Report all cases of
Cracks found? � cracks to Pilatus and
Hartzell.
NO
Is there abnormal YES

� Check the blade track
vibration?
for loose and bent
blades. Try to change
NO
the blade pitch by hand.
OK?
NO
YES
Do the propeller
balance procedure ,.
NO
OK? � Reject the propeller
,,
Lubricate, clean. YES

�
Do a ground run.
Are there leaks? YES
� Repair as necessary
NO
� Return to service
Propeller Assembly - Troubleshooting

Figure 101
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 102
61-10-00 Mar 14/98
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLER - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. General
This procedure for balancing the propeller has been developed by Pilatus Aircraft Ltd using a Vibrex
Balancing Kit, manufactured by the Chadwick-Helmuth Company, Ohio, USA, and equipment and data
supplied by Pilatus.
Dynamic balancing must not be used to replace a static balance of the propeller after overhaul.
The balance of the propeller must be checked when:
• The propeller is replaced

• The engine is replaced
• Major repairs are done to the propeller or propeller blades
• The propeller is removed and installed.
The Vibrex equipment uses an accelerometer (velometer) and a magnetic pick-up to find the size and
position of the out-of-balance forces on the component. A display on a Balancer/Phazor unit shows the
size on a meter as Inches Per Second (IPS), and the position on a circle of 24 Phazor lights as a clock
angle.
This size and clock position of the out of balance force are used with graphs to find the size and the
position at which weights must be attached on the propeller backplate to give an acceptable balance.
With the accelerometer installed in the position shown, the balance of the propeller is satisfactory when
the size of the out of balance force is 0.2 IPS or less.
It can be necessary to modify the propeller bulkhead as shown (Ref. Fig. 503).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 501
61-10-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
110.85.07.422 Vibrex Propeller Balancing Kit

110.85.07.414 Bracket, magnetic pick-up
110.85.07.415 Bracket, accelerometer
110.85.07.412 Interrupter
110.85.07.413 Counterweight
B. Expendable Parts
- Decal/Placard A2803
932.19.21.030 Bolt AN3-10A 26,2 mm long
932.19.21.029 Bolt AN3-7A 23,0 mm long
932.19.21.028 Bolt AN3-6A 19,8 mm long
932.19.21.027 Bolt AN3-5A 16,7 mm long
932.19.21.026 Bolt AN3-4A 13,5 mm long
932.19.21.025 Bolt AN3-3A 11,9 mm long
938.77.11.113 Washer AN 960-10 Thin
938.77.11.112 Washer AN 960-10L Thick
938.07.68.204 Nut
968.29.11.453 Washer AN 970-3
Use these bolts, washers and nuts as balance weights.

- Masking Tape Local supply
3. Job Set Up (Ref. Fig. 501 to 504)
A. Aircraft Preparation
(1) Do a check in the aircraft and propeller log book for a record of the last balance check.
Make a note of the position and quantity of all weight corrections.
(2) Remove the access panels PT1 and PB1.
B. Propeller Inspection
(1) Remove the spinner (3). Make sure that there are index marks on the spinner and
backplate.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 502
61-10-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Examine the propeller blades and spinner for signs of grease leakage.
NOTE: There can be small amounts of grease after the first run of a new or overhauled
propeller.
(3) Examine the red slippage tape or paint on the blades and clamps. If there are signs that
the blade has turned in the clamp correct the fault before the propeller is balanced (Ref.
Hartzell Propeller CMM).
(4) Make sure that the decals (Part No. A2803) are installed on the propeller cylinder and on
the spinner bulkhead.
(5) Lubricate the propeller (Ref. 12-27-61).
(6) Install the spinner (3) and secure with the screws and washers. Make sure that the Index
marks on the spinner dome and spinner bulkhead align.
C. Install the Balancing Equipment
(1) Install the interrupter:
(a) Remove one securing screw and washer from the spinner (3).
(b) Install the interrupter (4), screw and washer.
(c) Remove the securing screw and washer on the spinner (3) which are 180 degrees
opposite the interrupter (4).
(d) Install the counterweight and secure with the screw and washer.
(2) Install the Velometer:
(a) Attach the Velometer (9) to the bracket (8).
(b) Remove the nut (7) from the forward upper mounting stud of the propeller
overspeed governor (1).
(c) Install the velometer bracket (8) with the velometer at 90 degrees to the engine
horizontal axis and secure with the nut (7) and washer.
If the Velometer is not aligned correctly the indications given will not be accurate.
(3) Install the magnetic pick-up
(a) Remove the nuts (2) and propeller de-ice harness support brackets (if installed)
from the lower mounting studs on the propeller overspeed governor (1).
(b) Install the magnetic pick-up bracket (5) with the nuts (2).
(c) Rotate the propeller to align the interrupter (4) with the pick-up bracket (5).
(d) Attach the magnetic pick-up (6) to the bracket (5) and adjust the locknuts to give a
gap of between 2,25 and 2,75 mm (0.09 and 0.11 in) between the pick-up (6) and
the interrupter (4). Tighten the locknuts.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 503
61-10-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE CABLES FROM THE BALANCER/PHAZOR ARE SECURED
CLEAR OF HOT OR MOVING PARTS. DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT OR
(4) Install the cables:
(a) Open the engine cowling PL1.
(b) Attach the magnetic pick-up cable to the pick-up (6).
(c) Attach the Velometer cable to the Velometer (9).
(d) Route both cables along the engine and aircraft structure to the cockpit.
(e) Secure the cables to the engine and airframe structure with masking tape.
(f) Close the engine cowling PL1, but do not secure the rear cowling latch.
NOTE: To avoid damage to the cables, do not fasten the rear cowling latch.
D. Prepare the Balancer/Phazor
(1) Put the Balancer/Phazor in the cockpit.
(2) Connect the Velometer cable to channel A of the Balancer/Phazor.
(3) Connect the magnetic pick-up cable to channel A of the Balancer/Phazor.
(4) Connect the Balancer/Phazor to the aircraft 28V DC socket.
(5) Set the Balancer/Phazor controls as follows:
• FUNCTION selectorA
• MAGNETIC PICK-UP switchCOMMON
• RPM RANGE selector X10
• INTERRUPTER LOGIC switch SINGLE.
4. Procedures (Ref. Fig. 501 to 504)
CAUTION: DO THE BALANCE CHECKS WITH THE SPINNER INSTALLED. THE PROPELLER IS
NOT BALANCED CORRECTLY WHEN THE SPINNER IS NOT INSTALLED.
A. Balancing Check
(2) Press the TEST push switch and make sure that the Phazor light at 12 o'clock position
comes on.
(3) Run the engine at low idle, and set the RPM TUNE to the indicated propeller speed (Np)
divided by 10.
(4) Make a note of the clock position of the Phazor light which is on.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 504
61-10-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Press the VERIFY TUNE button:
(a) Make a note of the clock position of the Phazor light which is on.
(b) Keep the VERIFY TUNE button pressed.
(c) Adjust the RPM TUNE selector until the Phazor light moves less than 3 lights when
the VERIFY TUNE button is released.
(b) Make a note of the IPS scale reading.
(c) Release the VERIFY TUNE button.
(7) Move the PCL to give a torque indication of approximately 35 psi at maximum rpm.
NOTE: The same torque value on all subsequent checks must be used.
(8) Set the balancer RPM TUNE reading to propeller rpm divided by 10.
(9) Make a note of the clock position of the Phazor light which is on.
(b) Keep the VERIFY TUNE button pressed.
(c) Adjust the RPM TUNE selector until the Phazor light moves less than 3 lights when
the VERIFY TUNE button is released.
(b) Make a note of the IPS scale reading.
(c) Release the VERIFY TUNE button.
(12) Shutdown the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(13) Compare the IPS readings between idle and 35 psi torque:
(a) If the difference is more than 0.4 IPS, remove the propeller and check the blade
angles (Ref. Hartzell CMM 61-10-18).
NOTE: Very small blade angle inaccuracies can cause the blades to be
substantially out of track.
(14) If the IPS reading from the check is 0.2 IPS or less, the balance is acceptable.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 505
61-10-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED THE MAXIMUM BALANCE WEIGHT AT EACH HOLE. THE
MAXIMUM WEIGHT OF THE BALANCE WEIGHTS ATTACHED AT ONE OF THE
HOLES IN THE SPINNER BULKHEAD IS 28,4 g (1.0 oz). DAMAGE TO THE
AIRCRAFT OR EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR.
(15) If balance is not acceptable:
(a) Plot the IPS and clock position on the balance chart (Ref. Fig. 505, Chart A).
(b) Calculate the quantity of weights required and make a record on the chart (Ref. Fig.
505 Chart B).
NOTE: For each 0.1 IPS out of balance approximately 8 g is necessary.
(c) Put the propeller in position with the interrupter adjacent to the magnetic pick-up.
(d) Install weights in the position shown, viewed from the front of the aircraft (Ref. Fig.
505, Chart C).
(e) Make sure that the threads of the balance weight screws on the backplate come out
of the nuts by a minimum of one thread and a maximum of four threads.
(f) Do the balance check again.
5. Close Up
A. Remove the Balancing Equipment (Ref. Fig. 501).
(1) Disconnect the Balancer/Phazor from the aircraft 28V DC Socket.
(2) Disconnect the Velometer and magnetic pick-up cables from the Balancer/Phazor.
(3) Remove the Balancer/Phazor from the cockpit.
(4) Open the engine cowl PL1.
(5) Disconnect the cables from magnetic pick-up (6) and Velometer (9).
(6) Remove the sensor cables.
(7) Remove the Velometer (9) from the bracket (8).
(8) Remove the nut (7) which secures the velometer bracket (8). Remove the bracket (8).
(9) Install the nut (7) on the forward upper mounting stud of the propeller overspeed governor
(1).
(10) Remove the magnetic pick-up (6) from the pick-up bracket (5).
(11) Remove the nuts (2) securing the pick-up bracket (5) and remove the bracket.
(12) Install the nuts (2) and de-ice harness support brackets (if installed) to the lower mounting
studs on the propeller overspeed governor (1).
(13) Torque the nuts (2) and (7) to between 19,2 and 21,5 Nm (170 and 190 lbf in).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 506
61-10-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(14) Remove the screws and washers and remove the interrupter (4) and counterweight. Install
the screw and washer.
B. Remove all the equipment, tools and materials from the work area. Make sure that the work area
is clean.
C. Install the access panels PT1 and PB1.
D. Close the access panel PL1.
E. Make sure that the Propeller Balance Chart/Data Sheet is complete.
F. Enter the details of the Balance Check and put a copy of the balance chart in the aircraft and
propeller log books.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 507
61-10-00 Jan 31/22

PC-6

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

66A
A 47A
%""( %"A
&A !) A
9=/A7<?;/A=2+=A /5/,=;4,+5A5/+-<A+;/A </,?;/.A ,5/+;A

90A 39=A9;A69@481A :+;><A
A *%"A
*%"A " "A

"%A *"$ A
*""A
A (%A
%A ( A
A !( A "'A
" "A
$ "A
%"#( %"A
Velometer, Magnetic Pick-up and Interrupter Installation

Figure 501
+%,", #)''+&*',
$!)', "*,
EFFECTIVITY: All
, ,
Page 508
61-10-00

,,
Jan 31/22
', ,

PC-6
MANUAL
MAINTENANCE
#
#
##
##
! #
# #
#
"##
#! #
#

#
#! #
# #! #
Dynamic Balancer and Phazor

&"!( "$("( '#$(
Figure 502
%$( (
(
EFFECTIVITY: ( All
((
Page 509
61-10-00
$(31/22
Jan (

PC-6
MAINTENANCE
MANUAL

$ $
$ $ $ $ $ $
$ #$ $!
$ $ !$
$
!
!
!
!
!

$

!

!

!
!
!
$ $

!$ $ $
Propeller Bulkhead Balance Weight Locations

" Figure " " "
503
! " !
EFFECTIVITY:!All
!

Page 510
61-10-00 " !
Jan 31/22
" !
$("1

PC-6
' 1
MAINTENANCE )1
MANUAL
PROPELLER DYNAMIC BALANCE CHART/DATA SHEET

! !1 *1 1!% &1# %1
-=$=!)BI'=-!2I :I I 7*.7'I'=-!2I :I I

Aircraft Serial No. Engine Serial No.

Propeller Serial :I

=:;'23'=I'=-!2I No. I Date
!B'I
Name Signature
!5'I III IIIIIIIIII II II IIII IIIIII I IIIIII II I -*7!BD=(I II
!2!7$'I -@I !$$';B!#2'IF+'8I I -8&-$!B-:7I -@I I :=I 2(@@I!7&I$2:$0I;:@-B-:7I .7&-$!B.:7I -@I '==!B.$I
NOTE: Balance is acceptable when IPS indication is 0.2 or less and clock position indication is erratic.
:7&-B-:7I &2'I !G-6E6I ;=:;'24'=I I

Condition Idle Maximum propeller RPM
,'$0I =!$1-7*I ABI 7&I =&I B+I B+I
Check
3:$0I
Tracking 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th
;:@-B-:7I
Clock position
I
IPS -7&-$!B-:7I
indication
'-*+BI $:=='%B-:7I
Weight correction required
='<D-='&I
:$!B.:7I
Location Weights '-*+B@I
installed
.7@B!24'&I
-,.01
Chart B 4
I I
"'+(*24/'-3+/'&4
(/%,04

! 4
4
4 I ! 4
4 4

-+/01 1
4
)$.14 4
Propeller Dynamic Balance Chart/Data Sheet

>:;'42'>I H7!6/$I !2"9$'I +!?"B"I +''CI
Figure 504
-*D='I I
#4 All32I

EFFECTIVITY:
!*'I
Page 511 I

61-10-00 Jan!=I
31/22 I
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 512
61-10-00 Jan 31/22
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLER BLADES - REPAIRS
WARNING: BLADE FAILURE CAN OCCUR IF DAMAGE IS NOT REPAIRED. FATIGUE CRACKS CAN
START FROM THE AREA OF THE DAMAGE.
1. General
Minor damage of small nicks, gouges or scratches can be repaired by blending, if the damage is not
more than the permitted repair tolerances.
If the damage is more than the permitted repair tolerances - Reject the propeller.
Several repairs may be made to a blade, but the repairs must not make a continuous line across the
blade.
If a series of repairs make a continuous line across the blade - Reject the propeller.
If larger nicks, gouges, scratches or cracks are found which may affect the structural strength, balance
or efficient operation of the propeller - Reject the propeller.
The blade tips must not be cropped (shortened) during repairs.
Part No. Designation Remarks
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
STARTER
B. Edge Repairs
(1) Refer to Hartzell Service Letter HC-SL-61-324 and the Hartzell Propeller Owner’s Manual.
C. Blade Surface Repairs
(1) Refer to Hartzell Service Letter HC-SL-61-324 and the Hartzell Propeller Owner’s Manual.
D. Close Up
STARTER
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 801
61-10-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 802
61-10-00 Jul 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLER - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This task gives the procedure to remove and install the propeller.
Tool No. Description Remarks
110.85.06.008 Puller, slip ring

513.61.09.005 Propeller stand
- Torque wrench 0 to 200 Nm
(0 to 1800 lbf in)
- Protractor, propeller blade or
- Clinometer
B. Expendable Parts

61-11-01, Fig. 01 O-ring
P02-001 Lockwire A/R

A/R Ref. Hartzell Service Advisory
P04-009 Grease No 17 for other approved
greases
P04-016 Grease A/R Ref. Hartzell Service Advisory
No 17 for other approved
greases
P04-045 Grease A/R Ref. Hartzell SL HC-SL-61-
366 <1>
NOTE: <1> Hartzell recommend grease (Material No. P04-045) as the preferred alternative.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
61-10-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Procedures
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT YOU OBEY THE INSTRUCTIONS IN HARTZELL SERVICE LETTER
HC-SL-61-366 WHEN YOU LUBRICATE THE PROPELLER BOLTS WITH GREASE.
YOU MUST DO A CHECK OF THE LUBRICATION LABEL ON THE PROPELLER AND:
• DO NOT MIX DIFFERENT SPECIFICATIONS AND/OR BRANDS OF GREASE

EXCEPT AS NOTED IN THE ACCOMPLISHMENT INSTRUCTIONS SECTION OF
HARTZELL SERVICE LETTER HC-SL-61-366.
A. Job Set Up
(1) Remove the upper and lower engine cowls PT1 and PB1.
(2) Remove the screws and washers and remove the propeller spinner dome.
(2) Remove the cotter pin (10), washer (11) and pin (3). Discard the cotter pin.
(3) Remove the cotter pin (1), nut (13), washer (14), bush (15) and bolt (2).
(4) Remove the reversing lever (12).
(5) Remove the carbon block (9) from the slip ring.
(6) Attach the puller (16) and pull the slip ring fully forward to touch the rear face of the
propeller bulkhead.
(7) Install a sling on the propeller.
(8) Remove the lockwire from the bolts (7).
(9) Remove the bolts (7) and washers (8).
(10) Remove the propeller from the engine.
(11) Remove and discard the O-ring (15).
(12) Put the propeller on a stand with the cylinder upwards. Let the oil drain and then install a
blank.
(13) Remove the slip ring puller and sling from the propeller.
(1) Attach the puller (16) and pull the slip ring fully forward to touch the rear face of the
propeller bulkhead.
(2) Install a new O-ring (15) on the propeller shaft.
(3) Install the sling and put the propeller in position on the engine flange.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
61-10-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

WHEN YOU LUBRICATE WITH GREASE.
(4) Lubricate the bolts (7) with grease (Material No. P04-009, P04-016 or P04-045).
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE CHAMFERED SIDE OF THE WASHER FACES THE
BOLT HEAD.
(5) Install the attachment bolts (7) and washers (8), with the chamfered side of the washer
next to the bolt head.
(6) Torque the bolts in three steps as follows:
(a) To 54 Nm (480 lbf in.), (Ref. Fig. 402, Sequence A).
(b) To 108 Nm (960 lbf in.), (Ref Fig. 402, Sequence A).
(c) To between 136 and 142 Nm (1200 and 1260 lbf in.), (Ref. Fig 402, Sequence B).
(7) Safety the bolts with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(8) Remove the sling and puller.
(9) Put the carbon block (9) in position.
WARNING: YOU MUST INSTALL THE REVERSING LEVER (12) IN THE CORRECT
POSITION BELOW THE GUIDE PIN OF THE GUIDE PIN BRACKET ASSY (17).
(10) Put the reversing lever (12) in position.
(11) Put the low pitch switch control rod in position.
(12) Install the nut (5) and washer (6).
(14) Install the pin (3) and washer (11).
(15) Safety the pin with a new cotter pin (10).
(16) Install the bolt (2), bush (15), washer (14) and nut (13).
(18) Make sure the side clearance between the beta-ring and the carbon block (9) is between
0,03 and 0,25 mm (0.001 and 0.01 in). If necessary, remove material from, or replace, the
carbon block (9) to get the correct clearance.
D. Job Close Up
(1) Install the spinner dome to the bulkhead assembly. Align the marks on the spinner with the
marks on the bulkhead.
NOTE: The spinner assembly (plate, bulkhead and dome) is balanced as a unit. The
components are not interchangeable.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
61-10-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Do a balance check (Ref. 61-10-00, Page Block 501).
(3) Do a ground run (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(4) Check for oil leaks from the propeller - No leaks are acceptable.
(6) Install the engine cowls PT1 and PB1.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
61-10-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. BOLT
3. PIN
1. COTTER PIN
15. BUSH
14. WASHER
13. NUT
12. REVERSING LEVER

A
11.WASHER
4. COTTER PIN
5. NUT
10. COTTER PIN
A 6. WASHER
9. CARBON BLOCK
B
7. BOLT
8. WASHER
15. O-RING
17. GUIDE PIN

BRACKET
ASSEMBLY
B
16. PULLER
12. REVERSING LEVER
B
6410
Propeller - Removal / Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 405
61-10-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1
6 4
8 7
3 5
2
SEQUENCE A
1
8 2
7 3
6 4
5
SEQUENCE B
Propeller - Bolt Tightening Sequence

Figure 402
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 406
61-10-01 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLER CONTROL-CABLE ASSEMBLY - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This Topic gives the procedures to remove and install a propeller control cable P/N 115.75.06.265.

- Hot Air Gun (Max. 150° C / 302° F) Local supply
B. Expendable Parts

Required for aircraft up to
944.87.31.008 Grommet, MS35489-9
MSN 977 (FR1)
Required for aircraft MSN 978
917.99.88.702 Back Shell, STR, 152-42-6
and up (FR1 feed-through)
940.17.00.341 Cotter Pin Propeller lever connection
940.17.00.343 Cotter Pin Propeller governor connection
P01-011 Solvent
Required for aircraft up to
P08-069 Sealant, Gurisil
MSN 977 (FR1)
P09-017 Cable Ties, Heat Resistant
Required for aircraft MSN 978
P09-057 Adhesive Tape
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) Remove the engine cowling PT1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(2) Open the engine cowlings PL1 and PR1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(3) Make sure the propeller control lever is set to the FEATHER position.
STARTER GENERATOR (BATTERY BUS).
EFFECTIVITY: Cable Assy P/N 115.75.06.265 CONFIG 1

Page 401
61-20-00 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Many of the removed parts are required for the installation procedure. Keep all
removed parts unless told to discard them.
(1) In the cockpit, remove and discard the cotter pin (1).
(2) Remove the pin (3) and the washers (2).
(3) Loosen the locknut (5) and remove the clevis (4) from the cable (6).
(4) Remove the locknut (5) from the cable (6).
(5) Remove the nuts (11), washers (10), screws (7) and (8) and the clamp plates (9).
NOTE: The clamp assembly is located on the support beam behind the pilot’s
instrument panel. Access is from below the instrument panel.
(6) At the propeller governor, remove and discard the cotter pin (25).
(7) Remove the nut (24), washer (23) and bolt (27) to disconnect the rod-end (22) from the
propeller governor. Collect the bush (26).
(8) Loosen the locknuts (19) and (21).
(9) Remove the linkage (20) and the locknut (19) from the cable (6).
(10) Remove the rod-end (22) from the linkage (20).
NOTE: You can leave the locknut (21) on the rod-end (22).
(11) Remove the nuts (18), washers (17), bolts (15) and the clamp plate (16).
(12) Cut and remove all cable ties which attach electrical wires to the cable (6).
(13) Carefully remove the insulation sleeve (14) from the cable (6).
(14) Remove the cable at FR1:
(a) Aircraft up to MSN 977:
NOTE: The cable is sealed where it passes through the grommet in FR1.
1 Carefully pull the cable (6) through FR1. If necessary use a suitable cutting
tool to cut the sealant.
2 Remove the grommet (13) and all sealant from FR1 and the cable (6).
(b) Aircraft MSN 978 and up:
NOTE: The cable is sealed with a heat-shrunk back-shell at the feed-through (12).
tool to cut the back shell.
2 Remove the back shell from the feed-through (12) and the cable (6).

Page 402
61-20-00 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(15) Remove and discard the cable (6).
(16) Make sure the feed-through (12) has no debris and is clean.
(17) Make sure the grommets (13) in the engine frames are correctly installed and serviceable.
(1) Aircraft up to MSN 977:
(a) Use absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with solvent (Material No.
P01-011) to clean the area around the hole in FR1. Remove all old sealant.
(b) Install the new grommet (13) in the hole in FR1.
(c) In the cockpit, put the engine end of the cable assy (6) through FR1.
(d) Put the cable (6) through the grommets (13) in the engine frames so it is
approximately in the installed position.
(e) Loosely install the locknut (5) and the clevis (4). Make sure the clevis is in safety.
(f) Connect the clevis (4) to the propeller control lever with the pin (3) and washers (2).
(g) Hold the parts in position with a new cotter pin (1) but do not fully install the cotter
pin.
NOTE: The installation of the cotter pin (1) is completed after adjustment of the
cable end fittings.
(h) Put the bracket (9) in the installed position and install the two bolts (7), washers (10)
and nuts (11).
(2) Aircraft MSN 978 and up:
(a) In the cockpit, put the engine end of the cable assy (6) through the FR1 feed-
through (12).
(b) Slide the new back shell (P/N 917.99.88.702) onto the cable (6) and move it to a
position forward of the FR1 feed-through (12).
(c) Put the cable (6) through the grommets (13) in the engine frames so it is
(d) Loosely install the locknut (5) and the clevis (4). Make sure the clevis is in safety.
(e) Temporarily attach the clevis (4) to the propeller control lever with the pin (3).
(f) Put the bracket (9) in the installed position and install the two bolts (7), washers (10)
and nuts (11).
(3) Put the insulation sleeve (14) on the cable (6).
(4) Install the linkage (20) on the cable (6). Make sure the cable is in safety.
(5) Install the rod-end (22) in the linkage (20). Make sure the rod-end is in safety.

Page 403
61-20-00 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Tighten the locknuts (19) and (21) with your fingers.
(7) Install the bush (26) in the rod-end (22).
(8) Temporarily connect the rod-end (22) to the propeller governor with the bolt (27).
(9) Put the cable (6) in the installed position and install the clamp plates (9) with the screws (7)
and (8), the washers (10) and the nuts (11). Do not fully tighten the nuts (11).
(10) Put the cable (6) in the installed position and install the clamp plate (16) with the bolts (15),
the washers (17) and the nuts (18). Do not fully tighten the nuts (18).
(11) Make sure the outer casing of the cable (6) is in the correctly installed position.
(12) On aircraft MSN 978 and up only:
(a) At the engine and cockpit sides of the FR1 feed-through (12), make marks on the
cable (6) to indicate where you will apply the hot melt tape. Make the marks
approximately 25 mm (1 in.) on each side of the feed-through to allow for movement
of the cable.
(b) Remove the nuts (11), the washers (10) and the bolts (7) to release the bracket (9).
(c) Remove the pin (3) to disconnect the cable (6) from the propeller control lever.
(d) Pull the cable (6) forwards to get access to the marked area of the cable.
(e) Use absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with solvent (Material No.
P01-011) to clean the marked area of the cable (6).
(f) Let the solvent dry.
(g) Wrap adhesive tape (Material No. P09-057) around the marked area of the cable
(6).
(h) Pull the cable (6) backwards until the adhesive tape is in the FR1 feed-through (12)
and extends approximately 25 mm (1 in.) forward of the feed-through.
(i) Install the bracket (9) with the two bolts (7), washers (10) and nuts (11).
(j) Connect the clevis (4) to the propeller control lever with the pin (3) and washers (2).
(k) Hold the parts in position with a new cotter pin (1) but do not fully install the cotter
pin.
NOTE: The installation of the cotter pin (1) is completed after adjustment of the
cable end fittings.
(13) Connect the clevis (4) to the propeller control lever with the pin (3), washers (2) and a new
cotter pin (1).
(14) Hold the parts in position with a new cotter pin (1) but do not fully install the cotter pin.
NOTE: The installation of the cotter pin (1) is completed after adjustment of the cable.
(15) Make sure the clevis (4) is in safety and tighten the locknut (5).

Page 404
61-20-00 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(16) Remove the bolt (27) to disconnect the rod-end (22) from the propeller governor. Collect
the bush (26).
(17) At the clamp in the cockpit, tighten the nuts (11).
(18) At the clamp on the engine, pull the cable (6) to remove slack then tighten the nuts (18).
(19) Make sure the propeller governor is set to the feather position.
(20) Adjust (turn) the rod-end (22) until you can easily install the bolt (27) with the bush (26).
(22) Make sure the ends of the linkage (20) are in safety then tighten the locknuts (19) and
(21).
(23) Adjust the propeller control cable as follows:
(a) Move the propeller control lever to the maximum position. When you do this, make
sure the lever drops down from the feather end stop and locks in position at the
maximum end stop.
(b) Make sure that the speed adjusting lever contacts the maximum stop on the
propeller governor.
(c) Move the propeller control lever to the feather position.
(d) Make sure that the speed adjusting lever contacts the feather stop on the propeller
governor.
CAUTION: IF YOU ADJUST THE CABLE END FITTINGS YOU MUST MAKE SURE
THEY ARE IN SAFETY.
(e) If necessary, adjust the rod-end (22) of the propeller control cable at the propeller
governor connection to get the correct adjustment.
NOTE: If you cannot get sufficient adjustment at the propeller governor you can adjust
the clevis (4) at the control lever in the cockpit. If necessary, you can also move
the complete cable assy (6) at the clamp plates (9) and (16).
(f) Make sure the adjusted end fitting is in safety.
NOTE: The end fittings have inspection holes. Use a piece of lockwire to make
sure the parts have full engagement.
(25) At the control lever in the cockpit, complete the installation of the cotter pin (1).

Page 405
61-20-00 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) At FR1, apply Gurisil (Material No. P08-069) to seal all gaps between the cable (6)
and the grommet (13).
(27) Aircraft MSN 978 and up:
(a) At the FR1 feed-through (12), push the back shell over the feed-through.
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY MORE THAN 150 DEG C OF HEAT TO THE CABLE AND
FEED-THROUGH. PROTECT ADJACENT CONTROL CABLES AND
ELECTRICAL WIRING FROM HEAT.
NOTE: The back shell will heat shrink at between 110 and 150 deg. C.
(b) Apply heat to the back shell to shrink it in position.
(28) Attach electrical wires, as necessary, to the cable (6) with cable ties (Material No. P09-
017).
D. Test
STARTER GENERATOR (BATTERY BUS)
(2) Do the checks for minimum and maximum propeller speed (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block
501, Check 2).
E. Close Up
(2) Close the engine cowlings PL1 and PR1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(3) Install the engine cowling PT1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).

Page 406
61-20-00 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
E
C B
F D
D 1
2
2
4 3
7
8
5
6
9
B
C C 9
UP TO MSN 978
MSN 977 AND UP 10
11
12
13
FR 1 10
D
FR 1
11 D
13
G 13
15
G
BACK SHELL 16 14
E 6
19
CABLE TAPE 17
20 18
27 21
F 26
22
23
25 24
6796
Propeller Control Cable - Removal / Installation

Figure 401

Page 407
61-20-00 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

Page 408
61-20-00 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PROPELLER CONTROL-CABLE ASSEMBLY - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This Topic gives the procedures to remove and install the Cable Assy P/N 941.94.11.432.

Torque Wrench
904.10.89.105 Or equivalent
(1 to 5 Nm / 9 to 44 lbf. in.)
Torque Wrench
904.10.89.141 Or equivalent
(4 to 20 Nm / 35 to 177 lbf. in.)
- Hot Air Gun (Max. 150° C / 302° F) Local supply
B. Expendable Parts
944.87.31.008 Grommet, MS35489-9 Required for aircraft up to

MSN 977 (FR1)
917.99.88.702 Back Shell, STR, 152-42-6 Required for aircraft MSN 978
940.17.00.341 Cotter Pin Propeller lever connection
940.17.00.343 Cotter Pin Propeller governor connection
P01-011 Solvent
P02-006 Lockwire Heat resistant
P08-069 Sealant, Gurisil Required for aircraft up to
MSN 977 (FR1)
P09-017 Cable Ties Heat resistant
P09-057 Adhesive Tape Required for aircraft MSN 978
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) Open the engine cowlings PL1 and PR1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).

Page 401
61-20-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Removal (Ref. Figs. 401 and 402)
(1) Disconnect the Propeller Control-Cable Assy (Ref. Fig. 401):
(a) In the cockpit, remove and discard the cotter pin (1).
(b) Remove the pin (3) and the washers (2).
(c) Loosen the locknut (5) and remove the clevis (4) from the cable (6).
(d) Remove the nuts (11), washers (10) and screws (7) to release the bracket (9).
NOTE: The support bracket is located on the support beam behind the pilot’s
instrument panel. Access is from below the instrument panel.
(e) At the propeller governor, remove and discard the cotter pin (25).
(f) Remove the nut (24), washer (23) and bolt (27) to disconnect the rod-end (22) from
the propeller governor. Collect the bush (26).
(g) Loosen the locknuts (19) and (21).
(h) Remove the linkage (20) and the locknut (19) from the cable (6).
(i) Remove the nuts (18), washers (17) and special bolts (15) to release the bracket
(16).
(j) Cut and remove all cable ties which attach electrical wires to the cable (6).
(2) Remove the Forward Bracket from the Propeller Control-Cable Assy (Ref. Fig 402):
NOTE: This is required to permit the removal of the cable through FR1 and the engine
frames, and to remove the insulation sleeve. The insulation sleeve is kept for
installation on the new cable assy.
(a) Remove the locknut (6) from the cable assy (1).
(b) Carefully pull the wiper seal (5) from the cable assy (1).
(c) Remove the two forward locknuts (3) from the cable assy (1).
(d) Remove the forward bracket (4) from the cable assy (1).
(e) Remove the two rear locknuts (3) from the cable assy (1).
(f) Carefully remove the insulation sleeve (2) from the cable (1).
(3) Remove the Propeller Control-Cable Assy from the Engine Frames (Ref. Fig 401):
(a) Carefully pull the cable (6) rearwards through the grommets (13) in the engine
frames.

Page 402
61-20-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Make sure the grommets (13) in the engine frames stay correctly installed and are
serviceable
(4) Remove the Propeller Control-Cable Assy from FR1 (Ref. Fig. 401):
NOTE: The cable is sealed where it passes through the grommet in FR1.
tool to cut the sealant.
2 Remove the grommet (13) and all sealant from FR1 and the cable (6).
NOTE: The cable is sealed with a heat-shrunk back-shell at the feed-through (12).
tool to cut the back shell.
2 Remove the back shell from the feed-through (12) and the cable (6).
(5) Remove and discard the cable (6).
(6) Make sure the feed-through (12) has no debris and is clean.
C. Installation (Ref. Figs. 401 and 402)
(1) Remove the Forward Bracket from the Propeller Control-Cable Assy (Ref. Fig 402):
NOTE: This is required to permit the installation of the new cable through FR1 and the
engine frames, and to install the insulation sleeve.
(a) Remove the locknut (6) from the cable assy (1).
(b) Carefully pull the wiper seal (5) from the cable assy (1).
(c) Remove the two forward locknuts (3) from the cable assy (1).
(d) Remove the forward bracket (4) from the cable assy (1).
(e) Remove the two rear locknuts (3) from the cable assy (1).
(2) Put the Propeller Control-Cable Assy in the Installed Position (Ref. Fig. 401):
CAUTION: THE MINIMUM BEND RADIUS FOR THE CABLE ASSY IS 15 CM (5.9 IN.).
(i) Use absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with solvent
(Material No. P01-011) to clean the area around the hole in FR1. Remove all
old sealant.
(ii) Install the new grommet (13) in the hole in FR1.

Page 403
61-20-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(iii) In the cockpit, put the engine end of the cable assy (6) through FR1.
(iv) Put the cable (6) through the grommets (13) in the engine frames so it is
(v) Loosely install the locknut (5) and the clevis (4). Make sure the clevis is in
safety.
(vi) Connect the clevis (4) to the propeller control lever with the pin (3) and
washers (2).
(vii) Hold the parts in position with a new cotter pin (1) but do not fully install the
cotter pin.
NOTE: The installation of the cotter pin (1) is completed after adjustment of
the cable end fittings.
(viii) Put the bracket (9) in the installed position and install the two bolts (7),
(i) In the cockpit, put the engine end of the cable assy (6) through the FR1 feed-
through (12).
(ii) Slide the new back shell (P/N 917.99.88.702) onto the cable (6) and move it
to a position forward of the FR1 feed-through (12).
(iii) Put the cable (6) through the grommets (13) in the engine frames so it is
(iv) Loosely install the locknut (5) and the clevis (4). Make sure the clevis is in
safety.
(v) Temporarily attach the clevis (4) to the propeller control lever with the pin (3).
(vi) Put the bracket (9) in the installed position and install the two bolts (7),
(3) Install the Insulation Sleeve and Forward Bracket on the Propeller Control-Cable (Ref. Fig.
402):
(a) Slide the insulation sleeve (2) onto the cable (1) so it is aft of the installed position of
the bracket (4).
(b) Loosely install the two rear locknuts (3) on the cable (1).
(c) Install the bracket (4) on the cable (1).
(d) Loosely install the two forward locknuts (3) on the cable (1).
(e) Carefully put the wiper seal (5) on the cable (1) and push it firmly onto the fixed
sleeve.
(f) Loosely install the locknut (6) on the cable (1).

Page 404
61-20-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Continue the Installation of the Control-Cable Assy (Ref. Fig. 401):
(a) Install the brackets (16) and (28) with the special bolts (15), washers (17) and nuts
(18).
(b) Torque tighten the nuts (18) to between 3,62 and 4,07 Nm (32 to 36 lbf. in.).
(c) Install the linkage (20) complete with the rod-end (22) on the cable (6). Make sure
the cable is in safety.
(d) Tighten the locknut (19) with your fingers.
(e) Temporarily connect the rod-end (22) to the propeller governor with the bush (26)
and bolt (27).
(f) Remove slack between the two brackets (9) and (16) by adjusting the locknuts (8).
(g) Make sure the outer casing of the cable (6) is in the correctly installed position.
(h) On aircraft MSN 978 and up only:
(i) At the engine and cockpit sides of the FR1 feed-through (12), make marks on
the cable (6) to indicate where you will apply the hot melt tape. Make the
marks approximately 25 mm (1 in.) on each side of the feed-through to allow
for movement of the cable.
(ii) Remove the nuts (11), the washers (10) and the bolts (7) to release the
bracket (9).
(iii) Remove the pin (3) to disconnect the cable (6) from the propeller control
lever.
(iv) Pull the cable (6) forwards to get access to the marked area of the cable.
(v) Use absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) made moist with solvent
(Material No. P01-011) to clean the marked area of the cable (6).
(vi) Let the solvent dry.
(vii) Wrap adhesive tape (Material No. P09-057) around the marked area of the
cable (6).
(viii) Pull the cable (6) backwards until the adhesive tape is in the FR1 feed-
through (12) and extends approximately 25 mm (1 in.) forward of the feed-
through.
(ix) Install the bracket (9) with the two bolts (7), washers (10) and nuts (11).
(x) Connect the clevis (4) to the propeller control lever with the pin (3) and
washers (2).
(xi) Hold the parts in position with a new cotter pin (1) but do not fully install the
cotter pin.
NOTE: The installation of the cotter pin (1) is completed after adjustment of
the cable end fittings.

Page 405
61-20-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(i) Make sure the clevis (4) is in safety and torque tighten the locknut (5) to between 6
and 7 Nm (53.1 and 62.0 lbf. in.).
(j) At the bracket (9), torque tighten the locknuts (8) at each side of the bracket to
between 10 and 11 Nm (88.5 to 97.4 lbf. in.).
(k) Remove the bolt (27) to disconnect the rod-end (22) from the propeller governor.
Collect the bush (26).
(l) Make sure the propeller governor is set to the feather position.
(m) Adjust (turn) the linkage (20) and/or the rod-end (22) until you can easily install the
bolt (27) with the bush (26).
(n) Install the washer (23) and the nut (24).
(o) Make sure the ends of the linkage (20) are in safety then torque tighten the locknuts
(19) and (21) to between 6 and 7 Nm (53.1 and 62.0 lbf. in.).
(p) At the bracket (16), torque tighten the locknuts (8) at each side of the bracket to
between 10 and 11 Nm (88.5 to 97.4 lbf. in.).
(q) Adjust the propeller control cable as follows:
(i) Move the propeller control lever to the maximum position. When you do this,
make sure the lever drops down from the feather end stop and locks in
position at the maximum end stop.
(ii) Make sure that the speed adjusting lever contacts the maximum stop on the
propeller governor.
(iii) Move the propeller control lever to the feather position.
(iv) Make sure that the speed adjusting lever contacts the feather stop on the
propeller governor.
CAUTION: IF YOU ADJUST THE CABLE END FITTINGS YOU MUST MAKE
SURE THEY ARE IN SAFETY.
(v) If necessary, adjust the rod-end (22) of the propeller control cable at the
propeller governor connection to get the correct adjustment.
NOTE: If you cannot get sufficient adjustment at the propeller governor you
can adjust the clevis (4) at the control lever in the cockpit. You can
also move the complete cable assy by adjusting the locknuts (8) at
the brackets (9) and (16). If you do this, torque tighten the nuts (8)
to between 10 and 11 Nm (88.5 to 97.4 lbf. in.).
(vi) Make sure the adjusted end fitting is in safety.
NOTE: The end fittings have inspection holes. Use a piece of lockwire to
make sure the parts have full engagement.
(r) Safety the nut (24) with a new cotter pin (25).
(s) At the control lever in the cockpit, complete the installation of the cotter pin (1).

Page 406
61-20-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(t) Safety the locknuts (8) at the brackets (9) and (16) with lockwire (Material No. P02-
006).
(u) Aircraft up to MSN 977:
(i) At FR1, apply Gurisil (Material No. P08-069) to seal all gaps between the
cable (6) and the grommet (13).
(v) Aircraft MSN 978 and up:
(i) At the FR1 feed-through (12), push the back shell over the feed-through.
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY MORE THAN 150 DEG C OF HEAT TO THE CABLE
AND FEED-THROUGH. PROTECT ADJACENT CONTROL CABLES
AND ELECTRICAL WIRING FROM HEAT.
NOTE: The back shell will heat shrink at between 110 and 150 deg. C.
(w) Apply heat to the back shell to shrink it in position.
(x) Attach electrical wires, as necessary, to the cable (6) with cable ties (Material No.
P09-017).
D. Test
(2) Do the checks for minimum and maximum propeller speed (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block
501, Check 2).
E. Close-up
(3) Close the engine cowlings PL1 and PR1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).

Page 407
61-20-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
E
C B
F D 1
2
D 2
4
3
C 8
UP TO
MSN 977
9
B D
8
13
FR 1
C 13
MSN 978
AND UP
12 16
10
11
D FR 1
E 8 14
15
8
13 G 28
6 17
18
19
27
G
F 21
20 BACK SHELL
26
22
23
25 24
SB 2739
CABLE TAPE
Propeller Control-Cable Assy - Removal / Installation

Figure 401

Page 408
61-20-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
4 3
6
SB 2740
Forward Bracket - Removal / Installation

Figure 402

Page 409
61-20-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

Page 410
61-20-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LOW-PITCH WARNING MICROSWITCH - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This Topic gives the procedures to remove and install the low-pitch warning microswitch for the
propeller low-pitch indicating system.
110.88.07.065 Safety Clips Circuit breaker hold open

904.10.89.105 Torque Wrench (1-5 Nm/10-50 lbf. in.) Or equivalent
P02-001 Lockwire
P09-014 Cable Ties
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up

ANNUNCIATOR PANEL (BATTERY BUS)
ANNUNCIATOR PANEL (GENERATOR BUS).
(1) Remove the cable ties from the microswitch electrical wires.
(2) Disconnect the microswitch electrical wires at the two snap connectors (1) and (2).
(3) Remove the nut (5) from the microswitch arm (12).
(4) Remove the microswitch arm (12) from the lever (6).
(5) Remove the nut (7), washer (8) and switch arm (9) from the microswitch (3).
(6) Remove the lockwire from the nut (10).
(7) Remove the nut (10), washer (11) and microswitch (3) from the bracket (4).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
61-42-01 May 31/14
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(1) Put the microswitch (3) in position in the bracket (4).
(2) Align the notches on the microswitch (3) with the holes in the bracket (4) and install the
(3) Safety the nut (10) with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
CAUTION: DO NOT FORCE THE SWITCH ARM ONTO THE MICROSWITCH SHAFT. YOU
CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE SWITCH ARM AND/OR THE SHAFT.
NOTE: Because the microswitch shaft and switch arm have tapered splines, you cannot
install the switch arm incorrectly.
(4) Install the switch arm (9) on the shaft of the microswitch (3) so that the switch arm (9) is
positioned approximately in the correct direction (Ref. Fig. 401, View B).
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY OPERATING PRESSURE TO THE SWITCH ARM WHEN YOU
DO THE ADJUSTMENT. YOU CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE ADJUSTING
MECHANISM.
(5) Adjust the position of the switch arm (9) as follows:
(a) Loosen the locknut (13) on the switch arm worm-gear.
(b) Turn the worm gear adjuster (14) so that there is a gap of between 10 and 11 mm
(0.39 and 0.43 in.) between the switch arm (9) and the bracket (4).
(c) Tighten the worm gear locknut (13).
(d) Safety the locknut (13) with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(6) Install the washer (8) and nut (7) on the microswitch (3).
(7) Torque the nut (7) to between 2,8 and 3,4 Nm (25 and 30 lbf. in.).
(8) Engage the microswitch arm (12) in the lever (6) and install the nut (5).
(9) Connect the microswitch electrical wires to the aircraft wiring with the snap connectors (1)
and (2) as follows:
(a) Connect wire 1-20 to aircraft wire E92A22.
(b) Connect wire 3-20 to aircraft wire E93A22N.
(10) Make sure the four not used wires are capped and stowed.
(11) Install cable ties (Material No. P09-014) on the electrical wires as necessary.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
61-42-01 May 31/14
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Close Up
(1) Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breakers:

ANNUNCIATOR PANEL (BATTERY BUS)
ANNUNCIATOR PANEL (GENERATOR BUS).
(3) Do the check of the propeller low pitch warning in the Powerplant Adjustment/Test (Ref.
71-00-00, Page Block 501).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
61-42-01 May 31/14
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
3
A
11
12 10
8 4
10 - 11 mm 5
B
3
C
C
7 14 9
3
4 D
D
13
6760
Low-Pitch Warning Microswitch - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
61-42-01 May 31/14
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 71 - POWERPLANT
Chapter Chapter
Section Section
List of Effective 1 Feb 28/20 71-00-00 (Cont’d) 401 Feb 28/20
Pages 2 Feb 28/20 402 Feb 28/20
403 Feb 28/20
Table of Contents 1 Feb 28/10 404 Feb 28/20
2 Feb 28/10 405 Feb 28/20
406 Feb 28/20
71-00-00 1 Jun 14/92 407 Feb 28/20
2 Jun 14/91 408 Feb 28/20
3 Jun 14/91 409 Feb 28/20
4 Jun 14/91 410 Feb 28/20
411 Feb 28/20
CONFIG 1 201 Jul 30/15 412 Feb 28/20
202 Jul 30/15 413 Feb 28/20
203 Jul 30/15 414 Feb 28/20
204 Jul 30/15 415 Feb 28/20
205 Jul 30/15 416 Feb 28/20
206 Jul 30/15 417 Feb 28/20
207 Jul 30/15 418 Feb 28/20
208 Jul 30/15 419 Feb 28/20
209 Jul 30/15 420 Feb 28/20
210 Jul 30/15 421 Feb 28/20
211 Jul 30/15 422 Feb 28/20
212 Jul 30/15 423 Feb 28/20
213 Jul 30/15 424 Feb 28/20
214 Jul 30/15 425 Feb 28/20
215 Jul 30/15 426 Feb 28/20
216 Jul 30/15 427 Feb 28/20
428 Feb 28/20
CONFIG 2 201 Jul 30/15 429 Feb 28/20
202 Jul 30/15 430 Feb 28/20
203 Jul 30/15 431 Feb 28/20
204 Jul 30/15 432 Feb 28/20
205 Jul 30/15 433 Feb 28/20
206 Jul 30/15 434 Feb 28/20
207 Jul 30/15 435 Feb 28/20
208 Jul 30/15 436 Feb 28/20
209 Jul 30/15 437 Feb 28/20
210 Jul 30/15 438 Feb 28/20
211 Jul 30/15 439 Feb 28/20
212 Jul 30/15 440 Feb 28/20
213 Jul 30/15
214 Jul 30/15 501 Feb 28/20
215 Jul 30/15 502 Feb 28/20
216 Jul 30/15 503 Feb 28/20
Page 1
71-LEP Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Chapter Chapter
Section Section
71-00-00 (Cont’d) 504 Feb 28/20 71-00-00 (Cont’d) 552 Feb 28/20
505 Feb 28/20 553 Feb 28/20
506 Feb 28/20 554 Feb 28/20
507 Feb 28/20 555 Feb 28/20
508 Feb 28/20 556 Feb 28/20
509 Feb 28/20 557 Feb 28/20
510 Feb 28/20 558 Feb 28/20
511 Feb 28/20 559 Feb 28/20
512 Feb 28/20 560 Feb 28/20
513 Feb 28/20
514 Feb 28/20 701 Mar 14/98
515 Feb 28/20 702 Mar 14/98
516 Feb 28/20 703 Mar 14/98
517 Feb 28/20 704 Mar 14/98
518 Feb 28/20 705 Mar 14/98
519 Feb 28/20 706 Mar 14/98
520 Feb 28/20 707 Mar 14/98
521 Feb 28/20 708 Mar 14/98
522 Feb 28/20
523 Feb 28/20 71-10-00 201 Nov 30/03
524 Feb 28/20 202 Nov 30/03
525 Feb 28/20 203 Nov 30/03
526 Feb 28/20
527 Feb 28/20 71-12-00 1 Mar 14/95
528 Feb 28/20 2 Mar 14/95
529 Feb 28/20 3 Mar 14/95
530 Feb 28/20
531 Feb 28/20 701 Mar 14/95
532 Feb 28/20 702 Mar 14/95
533 Feb 28/20
534 Feb 28/20
535 Feb 28/20
536 Feb 28/20
537 Feb 28/20
538 Feb 28/20
539 Feb 28/20
540 Feb 28/20
541 Feb 28/20
542 Feb 28/20
543 Feb 28/20
544 Feb 28/20
545 Feb 28/20
546 Feb 28/20
547 Feb 28/20
548 Feb 28/20
549 Feb 28/20
550 Feb 28/20
551 Feb 28/20
Page 2
71-LEP Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 71 - POWERPLANT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
POWERPLANT 71-00-00
Maintenance Practices CONFIG 1 201 MSN 101
thru 947
Maintenance Practices CONFIG 2 201 MSN 948
and up
Cleaning / Painting 701 All
COWLING 71-10-00
AIR INTAKE SAND FILTER INSTALLATION 71-12-00
sand filters
Cleaning / Painting 701 Aircraft with
sand filters
Page 1
71-TOC Feb 28/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
71-TOC Feb 28/10
'$PILATUSEF"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWERPLANT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
I The powerplant in the PC-6 B2-H2 or B2-H4 has the following components:
A Pratt and Whitney of Canada (P&WC) PT6A-27 free turbine engine.
Engine mounted accessories.
An engine mount system.
A three blade, variable pitch propeller.
Engine cowls.
A drains system.
2. Engine
The compressor has three axial and a single centrifugal stage which give a compression ratio of 7: 1. A
compressor bleed valve is installed to prevent compressor stall at low engine speeds.
The combustion section of the engine has an annular combustion chamber with 14 simplex fuel
nozzles. The combustion chamber turns the air through 180 degrees at the inlet and again through 180
degrees at the outlet.
The engine has two counter-rotating turbine sections, one driving the gas generator compressor, the
second driving the propeller through a reduction gearbox.
An accessory gearbox and engine oil tank are installed on the rear of the engine.
A propeller gearbox is installed on the front of the engine to reduce the engine speed for the three
blade variable pitch propeller.
3. Engine Mounts
The engine is attached to a machined aluminium mounting ring by three flexible shock mounts. The
mounting ring is attached to the fuselage with two bolts. Two support struts are attached to the
mounting ring and to the fuselage to support the engine.
The engine is mounted with its centreline 5 degrees nose down from the fuselage centreline.
4. Engine Installation
The engine is installed on two machined fuselage longerons which form the engine attachment and
main load bearing structure.
The engine has bulkheads which divide the engine compartment into three sections.
The engine mounted stainless steel front bulkhead isolates the engine hot (forward) section.
The rear bulkhead isolates the engine accessories (rear) section and comprises an engine mounted
stainless steel inner section and an airframe mounted outer section.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
71-00-00 Jun 14/92
•PILATUSE"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The engine compartment is separated from the fuselage by a stainless steel firewall.
5. Cowlings
Access to the engine is provided by four cowls. The cowls are at the top and bottom front, and the top
left and top right rear of the engine.
Quick release fasteners are installed on all the cowlings with support struts on the top left and top right
cowlings to hold the cowlings open.
6. Air Intake
The bottom front cowling has a centrally positioned air intake.
Air enters the cowling and passes through ducts which turn the airflow up to the intake screens at the
rear of the engine via the intake plenum chamber.
Snow vanes can be installed in the bottom front cowling to prevent snow from entering the air ducts
and blocking the engine intake screens.
Air is also used to keep the area between the cowls and the engine cool.
7. Exhaust
Engine exhaust gas goes to atmosphere through two exhaust stubs, one on each side of the engine.
8. Drains
Two fuel drain valves are installed in the engine gas generator case. The valves are closed during
engine operation by P3 air pressure. When the engine is shutdown the valves open and let residual fuel
drain out through the two front end drain pipes.
Fuel dumped from the starting flow control unit on engine shutdown is retained in a fuel dump collector
tank. The tank is installed at the rear of the engine compartment and has a drain valve at the bottom of
the tank.
At the rear of the engine, drains are installed on the:
- Engine driven fuel pump.
- HP fuel pump.
- Starter/generator mounting pad.
- Starting flow control unit.
9. Operation
Air enters the lower forward engine cowl and goes up to the engine air intake.
The air is compressed by each stage of the compressor and goes through diffuser tubes. These turn
the air through 90 degree and increase the pressure.
Straightening vanes remove swir1 and the air then goes to the annulus between the combustion
chamber and the gas generator case.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page2
71-00-00 Jun 14/91
•PILATUSW
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The compressed air passes in to a reverse flow annular combustion chamber where fuel is injected and
the mixture ignited.
The resultant combustion gas is turned through 180 degrees in the combustion chamber outlet duct
and goes forward through the compressor and the power turbines.
The gas is then directed to atmosphere from the engine exhaust duct through two exhaust stubs.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page3
71-00-00 Jun 14/91
'9PILATUS5F"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LEFT AND RIGHT

REAR COWLS
TOP FRONT
COWL
REDUCTION
GEARBOX
FIREWALL
ACCESSORY
GEARBOX
ENGINE MOUNT RING
EXHAUST STUB
BOTTOM FRONT COWL
PROPELLER
AIR INTAKE
6204
Powerplant Installation
Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page4
71-00-00 Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWERPLANT - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
This topic gives the information that follows:
• 2. Safety Precautions
• 3. Engine Limitations
• 4. Preparation for Ground Runs
• 5. Starting and Stopping the Engine
• 6. Emergency Procedures
• 7. Draining the Fuel Dump Collector Tank (Post SB 151 aircraft)
• 8. Dry Motoring Run
• 9. Wet Motoring Run
A. Obey the applicable local regulations when ground runs are done.
B. Ground runs must be done on hard, level ground which is clean and free from loose material
such as stones, dirt or spilled fluids.
C. Observe the ground run danger areas and position fire fighting equipment and the external
power unit (EPU) in the recommended locations (Ref. Fig. 201).
D. Position the aircraft into wind and apply the parking brake.
E. If the engine run is to be at high power settings, or acceleration checks will be done, do the
precautions that follow:
(1) Position the aircraft so that the area in front is clear of obstruction; aligning the aircraft on
the runway, perimeter track, or special ground run area is recommended.
(2) If an EPU is used, make sure it is positioned clear of propeller and exhaust backwash area
at the rear of the left wing, clear of the trailing edge (Ref. Fig. 201).
(3) Safety the aircraft tail to the ground at the rear tie-down point with rope (Ref Fig 202).
F. Appropriate fire fighting equipment must be positioned to hand.
G. The engine must be shut down before any adjustment, or other work is done on the engine
airframe components.

CONFIG 1
Page 201
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Engine Limitations
A. Speeds and Temperatures (B2-H4 Aircraft)
B2-H4 Aircraft
Condition Torque ITT Ng Np Time Limit
Take off 47.3 725 101.5 2000 Unlimited
Maximum Climb
47.3 695 101.5 2000 Unlimited
Maximum Cruise
Low Idle - 660 51 to 53 Unlimited
Starting - 1090 (1) - - 2 seconds
Acceleration 53.0 825 102.6 2420 2 seconds
Reverse Thrust 47.3 725 101.5 2000 60 seconds
B. Speeds and Temperatures (B2-H2 Aircraft)
B2-H2 Aircraft
Maximum Climb
42.5 695 101.5 2200 Unlimited
Maximum Cruise
2068 to
Reverse Thrust 42.5 725 101.5 60 seconds
2112
(1) NOTE: If the ITT is more than 925°C during engine start, refer to the Fault Isolation charts
(Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00).

CONFIG 1
Page 202
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Oil Pressure and Temperature Limits
Condition Pressure Temperature
10 to 99 °C
Take off 80 to 100 psig
(50 to 210 °F)
Maximum Climb, 0 to 99 °C
80 to 100 psig
Maximum Cruise (32 to 210 °F)
- 40 to 99 °C
Low Idle 40 psig Min.
(- 40 to 210 °F)
- 40 to 99 °C
Starting -
(- 40 to 210 °F)
0 to 99 °C
Acceleration -
(32 to 210 °F)
0 to 99 °C
Reverse Thrust 80 to 100 psig
(32 to 210 °F)
NOTE: For increased service life of the engine oil, an oil temperature of between 74 and 80 °C
(165 and 175 °F) is recommended.

CONFIG 1
Page 203
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Preparation for Ground Run
A. Tools and equipment
Part No Description Remarks
Fire extinguishing equipment CO2

External power supply 28 VDC 1500 A
Ear defenders
Headphones
B. External Checks
(1) Check the aircraft servicing documents to make sure it is safe to do an engine ground run.
(2) Make sure the aircraft contains sufficient fuel for the ground run, replenish if necessary
(Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301).
(3) Make sure that the engine oil level is correct (Ref. 12-10-03, Page Block 301).
(4) Make sure that the main and tail wheel tire pressures are correct (Ref. 12-14-32, Page
Block 301).
(5) Put the aircraft with the nose into the wind and set the parking brake to ON.
(6) Put chocks at the front and rear of the mainwheels.
(7) Put fire-extinguishing equipment in position near the aircraft.
(8) Put the External Power Unit (EPU) in position.
NOTE: To preserve the life of the aircraft battery, it is recommended to use external
power.
(9) If high power settings or acceleration checks will be done, safety the aircraft tail to the
ground from the rear tie-down point with rope.
(10) Remove all the covers from the aircraft.
(11) Remove the forward upper and lower cowls PT1 and PB1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block
201).
NOTE: The forward cowls are removed to prevent installation losses during the
performance checks.
(12) Make sure that the rear hinged cowls PL1 and PR1 are correctly installed or closed.
(13) Examine the engine air intake system for any loose items.
(14) Make sure that all access panels are correctly installed or closed.
(15) Make sure that the area is clean and clear of tools, ground equipment and other items.

CONFIG 1
Page 204
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Internal Checks
(1) Make sure that:
• All the equipment in the aircraft is safe

• The pilot seat is locked
• The parking brake is set to ON
(2) Set these levers, controls and switches as follows:
FUEL SYSTEM VALVE CLOSED
IDLE CONTROL LEVER CUT-OFF
POWER CONTROL LEVER IDLE-DETENT
PROPELLER CONTROL LEVER FEATHER
FLAPS UP
HEATING SYSTEM OFF
BATTERY OFF
GENERATOR OFF
IGNITION OFF
AUX FUEL PUMPS OFF
POSN / STROBE OFF
LANDING LIGHTS OFF
INSTR / CABIN OFF
PROP DE-ICE OFF
ANTI-ICE OFF

CONFIG 1
Page 205
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Starting and Stopping the Engine
A. Preparation
(1) Make sure that the area around the propeller is clear of persons.
(2) Make sure that all the circuit breakers are closed.
(3) Set these switches as follows:
BATTERY ON
or
Start the EPU and then connect it to the aircraft.
BEACON ON
For ground runs at night only:
NAV ON
CABIN ON
INSTRUMENTS ON
(4) Push and hold the annunciator light test, make sure that all the lights on the CWS come
on.
(5) Set the stabilizer trim to fully nose up.
(6) Hold the control column to the rear.
B. Starting the Engine
(1) Set these controls as follows:
FUEL SYSTEM VALVE OPEN
AUX FUEL PUMP ON

CONFIG 1
Page 206
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE THE STARTER MOTOR FOR MORE THAN 30 SECONDS.
AFTER EACH START LET THE STARTER COOL FOR ONE MINUTE BEFORE IT
IS OPERATED AGAIN. AFTER THE STARTER MOTOR HAS BEEN OPERATED
THREE TIMES, BEFORE THE NEXT START, YOU MUST LET THE STARTER
MOTOR COOL DOWN FOR A MINIMUM OF 30 MINUTES.
STARTER ON
NOTE: The starter pilot light is optional equipment, but is installed as standard equipment in
aircraft S/N 804 and subsequent aircraft.
(2) Make sure the oil pressure increases.
IGNITION ON
CAUTION: THE MINIMUM Ng FOR START IS 12% AND THE MINIMUM OIL PRESSURE IS
25 psi.
(3) Let Ng stabilize
CAUTION: IF THE ENGINE DOES NOT LIGHT UP WITHIN 10 SECONDS, SET THE IDLE
CONTROL LEVER TO CUT-OFF. LET THE FUEL DRAIN FOR 30 SECONDS AND
DO A DRY MOTORING RUN BEFORE A START IS TRIED AGAIN.
NOTE: In cold environmental conditions, the time for the Ng to increase after ignition has
occurred can be more than usual.
IDLE CONTROL LEVER LOW IDLE
(4) At idle:
STARTER OFF
STARTER PILOT LIGHT OFF
IGNITION OFF
Make sure the engine indications are in limits.
NOTE: When the propeller control lever at the FEATHER position the idle speed will
decrease.
If an EPU is connected, disconnect and then stop the EPU.
BATTERY ON
GENERATOR ON
PROPELLER CONTROL LEVER FEATHER to MAX FINE
Make sure the propeller moves from the feather position.
(5) Let the engine stabilize at ground idle, then make sure:
ITT MAX. 725 °C

CONFIG 1
Page 207
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL PRESSURE MIN. 40 psi
CAUTION: DO NOT LET THE OIL TEMPERATURE INCREASE TO MORE THAN 99°C
(210 °F).
(6) Before you do any engine checks, let the engine warm up at idle to 50 °C.
NOTE: On the first start, move the propeller to and from the feather position two times to purge
the propeller control system of air and to supply warm oil through the control system.
C. Stopping the Engine
(1) Set the levers, controls and switches as follows:
Let the engine stabilize for a minimum of two minutes.
GENERATOR OFF
IDLE CONTROL LEVER CUT OFF
(2) During engine rundown, listen for unusual noises which can indicate damage to the
engine.
(3) Let the engine stop.
(4) If the ground run was done a night set these switches as follows:
NAV OFF
CABIN OFF
INSTRUMENT OFF
AUX FUEL PUMP OFF
CAUTION: IF THE Ng IS MORE THAN 5%, DO NOT SET THE AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP TO
OFF.
BEACON OFF
BATTERY OFF
D. Post Ground Run Checks
(1) Drain the fuel dump collector tank (Ref. Para. 7).
(2) Let the exhaust stubs cool.

CONFIG 1
Page 208
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) If the work on the aircraft is complete, remove the rope from the rear tie-down position.
(4) Install the forward upper and lower cowls PT1 and PB1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(5) Install all covers on the aircraft.

CONFIG 1
Page 209
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Emergency Procedures
This paragraph gives the emergency procedures for:
• An engine fire
• A failure of the engine
• An electrical failure
A. Engine Fire
If, during an engine start, ground run or engine stop, there is an indication of an engine fire, do
this procedure:
IGNITION OFF
BATTERY ON
AUX FUEL PUMP ON
STARTER ON
To give a good airflow through the engine, operate the starter for a minimum of 20
seconds.
STARTER OFF
If the fire is not extinguished:
AUX FUEL PUMP OFF
BATTERY OFF
GET OUT OF THE AIRCRAFT AND GET ALL PERSONNEL CLEAR OF THE AIRCRAFT.
B. Failure Of The Engine
If, during an engine start or ground run, a failure of the engine occurs do this procedure:
BATTERY OFF
AUX FUEL PUMP OFF

CONFIG 1
Page 210
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Electrical Failure
If, during an engine ground run a failure of the generator occurs, do this procedure:
GEN RESET RESET
If the generator does not reset correctly, STOP the engine.

CONFIG 1
Page 211
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. Drain the Fuel Dump Collector Tank
A. General
This procedure is only applicable to aircraft Post SB 151.
110.85.07.221 Drain tool

- Container Minimum capacity 1,5 liters
(0.4 US gal)
C. Procedure
(1) Position a container at the collector tank valve (engine compartment fixed section, lower
right side).
(2) Engage the drain tool in the valve and allow the tank contents to drain into the container.
(3) Disengage and remove the drain tool.
(4) Make sure the tank valve closes.
(5) Remove the container and dispose of drained fuel in accordance with local regulations.

CONFIG 1
Page 212
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8. Dry Motoring Run
A. General
This procedure is used to remove fuel or vapour, or when there is an engine fire.
B. Procedure
(1) Start the EPU and then connect it to the aircraft.
(2) Set these controls and switches as follows:
IGNITION OFF
BATTERY ON
AUX FUEL PUMP ON
STARTER ON
Motor the engine for a minimum of 20 seconds.
STARTER OFF
(3) When the engine has stopped, set these switches as follows:
AUX FUEL PUMP OFF
BATTERY OFF
(4) Stop the EPU and then disconnect it from the aircraft.

CONFIG 1
Page 213
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9. Wet Motoring Run
A. General
This procedure is used for maintenance purposes.
B. Procedure
IGNITION OFF
BATTERY ON
AUX FUEL PUMP ON
STARTER ON
(3) Let the Ng stabilize, then:
(4) After 10 seconds
STARTER OFF
AUX FUEL PUMP OFF
BATTERY OFF
(6) Do a dry motor run (Ref. Para. 8)
(7) Stop the EPU and then disconnect it from the aircraft.

CONFIG 1
Page 214
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RECOMENDED
LOCATION FOR
FIRE FIGHTING
0
EQUIPMENT
RECOMENDED
LOCATION FOR
EPU
10
20
PROPELLER
30
DANGER AREA-
KEEP CLEAR
HOT EXHAUST-
KEEP CLEAR
PROPELLER/EXHAUST
BACKWASH-
KEEP CLEAR
NOTE: DIFFERENT WIND DIRECTIONS

AND WIND STRENGTHS CAN
CHANGE THE SHAPE OF THE
DANGER AREAS.
40
METERS 5 0 5
6664
Powerplant - Maintenance Practices - Danger Areas

Figure 201

CONFIG 1
Page 215
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
B
REAR FUSELAGE
LIFTING POINT
B
MOORING CABLE
ATTACHMENT POINT
REAR TIE DOWN POINT

6289
Powerplant - Maintenance Practices - Tie-Down Points

Figure 202

CONFIG 1
Page 216
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWERPLANT - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
This topic gives the information that follows:
• 2. Safety Precautions
• 3. Engine Limitations
• 4. Preparation for Ground Runs
• 5. Starting and Stopping the Engine
• 6. Emergency Procedures
• 7. Draining the Fuel Dump Collector Tank (Post SB 151 aircraft)
• 8. Dry Motoring Run
• 9. Wet Motoring Run
A. Obey the applicable local regulations when ground runs are done.
B. Ground runs must be done on hard, level ground which is clean and free from loose material
such as stones, dirt or spilled fluids.
C. Observe the ground run danger areas and position fire fighting equipment and the external
power unit (EPU) in the recommended locations (Ref. Fig. 201).
D. Position the aircraft into wind and apply the parking brake.
E. If the engine run is to be at high power settings, or acceleration checks will be done, do the
precautions that follow:
(1) Position the aircraft so that the area in front is clear of obstruction; aligning the aircraft on
the runway, perimeter track, or special ground run area is recommended.
(2) If an EPU is used, make sure it is positioned clear of propeller and exhaust backwash area
at the rear of the left wing, clear of the trailing edge (Ref. Fig. 201).
(3) Safety the aircraft tail to the ground at the rear tie-down point with rope (Ref Fig 202).
F. Appropriate fire fighting equipment must be positioned to hand.
G. The engine must be shut down before any adjustment, or other work is done on the engine
airframe components.

CONFIG 2
Page 201
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3. Engine Limitations
A. Speeds and Temperatures (B2-H4 Aircraft)
B2-H4 Aircraft
Maximum Climb
47.3 695 101.5 2000 Unlimited
Maximum Cruise
Reverse Thrust 47.3 725 101.5 2000 60 seconds
B. Speeds and Temperatures (B2-H2 Aircraft)
B2-H2 Aircraft
Maximum Climb
42.5 695 101.5 2200 Unlimited
Maximum Cruise
2068 to
Reverse Thrust 42.5 725 101.5 60 seconds
2112
(1)
NOTE: If the ITT is more than 925°C during engine start, refer to the Fault Isolation charts
(Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00).

CONFIG 2
Page 202
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Oil Pressure and Temperature Limits
Condition Pressure Temperature
10 to 99 °C
Take off 80 to 100 psig
(50 to 210 °F)
Maximum Climb, 0 to 99 °C
80 to 100 psig
Maximum Cruise (32 to 210 °F)
- 40 to 99 °C
Low Idle 40 psig Min.
(- 40 to 210 °F)
- 40 to 99 °C
Starting -
(- 40 to 210 °F)
0 to 99 °C
Acceleration -
(32 to 210 °F)
0 to 99 °C
Reverse Thrust 80 to 100 psig
(32 to 210 °F)
NOTE: For increased service life of the engine oil, an oil temperature of between 74 and 80 °C
(165 and 175 °F) is recommended.

CONFIG 2
Page 203
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Preparation for Ground Run
A. Tools and equipment
Fire extinguishing equipment CO2

External power supply 28 VDC 1500 A
Ear defenders
Headphones
B. External Checks
(1) Check the aircraft servicing documents to make sure it is safe to do an engine ground run.
(2) Make sure the aircraft contains sufficient fuel for the ground run, replenish if necessary
(Ref. 12-11-28, Page Block 301).
(3) Make sure that the engine oil level is correct (Ref. 12-10-03, Page Block 301).
(4) Make sure that the main and tail wheel tire pressures are correct (Ref. 12-14-32, Page
Block 301).
(5) Put the aircraft with the nose into the wind and set the parking brake to ON.
(6) Put chocks at the front and rear of the mainwheels.
(7) Put fire-extinguishing equipment in position near the aircraft.
(8) Put the External Power Unit (EPU) in position.
NOTE: To preserve the life of the aircraft battery, it is recommended to use external
power.
(9) If high power settings or acceleration checks will be done, safety the aircraft tail to the
ground from the rear tie-down point with rope.
(10) Remove all the covers from the aircraft.
(11) Remove the forward upper and lower cowls PT1 and PB1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block
201).
NOTE: The forward cowls are removed to prevent installation losses during the
performance checks.
(12) Make sure that the rear hinged cowls PL1 and PR1 are correctly installed or closed.
(13) Examine the engine air intake system for any loose items.
(14) Make sure that all access panels are correctly installed or closed.
(15) Make sure that the area is clean and clear of tools, ground equipment and other items.

CONFIG 2
Page 204
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Internal Checks
(1) Make sure that:
• All the equipment in the aircraft is safe

• The pilot seat is locked
• The parking brake is set to ON
(2) Set these levers, controls and switches as follows:
FUEL SYSTEM VALVE CLOSED
FLAPS UP
HEATING SYSTEM OFF
BATTERY OFF
EXT / STBY PWR OFF
GENERATOR OFF
IGNITION OFF
AUX FUEL PUMPS OFF
POSN / STROBE OFF
LANDING LIGHTS OFF
INSTR / CABIN OFF
PROP DE-ICE OFF
ANTI-ICE OFF

CONFIG 2
Page 205
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Starting and Stopping the Engine
A. Preparation
(1) Make sure that the area around the propeller is clear of persons.
(2) Make sure that all the circuit breakers are closed.
BATTERY (if external power is not available) ON
or
EXT / STBY PWR (if external power is available) ON
Start the EPU and then connect it to the aircraft.
BEACON ON
For ground runs at night only:
NAV ON
CABIN ON
INSTRUMENTS ON
(4) Push and hold the annunciator light test, make sure that all the lights on the CWS come
on.
(5) Set the stabilizer trim to fully nose up.
(6) Hold the control column to the rear.
B. Starting the Engine
(1) Set these controls as follows:
AUX FUEL PUMP ON

CONFIG 2
Page 206
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STARTER ON
NOTE: The starter pilot light is optional equipment, but is installed as standard equipment in
aircraft S/N 804 and subsequent aircraft.
(2) Make sure the oil pressure increases.
IGNITION ON
CAUTION: THE MINIMUM Ng FOR START IS 12% AND THE MINIMUM OIL PRESSURE IS
25 psi.
(3) Let Ng stabilize
CAUTION: IF THE ENGINE DOES NOT LIGHT UP WITHIN 10 SECONDS, SET THE IDLE
CONTROL LEVER TO CUT-OFF. LET THE FUEL DRAIN FOR 30 SECONDS AND
DO A DRY MOTORING RUN BEFORE A START IS TRIED AGAIN.
NOTE: In cold environmental conditions, the time for the Ng to increase after ignition has
occurred can be more than usual.
(4) At idle:
STARTER OFF
STARTER PILOT LIGHT OFF
IGNITION OFF
Make sure the engine indications are in limits.
NOTE: When the propeller control lever at the FEATHER position the idle speed will
decrease.
BATTERY ON
GENERATOR ON
If an EPU is connected:
EXT / STBY PWR OFF
Disconnect, and then stop, the EPU.
PROPELLER CONTROL LEVER FEATHER to MAX FINE
Make sure the propeller moves from the feather position.

CONFIG 2
Page 207
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Let the engine stabilize at ground idle, then make sure:
ITT MAX. 725 °C
OIL PRESSURE MIN. 40 psi
CAUTION: DO NOT LET THE OIL TEMPERATURE INCREASE TO MORE THAN 99°C
(210 °F).
(6) Before you do any engine checks, let the engine warm up at idle to 50 °C.
NOTE: On the first start, move the propeller to and from the feather position two times to purge
the propeller control system of air and to supply warm oil through the control system.
C. Stopping the Engine
(1) Set the levers, controls and switches as follows:
Let the engine stabilize for a minimum of two minutes.
GENERATOR OFF
IDLE CONTROL LEVER CUT OFF
(2) During engine rundown, listen for unusual noises which can indicate damage to the
engine.
(3) Let the engine stop.
(4) If the ground run was done a night set these switches as follows:
NAV OFF
CABIN OFF
INSTRUMENT OFF
AUX FUEL PUMP OFF
CAUTION: IF THE Ng IS MORE THAN 5%, DO NOT SET THE AUXILIARY FUEL PUMP TO
OFF.
BEACON OFF
BATTERY OFF

CONFIG 2
Page 208
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Post Ground Run Checks
(2) Let the exhaust stubs cool.
(3) If the work on the aircraft is complete, remove the rope from the rear tie-down position.
(4) Install the forward upper and lower cowls PT1 and PB1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(5) Install all covers on the aircraft.

CONFIG 2
Page 209
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. Emergency Procedures
This paragraph gives the emergency procedures for:
• An engine fire
• A failure of the engine
• An electrical failure
A. Engine Fire
If, during an engine start, ground run or engine stop, there is an indication of an engine fire, do
this procedure:
IGNITION OFF
BATTERY ON
EXT / STBY PWR ON
AUX FUEL PUMP ON
STARTER ON
To give a good airflow through the engine, operate the starter for a minimum of 20
seconds.
STARTER OFF
If the fire is not extinguished:
AUX FUEL PUMP OFF
BATTERY OFF
EXT / STBY PWR OFF
B. Failure Of The Engine
If, during an engine start or ground run, a failure of the engine occurs do this procedure:
BATTERY OFF
AUX FUEL PUMP OFF

CONFIG 2
Page 210
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Electrical Failure
If, during an engine ground run a failure of the generator occurs, do this procedure:
GEN RESET RESET
If the generator does not reset correctly, STOP the engine.

CONFIG 2
Page 211
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
7. Drain the Fuel Dump Collector Tank
A. General
This procedure is only applicable to aircraft Post SB 151.
110.85.07.221 Drain tool

- Container Minimum capacity 1,5 liters
(0.4 US gal)
C. Procedure
(1) Position a container at the collector tank valve (engine compartment fixed section, lower
right side).
(2) Engage the drain tool in the valve and allow the tank contents to drain into the container.
(3) Disengage and remove the drain tool.
(4) Make sure the tank valve closes.
(5) Remove the container and dispose of drained fuel in accordance with local regulations.

CONFIG 2
Page 212
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
8. Dry Motoring Run
A. General
This procedure is used to remove fuel or vapour, or when there is an engine fire.
B. Procedure
IGNITION OFF
BATTERY ON
EXT / STBY PWR ON
AUX FUEL PUMP ON
STARTER ON
Motor the engine for a minimum of 20 seconds.
STARTER OFF
AUX FUEL PUMP OFF
BATTERY OFF
EXT / STBY PWR OFF
(4) Stop and then disconnect the EPU from the aircraft.

CONFIG 2
Page 213
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
9. Wet Motoring Run
A. General
This procedure is used for maintenance purposes.
B. Procedure
IGNITION OFF
BATTERY ON
EXT / STBY PWR ON
AUX FUEL PUMP ON
STARTER ON
(3) Let the Ng stabilize, then:
(4) After 10 seconds
STARTER OFF
AUX FUEL PUMP OFF
BATTERY OFF
EXT / STBY PWR OFF
(6) Do a dry motor run (Ref. Para. 8)
(7) Stop and then disconnect the EPU from the aircraft.

CONFIG 2
Page 214
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
RECOMENDED
LOCATION FOR
FIRE FIGHTING
0
EQUIPMENT
RECOMENDED
LOCATION FOR
EPU
10
20
PROPELLER
30
DANGER AREA-
KEEP CLEAR
HOT EXHAUST-
KEEP CLEAR
PROPELLER/EXHAUST
BACKWASH-
KEEP CLEAR
NOTE: DIFFERENT WIND DIRECTIONS

AND WIND STRENGTHS CAN
CHANGE THE SHAPE OF THE
DANGER AREAS.
40
METERS 5 0 5
6664
Powerplant - Maintenance Practices - Danger Areas

Figure 201

CONFIG 2
Page 215
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
B
REAR FUSELAGE
LIFTING POINT
B
MOORING CABLE
ATTACHMENT POINT
REAR TIE DOWN POINT

6289
Powerplant - Maintenance Practices - Tie-Down Points

Figure 202

CONFIG 2
Page 216
71-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWERPLANT - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This topic gives the procedure for the removal and installation of the powerplant. You must keep some
engine accessories with the aircraft. You must remove these accessories from the removed engine
(Ref. Para 5.), and then install them on the replacement engine (Ref. Para 6.).

- Lifting Equipment
968.20.12.938 Engine sling P&WC item
CPWA 30800 Stand P&WC item
CPWA 32081 Mount ring P&WC item
CPWA 32389 Brackets (Qty 3) P&WC item
CPWA 30712 Adapters (Qty 2) P&WC item
Torque wrench 0 - 15 Nm (0 -130 lbf in.)
Torque wrench 0 - 150 Nm (0 -1300 lbf in.)
B. Expendable Parts
28-21-01, Fig. 01 O-ring Oil-fuel heater

61-21-01, Fig. 01 Cotter Pin Propeller Control Cable
61-41-09, Fig. 01 Gasket NP tacho
71-21-01, Fig. 01 Moulded assembly Absorber rubber, Qty 3
71-21-01, Fig. 01 Gasket Engine mount, Qty 3
71-21-01, Fig. 01 Nut, 12 point, self locking Engine mount, Qty 3
71-71-01, Fig. 01 O-ring Oil breather elbow
71-71-01, Fig. 01 O-ring HP fuel pump drain
71-71-01, Fig. 01 O-ring Starter control unit drain
72-10-00, Fig. 01 Gasket (P&WC IPC) Overspeed governor
72-30-04, Fig. 01 Gasket (P&WC IPC) P3 air bleed
72-60-00, Fig. 01 Gasket (P&WC IPC) Starter adapter
73-11-01, Fig. 01 Gasket LP fuel pump
76-11-01, Fig. 01 Cotter Pins Engine Control Cables, Qty 2
77-11-09, Fig. 01 O-ring Torque transducer adapter
77-12-09, Fig. 01 Gasket NG tacho
79-11-01, Fig. 01 O-ring Oil drain valve
79-31-09, Fig. 01 O-ring Oil temp bulb
79-31-09, Fig. 01 O-ring Oil pressure adapter
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P02-001 Lockwire 0,8 mm Diameter

P04-004 Grease Plastilube 3
P08-001 Caulking putty
3. Job Set Up
A. Put chocks at the front and rear of the main wheels.
B. If necessary lift the aircraft on to a tail stand (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
C. Disconnect the aircraft battery (Ref. 24-32-11, Page Block 401).
D. Set the fuel system valve to CLOSED.
E. Remove the engine cowlings (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
F. Drain the engine oil (Ref. 12-10-03, Page Block 301).
G. Remove the propeller (Ref. 61-10-01, Page Block 401).
H. Remove the exhaust stubs (Ref. 78-11-11, Page Block 401).
4. Removal
A. Remove the Oil Cooler
CAUTION: IF THE ENGINE IS REMOVED BECAUSE OF METAL CONTAMINATION OF THE OIL

SYSTEM, THE OIL COOLER MUST BE REPLACED. IF THE OIL COOLER IS NOT
REPLACED THE METAL CONTAMINATION CAN DAMAGE THE NEW ENGINE.
(1) If necessary, remove the oil cooler (Ref. 79-11-11, Page Block 401).
B. Disconnect the Electrical Connectors (Ref. Fig. 401 Sheets 1 and 2)
(1) Identify and disconnect the electrical cables (1) from the starter-generator terminal block.
(2) Disconnect the bonding lead (3) from the engine data plate securing bolt (4).
(3) Disconnect the electrical plug (2) from the ignition unit.
(4) Disconnect the electrical plug (5) from the gas generator tachometer generator.
(5) Disconnect the electrical plug (7) from the FCU sense line heater. Remove the cable ties
as necessary.
(6) Disconnect the electrical plug (8) from the oil temperature sensor.
(7) Disconnect the electrical plug (9) at the front of the RH side rear bulkhead.
(8) Disconnect the ground leads (6).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(9) If a propeller de-icing system is installed, disconnect the plug (10) at the engine rear
bulkhead.
C. Disconnect the Case Drains and P3 Bleed Air Pipe (Ref. Fig. 402)
(1) Disconnect the P3 bleed air hose (2) from the top of the engine.
(2) Release the P-clip (3) from the engine front bulkhead.
(3) Remove and discard the cable tie at the engine mounting ring.
(4) Remove the bolts (4), the adapter (5) and gasket (6).
(5) Disconnect the forward drain hose (1) from the gas generator case.
(6) Disconnect the rear drain hose (8) from the gas generator case.
(7) Remove the forward drain pipe (7) from the gas generator case.
D. Disconnect the Oil Tubes (Ref. Fig. 403)
(1) Disconnect the oil cooler return hose (1) from the accessory gearbox casing.
(2) Disconnect the oil cooler supply hose (7) at the oil scavenge pump.
(3) Disconnect the oil pressure transducer supply hose (6).
(4) Remove the adapter (5) and discard the O-ring (4).
(5) Loosen the clamp (2) and disconnect the engine breather hose (3).
(6) Loosen the clamp (6) and disconnect the drain hose (5) below the starter generator
(Ref. Fig. 413).
E. Disconnect the Fuel Tubes (Ref. Fig. 404 Sheets 1 and 2)
(1) Disconnect the fuel supply hose (3) at the oil fuel heater.
(3) Disconnect the inlet hose (4) from the LP fuel pump.
(4) Disconnect the outlet hose (9) from the LP fuel pump.
(5) Disconnect drain tube (7) at the HP fuel pump.
(7) Disconnect drain tube (8) at the LP fuel pump.
(8) Disconnect the fuel bleed return pipe (10) from the starting flow control unit.
(9) Loosen the worm-drive clamp (13).
(10) Disconnect the fuel dump hose (14) from the starting flow control unit.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(11) Make a note of the position of the adapter (12) on the starting flow control unit.
(12) Loosen the locknut and remove adapter (12).
F. Disconnect the Controls (Ref. Fig. 405)
(1) Idle Control:
(a) Remove and discard the cotter pin (12).
(b) Remove the nut (13), washers (14) and bolt (16) that attach the idle control rod (15)
to the lever (9).
(2) Power Control:
(b) Remove the nut (23), washer (24) and bolt (26) that attach the power control rod
end (25) to the lever (18).
(3) Propeller Control:
(b) Remove the nut (28), washer (29), spacer (32) and bolt (34) that attach the control
rod end (31) to the lever (30).
G. Disconnect and Remove the Propeller Control Cable (Ref. Fig. 406)
(1) Aircraft equipped with propeller control cable P/N 115.75.06.265:
(a) Remove the nuts (13), washers (14), bolts (18) and the clamp plate (17).
(b) Loosen the locknut (20) and remove the link/rod-end assy (21).
(c) Remove the locknut (20).
(d) Remove the cable (19) from the bracket (16) and remove the insulation sleeve (15)
from the cable (19).
(e) Push the cable grommets from the holes in the engine front and rear bulkheads.
(f) Pull the cable (19) rearwards through the bulkheads.
(g) Remove the nuts (10), washers (11) and special bolts (12).
(h) Remove the brackets (9) and (16).
(a) Loosen the locknut (24) and remove the link/rod-end assy (23).
(b) Remove the locknut (24).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Carefully pull the wiper seal (25) from the cable assy (33).
(d) Remove the two forward locknuts (26) from the cable assy (33).
(e) Remove the nuts (27), washers (28) and special bolts (31).
(f) Remove the bracket (29).
(g) Remove the bracket (30) from the cable (33).
(h) Remove the two rear locknuts (32) from the cable assy (33).
(i) Remove the insulation sleeve (22) from the cable (33).
(j) Push the cable grommets from the holes in the engine front and rear bulkheads.
(k) Pull the cable (33) rearwards through the bulkheads.
H. Remove the Control-Cable Support-Brackets (Ref. Fig. 406)
(2) Remove the nut (4), washer (3) and bolt (1).
(3) Remove the bolt (5).
(4) Move the brackets (2) and (6) with the control cables, clear of the engine.
I. Disconnect the Engine Bulkheads (Ref. Fig. 407)
(1) Remove the bolts (6) and washers (7) from the rear bulkhead (1).
(2) Remove the bolts (4) washers (3) plates (5) and seals (2).
J. Remove the Engine (Ref. Fig. 408)
(1) Install the engine sling (P/N CPWA 32420) to the lugs on the accessory gearbox and
reduction gearbox.
(2) Position the hoisting equipment and adjust the sling lifting eye so that the engine will stay
horizontal.
(3) Operate the hoisting equipment to hold the weight of the engine.
(4) Remove and discard the cotter pins (14)(if installed).
NOTE: Some aircraft have self-locking nuts (15) installed.
(6) Remove and discard the cotter pins (4).
(8) Remove the struts.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 405
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(9) Remove and discard the lockwire from the bolts (16).
(10) Remove bolts (16) and washers (13).
CAUTION: BEFORE YOU DO STEP (11), MAKE SURE THAT ALL OF THE DISCONNECTED
ITEMS ARE CLEAR OF THE ENGINE.
(11) Lift and move the engine clear of the airframe.
(12) Remove the upper half of the engine rear bulkhead.
K. Remove the Engine Mounting Ring (Ref. Fig. 408)
(1) Remove the nut (11), washers (12) and (9) and bolt (8).
(2) Move the mounting ring to the rear.
(3) Remove the bolts (5) and washers (6) and then remove each shockmount (10) from the
engine.
(4) Install the engine in the engine stand (Ref. P&WC EMM. 72-00-00, SERVICING).
(5) Remove engine mounting ring from engine.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 406
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Remove the Accessories from the Removed Engine
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT BLANKS AND COVERS ARE INSTALLED TO ALL OPENINGS ON
THE REMOVED ENGINE. YOU MUST MOVE THE BLANKS AND COVERS FROM THE
REPLACEMENT ENGINE TO THE REMOVED ENGINE.
A. Oil Drain Valve (Ref. Fig. 409)
(2) Remove the lock pin (2).
(3) Remove the bolt (1) and then remove the oil drain valve (5) from the engine.
(5) Install a blank to the opening.
B. Oil Temperature Sensor (Ref. Fig. 409)
(1) Remove the oil temperature sensor (10).
C. Engine Breather Elbow (Ref. Fig. 409)
(1) Remove and discard the lockwire from the two bolts (6).
(2) Remove the two bolts (6) and washers (7).
(3) Remove the elbow (9).
D. Control Levers (Ref. Fig. 405)
(1) Idle Control Lever
(b) Remove the nut (2), washer (3), spacers (4) and (7) and bolt (6).
(c) Move the rod (5) clear of the lever (9).
(e) Remove the nut (11), washer (10) and the idle control lever (9).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 407
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Power Control Input Lever
(b) Remove the nut (20), washer (19) and bolt (17).
(c) Remove the lever (18).
E. Engine Driven Fuel Pump (Ref. Fig. 410)
(1) Remove the nuts (6) and the washers (5).
(2) Remove the pump (7).
F. Gas Generator and Propeller Tachometer Generators (Ref. Fig. 410)
(2) Remove the tachometer generator (1).
G. Torque Indicating System (Ref. Fig. 411, Sheets 1 and 2)
(a) Disconnect the electrical connector (4).
(b) Disconnect the case reference pressure hose (3).
(c) Remove the torque transducer (2) and washer (5).
(d) Remove and discard the O-ring (1).
(2) Aircraft from MSN 825:
(a) Disconnect the electrical plug (5).
(b) Remove the torque pressure pipe (2).
(c) Disconnect the case reference pressure hose (7).
(d) Remove the nut (6).
(e) Remove the P-clip (4) and the torque transducer (3).
(f) Remove the torque pressure pipe adapter (8) and discard the O-ring (1).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 408
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
H. Propeller Overspeed Governor (Ref. Fig. 412)
(1) Remove nuts (2) and washers (1).
(2) Remove the overspeed governor (3).
I. Starter-Generator, QAD Adapter (if installed) and Drain Line Adapter (Ref. Fig. 413)
(1) Remove the starter-generator (Ref. 24-31-11, Page Block 401).
(2) Remove the nuts (4) washers (3) and the QAD adapter (2).
(3) Remove the drain adapter (7).
J. Harness (Ref. Fig. 414)
NOTE: Do not disconnect the low pitch warning switch cables. Transfer the electrical harness
with the warning switch and switch mounting bracket attached.
(1) Remove the cotter pin.
(2) Remove the nut and washer that attaches the linkage block of the low pitch warning switch
to the propeller reversing lever.
(3) Remove the block.
(4) Remove the two nuts that attach the warning switch mounting bracket.
(5) Release the bracket from the mounting studs.
(6) Disconnect the electrical plug from the chip detector.
(7) If propeller de-icing is installed, identify and disconnect the leads from the terminal block of
the propeller de-icer unit.
(8) Identify and disconnect the ITT leads from the T5 terminal block on the RH side of the gas
generator case.
(9) Remove the harness slot filler-plate from the engine front bulkhead.
(10) Release the harness support P-clips.
(11) Remove the harness.
(12) If installed, remove the propeller de-icer unit (Ref. 30-60-01, Page Block 401).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 409
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
K. Inner Bulkheads (Ref.Fig. 415)
(3) Remove the forward bulkheads (1) and (13).
(5) Remove the rear bulkheads (6) and (12).
6. Install the Accessories to the Replacement Engine
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT ALL BLANKS AND COVERS REMOVED FROM THE
REPLACEMENT ENGINE ARE INSTALLED TO ALL OPENINGS ON THE REMOVED
ENGINE.
A. Oil Drain Valve (Ref. Fig. 409)
(1) Remove the blank from the opening.
(2) Install a new O-ring (4) to the oil drain valve (5).
(3) Install the drain valve (5) with the lock pin (2).
(4) Safety the lockpin (2) with a new cotter pin.
(5) Install the bolt (1).
B. Oil Temperature Sensor (Ref. Fig. 409)
(2) Install a new O-ring (11) to the oil temperature sensor.
(3) Install the oil temperature sensor (10).
C. Engine Breather Elbow (Ref. Fig. 409)
(2) Install a new O-ring (8) to the elbow (9).
(3) Install the elbow (9) with the bolts (6) and washers (7).
(4) Torque the bolts (6) to between 3.4 and 3.9 Nm (30 and 35 lbf in.).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 410
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Control Levers (Ref. Fig. 405)
(1) Idle Control Lever:
(a) Put the lever (9) in position on the idle control unit.
(b) Install the washer (10) and nut (11), then tighten the nut (11) with your hand.
(c) Install the bolt (6), control rod end (5), spacers (7) and (4), washer (3) and nut (2).
(d) Torque the nut (2) to between 1.3 and 2.0 Nm (12 and 18 lbf in.).
(f) Torque the nut (11) to between 1.3 and 2.0 Nm (12 and 18 lbf in.).
(g) Safety the nut (11) with a new cotter pin (8).
(2) Power Control Input Lever
CAUTION: WHEN YOU INSTALL THE LEVER (18) IT MUST BE IN LINE WITH THE
FOLLOWER LEVER ON THE SAME SHAFT OF THE CAM BOX.
(a) Install the lever (18) to the splined shaft.
(b) Install the bolt (17), the washer (19) and the nut (20).
E. Engine Driven Fuel Pump (Ref. Fig. 410)
(3) Install the fuel pump (7), washers (5) and nuts (6).
F. Gas Generator and Propeller Tachometer Generators (Ref. Fig. 410)
(3) Install the generator (1), washers (3) and nuts (4).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 411
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
G. Torque Indicating System (Ref. Fig. 411, Sheets 1 and 2)
CAUTION: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE TORQUE TRANSDUCER.
(a) Install a new O-ring (1) on to the torque transducer (2).
(b) Install the torque transducer (2) and the washer (5).
(c) Install the case reference pressure hose (3).
(2) Aircraft from MSN 825:
(a) Install a new O-ring (1).
(b) Install the adapter (8).
(c) Remove the bottom RH nut (6) from the propeller tachometer generator.
(d) Install the P-clip (4) and torque transducer (3).
(e) Install the nut (6).
(f) Torque the nut (6) to between 8,5 and 9,6 Nm (75 and 85 lbf in.).
(g) Install the torque pressure pipe (2).
(h) Install the case reference pressure hose (7).
H. Propeller Overspeed Governor (Ref. Fig. 412)
(1) Install a new gasket (4) on the replacement engine.
(2) Install the governor with the washers (1) and nuts (2).
I. Drain Line Adapter, QAD Adapter (if applicable) and Starter-Generator (Ref. Fig. 413)
(1) Install the drain adapter (7).
(3) If applicable, install the QAD adapter (2) with the washers (3) and nuts (4).
(4) Install the starter-generator (Ref. 24-31-11, Page Block 401) but connect the electrical
cables after you install the engine (Ref. Para. 7.H.(1)).
J. Harness (Ref. Fig. 414)
(1) If applicable, install the propeller de-icer unit (Ref. 30-60-01, Page Block 401).
(2) If necessary, replace the heat insulating tape installed on the harness between the engine
flanges A and C.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 412
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Put the harness assembly in position on the engine.
(4) Install the P-clips to secure the harness.
(5) Remove the identity marks and connect the ITT indication leads to the T5 terminal block.
(6) If applicable, remove the identity marks and connect the propeller de-icer leads to the
de-icer unit terminal block.
(7) Connect the electrical plugs at the:
(a) chip detector.
(b) propeller tachometer generator.
(c) torque pressure transducer.
(8) Remove the two thrust bearing cover attaching nuts.
(9) Install the low pitch warning switch mounting bracket and warning switch on to the
mounting studs.
(10) Install the warning switch linkage block on to mounting stud on the propeller reversing
lever.
(11) Install the washer and nut to secure the warning switch linkage block, then tighten the nut
with your hand. Make sure that the block is free to turn on the stud.
(12) Safety the nut with a new cotter pin.
K. Propeller Governor Maximum Stop Screw (Ref. Fig. 405)
(1) Check the maximum stop screw (35) on the propeller governor. If the screw is shorter than
the stop screw on the removed engine, move the screws as follows:
NOTE: The long stop screw is used to give the propeller speed of 2000 rpm used on
B2H4 aircraft.
(a) On the removed engine:
(i) Loosen the locknut.
(ii) Remove the stop screw, at the same time count the number of turns
necessary to remove the stop screw.
(iii) Make a record of the number of turns.
(b) Move the short stop screw from the replacement engine to the removed engine.
(c) Install the long stop screw on the propeller governor of the replacement engine with
the same number of turns as recorded at (a) (iii).
(d) Tighten the stop screw locknut.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 413
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
L. Inner Bulkheads (Ref.Fig. 415)
(1) Put the forward bulkheads (1) and (13) in position.
(4) Install the harness slot filler plate on to the engine forward bulkhead.
(5) Use caulking putty (Material No. P08-001) to seal the gaps between the harness and the
bulkhead.
(6) Put the rear bulkheads (6) and (12) in position.
7. Installation
A. Engine Mounting Ring (Ref. Fig. 408)
(1) Position the mounting ring on the engine to the rear of the attachment points.
NOTE: Make sure that the support strut attachment lugs on the mounting ring are to the
rear.
(2) Install the engine lifting sling (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-00-00, SERVICING).
CAUTION: THE BUSHES THAT ATTACH THE SHOCKMOUNT TO THE MOUNTING FRAME
BOLT MUST BE INSTALLED. THE BUSH MUST HAVE THE THICK FLANGE TO
THE REAR. IF THE BUSH IS INCORRECTLY INSTALLED, THE ENGINE WILL
NOT ALIGN CORRECTLY.
(3) Install the gaskets (7), shockmounts (10), washers (6) and bolts (5).
(4) Torque the bolts (5) to between 31.0 and 34.0 Nm (275 and 300 lbf in.).
(5) Safety the bolts in pairs with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(6) Lubricate the shanks of the mounting ring attachment bolts (8).
(7) Put the mounting ring in position.
(9) Torque the nuts (11) to between 55.0 and 60.0 Nm (486 and 531 lbf in.).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 414
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Install the Engine (Ref. Fig. 408)
(1) Lift the engine in position.
(2) Install the bolts (16) and washers (13).
(3) Torque the bolts (16) to between 46,0 and 51,0 Nm (407 and 450 lb in.).
(4) Safety the bolts (16) with locking wire (Material No. P02-001).
C. Support Struts (Ref. Fig. 408)
(1) Put the rear bulkhead over the engine.
(2) Loosely install 10 bolts (five each side) to attach the upper and lower half of the bulkhead
together.
(3) Put the support struts in position through the holes in the engine rear bulkhead.
(4) Install the bolt (1), washer (2) and nut (3).
(5) Torque the nuts (3) to between 10,5 and 12,5 Nm (95 and 110 lb in.).
(6) Safety the nuts with new cotter pins (4).
(7) Make sure the bonded shim (18) is securely attached to the structure.
(8) If the nuts (15) are self-locking nuts:
(a) Install the bolt (19) washer (17) and nut (15). When you do this measure the run-
down torque of the nut (15).
(b) Torque the nuts (15) to between 51 and 56 Nm (450 and 500 lb in.) plus the run-
down torque.
(9) If the nuts (15) are castellated nuts:
(a) Install the bolt (19), washer (17) and nut (15).
(b) Torque the nuts (15) to between 51 and 56 Nm (450 and 500 lb in.).
(c) Safety the nuts (15) with new cotter pins (14).
(10) Remove the lifting sling from the engine.
D. Connect the Engine Bulkheads (Ref. Fig. 407)
(1) Install the bolts (6) and washers (7) to attach the upper half of the engine rear bulkhead.
(2) Tighten the bolts (4) and washers (3) that attach the support strut seal plates (5) and seals
(2).
E. Case Drains and P3 Air Bleed (Ref. Fig. 402)
(1) Connect the gas generator case rear drain hose (8) at the rear drain valve.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 415
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Connect the gas generator case forward drain hose (1) at the engine forward bulkhead.
(3) Connect the gas generator case forward drain pipe (7).
(4) Install the gasket (6) to the mounting boss on the top of the gas generator case.
(5) Put the adapter in position and install the four bolts (4).
(6) Connect the P3 bleed air hose (2) to the adapter (5).
(7) Install the P-clip (3) on the P3 bleed air hose (2) and engine forward bulkhead.
(8) Safety the hose to the lower LH side of the engine mounting ring with a cable tie.
F. Fuel Tubes (Ref. Fig. 404, Sheets 1 and 2)
(1) Install a new O-ring (11) on the adapter (12).
(2) Install the adapter to the starting flow control unit.
(3) Set the adapter to the position noted at 4. E. (10).
(4) Hold the adapter and then tighten the adapter locknut.
(5) Connect the fuel dump hose (14) to the adapter (12).
(6) Install and tighten the worm-drive clamp (13).
(7) Connect fuel bleed return hose (10) to starting flow control unit.
(8) Install a new O-ring (1) to the adapter (2).
(9) Install the adapter (2) to the oil fuel heater.
(10) Connect the fuel supply hose (3) to the adapter (2).
(11) Connect the drain tube (8) to the LP fuel pump.
(13) Install the adapter (6) to the HP fuel pump.
(14) Connect the drain tube (7) to the adapter (6).
(15) Connect the inlet hose (4) to the LP fuel pump.
(16) Connect outlet hose (9) to the LP fuel pump.
G. Oil Tubes (Ref. Fig. 403)
(1) Connect the starter generator drain hose (Ref. Fig. 413):
(a) Connect the drain hose (5) to the drain adapter (7) below the starter generator drive.
(b) Install and tighten the clamp (6).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 416
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Connect the engine breather hose (3) to the breather elbow.
(3) Install and tighten the clamp (2).
(4) Connect the oil cooler return hose (1) to the adapter on top of the accessory gearbox.
(5) Connect the engine oil cooler supply hose (7) to the connector on the scavenge pump.
(6) Install a new O-ring (4) to the adapter (5) at the RH of the accessory gearbox.
(7) Install the adapter (5).
(8) Connect the oil pressure transducer hose (6) to the adapter (5).
H. Electrical Connectors (Ref. Fig. 401)
(1) Connect the electrical cables (1) to the starter-generator.
(2) Connect the electrical plug (8) to the oil temperature sensor.
(3) Connect the electrical plug (7) to the FCU sense line heater.
(4) Connect the electrical plug (5) to the gas generator tachometer generator.
(5) Connect the electrical plug (2) to the ignition unit.
(6) Connect the electrical plug (9) at the RH of the front face of the engine rear bulkhead.
(7) If the propeller de-icing system is installed:
(a) Install electrical plug (10) at the RH front face of the engine rear bulkhead.
(8) Install the earth leads (6) to engine bulkhead.
(9) Connect bonding lead (3) to engine data plate securing bolt (4).
I. Install the Control-Cable Support-Brackets (Ref. Fig. 406)
(1) Put the support brackets (2) and (6), complete with the control cables, in the installed
position.
(2) Install the bolt (1), washer (3) and nut (4).
(3) Install the bolts (5).
(4) Install the washers (7) and the the nuts (8).
J. Install and Connect the Propeller Control Cable (Ref. Fig. 406)
(2) Make sure the propeller governor is set to the feather position.
(a) Insert the cable (19) through the hole in the engine rear bulkhead.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 417
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) If removed, put the two grommets onto the cable (19).
(c) Insert the cable (19) through the hole in the engine forward bulkhead.
(d) Install the grommets into the holes in the engine bulkheads.
(e) Install the brackets (16) and (9) with the special bolts (12), the washers (11) and the
nuts (10).
(f) Put the insulation sleeve (15) on the cable (19) and move it to a position aft of the
bracket (16).
(g) Put the cable (19) in the installed position.
(h) Install the clamp plate (17) with the bolts (18), washers (14) and nuts (13).
(i) Install the locknut (20) and the link/rod-end assy (21).
(j) Adjust the link/rod-end assy (21) until you can easily install the bolt at the propeller
governer lever, then tighten the locknut (20).
(a) Insert the cable (33) through the hole in the engine rear bulkhead.
(b) If removed, put the two grommets onto the cable (33).
(c) Insert the cable (33) through the hole in the engine forward bulkhead.
(d) Install the grommets into the holes in the engine bulkheads.
(e) Install the brackets (30) and (29) with the special bolts (31), the washers (28) and
the nuts (27).
(f) Torque tighten the nuts (27) to between 3,62 and 4,07 Nm (32 to 36 lbf. in.).
(g) Put the insulation sleeve (22) on the cable (33) and move it to a position aft of the
bracket (30).
(h) Loosely install the two rear locknuts (32) on the cable assy (33).
(i) Put the cable (33) through the bracket (30) and loosely install the two forward
locknuts (26).
(j) Carefully put the wiper seal (25) on the cable (33) and push it firmly onto the fixed
sleeve.
(k) Loosely install the locknut (24) on the cable (33).
(l) Remove slack in the cable (33) by adjusting the locknuts (26) and (32).
(m) Make sure the outer casing of the cable (33) is in the correctly installed position.
(n) Torque tighten the locknuts (26) and (32) at each side of the bracket (30) to between
10 and 11 Nm (88.5 to 97.4 lbf. in.).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 418
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(o) Install the the link/rod-end assy (23) on the cable (33). Make sure the cable (33) is in
safety.
(p) Tighten the locknut (24) with your fingers.
(q) Adjust the link/rod-end assy (23) until you can easily install the bolt at the propeller
governer lever, then tighten the locknut (24).
K. Connect the Controls (Ref. Fig. 405)
(1) Idle Control:
(a) Put the washer (14) and rod (15) in position and then install the bolt (16), washer
(14) and nut (13).
(b) Torque the nut (13) to between 1,3 and 2,0 Nm (12 and 18 lbf in.).
(2) Power Control:
(a) Put the rod end (25) in position and then install the bolt (26), washer (24) and nut
(23).
(3) Propeller Control:
(a) Put the control rod (31) in position and then install the bolt (34), spacer (32), washer
(29) and nut (28).
8. Job Close Up
A. Adjust the engine controls (Ref. 76-10-00, Page Block 501).
B. Install the exhaust stubs (Ref. 78-11-11, Page Block 401).
C. Install the propeller (Ref. 61-10-01, Page Block 401).
D. If applicable, install the oil cooler (Ref. 79-11-11, Page Block 401).
E. Fill the engine oil system (Ref. 12-10-03, Page Block 301).
F. If installed, remove the aircraft tail stand and lower aircraft tail (Ref. 07-10-00, Page Block 201).
G. Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
H. Do a fuel system depreservation (Ref. P&WC EMM, 72-00-00, SERVICING).
I. Remove the engine compressor intake cover.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 419
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
J. Install the engine cowlings (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
K. Connect the aircraft battery (Ref. 24-32-11, Page Block 201).
L. Do an engine ground run (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 501).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 420
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B A
A
C
1. ELECTRICAL CABLES
C 4. BOLT 2. PLUG
3. BONDING LEAD
B
5. PLUG
6208
Powerplant - Removal / Installation - Electrical Connections

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 421
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
B
C
7. PLUG
B
6. EARTH LEADS
8. PLUG
10. PLUG (AIRCRAFT WITH

C
PROPELLER DE-ICING ONLY)
9. PLUG
6207
Powerplant - Removal / Installation - Electrical Connections

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 422
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A 3. P-CLIP
A
2. P3 AIR BLEED
5. ADAPTER
4. BOLT
6. GASKET
1. FORWARD DRAIN HOSE

B
7. FORWARD DRAN PIPE
8. REAR DRAIN HOSE

6206
Powerplant - Removal / Installation - Case Drains and P3 Air Bleed

Figure 402
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 423
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A 1. OIL COOLER
RETURN HOSE
B
C
D
B
2. CLAMP
3. BREATHER HOSE
4. O-RING
7. OIL COOLER
SUPPLY HOSE C
5. ADAPTER
6. OIL PRESSURE
TRANDUCER HOSE
6205
Powerplant - Removal / Installation - Oil Tubes

Figure 403
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 424
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A A
B
2. ADAPTER
D
3. FUEL SUPPLY HOSE

B
1. O-RING
4. INLET HOSE
9. OUTLET HOSE
5. O-RING
8. DRAIN TUBE
6. ADAPTER
7. DRAIN TUBE
C
6214
Powerplant - Removal / Installation - Fuel Tubes

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 425
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
10. FUEL BLEED RETURN A
11. O-RING
12. ADAPTER
14. FUEL DUMP HOSE
13. CLAMP
6201
Powerplant - Removal / Installation - Fuel Tubes

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 426
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C
A
2
1 3
B 4
5
A 8
9
10
11
15
13
14
12 14
16
34
C
B
32
31
30
35
29
28
27
26
17
21
18
25
19
20
22
24
6210
23
Powerplant - Removal / Installation - Control Connections and Levers

Figure 405
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 427
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A 1
7
8
6
7
8
6252
Powerplant - Removal / Installation - Control Cable Connections and Support Brackets

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 428
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
21
20
18
19
B 17
CABLE ASSY P/N
115.75.06.265
16
15 9
10
11
14
13
12
22
B 23
CABLE ASSY P/N
941.94.11.432
24
25
26
33
27
28
29
30
32
31
6797
Powerplant - Removal / Installation - Control Cable Connections and Support Brackets

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 429
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B
1. BULKHEAD
A
2. SEAL
3. WASHER
4. BOLT
5. PLATE
7. WASHER
6. BOLT
Powerplant - Removal / Installation - Engine Bulkheads

Figure 407
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 430
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B A
19
C 3
1
2
18
17
15 16
B
5 6
7
14
(IF INSTALLED)
13
8
12
11
10
6203
Powerplant - Removal / Installation - Engine Mounts and Support Struts

Figure 408
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 431
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. PIN
A
3. COTTER PIN
1. BOLT
B
C
4. O-RING
5. OIL DRAIN VALVE
6. BOLT 7. WASHER
8. O-RING
9. ELBOW
11. O-RING
6255
10. OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Powerplant - Removal / Installation - Oil Temperature Sensor, Breather and Drain Valve
Figure 409
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 432
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. GASKET
B
A
1. TACHOMETER
A GENERATOR
3. WASHER
4. NUT
B
5. WASHER
6. NUT
7. LP FUEL PUMP
8. GASKET
6211
Powerplant - Removal / Installation - Engine Driven Fuel Pump and Gas Generator and Tachometer Generator
Figure 410
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 433
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
3. CASE REFERENCE
PRESSURE HOSE
2. TORQUE TRANSDUCER
1. O-RING
4. ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR
5. WASHER 6287
Powerplant - Removal / Installation - Torque System (Aircraft up to MSN 824)

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 434
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
2. TORQUE
PRESSURE PIPE
1. O-RING
8. ADAPTER
3. TORQUE
TRANSDUCER
7. CASE REFERENCE 4. P-CLIP

PRESSURE HOSE
6. NUT
5. ELECTRICAL PLUG
6213
Powerplant - Removal / Installation - Torque System (Aircraft from MSN 825)

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 435
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
2. NUT
1. WASHER
4. GASKET
3. OVERSPEED
GOVERNOR
6212
Powerplant - Removal / Installation - Propeller Overspeed Governor

Figure 412
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 436
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. GASKET
2. QAD ADAPTER
3. WASHER
4. NUT
7. DRAIN ADAPTER
6. CLAMP
5. DRAIN HOSE
6209
Powerplant - Removal / Installation - Starter-Generator, QAD Adapter (if installed) and Pad Drain Adapter
Figure 413
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 437
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A HEAT INSULATING TAPE
C
C
C C
C
C
C
B
C
A B
6251
Powerplant - Removal / Installation - Electrical Harness (Aircraft up to MSN 824)

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 438
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A HEAT INSULATING TAPE
C C
C C
C
C C
B B
A C
B
6250
Powerplant - Removal / Installation - Electrical Harness (Aircraft from MSN 824)

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 439
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6. REAR BULKHEAD
3. WASHER
1. FORWARD BULKHEAD
7. BOLT
4. NUT
8. WASHER
2. BOLT 5. BOLT
9. NUT
10. WASHER
11. NUT
12. REAR BULKHEAD
13. FORWARD BULKHEAD

6222
Powerplant - Removal / Installation - Engine Inner Bulkheads

Figure 415
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 440
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWERPLANT - ADJUSTMENT / TEST
1. General
This topic gives the procedures for the test and adjustment of the P&WC PT6A-27 engine, with installed
accessories and the Hartzell HC-B3TN-3D propeller.
For the engine ground-run precautions and procedures that follow, refer to 71-00-00, Page Block 201:
• Safety Precautions
• Emergency Procedures
• Starting and Stopping the Engine
• Dry Motoring Run
• Wet Motoring Run
All the engine tests in this section must be done with:
• The cabin heat selector to OFF

• The engine oil temperature above 60 °C
For the tests that must be done after maintenance, refer to 4.A.
For the tests that must be done after installation, repair and adjustment, refer to 4.B.
For the ground run check sheets, refer to 5. A. and 5.B.
This topic also refers to the Pratt and Whitney Canada Engine Maintenance Manual (P&WC EMM).

Torque Wrench 0 to 5 Nm (0 to 50 lb in)
Torque Wrench 0 to 15 Nm (0 to 150 lb in)
B. Expendable Parts

76-11-01, Fig. 01 Cotter pin Power cable / cam box
76-11-01, Fig. 01 Cotter pin Starting control unit
P&WC EMM Cotter pin CSU airbleed link
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 501
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
P02-001 Lockwire 0,8 mm (0.032in)

P02-006 Lockwire 0,6 mm (0.025 in), Heat
resistant
P02-007 Lockwire 0,6 mm (0.025 in)
3. Job Set Up
WARNING: BEFORE YOU DO ANY ADJUSTMENTS, YOU MUST SHUTDOWN THE ENGINE.
WARNING: WHEN YOU USE HIGH POWER SETTINGS, OR ACCELERATION CHECKS WILL BE
DONE, SAFETY THE AIRCRAFT TAIL TO THE GROUND AT THE REAR TIE-DOWN
POINT WITH ROPE.
A. Get an ENGINE GROUND RUN CHECK SHEET and complete the required details.
B. If high power settings or acceleration checks are required, safety the aircraft tail to the ground
from the rear tie-down point with rope.
C. Get the outside air temperature (OAT) and pressure (QFE).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 502
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Required Engine Ground Run Checks
A. Tests after Maintenance
Propeller Fine Pitch Setting (High Idle)
FCU Maximum Governing Speed (Ng)

Low Idle (Minimum Governing) Speed
Engine Rundown Time and After Stop

Propeller Overspeed Governor
Propeller Low Pitch Warning
Acceleration/(Deceleration*)
Manual Override (MOR)

Minimum Pitch in Flight
Reverse Power Setting

Engine Performance
Propeller Governor
Oil Pressure
Generator
Suction
Test Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
100 Hour / Annual X X X X X (X*) X X X X X
Inspection
Each 200 Hours X
Pre Complete Overhaul X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
After Short Term X
Storage
After Long Term Storage X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
NOTE: (X*) Only applicable post P&WC SB 1568.

Not required if FCU is specified with ‘RE52’or ‘SB-73-3’, or with a serial number that
has a ‘F’ prefix.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 503
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Tests after Installation, Repair and Adjustment
Propeller Fine Pitch Setting (High Idle)
FCU Maximum Governing Speed (Ng)

Low Idle (Minimum Governing) Speed
Engine Rundown Time and After Stop

Propeller Overspeed Governor
Propeller Low Pitch Warning
Acceleration/(Deceleration*)
Manual Override (MOR)

Minimum Pitch in Flight
Reverse Power Setting

Engine Performance
Propeller Governor
Oil Pressure
Generator
Suction
Test Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Engine Installation X X X X X X X X X (X*) X X X X X
Propeller Installation X X X X X
Fuel Control Unit X X X X X X X
HP Fuel Pump X X
Fuel Nozzles X X
Starting Flow Control X X X
Emergency Fuel Control X
Actuator
Propeller Governor X X X X X X X
Propeller Overspeed X
Governor
Compressor Bleed X X
Valve
Engine Controls X X X X X X
Low Pitch Warning X
Switch
Suction Components X
NOTE: (X*) Only applicable post P&WC SB 1568.

Not required if FCU is specified with ‘RE52’or ‘SB-73-3’, or with a serial number that
has a ‘F’ prefix.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 504
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Ground Run Checks
A. H4 Aircraft
ENGINE GROUND RUN CHECK SHEET - H4 AIRCRAFT - PT6A-27 ENGINE
Aircraft Serial No.: Airframe Hours:
Engine Serial No.: Engine Hours:
Propeller Serial No.: Propeller Hours:
Reason for Test: Date:
Operator: Inspector:
Check Description Target Actual
Engine Start
ITT (Find the cause if more than 925 °C) Max. 1090 °C °C
Cabin Heat OFF
1 Low Idle (Minimum Governing) Speed 51 - 53 % Ng % Ng
Fuel Pressure / Boost Pump OFF Light out or 25 ± 5 psi OK

ITT °C
Oil Pressure psi
Oil Temperature °C
2 Propeller Governor
Maximum Np 1980 - 2000 rpm (90.0 - 90.9 %) rpm
Py Disconnected % Ng
Py Connected % Ng
Difference Maximum 0.3 % Ng % Ng
Airbleed Link at Minimum 1900 - 1950 rpm (86.4 - 88.6 %) rpm
Aircraft with SB 161:
Propeller Control Lever at Minimum 1880 - 1900 rpm (85.5 - 86.4 %) rpm
3 Propeller Fine Pitch Setting (High Idle)

Target Torque psi psi
Power Lever to give Np 1694 rpm (77 %) rpm
Basic High Idle 68 - 72% Ng % Ng
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 505
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4 Propeller Low Pitch Warning

PCL from Reverse to Detent Light OFF
1 to 2 mm before Detent mm
5 Minimum Pitch in Flight

Ng 67 - 73 % % Ng
Np 1800 - 1950 rpm (81.8 - 88.6 %) rpm
Torque 4 - 7 psi psi
6 FCU Maximum Govening Speed (Ng) 97.1 % Ng % Ng

(Trim stop deployed)
7 Engine Performance (Reference)

Torque Pressure: psi psi
Fuel flow (Actual minus 23 lb / hr lb / hr lb / hr
or 3.4 gal / hr)
Ng: % Ng % Ng
ITT: °C °C
8 Reverse Power Setting

Np 1880 - 1925 rpm (85.5 - 87.5 %) rpm
Torque psi psi
9 Propeller Overspeed Governor

Test Lever Selected to:
TEST 1880 - 1920 rpm (85.5 - 87.3 %) rpm
NORMAL 1980 - 2000 rpm (90.0 - 90.9 %) rpm
10 Acceleration
64 % to 90 % Ng 2.5 - 4 secs secs
Deceleration
85 % to 60% Ng or low idle speed Maximum 6 - 12 secs secs
(Whichever comes first) (Dependant upon altitude,
Ref. Fig. 515) altitude (kFt)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 506
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
11 Manual Override (MOR)

(Aircraft with SB 164)
Use Toggle Switch in Small Increments Increase to 15 % Above Ground OK
Idle
(Ref. to WARNINGS and CAUTIONS in (Max. Increase, less than 4 % per
Check 11) second)
Decrease to Idle OK
(Max. Decrease, less than 4 %
per second)
12 Oil Pressure 80 - 100 psi psi
13 Generator (Ref. 24-30-00) On line by 60 % Ng % Ng
14 Suction 4.5 - 5.2 in. Hg in. Hg
15 Engine Rundown Time and After Stop secs secs
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 507
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. H2 Aircraft
ENGINE GROUND RUN CHECK SHEET - H2 AIRCRAFT - PT6A-27 ENGINE
Aircraft Serial No.: Airframe Hours:
Engine Serial No.: Engine Hours:
Propeller Serial No.: Propeller Hours:
Reason for Test: Date:
Operator: Inspector:
Engine Start
ITT (Find the cause if more than 925 °C) Max. 1090 °C °C
Cabin Heat OFF
1 Low Idle (Minimum Governing) Speed 51 - 53 % Ng % Ng

(Q-STOL at Soft Stop)
Fuel Pressure / Boost Pump OFF Light out or 25 ± 5 psi
ITT °C
Oil Pressure psi
Oil Temperature °C
2 Propeller Governor
Maximum Np 2180 - 2200 rpm (99.1 - 100.0 %) rpm
Minimum Np 1980 - 2002 rpm (90.0 - 91.0%) rpm
Py Disconnected % Ng
Py Connected % Ng
Difference Maximum 0.3 % Ng % Ng
Airbleed Link at Minimum 2068 - 2112 rpm (94.0 - 96.0%) rpm
Q-STOL Aircraft:
Propeller Control Lever at Minimum 1914 - 1936 rpm (87.0 - 88.0%) rpm
3 Propeller Fine Pitch Setting (High Idle)

Target Torque psi psi
Power Lever to give Np: Basic Aircraft 1694 rpm (77.0%) rpm
Q-STOL 1650 rpm (75.0%) rpm
Basic High Idle 80 - 85 % Ng % Ng
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 508
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4 Propeller Low Pitch Warning

PCL from Reverse to Detent Light OFF
1 to 2 mm before Detent mm
5 Minimum Pitch in Flight

Ng 75 - 80 % % Ng
Np 2068 - 2112 rpm (94.0 - 96.0%) rpm
Torque 7 - 9 psi psi
6 FCU Maximum Governing Speed (Ng) 97.1 % Ng % Ng

(Trim stop deployed)
7 Engine Performance (Reference)

Torque Pressure: psi psi
Fuel flow (Actual minus 23 lb / hr lb / hr lb / hr
or 3.4 gal / hr)
Ng: % Ng % Ng
ITT: °C °C
8 Reverse Power Setting

Np 2046 - 2090 rpm (93.0 - 95.0%) rpm
Torque psi psi
9 Propeller Overspeed Governor

Test Lever Selected to:
TEST 2009 - 2049 rpm (91.3 - 93.1%) rpm
NORMAL 2200 rpm (100.0%) rpm
10 Acceleration
64 % to 90 % Ng 2.5 - 4 secs secs
Deceleration
85 % to 60% Ng or low idle speed Maximum 6 - 12 secs secs
(Whichever comes first) (Dependant upon altitude,
Ref. Fig. 515) altitude (kFt)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 509
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
11 Manual Override (MOR)

(Aircraft with SB 164)
Use Toggle Switch in Small Increments Increase to 15 % Above Ground OK
Idle
(Ref. to WARNINGS and CAUTIONS in (Max. Increase, less than 4 %
Check 11) per second)
Decrease to Idle OK
(Max. Decrease, less than 4 %
per second)
12 Oil Pressure 80 - 100 psi psi
13 Generator (Ref. 24-30-00) On line by 60 % Ng % Ng
14 Suction 4.5 - 5.2 in. Hg in. Hg
15 Engine Rundown Time and After Stop secs secs
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 510
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENGINE START
A. Procedure
(1) Obey the safety precautions given in 71-00-00, Page Block 201.
(2) Start the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201), as the engine starts:
(a) Monitor Ng at minimum stabilized Ng of 12 %.
(b) Check light up within 10 seconds.
CAUTION: IF THE ENGINE DOES NOT LIGHT UP WITHIN 10 SECONDS WHEN YOU
MOVE THE PCL TO IDLE, OR IF THE Ng STABILIZES BELOW 45 %, YOU
MUST DO AN ENGINE DRY RUN.
(i) Do an engine dry run (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(c) Observe ITT indication. Normal ITT maximum is 800 °C. Permitted ITT transients
are a maximum of 1090 °C for a maximum of 2 seconds.
CAUTION: IF THE ITT IS 1090 °C FOR MORE THAN 2 SECONDS, SET THE PCL TO
OFF, THE START SWITCH TO OFF AND THE IGNITION SWITCH TO OFF.
THEN SET THE START SWITCH TO ON AND MOTOR THE ENGINE FOR
A MAXIMUM OF 30 SECONDS.
CAUTION: IF THE ITT IS MORE THAN 925 °C INVESTIGATE THE CAUSE.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 511
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHECK 1 - LOW IDLE (MINIMUM GOVERNING) SPEED
CAUTION: DO NOT ADJUST THE LOW IDLE IF THE FIELD ALTITUDE IS MORE THAN 3500
FEET (25.2 IN. HG / 855 MILLIBARS BAROMETRIC PRESSURE). UP TO THIS
ALTITUDE THE FUEL FLOW IS AUTOMATICALLY REDUCED BY THE FCU TO
MAINTAIN A CONSTANT IDLE SPEED. ABOVE 3500 FEET THE FUEL FLOW IS
CONSTANT AND IDLE SPEED INCREASES WITH ALTITUDE.
NOTE: To check the minimum fuel flow refer to the Engine Maintenance Manual 71-00-00,
Page Block 501.
(2) Set the Controls:
• GENERATOR OFF
• Idle Control lever LOW IDLE
• Propeller Control Lever Fully Forward
(3) Move the Power Control Lever (PCL) forward to give approximately 70% Ng and then
back to the IDLE detent (soft stop on Q-STOL aircraft).
(4) Make sure that the idle speed is between 51% and 53% Ng.
(5) If the engine idle (minimum governing) speed is not in limits, adjust as follows:
(a) Stop the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(b) Open the engine access panel PR1 (71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(c) Remove and discard the lockwire from the adjuster.
(d) Use an Allen key to hold the adjuster screw and slacken the locknut.
(e) Adjust the idle speed adjuster.
NOTE: Turn the adjuster clockwise to increase the idle speed.
(f) Use and Allen key to hold the adjuster screw and torque the locknut to between 2,3
and 2,8 Nm (20 and 25 lbf in).
(g) Safety the locknut with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(h) Close the engine access panel PR1 (71-11-00, Page Block 201).
(7) Do a check of the engine idle speed.
(8) Do the adjustment again if necessary.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 512
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MIN GOVERNING ADJUSTER
6224
Fuel Control Unit - Low Idle Adjustment

Figure 501
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 513
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHECK 2 - PROPELLER GOVERNOR
A. Procedure (Ref. Fig. 502 and 503)
(1) Remove the engine cowl PT1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(2) Disconnect the Py line from the propeller governor.
(3) Install airtight blanks on the Py line and the propeller governor.
(4) Make sure that the governor airbleed link arm is in contact with the maximum stop.
(5) Install the engine cowl PT1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(7) Do a propeller maximum speed check:
(a) Set the propeller control lever fully forward.
(b) Move the Power Control Lever (PCL) forward until the propeller is in the constant
speed range (no further increase in propeller speed (Np), approximately 30 psi
torque).
(c) Make sure that the propeller speed (Np) is:
• H4 aircraft between 1980 and 2000 rpm

(d) If Np is not in limits:
(i) Stop the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(ii) Make sure that the correct maximum stop screw is installed as follows:
• H4 aircraft P/N 968.20.11.542

• H2 aircraft P/N 968.29.14.576
(iii) Make sure that the propeller control lever moves safely over the detent.
(iv) Adjust the maximum stop adjustment screw.
(v) Do the check again.
(8) Do a propeller minimum speed check:
(a) Start the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(b) Set the propeller control lever to the minimum detent.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 514
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Adjust the propeller control lever minimum stop detent on the cockpit control
quadrant as follows:
• H4 aircraft to give no play

• H4 aircraft with SB 161 to give between 1880 and 1900 rpm
• H2 aircraft to give between 1980 and 2002 rpm
• H2 Q-STOL aircraft to give between 1914 and 1936 rpm
(9) Nf governor leak check:
(a) Set the propeller control lever fully forward.
(b) Move the PCL forward until the propeller is in the constant speed range (no further
increase in propeller speed (Np), approximately 30 psi torque).
(c) Make a record of Ng and the position of the PCL when the propeller is in the
constant speed range.
NOTE: Attach a piece of masking tape on the control quadrant next to the PCL.
Mark the position of the PCL on the tape.
(d) Stop the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(e) Remove the engine cowl PT1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(f) Remove the blanks and connect the Py line to the propeller governor.
(g) Torque the connection to between 10,0 and 11,3 Nm (90 and 100 lbf in).
(h) Safety the connection with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(i) Install the engine cowl PT1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(j) Start the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(k) Set the propeller control lever fully forward.
(l) Move the PCL to the position marked on the masking tape.
(m) Make a record of Ng.
(n) Stop the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
CAUTION: YOU MUST NOT MOVE THE PNEUMATIC MAXIMUM STOP ON THE
PROPELLER GOVERNOR.
(o) If the difference between the Ng figures recorded is more than 0,3% (100 rpm),
make sure that the airbleed link touches the maximum stop.
(i) If the link does not touch the stop, adjust the airbleed link if necessary and do
the check again.
(ii) If the link touches the stop - Reject the propeller governor.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 515
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(10) Nf governor datum reset check:
(a) Remove the engine cowl PT1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(b) Disconnect the governor airbleed link arm from the interconnecting rod.
(c) Hold the link arm in the minimum (fully rear) position against the minimum stop.
(d) Install the engine cowl PT1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(e) Start the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(f) Move the PCL forward until the propeller is in the constant speed range (no further
increase in propeller speed (Np), approximately 30 psi torque).
(g) Make sure the propeller speed with the PCL fully forward is:

(h) Stop the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(i) If the propeller speed is not in limits:
(i) Remove and discard the lockwire from the pneumatic minimum
eccentric-adjuster.
(ii) Loosen the Allen screws.
(iii) Adjust the propeller speed.
NOTE: Turn the adjuster counter clockwise to increase the propeller rpm.
Make only very small adjustments.
(iv) Tighten the Allen screws.
(v) Safety the pneumatic minimum eccentric-adjuster with lockwire (Material No.
P02-001).
(j) Do the check again.
(k) Connect the connecting rod to the lower hole of air bleed link arm.
(l) Torque the castellated nut to between 2,7 and 4,0 Nm (24 and 36 lb in).
(m) Safety the nut with a new cotter pin.
(n) Install the engine cowl PT1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 516
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
MAX STOP
ADJUSTER SCREW
MIN STOP
GOVERNOR AIR
BLEED LINK ARM
PNEUMATIC MAX STOP

CAUTION
DO NOT DISTURB
PNEUMATIC MIN
ECCENTRIC ADJUSTER
INTERCONNECTING
FWD ROD
6225
Propeller Governor Adjustments

Figure 502
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 517
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
PROPELLER CONTROL
LEVER
BOLT
PROPELLER GUIDE
ASSEMBLY
COVER PLATE
SCREW
6226
Minimum Propeller Speed Adjustment

Figure 503
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 518
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHECK 3 - PROPELLER FINE PITCH SETTING (HIGH IDLE)
A. General
The fine pitch adjustment of the propeller blades is set by the position of stop nuts on the pitch
change mechanism.
The stop nuts are set to give a calculated engine torque pressure when the engine is running at a
propeller speed (Np) of:
• H4 and standard H2 aircraft 1694 rpm

• H2 Q-STOL aircraft 1650 rpm
B. Procedure (Ref. Fig. 504, 505 and 506)
WARNING: DO NOT DO THIS TEST IF THE AMBIENT PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE IS

NOT WITHIN THE LIMITS OF THE GRAPH.
NOTE: The Gas Generator Speed (Ng) and the fine pitch set in this check may change if
adjustments are made during the minimum pitch in flight check. Do not attempt to
correct these changes.
(1) Find the target torque pressure value from the graph (Ref. Fig. 504).
(2) Remove the engine cowl PT1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(3) Open the engine access panel PR1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(4) On H4 and standard H2 aircraft (without Q-STOL):
(a) Remove and discard the cotter pin from the reversing-linkage rear clevis pin.
(b) Remove the clevis pin.
(c) Disconnect the propeller reversing-linkage from the propeller control cam.
(d) Pull the front rod end clevis forward until it is against the low pitch stop.
(e) Temporarily attach the reversing-linkage to the engine support structure with
(6) Set the controls:

• Idle Control Lever LOW IDLE
(7) Set the Power Control Lever (PCL) to give a propeller speed of:
• H4 and standard H2 aircraft 1694 rpm

• H2 Q-STOL aircraft 1650 rpm
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 519
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(8) Record the engine torque pressure. Compare the actual torque with the target torque. If
the two torque figures are not the same, adjust the propeller mechanical fine-pitch setting
as follows:
(b) Remove the propeller spinner.
(c) Adjust propeller fine pitch stop nuts. Make sure that all three stop nuts are adjusted
equally.
NOTE: Turn the nuts clockwise to increase torque. One full turn changes torque
by approximately three psi.
(d) Install the propeller spinner.
(e) Do the check again.
(9) Do a check of the basic high idle speed:
(a) Start the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(b) Set the controls:
• PCL IDLE detent.

• Idle Control Lever HIGH IDLE.
(c) Make sure the gas generator speed (Ng) is between:
• H4 aircraft 68 and 72%

• H2 aircraft 80 and 85%
(d) Stop the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(e) Adjust the high idle speed:
(i) Set the controls:

• PCL IDLE detent
(ii) If Ng is high decrease the length of the start control rod, to increase the gap
at the lower end to:
• H4 aircraft between 6 and 8 mm (0.24 and 0.32 in)

• H2 aircraft between 1 and 2 mm (0.04 and 0.08 in)
• Q-STOL aircraft between 1 and 2 mm (0.04 and 0.08 in)
(iii) Do the check again.
(10) Move the PCL fully forward.
(11) Remove and discard the lockwire that temporarily holds the reversing-linkage to the
engine support structure.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 520
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(12) Make sure the clevis pin hole in the propeller reversing-linkage, aligns with the hole
second from the bottom of the propeller control cam.
NOTE: With the clevis pin installed, there should be a small forward force on the
reversing linkage. Make sure that the reversing-linkage touches the low pitch
stop at the forward end of the linkage.
(13) If necessary, adjust the linkage as follows:
(a) Make sure the linkage is pulled forward and touches the low pitch stop.
(b) Remove and discard the lockwire from the clevis locknut.
(c) Loosen the clevis locknut.
(d) Adjust the clevis until the clevis pin hole aligns with the hole second from the bottom
on the propeller central cam.
(e) Turn the clevis one half of a turn counter-clockwise.
(f) Torque the clevis locknut to between 8,5 and 9,6 Nm (75 and 85 lb in).
(g) Safety the locknut with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(14) Connect the reversing-linkage to the propeller control cam with the clevis pin.
(15) Safety the clevis pin with a new cotter pin.
(17) Install the engine cowl PT1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(18) Close the engine access panel PR1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 521
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
6227
Propeller Fine Pitch Setting Graph

Figure 504
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 522
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
BETA CONTROL
REAR RON END CLEVIS
A A
LOCKNUT
B MAX STOP
ADJUSTER SCREW
MIN STOP
FRONT ROD
6228
END CLEVIS
Propeller Fine Pitch Setting Adjustments

Figure 505
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 523
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FINE PITCH
STOP NUTS
6229
Propeller Fine Pitch Stops Adjustment

Figure 506
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 524
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHECK 4 - PROPELLER LOW PITCH WARNING
• Propeller Control Lever fully forward

• Power Control Lever (PCL) IDLE detent
• Idle Control Lever HIGH IDLE
(3) Lift the PCL over the IDLE detent and slowly move the lever to the REVERSE range.
(4) Make sure that the annunciator warning light PROP LOW PITCH comes ON and stays on
during reverse thrust operation.
(5) Move the PCL to the usual operating range:
(a) Make sure the PROP LOW PITCH warning light goes OFF between 1 and 2 mm
(0.04 and 0.08 in) before the IDLE detent, as measured on the quadrant.
(7) If the light goes OFF when the PCL is more than 1 and 2 mm (0.04 and 0.08 in) from the
IDLE detent, adjust the switch as follows:
(b) Decrease the length of the switch operating arm.
(c) If the adjustment range is not sufficient, change the position of the switch arm as
follows:
(i) Loosen the locknut that attaches the switch arm to the threaded shaft of the
switch.
(ii) Remove and discard the lockwire from the lockscrews on switch arm
worm-gear.
(iii) Loosen the lockscrews on switch arm worm-gear.
(iv) Turn the worm gear adjuster clockwise.
(d) Install the engine cowl PT1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(e) Do the check again.
(8) When the adjustment is complete:
(b) Tighten the worm gear lockscrew
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 525
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Safety the lockscrew with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(d) Torque the switch arm locknut to between 2,8 and 3,4 Nm (25 and 30 lb in).
(e) Install the engine cowl PT1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 526
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
REVERSING LEVER
SWITCH ARM
SWITCH OPERATING ROD
ADJUSTMENT LOCKNUTS
B
SWITCH
LINKAGE BLOCK
SWITCH
THREADED
SHAFT
WORM GEAR SWITCH ARM

LOCKNUT ADJUSTER
LOCKSCREW
6230
Low Pitch Warning Switch Adjustment

Figure 507
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 527
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHECK 5 - MINIMUM PITCH IN FLIGHT
A. General
A flight test must be done after this check to make sure that the rate of descent is correct. For the
applicable flight test information refer to paragraphs C and D.
B. Procedures (Ref. Fig. 508)
(2) Set the controls

(3) On H4 Aircraft make sure the limits that follow are between:
• Gas generator speed (Ng) 67 and 73 %

• Torque pressure 4 and 7 psi
• Propeller speed (Np) 1800 and 1950 rpm
(4) On H2 Aircraft make sure the limits that follow are between:
• Gas generator speed (Ng) 75 and 80 %

• Torque pressure 7 and 9 psi
• Propeller speed (Np) 2068 and 2112 rpm
(5) If the figures are not in limits, adjust as follows:
(a) If torque and Np are high, do the rigging of the starting control rod to shorten the
starting control rod (Ref. 76-10-00, Page Block 501).
NOTE: Adjust the starting control rod at the FCU end.
(b) If Np is low and torque pressure is high, do the rear end rigging to shorten the PCL
cable and adjust the FCU pick up point (Ref. 76-10-00, Page Block 501).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 528
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Flight Test Information - H4 Aircraft
The minimum pitch in flight is set to give a rate of descent of between at the temperatures that
follow:
• 15 °C or higher 1200 and 1300 fpm

• Less than 15 °C 1300 and 1400 fpm
(1) The flight conditions required are:
• Aircraft weight 4409 to 4630 lb (2000 to 2100 kg)

• Altitude Less than 5000 feet
• Airspeed 61 kts (IAS)
• Flaps 38 °
• Idle Control HIGH IDLE
NOTE: Under usual conditions these figures are seen:
• Torque 4.5 to 5.5 ± 1 psi

• Ng 67 to 70 %
• Np 1850 to 1900 rpm.
(2) If the rate of descent is too low, decrease the length of the PCL cable and then adjust the
FCU pick up point (Ref. 76-10-00, Page Block 501). This decreases the minimum pitch in
flight.
D. Flight Test Information - H2 Aircraft
The minimum pitch in flight is set to give a rate of descent of between 1300 and 1400 fpm.
(1) The flight conditions required are:
• Aircraft weight 4850 lbs (2200 kg)

• Altitude less than 5000 feet
• Airspeed 60 kts (IAS)
• Flaps 38 °
• Idle Control HIGH IDLE
• Power Control Lever (PCL) Standard H2 aircraft - IDLE detent
H2 Q-STOL aircraft - Hard stop
(2) If the rate of descent is too low, decrease the length of the PCL cable and then adjust the
FCU pick up point (Ref. 76-10-00, Page Block 501). This decreases the minimum pitch in
flight.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 529
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C
C
A
B
TO POWER
CONTROL LEVER
STARTING
CONTROL ROD
FUEL CONTROL UNIT

(FCU)
STARTING CONTROL
UNIT
STARTING CONTROL
ACTUATING LEVER
TO COCKPIT IDLE CUT/

OFF CONTROL LEVER
6391
High Idle Ng Adjustment

Figure 508
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 530
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHECK 6 - FCU MAXIMUM GOVERNING SPEED (Ng)
A. General
The fuel control unit (FCU) is calibrated for maximum governing speed during overhaul. On
PT6A-27 engine it is necessary to check the maximum governing speed after engine installation
or component replacement.
The check is done at a reduced power using a part power trim stop which reduces Ng by 1700
rpm (4.5%).
WARNING: DO NOT OPERATE THE ENGINE OUT OF ITS OPERATIONAL LIMITS DURING
THIS CHECK.
(2) Put the part-power trim stop in position:
(a) Remove and discard the lockwire from the securing screw.
(b) Loosen the securing screw.
(c) Move the trim stop into position between the normal stop and the operating lever.
(d) Torque the securing screw to between 2,8 and 3,4 Nm (25 and 30 lbf in).
(5) Let the engine stabilize.
• Idle Control Lever HIGH IDLE detent

• Power Control Lever (PCL) Move forward until you get the maximum acceleration
torque of 53 psi or until the lever touches the
part-power trim stop
WARNING: DO NOT OPERATE THE ENGINE AT THIS POWER SETTING FOR MORE THAN
5 SECONDS.
(7) Make sure the Ng is:
• If maximum torque is reached Less than 97.1%

• If the lever touches the part power trim stop 97.1%
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 531
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(8) If the Ng is not in limits adjust as follows:
(b) Open the engine access panel PR1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(c) Remove and discard the lockwire from the maximum Ng adjustment screw.
(d) Use an Allen key to hold the adjustment screw and loosen the locknut.
NOTE: Turn the adjustment screw counter-clockwise to increase Ng speed. One

complete turn changes Ng by approximately 1%.
(e) Use an Allen key to hold the adjustment screw and tighten the locknut.
(f) Torque the locknut to between 2,8 and 3,4 Nm (25 and 30 lbf in).
(g) Do the check again and repeat the adjustment as necessary.
(9) Safety the locknut and maximum Ng adjustment screw with lockwire
(10) Loosen the securing screw and put the part-power trim stop to the stowed position.
(11) Torque the securing screw to between 2,8 and 3,4 Nm (25 and 30 lbf in).
(12) Safety the screw with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 532
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAX Ng
ADJUSTER
PART POWER
TRIM STOP
6231
FCU Adjusters and Part Power Trim Stop

Figure 509
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 533
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHECK 7 - ENGINE PERFORMANCE
A. General
This check is done to monitor the performance of the engine and to record the effect of
maintenance actions. The graphs give data for a worse-case new engine. The figures recorded
during this power check must not be used to reject the engine.
(1) Get and record the Outside Air Temperature (OAT) and field barometric pressure (QFE).
(2) Use the graphs to find the limits that follow:
• Torque Pressure (psi)

• Interturbine Temperature (ITT)
• Gas Generator Speed (Ng)
• Fuel Flow (Wf)
NOTE: These values are different from those given in the Pratt and Whitney Engine
Maintenance Manual because of the lower maximum torque limit of the PC-6
airframe.
(4) Set the Power Control Lever (PCL) to IDLE.
(5) Make sure that the GENERATOR and HEATING switches are set to OFF.
(6) Disengage the gust lock.
(7) Pull the control column fully to the rear.
(8) Set the propeller control lever to give 2000 rpm.
(9) Move the PCL to get the corrected target torque pressure.
(10) Let the engine stabilize at this setting for 3 minutes.
(11) Adjust the PCL setting if necessary to give the target torque pressure setting.
(12) Make a record of these readings:
• Torque Pressure (psi.

• Interturbine Temperature (ITT)
• Gas Generator Speed (Ng)
• Fuel Flow (Wf)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 534
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
NOTE: Because of the continuous fuel bleed to the fuel tank, subtract 23 lbs / hr from
the actual fuel flow.
NOTE: If fuel flow is much lower than the target fuel flow, check the fuel flow indication
system.
(14) If the figures are not in limits, refer to the Fault Isolation section (Ref. P&WC EMM,
72-00-00).
(15) Record the results of the check on the engine ground run check sheet.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 535
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
Target Torque (psi)
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Field Barometric Pressure (in. Hg)
6322
Engine Power Check

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 536
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
740
730
720
710
700
690
680
Interturbine Temperature (°C)
670
660
650
640
630
620
610
600
590
580
570
560
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Ambient Air Temperature (°C)
6323
Engine Power Check

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 537
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
98
97
96
95
Gas Generator Speed (Ng %)
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
6324
Engine Power Check

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 538
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
370
360
350
31 in. Hg
340
29.92 in. Hg
330
29 in. Hg
320
28 in. Hg
Fuel Flow (Wf) (lbs/hr)
310
27 in. Hg
300
26 in. Hg
290
25 in. Hg
280
24 in. Hg
270
260 23 in. Hg
22 in. Hg
250
240
230
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
6325
Engine Power Check

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 539
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHECK 8 - REVERSE POWER SETTING
A. Procedure (Ref. Fig. 511 and 512)
WARNING: DO NOT OPERATE IN REVERSE THRUST FOR MORE THAN 30 SECONDS AT

ONE TIME.
(2) Set the controls as follows:

• Power Control Lever (PCL) Maximum Reverse Power
(3) Let the engine stabilize and record:
• Torque pressure
• Propeller speed (Np)
• Ambient pressure and temperature
(4) Set the PCL to IDLE and stop the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(5) Use the nomograph to find the reverse power as follows:
(a) Plot the ambient pressure to the ambient temperature line.
(b) Plot across to the relevant propeller speed line.
(c) Plot to find the reference torque pressure.
(d) Plot the reference torque pressure to find the actual (target) torque limits for the
desired reverse power setting (Ref. Sheet 2).
(6) If the actual torque pressure does not give a reverse power of between 375 and 450 shp,
adjust as follows:
(a) Open the engine access panel PR1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(b) Remove and discard the lockwire from the idle dead-band adjustment bolt.
(c) Loosen the locknut of the idle dead-band adjustment bolt.
(d) To increase torque, turn the idle dead-band bolt counter-clockwise.
NOTE: After adjustment, make sure the minimum clearance between the idle
dead-band adjustment bolt and the follower lever is 1,0 mm (0.04 in).
NOTE: If you cannot get the required torque pressure, check the propeller blade
angle in reverse pitch.
(e) Tighten the locknut.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 540
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(f) Safety the locknut with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(g) Close the engine access panel PR1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(h) Do the check again.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 541
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TARGET TORQUE PRESSURE psi

42
40
38
36
34
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
42
m
rp
8
1 87 m
rp
4
40
1 91
%
85
%
.5
ED 86 rp
m
38
E
SP 46
R 20
m
L LE rp
90
REFERENCE TORQUE PRESSURE psi

PE 93
% 20
O
36
PR
%
95
- H4
B2
34
- H2
B2
28
26
24 30 32
10 -12
-18
-10 -23
-20 -29
°C
120 49
110 43
100 38
32
27
21
15
10
-1
-7
4
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
90
80
70
59
50
40
30
20
°F
0
31
30 29
AMBIENT PRESSURE inches Hg
26 27 28
25
24
6234
23
Reverse Power Setting Nomograph

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 542
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Reference Torque Pressure

(from Sheet 1)
23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43
44
42
40
38
36 450 SHP
Target Torque Pressure
(from Aircraft Gage)
34
32
30 375 SHP
28
26
Example:
Ambient Pressure: 29.75 in. Hg
24 Ambient Temperature: 15 °C
Propeller Speed (B2-H4): 1896 rpm
Reference Torque: 36.5 psi
Target Torque (Max): 41.1 psi
22 Target Torque (Min): 34.0 psi
6647
20
Reverse Power Setting Nomograph

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 543
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MIN 1 mm (0.04 in.)
IDLE DEADBAND
ADJUSTMENT BOLT
6235
Reverse Power Setting Adjustment

Figure 512
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 544
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHECK 9 - PROPELLER OVERSPEED GOVERNOR
A. General
This procedure is applicable only to aircraft with SB 133 and from MSN 804.
(1) Remove the engine cowls PT1 and PB1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(2) Remove and discard the lockwire from the overspeed governor test lever.
(3) Move the lever to the TEST stop and hold in position with lockwire (Material No. P02-006).
(5) Install the engine cowls PT1 and PB1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).

• Idle Control Lever LOW IDLE.
(8) Move the Power Control Lever (PCL) slowly forward until the propeller is in the constant
speed range (no further increase in propeller speed Np).
(9) Make sure the Np is between:
• H4 aircraft 1880 and 1920 rpm (85.5 and 87.3%)

• H2 aircraft 2009 and 2049 rpm (91.3 and 93.1%)
CAUTION: IF NP IS OUT OF LIMITS AND THE OVERSPEED GOVERNOR IS NOT NEW, OR

NEWLY OVERHAULED, REPLACE THE OVERSPEED GOVERNOR. YOU MUST
INSTALL ONLY A NEW OR NEWLY OVERHAULED OVERSPEED GOVERNOR
(ZERO HOURS TIME SINCE NEW, OR ZERO HOURS TIME SINCE OVERHAUL).
(10) If Np is out of limits and the overspeed governor is new, or newly overhauled, adjust as
follows:
CAUTION: DO NOT ADJUST THE MAXIMUM STOP SCREW.
(b) Remove and discard the lockwire from the ground-test stop-screw.
(c) Adjust the ground-test stop-screw a maximum 0.5 turn for each adjustment.
NOTE: Turn the ground-test stop-screw clockwise to increase the propeller

speed.
(d) Safety the ground-test stop-screw with lockwire (Material No. P02-006).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 545
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(e) Make sure the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
(f) Do steps (3) thru (10) again until the Np is correct.
(13) Remove and discard the lockwire from the overspeed governor test-lever.
(14) Move test-lever to the MAX RPM position.
(15) Hold the test-lever in position with lockwire (Material No. P02-006).
(18) Make sure you can get the maximum governed Np of:
• H4 aircraft 2000 rpm

• H2 aircraft 2200 rpm
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 546
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TEST STOP
PROPELLER OVERSPEED
GOVERNOR
6236
Overspeed Governor
Figure 513
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 547
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHECK 10 - ACCELERATION / DECELERATION
A. Procedure - Acceleration (Ref. Fig. 514)
WARNING: DO NOT LET THE ENGINE TORQUE GO OUT OF LIMITS DURING THIS TEST.
(2) Operate the engine at idle for five minutes to let the temperatures stabilize.
(3) Set the controls
• Idle Control Lever LOW IDLE detent

• Propeller Control Lever (PCL) Fully Forward
(4) Set the PCL to give an Ng of 64%.
(5) Accelerate the engine:
(a) In less than one second move the PCL to MAX.
(b) Record the time taken for Ng to reach 90 %.
(c) Immediately Ng goes through 90 %, move the PCL to IDLE detent.
(6) The acceleration time must be between 2.5 and 4.0 seconds.
WARNING: DO NOT ADJUST THE ACCELERATION DOME MORE THAN THREE CLICKS. IF
THE ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED IS MORE THAN THREE CLICKS, YOU MUST
REPLACE THE FUEL CONTROL UNIT.
(9) If the acceleration time is out of limits:
(a) Turn the acceleration dome one click.
(b) Do the acceleration check again.
NOTE: To decrease the acceleration time, turn the dome clockwise.

To increase the acceleration time, turn the dome counter-clockwise.
(11) Do the procedure again until the acceleration time is in limits.
(12) If more than three clicks are necessary to adjust the acceleration time, replace the FCU
(Ref. P&WC EMM 73-20-00).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 548
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Procedure - Deceleration (Ref. Fig. 515)
WARNING: DO NOT LET THE ENGINE TORQUE GO OUT OF LIMITS DURING THIS TEST.
(2) Do a check for low idle (minimum governing) speed (Ref. CHECK 1.) but do not shut down
the engine.
(3) With the engine still running, set the controls:
• Idle Control Lever LOW IDLE detent
(4) Let instruments stabilize for a minimum of one minute.
(5) Make sure that the cockpit Manual Override System (MOR) is set to the OFF position (if
installed).
(6) Move the Power Control Lever (PCL) forward to give approximately 85% Ng.
(7) Set the propeller control lever fully forward and let the engine stabilize for ten seconds.
(8) Move the PCL quickly in less than one second to IDLE detent.
(9) Make a note and record time to reach Ng of 60% or low idle speed (whichever comes first)
and the altitude (kFt) on the ground run check sheet.
(11) Make sure the work is clean and clear of tools and other items.
(12) If deceleration time is more than the limit (Ref. Fig. 515) you must contact P&WC.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 549
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
ACCELERATION
DOME
6237
Acceleration /Adjustment
Figure 514
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 550
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
14
12
10
DECELERATION TIME (SEC.)
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
OR BELOW ALTITUDE (kFt)
6836
Deceleration Check Limits

Figure 515
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 551
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHECK 11 - MANUAL OVERRIDE SYSTEM (MOR)
A. General
Aircraft with SB 164 have an emergency fuel control system installed. This lets the pilot control
engine power if either the mechanical power control system from the cockpit (Power Control
Lever (PCL)) or the pneumatic control (Py) system in the engine fuel system fail.
B. Procedure
WARNING: WHEN YOU USE HIGH POWER SETTINGS, OR ACCELERATION CHECKS WILL
BE DONE, SAFETY THE AIRCRAFT TAIL TO THE GROUND AT THE REAR
TIE-DOWN POINT WITH ROPE AND APPLY THE BRAKES.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT WHEN THE ENGINE ACCELERATES IT DOES NOT GO TO
MORE THAN THE PERMITTED ITT AND TORQUE LIMITS.
CAUTION: WHEN YOU USE THE EMERGENCY FUEL SYSTEM, THE ENGINE RESPONSE
WILL BE MORE FASTER THAN WHEN YOU USE THE PCL. DO NOT MOVE THE
PCL FROM THE IDLE POSITION DURING THIS CHECK.
(1) Make sure the emergency fuel actuator operates correctly (Ref. 76-20-00, Page Block
501).

• Power Control Lever (PCL) IDLE Detent
(4) Record the propeller speed Np.
(5) Set the EMERGENCY FUEL CONTROL switch to ON.
(6) Set and hold the INCREASE / DECREASE switch to INCREASE.
(a) Observe ITT, torque and Ng at all times. Keep Ng increase to less than 4 % per
second.
(7) Release the INCREASE / DECREASE switch when the Ng is at 15 % above ground idle.
(8) Set and hold the INCREASE / DECREASE switch to DECREASE.
(a) Observe ITT, torque and Ng at all times. Keep Ng decrease to less than 4 % per
second.
(9) Release the INCREASE / DECREASE switch when the Ng is at LOW IDLE.
(10) Close the switchguard to set the EMERGENCY-FUEL CONTROL switch to OFF.
(11) Make sure the actual Np is the same as the recorded Np.
(12) Move the PCL to MAX.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 552
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(13) Make sure that maximum take-off power is available
(15) Make sure the work is clean and clear of tools and other items.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 553
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHECK 12 - OIL PRESSURE
A. Procedure
(2) Move the Power Control Lever (PCL) to give an Ng above 72%.
(3) Let the oil temperature and pressure stabilize in the operating range.
(4) Make sure the oil pressure is between 80 and 100 psi.
(6) If the oil pressure is not in limits, refer to the Fault Isolation section (Ref. P&WC EMM,
Chapter 72-00-00).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 554
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHECK 13 - GENERATOR
A. Procedure
(2) Do an operational test of the DC generator system (Ref. 24-30-00, Page Block 501).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 555
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHECK 14 - SUCTION
CAUTION: THE SUCTION CAPTION (IF INSTALLED) MUST NOT BE ON WHEN THE
ENGINE IS AT LOW IDLE.
NOTE: Pilatus recommend that you do this check at an ambient pressure below 28.1 in.
Hg. If this is not possible (because the location of the aircraft is at a low altitude)
and the aircrew subsequently report low suction indications:
• Do a leak test of the system (no leaks permitted)
and/or
• Do the check again at an ambient pressure below 28.1 in. Hg.
(1) If a suction gage is not installed, install an external test gage to the suction test point.
(3) Let the engine operate at idle until the oil temperature is between 74 and 80 deg C.

(5) Make sure the suction is between 4.5 and 5.2 in. Hg.
(6) Adjust if necessary:
(a) Remove and discard the tab washer from the suction regulator adjuster.
NOTE: The suction regulator is installed below the cockpit instrument panel on
the LH side.
(b) Visually inspect the pressure regulator. Make sure that there are no leaks and/or
broken gaskets.
(c) Adjust the suction regulator.
NOTE: Turn the adjuster clockwise to increase suction.
(d) Safety the suction regulator adjuster with a new tab washer.
(7) If suction is low and you cannot get the correct level by adjusting the suction regulator,
adjust as follows:
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 556
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(b) Adjust the pressure regulator to give 6 in. Hg.
NOTE: Turn the adjuster clockwise to increase suction.
(c) Start the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(d) Remove and discard the tab washer from the suction regulator adjuster.
(e) Adjust the suction regulator to get 4.5 to 5.2 in. Hg.
(f) Stop the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(g) Safety the suction regulator adjuster with a new tab washer.
(8) If it has been installed, remove the external test gage.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 557
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TEST GAGE
CONNECTION
POINT
A
A
B
SUCTION
REGULATOR
LOCKING
WASHER
ADJUSTER
SUCTION
B ADJUSTER
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
6238
Suction Adjustment
Figure 516
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 558
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHECK 15 - ENGINE RUNDOWN AND AFTER STOP
A. Procedure
(1) Start the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201) and operate for a minimum of 5 minutes.
• Generator switch OFF

(3) Let the engine stabilize for one minute.
• Propeller Control Lever FEATHER

• Idle Control Lever CUT OFF
• Clock (second hand) Start
(5) During rundown listen for abnormal noises from the engine.
(6) When the engine stops, record the rundown time.
(7) Compare the time with other recorded rundown times.
(8) Set the controls and switches as follows:
• AUX FUEL PUMP OFF

• FUEL SYSTEM SHUT-OFF VALVE CLOSE
• BATTERY OFF
(9) Open the engine access panels PL1 and PR1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(11) Examine the engine for fuel, oil and air leaks, no leaks are permitted.
(12) Check the engine oil level (Ref. 12-10-03, Page Block 301).
(13) Examine the engine accessories and linkages and make sure they are correctly installed.
(14) Do this step no more than five minutes after the engine stops:
(a) Make sure the fuel pump housing and the fuel filter bowl are cool to touch. If they
are too hot, the oil-to-fuel heater could be unserviceable.
(15) Close the engine access panels PL1 and PR1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 559
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 560
71-00-00 Feb 28/20
"ePILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POW ER PLANT - CLEANING/PAINTING
CAUTION: LET THE ENGINE COOL AFTER SHUTDOWN FOR A MINIMUM OF 40 MINUTES OR UNTIL
ITT IS 65°C (150°F) OR LESS BEFORE A COMPRESSOR OR TURBINE WASH IS DONE.
1. General
This section gives details about engine compressor and compressor turbine washes. Compressor
washes are necessary to remove deposits from the compressor and turbine blades which could cause
damage to the blades or reduce engine power.
Desalination washes must be done after the last flight of the day.
The engine must be ground run after all compressor washes to fully dry the engine to prevent internal
corrosion.
Performance recovery washes must only be done after trouble-shooting has eliminated other causes of
low power. Performance recovery washes with the engine running must not be done.
Only use water of drinking quality or better for compressor washes.
2. Wash Frequency
The frequency of compressor washes depends on the environment in which the aircraft operates. The
frequencies recommended by Pratt and Whitney Canada are given in the Engine Maintenance Manual.
513.71.09.042 or Rig assembly, compressor

119.99.06.118 or wash
119.99.06.119
External power supply
Wash tube (P&WC 32271) For turbine washes
Blanking caps
P01-001 Alkaline cleaner

P01-002 Triethanolamine
P01-003 Emulsifier - Witco HC-59B or See Table 702 for the quanti
P01-009 P10-59B ties required
P01-014 Methanol
P02-006 Cleaner, detergent
Lockwire, 0,6 mm diameter
Kerosine
Drinking quality water
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 701
71-00-00 Mar 14/98
�PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Job Set Up
A. Open the access panels PR1 and PL1.
B. On aircraft with a pre P&WC SB 1495 engine:
(1) Disconnect the pipe union on the P3 air line from the connector on the bulkhead.
(2) Remove the bolts (3) and remove the pipe (1) and gasket (2). Install blanking caps.
NOTE: P&WC SB 1495 introduces a drain valve in the P3 filter bowl.
C. Prepare the required wash solution (Ref. Table 701 or 702).
NOTE: It is recommended that 150 ml (0.3 US pint)(3% by volume) of emulsifier (Material No.
P01-003) is added to the solution to prevent separation of the kerosine.
D. Fill the tank of the compressor wash rig with the solution.
E. Pressurize the compressor wash rig tank to between 2,07 and 3,45 bar (30 and 50 psi).
F. Connect the external power supply to the external power receptacle.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THE IGNITION IS SET TO OFF BEFORE YOU MOTOR THE
ENGINE.
CAUTION: DO NOT MOTOR THE ENGINE FOR MORE THAN 30 SECONDS AT ONE TIME. LET
THE STARTER COOL FOR A MINIMUM OF ONE MINUTE BEFORE YOU OPERATE IT
AGAIN OR THE STARTER MAY BE DAMAGED.
A. Desalination Wash/Rinse Procedure
(1) Put the wash rig in position.
(2) Energize the aircraft electrical system (Ref. 24-00-00).
(3) Dry motor the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(4) When Ng reaches 5% open the valve on the wash rig.
(5) Motor the engine for a maximum of 30 seconds.
(6) If the fluid is not all used, close the valve on the wash rig when Ng is 5%.
(7) Let the starter motor cool for at least one minute.
(8) Repeat the motor run to use all the fluid.
(9) If a water/methanol solution was used, motor the engine for 30 seconds.
(10) Do an engine drying run.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 702
71-00-00 Mar 14/98
'ePILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Performance Recovery Wash
(1) Put the wash rig in position.
(4) When Ng reaches 5% open the valve on the wash rig.
(5) Motor the engine for maximum of 30 seconds.
(6) If the fluid is not all used, close the valve on the wash rig when Ng is 5%.
(7) Let the starter motor cool for at least one minute.
(9) Let the cleaning solution soak for between 15 and 20 minutes.
(10) Do two desalination wash/rinse procedures.
(11) Do an engine drying run.
C. Compressor Turbine Desalination Wash
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE THREADS IN THE IGNITER BOSS ARE NOT DAMAGED
WHEN THE WASH TUBE IS INSTALLED. IF THE THREADS GET DAMAGED THE
ENGINE MUST BE REPLACED.
NOTE: If a compressor wash is also required, do before the turbine wash.
(1) Remove one igniter plug (Ref. 74-21-11, Page Block 401).
(2) Install the wash tube in the ignitor boss so that the arrow on the tab points to the propeller
and is parallel with the center of the engine. Tighten the knurled nut finger-tight.
(3) Connect the compressor wash rig to the spray tube.
( 6) When Ng reaches 5% open the valve on the wash rig.
(7) Motor the engine for maximum of 30 seconds. Release the starter switch.
NOTE: Approximately 2,5 liters (0.5 US gal) of compressor wash solution is used in
each 30 second motoring run.
(8) Close the valve on the wash rig when Ng is 5%.
(9) Allow the starter motor to cool for at least one minute.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 703
71-00-00 Mar 14/98
'S PILATUS!iir
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(11) If a water/methanol solution was used, motor the engine for 30 seconds.
(12) Disconnect the compressor wash rig from the wash tube.
(13) Remove the wash tube.
(14) Install the ignitor (Ref. 74-21-11, Page Block 401).
(15) Do an engine dry ing run.
D. Engine Drying Run
(1) On aircraft with a pre P&WC SB 1495 engine:
NOTE: It is important to ensure that all solid P3 lines are properly and correctly fitted
before the coupling nuts are tightened. The coupling nuts should be seated
without the use of tools (finger tight) before torquing. T he installation of any pipe
brackets should not distort the pipe in any way.
(a) Remove the blanking caps.
(b) Put the pipe in position and connect the pipe union finger-tight only, at the connector
on the bulkhead.
(c) Put the gasket in position and install the bolts.
(d) Torque the bolts in sequence to between 1,7 and 2,3 Nm (15 and 20 lbf in.), and
then in sequence to between 3,6 and 4,1 Nm (32 and 36 lbf in.).
(e) Safety the bolts with lockwire (Material No. P02-006).
(f) Torque the union nut to between 10,2 and 11,3 Nm (90 and 100 lbf in.).
(g) Safety the union nut with lockwire (Material No. P02-006).
(2) Install the engine cowls ENG 1 and ENG 2 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(3) Close the engine access panels.
(4) Start the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201) and run at approximately 80% Ng for at
least 1 minute.
(5) Look for leaks from the P3 air line. No leaks are acceptable.
(6) Make sure that the engine accelerates normally.
6. Close Up
A. De-energize the electrical system (Ref. 24-00-00).
B. Disconnect the external power supply.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 704
71-00-00 Mar 14/98
'ePILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Ambient Temperature Water Methanol
Above +2°C (+36°F) 10.0 liters (2.65 US gal) -
-25 to +2°C (-12 to +36°F) 5.0 liters (1.32 US gal) 5.0 liters (1.32 US gal)
Below -25°C (-12°F) 4.0 liters (1.06 US gal) 6.0 liters (1.59 US gal)
Desalination Wash/Rinse Wash

Table 701
EFFECTIVITV: All
Page 705
71-00-00 Mar 14/98
'SPILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OAT Ardrox 624 or Kerosine Methanol Water

Turco 4217
Above+2°C 0,2 liters 2,0 liters - 2,8 liters

(+36°F) (0.05 US gal) (0.53 US gal) (0.74 US gal)
-25 to +2°C 0,2 liters 2,0 liters 1,0 liter 1,8 liters
(-12 to +36°F) (0.05 US gal) (0.53 US gal) (0.26 US gal) (0.47 US gal)
Below -25°C 0,2 liters 2,0 liters 1,8 liters 1,0 liter
(-12°F) (0.05 US gal) (0.53 US gal) (0.47 US gal) (0.26 US gal)
OAT Magnus 1214, Kerosine Methanol Water

Turco 5884,
8 & 8 3100,
Almon AL-333
or CLIX
Above +2°C 1,25 liters - - 3,75 liters

(+36°F) (0.33 US gal) (1.0 US gal)
(-12 to +36°F) (0.33 US gal) (0.2 US gal) (0.26 US gal) (0.53 US gal)
Below -25°C 1,25 liters 0,75 liters 2,0 liters 1,0 liter
OAT Rivenaes R-MCS Kerosine Methanol Water

or R-MC G21
Above +2°C 5,0 liters - - -

(+36°F) (1.32 US gal)
(-12 to +36°F) (0.33 US gal) (0.2 US gal) (0.26 Us gal) (0.53 US gal)
Below -25°C 1,25 liters 0,75 liters 2,0 liters 1,0 liters
OAT Witco HC-598 Carbitol Triethanolamine Water
Above +2°C 0,36 liters 0,71 liters 0,18 liters 3,75 liters
(+36°F) (0.1 O US gal) (0.19 US gal) (0.05 US gal) (1.0 US gal)
-25 to +2°C 0,36 liters 0,71 liters 0,18 liters 3,75 liters
(-12 to +36°F) (0.1 O US gal) (0.19 US gal) (0.05 US gal) (1.0 US gal)
Below -25°C 0,36 liters 0,71 liters 0,18 liters 3,75 liters
(-12°F} (0.10 US gal) (0.19 US gal) (0.05 US gal) (1.0 US gal)
Performance Recovery Wash Solutions

Table 702 (Sheet 1 of 2)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 706
71-00-00 Mar 14/98
'ePILATUSe'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OAT Ardrox 6345, Methanol Water

Turboclean 2
or Zok 27
Above +S°C 1,0 liter - 4,0 liters

(+41°F) (0.26 US gal) (1.06 US gal)
-s to +S°C 1,0 liter 1,0 liter 3,0 liters

(+ 23 to + 41°F) (0.26 US gal) (0.26 US gal) (0.80 US gal)
-21 to -S°C 1,0 liter 1,S liters 2,5 liters

(-6 to + 23°F) (0.26 US gal) (0.40 US gal) (0.66 US gal)
Below -21°C 1,0 liters 2,0 liters 2,0 liters
(Below - 6°C) (0.26 US gal) (O.S3 US gal) (O.S3 Us gal)
Performance Recovery Wash Solutions

Table 702 (Sheet 2 of 2)
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 707
71-00-00 Mar 14/98
'e PILATUS !EF"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Compressor and Turbine Wash

Figure 701
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 708
71-00-00 Mar 14/98
'ePILATUS5'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
COWLINGS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
This section gives the procedures for opening and closing the hinged cowls, and removal and
installation of the cowlings for maintenance purposes.
2. Procedures
A. Open the Hinged Cowls (PL1 and PR1)
(1) Release the three Dzus fasteners on the cowl that is to be opened.
(2) Disengage the fastener latches from the airframe.
(3) Lift the cowl and engage the support struts in the brackets on the airframe.
B. Close the Hinged Cowls (PL 1 and PR1)
(1) Lift the cowl and disengage the support struts from the brackets on the airframe.
(2) Install the struts in to the spring clips.
(3) Close the cowl and engage the fastener latches on the airframe.
(4) Close the fastener latch and secure with the Dzus fastener.
C. Remove the Forward Upper and Lower Cowls (PT1 and PB1)
(1) Release the four fasteners which secure the upper cowl.
(2) Remove the cowl.
(3) Hold the lower cowl and release the two fasteners.
(4) Remove the cowl.
D. Install the Forward Upper and Lower Cowls (PT1 and PB1)
(1) Put the lower cowl in to position and close the two fasteners.
(2) Put the upper cowl in to position and close the four fasteners.
E. Remove the Hinged Cowls (PL1 and PR1)
(1) Release the three fasteners on each hinged cowl.
(2) Open the cowls.
(3 ) Remove the two bolts (Detail A).
(4) Close the cowls.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 201
71-10-00 Nov 30/03
�PILATUS:F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(5) Remove the two screws from the front and the five screws from the rear of the cowls
(Detail D).
(6) Remove the cowls from the aircraft.
F. Install the Hinged Cowls (PL1 and PR1)
(1) Put the cowls in position on the aircraft.
(2) Install the five rear and the two forward attachment screws (Detail D).
(3) Open the cowls.
(4) Install the two bolts (Detail A).
(5) Close the cowls.
(6) Secure the fasteners.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 202
71-10-00 Nov 30/03
'e PILATUS :::?'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Cowls - Maintenance Practices

Figure 201
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 203
71-10-00 Nov 30/03
'e PILATUSE!!f'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENGINE AIR INTAKE SAND FILTER INSTALLATION· DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The engine air intake can have sand filters installed to remove sand particles from the air flow to the
engine inlet. The filters prevent the erosion of the engine compressor and turbine blades which
reduces engine performance and life.
• Four filter assemblies in the lower engine cowling
• A deflector plate installed on the lower engine cowling
• An emergency by-pass flap in the lower fuselage
• Air inlet ducts for the oil cooler and air conditioning system in the lower fuselage
• A snow vane
The system gives no loss of performance during normal operation up to ISA +28°C (+43°C at sea
level). If operated outside these conditions there is a performance loss of up to 12% on take off
distance and 20% of climb performance.
The aircraft can be operated with the front filter and the deflector plate removed, with no loss of
performance at high temperatures.
2. Component Description {Ref. Fig. 1)
A. Air Filters
Four filter assemblies, attached with quick-release (Dzus) fasteners, are installed in the lower
nose cowling. There is one filter in the normal inlet, one on the bottom of the cowling, and one on
each side of the cowling.
Each filter assembly has two filter elements supported in a frame and a cover plate to attach it to
the cowling. The filter element is a sheet of filter material between two sheets of steel mesh
folded to make a continuous 'W' section.
Rubber seals are used between the filters and the cowling and the cover plates.
In conditions where there is no sand the front filter can be removed.
B. Emergency By-pass Flap
An emergency by-pass flap is installed under the nose of the aircraft, rear of the nose cowling.
The flap is held closed by a latch mechanism that can be operated from the cockpit. When the
cockpit control is operated, the flap opens due to the action of a spring and the air flow, and
supplies air to the engine which is not filtered.
C. Deflector Plate
The deflector plate is installed in front of the front filter element. The plate protects the filter from
sand in the airflow from the forward movement of the aircraft and the propeller.
EFFECTIVITY: Aircraft with sand filters
Page 1
71-12-00 Mar 14/95
�PILATUS::s:'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Snow vane
The snow vane must be installed if the aircraft flies in falling snow to stop a build up of snow on
the right side filter and the oil cooler intake. The snow vane replaces the cover assembly of the
right side filter.
The snow vane must be removed if the ambient temperature is more than 15° C (59° F).
E. Oil Cooler and Air Conditioning Ducts
Separate ducts are installed for the oil cooler and air conditioning inlets. One oil cooler duct is
installed on each side of the lower engine compartment, with the air conditioning duct on the left
side only.
3. Operation
The filters remove sand particles from the engine inlet air. If the filters get blocked, the torque produced
will decrease, and the emergency by-pass must be opened using the control in the cockpit. This lets
the engine get air which is not filtered.
Page 2
71-12-00 Mar 14/95
';:: PILATUS 5F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FRONT FILTER
SIDE FILTER
OIL COOLER INLET DUCT
DEFLECTOR PLATE
LOWER FILTER
Sand Filter Installation

Figure 1
Page3
71-12-00 Mar 14/95
�PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SAND FILTERS - CLEANING/PAINTING
CAUTION: DO NOT USE SOLVENTS OR DETERGENTS TO CLEAN THE FILTERS.
NOTE: Only the left side filter is shown. The procedure for the other filters is similar.
A. Release the quick-release fasteners (1) and remove the cover plate assembly (3).
B. Remove the filter assembly (2) from the aircraft.
C. With the inlet (outer) side of the filter down, gently tap the filter on a flat surface to remove the
debris.
D. Examine the filter for damage, deterioration or contamination of the filter elements:
• Reject the filter if the damage or deterioration will let particles into the engine
• Reject the filter if there is contamination that can not be removed
E. Examine the rubber seals on the engine cowling and the cover plate assembly - Repair or
replace as necessary.
F. Examine the cover plate assembly.
G. Put the filter (2) in position in the engine cowling. Make sure that the filter is installed so that the
air flow arrow on the placard points in.
H. Install the cover plate (3) and secure the quick-release fasteners (1).
I. Do this procedure again for the remaining filters.
Page 701
71-12-00 Mar 14/95
�PILATUS!EF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Air Intake Sand Filters - Cleaning/Painting

Figure 701
Page 702
71-12-00 Mar 1 4/95
'ePILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 73 - FUEL AND CONTROL

Chapter
Section
Subject Page Date
List of 1 Mar 14/98

Effective
Pages
Table of Jun 14/91

Contents
73-31-11 401 Mar 14/98

402 Mar 14/98
403 Mar 14/98
73-31-12 401 Jun 14/91
73-31-13 401 Jun 14/91
Page 1
73-LEP Mar 14/98
"9PILATUSiiiiF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 73 - ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
ENGINE FUEL AND CONTROL 73-00-00
INDICATING 73-30-00
FUEL FLOW TRANSMITIER 73-31-11
FUEL FLOW INDICATOR 73-31-12
Removal/Indicator 401 All
FUEL USED TOTALIZER 73-31-13
Removal/Indicator 401 All
Page 1
73-CONT Jun 14/91
'e PILATUS !5!F"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL FLOW TRANSMITTER - REMOVAUINSTALLATION
Minimum capacity3,8 litres

Clean container
(1 US gal)
8. Expendable Parts
2 8- 2 1-01, Fig. 01 0-ring Qty 2
P02-001 Lockwire
A. Preparation
(1) Set the fuel system Shutoff Valve to CLOSED.
(2) Open the fuel filter access panel PB3 and the left hand engine cowl PL 1.
(3) Open the fuel filter drain valve and drain the fuel in to the container.
B. Removal
(1) Remove the lockwire and disconnect the electrical connector (13).
(2) Disconnect the inlet hose (1).
(3) Disconnect the outlet hose (7) and remove the transmitter.
C. Installation
(1) Transfer the following items to the replacement transmitter:
(a) On aircraft with Foxboro instrumentation
•
Inlet and outlet reducers (2) and (6). Install new 0-rings (3) and (5).
(b) On aircraft with Faure Herman instrumentation
•
Inlet and outlet unions (8) and (12). Install new 0-rings (9) and (11).
E FFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
73-31-11 Mar 14/98
"S PILATUS :l5F'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(2) Put the transmitter (4) or (1 0) in to position and connect the inlet hose (1) and the outlet
hose (7) .
(3) Connect the electrical connector (13) to the transmitter.
(4) Safety the electrical connector with wire (Material No. P02-001) .
(5) Make sure that the filter drain valve is closed.
(6) Set the fuel system Shutoff Valve to OPEN.
D. Test
(2) Set the fuel system valve lever to OPEN and set the AUX F PUMP switch to on.
(3) Check the flow transmitter and connections for leaks. No leaks are acceptable.
(4) Set the AUX F PUMP to off and set the fuel system valve to CLOSED.
(6) Check the operation of the flow transmitter at the next engine start.
E. Close Up
(1) Close the fuel filter access panel PB3 and the left hand engine cowl PL1.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
73-31-11 Mar 14/98
"e PILATUS :?'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. INLET HOSE
AIRCRAFT WITH
2. REDUCER
FOXBORO INSTRUMENTS
4. FUEL FLOW TRANSMITTER
13. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
7. OUTLET HOSE
AIRCRAFT WITH
FAURE HERMAN
INSTRUMENTS
12. UNION
11. 0-RING
10. FUEL FLOW TRANSMITTER
8. UNION
Fuel Flow Transmitter - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
73-31-11 Mar 14/98
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL FLOW INDICATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Removal
A. Loosen the dome-head screw to release the instrument clamp.
B. Pull out the indicator sufficiently to get access to the electrical connector.
C. Disconnect the connector and remove the indicator.
2. Installation
A. Connect the fuel flow indicator to the electrical connector.
B. Push the indicator in to the instrument panel.
C. Tighten the dome-head screw to secure the instrument clamp.
3. Close Up
A. Check the operation of the fuel flow indicator at the next engine start.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
73-31-12 Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL USED TOTALIZER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Removal
A. Loosen the dome-head screw adjacent to the fuel used totalizer indicator to release the
instrument clamp.
B. Remove the indicator from the instrument panel to get access to the electrical connector.
C. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the indicator.
2. Installation
A. Connect the fuel flow totalizer to the electrical connector.
B. Push the indicator in to the instrument panel.
C. Tighten the dome-head screw to secure the instrument clamp.
3. Close Up
A. Check the instrument operation at the next engine start.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
73-31-13 Jun 14/91
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 74 - IGNITION
Chapter
Section
Subject Pages Date
Pages 2 Jan 30/16
74-00-00 501 Mar 14/95

502 Mar 14/95
74-11-11 401 Mar 14/98

402 Mar 14/98
403 Mar 14/98
74-21-11 401 Jan 30/16

402 Jan 30/16
403 Jan 30/16
404 Jan 30/16
Page 1
74-LEP Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
74-LEP Jan 30/16
�PILATUS&'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 74 - IGNITION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
IGNITION 74-00-00
Adjustment/Test 501 All
ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY 74-10-00

IGNITION UNIT 74-11-11
DISTRIBUTION 74-20-00
SPARK IGNITERS 74-21-11
Page 1
74-CONT Mar 14/95
'SPILATUSiF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
IGNITION SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENTITEST
1. General
This test must be done after installation of a new engine, or when an ignition system component is
removed or replaced.
3. Operational Test of Ignition System
WARNING: WAIT A MINIMUM OF SIX MINUTES AFTER ELECTRICAL POWER IS

DISCONNECTED BEFORE YOU TOUCH THE IGNITION SYSTEM COM PONENTS.
THE IGNITION SYSTEM PRODUCES HIGH VOLTAGES WHICH CAN KILL. ALWAYS
USE INSULATED TOOLS TO REMOVE IGNITION CABLES. DO NOT TOUCH
CONNECTORS OR COU PLINGS WITH BARE HANDS.
A. Make sure that the IGNITION switch is set to OFF.
B. Open and install a safety clip to the circuit breaker:
IGNIT (BATTERY BUS CB panel).
C. Open the access panel PL1.
D. Wait at least six minutes for the electrical charge in the ignition unit to decrease to zero.
E. Disconnect one ignition cable from the ignition unit.
F. Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
G. Energize the aircraft electrical system.
H. Set the IGNITION switch to ON.
I. Listen for a cracking sound from the connected spark igniter at a frequency of approximately
once per second.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 501
74-00-00 Mar 14/95
'SPILATUS�
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
J. Set the IGNITION switch to OFF.
K. Set all electrical power to OFF.
L. Open and install a safety clip to the circuit breaker:
M. Wait at least six minutes for the electrical charge in the ignition unit to decrease to zero.
N. Connect the ignition cable to the ignition unit. Tighten coupling nut fingertight, plus 45 degrees
(1 /8 turn).
0. Do this procedure for the other igniter.
P. Safety the ignition cable coupling nuts together with lockwire (Material No. P02-001 ).
Q. De-energize aircraft electrical system.
R. Close access panel PL 1.
S. Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker:
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 502
74-00-00 Mar 14/95
'ePILATUSe'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
IGNITION UNIT- REMOVAUINSTALLATION
CAUTION: WAIT A MINIMUM OF SIX MINUTES AFTER ELECTRICAL PO WER IS DISCONNECTED

BEFORE YOU TOUCH THE IGNITION SYSTEM COM PONENTS. THE IGNITION SYSTEM
PRODUCES HIGH VOL TAGES WHICH CAN KILL. ALWAYS USE INSULATED TOOLS TO
REMOVE IGNITION CABLES. DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS OR COUPLINGS WITH BARE
HANDS.
IGNITION (Battery Bus CB panel)
( 2) Open the engine cowl PL 1.
(3) Remove the electrical connector (1) from the top of the ignition unit (6).
CAUTION: DO NOT LET THE IGNITION CABLE B RAIDING AND FERRULES TURN WHEN
YOU LOOSEN THE COUPLING NUTS.
(4) Tag and disconnect the ignition cables (5).
(5) On aircraft without P&WC SB1422:
(a) Remove the nuts ( 4) , washers (3) and bolts ( 2) and remove the ignition unit (6).
(6) On aircraft with P&WC SB1422:
(a) Remove the nuts (7), washers (8), bolts {11), washers (10) and remove the ignition
unit (12).
(b) Remove the flanged bushes (9) from the mounting plate.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
74-11-11 Mar 14/98
'SPILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(a) Put the ignition unit (6) in position on the mounting bracket.
(b) Install the bolts (2), washers (3) and nuts (4).
(c) Torque the bolts (2) to between 4,1 and 4,5 Nm (36 and 40 lbf in.).
(a) Put the flanged bushes (9) in position on the mounting bracket.
(b) Put the ignition unit (12) in position on the mounting bracket.
(c) Install the washers (10), bolts (11), washers (8) and nuts (7).
(d) Torque the bolts (11) to between 4,1 and 4,5 Nm (36 and 40 lbf in.).
CAUTION: DO NOT LET T HE IGNITION CABLE BRAIDING AND FERRULES TURN WHEN
THE COUPLING NUTS ARE TIGHT ENED.
(3) Connect the ignition cables (5) to the respective outputs and remove the tags.
(4) T ighten the coupling nuts fingertight, plus 45 degrees (1/8 turn).
(5) Safety the nuts together with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(6) Install the electrical connector (1) and safety with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
IGNIT ION (Battery Bus CB panel)
(8) Do a Functional Test of ignition system (Ref. 74-00-00, Page Block 501).
(9) Close the engine cowl PL 1.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
74-11-11 Mar 14/98
'e PILATUS ::r
-
MAINTE ��c� MANUAL
4. NUT WITHOUTP&W
581422 c
5. IGNITION CABLES
7. NUT
S. WASHER
WITHP&WC
581422
12. IGNITION
EXCITER
9. FLANGED BUSH
lgrn"t'ion Unit R vaI/Installation

Figu�;�0 1
W :_-·
I
EFFECTIVITY: All _______
Page403
74-11-11 1 /9B
Mar 4
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SPARK IGNITERS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING: DO NOT TOUCH THE IGNITION SYSTEM COMPONENTS FOR A MINIMUM OF SIX
MINUTES AFTER ELECTRICAL POWER IS DISCONNECTED FROM THE SYSTEM. THE
IGNITION SYSTEM PRODUCES HIGH VOLTAGES WHICH CAN KILL. ALWAYS USE
INSULATED TOOLS TO REMOVE IGNITION CABLES. DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS OR
COUPLINGS WITH BARE HANDS.
B. Expendable Parts
74-21-09, Fig. 01 Gasket, igniter Qty. 2
P01-008 Solvent
P04-035 Anti-seize compound
A. Removal
(2) Remove engine nose cowlings PT1 and PB1.
CAUTION: DO NOT LET THE IGNITION CABLE BRAIDING AND FERRULES TURN WHEN
YOU LOOSEN THE COUPLING NUTS ON THE IGNITION CABLES.
(3) Remove the lockwire from the ignition cable couplings (3).
(4) Disconnect the ignition cable couplings (3).
(5) Remove the spark igniters (2) from the gas generator case.
(6) Remove and discard the igniter gaskets (1).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
74-21-11 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Installation
(1) Clean the mating surfaces of the mounting bosses on the engine casing with solvent
(Material No. P01-008) and absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031). Make sure all the old
anti-seize compound and/or grease and oil is removed.
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY OIL TO THE THREADS OF THE SPARK IGNITERS. APPLY THE
ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND ONLY TO THE THREADS OF THE SPARK IGNITERS.
(2) Apply a thin layer of anti-seize compound (Material No. P04-035) to the threads of the
spark igniters (2).
(3) Install new gaskets (1) onto the igniters (2).
(4) Install the igniters (2).
(5) Torque the igniters (2) to between 22,6 and 27,1 Nm (200 and 240 lbf in.).
CAUTION: DO NOT LET THE IGNITION CABLE BRAIDING AND FERRULES TURN WHEN
YOU TIGHTEN THE COUPLING NUTS ON THE IGNITION CABLES.
(6) Connect the ignition cable couplings (3) to the spark igniters (2).
(7) Tighten the ignition cable couplings (3) handtight plus 45 degrees.
(8) Safety the coupling nuts of the ignition cable couplings (3) with lockwire (Material No. P02-
006).
(9) Remove safety clip and close circuit breaker:
(10) Do a functional test of the ignition system (Ref. 74-00-00, Page Block 501).
(11) Install the engine cowls PT1 and PB1.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
74-21-11 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
1. IGNITER GASKET
2. SPARK IGNITER
3. IGNITION LEAD
6334
Spark Igniters - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
74-21-11 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
74-21-11 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 76 - ENGINE CONTROLS

Chapter
Section
Subject Pages Date
Pages 2 Jul 30/16
Table of Contents 1 Dec 31/12

2 Dec 31/12
76-10-00 501 Jul 30/16

502 Jul 30/16
503 Jul 30/16
504 Jul 30/16
505 Jul 30/16
506 Jul 30/16
507 Jul 30/16
508 Jul 30/16
509 Jul 30/16
510 Jul 30/16
76-20-00 1 Dec 31/12

3 Dec 31/12
4 Dec 31/12

2 Dec 31/12
3 Dec 31/12
4 Dec 31/12

502 Dec 31/12

502 Dec 31/12
76-20-01 401 Dec 31/12

403 Dec 31/12
404 Dec 31/12

402 Dec 31/12
403 Dec 31/12
404 Dec 31/12
Page 1
76-LEP Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
76-LEP Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 76 - ENGINE CONTROLS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
ENGINE CONTROLS
POWER CONTROL 76-10-00
EMERGENCY FUEL-CONTROL SYSTEM 76-20-00

Description and Operation CONFIG 1 1 MSN 825 thru
945 Post
SB 164
Description and Operation CONFIG 2 1 MSN 946 and
up
Adjustment / Test CONFIG 1 501 MSN 825 thru
945 Post
SB 164
Adjustment / Test CONFIG 2 501 MSN 946 and
up
EMERGENCY FUEL-CONTROL ACTUATOR 76-20-01
945 Post
SB 164
up
Page 1
76-TOC Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
76-TOC Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
POWER CONTROL - ADJUSTMENT / TEST
- Torque Wrench 0 to 10 Nm (0 to 50 lb in.)

- Torque Wrench 0 to 50 Nm (0 to 500 lb in.)
- Rigging pin (twist drill or similar) 3,2 mm (0.125 in.) diameter
B. Expendable Parts
61-21-01, Fig. 01 Cotter pin (Qty 3)

76-11-01, Fig. 01 Cotter pin (Qty 2)
2. Propeller Control Basic Rigging (Ref. Fig. 501)
A. Control Lever Rigging
(1) Move the propeller control lever to the maximum position. When you do this, make sure
the lever drops down from the feather end stop and locks in position at the maximum end
stop.
(2) Make sure that the speed adjusting lever contacts the maximum stop on the propeller
governor.
(3) Move the propeller control lever to the feather position.
(4) Make sure that the speed adjusting lever contacts the feather stop (1) on the propeller
governor.
CAUTION: IF YOU ADJUST THE CABLE END FITTINGS YOU MUST MAKE SURE THEY
ARE IN SAFETY.
(5) If necessary adjust the rod-end of the propeller control cable at the propeller governor
connection, or the clevis at the control lever in the cockpit.
NOTE: To help you to get the correct adjustment you can move the cable assy at the
forward mount clamp, or support bracket, on the engine casing. Refer to 61-20-
00, Page Block 401 for more data.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 501
76-10-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(6) Make sure the adjusted end fitting is in safety.
NOTE: The end fittings have inspection holes. Use a piece of lockwire to make sure the
parts have full engagement.
(7) Install new cotter pins, as required, to safety all disturbed connections.
B. Propeller Low Pitch Stop Nuts
(1) Make sure that the distance between the low pitch stop nuts and the spotface on the piston
is 52,5 ± 0,2 mm (2.067 ± 0.008 in.).
NOTE: This dimension can change during engine testing.
3. Beta Control Rigging
A. Front End Rigging (Ref. Fig. 502, Sheet 1)
(1) Disconnect the Beta cable (1) at the cambox.
(2) Disconnect the propeller governor interconnecting rod (3) from the clamp bolt (2).
(3) Pull the reversing linkage (4) forward until the carbon block (5) touches the rear face of the
feedback ring. Hold the linkage in this position.
(4) Adjust the fine pitch stop adjuster (9) until the clevis slot (7) is level with the beta valve cap
nut (6).
(5) Torque the locknut (8) to between 16,95 and 28,25 Nm (150 and 250 lb in.).
(6) Safety the locknut with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(7) Move the governor airbleed link forward (11) to the maximum stop (10).
(8) Adjust the interconnecting rod (3) until the clamp bolt (2) can be installed.
(9) Shorten the rod (3) by one half turn.
(10) Tighten the interconnecting rod locknut to between 3,62 and 4,07 Nm (32 and 36 lb in.).
(11) Safety the locknut with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
(12) Install the washer and nut and safety with a new cotter pin.
(13) With the power control lever (PCL) fully forward, connect the Beta cable (1) at the cambox.
(14) Safety the pin with a new cotter pin.
B. Rear End Rigging (Ref. Fig. 502, Sheet 2)
(1) Disconnect the power control cable (13) from the input lever (12).
(2) Disconnect the FCU control rod (17) from the FCU arm (19).
(3) Move the PCL to the IDLE detent (soft stop on Q-Stol H2 aircraft) and tighten the friction
control.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 502
76-10-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Adjust the idle deadband adjustment bolt (21) (Detail C):
(a) On H4 aircraft:
Install the bolt with the head to the rear and adjust to give a distance of 6,0 mm
(0.236 in.) between the front of the lever and the end of the bolt.
(b) On H2 aircraft:
Install the bolt with the head to the front and adjust to give a distance of 8,0 mm
(c) On Q-Stol aircraft:
Install the bolt with the head to the rear and adjust to give a distance of 4,0 mm
(5) Make sure that the input lever (12) is parallel with the follower lever (22).
(6) Connect the power control cable (13) to the lower hole in the input lever (12).
(7) Adjust the cable spherical bearing (14) to give a clearance between the deadband
adjusting bolt (21) and the cam follower pin of:
• On H4 aircraft 5,5 to 6,0 mm (0.22 to 0.24 in.)

• On H2 aircraft 3,6 mm (0.14 in.)
• On Q-Stol aircraft 1,0 mm (0.04 in.)
(8) Rotate the FCU arm (19) fully counter clockwise.
(9) Slowly rotate the FCU arm clockwise until a resistance is felt. This is the FCU pick up
point.
(10) Check that the FCU arm is approximately parallel to the engine axis. Adjust the position of
the arm by the serrated spacer (15) on the shaft if necessary.
(11) Turn the arm counter clockwise by approximately 2 degrees from the pick up point.
(12) Adjust the FCU control rod (17) to align the attachment holes and install the bolt, nut and
washer.
(13) Move the PCL to the maximum position.
(14) Make sure that there is a gap between the cam follower pin (23) and the bottom of FCU
actuating lever (24).
(15) Move the PCL to maximum reverse and then to maximum power. Check that the Ng
maximum stop (16) is contacted in both positions. Adjust the position of the FCU arm (19)
on the shaft if necessary.
(16) Move the PCL to maximum reverse and check that the FCU control rod (17) does not
touch the FCU arm extension (18).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 503
76-10-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
4. Starting Control Unit Rigging (Ref. Fig. 503)
A. Move the PCL to the Idle detent (soft stop on Q-Stol aircraft) and tighten the friction control.
B. Disconnect the idle control cable (7) at the Starting Control Unit.
C. Screw in the rod end as far as possible.
D. Move the Idle Control Lever (2) to Cut Off.
E. Move the actuating lever (6) on the Starting Control Unit to the Cut Off stop (9).
F. Adjust the position of the rod end and connect the idle control cable (7) to the starting control
unit. Install the bolt so that the head faces out.
G. Adjust the position of the rod end and tighten the locknut.
H. Move the idle control lever to the LOW IDLE position.
I. Make sure that the cut off safety guard (4) is easy to disengage. If necessary, loosen the bolts
(12) and adjust the low idle detent. Tighten the bolts (12).
J. Adjust the spherical bearing adjustment nuts (8) until the rigging pin (3,2 mm (0.125 in.)
diameter) can be inserted through the rigging pin hole (5) in the actuating lever (6) and the
forward (45 deg) rigging slot (10).
K. Tighten the nuts (8) and remove the rigging pin.
L. Move the Idle Control Lever forward until the rigging pin (diameter 3,2 mm (0.125 in.)) can be
inserted through the rigging pin hole (5) in the actuating lever (6) and the rear (72 deg) rigging
slot (10).
M. Adjust the length of the starting control rod (11) until the gap between the two parts of the rod is:
• On H4 aircraft between 6 and 8 mm (0.236 and 0.315 in.)

• On H2 aircraft between 1 and 2 mm (0.04 and 0.08 in.)
• On Q-Stol aircraft between 1 and 2 mm (0.04 and 0.08 in.)
NOTE: This gap may change if adjustments are made during engine ground runs.
NOTE: When the Idle Control Lever is at low idle there must be a gap.
N. Tighten the locknut.
O. Remove the rigging pin.
P. Move the Idle Control Lever forward until it reaches the High Idle stop.
Q. If necessary, loosen the bolts (3) and adjust the HIGH IDLE detent until the lever engages.
Tighten the bolts (3).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 504
76-10-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5. Close Up
A. Make sure that all the control rods and rod ends are in safety.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 505
76-10-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B
A
1. FEATHER STOP
52,5mm ± 0,2 mm
(2.067 in. ± 0.008 in.)
6244
Propeller Basic Rigging

Figure 501
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 506
76-10-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D
1. BETA CABLE
A
A
11. AIR BLEED LINK
2. CLAMP BOLT
3. INTERCONNECTING ROD
4. REVERSING LINKAGE
8. LOCKNUT
10. MAXIMUM STOP
9. FINE PITCH STOP ADJUSTER
C
THIS DIMENSION MUST BE ZERO

B
C
5. CARBON BLOCK
7. CLEVIS SLOT
6. BETA VALVE CAP NUT

6245
Beta Control Rigging

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 507
76-10-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
A
C
B
12. INPUT LEVER
3,6 mm (0.142 in.) 13. POWER CONTROL CABLE

8 mm (0.315 in.)
14. SPHERICAL BEARING
B 15. SERRATED SPACER
16. NG MAXIMUM
H2 AIRCRAFT
17. FCU CONTROL
ROD
1 mm (0.040 in.)
4 mm (0.157 in.)
18. FCU ARM

EXTENSION
D 19. FCU ARM

Q-STOL AIRCRAFT
5,5 mm (0.217 in.)

6 mm (0.236 in.)
20. FCU ACTUATING LEVER
24. CONNECT FCU

CONTROL ROD HERE
21. DEADBAND
ADJUSTING BOLT
D
C
H4 AIRCRAFT
GAP
22. FOLLOWER LEVER

6246
23. CAM FOLLOWER PIN
Beta Control Rigging

EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 508
76-10-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B 1. POWER CONTROL LEVER
A
12. LOW IDLE DETENT
ADJUSTMENT BOLTS
2. IDLE CONTROL
LEVER
3. HIGH IDLE DETENT

ADJUSTMENT BOLTS
B 11. STARTING CONTROL ROD
4. CUT-OFF SAFETY GUARD
10. RIGGING SLOTS

H2 AND Q-STOL AIRCRAFT 1 TO 2 mm (0.040 TO 0.080 in.)
72° 45° H4 AIRCRAFT 6 TO 8 mm (0.236 TO 0.315 in.)
9. CUT-OFF STOP
5. RIGGING PIN HOLE
8. SPHERICAL BEARING ADJUSTMENT NUTS 6. ACTUATING LEVER

6247
7. IDLE CONTROL CABLE
Idle Control System Rigging

Figure 503
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 509
76-10-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 510
76-10-00 Jul 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EMERGENCY FUEL-CONTROL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
Aircraft with SB 164 have an emergency fuel-control system installed which lets the pilot control engine
power if there is a failure of either the mechanical power control system from the cockpit (PCL) or the
pneumatic control (Py) system in the engine fuel system.
The system has an electrical actuator installed on the engine, controlled from a switch panel next to the
engine control quadrant in the cockpit. The actuator is connected to a lever on the FCU which moves
the fuel metering valve.
The system gets a 28V DC supply from the generator busbar through a circuit breaker placarded
EMERG FCU.
2. Component Description (Ref. Figs. 1 and 2)
A. Switch Panel
The switch panel is installed next to the engine control quadrant and has the emergency control
switches for the stabilizer trim and fuel control systems.
The two emergency fuel-control switches are installed on the lower half of the panel. One of the
switches has a guard to prevent accidental switch operation and sets the system on or off. The
switch is placarded ON/OFF. The other switch has three positions, and is spring loaded to the
center position. This switch controls the actuator extension and retraction and is placarded
INCREASE/DECREASE.
B. Actuator
The actuator is a linear type with internal limit switches to control the range of movement. With
the system set for normal operation the actuator is fully extended. The actuator retracts to
increase engine power.
The actuator is attached to the engine control cable support strut and operates a control lever on
the FCU which operates the fuel metering valve in the FCU.
3. Operation (Ref. Figs. 1 and 2)
During normal engine operation, with the guarded switch set to OFF, the 28V DC supply goes through
the switch to the decrease side of the actuator. If the actuator is not fully extended, the extend limit
switch will be closed and the actuator will extend until the limit switch operates. This makes sure that
the actuator is always fully extended when the system is set to OFF.
If the system is set to ON, the 28V DC supply goes to the three position INCREASE/DECREASE
switch. If the switch is moved to the INCREASE position, power is supplied through the retract limit
switch to operate the actuator. The actuator retracts until either the switch is released or the limit switch
operates. As soon as the actuator moves from fully extended position the extend limit switch contacts
close, which allows the actuator to extend when required or when the system is set to OFF.
As the actuator retracts to increase power, or extends to decrease power, it moves a lever on the FCU.
This lever moves the metering valve in the FCU to increase or decrease fuel flow.
EFFECTIVITY: MSN 825 thru 945 Post SB 164

CONFIG 1
Page 1
76-20-00 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENGINE CONTROL
CABLE SUPPORT STRUT
A
ACTUATOR
FUEL
CONTROL UNIT
FCU LEVER
GUARDED SWITCH
3 POSITION SWITCH
6418
Emergency Fuel-Control System - Component Location

Figure 1

CONFIG 1
Page 2
76-20-00 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERATOR BUS
EMER EMERGENCY FUEL

FCU CONTROL SWITCH
OFF
ON
DECREASE
INCREASE
INCREASE/DECREASE
SWITCH
RETRACT EXTEND
LIMIT LIMIT
SWITCH SWITCH
RETRACT EXTEND
(INCREASE ENGINE (DECREASE ENGINE
POWER) POWER)
MOTOR
6419
Emergency Fuel-Control System - Electrical Schematic

Figure 2

CONFIG 1
Page 3
76-20-00 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CONFIG 1
Page 4
76-20-00 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EMERGENCY FUEL-CONTROL SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The emergency fuel-control system lets the pilot control engine power if there is a failure of either:
• The mechanical power control system from the cockpit (PCL)

• The pneumatic control (Py) system in the engine fuel system
The system has an electrical actuator installed on the engine, controlled from a switch panel next to the
engine control quadrant in the cockpit. The actuator is connected to a lever on the FCU which moves
the fuel metering valve.
The system gets a 28V DC supply from the generator busbar through a circuit breaker placarded
EMERG FCU.
2. Component Description (Ref. Figs. 1 and 2)
A. Switch Panel
The switch panel is installed next to the engine control quadrant and has the emergency control
switches for the stabilizer trim and fuel control systems.
The two emergency fuel control switches are installed on the right half of the panel. One of the
switches has a guard to prevent accidental switch operation and sets the system on or off. The
switch is placarded ON/OFF. The other switch has three positions, and is spring loaded to the
center position. This switch controls the actuator extension and retraction and is placarded
INCREASE/DECREASE.
B. Actuator
The actuator is a linear type with internal limit switches to control the range of movement. With
the system set for normal operation the actuator is fully retracted. The actuator extends to
increase engine power.
The actuator is attached to the engine control cable support strut and operates a control lever on
the FCU which operates the fuel metering valve in the FCU.
3. Operation (Ref. Figs. 1 and 2)
During normal engine operation, with the guarded switch set to OFF, the 28V DC supply goes through
the switch to the decrease side of the actuator. If the actuator is not fully retracted, the retract limit
switch will be closed and the actuator will retract until the limit switch operates. This makes sure that the
actuator is always fully retracted when the system is set to OFF.
If the system is set to ON, the 28V DC supply goes to the three position INCREASE/DECREASE
switch. If the switch is moved to the INCREASE position, power is supplied through the extend limit
switch to operate the actuator. The actuator extends until either the switch is released or the limit switch
operates. As soon as the actuator moves from the fully retracted position, the retract limit switch
contacts close, which allows the actuator to retract when required or when the system is set to OFF.
As the actuator extends to increase power, or retracts to decrease power, it moves a lever on the FCU.
This lever moves the metering valve in the FCU to increase or decrease fuel flow.

CONFIG 2
Page 1
76-20-00 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENGINE CONTROL
CABLE SUPPORT STRUT
A
A ACTUATOR
FUEL
CONTROL UNIT
FCU LEVER
B GUARDED SWITCH
STAB TRIM EMERG FUEL CONTROL
B INCREASE
DN ON
UP OFF
ALTERNATE IN ERR PT DECREASE
3 POSITION SWITCH
6715
Emergency Fuel-Control System - Component Location

Figure 1

CONFIG 2
Page 2
76-20-00 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GENERATOR BUS
EMER EMERGENCY FUEL

FCU CONTROL SWITCH
OFF
ON
DECREASE
INCREASE
INCREASE/DECREASE
SWITCH
RETRACT EXTEND
LIMIT LIMIT
SWITCH SWITCH
RETRACT EXTEND
(DECREASE ENGINE (INCREASE ENGINE
POWER) POWER)
MOTOR
6716
Emergency Fuel-Control System - Electrical Schematic

Figure 2

CONFIG 2
Page 3
76-20-00 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CONFIG 2
Page 4
76-20-00 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EMERGENCY FUEL-CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT / TEST
1. General
CAUTION: DO NOT DO THIS TEST WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING. A SEVERE ENGINE
OVERTEMPERATURE CAN OCCUR.
This topic gives the procedure to do a Functional Test of the Emergency Fuel-Control System. Do not
do this test when the engine is running.
2. Job Set Up
A. Open the engine access panel PR1.
3. Procedure
A. Functional Test
(2) Set the EMERG FUEL CONTROL switch to ON.
(3) Set and hold the INCREASE-DECREASE switch to INCREASE, to fully retract the
actuator.
(a) Make sure that the stop on the FCU operating lever touches the maximum stop.
(b) Make sure the actuator motor stops.
(4) Set the INCREASE-DECREASE switch to DECREASE. Make sure that the actuator
extends then release the switch.
(5) Set the EMERG FUEL CONTROL switch to OFF.
(a) Make sure that the actuator fully extends.
(b) Make sure that the FCU operating lever does not touch the minimum stop.
4. Job Close Up
A. Make sure the work area is clean and clear of tools and other equipment.
B. Close the access panel PR1.

CONFIG 1
Page 501
76-20-00 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CONFIG 1
Page 502
76-20-00 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EMERGENCY FUEL-CONTROL SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT / TEST
1. General
CAUTION: DO NOT DO THIS TEST WITH THE ENGINE RUNNING. A SEVERE ENGINE
OVERTEMPERATURE CAN OCCUR.
This topic gives the procedure to do a Functional Test of the Emergency Fuel-Control System. Do not
do this test when the engine is running.
2. Job Set Up
A. Open the engine access panel PR1.
3. Procedure
A. Functional Test
(2) Set the EMERG FUEL CONTROL switch to ON.
(3) Set and hold the INCREASE-DECREASE switch to INCREASE to fully extend the
actuator.
(a) Make sure that the stop on the FCU operating lever touches the maximum stop.
(b) Make sure the actuator motor stops.
(4) Set the INCREASE-DECREASE switch to DECREASE. Make sure that the actuator starts
to retract, then release the switch.
(5) Set the EMERG FUEL CONTROL switch to OFF.
(a) Make sure that the actuator fully retracts.
(b) Make sure that the FCU operating lever does not touch the minimum stop.
4. Job Close Up
A. Make sure the work area is clean and clear of tools and other equipment.
B. Close the access panel PR1.

CONFIG 2
Page 501
76-20-00 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CONFIG 2
Page 502
76-20-00 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EMERGENCY FUEL-CONTROL ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
B. Expendable Parts
P&WC IPC Cotter pin (if required)
A. Open access panel PR 1.
B. Extend the actuator:
(2) Open the switchguard and set the EMERG FUEL CONTROL switch to ON.
(3) Set the INCREASE/DECREASE switch to DECREASE until the emergency fuel-control
actuator extends fully.
(4) De-energize the aircraft electrical system (Ref. 24-00-00).
(5) Set the EMERG FUEL CONTROL switch to OFF and close the switchguard.
EMERG FCU.
C. Disconnect the electrical connector (6) from the actuator.
D. Remove the nut (8), washers (9) and (15), and bolt (14) to disconnect the actuator (17) from the
FCU operating lever (12).
E. Hold the actuator and remove the nut (4), washer (3) and bolt (2) and remove the actuator (17)
and washers (5) and (7) from the support strut assembly (1).
F. Remove the rod-end (13) and locknut (16) from the actuator (17).
A. Install the rod-end (13) and locknut (16), and adjust the distance between the actuator rod and
the center of the rod-end bolt hole to 25,0 ± 0,5 mm (1.00 ± 0.02 in.). Tighten the locknut (16).
B. Put the actuator (17) and the washers (5) and (7) in position in the support strut (1), and install
the bolt (2), washer (3) and nut (4).

CONFIG 1
Page 401
76-20-01 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Connect the electrical connector (6) to the actuator (17).
D. Retract the actuator:
CAUTION: THE ACTUATOR WILL START TO EXTEND IMMEDIATELY WHEN THE FCU SWITCH
IS SET TO ON.
EMERG FCU.
(4) Operate the INCREASE/DECREASE switch to INCREASE until the actuator retracts fully.
E. Check the position of FCU operating lever:
(1) Move the FCU operating lever (12) clockwise until it is in contact with the hard (maximum)
stop.
(2) Put the actuator rod-end in position. If the holes do not align:
NOTE: Final adjustment to align the bolt holes in the rod-end and lever is done on the
rod-end.
(a) Remove the cotter pin (11) and loosen the nut (10). Discard the cotter pin.
(b) Hold the abutment ring against the hard (maximum) stop on the FCU.
(c) Move the lever (12) until it aligns with the rod-end (13) on the actuator and the
serrated coupling is engaged.
(d) Tighten the nut (10).
(e) Safety the nut with a new cotter pin (11).
F. Adjust the actuator rod-end (13) to align the bolt holes.
G. Tighten the locknut (16).
H. Make sure that the rod-end thread is in safety and the distance between the actuator rod and the
center of the rod-end bolt hole is between 22,5 and 27,5 mm (0.89 and 1.08 in.).
I. Extend the actuator:
(1) Operate the INCREASE/DECREASE switch to DECREASE until the actuator (17) extends
fully.

CONFIG 1
Page 402
76-20-01 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
J. Align the bolt holes in the actuator rod-end (13) and the FCU lever (12). Make sure that the FCU
lever is in the 'Dead Band' of the operating range.
NOTE: The Dead Band is approximately the first 30° of the lever movement when the lever
moves freely.
K. Install the bolt (14), washers (9) and (15) and nut (8).
L. Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items.
M. Close access panel PR 1.
N. Do a test of the emergency fuel-control system (Ref. 76-20-00, Page Block 501).

CONFIG 1
Page 403
76-20-01 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. SUPPORT STRUT ASSEMBLY
2. BOLT
A
3. WASHER
4. NUT
5. WASHER
7. WASHER
5. WASHER
6. ELECTRICAL
17. ACTUATOR
CONNECTOR
A
16. LOCKNUT
8. NUT
25 ± 0.5 mm
(0.98 ± 0.20 in.)
9. WASHER
15. WASHER
14. BOLT
13. BOLT END
12. FCU OPERATING LEVER
11. COTTER PIN

10. NUT
6420
Emergency Fuel-Control Actuator - Removal/Installation

Figure 401

CONFIG 1
Page 404
76-20-01 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EMERGENCY FUEL CONTROL ACTUATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
B. Expendable Parts
P&WC IPC Cotter pin (if required)
2. Preparation
A. Open access panel PR 1.
B. Retract the actuator:
(3) Set the INCREASE/DECREASE switch to DECREASE until the emergency fuel control
actuator retracts fully.
EMERG FCU.
A. Disconnect the electrical connector (4) from the actuator.
B. Remove the nut (11), washer (10) and bolt (5) to disconnect the actuator (13) from the FCU
operating lever (8).
C. Hold the actuator and remove the nut (14), washer (15) and bolt (1) to remove the actuator (13)
from the support strut assembly (16). Collect the washers (2) and (3).
D. Count and record the number of threads you can see on the rod-end (9).
NOTE: This is so you can install the rod-end in the same position on the new actuator.
E. Loosen the locknut (12)
F. Remove the rod-end (9) and locknut (12) from the actuator (13).

CONFIG 2
Page 401
76-20-01 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Install the rod-end (9) and locknut (12) on the actuator (13).
B. Adjust the rod-end (9) to get the same number of threads recorded in the removal procedure.
C. Tighten the locknut (12).
D. Put the actuator (13) and the washers (2) and (3) in position in the support strut (16).
E. Install the bolt (1), washer (15) and nut (14).
F. Connect the electrical connector (4) to the actuator (13).
G. Extend the actuator:
CAUTION: THE ACTUATOR WILL START TO RETRACT IMMEDIATELY WHEN THE FCU SWITCH
IS SET TO ON.
EMERG FCU.
(4) Operate the INCREASE/DECREASE switch to INCREASE until the actuator extends fully.
H. Check the position of FCU operating lever:
(1) Move the FCU operating lever (8) clockwise until it is in contact with the hard (maximum)
stop.
(2) Put the actuator rod-end (9) in position. If the holes do not align:
NOTE: Final adjustment to align the bolt holes in the rod-end and lever is done on the
rod-end.
(a) Remove the cotter pin (7) and loosen the nut (6). Discard the cotter pin.
(b) Hold the abutment ring against the hard (maximum) stop on the FCU.
(c) Move the lever (8) until it aligns with the rod-end (9) on the actuator and the serrated
coupling is engaged.
(d) Tighten the nut (6).
I. Loosen the locknut (12).
J. Adjust the actuator rod-end (9) to align the bolt holes.
K. Tighten the locknut (12).

CONFIG 2
Page 402
76-20-01 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
L. Make sure that the rod-end thread is in safety.
M. Retract the Actuator:
(1) Operate the INCREASE/DECREASE switch to DECREASE until the manual override
actuator retracts fully .
N. Align the bolt holes in the actuator rod-end (9) and the FCU lever (8). Make sure that the FCU
lever is in the 'Dead Band' of the operating range.
NOTE: The Dead Band is approximately the first 30° of the lever movement when the lever
moves freely.
O. Install the bolt (5), the washer (10) and the nut (11).
5. Close Up
B. Close access panel PR 1.
C. Do a test of the manual override system (Ref. 76-20-00, Page Block 501).

CONFIG 2
Page 403
76-20-01 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
1
16
15
14
2
3
4
A
3
13
6
12
8
9
10
11
6714
Emergency Fuel Control Actuator - Removal/Installation

Figure 401

CONFIG 2
Page 404
76-20-01 Dec 31/12
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 77 - ENGINE INDICATING

Chapter
Section
Subject Pages Date
Pages 2 Jan 30/16
77-00-00 1 Nov 30/03

2 Nov 30/03
77-11-00 1 Nov 30/03

2 Nov 30/03
3 Nov 30/03
4 Nov 30/03
77-11-01 401 Nov 30/03

CONFIG 01 402 Nov 30/03
403 Nov 30/03
CONFIG 02 401 Jul 30/15

402 Jul 30/15
403 Jul 30/15
404 Jul 30/15
501 Jul 30/15

502 Jul 30/15
503 Jul 30/15
504 Jul 30/15
77-12-00 1 Nov 30/03

2 Nov 30/03
77-12-01 401 Jul 30/15

402 Jul 30/15
403 Jul 30/15
404 Jul 30/15
77-20-00 1 Nov 30/03

2 Nov 30/03
3 Nov 30/03
501 Jan 30/16

502 Jan 30/16
Page 1
77-LEP Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
77-LEP Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 77 - ENGINE INDICATING

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
ENGINE INDICATING 77-00-00

TORQUE INDICATION SYSTEM 77-11-00

TORQUE TRANSDUCER 77-11-01
Removal / Installation CONFIG 01 401 MSN up to 824
CONFIG 02 401 MSN from 825
Adjustment / Test 501 MSN from 825
GAS GENERATOR SPEED (Ng) INDICATION SYSTEM 77-12-00
GAS GENERATOR 71-12-01
TACHOMETER-GENERATOR
INTERTURBINE TEMPERATURE (ITT) INDICATING 77-20-00

SYSTEM
Page 1
77-TOC Nov 30/03
'ePILATUS!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENGINE INDICATING- DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Visual data related to engine operating condition is given on individual instruments in the flight
compartment. The instruments show:
•
Engine lnterturbine Temperature (ITT )
•
Engine Torque
•
Engine Gas Generator Speed (Ng)
•
Propeller Speed (Np)
•
Fuel Status (fuel quantity and flow rate)
•
Engine Oil Temperature and Pressure
Engine Warning, Caution and advisory indications are given on the Central Advisor and Warning
System (CAWS) annunciator panel as follows:
•
CHIP (Amber CAUTION caption)
•
FUEL PRESS (Amber CAUT ION caption)
For data related to the CAWS, refer to chapter 31-00-00.
T his chapter has the data related to these indication systems:
• Engine Torque Ref. 77-11-00
•
Engine Ng. Ref. 77-12-00
•
Engine ITT Ref. 77-20-00
Data for the other indication systems can be found in the related chapters as follows:
• Np Chapter 61
•
Fuel Quantity, Flow Rate and Pressure Chapter 28
•
Engine Oil Temperature and Pressure Chapter 79.
and Chip Detection System
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
77-00-00 Nov 30/03
�PILATUSEF
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FUEL
I PRESS
I
I CHIP
I
I I
I I I
t
CID
t
CID I ...
�
Engine Indicators and CAWS Annunciator Panel
Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
77-00-00
Page2
Nov 30/03
'e PILATUS !!!?"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TORQUE INDIC ATION SYSTEM- DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The torque indication system has these components:
• Hydro-Mechanical torquemeter
• Pressure Transducer
• Torque Indicator in the Flight Compartment
2. Component Description (Ref. Fig. 1, 2 and 3)
A. Torquemeter
The torquemeter is part of the reduction gearbox and has a piston, cylinder, valve plunger and
spring. The planet ring of the first stage of the gearbox is held in the rear case of the gearbox by
helical splines. When engine power changes the ring moves axially and moves the piston and
valve plunger. A bleed orifice in the top of the cylinder, which bleeds oil into the reduction
gearbox, prevents the formation of hydraulic locks.
B. P ressure Transducer
The pressure transducer converts the oil pressure into an electrical signal which the analogue/
digital torque indicator processes for display.
3. O peration (Ref. Fig. 1)
As engine power increases, the planet ring moves axially to the rear. This moves the piston and valve
plunger and opens a metering orifice which supplies engine oil pressure to the cylinder.
The oil pressure increases until it moves the piston forwards and reduces the flow of oil until there is a
balance between the oil pressure supply and the bleed from the cylinder through the bleed orifice.
T he pressure in the cylinder is sensed by the pressure transducer which changes the oil pressure into
an electrical signal.
Internal oilways take the pressures in the torquemeter and the reduction gearbox to bosses at the top of
the reduction gearbox.
The difference between the torquemeter pressure and the internal pressure in the reduction gearbox
accurately indicates the torque produced by the engine.
Torque pressure is converted into a voltage measurement and this signal is transmitted to the gauge on
the engine indicator panel in the flight compartment.
EFFEC TIVITY: All
Page 1
77-11-00 Nov 30/03
�PILATE:f 5"
PC-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TORQUE
INDICATOR
PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER
CYLINDER
HELICAL
SPLINES VALVE PLUNGER
BLEED ORIFICE
PISTON
\
PLANET GEAR
.
. ation System - Schematic
Torque lnd1c
Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY.. All
Page2
77-11-00 Nov 30/03
'e PILATUS5"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TORQUE TRANSDUCER
Torque Indication System - Component Location - MSN up to 824

Figure 2
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page3
77-11-00 Nov 30/03
"e PILATUS :s:"
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1---TORQUE
TRANSDUCER
1--- ELECTRICAL PLUG
Torque Indication System - Component Location - MSN from 825

Figure 3
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page4
77-11-00 Nov 30/03
"e Pl LATUS !!5F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TORQUE TRANSDUCER-REMOVAL/ INSTALLATION
1. General
This procedure is only applicable to aircraft up to MSN 824.
110.88.07.065 Safety clip circuit breaker hold open
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) Open and install a safety clip to the circuit breakers:
START (BATTERY BUS CB panel)

IGNIT (BATTERY BUS CB panel)
(2) Open the access panels PT1.
(1) Disconnect the electrical connector (2) from the torque transducer (5).
(2) Disconnect the reference pressure hose (1) from the transducer (5).
(3) Remove the transducer (5), washer (3) and 0-ring (4).
(4) Discard the 0-ring (4).
(1) Install the washer (3) and a new 0-ring (4) to the transducer (5).
NOTE: If the transducer has been replaced, make sure the correct washer (3) is
installed to get the correct transducer clearance.
(2) Install the transducer (5).
(3) Connect the case reference pressure hose (1) to the transducer (5).
(4) Connect the electrical connector (2) to the transducer (5).
EFFECTIVITY: MSN up to 824

CONFIG 01
Page 401
77-11-01 Nov 30/03
"S PILATUS !!5F'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
D. Job Close Up
(2) Install the access panels PT1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).


CONFIG 01
Page 402
77-11-01 Nov 30/03
"e Pl LATUS 55!7
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
"'
"'
"'
"'
Torque Transducer - Removal I Installation

Figure401

CONFIG 01
Page403
77-11-01 Nov 30/03
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TORQUE TRANSDUCER - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This procedure is only applicable to aircraft from MSN 825.
110.88.07.065 Safety clip circuit breaker hold open
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up

(2) Remove the access panels PT1 and PB1.
(1) Disconnect the electrical plug (3) from the torque transducer (1).
(2) Disconnect the union (5) of the case reference pressure-hose from the transducer (1).
(3) Disconnect the torque pressure pipe (8) from the transducer (1) and the adapter (6).
(4) Remove the nut (4) and then remove the transducer (1).
(5) Remove the P-clip (2) from the transducer (1).
(6) Remove the adapter (6).
(2) Install the adapter (6).
(3) Install the P-clip (2) on the torque transducer (1).
(4) Put the transducer in position and install the nut (4).
(5) Connect the torque pressure pipe (8) to the adapter (6) and the transducer (1).
(6) Connect the union (5) of the case reference pressure hose to the transducer (1).
EFFECTIVITY: MSN from 825

CONFIG 02
Page 401
77-11-01 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Torque the nut (4) to between 8,5 and 9,6 Nm (75 and 85 lb in.).
(8) Connect the electrical plug (3).
D. Job Close Up
(2) Install the access panels PT1 and PB1.

(4) Do a test of the torque transducer (Ref. 77-11-01, Page Block 501).

CONFIG 02
Page 402
77-11-01 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
5 2
3
6666
Torque Transducer - Removal / Installation

Figure 401

CONFIG 02
Page 403
77-11-01 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CONFIG 02
Page 404
77-11-01 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TORQUE TRANSDUCER - ADJUSTMENT / TEST
1. General
This procedure is only applicable to aircraft MSN from 825.

990.00.00.823 or
Pressure test set 0 to 3,4 bar (0 to 50 psi)
990.00.00.827
3. Procedure
A. Job Set Up
START (BATTERY BUS)
(2) Remove the engine access panel PL1.
B. Calibrate the Torque Transducer (Ref Fig. 501)
(1) Put absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) below the torque transducer (2).
(2) Disconnect the torque pressure pipe (1) from the adapter (4) and the transducer (2).
(3) Install a blank to the adapter (4).
(4) Connect the test set connector (3) to the transducer (2).
(6) Do the calibration check of the torque transducer.
(a) On the test set, slowly increase the pressure to 0,68 bar (10 psi).
(b) Check the indication on the torque gauge on the CAWS panel.
(c) If the torque display is different from the test set pressure by ± 0,07 bar (± 1 psi)
replace the torque transducer.
Page 501
77-11-01 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Do step (6) again for test pressures of 1,38, 2,07, 2,75 and 3,26 bar (20, 30, 40, and 47.3
psi).
(8) Set the pressure of the test set to zero.
(10) Disconnect the test set connector (3) from the torque transducer (2).
(11) Remove the blank from the adapter (4).
(12) Connect the torque pressure pipe (1) to the adapter (4) and the transducer (2).
(13) Remove the absorbent paper from the engine.
C. Close Up
(1) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items
(2) Install the engine access panel PL1.
START (BATTERY BUS)
(5) Check the engine torque gauge, make sure that the torque indication is correct
(Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 501).
(6) Shutdown the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
START (BATTERY BUS)
(8) Remove the engine access panel PL1.
(9) Look for leaks around the torque transducer. No leaks are permitted.
(10) Make sure the engine oil level is correct (Ref. 12-10-03, Page Block 301).
(11) Install the engine access panel PL1.
START (BATTERY BUS)
Page 502
77-11-01 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2
6657
Torque Transducer - Adjustment / Test

Figure 501
Page 503
77-11-01 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 504
77-11-01 Jul 30/15
'e PILATUSE:?'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GAS GENERATOR SPEED (Ng) INDICATION SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The Ng indication system consists of:
• Tachometer Generator
• Ng Indicator
The tachometer generator is installed at the 5 o'clock position on the accessory gearbox. It consists of
a permanent magnet rotor and a stator. An alternating voltage is induced in the stator as the rotor turns.
Signals from the generator are transmitted to the Ng indicator gauge in the flight compartment.
2. Operation
The rotor of the tachometer-generator is driven by the compressor turbine via the accessory gearbox ,
and induces a signal in the stator. The induced signal is transmitted to the Ng indicator gauge in the
flight compartment. The gas generator speed (Ng) is shown in percentage units on the indicator, in
analog and digital displays.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
77-12-00 Nov 30/03
'ii PILATUSe'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TACHOMETER
GENERATOR
"'
lll
<O
Engine Gas Generator Governor - Component Location

Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page2
77-12-00 Nov 30/03
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
GAS GENERATOR TACHOMETER-GENERATOR - REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
1. General
This topic gives the procedure for the removal and installation procedure for the gas generator
tachometer-generator.

B. Expendable Parts
P&WC IPC Ref. Description Remarks

72-60-00, Fig. 01 Gasket

P04-004 Grease Plastilube 3
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
STARTER (BATTERY BUS CB panel)

IGNITION (BATTERY BUS CB panel)
(2) Open the engine cowling ENG 3R.
(1) Disconnect the electrical connector from the tachometer-generator.
(2) Remove the nuts (4) and washers (3), and remove the tachometer-generator (1) from the
aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
77-12-01 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(1) Make sure the drive shaft is clean and is not damaged.
(2) Apply a layer of grease (Material No. P04-004) to the drive shaft.
(3) Make sure that the mounting pad and internal drive are clean and are not damaged.
(4) Put a new gasket (2) in position over the studs of the mounting pad.
(5) Put the tachometer-generator (1) in position on the mounting pad.
(7) Connect the electrical connector to the tachometer-generator (1).
D. Job Close Up
STARTER (BATTERY BUS CB panel)

IGNITION (BATTERY BUS CB panel)
(3) Close the engine cowling ENG 3R.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
77-12-01 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A
1
3
4
6659
Tachometer-Generator - Removal / Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
77-12-01 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
77-12-01 Jul 30/15
�PILATUSe'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTERTURBINE TEMPERATURE {ITT) INDICATING SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General {Ref. Fig. 1 and 2)
The lnterturbine Temperature {ITI) sensing system indicates the engine operating temperature (TS)
between the compressor turbine and the first stage power turbine stator. The ITI system gives
electrical signals to show the engine operating temperature (TS) with the ITI gauge on the annunciator
panel.
The system consists of a busbar and probe assembly, a wiring harness, an externally mounted terminal
block, and a trim harness incorporating a T1 thermocouple probe and a preset variable resistor. The T1
thermocouple/resistor is connected in parallel with the TS harness and is reset to bias the signal from
the TS harness to represent the inter-turbine temperature of the engine.
The busbar and probe assembly consists of eight alumel I chrome! thermocouple probes connected in
parallel by one positive (chrome!) and one negative (alumel) busbar. The probes protrude through
individual threaded bosses in the power turbine stator housing and into the compressor turbine
discharge air stream immediately in front of the first stage power turbine guide vane rings. The eight
probe locations are spaced around the housing at 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 9, 10 and 11 o'clock positions and are
attached to bosses by a floating threaded fitting which forms an integral part of the assembly.
The harness assembly consists of single alumel and chrome! leads encased in a flexible shield. The
ends of the leads are welded to their respective alumel or chrome! terminal lugs. The terminal lugs are
attached to their connection points on the two busbars by stainless steel nuts and bolts. The lugs on the
lead ends are of different sizes so that they cannot be connected to the wrong terminal.
The individual leads are attached to the stator housing by clips. The leads pass through a tube which is
welded to the exhaust duct at the 1 O'clock position forward of frame 3. A stainless steel sleeve is
installed to centralise and protect the leads where they pass through tube. The outer ends of the leads
are connected to a terminal block on the gas generator.
The T1 trim thermocouple consists of chrome! I alumel leads in a stainless steel tube. At the forward
end is a variable, preset chrome! resistor. The applicable resistance value is set during final engine
acceptance checks and the unit is sealed. The trim data is recorded on the engine data plate. The unit
may only be replaced by an identically adjusted, sealed unit. The tube is installed at the 2 o'clock
position in the inlet air stream, immediately above the inlet screen. The leads at the front of the tube are
connected to terminals on the TS terminal block. The signal is transmitted to the ITI gauge on the
annunciator panel in the flight compartment.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
77-20-00 Nov 30/03
'e PILATUSEF'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHROMEL CHROMEL RESISTOR
T 1 TRIM
THERMOCOUPLE HARNESS
(BUSBAR)
lnterturbine Temperature Indicating System - Schematic

Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page2
77-20-00 Nov 30/03
'e PILATUSE!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ALUMEL BUS-BAR
CHROMEL BUS-BAR
SEAL RETAINING PLATE
TERMINAL STRAPS
TERMINAL LUG
CHROMEL TERMINAL
CAP SCREW
WASHER
PROBE ASSEMBLY
lnterturbine Temperature Indicating System - Component Location

Figure 2
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page3
77-20-00 Nov 30/03
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTERTURBINE TEMPERATURE (ITT) INDICATING SYSTEM - ADJUSTMENT / TEST
1. General
The engine part of the ITT indicating system can only be checked as a complete system.
990.00.00.831 Test set, turbine temperature
P02-014 Abrasive cloth 400 grit
3. Procedures
A. ITT Indicating System - Adjustment / Test
WARNING: LET THE ENGINE COOL FOR AT LEAST TWO HOURS AFTER SHUTDOWN.
(1) Disconnect the aircraft system leads from the ITT terminal block.
(2) Connect the turbine-temperature test-set to the terminal block.
(3) Measure the loop resistance of the engine system.
(a) The resistance must be between 0.58 and 0.74 Ohm
(4) Connect the test set between one lead on the terminal block and ground on the gas
generator case.
(5) Measure the insulation resistance.
(a) The resistance must be not less than 50,000 Ohms.
(6) Connect the test set between the other lead on the terminal block and ground on the gas
generator case.
(7) Measure the insulation resistance.
(a) The resistance must be not less than 50,000 Ohms.
(8) Remove the test set.
(9) Clean the contact surfaces on the leads and the terminal block with abrasive cloth
(10) Connect the leads to the terminal block.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 501
77-20-00 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(11) Torque the alumel bolt to between 1,14 Nm and 1,70 Nm (10 and 15 lb in.).
(12) Torque the chromel bolt to between 0,91 Nm and 1,36 Nm (8 and 12 lb in.).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 502
77-20-00 Jan 30/16
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 78 - EXHAUST
Chapter
Section
Subject Pages Date
Pages 2 Jul 30/15
Table of Contents 1 Oct 31/10

2 Oct 31/10
78-11-11 401 Jul 30/15

402 Jul 30/15
801 Oct 31/10

802 Oct 31/10
803 Oct 31/10
804 Oct 31/10
805 Oct 31/10
806 Oct 31/10
Page 1
78-LEP Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
78-LEP Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 78 - EXHAUST
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
EXHAUST
EXHAUST STUBS 78-11-11
Repair 801 All
Page 1
78-TOC Oct 31/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
78-TOC Oct 31/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXHAUST STUBS - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
A. Expendable Parts
78-11-01, Fig. 01 Glass-Fiber Cord Fig. 401, Item 6
2. Job Set Up
A. Remove access panels PT1 and PB1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
A. Remove the nuts (1), washers (2) and (3) and bolts (4).
NOTE: On some aircraft, the nuts (1) are safetied with cotter pins.
B. Remove the exhaust stub (5).
C. Remove and discard the asbestos or glass-fiber cord (6).
A. Cut a piece of glass-fiber cord 60 cm (24 in.) long.
B. Install the glass-fiber cord (6) to the engine flange and cut the ends to give a butt joint.
C. Put the exhaust stub (5) in position and install the bolts (4), washers (3) and (2) and nuts (1).
D. If castellated nuts (1) are installed, safety the nuts with the correct cotter pins.
5. Close Up
A. Install access panels PT1 and PB1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
78-11-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Exhaust Stub - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
78-11-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
EXHAUST STUBS - REPAIR
1. General
This topic gives the procedures to do weld repairs if you find cracks on the exhaust stub. Most cracks
are repairable but cracks along the spot welds for the stiffeners are not repairable (Ref. Fig. 801, Crack
type E). If you find cracks at this position you must replace the exhaust stub.
Weld repairs must be done by an approved welder.
TIG welding equipment with Argon

-
shielding gas
Sandblasting equipment with
- aluminium-oxide blasting-media
-
and
- glass-bead blasting-media
P01-016 Solvent
P03-001 Welding rod Filler rod, 1,0 mm
P06-001 Penetrant
P06-002 Remover
P06-003 Developer
C. Expendable Parts
939.17.69.026 Rivet, Monel, MS 20615-5M Required for cracks type C
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) Remove the exhaust stub (Ref. 78-11-11, Page Block 401).
(2) Use water and a brush to clean the exhaust stub. Remove all soot.
(3) Use absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031) to dry the exhaust stub.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 801
78-11-11 Oct 31/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B. Repairs (Ref. Fig. 801)
NOTE: Cracks type A, B, C and D are repairable. Cracks type E, along the spot welds for the
stiffeners, are not repairable.
(1) Crack Type A:
(a) Stop drill the end of the crack with a 2,4 mm (0.1in.) drill.
(b) Use the solvent (Material No. P01-016) and absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031)
to clean the repair area. Clean an area of approximately 50 mm (2 in.) around the
crack.
(c) Sandblast the repair area with the aluminium-oxide blasting-media. Do this on both
sides of the crack if applicable.
(d) Use the TIG welding equipment with argon shielding gas and the welding rod
(Material No. P03-001) to weld the crack. Use argon as a weld backing gas. Start
next to the stop drill hole and weld in the direction shown on Figure 801. Make sure
the weld seam goes fully through the crack.
(e) Hold a piece of copper sheet behind the stop drill hole and fill the hole with weld.
(f) Remove the copper sheet.
(g) Grind the weld seam flush with the flange. Do this on both sides of the flange to
permit correct installation on the engine, and installation of the washer and bolt.
(h) Put the exhaust stub in the installed position on the engine flange and do a check
for distortion. If the flange of the exhaust stub has distorted during welding, adjust it
to get a good fit with the engine flange.
(i) Sandblast the weld seam with the glass-bead blasting-media.
(j) Use the dye penetrant (Material No. P06-001, P06-002 and P06-003) to do a test for
cracks in the weld. Cracks are not permitted.
(2) Crack Type B:
(a) Stop drill each end of the crack with a 2,4 mm (0.1in.) drill.
(b) Use the solvent (Material No. P01-016) and absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031)
crack.
(c) Sandblast the repair area with the aluminium-oxide blasting-media. Do this on both
(d) Use the TIG welding equipment with argon shielding gas and the welding rod
(Material No. P03-001) to weld the crack between the stop drill holes. Use argon as
a weld backing gas. Make sure the weld seam goes fully through the crack.
(e) Hold a piece of copper sheet behind the stop drill holes and fill the holes with weld.
(f) Remove the copper sheet.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 802
78-11-11 Oct 31/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(g) On the engine side of the flange, grind the weld seam flush to permit correct
installation on the engine.
(h) If the weld seam is close to a bolt hole, grind the weld seam flush to permit correct
installation of the washer and bolt.
(i) Put the exhaust stub in the installed position on the engine flange and do a check
for distortion. If the flange of the exhaust stub has distorted during welding, adjust it
to get a good fit with the engine flange.
(j) Sandblast the weld seam with the glass-bead blasting-media.
(k) Use the dye penetrant (Material No. P06-001, P06-002 and P06-003) to do a test for
(3) Crack Type C:
(a) Drill out the rivet and remove the disc. Do not enlarge the rivet hole.
(b) Stop drill the end of the crack with a 2,4 mm (0.1in.) drill.
(c) Use the solvent (Material No. P01-016) and absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031)
crack.
(d) Sandblast the repair area with the aluminium-oxide blasting-media. Do this on both
(e) Use the TIG welding equipment with argon shielding gas and the welding rod
(Material No. P03-001) to weld the crack. Use argon as a weld backing gas. Start
next to the stop drill hole and weld in the direction shown on Figure 801. Make sure
the weld seam goes fully through the crack.
(f) Hold a piece of copper sheet behind the stop drill hole and fill the hole with weld.
(g) Remove the copper sheet.
(h) Grind the weld seam flush to permit correct installation of the disc.
(i) If the weld has blocked the rivet hole, re-drill the rivet hole with a 4,1 mm (0.16 in.)
drill.
(j) Sandblast the weld seam with the glass-bead blasting-media.
(k) Use the dye penetrant (Material No. P06-001, P06-002 and P06-003) to do a test for
(l) Install the disc with a new rivet (P/N 939.17.69.026).
(4) Crack Type D:
(a) Grind the weld seam flush.
(b) Stop drill the end of the crack with a 2,4 mm (0.1in.) drill.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 803
78-11-11 Oct 31/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(c) Use the solvent (Material No. P01-016) and absorbent paper (Material No. P02-031)
crack.
(d) Sandblast the repair area with the aluminium-oxide blasting-media. Do this on both
(e) Use the TIG welding equipment with argon shielding gas and the welding rod
(Material No. P03-001) to weld the crack. Use argon as a weld backing gas. Start at
the stop drill hole and weld in the direction shown on Figure 801. Make sure the
weld seam goes fully through the crack.
(f) Hold a piece of copper sheet behind the stop drill hole and fill the hole with weld.
(g) Remove the copper sheet.
(h) At the exhaust outlet, grind a chamfer on the end of the weld seam.
(i) Sandblast the weld seam with the glass-bead blasting-media.
(j) Use the dye penetrant (Material No. P06-001, P06-002 and P06-003) to do a test for
(5) Crack Type E:
(a) Not repairable. Discard the exhaust stub.
C. Close Up
(1) Install the exhaust stub (Ref. 78-11-11, Page Block 401).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 804
78-11-11 Oct 31/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
E (NOT REPAIRABLE)
B
WELD DIRECTION
D
6719
Exhaust Stub Repair - Crack Types

Figure 801
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 805
78-11-11 Oct 31/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 806
78-11-11 Oct 31/10
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 79 - OIL
Chapter
Section
Subject Pages Date
Pages 2 Jul 30/15
Table of Contents 1 Jul 30/15

2 Jul 30/15
79-00-00 1 Jul 30/15

2 Jul 30/15
79-11-11 401 Jul 30/15

402 Jul 30/15
403 Jul 30/15
404 Jul 30/15
79-21-11 401 Mar 14/98

402 Mar 14/98
403 Mar 14/98
701 Jul 30/15

702 Jul 30/15
79-31-11 401 Jul 30/15

402 Jul 30/15
403 Jul 30/15
404 Jul 30/15
501 Mar 14/98

502 Mar 14/98
79-31-13 401 Jul 30/15

402 Jul 30/15
403 Jul 30/15
404 Jul 30/15
Page 1
79-LEP Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
79-LEP Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 79 - OIL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
OIL 79-00-00
STORAGE
OIL COOLER 79-11-11
OIL FILTER 79-21-11

Cleaning / Painting 701 All
INDICATING
MAGNETIC CHIP DETECTOR 79-31-11
OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR 79-31-13

Page 1
79-TOC Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Page 2
79-TOC Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. Description
The oil system comprises:
• An engine integral lubrication system

• An oil cooler
• An indicating system
A. Engine Integral Lubrication System
The engine integral lubrication system contains an integrally formed oil tank in the compressor
inlet case that provides a constant supply of clean oil to the engine bearings, reduction gears,
accessory drives, torquemeter and propeller governor. The oil lubricates and cools the bearings
and carries any extraneous matter to the oil filter where it is prevented from further circulation.
Oil level indication comprises of an oil quantity dipstick/gage which forms an integral part of the
oil tank filler cap.
Ports in the accessory gearbox are provided for installation of airframe supplied oil temperature
and oil pressure sensing devices (Ref. 77-00-00). A magnetic chip detector is located in the
reduction gearbox to detect impending component failure.
An engine oil filter and housing assembly is located in the compressor air inlet case. The filter is
retained by a cover installed with four self-locking nuts.
For more data refer to P&WC EMM 79-00-00.
B. Oil Cooler
The oil cooler is located at the bottom of the engine compartment and is accessible through
access panel PB2. The basic design of the oil cooler is that of a typical heat exchanger where the
oil flows across integral passages and is cooled by the passage surfaces which in turn are
cooled by air sweeping through the fins which separate the passages. The fins provide increased
surface area so that cooling efficiency and cooler size are optimal.
C. Indicating
The engine oil temperature and pressure indicating system consists of a temperature sensitive
bulb and a pressure transducer connected to cockpit indicators.
2. Operation
For the operation of the engine integral lubrication system refer to P&WC EMM 79-00-00.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
79-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 2
79-00-00 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL COOLER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
This topic gives the procedure to remove and install the oil cooler. A new oil cooler requires some
additional mounting holes to be drilled before installation in the aircraft.
A. Expendable Parts
IPC Ref. Description Fig. Item
79-11-01, Fig. 01 O-ring Fig. 401, Item 4


P07-021 CCC solution Touch-N-Prep Pen
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) Remove the access panel PB2.
(2) Drain the engine oil system (Ref. 12-10-03, Page Block 301).
(1) Disconnect the oil pipes (1) and (2).
(2) Support the oil cooler.
(3) Remove the bolts (9) and remove the oil cooler from the aircraft.
(4) Remove the screws (8), washers (6) and (7), and nuts (5).
(5) Remove the screws (12), washers (13), and nuts (14).
(6) Remove the mounting plates (15).
(7) Remove the drain pipe (10) and O-ring (11). Discard the O-ring.
(8) Remove the pipe unions (3) and (17) and O-rings (4) and (16). Discard the O-rings.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
79-11-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(1) If you install a new oil cooler:
(a) Put the two mounting plates (15) in the installed position on the new oil cooler.
(b) Make sure the holes in the mounting plates (15) align with all the existing holes in
the oil cooler.
(c) At the positions where the oil cooler has no holes, make marks for the hole
positions.
(d) Remove the mounting plates (15).
WARNING: OBEY THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS GIVEN IN 20-00-00, PAGE BLOCK

201, WHEN YOU DRILL AND DEBURR THE HOLES.
(e) Drill 5,2 mm (0.2 in.) holes at the marked positions.
(f) Deburr the holes.
(g) Remove all swarf and debris from the oil cooler.
(h) Apply CCC solution (Material No. P07-021) to the bare metal areas of the new
holes.
(2) Install the pipe unions (3) and (17) and new O-rings (4) and (16). Safety the unions with
(3) Install the drain pipe (10) and new O-ring (11). Safety the drain pipe with lockwire (Material
No. P02-001).
(4) Put the mounting plates (15) in position and install the screws (12), washers (13), and nuts
(14).
(5) Install the screws (8), washers (6) and (7), and nuts (5).
(6) Put the oil cooler in position on the aircraft and install the bolts (9).
(7) Connect the oil pipes (1) and (2).
D. Test
(1) Fill the engine oil system (Ref. 12-10-03, Page Block 301).
(3) Look for leaks around the oil cooler. Leaks are not permitted.
E. Close Up
(2) Install the access panel PB2.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
79-11-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. PIPE
A 2. PIPE
17. UNION
16. O-RING
14. NUT
3. UNION
4. O-RING
15. MOUNTING PLATE
5. NUT
13. WASHER
11. O-RING
9. BOLT 6. WASHER
10. DRAIN PIPE
12. SCREW
7. WASHER
8. SCREW
6392
Oil Cooler - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
79-11-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
79-11-11 Jul 30/15
'ePILATUS:F'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL FILTER - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

30556 Puller, oil filter P&WC tool
Torque wrench Oto 5 Nm (0 to 50 lbf in.)
B. Expendable Parts
79-20-02, Fig 1 0-ring P&WC IPC

79-20-02, Fig 1 Teflon spacer P&WC IPC (If required)
A. Removal
(1) Open the right engine cowl PR1.
START GEN (Battery CB Panel)
(3) Remove the nuts (7) and washers (8) from the oil filter cover (6).
(4) Remove the cover (6) with the 0-ring (4) and Teflon spacer (5).
(5) Examine the Teflon spacer (5) on the cover (6). Discard if damage is found.
(6) Remove the oil filter element (2) using the puller.
(7) Remove and discard the 0-rings (1) and (3) from the filter element (2).
B. Installation
(1) Install new 0-rings (1) and (3) on the filter element (2).
(2) Put the filter element (2) with the perforated flanged end first, into the oil filter housing.
NOTE: Filter elements with SB1215 have' T his End In' and 'T his End Out' marked on
the filter.
(3) Make sure that the Teflon spacer (5) is in position on the cover (6).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
79-21-11 Mar 14/98
'e PILATUS !!E!7
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(4) Install a new 0-ring (4) onto the cover (6).
(5) Put the cover (6) into position and install the washers (8) and nuts (7).
(6) Torque the nuts (7) to between 3,6 and 4,0 Nm (32 an 36 lbf in.).
(8) Dry motor the engine (Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201) .
(9) Look for leaks around the oil filter cover - No leaks are acceptable.
(10) Close the engine cowl PR1.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
79-21-11 Mar 14/98
'ePILATUS�
MAINTENAN
PCC�MANUAL
l. 0-RING
2. FILTEA ELEMENT
5. TEFLON SPACER
6. COVER
.
.
Engine Oil Filter - RemovaI/Installation
Figure 401
EFFECTIVITV: All
Page 403
79-21-11 Mar 14/98
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL FILTER - CLEANING/PAINTING

- Rubber plugs
- Clean container
- Magnifying glass x10 magnification
A. Open the right engine cowl PR1.
B. Open and install a safety clip to the circuit breaker:
C. Remove the engine oil filter element (Ref. 79-21-11, Page Block 401).
3. Procedure
CAUTION: DO NOT USE PRESSURE FLUSHING, COMPRESSED AIR OR ULTRASONIC

EQUIPMENT TO CLEAN OR DRY DISPOSABLE FILTER ELEMENTS (POST P&WC
SB1215).
A. Seal both ends of the filter with rubber plugs.
B. Put the filter into a container full of white spirit (Material No. P01-008).
C. Shake the filter for 5 minutes to remove contamination.
D. Remove the filter from the solvent and allow to dry.
E. Collect the debris in the solvent.
F. Visually inspect the filter element. Do this procedure again until the filter is clean.
G. If the filter can not be cleaned using this procedure, wash the filter using an electrosonic cleaner
(Ref. P&WC EMM 79-20-02).
H. Use a x10 magnifying glass to inspect the filter element for blocked passages, broken wires and
dents:
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 701
79-21-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(1) If dents are found - Reject the filter element.
(2) If broken wires are found - Reject the filter element.
(3) If more than 5 per cent of the visible passages are blocked:
(a) On Pre SB1215 filter elements - Send the filter for ultrasonic cleaning.
(b) On Post SB1215 filter elements - Reject the filter element.
I. Examine the debris collected from the solvent (Ref. P&WC EMM 79-20-02).
4. Close Up
A. Install the engine oil filter element (Ref. 79-21-11, Page Block 401)
C. Close the engine cowl PR1.
D. Remove the safety clip and close the circuit breaker START GEN.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 702
79-21-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAGNETIC CHIP DETECTOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

- Clean container 2 litres (0.5 gal) capacity
B. Expendable Parts
P&WC IPC Ref. Description Remarks

72-10-00, Fig. 07 O-ring

A. Removal
(3) Put the container in position under the chip detector.
(4) Remove the locking wire and remove the chip detector (2) and O-ring (1). Discard the
O-ring.
(5) Examine the debris on the chip detector (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-10-00).
(6) Check the continuity of the chip detector (Ref. P&WC EMM 72-10-00).
B. Installation
(1) Install a new O-ring (1) on the chip detector (2).
(2) Install the chip detector.
CAUTION: USE A TORQUE WRENCH WHEN YOU TIGHTEN THE CHIP DETECTOR. THE
CHIP DETECTOR IS EASILY DAMAGED IF IT IS OVER TIGHTENED.
(3) Torque the chip detector to between 5,10 and 6,22 Nm (45 and 55 lbf in.).
(4) Safety the chip detector with lockwire (Material No. P02-001).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
79-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(7) Look for leaks around the chip detector - No leaks are acceptable.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
79-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2. CHIP DETECTOR
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
1. O-RING
6399
Magnetic Chip Detector - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
79-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
79-31-11 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHIP DETECTOR - ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. General
This page block gives the procedure to do a functional test of the chip-detector electrical system, and to
check for debris on the chip detector.
- Jumper
- Ohmmeter For continuity check
Consumable Materials (Ref. 20-31-00)
3. Procedures
A. Job Set Up
(1) Remove the access panels PT1 and PT2.
(2) Remove the lockwire from the electrical connector and chip detector.
(3) Disconnect the electrical connector.
B. Airframe Installation
(1) Connect the jumper between the two contacts in the electrical connector.
(3) Make sure the CHIP caption on the annunciator panel comes on.
(4) Remove the jumper from the electrical connector.
(5) Make sure the CHIP caption on the annunciator panel goes off.
(6) Set all electrical power to OFF.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 501
79-31-11 Mar 14/98
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
C. Chip Detector
(1) Use an ohmmeter to check for open circuit between the pins on the chip detector. If there
is continuity:
• Remove the chip detector and examine for debris (Ref. 79-31-11, Page Block 401)
NOTE: If there is continuity it shows that there is ferrous contamination of the chip
detector.
D. Close Up
(1) Connect the electrical connector to the chip detector.
(2) Safety the electrical connector with lockwire (Material No. P02-007).
(4) Install the access panels PT1 and PT2.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 502
79-31-11 Mar 14/98
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

B. Expendable Parts

79-31-09, Fig. 01 O-ring Qty 1

P10-004 Engine oil
2. Procedures
A. Preparation
START GEN (Battery Bus CB panel)
(2) Drain the oil from the engine (Ref. 12-10-03, Page Block 301).
(3) Open the engine cowl PR1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(1) Disconnect the electrical plug (3) from the oil temperature sensor.
(2) Cut and remove the lockwire from the oil temperature sensor (2).
(3) Remove the oil temperature sensor (2).
(2) Lubricate the new O-ring with clean engine oil (Material No. P10-004).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
79-31-13 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(3) Install the new O-ring (1) to the oil temperature sensor.
(4) Install the oil temperature sensor (2).
(5) Safety the oil temperature sensor (2) to the adjacent support bracket with lockwire
(6) Connect the electrical plug (3) to the oil temperature sensor (2).
D. Close-Up
(1) Fill the engine with oil to the correct level (Ref. 12-10-03, Page Block 301).
START GEN (Battery Bus CB panel)
(4) Close the engine cowl PR1 (Ref. 71-10-00, Page Block 201).
(5) Do an engine ground run and make sure the engine oil temperature indicator operates
(Ref. 71-00-00, Page Block 201).
(6) Make sure there are no oil leaks from the oil temperature sensor (2).
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 402
79-31-13 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
3
6710
Oil Temperature Sensor - Removal/Installation

Figure 401
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 403
79-31-13 Jul 30/15
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 404
79-31-13 Jul 30/15
•PILATUS!!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 80 - STARTING
Chapter Chapter
Section Section
Subject Page Date Subject Page Date
List of Jun 14/92

Effective
Pages
Table of Jun 14/91

Contents
80-00-00 1 Jun 14/92

2 Jun 14/92
80-11-11 401 Jun 14/91
F = foldout page
Page 1
80-LEP Jun 14/92
'&PILATUS!!!!"'
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CHAPTER 80 STARTING
-
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
STARTING 80-00-00
Description and Operation
General 1 All
Component Description 1 All
Operation All
STARTER GENERATOR 80-11-11

Page 1
80-CONT Jun 14/91
;E PILATUS 5!i!Y
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STARTING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The starter system must turn the engine to a speed sufficient move air through the engine and allow
fuel to be ignited and then accelerate the engine.
An electrical starter is installed, which when the starting cycle is complete, is used as a DC generator.
A. Starter /Generator
This is a lightweight combined starter motor and DC generator, with integral cooling fan. The
starter /generator is attached to a Quick Attach and Detach (QAD) adapter installed on the
engine accessory gearbox.
3. Description and Operation (Ref. Fig. 1)
Starter motor operation is initiated from the cockpit by activating the STARTER switch. This energizes
starter relay which connects the EPU, or the aircraft battery, to the starter input (terminal C) and shorts
the INTERPOLE SAMPLING and the shunt field excitation terminals of the starter /generator. Returning
the START switch to off terminates starter operation. Refer to 24-30-00 for the description of the
generator and to 24-31-11 for removal and installation procedures.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 1
80-00-00 Jun 14/92
"ePILATUS!F
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
INTERPOLE ARMATURE
WINDING
SHUNT (GENERATOR) SERIES (STARTER)

FIELD WlNDING FIELD WINDING
RADIO NOISE FILTER
��---------------�----�-------�---
.. - ---------------- ---- · · ------------ -------- - ..
E(-) D (A+) B+ c+
INTERPOLE SHUNT GENERATOR STARTER
SAMPLING FIELD OUTPUT INPUT
EXCITATION
STARTER-GENERATOR
E(·)
D A(+) B(+) C(+)
...-
GENERATOR
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE � VOLTAGE
-== REGULATOR - - I - -
REGULATOR
PIN D I PIN M
I
I
I
I
I
BATTERY �
OR EXTERNAL ' I
POWER
STARTER/
GENERATOR
STARTER
RELAY
Starting Circuit - Schematic Diagram

Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page2
80-00-00 Jun14/92
PC-6
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
STARTER/GENERATOR - REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
For details of Removal/Installation of the Starter/Generator refer to 24-31-11, Page Block 401.
EFFECTIVITY: All
Page 401
80-11-11 Jun 14/91

PC-6 AMM 01975 Rev. 33

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PC-6 AMM 01975 Rev. 33

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

�PLATUSEF

Initial Issue: June 14 1991

©PILATUS AIRCRAFT LIMITED 1991

Pilatus Aircraft Ltd. CH-6370 Stans. Switzerland

Pilatus Aircraft Ltd

PC-6 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

DOCUMENT NUMBER 01975

DATED JUL 31/22

Remove Insert Reason for Change

Chapter 20 - Standard Practices

FILE THIS TRANSMITTAL IN FRONT OF THE MANUAL

Record of Temporary No change.

FILE THIS TRANSMITTAL IN FRONT OF THE MANUAL

Rev Date of Date Rev Date of Date

1 Incorporated at Issue 26 Incorporated at Issue

2 Incorporated at Issue 27 Incorporated at Issue

3 Incorporated at Issue 28 Incorporated at Issue

4 Incorporated at Issue 29 Incorporated at Issue

5 Incorporated at Issue 30 Incorporated at Issue

6 Incorporated at Issue 31 Incorporated at Issue

7 Incorporated at Issue 32 Incorporated at Issue

RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS

Temp Date of Date Date Removed /

05-01 Oct 25/95 Included Pilatus TR 05-03 Pilatus

27-01 Oct 25/95 Included Pilatus TR 27-02 Pilatus

05-02 Oct 30/95 Included Pilatus Rev 4 Pilatus

05-03 Feb 03/97 Included Pilatus TR 05-04 Pilatus

05-04 Feb 24/97 Included Pilatus Rev 4 Pilatus

27-02 Oct 23/98 Included Pilatus Rev 5 Pilatus

32-01 Nov 30/99 Included Pilatus Rev 5 Pilatus

05-06 Aug 28/01 Included Pilatus Rev 5 Pilatus

28-01 Sep 04/01 Included Pilatus Rev 5 Pilatus

05-05 Sep 21/01 Included Pilatus Rev 5 Pilatus

27-03 Jan 15/02 Included Pilatus Rev 5 Pilatus

57-01 Jan 15/02 Included Pilatus Rev 5 Pilatus

27-04 Mar 28/02 Included Pilatus Rev 5 Pilatus

71-01 Jun 07/02 Included Pilatus TR 71-02 Pilatus

71-02 Jun 20/02 Included Pilatus Rev 5 Pilatus

05-07 Jul 05/02 Included Pilatus Rev 5 Pilatus

24-01 Jun 11/04 Included Pilatus Rev 6 Pilatus

27-05 Oct 21/05 Included Pilatus TR 27-06 Pilatus

05-08 Aug 08/05 Included Pilatus Rev 7 Pilatus

05-09 Aug 08/05 Included Pilatus Rev 7 Pilatus

05-10 Aug 08/05 Included Pilatus Rev 7 Pilatus

27-06 Dec 07/05 Included Pilatus Rev 7 Pilatus

28-02 Jan 23/06 Included Pilatus Rev 7 Pilatus

Temp Date of Date Date Removed /

28-03 Jan 23/06 Included Pilatus Rev 7 Pilatus

25-01 Jul 04/07 Included Pilatus Rev 7 Pilatus

05-11 Aug 03/07 Included Pilatus Rev 7 Pilatus

05-12 Jul 30/08 Included Pilatus Rev 9 Pilatus

27-07 Jul 30/08 Included Pilatus Rev 9 Pilatus

28-04 Sep 25/08 Included Pilatus Rev 9 Pilatus

28-05 Sep 25/08 Included Pilatus Rev 9 Pilatus

28-06 Sep 25/08 Included Pilatus Rev 9 Pilatus

28-07 Sep 25/08 Included Pilatus Rev 9 Pilatus

25-02 Jan 28/09 Mar 11/09 Pilatus Rev 10 Pilatus

25-03 Jan 28/09 Mar 11/09 Pilatus Rev 10 Pilatus

05-13 Mar 23/10 Mar 29/10 Pilatus Rev 12 Pilatus

55-01 Sep 20/11 Sep 25/11 Pilatus Rev 15 Pilatus

55-02 Sep 20/11 Sep 25/11 Pilatus Rev 15 Pilatus

71-03 Feb 27/17 Feb 27/17 Pilatus Rev 25 Pilatus

05-14 Jan 19/18 Jan 19/18 Pilatus Rev 26 Pilatus